Pioneer SC-1525-K Operating Instructions
Operating Instructions audio/video multi-channel receiv er SC-1525_UXJCB.bo ok 1 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ æÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂç« æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ æÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
The exclamation point within an equilateral triangle is intended to alert the user to the presence of important operating and maintenance (ser vicing) instructions in the literature accompanying the appliance. The lightning flash with arrowhead symbol, within an equilateral triangle, is intended to alert the user to the presence of uninsulated âÂÂdangerous voltageâ within the productâÂÂs enclosure that may be of sufficient magnitude to constitute a risk of electric shock to persons. CAUTION: TO PREVENT THE RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK, DO NOT REMOVE COVER (OR BACK). NO USER-SERVICEABLE P ARTS INSIDE. REFER SERVICING TO QUALIFIED SERVICE PERSONNEL. CAUTION RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK DO NOT OPEN IMPOR T ANT D3-4-2-1-1_A1_En W ARNING This equipment is not waterproof . T o prevent a fire or shock hazard, do not place any container filled with liquid near this equipment (such as a vase or flower pot) or expose it to dripping, splashing, rain or moisture. D3-4-2-1-3_A1_En W ARNING Before plugging in for the first time, r ead the following section carefully . The voltage of the available power supply differs according to country or region. Be sur e that the power supply voltage of the area wher e this unit will be used meets the requir ed voltage (e.g., 230 V or 120 V) written on the rear panel. D3-4-2-1-4*_A1_En Operating Environment Operating environment temperature and humidity : 5 ðC to 35 ðC ( 41 ðF to 95 ðF); less than 85 %RH (cooling vents not blocked) Do not install this unit in a poorly ventilated area, or in locations exposed to high humidity or direct sunlight (or strong artificial light) D3-4-2-1-7c*_A1_En W ARNING T o prevent a fire hazard, do not place any naked flame sources (such as a lighted candle) on the equipment. D3-4-2-1-7a_A1_En Caution T o prevent fire hazard, the Class 2 W iring Cable should be used for connection with speaker , and should be routed away from hazards to avoid damage to the insulation of the cable. D3-7-13-67*_A1_En Read these instructions. Keep these instructions. Heed all warnings. F ollow all instructions. Do not use this apparatus near water . Clean only with dr y cloth. Do not block any ventilation openings. Install in accordance with the manufacturer âÂÂs instructions. Do not install near any heat sources such as radiators, heat registers, stoves, or other apparatus (including amplifiers) that produce heat. Do not defeat the safety purpose of the polarized or grounding-type plug. A polarized plug has two blades with one wider than the other . A grounding type plug has two blades and a third grounding prong. The wide blade or the third prong are provided for your safety . If the provided plug does not fit into your outlet, consult an electrician for replacement of the obsolete outlet. P rotect the power cord from being walked on or pinched particularly at plugs, convenience receptacles, and the point where they exit from the apparatus. 1) 2) 3) 4) 5) 6) 7) 8) 9) 10) Only use attachments/accessories specified by the manufacturer . Use only with the cart, stand, tripod, bracket, or table specified by the manufacturer , or sold with the apparatus. When a cart is used, use caution when moving the cart/apparatus combination to avoid injur y from tip-over . Unplug this apparatus during lightning storms or when unused for long periods of time. Refer all servicing to qualified ser vice personnel. Ser vicing is required when the apparatus has been damaged in any way , such as power-supply cord or plug is damaged, liquid has been spilled or objects have fallen into the apparatus, the apparatus has been exposed to rain or moisture, does not operate normally , or has been dropped. D3-7-13-69_En 11) 12) 13) 14) SC-1525_UXJCB.bo ok 2 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ æÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂç« æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ æÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
VENTILA TION CAUTION When installing this unit, make sure to leave space around the unit for ventilation to improve heat radiation (at least 20 cm at top, 10 cm at rear , and 20 cm at each side). W ARNING Slots and openings in the cabinet are provided for ventilation to ensure reliable operation of the product, and to protect it from overheating. T o prevent fire hazard, the openings should never be blocked or covered with items (such as newspapers, table-cloths, curtains) or by operating the equipment on thick carpet or a bed. D3-4-2-1-7b*_A1_En If the AC plug of this unit does not match the AC outlet you want to use, the plug must be removed and appropriate one fitted. Replacement and mounting of an AC plug on the power supply cord of this unit should be per formed only by qualified ser vice personnel. If connected to an AC outlet, the cut-off plug can cause severe electrical shock. Make sure it is properly disposed of after removal. The equipment should be disconnected by removing the mains plug from the wall socket when left unused for a long period of time (for example, when on vacation). D3-4-2-2-1a_A1_En CAUTION The ïµ STANDBY/ON switch on this unit will not completely shut off all power from the AC outlet. Since the power cord ser ves as the main disconnect device for the unit, you will need to unplug it from the AC outlet to shut down all power . Therefore, make sure the unit has been installed so that the power cord can be easily unplugged from the AC outlet in case of an accident. T o avoid fire hazard, the power cord should also be unplugged from the AC outlet when left unused for a long period of time (for example, when on vacation). D3-4-2-2-2a*_A1_En NOTE: This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device, pursuant to P art 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential installation. This equipment generates, uses, and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the instructions, may cause harmful inter ference to radio communications. However , there is no guarantee that inter ference will not occur in a particular installation. If this equipment does cause harmful inter ference to radio or television reception, which can be determined by turning the equipment off and on , the user is encouraged to tr y to correct the inter ference by one or more of the following measures: â Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna. â Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver . â Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the receiver is connected. â Consult the dealer or an experienced radio/TV technician for help. D8-10-1-2_A1_En Information to User Alterations or modifications carried out without appropriate authorization may invalidate the user âÂÂs right to operate the equipment. D8-10-2_A1_En CAUTION This product satisfies FCC regulations when shielded cables and connectors are used to connect the unit to other equipment. T o prevent electromagnetic inter ference with electric appliances such as radios and televisions, use shielded cables and connectors for connections. D8-10-3a_A1_En FEDERAL COMMUNICA TIONS COMMISSION DECLARA TION OF CONFORMITY This device complies with part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) This device may not cause harmful inter ference, and (2) this device must accept any inter ference received, including inter ference that may cause undesired operation. P roduct Name: AUDIO/VIDEO MUL TI-CHANNEL RECEIVER Model Number: SC -1525-K Responsible P arty Name: PIONEER ELECTRONICS (USA) INC. SERVICE SUPPORT DIVISION Address: 1925 E. DOMINGUEZ ST . LONG BEACH , CA 90810-1003, U.S.A. Phone: 1-800-421-1404 URL: http://www .pioneerelectronics.com D8-10-4*_C1_En IMPORT ANT NOTICE THE MODEL NUMBER AND SERIAL NUMBER OF THIS EQUIPMENT ARE ON THE REAR OR BOT TOM. RECORD THESE NUMBERS ON YOUR ENCL OSED W ARRANTY P AGE 115 FOR FUTURE REFERENCE. D36-AP9-1_A1_En SC-1525_UXJCB.bo ok 3 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ æÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂç« æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ æÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
This product is for general household purposes. Any failure due to use for other than household purposes (such as long-term use for business purposes in a restaurant or use in a car or ship) and which requires repair will be charged for even during the warranty period. K041_A1_En The Safety of Y our Ears is in Y our Hands Get the most out of your equipment by playing it at a safe level â a level that lets the sound come through clearly without annoying blaring or distortion and, most importantly , without affecting your sensitive hearing. Sound can be deceiving. Over time, your hearing âÂÂcomfort levelâ adapts to higher volumes of sound, so what sounds âÂÂnormalâ can actually be loud and harmful to your hearing. Guard against this by setting your equipment at a safe level BEFORE your hearing adapts. EST ABLISH A SAFE LEVEL: ⢠Set your volume control at a low setting. ⢠Slowly increase the sound until you can hear it comfortably and clearly , without distortion. ⢠Once you have established a comfortable sound level, set the dial and leave it there. BE SURE TO OBSERVE THE FOLLOWING GUIDELINES: ⢠Do not turn up the volume so high that you canâÂÂt hear whatâÂÂs around you. ⢠Use caution or temporarily discontinue use in potentially hazardous situations. ⢠Do not use headphones while operating a motorized vehicle; the use of headphones may create a traffic hazard and is illegal in many areas. S001a_A1_En SC-1525_UXJCB.bo ok 4 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ æÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂç« æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ æÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
5 En Contents 01 Before you start Ou r p hiloso p hy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 Featu r es . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 Checking whatâÂÂs in the box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 Installing the r eceiver . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 Loading the batte r ies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 0 O pe r ating r ange of r emote cont r ol unit . . . . . . . . . . . 10 02 Controls and displays Remote cont r ol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11 Dis p lay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 F r ont p anel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14 03 Connecting your equipment Rea r p anel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16 Dete r mining the s p eake r sâ a pp licatio n . . . . . . . . . . . 17 Othe r s p eake r connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18 Placing the s p eaker s . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18 THX s p eaker system setu p . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18 Some ti p s fo r im pr oving so und quality . . . . . . . . . . 18 Connecting the s p eaker s . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19 Installing yo u r sp eaker system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20 Standa r d su rr ound conn ection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20 Bi-am p ing you r s p eake r s . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21 Bi-wi r ing you r s p eake r s . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21 Selecting th e S p eaker system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22 F r ont height setu p . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22 F r ont wide setu p . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22 S p ea ke r B setu p . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22 Bi-Am p ing setu p . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 2 ZONE 2 setu p . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22 About the audio connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22 About the video conve r ter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22 About HDMI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23 Connecting you r TV and p layback com p onents . . . . . 24 Connecting using HDMI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24 Connecting you r DVD p layer with no HDMI out p ut . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25 Connecting you r TV with no HDMI in p ut . . . . . . . . . 26 Connecting an HDD/DVD r ecor der , BD r ecor der and othe r video sou r ces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27 Connecting a satellite/ cable r eceiver or othe r set-to p box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28 Connecting the multichannel analog in p uts . . . . . . . 29 Connecting othe r audio com p onen ts . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30 About the WMA9 P r o decode r . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30 Connecting additional am p lifie r s . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 1 Connect ing AM/FM antennas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31 Connecting exte r nal ante nnas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32 MULTI-ZONE setu p . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 2 Making MULTI-ZONE connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32 Connecting to the netwo r k th r ough LAN inte r face . . . 33 Connecting O p tional Bluetoothî ADAPTER . . . . . . . 34 Connecting an HDMI -equi pp ed com p onent to the f r ont p anel i n p ut . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34 Connecting an XM Ra dio tune r . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34 Connecting a Si r iusConn ect⢠tune r . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34 Connecting an iPo d . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35 Connecting a USB device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35 Connecting a USB device fo r Advanced MCACC out p ut . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35 Connecting an IR r eceiver . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36 O pe r ating othe r Pionee r com p onents with this unitâÂÂs senso r . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36 Switching com p onents on and off using the 12 volt t r igger . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37 Plugging in the r eceiver . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37 04 Basic Setup Changing the OSD dis play language (OSD Language) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38 Automatically con ducting o p timum sound tuning (Full Au to MCA CC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38 P r oblems when using the Auto MCACC Setu p . . . . 40 The In p ut Setu p menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40 In p ut function default and p ossible settings . . . . . . 41 05 Basic playback Playing a so u r ce . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42 Playing a sou r ce with HDMI connection . . . . . . . . . 42 Selecting the mu ltichannel ana log in p uts . . . . . . . . 42 Playin g an iPod . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43 Playing back audio files sto r ed on an iPod . . . . . . . 43 Playing a USB device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 Playing back audio files sto r ed on a USB memo r y device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 Playing back p hoto files sto r ed on a USB memo r y device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 About p layable file fo r mats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45 Listen ing to th e r adio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46 Im pr oving FM sound . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46 Using the noise cut mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46 Using Neu r al Su rr ound . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46 Tuning di r ectly to a station . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46 Saving s tation pr esets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46 Listening to station pr esets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46 Naming station pr esets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46 Listening t o Satellit e Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47 Listening t o XM Radi o . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47 Using XM HD Su rr ound . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47 Saving channel pr esets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48 Using the XM Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48 Listening to SIRIUS Radi o . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48 Saving channel pr esets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49 Using the SIRIUS Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49 Listening to Inte r net r adio stations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49 P r og r amm ing the Inte r net r adio stations . . . . . . . . 50 Thank you for buying this P ioneer product. Please read through these operating instructions so you will know how to operate your model properly . Af ter you have finished reading the instructions, put them away in a safe place for future reference. SC-1525_UXJCB.bo ok 5 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ æÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂç« æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ æÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
6 En Bluetooth ADAPTER fo r Wir eless Enjoyment of Music . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51 Wi r eless music p lay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 1 Pai r ing the Blu etooth ADAPT ER and Bluetoo th wi r eless technology device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51 Listening to music contents of a Bluetooth wi r eless technology device with you r system . . . . . . 52 06 Listening to your system Auto p layback . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53 Listening in su rr ound sound . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53 Standa r d su rr ound sou nd . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53 Using the Home THX modes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 4 Using the Advanced su rr ound effects . . . . . . . . . . . 54 Listening in ste r eo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55 Using F r ont Stage Su rr ound Advance . . . . . . . . . . . . 55 Using St r eam Di r ect . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55 Selecting MCAC C pr esets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56 Choosing the in p ut signal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56 Bette r sound using Phase Con t r ol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56 07 Control with HDMI function Making Cont r ol with HDMI connections . . . . . . . . . . . 57 HDMI Setu p . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57 Befo r e using synch r onization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58 About synch r onized o p er ations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58 About connections with a pr oduct of a diffe r ent b r and that su pp o r ts the Cont r ol with HDMI function . . . . . 59 Setting th e PQLS functi on . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59 Cautions on the C ont r ol with HDMI function . . . . . . . 59 08 Using other functions Setting th e Audio o p tions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60 Setting the Video o p tions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62 Switching t he s p eaker te r minals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63 Using the MULTI-ZONE co nt r ols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63 Making an audio o r a video r ecor ding . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64 Reducing the level of an analog signal . . . . . . . . . . . . 64 Using the sl ee p time r . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65 Dimming the dis p lay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65 Switching t he HDMI out p ut . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65 Using the Web Cont r ol function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65 Checking you r system settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65 Resetting the system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66 Default system settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66 09 Controlling the rest of your system About the Remote Se tu p menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67 O pe r ating multi p le r eceive rs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67 Setting the r emote to cont r ol othe r com p onents . . . . 68 Selecting pr eset codes di r ec tly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68 P r og r amming signals f r om othe r r emote cont r ol s . . . 68 E r asing one of the r emo te cont r ol button se ttings . . . 6 9 E r asing all lea r nt setti ngs that a r e in one in p ut function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69 Di r ect function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69 Setting the backl ight mod e . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70 Multi o p er ation and System of f . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70 P r og r amming a Mult i o pe r ation o r a shutdown sequence . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71 Using multi o p er ations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71 Using System off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71 E r asing t he settin gs fo r the m ulti-o p er ation . . . . . . . 71 Resettin g the r emote cont r ol settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72 Default pr eset codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72 Cont r olling com p onents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72 10 The Advanced MCACC menu Making r eceive r settings f r om the Advanced MCACC me nu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75 Automatic MCACC (Ex p er t) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75 Manual MC ACC setu p . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77 Fine Channel Level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78 Fine S p eaker Distance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78 Standing Wave . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78 Acoustic Cali b r ation EQ Adjust . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79 Acoustic Cali b r ation EQ P r of essional . . . . . . . . . . . 79 Checking MCACC Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81 S p eake r Setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81 Channel Level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81 S p eake r Distance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81 Standing Wave . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81 Acoustic Cal EQ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81 Out p ut MCACC d ata . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82 Data Management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82 Renaming MCACC pr esets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82 Co p ying MCACC pr eset data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83 Clea r ing MCACC pr esets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83 SC-1525_UXJCB.bo ok 6 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ æÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂç« æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ æÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
7 En 11 The System Setup and Other S etup menus Making r eceive r settings f r om the System Setu p menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84 Manual s p eaker setu p . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84 S p eake r system setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 5 S p eake r Setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85 Channel Level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86 S p eake r Distance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86 X-Cu r ve . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87 THX Audio Setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 7 Netwo r k Setu p menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87 IP add r ess/Pr oxy setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 8 Checking the MAC add r ess . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88 Netwo r k Standby . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 8 The Othe r Setu p menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 9 Volume Setu p . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89 Remote Cont r ol Mode Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 9 Flicke r Reduction Setu p . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90 EXTENSION Setu p . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90 Multi Channe l In p ut Setu p . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 0 12 Additional in formation S p eake r Setting Guide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91 Positional r elationshi p between s peake r s and monito r . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92 T r oubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92 Powe r . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92 No sound . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93 Othe r audio pr oblems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94 ADAPTER PORT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95 Video . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95 Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96 P r ofessional Calib r ation EQ g ra p hical o ut p ut . . . . . 9 6 Dis p lay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97 Remote cont r ol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97 Web Cont r ol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98 HDMI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98 Im p or tant inf o r mation r ega r ding the HDMI connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99 USB inte r face . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99 Inte r net r adio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100 XM r adio me ssages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101 SIRIUS r adio messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102 Su rr ound sound fo r mats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103 Do lby . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 3 DTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103 Windows Media Audio 9 P r of essional . . . . . . . . . . 10 3 About THX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103 About iPod . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104 About SIRIUS and XM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 05 Auto Su rr ound, ALC and St r eam Di r ect with diffe r ent in p ut signal fo r mats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 6 P r eset code list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107 S p ecifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111 Cleaning the unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111 SC-1525_UXJCB.bo ok 7 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ æÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂç« æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ æÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
8 En Flow of settings on the receiver The unit is a full-fledged AV rece iver eq uipped with an ab undance of func tions and termina ls. It can be use d easily after following the procedure belo w to make the connect ions and settings. The colors of the steps indicate the following: Required settin g item Setting to be made as necessary 1 Before you start ⢠Checking whatâÂÂs in the box (page 10) ⢠Loading the batteries (page 10) ïª 2 Determining the speakersâ app lication (page 17) ⢠7.1 channel surround system (Front height) ⢠7.1 channel surround system (Front wide) ⢠7.1 channel surround system & Speaker B connection ⢠5.1 channel surround system & Front Bi-amping connection (High quality surr ound) ⢠5.1 channel surround syst em & ZONE 2 connection (Multi Zone) ïª 3 Connecting the speakers ⢠Placing the speakers (page 18) ⢠Connecting the speakers (page 19) ⢠Installing your speaker system (page 20) ⢠Bi-amping your speakers (page 21) ïª 4 Connecting the components ⢠About the audio connection (page 22) ⢠About the video converter (page 22) ⢠Connecting your TV and playback components (page 24) ⢠Connecting AM/FM antennas (page 31) ⢠Plugging in the receiver (page 37) ïª 5P o w e r O n ïª 6 Changing the OSD d isplay lang uage (OSD Language) ( page 38) ïª 7 MCACC speaker settings ⢠Automatically conducting optimum sound tuning (Full Auto MCACC) (page 38) ïª 8 The Input Setup menu (page 40) (When using connecti ons other than the recommended connections) ïª 9 Basic playback (page 42) ïª 10 Switching the HDMI output (page 65) ïª 11 Adjusting the sound and picture quality as desired ⢠Using the various listening modes (page 53) ⢠Better sound using Phase Control (page 56) ⢠Measuring the all EQ type (SYMMETRY/ALL CH ADJ/FRONT ALIGN) (page 75) ⢠Changing the channe l level while listening ( Tip on page 86) ⢠Switching on/off the Acoust ic Calibrati on EQ, Sound retriever or Dialog Enhan cement (page 60) ⢠Setting the PQLS function (page 59) ⢠Setting the Audio options (Tone, Loudness or Sound delay, etc.) (page 60) ⢠Setting the Video options (page 62) ïª 12 Other optional adju stments and settings ⢠Control with HDMI function (page 57) ⢠The Advanced MC ACC menu (page 75) ⢠The System Setup and Other Setup menus (page 84) ïª 13 Making maximum use of the remote con trol ⢠Operating multiple recei vers (page 67) ⢠Setting the remote to control other components (page 68) 00he_Flow_chart. fm 8 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ æÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂç« æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ æÂÂï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Before you start 01 9 En Chapter 1: Before you start Our philosophy Pionee r is dedicated to making you r home theate r listening ex p er ience as close as p ossible to the vision of the moviemake r s and maste r in g enginee r when they c r eated the o r iginal soundt r ack. We do this by focusing on th r ee im p or ta nt ste p s: 1 Achieving the highest possi ble sound quality 2 Allowing for customized acoustic calibration according to any listening area 3 Fine-tuning the receiver with the help of world- class studio engineer s * * With the cooperatio n of AIR Studios, this receiver has been designated AIR Studios Monitor: Features ⢠Direct Energy HD Amplifier Th r ough a collabo r ation, Pione e r and ICE p ower have jointly develo p ment a unique class D am p lifier called a âÂÂDi r ect Ene r gy HD (H igh Fidelity Class D ) am p lifie r âÂÂ. This new gene r ation r efer ence am p lifier offe r s outstanding p er for mance with high sound quality and r e pr oduces the latest in mul ti-channel di gital con tents. ⢠HDMI (Ver.1.4a wit h 3D, Audio Return Channel) A com p atible com p onent is r equir ed to use the above function. ⢠Remote operation on an i Phone/iPod touch O pe r ation via LAN is p ossible f r om an iPhone o r iPod touch by downloading a Pionee r or iginal a pp lication (iCont r olAV) f r om the iTun es Sto r e. ⢠iPhone/iPod playback You r iPhone o r iPod can be connected to the r eceive r âÂÂs USB te r minal to p lay the music/video files on the iPhone/ iPod. â¢P Q L S 1 Jitte r less high qu ality p layback is p ossible by connect ing a PQLS-com p atible p layer with HDMI connections. ⢠Dolby Pro Logic llz compatible Adding a p air of s p eaker s above the f r ont left and r ight s p eake r s adds ex pr essiveness in the ve r tical di r e ction to the pr evious ho r izontally-or iented sound field. The height channel st r engthens the sound fieldâÂÂs sense of th r ee- dimensionalit y and ai r , pr oduci ng pr esence and ex p ansion. ⢠Internet Radio By connecting this r eceiver to the netwo r k via the LAN te r minal, you can listen to Inte r net r adio stations. ⢠XM and SIRIUS Ready With the XM and SIRIUS Radio te r minals, youâÂÂll be u p and r unning in no time. ⢠Bluetooth compatible Using the Bluetooth ADAPTER (Pionee r Model No. A S- BT100) 2 lets you enjoy music files on an iPh one o r othe r Bluetooth wi r eless technology device wir elessly. ⢠Sound Retriever and Sound Retri ever Air The Sound Ret r iever featu r e em p loys DSP technology to r estor e sound pr essur e an d smooth jag ged ar tifacts left ove r afte r com pr ession. Sound Ret r ieve r Ai r com p ensates fo r r educed sound quality due to com pr ession when sending Bluetooth signals. ⢠Easy setup using Advanced MCACC The Auto MCACC Setu p pr ovid es a quick b ut accu r ate su rr ound sound setu p , wh ich includes the advan ced featu r es of P r ofessiona l Acoustic Calib r atio n EQ. ⢠Web control The r eceive r can be o p er ated using a b r owse r f r om a com p ute r connected on the same LAN as the r eceive r . ⢠RF two-way communications function Using the CU-RF100 3 , the info r mation shown of the r eceiver âÂÂs disp lay can be disp layed on the r emote contr ol in you r hands and you can o p er ate the r emote cont r ol without wo rr ying about obstacles o r the di r ection in which the r emote cont r ol is p ointing. Note 1 T he PQLS functions su pp o r ted fo r the PQLS Multi Su rr ound and PQLS 2ch Audio. 2 The AS-BT100 is sold se p ar ately. 3 T he CU-RF100 is sold se p ar ately. SC-1525_UXJCB.bo ok 9 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ æÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂç« æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ æÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Before you start 01 10 En Checking whatâÂÂs in the box Please check that youâÂÂve r eceived the follo wing su pp lied accesso r ies: â¢S e t u p micr op hone (cable: 5 m (16.4 ft.)) ⢠Remote cont r ol unit ⢠AAA size IEC R03 d r y cell batte r ies (to confi r m system o pe r ation) x2 â¢A M l o o p antenna â¢F M w i r e antenna ⢠iPod cable â¢P o w e r cor d â¢T h e s e o p er ating instr uctions Installing the receiver ⢠When installing this unit , make su r e to p ut it o n a level and stable su r face. DonâÂÂt insta ll it on the fol lowing p lac es: â on a colo r TV (the sc r een may disto r t) â nea r a cassette de ck (o r close to a device th at gives off a magnetic field). This may inte r fer e with the sound. â in di r ect sunlight â in dam p or wet a r eas â in ext r emely hot o r cold a r eas â in p laces whe r e the r e is vib r ation o r othe r movement â in p laces that a r e ve r y dusty â in p laces that have hot fumes o r oils (such as a kitchen) ⢠Do not touch this r eceiver âÂÂs botto m p anel while the p ower is on or just after it is tur ned off. The bottom p anel becomes hot when the p ower is on (or r ight afte r it is tu r ned off) and could cause bu r ns. Loading the bat teries The batte r ies included w ith the unit a r e to check in itial o pe r ations; they may not last ove r a long pe r iod. We r ecommend usin g alkaline bat ter ies that have a longe r life. CAUTION Inco rr ect use of batte r ies may r esult in suc h haza r ds as leakage an d bu r sting. Obse r ve the following pr ecautions: ⢠Neve r use new and ol d batte r ies to gethe r . â¢I n s e r t the p lus and minus sides of the batter ies pr o pe r ly acco r ding to the ma r ks in th e batte r y case. â¢B a t t e r ies with the same shap e may ha ve differ ent voltages. Do not use diffe r ent batte r ies togethe r . ⢠When dis p osing of used batte r ies, p lease com p ly with gove r nmental r egulations o r envi r on mental p ublic instr uctionâÂÂs r ul es th at a pp ly in you r count r y o r a r ea. ⢠WARNING Do not use o r sto r e batte r ies in di r ect sunlight o r othe r excessively hot p lace, such as insid e a ca r o r nea r a heat e r . This ca n cause ba tte r ies to leak, ove r heat, ex p lode o r catch f i r e. It can also r educe the life o r p er for mance of batte r ies. Operating range of remote control unit The r emote cont r ol may not wo r k pr o pe r ly if: â¢T h e r e ar e obstacles between the r emote contr ol and the r eceive r âÂÂs r emote senso r . â¢D i r ect su nlight or fluor escent light is sh ining onto the r emote sensor . â¢T h e r e ceiver is located nea r a device that is emitting inf r ar ed r ays. â¢T h e r eceiver is op er ated simult aneously with anoth e r inf r ar ed r emote cont r ol unit. Tip ⢠By connecting an RF ada p ter to the RS-232C and EXTENSION te r minals, the CU-RF100 omni- di r ectional r emote cont r ol can be used fo r RF two- way communications with the r eceiver . 1 W i t h R F t w o - way communications, the info r mation of the r eceiver âÂÂs disp lay can be disp layed on th e r emote cont r ol i n you r hands and the r emote con t r ol can be o pe r ated without wo rr ying about obstacles o r the di r ection in which the r emote cont r ol is p ointi ng. 2 Note 1 The RF ada p ter and CU -RF100 o mni-di r ectional r emote cont r ol a r e sold se p ar ately. 2 The maximum line-of-sight distance fo r RF two-way communications is about 10 mete r s. This line-of-sight communications di stance is a r ough indication, and may diffe r acco r ding to the su rr ounding envi r onment. 7 m (23 ft. ) 30ð 30ð SC-1525_UXJC B.book 10 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼ å¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂç«æÂÂæÂÂ¥ ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Controls and displays 02 11 En Chapter 2: Controls and displays Remote control This sectio n ex p lains how to o p er ate the r emote co nt r ol fo r the r eceive r . The remote has been conveniently color-coded accord ing to compo nent con trol using the foll owing s ystem: ⢠White â Receive r cont r ol, TV cont r ol ⢠Blue â Othe r cont r ols (See p age 43, 44, 46, 47, 51 and 72.) 1 ïµ RECEIVER This switches between standb y and on fo r this r eceiver . 2 MULTI OPERATION â Use to p er for m m ulti o pe r ations ( p age 70). R.SETUP â Use to in p ut the pr eset code when making r emote contr ol settings and to se t the r emote cont r ol mode ( p age 67). 3 Input functi on buttons P r ess to select cont r ol of othe r com p onents ( p age 67). Use INPUT SELECT to select the in p ut function ( p age 42). 4 TV CTRL Set the pr eset code of you r TVâÂÂs manufactu r er when cont r olling the TV ( p age 68). 5 TV CONTROL buttons These buttons a r e dedicated to cont r ol the TV assigned to the TV C TRL button. 6 Receiver setting b uttons P r ess fi r st to access: AUDIO PARAMETER â Use to access the Audio o p tions ( p age 60). VIDEO PARAMETER â Use to access the Video o p tions ( p age 62). HOME MENU â Use to access the Home Menu ( p ages 38, 40, 57, 75, 84 and 87). RETURN â P r ess to confir m and exit the cu rr ent menu sc r een. 7 ï©/ïª/ï«/ï¬ / ENTER Use the a rr ow buttons when setting u p you r su rr ound sound system (see p age 75) and the Audio o r Video o p tions ( p age 60 o r 62). 8 Receiver Contro l buttons P r ess fi r st to access: AUTO/ALC/DIRECT â Switches between Auto Su rr ound ( p age 53) , Auto Level Cont r ol mode and St r eam Di r ect m ode ( p age 55). STEREO â Switches between ste r eo p layback and F r ont Stage Su rr ound Advance modes ( p age 55). RECEIVER ZONE 2 ZONE 3 LIGHT AUTO / ALC / DIRECT D.A CCESS CH LEVEL A .A TT DIMMER SIGNAL SEL MCACC SLEEP HDMI OUT TV / DTV MPX PQLS PHASE CTRL ST A TUS THX PGM STEREO iPod CTRL HOME MENU TUNE TUNE TOOLS LIST CH TV CONTROL INPUT INPUT SELECT TV CTRL iPod USB TUNER SIRIUS XM ADAPTER NET RADIO CD TV BD DVD R.SETUP SOURCE RECEIVER MUL TI OPERA TION DVR/BDR HDMI RECEIVER MUTE MASTER VOLUME VOL PRESET TOP MENU BAND GUIDE T .EDIT VIDEO P ARAMETER AUDIO P ARAMETER ENTER PRESET RETURN CA TEGORY MEMORY ST ANDARD MENU ADV SURR AUDIO INFO CLASS ENTER DISP HDD DVD 5 46 8 0 79 2 13 / CLR CH 1 2 3 4 8 9 5 6 7 10 11 12 13 14 RECEIVER RECEIVER SC-1525_UXJC B.book 11 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼ å¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂç«æÂÂæÂÂ¥ ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Controls and displays 02 12 En STANDARD â P r ess for Standar d decoding and to switch va r ious modes ( 2 P r o Logic, Neo:6, etc.) ( p age 53). ADV SURR â Use to switch bet ween the va r io us su rr ound modes ( p age 54). THX â P r ess to select a Home THX listening mode ( p age 54). PHASE CTRL â P r ess to switch on/off Phas e Cont r ol ( p age 56). STATUS â P r ess to check selected r eceiver settin gs ( p age 65). PQLS â P r ess to select the PQLS setting (p age 59). HDMI OUT â Swit ch the HDMI out p ut te r minal ( p age 65). SIGNAL SEL â Use to s elect an in p ut signal ( p a ge 56). MCACC â P r ess to switch between MCACC pr esets ( p age 56). SLEEP â Use to p ut the r eceiver in sleep mode and select the amount of ti me befo r e slee p (p age 65). CH LEVEL â P r ess r ep eated ly to sele ct a channel, then use ï«/ï¬ to adjust the level ( p age 86). A.ATT â Attenuates (lowe r s) th e level of an ana log in p ut signal to pr event disto r tion ( p age 64). DIMMER â Dims o r br ightens th e disp lay (p age 65). 9 MULTI-ZONE select buttons Switch to p er for m op er ations in ZON E 2 and ZONE 3 ( p age 64). 10 Remote control LED Lights when a command is sent f r om the r emote cont r ol. 11 Switch es the r emote to cont r ol the r eceiver (used to select the white commands). Switch to p er for m op er ations in th e main zone. Also use this button to set u p su rr ound sound. 12 MASTER VOLUME /â Use to set the listening volume. 13 MUTE Mutes the sound o r r estor es the sound if it has been muted (adjusting the volume also r estor es the sound). 14 P r ess to tu r n on/off the il lumination fo r the buttons. The way the bu ttons ligh t can be selected f r om fou r modes ( p age 70). Display 1 SIGNAL indicators Light to indicate the cu rr ently selected in p ut signal. AUTO lights wh en the r eceiver is set to select the inp ut signal aut omatically ( p age 56). 2 Program format i ndicators Light to indicat e the ch annels to which digital signals a r e being in p ut. L/R â Left f r ont/Right fr ont chan nel C â Cente r channel SL / SR â Left su rr ound/Right su rr ound ch annel LFE â Low f r equency effects channel (the (( )) indicato r s light when an LFE signal is being in p ut) XL / XR â Two channels othe r than the ones above XC â Eithe r one channel other than the ones above, the mono su rr ound channel o r mat r ix encode f lag 3 Digital f ormat indicators Light when a signal encoded in the co rr es p ondi ng for mat is detected. 2 DIGITAL â Lights with Dolby Digital decoding. 2 DIGITAL PLUS â Lights with Dolby Digital Pl us decoding. 2 TrueHD â Ligh ts with Dolby T r ueHD decoding. DTS â Lights with DTS decoding. DTS HD â Lights with DTS-HD decod ing. 96/24 â Lights with DTS 96/24 decoding. WMA9 Pro â Lights to indic ate that a WMA9 P r o signal is being decoded. DSD PCM â Light du r ing DSD (Di r ect St r eam Digital) to PCM conve r sion with SACDs. RECEIVER PCM HDMI DIGITAL ANALOG L C R SL SR XL XR XC LFE AUTO DIGITAL PLUS AUTO SURROUND STREAM DIRECT PROLOGIC x Neo:6 THX ADV.SURROUND STEREO STANDARD SP AB SLEEP DSD PCM DTS HD ES 96/24 MSTR S.RTRV SOUND UP MIX OVER MONO dB 2 MULTI-ZONE STEREO TrueHD WMA9Pro PQLS ALC ATT 2 2 USB XM VIDEO TV DVD HDMI DVR BD CD TUNER SIRIUS CD-R iPod [ 2 ] [ 3 ] [ 4 ] TUNED PHONO 2 1 3 8 4 9 5 7 10 11 12 18 17 19 14 15 16 13 6 6 SC-1525_UXJC B.book 12 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼ å¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂç«æÂÂæÂÂ¥ ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Controls and displays 02 13 En PCM â Lights du r ing p layback of PCM signals. MSTR â Lights du r ing p layback of DTS-HD Master Audio signals. 4 MULTI-ZONE Lights when the MULTI-ZONE featu r e is a ctive ( p age 63). 5 SOUND Lights when any of the Midnight, Loudness o r tone cont r ols featu r es is selected ( p age 60). Lights when Dialog Enhancement is switched on . 6 Listening mode indicators AUTO SURROUND â Lights when the Auto Su rr ound featu r e is switched on ( p age 53). ALC â Lights when the ALC (Auto level cont r ol) mode is selected ( p a ge 55). STREAM DIRECT â Lights when Di r ect/Pur e Di r ect is selected ( p age 55). ADV.SURROUND â Lights when one of the Advanced Su rr ound modes has been selected ( p age 54). STEREO â Lights when ste r eo listening is swi tched on ( p age 55). STANDARD â Lights when one of the Standa r d Su rr ound modes is switched on ( p age 53). THX â Lights when one of the Home THX modes is selected ( p age 54). 7 ( PHASE CONTROL ) Lights when the Phase Cont r ol is switched on ( p age 56). 8 Analog signal indicat ors Light to indicate r educing the level of an analog signal ( p age 64). 9 Tuner indicators TUNED â Lights when a b r oadcast is being r eceived. STEREO â Lights when a ste r eo FM b r oadcast is being r eceived in auto ster eo mode. MONO â Lights when the mono mode is set using MPX . 10 Lights when the sound is muted ( p age 12). 11 Master volume level Shows the ove r all volume level. â --- â indicates the minimum level, and â 12dB â indicates the maximum level. 12 Input function indicat ors Light to indicate the in p ut function you have selected. 13 Scroll indicators Light when the r e a r e mo r e select able items when making the va r ious settings. 14 Speaker indicators Lights to in dicate the cu rr ent s p eaker system , A and/o r B ( p age 63). 15 SLEEP Lights when the r eceiver is in slee p mode ( p age 65). 16 Matrix decoding format i ndicators 2 PRO LOGIC IIx â This lights to indicate 2 P r o Logic II / 2 P ro Logic IIx decoding ( p age 53). Neo:6 â When one of the Neo:6 modes of the r eceiver is on, this lights to indicate Neo:6 pr ocessing ( p age 53) . 17 S.RTRV Lights when the Sound Ret r iever function is active ( p age 60) . 18 Character display Dis p lays va r ious system info r mation. 19 Remote control mode i ndicator Lights to indicate the r eceiver âÂÂs r emote cont r ol mode setting. (Not dis p layed when set to 1 .) ( p age 67) SC-1525_UXJC B.book 13 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼ å¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂç«æÂÂæÂÂ¥ ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Controls and displays 02 14 En Front panel 1 ïµ STANDBY/ON Switches the r eceiver between on and standby. 2 INPUT SELECTOR dial Use to select an in p ut func tion. 3 Indicators ADVANCED MCACC â Lights when EQ is set to ON in the AUDIO PARAMETER menu ( p age 60) . PQLS â Lights when the PQLS featu r e is active ( p age 59). HDMI â Blinks when co nnecting an HDMI- equi pp ed com p onent; ligh ts when the com p onent is connected ( p age 24) . iPod/iPhone â Lights to indi cate iPod/iPhone is connected ( p age 35). 4 Remote sensor Receives the signals f r om th e r emote cont r ol (see Operating range of remote control unit on p age 10). 5 Character display See Display on p age 12. 6 MASTER VOLUME dial 7 Front panel controls To access the f r ont p anel c ont r ols, p ush gently on the lowe r thi r d p or tion of the p anel with you r finge r . 8 AUDIO PARAMETER Use to access the Audio o p ti ons ( p age 60). 9 VIDEO PARAMETER Use to access the Video o p tions ( p age 62). 10 ï©/ïª/ï«/ï¬ ( TUNE / PRESET ) / ENTER Use the a rr ow buttons when setting u p you r Home Menu . Use TUNE ï©/ïª to find r adio fr equenc ies and use PRESET ï«/ï¬ to find pr eset sta tions ( p age 46). ïµ ST ANDBY/ON INPUT SELECTOR ADV ANCED MCACC iPod iPhone PQLS HDMI MASTER VOLUME PHONES SPEAKERS CONTROL MULTI-ZONE ON/OFF MCACC SETUP MIC PARAMETER ENTER (TUNE) (TUNE) (PRESET) (PRESET) AUDIO VIDEO TUNER EDIT USB HDMI 5 VIDEO CAMERA iPod iPhone AUTO SURR/ALC/ STREAM DIRECT HOME THX STANDARD SURROUND ADVANCED SURROUND STEREO BAND HOME MENU RETURN 1 7 23 8 16 17 9 11 12 15 14 10 4 5 6 13 20 21 18 19 SC-1525_UXJC B.book 14 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼ å¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂç«æÂÂæÂÂ¥ ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Controls and displays 02 15 En 11 TUNER EDIT Use with ï©/ïª/ï«/ï¬ / ENTER to me mo r ize and n ame stations fo r r eca ll ( p age 46). 12 BAND Switches between AM and FM r adio bands ( p a ge 46). 13 Listening mode button s AUTO SURR / ALC/ STREAM DIRECT â Switches between Auto Su rr ound ( p age 53) , Auto Level Cont r ol mode and St r eam Di r ect mode ( p age 55) . HOME THX â P r ess to select a Home THX listening mode ( p age 54). STANDARD SURROUND â P r es s fo r Standa r d decoding and to switch va r ious modes ( 2 P r o Logic, Neo:6, etc.) ( p age 53). ADVANCED SURROUND â Use to swit ch between the va r ious su rr o und modes ( p age 54). STEREO â Switches between ste r eo p layback and F r ont Sta ge Su rr ound Advance modes ( p age 55). 14 MULTI-ZONE controls If youâÂÂve made MULTI-ZONE connections (see MULTI- ZONE setup on p age 32) use these cont r ols to cont rol the sub zone f r om the main zone (see Using the MULTI-ZONE controls on p age 63). 15 SPEAKERS Use to change the s p eaker te r minal ( p age 63) . 16 HOME MENU P r ess to access the Home Menu ( p ages 38, 40, 57, 75, 84 and 87). 17 RETURN P r ess to confi r m and exit the cu rren t menu sc r een. 18 HDMI input co nnector Use fo r connection to a comp atib le HDMI de vice (Video came r a, etc.) ( p age 34). 19 iPod/iPhone/USB terminals Use to connect you r A pp le iP od as an audio and vi deo sou r ce, o r connect a USB device fo r audio and p hoto p layback (p age 35). 20 MCACC SETUP MIC jack Use to connec t the su pp li ed mic r op hone ( p age 38). 21 PHONES jack Use to connect head p hones. When the head p hones a r e connected, the r e is no sound o ut p ut f r om the s p eaker s. SC-1525_UXJC B.book 15 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼ å¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂç«æÂÂæÂÂ¥ ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Connecting your equipment 03 16 En Chapter 3: Connecting your equipment This r eceive r pr ovides you with many connection p ossibilities, but it doesnâÂÂt ha ve to be di fficult. Th is cha p ter ex p lains the kinds of com p onents you can connect to m ake u p you r home thea te r system. Rear panel Note â¢T h e i n p ut functions below ar e assigned by default to the r eceive r âÂÂs diffe r ent in p ut te r minals. Refe r to The Input Setup menu on p age 40 to change the assignments if othe r connection s a r e used. ⢠The CU-RF100 omni-di r ectional r emote contr ol (se p ar ately sold) can be connected to the RS-232C and EXTENSION te r minals. Using the CU-RF100 lets you dis p lay the r eceiver âÂÂs dis p la y info r mation on the r emote contr ol disp lay in your ha nds and op er ate it without wo rr yin g about obstacles o r the di r ection in which the r emote cont r ol is p ointing. CAUTION â¢B e f o r e m aking or changing the connections, switch off the p ower and disconnect the p ower co r d f r om the p ower o utlet. Plugging in should be the final ste p . RS-232C HDMI ASSIGNABLE COAXIAL COMPONENT VIDEO ASSIGNABLE OPTICAL ASSIGNABLE ASSIGNABLE MONITOR OUT ZONE 2 OUT IN Y CD-R/T APE ANTENNA FM UNBAL 75 AM LOOP AC IN IN CD IN VIDEO MONITOR OUT OUT ZONE2 OUT ZONE3 OUT DVD IN TV/SA T IN VIDEO IN DVR/BDR PHONO IN OUT IN P R P B 1 IN BD IN 1 IN 2 IN 3 OUT 1 ( CONTROL ) OUT 2 1 4 ( DVD ) IN 2 ( DVR/BDR ) IN 3 ( VIDEO ) IN 1 ( DVD ) IN 1 ( TV/SA T ) IN 2 ( DVR/BDR ) IN OUT FRONT CENTER SURROUND SURR BACK (Single) FH/FW 3 ( VIDEO ) IN 2 ( CD ) CONTROL EXTENSION IR 12 V TRIGGER IN IN IN OUT OUT 1 2 1 2 (OUTPUT 12 V TOTAL 150 mA MAX) SUBWOOFER IN 4 LAN ( 10/100 ) ( OUTPUT 5 V 100 mA MAX ) ADAPTER PORT PRE OUT ( OUTPUT 5 V 150 mA MAX ) XM IN SIRIUS IN SPEAKERS Class 2 Wiring MULTI CH IN SIGNAL GND FRONT CENTER SUBWOOFER SURROUND SURR BACK L R CAUTION: SPEAKER IMPEDANCE 6 é - 16 é . A T TENTION: ENCEINTE D'IMPEDANCE DE 6 é - 16 é . A SURROUND BA CK (Single) B R FRONT HEIGHT/WIDE/ LR L R L R L SURROUND FRONT CENTER SEE INSTRUCTION MANUAL SELECT ABLE VOIR LE MODE D'EMPLOI SELECT ABLE Input func tion Input Terminal s Digital HDMI Component DVD COAX-1 IN 1 BD (BD ) TV/SAT OPT-1 DVR/BDR OPT-2 IN 2 VIDEO OPT-3 IN 3 HDMI 1 ( HDMI-1 ) HDMI 2 ( HDMI-2 ) HDMI 3 ( HDMI-3 ) HDMI 4 ( HDMI-4 ) HDMI 5 (f r ont p anel) ( HDMI-5 ) CD COAX-2 CD-R/TAPE RS-232C EXTENSION ( OUTPUT 5 V 150 mA MAX ) SC-1525_UXJC B.book 16 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼ å¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂç«æÂÂæÂÂ¥ ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Connecting your equipment 03 17 En Determining the speakersâ application This unit p ermits you t o bu ild various surround systems, in accordance with the number o f speakers you have. ⢠Be sure to connect speakers to the front left and right channels ( L an d R ). ⢠It is also possi ble to only connect one of the surround back speakers ( SB ) or neither. Choose one from Plans [A] to [E] below. [A] 7.1 channel surround system (Front height) *Default setting ⢠Speaker System setting: Normal(S B/FH) A 7.1 ch surround system connects the left and right front speake rs ( L /R ), the center speaker ( C ), the le ft and right front height speakers ( FHL /FHR ), the left and right surround speakers ( SL / SR ), the left and right surro und back speakers ( SBL / SBR ), and the subwoofe r ( SW ). 1 This surround system produces a more true- to-life sound from above. [B] 7.1 ch annel surroun d system (Fron t wide) ⢠Speaker System setting: Normal(SB/FW) This plan replaces t he left and right front hei ght speakers shown in [A] with the left and right front wide speakers ( FWL/ FWR ). 1 This surround system produces a true-to-life so und over a wider area. [C] 7.1 channel surround system & Speaker B connection ⢠Speaker System setting: Spe aker B With these connections you can simultaneously enjoy 5.1-channel surround sound in the main zone with stereo playback of the same sound on the B speakers. The same connections also allow for 7.1-channel surround sound in the main zone when not using the B speakers. [D] 5.1 channel surround system & Fron t Bi- amping connection (High quality surround) ⢠Speaker System setting: Front Bi-Amp Bi-amping connection of th e front speakers for high sound quality with 5.1-channel surround so und. Note 1 I t is not possible to p roduce sound simult aneously from the front height or front wi de speakers and the surround back s peakers . SL L FHL SW C R FHR SR SBL SBR FWR FWL L SW C R SBL SBR SL SR SL L SW C R SR SBL SBR L R Speaker B L R SL SW C SR Front Bi-Amp 03he_Connecting_ up.fm 17 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ã ç«æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾ ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Connecting your equipment 03 18 En [E] 5.1 ch annel surro und system & ZONE 2 connection (Multi Zone) ⢠Speaker System setting: ZONE 2 With these connections you can simultan eously enjoy 5.1-channel su rr ound sound in the main zone with ste r eo p layback on anothe r com p onent in ZONE 2. (The selection of in p ut devices is limited.) Important â¢T h e Speaker System setting must be made if you use any of the connect ions shown abo ve othe r than [A] (see Speaker system setti ng on p age 85). ⢠Sound does not come th r ough simu ltaneously fr om the f r ont height, f r ont wide, s p eaker B and su rr ound back s p eaker s. Out p ut s p eaker s a r e diffe r ent de p ending on the in p ut signal o r listening mode. Other speaker co nnections â¢Y o u r favor ite sp eaker c onnections can be selected even if you have fewe r than 5.1 s p eaker s (exce p t f r ont left/ r ight s p eake r s). ⢠When not connecting a subwoofe r , connect s p eak er s with low f r equency r e pr oduction ca p abilities to the f r ont channel . (The subwoofe r âÂÂs low f r equ ency com p onent is p layed f r om the f r ont s p eake r s, so the s p eake r s could be damaged.) ⢠After connecting, be sure t o conduct the Full Auto MCACC (speaker environment setting) procedure. See Automatically conducting optimum s ound tuning (Full Auto MCACC) on p a ge 38. Placing the speakers Refe r to the cha r t below fo r p lacement of the s p eake r s you int end to connect . â¢P l a c e t h e s u rr ound s p eaker s at 120ú fr om the center . If you, (1) use the su rr ound back s p eaker , and, (2) donâÂÂt use the f r ont height s p eake r s / f r ont wide s p eake r s, we r ecommend p lacing the su rr ound s p eake r r ight beside you. ⢠If you intend to connect only one su rr ound back s p eake r , p lace it di r ectly behind you. ⢠Place the left and r ight f r ont height s p eaker s at least one mete r (3.3 ft.) di r ectly above the left and r ight f r ont s p eake r s. THX speaker syst em setup If you a r e using a THX ce r tified subwoofe r , use the THX INPUT jack on the subwoo fe r (if your subwoofer has one) o r switch the filt e r p osit ion to THX on you r subwoofe r . See also THX Audio Setting on p age 87 to make the settings that will give you the best sound ex p er ience when using the Home THX modes ( p age 54). Some tips for imp roving so und qual ity Whe r e you p ut you r s p eake r s in the r oom has a big effect on the quality of the sound. The fo llowing guidelines should hel p you to get the best sound f r om your system. â¢T h e s u b w o o f e r can be p laced on the f loor . Ideally, the othe r s p eake r s should be at about ea r -level when youâ r e listening to them. Putting the s peake r s on the floo r (exce p t the subwoofe r ), o r mounting them ve r y high on a wa ll is not r eco mmended. â¢F o r the best ster eo effect, p la ce the fr ont s p eaker s 2 m to 3 m (6 ft. to 9 ft.) a p ar t, at equal distance f r om the TV. â¢I f y o u â r e going to p lace sp eaker s ar ound your CRT TV, use shi elded s p eaker s o r p lace the sp eaker s at a sufficient d istance f r om you r CRT TV. â¢I f y o u â r e using a center sp eaker , p lace the fr ont s p eake r s at a wide r angle. If not, p lace them at a na rr owe r angle. L L R R SL SW C SR Main zone Sub zone ZONE 2 L SW C FHL FWL SL SBL SBR SB SR FWR R FHR 30 30 60 60 60 120 120 SC-1525_UXJC B.book 18 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼ å¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂç«æÂÂæÂÂ¥ ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Connecting your equipment 03 19 En ⢠Place the ce nte r sp eaker above o r below the TV so that the sound of the cente r channel i s localized a t the TV sc r een. Also, make su r e the cent e r sp eaker does not c r oss the line fo r med by the leading edge of the f r ont left and r ight s p eaker s. ⢠It is best to angle the s p eaker s towar ds the listen ing p osition. T he angle de p ends on the size of the r oo m. Use less of an angle fo r bigge r r ooms. â¢S u rr ound an d surr ound bac k s p eaker s should be p ositioned 60 cm to 90 cm (2 f t. to 3 ft.) higher than you r ea r s and tilted slightly downwa r d. Make su r e the s p eake r s donâÂÂt face each ot he r . Fo r DVD-Audio, the s p eake r s should be mo r e di r ectly behind the listene r than fo r home theate r p la yback. â¢T r y no t to p lace the su rr ound s p eake r s fa r the r away f r om the listening p osition than the f r ont and cente r s p eake r s. Doing so can weaken the su rr ound sound effect. Connecting the speakers Each s p eaker connection on th e r eceiver com pr ises a p ositive ( ) and negative (âÂÂ) ter minal. Mak e su r e to match these u p with the te r minals on the s p eaker s themselves. CAUTION â¢T h e s e s p eaker ter minals ca rr y HA ZARDOUS LIVE voltage . To pr event the r isk of electr ic shock when connecting o r disconnecting the s p eaker cables, disconnect the p ower co r d befo r e touching any uninsulated p ar ts. â¢M a k e s u r e that all the bar e sp eaker wir e is twist ed togeth e r and inse r ted fully into the s p eake r te r minal. If any of the ba r e s p eaker wi r e touches the back p anel it may cause the p ower to cut off as a safety measu r e. Bare wire connections 1 Twist exposed wire st rands together. (fig. A) 2 Loosen terminal and insert exposed wire. (fig. B) 3 Tighten terminal. (fig. C) Banana plug connections If you want to use s p eaker ca bles te r minated with banana p lugs, scr ew the sp eaker ter minal fully shut, then p lug the banana p lug into the end of the s p eaker te r minal. Important â¢P l e a s e r efer to the manual that came with your s p eake r s fo r details on ho w to connect th e othe r end of the s p eaker cables to you r sp eaker s. ⢠Use an RCA cable to connect the subwoofe r . It is not p ossible to connect using sp eaker cables. CAUTION â¢M a k e s u r e that all sp eaker s ar e secur ely installed. This not o nly im pr oves sound quality, but also r educes the r isk of damage or injur y r esulting fr om s p eake r s being knocked ove r o r falling in the event of exte r nal shocks such as ea r thquakes . fig. A fig. B fig. C 10 mm ( 3 / 8 in.) SC-1525_UXJC B.book 19 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼ å¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂç«æÂÂæÂÂ¥ ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Connecting your equipment 03 20 En Installing your speaker syste m At the ve r y least, f r ont left and r ight s p eaker s only a r e necessa r y. Note that you r main su rr ound s p eaker s should always be connected as a p air , but you can connect just one su rr ound back s p eaker if you like (it must be connected to the left su rr ound back te r minal). Standard surround connectio n RS-232C HDMI ASSIGNABLE COAXIAL COMPONENT VIDEO ASSIGNABLE OPTICAL ASSIGNABLE ASSIGNABLE MONITOR OUT ZONE 2 OUT IN Y CD-R/TAPE ANTENNA FM UNBAL 75 AM LOOP AC IN IN CD IN VIDEO MONITOR OUT OUT ZONE2 OUT ZONE3 OUT DVD IN TV/SAT IN VIDEO IN DVR/BDR PHONO IN OUT IN P R P B 1 IN BD IN 1 IN 2 IN 3 OUT 1 ( CONTROL ) OUT 2 1 4 ( DVD ) IN 2 ( DVR/BDR ) IN 3 ( VIDEO ) IN 1 ( DVD ) IN 1 ( TV/SAT ) IN 2 ( DVR/BDR ) IN OUT FRONT CENTER SURROUND SURR BA CK (Single) FH/FW 3 ( VIDEO ) IN 2 ( CD ) CONTROL EXTENSION IR 12 V TRIGGER IN IN IN OUT OUT 1 2 1 2 (OUTPUT 12 V TOTAL 150 mA MAX) SUBWOOFER IN 4 LAN ( 10/100 ) ( OUTPUT 5 V 100 mA MAX ) ADAPTER PORT PRE OUT ( OUTPUT 5 V 150 mA MAX ) XM IN SIRIUS IN SPEAKERS Class 2 Wiring MULTI CH IN SIGNAL GND FRONT CENTER SUBWOOFER SURROUND SURR BACK L R CAUTION: SPEAKER IMPEDANCE 6 é - 16 é . A T TENTION: ENCEINTE D'IMPEDANCE DE 6 é - 16 é . A SURROUND BACK (Single) B R FRONT HEIGHT/WIDE/ LR L R L R L SURROUND FRONT CENTER SEE INSTRUCTION MANUAL SELECTABLE VOIR LE MODE D'EMPLOI SELECTABLE LINE LEVEL INPUT F r ont left Subwoofe r Cente r Su rr ound r ight Not con necte d Not connected F r ont r ight Su rr ound left The su rr ound back te r minals can also be used fo r ZONE 2. 5.1 ch su rr ound setting Su rr ound back Not connected Su rr ound back left ZONE 2 setting ZONE 2 - Right ZONE 2 - Left 6.1 ch su rr ound setting Su rr ound back r ight 7.1 ch su rr ound setting S p eake r B - left S p eake r B - r ight S p eake r B setting F r ont wide left F r ont wide r ight F r ont height left F r ont height setting F r ont height r ight The f r ont height te r minals can also be used fo r the f r ont wide and S p eake r B s p eake r s. F r ont wide setting SC-1525_UXJC B.book 20 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼ å¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂç«æÂÂæÂÂ¥ ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Connecting your equipment 03 21 En Bi-amping your spe akers Bi-am p ing is when you connect the high f r equency d r ive r and low f r equency d r iver of you r sp eak er s to diffe r ent am p lifie r s fo r bette r c r ossove r p er fo r mance. You r s p eake r s must be bi-am p able to do this (having se p ar ate te r minals for high and low) and the sound im pr ovement will de p end on the kind of s p eaker s youâ r e using. CAUTION â¢M o s t s p eaker s with both Hi gh and Low te r minals have two metal p lates that connect the High to the Low te r minals. These must be r emoved when you ar e bi-am p ing the s p eake r s o r yo u could sev e r ely damage the am p lifie r . See you r sp eaker manua l fo r mo r e info r mation. â¢I f y o u r s p eaker s have a r emovable cr ossover ne twor k, make su r e you do not r emove it fo r bi-am p ing. Doing so may damage you r sp eaker s. Bi-wiring your speakers You r s p eake r s can also be bi-wi r ed if they su pp o r t bi- am p ing. ⢠With these connections, the Speaker System settin g makes no diffe r ence . ⢠To bi-wire a speaker, conn ect two speaker cords to the speaker terminal on the receiver. Using a banana p lug fo r the second connecti on is r ecommended. CAUTION ⢠DonâÂÂt connect diffe r ent s p eaker s f r om the same te r minal in this way. â¢W h e n b i - w i r ing as well, heed the cautions fo r bi- am p ing show n at the lef t. RS-232C HDMI ASSIGNABLE COAXIAL COMPONENT VIDEO ASSIGNABLE OPTICAL ASSIGNABLE ASSIGNABLE MONITOR OUT ZONE 2 OUT IN Y CD-R/TAPE ANTENNA FM UNBAL 75 AM LOOP AC IN IN CD IN VIDEO MONITOR OUT OUT ZONE2 OUT ZONE3 OUT DVD IN TV/SAT IN VIDEO IN DVR/BDR PHONO IN OUT IN P R P B 1 IN BD IN 1 IN 2 IN 3 OUT 1 ( CONTROL ) OUT 2 1 4 ( DVD ) IN 2 ( DVR/BDR ) IN 3 ( VIDEO ) IN 1 ( DVD ) IN 1 ( TV/SAT ) IN 2 ( DVR/BDR ) IN OUT FRONT CENTER SURROUND SURR BA CK (Single) FH/FW 3 ( VIDEO ) IN 2 ( CD ) CONTROL EXTENSION IR 12 V TRIGGER IN IN IN OUT OUT 1 2 1 2 (OUTPUT 12 V TOTAL 150 mA MAX) SUBWOOFER IN 4 LAN ( 10/100 ) ( OUTPUT 5 V 100 mA MAX ) ADAPTER PORT PRE OUT ( OUTPUT 5 V 150 mA MAX ) XM IN SIRIUS IN SPEAKERS Class 2 Wiring MULTI CH IN SIGNAL GND FRONT CENTER SUBWOOFER SURROUND SURR BACK L R CAUTION: SPEAKER IMPEDANCE 6 é - 16 é . A T TENTION: ENCEINTE D'IMPEDANCE DE 6 é - 16 é . A SURROUND BACK (Single) B R FRONT HEIGHT/WIDE/ L RL R L R L SURROUND FRONT CENTER SEE INSTRUCTION MANUAL SELECTABLE VOIR LE MODE D'EMPLOI SELECTABLE High Low High Low F r ont left Subwoofe r Cente r Su rr ound r ight F r ont r ight Su rr ound left Bi-am p com p atible s p eake r Bi-am p com p atible s p eake r SC-1525_UXJC B.book 21 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼ å¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂç«æÂÂæÂÂ¥ ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Connecting your equipment 03 22 En Selecting the Speaker sy stem The f r ont height te r minals ca n be used fo r f r ont w ide and S p eake r B con nections, i n additi on to fo r th e f r ont height s p eake r s. Also, the su rr ound back te r minals can be used fo r bi-am p ing and ZONE 2 connection s, in additi on to fo r the su rr ound back s p eake r s. Make this setting acco r ding to the a pp licati on. Front height setup *Default setting 1 Connect a pair of speakers t o the front height speaker terminals. See Standard surround connection on p age 20. 2 If necessary, select â Normal(SB/FH) â from the Speaker System menu. See Speaker system setting on p age 85 to do this. Front wide setup 1 Connect a pair of speakers t o the front height speaker terminals. See Standard surround connection on p age 20. 2 Select â Normal(SB/FW) â from the Speaker System menu. See Speaker system setting on p age 85 to do this. Speaker B setup You can listen to ste r eo p layback in ano the r r oom. 1 Connect a pair of speakers t o the front height speaker terminals. See Standard surround connection on p age 20. 2 Select â Speaker B â from the Speaker System menu. See Speaker system setting on p age 85 to do this. Bi-Amping setup Bi-am p ing connection of the f r on t s p eaker s fo r high sound quality with 5.1-channel su rr ound sound. 1 Connect bi-amp compatibl e speakers to the front and surround back speaker terminals. See Bi-amping your speake rs on p a ge 21. 2 Select â Front Bi-Amp â from t he Speaker System menu. See Speaker system setting on p age 85 to do this. ZONE 2 setup With these connection s you can simultane ously enjoy 5.1-channel su rr ou nd sound in the main zo ne with ste r eo p layback on another comp onent in ZONE 2. 1 Connect a pair of sp eakers to the surround back speaker terminals. See Standard surround connection on p age 20. 2 Select â ZONE 2 â from the Speaker System menu. See Speaker syste m setting on p age 85 to do this. About the audio connection ⢠With an HDMI cable, video and audio si gnals can be t r ansfe rr ed in high quality ove r a single cable . About the video converter The video conve r ter ensu r es that all video sou r ces a r e out p ut th r ough all of the MONITOR VID EO OUT jacks. The only exce p tion is HDMI: since this r esolutio n cannot be downsam p led, you must conne ct you r monito r /TV to the r eceive r âÂÂs HDMI video out p uts when connecting this video sou r ce. 1 Types of cables and terminals Transferable audio signals Sound signal pr io r ity ï¬ HDMI HD audio Digital (Coaxial) Conventional digital audio Digital (O p tical) RCA (Analog) (Whit e/Red) Conventional analog audio Note 1 ⢠If the video signal does not a pp ea r on you r TV, t r y adjusting the r esolution settings on you r com p onent o r dis p lay. Note that some com p onents (such as video game units) have r esolutions that may not be conve r ted. In this case, t r y switching Digita l Video Conve r sion (in Setting the Video optio ns on p age 62) OFF . ⢠The signal in p ut r esolutions that can be conve r ted f r om the com p onent video in p ut fo r the HDMI out p ut a r e 480i/576 i, 480 p /576p , 720 p and 1080i. 1080 p signals cannot be conve r ted. ⢠Only signals with an in p ut r esolution of 480i/576i can be conve r ted f r om the com p onent video in p ut fo r the com p osite MONITOR OUT te r minals. SC-1525_UXJC B.book 22 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼ å¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂç«æÂÂæÂÂ¥ ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Connecting your equipment 03 23 En If seve r al video com p on ents a r e assigned to the same in p ut function (see The Input Setup menu on p age 40), the conve r ter gives pr io r ity to HDMI, com p onent, then com p osite (in that o r de r ). â¢F o r op ti mal video p e r for mance, THX r ecommends switching Digital Vi deo Conve r sion (in Setting the Video options on p age 62) OFF . About HDMI 1 The HDMI connection t r ansfer s uncom pr essed digital video, as well as almost eve r y kind of digital audio. This r eceive r inco rp o r a tes High-De finition Mu ltimedia Inte r face (HDMI î ) technology. This r eceive r su pp o r ts the functions desc r ibed below th r ough HDMI connec tions. 2 â¢D i g i t a l t r an sfer of uncom pr essed video (contents pr otected by HDCP (1080 p /24, 1080p /60, etc.)) â¢3 D s i g n a l t r ansfer 3 â¢D e e p Color signal tr ansf er 3 ⢠x.v.Colo r signal t r ansfe r 3 â¢A u d i o R e t u r n Channel 3 â¢I n p ut of multi-channel linear PCM d igital audio signals (192 kHz o r less) fo r up to 8 channels â¢I n p ut of the following digit al audio fo r mats: 4 â Dolby Digital, Dolby Digi tal Plus, DTS, High bit r ate audio (Dolby T r ueHD, DTS-HD Maste r Audi o, DTS- HD High Resolu tion Audio), DVD-Audio , CD, SACD (DSD signal), Video CD, Su p er VCD â¢S y n c h r onized op er ation with com p onents using the Control with HDMI function (see Contr ol with HDMI function on p age 57) HDMI, the HD MI logo an d High-De finition M ultimed ia Interface are trademarks or re gistered trademarks of H DMI Licensing, LLC in the United States and o ther countries. âÂÂx.v.Colorâ and x.v.Col or logo are trademarks o f Sony Corporation. VIDEO IN VIDEO MONITOR OUT COMPONENT VIDEO IN Y P B P R YP B P R COMPONENT VIDEO MONITOR OUT HDMI IN HDMI OUT High p ictu r e quality Te r minal fo r connection with sou r ce device Te r minal fo r connection with TV monito r Video signals can be out p ut This product incorporates copyright protection technology that is protected by U.S. patents and other intellectual property rights. Use of this copyright protection t echnology must be authorized by Rovi Corporation, and is intended for home and other limited viewing uses only unless othe rwise author ized by R ovi Corporation. Reverse engineering or disassembly is prohibited. Note 1 ⢠An HDMI connection can only be made with DVI-equi pp ed com p onents com patible with both DVI and High Bandwidth Digital Content P r otection (HDCP). If you choose to connect t o a DVI connecto r , you will need a se p ar ate ada p tor (DVI ï¤ HDMI) to do so. A DVI connection, howeve r , does not su pp o r t audio signals. Consult you r local audio deale r fo r mo r e info r mation. ⢠If you connect a com p onent that is n ot com p atible with HDCP, an HDCP ERRO R message is dis p layed on the f r ont p anel dis p lay. Some com p onents that a r e com p atible with HDCP still cause this message to be dis p layed, but so long as the r e is no pr oblem with dis p laying video this is not a malfunction. ⢠De p ending on the com p onent you have connected, using a DVI connection may r esult in un r eliable signal t r ansfer s. ⢠This r eceiver su pp o r ts SACD, Dolby Digital Plus, Dolby T r ueHD and DTS- HD Maste r Audio. To take advantage of these fo r mats, howeve r , make s u r e t hat the com p onent connected to th is r eceive r also su pp or ts the co rr esp onding for mat. 2⢠U s e a H i g h S p eed HDMI î cable. If an HDMI cable othe r than a High S p eed HDMI î cable is used, it may not wo r k pr op er ly. ⢠When an HDMI cable with a b uilt-in equalize r is connected, it may not o p er ate pr op er ly. 3 Signal t r ansfer is only p ossible when connected to a com p atible com p onent. 4⢠H D M I f o r mat digital audio tr ansmissions r eq ui r e a longe r time to be r ecognized. Due to this, inte rr u p tion in the audio may occu r when switching between audio fo r mats o r beginning p layback. ⢠Tu r ning on/off the device connected to this unit's HDMI OUT te r minal d u r ing p layback, or disconnecting/connecting the HDMI cable du r ing p layback, may cause noise o r inte rr up ted audio. SC-1525_UXJC B.book 23 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼ å¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂç«æÂÂæÂÂ¥ ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Connecting your equipment 03 24 En Connecting your TV and playback components Connecting using HDMI If you have an HDMI o r DVI (with HDCP) equi pp ed com p onent (Blu- r ay di sc p layer (BD), etc.), yo u can connect it to this r eceive r using a co mme r cially available HDMI ca ble. If the TV and p layba ck com p onents su pp o r t the Control with HDMI featu r e, the convenien t Control with HDMI functions can be used (se e Control with HDMI function on p age 57). ⢠When connecting to an HDMI/DVI-com p atible monit o r using the HDMI OUT 2 te r minal, switch the HDMI out p ut setting to HDMI OUT 2 o r HD MI OUT ALL . See Switching th e HDM I output on p age 65. â¢F o r inp ut comp onents, connecti ons othe r than HDMI connections a r e also p ossible (see Connecti ng your DVD player with no HD MI output on p age 25). ⢠If you want to listen to the sound of the TV ove r the r eceiver , connect the r eceiver and TV wi th audio cables. 1 RS-232C HDMI ASSIGNABLE COAXIAL COMPONENT VIDEO ASSIGNABLE OPTICAL ASSIGNABLE ASSIGNABLE MONITOR OUT ZONE 2 OUT IN Y CD-R/TAPE ANTENNA FM UNBAL 75 AM LOOP IN CD IN VIDEO MONITOR OUT OUT ZONE2 OUT ZONE3 OUT DVD IN TV/SAT IN VIDEO IN DVR/BDR PHONO IN OUT IN P R P B 1 IN BD IN 1 IN 2 IN 3 OUT 1 ( CONTROL ) OUT 2 1 4 ( DVD ) IN 2 ( DVR/BDR ) IN 3 ( VIDEO ) IN 1 ( DVD ) IN 1 ( TV/SAT ) IN 2 ( DVR/BDR ) IN OUT FRONT CENTER SURROUND SURR BA CK (Single) FH/FW 3 ( VIDEO ) IN 2 ( CD ) CONTROL EXTENSION IR 12 V TRIGGER IN IN IN OUT OUT 1 2 1 2 (OUTPUT 12 V TOTAL 150 mA MAX) SUBWOOFER IN 4 LAN ( 10/100 ) ( OUTPUT 5 V 100 mA MAX ) ADAPTER PORT PRE OUT ( OUTPUT 5 V 150 mA MAX ) XM IN SIRIUS IN SPEAKERS Class 2 Wiring SIGNAL GND FRONT CE N SUB W CAUTION: SPEAKER IMPEDANCE 6 é - 16 é . A T TENTION: ENCEINTE D'IMPEDANCE DE 6 é - 16 é . SURROUND BACK (Single) B R FRONT HEIGHT/WIDE/ LR L R L SURROUND SEE INSTRUCTION MANUAL SELECTABLE VOIR LE MODE D'EMPLOI SELECTABLE DIGITAL OUT COAXIAL OPTIC AL ANALOG RL AUDIO OUT HDMI IN HDMI OUT HDMI OUT Othe r HDMI/DVI- equi pp ed com p onent HDMI/DVI-com p atible Blu- r ay disc p layer HDMI/DVI-com p atible monito r Select one This connection is r equir ed in or der to listen to the sound of the TV ove r the r eceiver . 1 Note 1 When the TV and r ece ive r a r e connected by HDMI connections, if the TV su pp o r ts the HDMI Audio Retu r n Channel function, the sound of the TV is in p ut to the r eceiver via the HDMI OUT 1 te r minal, so the r e is no need to connect an audio cable. In this case, set TV Audio at HD MI Setup to via HDMI (see HDMI Setup on p age 57). SC-1525_UXJC B.book 24 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼ å¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂç«æÂÂæÂÂ¥ ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Connecting your equipment 03 25 En Connecting your D VD player wi th no HDMI ou tput This diag r am shows connections of a TV (w ith HDM I in p ut) and DVD p layer (o r othe r p layback com p onent with no HDMI out p ut) to the r eceiver . ⢠If you want to listen to the sou nd of the TV ove r the r eceiver , connect th e r eceiver and TV with audio cables ( p age 24). 1 ⢠If you use an o p tical digital audio cabl e, youâÂÂll need to tell the r eceiver which digital in p ut you connected the p layer to (see The Input Setup menu on p age 40). RS-232C HDMI ASSIGNABLE COAXIAL COMPONENT VIDEO ASSIGNABLE OPTICAL ASSIGNABLE ASSIGNABLE MONITOR OUT ZONE 2 OUT IN Y CD-R/TAPE ANTENNA FM UNBAL 75 AM LOOP IN CD IN VIDEO MONITOR OUT OUT ZONE2 OUT ZONE3 OUT DVD IN TV/SAT IN VIDEO IN DVR/BDR PHONO IN OUT IN P R P B 1 IN BD IN 1 IN 2 IN 3 OUT 1 ( CONTROL ) OUT 2 1 4 ( DVD ) IN 2 ( DVR/BDR ) IN 3 ( VIDEO ) IN 1 ( DVD ) IN 1 ( TV/SAT ) IN 2 ( DVR/ BDR ) IN OUT FRONT CENTER SURROUND SURR BA CK (Single) FH/FW 3 ( VIDEO ) IN 2 ( CD ) CONTROL EXTENSION IR 12 V TRIGGER IN IN IN OUT OUT 1 2 1 2 (OUTPUT 12 V TOTAL 150 mA MAX) SUBWOOFER IN 4 LAN ( 10/100 ) ( OUTPUT 5 V 100 mA MAX ) ADAPTER PORT PRE OUT ( OUTPUT 5 V 150 mA MAX ) XM IN SIRIUS IN SPEAKERS Class 2 Wiring SIGNAL GND FRONT CENTER SUBWOOFE R S CAUTION: SPEAKER IMPEDANCE 6 é - 16 é . A T TENTION: ENCEINTE D'IMPEDANCE DE 6 é - 16 é . SURROUND BACK (Single) B R FRONT HEIGHT/WIDE/ LR L R L SURROUND SEE INSTRUCTION MANUAL SELECTABLE VOIR LE MODE D'EMPLOI SELECTABLE HDMI IN ANALOG R AUDIO OUT VIDEO OUT VIDEO Y P B P R COMPONENT VIDEO OUT DIGITAL OUT COAXIAL OPTICAL L DVD p layer , etc. HDMI/DVI-com p atible monito r Select one Select one Note 1 When the TV and r eceiver a r e c o n n ec t e d b y H D M I c on n e c t i o n s , i f t h e T V s u pp or ts the HDMI Audio Retu r n Channel function, the sound of the TV is in p ut to the r eceiver via the HDMI OUT 1 te r minal, so the r e is no need to connect an audio cable. In this case, set TV Audio at HDMI Setup to via HDMI (see HDMI Setup on p age 57). SC-1525_UXJC B.book 25 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼ å¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂç«æÂÂæÂÂ¥ ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Connecting your equipment 03 26 En Connecting your TV with no HDMI input This diag r am shows connections of a TV (with no HDMI in p ut) and DVD p layer (o r othe r p la yback com p on ent) to th e r eceiver . ⢠With these connections, the p ictur e is not outp ut to the TV even if the DVD p layer i s c o n n e c t e d w i t h a n H D M I c a b l e . Connect the DVD p lay er âÂÂs video signals using a com posite o r com p onent co r d. ⢠Connect using an HDMI cable to listen to HD audio on the r eceiver . Do not use an HDMI cable to in p ut video signals. De p ending on the video com p onent, it may not be p ossible to outp ut signals connected by HDMI and othe r methods simultaneously, and it may be necessa r y to make out p ut settings. Please r efer to the o pe r ating inst r uctions su pp lied with you r com p onent fo r mo r e info r mation. ⢠If you want to listen to the sound of the TV ove r the r eceiver , connect the r eceiver and TV wi th audio cables ( p age 24). â¢I f y o u u s e a n o p tical digi tal audio cab le, youâÂÂll need to tell the r eceiver which dig ital in p u t you connected the p layer to (see The Input Setup menu on p age 40). RS-232C HDMI ASSIGNABLE COAXIAL COMPONENT VIDEO ASSIGNABLE OPTICAL ASSIGNABLE ASSIGNABLE MONITOR OUT ZONE 2 OUT IN Y CD-R/TAPE ANTENNA FM UNBAL 75 AM LOOP IN CD IN VIDEO MONITOR OUT OUT ZONE2 OUT ZONE3 OUT DVD IN TV/SAT IN VIDEO IN DVR/BDR PHONO IN OUT IN P R P B 1 IN BD IN 1 IN 2 IN 3 OUT 1 ( CONTROL ) OUT 2 1 4 ( DVD ) IN 2 ( DVR/BDR ) IN 3 ( VIDEO ) IN 1 ( DVD ) IN 1 ( TV/SAT ) IN 2 ( DVR/BDR ) IN OUT FRONT CENTER SURROUND SURR BACK (Single) FH/FW 3 ( VIDEO ) IN 2 ( CD ) CONTROL EXTENSION IR 12 V TRIGGER IN IN IN OUT OUT 1 2 1 2 (OUTPUT 12 V TOTAL 150 mA MAX) SUBWOOFER IN 4 LAN ( 10/100 ) ( OUTPUT 5 V 100 mA MAX ) ADAPTER PORT PRE OUT ( OUTPUT 5 V 150 mA MAX ) XM IN SIRIUS IN SPEAKERS Class 2 Wiring SIGNAL GND FRONT CENTER SUBWOOFE R S CAUTION: SPEAKER IMPEDANCE 6 é - 16 é . A T TENTION: ENCEINTE D'IMPEDANCE DE 6 é - 16 é . SURROUND BACK (Single) B R FRONT HEIGHT/WIDE/ LR L R L SURROUND SEE INSTRUCTION MANUAL SELECTABLE VOIR LE MODE D'EMPLOI SELECTABLE ANALOG R AUDIO OUT VIDEO IN Y P B P R COMPONENT VIDEO IN VIDEO OUT VIDEO VIDEO Y P B P R COMPONENT VIDEO OUT DIGITAL OUT COAXIAL OPTICAL HDMI OUT L DVD p layer , etc. TV Select one Select on e Select one SC-1525_UXJC B.book 26 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼ å¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂç«æÂÂæÂÂ¥ ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Connecting your equipment 03 27 En Connecting an HDD/DVD recorder, BD recorder and other video sources This r eceive r has two sets of audio/video in p uts and out p uts sui table fo r connecting analog o r digital video devices, including HDD/DVD r ecor de r s and BD r ecor der s. When you set u p the r eceiver youâÂÂll need to tell the r eceiver which in p ut you connected the r ecor der to (see also The Input Setup menu on p age 40). ⢠In o r der to r ecor d, you must connect the analog audio cables (the digital connection is fo r p layback only) ( p age 64). â¢I f y o u r HDD/DVD r ecor der , BD r ecor der , etc., is equi pp ed with an HDMI out p ut te r minal, we r ecommend connecting it to the r eceiver âÂÂs HDMI IN te r minal. When doing so, also connect the r eceive r an d TV by HDMI (see Connec ting using HDMI on p age 24). RS-232C HDMI ASSIGNABLE COAXIAL COMPONENT VIDEO ASSIGNABLE OPTICAL ASSIGNABLE ASSIGNABLE MONITOR OUT ZONE 2 OUT IN Y CD-R/TAPE ANTENNA FM UNBAL 75 AM LOOP IN CD IN VIDEO MONITOR OUT OUT ZONE2 OUT ZONE3 OUT DVD IN TV/SAT IN VIDEO IN DVR/BDR PHONO IN OUT IN P R P B 1 IN BD IN 1 IN 2 IN 3 OUT 1 ( CONTROL ) OUT 2 1 4 ( DVD ) IN 2 ( DVR/BDR ) IN 3 ( VIDEO ) IN 1 ( DVD ) IN 1 ( TV/SAT ) IN 2 ( DVR/BDR ) IN OUT FRONT CENTER SURROUND SURR BA CK (Single) FH/FW 3 ( VIDEO ) IN 2 ( CD ) CONTROL EXTENSION IR 12 V TRIGGER IN IN IN OUT OUT 1 2 1 2 (OUTPUT 12 V TOTAL 150 mA MAX) SUBWOOFER IN 4 LAN ( 10/100 ) ( OUTPUT 5 V 100 mA MAX ) ADAPTER PORT PRE OUT ( OUTPUT 5 V 150 mA MAX ) XM IN SIRIUS IN SPEAKERS Class 2 Wiring SIGNAL GND FRONT CENTER SUBWOOFER S CAUTION: SPEAKER IMPEDANCE 6 é - 16 é . A T TENTION: ENCEINTE D'IMPEDANCE DE 6 é - 16 é . SURROUND BACK (Single) B R FRONT HEIGHT/WIDE/ LR L R L SURROUND SEE INSTRUCTION MANUAL SELECTABLE VOIR LE MODE D'EMPLOI SELECTABLE DIGITAL OUT COAXIAL OPTICAL ANALOG RL ANALOG R L AUDIO OUT AUDIO IN VIDEO OUT VIDEO VIDEO VIDEO IN HDD/DVD r eco r de r , BD reco r de r , etc. Select one SC-1525_UXJC B.book 27 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼ å¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂç«æÂÂæÂÂ¥ ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Connecting your equipment 03 28 En Connecting a satelli te/cable receiver or other se t-top box Satellite an d cable r eceiver s, and te rr est r ial dig ital TV tu ne r s a r e all exam p les of so-called âÂÂset-to p boxesâÂÂ. When you set u p the r eceiver youâÂÂll need to tell the r eceiver which in p ut you connected th e set-to p box to (see The Input Setup menu on p age 40). â¢I f y o u r set-top box is equi pp ed with an HD MI outp ut te r minal , we r ecommend connecting it to the r eceiver âÂÂs HDMI IN ter minal. When doing so, also connect the r eceiver and TV by HDMI (see Connecting using HDMI on p age 24). RS-232C HDMI ASSIGNABLE COAXIAL COMPONENT VIDEO ASSIGNABLE OPTICAL ASSIGNABLE ASSIGNABLE MONITOR OUT ZONE 2 OUT IN Y CD-R/TAPE ANTENNA FM UNBAL 75 AM LOOP IN CD IN VIDEO MONITOR OUT OUT ZONE2 OUT ZONE3 OUT DVD IN TV/SAT IN VIDEO IN DVR/BDR PHONO IN OUT IN P R P B 1 IN BD IN 1 IN 2 IN 3 OUT 1 ( CONTROL ) OUT 2 1 4 ( DVD ) IN 2 ( DVR/BDR ) IN 3 ( VIDEO ) IN 1 ( DVD ) IN 1 ( TV/SAT ) IN 2 ( DVR/BDR ) IN OUT FRONT CENTER SURROUND SURR BA CK (Single) FH/FW 3 ( VIDEO ) IN 2 ( CD ) CONTROL EXTENSION IR 12 V TRIGGER IN IN IN OUT OUT 1 2 1 2 (OUTPUT 12 V TOTAL 150 mA MAX) SUBWOOFER IN 4 LAN ( 10/100 ) ( OUTPUT 5 V 100 mA MAX ) ADAPTER PORT PRE OUT ( OUTPUT 5 V 150 mA MAX ) XM IN SIRIUS IN SPEAKERS Class 2 Wiring SIGNAL GND FRONT CENTER SUBWOOFER S U CAUTION: SPEAKER IMPEDANCE 6 é - 16 é . A T TENTION: ENCEINTE D'IMPEDANCE DE 6 é - 16 é . SURROUND BACK (Single) B R FRONT HEIGHT/WIDE/ LR L R L SURROUND SEE INSTRUCTION MANUAL SELECTABLE VOIR LE MODE D'EMPLOI SELECTABLE VIDEO OUT VIDEO ANALOG R AUDIO OUT DIGITAL OUT COAXIAL OPTICAL L STB Select one SC-1525_UXJC B.book 28 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼ å¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂç«æÂÂæÂÂ¥ ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Connecting your equipment 03 29 En Connecting the multichannel analog inputs Fo r DVD Audio and SACD p layback, you r DVD p layer may have 5.1, 6.1 o r 7.1 channel analog out p uts (de pending on whethe r you r p layer su pp or ts su rr o u n d b a c k c h a n n e l s ) . M a k e s u r e that the p lay er is set to outp u t multichannel ana log audio. â¢I f t h e r e is a single su rr ound bac k outp ut, connect it to the SURROUND BACK L jac k on this r eceiver . ⢠To use a 5.1-channel s p eaker set, use the su rr ound s p eake r s fo r the su rr ound channel, not the su rr ound back channel. ⢠The audio sign al in p ut to MULT I CH IN cannot be downmixed. COAXIAL OPTICAL ASSIGNABLE ASSIGNABLE CD-R/T APE FM UNBAL 75 IN CD IN VIDEO MONITOR OUT OUT ZONE2 OUT ZONE3 OUT DVD IN TV/SA T IN VIDEO IN DVR/BDR PHONO IN OUT IN IN 1 IN 2 IN 3 OUT 1 ( CONTROL ) OUT 2 IN 1 ( DVD ) IN 1 ( TV/SA T ) IN 2 ( DVR/BDR ) IN OUT FRONT CENTER SURROUND SURR BACK (Single) FH/FW 3 ( VIDEO ) IN 2 ( CD ) IR 12 V TRIGGER IN IN OUT 1 2 1 2 (OUTPUT 12 V TOTAL 150 mA MAX) SUBWOOFER IN 4 LAN ( 10/100 ) ( OUTPUT 5 V 100 mA MAX ) ADAPTER PORT PRE OUT XM IN SIRIUS IN SPEAKERS Class 2 Wiring MULTI CH IN SIGNAL GND FRONT CENTER SUBWOOFER SURROUND SURR BACK L R CAUTION: SPEAKER IMPEDANCE 6 é - 16 é . A T TENTION: ENCEINTE D'IMPEDANCE DE 6 é - 16 é . SURROUND BA CK (Single) B R FRONT HEIGHT/WIDE/ LR L R L R L SURROUND FRONT CENTER SEE INSTRUCTION MANUAL SELECT ABLE VOIR LE MODE D'EMPLOI SELECT ABLE RL FRONT OUTPUT RL SURROUND OUTPUT CENTER OUTPUT SUBWOOFER OUTPUT RL SURROUND BACK OUTPUT VIDEO OUT VIDEO DVD p laye r , etc. SC-1525_UXJC B.book 29 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼ å¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂç«æÂÂæÂÂ¥ ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Connecting your equipment 03 30 En Connecting other audio components This r eceive r has both digital and analog in p ut s, allowing you to connect audio c om p onents fo r p layback. When you set u p the r eceiver youâÂÂll n eed to tell the r eceive r which in p ut you connected the com p onent to (see also The Input Setup menu on p age 40). â¢I f y o u â r e connectin g a r ecor der , connect the analog audio out p ut s to the analog au dio in p uts on the r ecor der . ⢠You canâÂÂt hea r HDMI audio th r ough this r eceiver âÂÂs digital o ut jack. Turntables only: â¢I f y o u r tur ntable has a gr ounding wir e, secur e it to the g r ound te r minal on this r eceive r. â¢I f y o u r tur ntable has line-level o utp uts (i.e., it has a built-in p hono pr e-am p ), connect i t to the CD in p uts instead. About the WM A9 Pro dec oder This unit ha s an on-boa r d Windows Media⢠Audio 9 P r ofessional 1 (WMA9 P r o) decode r , so it is p ossible to p layback WMA9 Pr o-encoded audio using HDMI, coaxial o r o p tica l digital connection when connected to a WMA9 P r o-com p atible p laye r . Howeve r , the connected DVD p layer , set-top b o x , e t c . m u s t b e a b l e t o o u t p ut WMA9 Pr o fo r mat audio signals th r ough a coaxial o r o p tical digital out p ut. COAXIAL OPTICAL ASSIGNABLE ASSIGNABLE CD-R/TAPE IN CD IN VIDEO MONITOR OUT OUT TV/SAT IN VIDEO IN DVR/BDR PHONO IN OUT IN IN 3 OUT 1 ( CONTROL ) OUT 2 IN 1 ( DVD ) IN 1 ( TV/SAT ) IN 2 ( DVR/BDR ) IN OUT FRONT CENTER SURROUND SURR BA CK (Single) FH/FW 3 ( VIDEO ) IN 2 ( CD ) 12 V TRIGGER 1 2 (OUTPUT 12 V TOTAL 150 mA MAX) SUBWOOFER IN 4 LAN ( 10/100 ) ( OUTPUT 5 V 100 mA MAX ) ADAPTER PORT PRE OUT XM IN SIRIUS IN SPEAKERS Class 2 Wiring SIGNAL GND FRONT CENTER SUBWOOFER SURROUND CAUTION: SPEAKER IMPEDANCE 6 é - 16 é . A T TENTION: ENCEINTE D'IMPEDANCE DE 6 é - 16 é . SURROUND BACK (Single) B R FRONT HEIGHT/WIDE/ LR L R L R SURROUND SEE INSTRUCTION MANUAL SELECTABLE VOIR LE MODE D'EMPLOI SELECTABLE DIGITAL OUT COAXIAL OPTIC AL ANALOG RL AUDIO OUT ANALOG RL AUDIO IN DIGITAL IN OPTICAL CD-R, MD, DAT, etc. Select one Select one Tu r ntable Note 1⢠Windo ws Media and the Windows logo are trademarks or re gistered trademarks of Microso ft Corporation in the United States an d/or other countries. ⢠With WMA9 P r o, sound pr oblems may occu r de p ending on your com p uter system. N ote th at WM A9 P r o 96 kHz sou r ces will be downsam p led to 48 kHz. SC-1525_UXJC B.book 30 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼ å¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂç«æÂÂæÂÂ¥ ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Connecting your equipment 03 31 En Connecting additional amplifiers This r eceive r has mo r e than enough p owe r fo r any home use, but itâÂÂs p ossible to add additional am p lifier s to eve r y channel of you r system using the pr e-outs . Make the connections shown below to ad d am p lifier s to p ower you r s p eake r s. ⢠You can use the additional a m p lifier on the su rr ound back channel pr e-outs fo r a single s p eaker as well. In this case p lug the am p lif ier into the left ( L (Single) ) te r minal only. â¢T h e s o u n d f r om the su rr ound back ter minals will de p end on how you have configu r ed the Speaker system settin g on p age 85. â¢T o h e a r sound only fr om the pr e-outs, switch the s p eake r system to OFF , o r si m p ly disc onnect any s p eake r s that a r e conne cted di r ectly to the r eceive r. If youâ r e not using a subwoofe r , change the f r ont s p eaker setting (see Speaker Setting on p age 85) to LARGE . Connecting AM/FM antennas Connect the AM loo p ante nna and the FM wi r e an tenna as shown below. To im pr ove r ecep tion and sound qual ity, connect exte r nal antennas (see Connecting external antennas on p age 32). 1 Pull off t he protective shields of both A M antenna wires. 2 Push open the tabs, then insert one wire fully into each terminal, then rel ease the tabs to secure the AM antenna wires. 3 Fix the AM loop antenn a to the attached stand. To fix the stand to the antenna, bend in the di r ection indicated by the a rr ow ( fig. a ) then cli p the loo p onto the stand ( fig. b ). â¢I f y o u p lan to mount the AM antenna to a wall o r othe r su r face, secur e th e stand with sc r ews ( fig. c ) befo r e cli pp ing the lo o p to the sta nd. Make su r e the r ecep tion is clear . 4 Place the AM antenna on a flat surface and in a direction giving the best reception. 5 Connect the FM wire antenna into the FM antenna socket. Fo r best r esults, extend the FM antenna fully and fix to a wall o r doo r f r ame. DonâÂÂt d r ap e loosely o r leave coiled u p . A L OPTICAL ASSIGNABLE ASSIGNABLE IN 1 ( TV/SAT ) IN 2 ( DVR/BDR ) IN OU T FRONT CENTER SURROUND SURR BACK (Single) FH/FW 3 ( VIDEO ) IN 2 ( CD ) IN 3 ( CD-R ) SUBWOOFER / 100 ) ( OUTPUT 5 V 100 mA MAX ) ADAPTER PORT PRE OUT XM IN FRONT CEN T SUBW O T ION: R IMPEDANCE 6 é - 16 é . N TION: E D'IMPEDANCE DE 6 é - 16 é . SURROUND BACK (Single) LR L SURROUND R L ANALOG INPUT R L ANALOG INPUT R L ANALOG INPUT ANALOG INPUT ANALOG INPUT R L ANALOG INPUT Powe r ed subwoofe r F r ont channel am p lifi e r Cente r channel am p lifie r (mono) Su rr ound channel am p lifier Su rr ound back channel am p lifier F r ont heig ht o r F r ont wide channel am p lifier ANTENNA FM UNBAL 75 AM LOOP 3 1 4 fig. a fig. b fig. c 5 2 SC-1525_UXJC B.book 31 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼ å¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂç«æÂÂæÂÂ¥ ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Connecting your equipment 03 32 En Connecting ex ternal antenna s To im pr ove FM r ecep tion, connect an exte r nal FM antenna to FM UNBAL 75 é . To im pr ove AM r ecep tion, connect a 5 m to 6 m (16 ft. to 20 ft.) length of vinyl-coated wi r e to the AM LOOP te r minals without disconnecting the su pp lied AM loo p antenn a. Fo r the best p ossible r ece p tion, sus p end ho r izontally outdoo r s. MULTI-ZONE setup This r eceiver can p ower up to thr ee i ndep endent systems in se p ar ate r ooms after yo u have made the pr o p e r MULTI- ZONE connections. Diffe r ent sou r ces ca n be p laying in th r ee zones at the same time o r , de p ending on you r needs, the same sou r ce can also be us ed. The main a nd sub zones have inde p endent p ower (the main zone p ower can be off while one (o r both) of the sub zones is on) and the sub zones can be cont r olled by the r emote or fr ont p anel contr ols. Making MULTI- ZONE connecti ons It is p ossible to make th ese connections if you h ave a se p ar ate TV and s p eake r s fo r you r pr ima r y ( ZONE 2 ) s ub zone, and a se p ar ate TV an d a se p ar ate am p lifier (and s p eake r s) fo r you r seconda r y ( ZONE 3 ) sub zone. You will also need a se p ar ate a m p lifier if you a r e not using the MULTI-ZONE setup u sing speaker terminals (ZON E 2) on p age 33 for your pr imar y sub zo ne. The r e a r e two pr ima r y sub zone setu p s p ossible with this system. Choose whicheve r wo r ks best fo r you. MULTI-ZONE listening options The following table shows the signals that can be out p ut to ZONE 2 and ZONE 3 1 : Basic MULTI-ZONE setup (ZONE 2) ⢠Connect a separate amplifier to the AUDIO ZONE 2 OUT jacks and a TV monitor to the VIDEO ZO NE 2 OUT 2 jack, both on this receiver. You should have a p air of s p eaker s attached to the sub zone am p lifi er as shown in the following illust r ation. ANTENNA FM UNBAL 75 AM LOOP 75 é coaxial cable ANTENNA FM UNBAL 75 AM LOOP Outdoo r antenn a Indoo r antenna (vinyl-coated wi r e) 5 m to 6 m (16 ft. to 20 ft.) Sub Zone Input functions available ZONE 2 DVD, TV/SAT, DVR/ BDR, VIDEO, INTERNET RADIO, iPod/USB, XM RADIO, CD, CD-R/TAPE, TUNER, AD APTER PO RT, SIRIU S (Out p uts analog au dio, com p osite vide o and com p onent video.) ZONE 3 Same as ZONE 2 above. (Out p uts analog audio and com p osi te video.) Note 1F o r the INTERNET RADIO, XM RADIO, SIRIUS and iPod/USB inp uts, it is not p ossible use the same in p ut in ZONE 2 and ZONE 3 simultaneously. 2⢠COMPONENT VI DEO ZONE 2 OUT can be used to out p ut c lea r images. ⢠The GUI sc r een is not dis p layed if only the COMPONENT VIDEO ZONE 2 OUT jack is co nnected. ⢠The v ideo c onve r t function does not wo r k fo r ZONE 2. Connect the com p osite video and com p onent video to the same ty p es of jacks for the in p uts and out p uts. RS-232C HDMI ASSIGNABLE COMPONENT VIDEO ASSIGNABLE MONITOR OUT ZONE 2 OUT IN Y ANTENNA FM UNBAL 75 AM LOOP ZONE2 OUT ZONE3 OUT D P R P B 1 IN BD IN 1 IN 2 1 4 ( DVD ) IN 2 ( DVR/BDR ) IN 3 ( VIDEO ) CONTROL EXTENSION IR IN IN IN OUT OUT 1 2 ( OUTPUT 5 V 150 mA MAX ) RL AUDIO IN VIDEO IN Main zone Sub zone ( ZONE 2 ) SC-1525_UXJC B.book 32 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼ å¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂç«æÂÂæÂÂ¥ ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Connecting your equipment 03 33 En MULTI-ZONE setup using speaker terminals (ZONE 2) You must select ZONE 2 in Speaker sy stem setting on p age 85 to use this setup . ⢠Connect a TV monitor to the VIDEO ZONE 2 OUT jacks on this receiver. 1 You should have a p air of s p eaker s attached to the su rr ound back s p eake r te r minals as shown belo w. Secondary MULTI-ZONE setup (ZONE 3) ⢠Connect a separate amplifier to the AUDIO ZONE 3 OUT jacks and a TV mo nitor to th e VIDEO ZONE 3 OUT jack, both on this recei ver. You should have a p air of s p eaker s attached to the sub zone am p lifie r as shown in the followin g illust r atio n. Connecting to the network thr ough LAN interface By connecting this r eceiver to the netwo r k via the LAN te r minal, you can listen to Inte r net r adio stations. 2 Connect the LAN te r minal o n this r eceiver to the LAN te r minal o n you r r outer (with or with out th e built-in D HCP se r ve r functi on) with a s t r aight LAN cable (CAT 5 o r highe r ). Tu r n on the DHCP se r ve r f u nc t i o n o f y o u r r oute r . In case you r r oute r does not have the built-in DHCP se r ve r function, it is necessa r y to set u p the netwo r k manually. Fo r details, see Network Setup menu on p age 87. LAN terminal specification s LAN te r minal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E the r net jack 10BASE-T/100BASE-TX Note 1⢠COMPONENT VIDEO ZONE 2 OUT can be used to out p ut clea r images. ⢠The GUI sc r een is not d is p layed if only the COMPONENT VIDEO ZONE 2 OUT jack is connected . ⢠The video conve r t function does not wo r k fo r ZONE 2. Connect the com p osite video and com p onent video to the same ty p es of jacks fo r the in p uts and out p uts. ENT VIDEO NABLE MONITOR OUT ZONE 2 OUT IN ANTENNA FM UNBAL 75 AM LOOP ZONE2 OUT ZONE3 OUT DVD IN P R P B 1 IN BD IN 1 IN 2 ( DVD ) IN 2 ( DVR/BDR ) IN 3 ( VIDEO ) CONTROL IR 1 T IN IN IN OUT OUT 1 2 1 2 ( 1 T 1 COAXIAL OPTICAL ASSIGNABLE ASSIGNABLE CD-R/TAPE IN CD IN DEO OUT OUT 2 IN 1 ( DVD ) IN 1 ( TV/SAT ) IN 2 ( DVR/ BDR ) IN OUT FRONT CENTER SURROUND SURR BACK (Single) FH/FW 3 ( VIDEO ) IN 2 ( CD ) SUBWOOFER LAN ( 10/100 ) ( OUTPUT 5 V 100 mA MAX ) ADAPTER P PRE OU XM IN SIRIUS IN L CAUTION: SPEAKER IMPEDANCE 6 é - 16 é . A T TENTION: ENCEINTE D'IMPEDANCE DE 6 é - 16 é . SURROUND BACK (Single) B HT/WIDE/ L RL R SU VIDEO IN R L Main zone Sub zone ( ZONE 2 ) RS-232C HDMI ASSIGNABLE COMPONENT VIDEO ASSIGNABLE MONITOR OUT ZONE 2 OUT IN Y ANTENNA FM UNBAL 75 AM LOOP ZONE2 OUT ZONE3 OUT DVD IN TV / I P R P B 1 IN BD IN 1 IN 2 I N 3 1 4 ( DVD ) IN 2 ( DVR/BDR ) IN 3 ( VIDEO ) CONTROL EXTENSION IR 12 V TRI G IN IN IN OUT OUT 1 2 1 2 (OU T 12 V TOT A 150 m ( OUTPUT 5 V 150 mA MAX ) RL AUDIO IN VIDEO IN Main zone Sub zone ( ZONE 3 ) 2 T o listen to Inte r net r adio stations, you must sign a cont r act with an ISP (Inte r net Se r vice P r ovider ) befo r ehand. COAXIAL OPTICAL ASSIGNABLE ASSIGNABLE CD-R/TAPE IN CD IN VIDEO MONITOR OUT OUT DVR/BDR PHONO IN OUT IN OUT 1 ( CONTROL ) OUT 2 IN 1 ( DVD ) IN 1 ( TV/SAT ) IN 2 ( DVR/BDR ) FRONT CENTER SURROUND IN 2 ( CD ) SUBWOOFER LAN ( 10/100 ) XM IN SIRIUS IN K ERS W iring SIGNAL GND SURROUND BACK (Singl e B R FRONT HEIGHT/WIDE/ LR L T RUCTION L T ABLE MODE O I T ABLE WAN 321 LAN LAN cable (sold se p ar ately) to LAN p or t Route r Modem Inte r net PC SC-1525_UXJC B.book 33 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼ å¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂç«æÂÂæÂÂ¥ ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Connecting your equipment 03 34 En Connecting Optional Bluetooth î ADAPTER When the Blueto oth ADAPTER (Pion ee r Model No. AS- BT100) 1 is connected to this r eceiver , a pr oduct equi pp ed with Bluetooth wi r eless technology ( p or table cell p hone, digital music p layer , etc .) can be used to listen to music wi r elessly. 2 ⢠Switch the receiver into st andby and connect Bluetooth ADAPTER to the ADAPTER PORT . â¢F o r instr uctions on p laying the Bluetooth wir eless technology device, see Pairing the Bluetooth ADAPTER and Bluetooth wire less technology device on p age 51. Important ⢠Do not move the r ece iver with the Bluetooth ADAPTER connected. Doing so could cau se damage o r faulty contact. Connecting an HDMI-equipped component to the fron t panel input Connecting an XM Radio tuner Afte r p ur chasing an XM Mini-Tune r and Home Dock (both sold se p ar ately), you will also need to activate the XM Radio se r vice to begin r eceiving b r oadc asts. â¢F o r ins tr uctions on p laying the XM Radio, see Listening to XM Radi o on p age 47. Connecting a SiriusConnect⢠tuner To r eceive SIRIUS Satellite Radio b r oadcasts, you will need to activate you r Si r iusConnec t⢠tune r . You will also need to co nnect the antenna a nd AC ada p te r to the Si r iusConnect⢠tune r . Fo r inst r uctions on p la ying the SIRIUS Radio, see Listening to SIRIUS Radio on p age 48. Note 1T h e Bluetooth ADAPTER (AS- BT100) is sold se p ar ately. 2⢠T h e Bluetooth wi r eless technology enabled device must su pp o r t A2DP pr ofiles. ⢠Pionee r does not gua r antee pr op er connection and o p er ation of this unit with all Blue tooth wi r eless technology enabled devices. COAXIAL OPTICAL ASSIGNABLE ASSIGNABLE CD-R/TAPE A C IN CD IN VIDEO OUT OUT 2 IN 1 ( DVD ) IN 1 ( TV/SAT ) IN 2 ( DVR/BDR ) IN OUT FRONT CENTER SURROUND SURR BACK (Single) FH/FW 3 ( VIDEO ) IN 2 ( CD ) SUBWOOFER LAN ( 10/100 ) ( OUTPUT 5 V 100 mA MAX ) ADAPTER PORT PRE OUT XM IN SIRIUS IN MULTI CH IN G NAL GND FRONT CENTER SUBWOOFER SURROUND SURR BACK L R Bluetooth î AD APTER (sold se p ar ately) PHONES SPEAKERS CONTROL MULTI-ZONE ON/OFF MCACC SETUP MIC TUNER EDIT USB HDMI 5 VIDEO CAMERA iPod iPhone AUTO SURR/ALC/ STREAM DIRECT HOME THX STANDARD SURROUND ADVANCED SURROUND STEREO BAND Video came r a, etc. COAXIAL OPTICAL ASSIGNABLE ASSIGNABLE - R/TAPE AC IN IN IN 1 ( DVD ) IN 1 ( TV/SAT ) IN 2 ( DVR/BDR ) IN OUT FRONT CENTER SURROUND SURR BACK (Single) FH/FW 3 ( VIDEO ) IN 2 ( CD ) SUBWOOFER L AN ( 10/100 ) ( OUTPUT 5 V 100 mA MAX ) ADAPTER PORT PRE OUT XM IN MULTI CH IN FRONT CENTER SUBWOOFER SURROUND SURR BACK L R SATELLiTE RADiO SATELLiTE RADiO XM Mini-Tune r and Home Dock with antenna COAXIAL OPTICAL ASSIGNABLE ASSIGNABLE CD-R/TAPE IN CD IN VIDEO MONITOR OUT OUT DVR/BDR PHONO IN TI N OUT 1 ( CONTROL ) OUT 2 IN 1 ( DVD ) IN 1 ( TV/SAT ) IN 2 ( DVR/ BDR ) IN OUT FRONT CENTER SURROUND SURR BACK (Single) FH/FW 3 ( VIDEO ) IN 2 ( CD ) SUBWOOFER LAN ( 10/100 ) ( OUTPUT 5 V 100 mA MAX ) ADAPTER PORT PRE OUT XM IN SIRIUS IN MULTI CH IN SIGNAL GND FRONT CENTER SUBWOOFER SURROUND SURR BACK L R SIRIUS H SIRIUS H Antenna Si r iusConnect⢠HOME tune r AC ada p ter SC-1525_UXJC B.book 34 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼ å¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂç«æÂÂæÂÂ¥ ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Connecting your equipment 03 35 En Connecting an iPod This r eceive r has a dedicated iPod ter minal that wi ll allow you to cont r ol p laybac k of audio content f r om you r iPod using the cont r ols of this r eceiver . ⢠Switch the receiver into standby then use the supplied iPod cable to connect your iPod to th e iPod/ iPhone/USB terminal on th e front panel of this receiver. â¢I t i s a l s o p ossible to connect usin g the cable included with the iPod , but in this ca se it is not p ossible to view p ictur es vi a the r eceiver . â¢F o r the ca ble connection, also r efer to the op er ating inst r uctions fo r you r iPod. â¢F o r instr uc tions on p laying the iPod, see Playing an iPod on p age 43. Connecting a USB device It is p ossible to p lay audi o and p hoto files by co nnecting USB devices to this r eceiver . It is also possible to connect a USB keyboa r d (US-in te r natio nal layout) to the r eceiver to ente r text in the follow ing GUI sc r eens. ⢠Change the in p ut name in th e Input Setup menu ( p age 40). ⢠Add names to r adio station pr esets ( p age 46). â¢E n t e r Inter net r adio station URLs ( p age 49) . ⢠Switch the receiver into standby then connect your USB device to the USB t erminal on the front panel of this receiver. 1 â¢F o r instr uctions on p laying the USB device, see Playing a USB devi ce on p age 44. Connecting a USB de vice for Advanced MCACC outp ut When using Full Auto MC ACC ( p age 38), Auto MCACC ( p age 75) o r Acoust ic Calib r ation EQ P r ofessiona l ( p age 79) to calib r ate the r eve r b cha r acte r istics of you r listening r oom, the 3D g r ap hs of the r eve r b cha r acte r is tics in you r listening r oom (be fo r e and afte r calib r ation) can be checked on a co m p uter sc r een. The va r ious MCACC p ar ameter s can also be checked on the com p uter . MCACC data and p ar ameter s a r e t r ansfe rr ed f r om this r eceive r to a USB device and by connecting the USB device to a com p uter , the data is im p or ted via the MCACC softwa r e in the com p uter . The MCACC softwa r e to out p ut the r esults is available f r om the su ppo r t a r ea o f the Pionee r website (htt p :// www. p ionee r elect r onics.com/ PUSA/ Home E nte r tainment Custom Install). Inst r uctions fo r using the softwa r e a r e also availa ble he r e. If you have any questions r egar ding, p lease contact the Custome r Su pp o r t Division of Pio nee r. See the docume ntation pr ovided with th e Advanced MC ACC PC Dis p lay A pp lica tion Softwa r e fo r mo r e info r mati on. â¢F o r the USB device connectio n and op er ations, see Output MCACC data on p age 82 2 . PHONES SPEAKERS CONTROL MULTI-ZONE ON/OFF MCACC SETUP MIC TUNER EDIT USB HDMI 5 VIDEO CAMERA iPod iPhone AUTO SURR/ALC/ STREAM DIRECT HOME THX STANDARD SURROUND ADVANCED SURROUND STEREO BAND MENU ï¤ïÂÂ¥ ï° ï¯ iPod iPod cable (su pp lied) Note 1T h i s r eceiver does not su pp or t a USB hub. 2T h e v a r ious p ar amete r s and the r eve r b char acter istics data used for disp lay on the comp uter a r e not clear ed when the p ower is tur ned off (see Output MCACC data on p age 82). PHONES SPEAKERS CONTROL MULTI-ZONE ON/OFF MCACC SETUP MIC TUNER EDIT USB HDMI 5 VIDEO CAMERA iPod iPhone AUTO SURR/ALC/ STREAM DIRECT HOME THX STANDARD SURROUND ADVANCED SURROUND STEREO BAND USB mass sto r age device USB keyboa r d SC-1525_UXJC B.book 35 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼ å¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂç«æÂÂæÂÂ¥ ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Connecting your equipment 03 36 En Connecting an IR receiver If you kee p you r ste r eo com p onents in a closed cabinet o r shelving unit, o r you wish to use the sub zone r emote cont r ol i n anothe r zone, you can use an o p ti onal IR r eceiver (such as a Niles or Xante ch unit) to cont r ol your system instead of the r emote senso r on the f r ont p anel of this r eceive r . 1 1 Connect the IR receiver sensor to the IR IN jack on the rear of this receiver. 2 Connect the IR IN jack of another component to the IR OUT jack on the r ear of this recei ver to link it to the IR receiver. Please see the manual su pp lied with you r IR r eceiver fo r the ty p e of cable necessa r y fo r the connection. ⢠If yo u want to link a Pionee r com p onent to the IR r eceiver , see Operating other Pioneer components with this unitâÂÂs sensor below to connect to the CONTROL jacks instead of the IR OUT jack. Operating other Pioneer components with this un itâÂÂs sensor Many Pi onee r com p onents have SR CONTROL jacks which can be used to link com p onents togethe r so that you can use just the r em ote senso r of one com p on ent. When you use a r emote cont r ol, th e cont r ol signal is p assed along the chain to the a ppr o pr iate com p onent. 2 Important ⢠Note that if you use this featu r e, make sure that you also have at least one set of analog audio, video or HDMI jacks conne cted to anothe r com p onent fo r g r ounding p u rp oses. 1 Decide which component you want to use the remote sensor of. When you want to cont r ol any comp onent in the chain, this is the r emote senso r at which youâÂÂll p oint the co rr es p onding r emote cont r ol. 2 Connect the CONTROL OUT jack of that component to the CONTROL IN jack of another Pioneer co mponent. Use a cable with a mono mini- p lug on each end fo r the connection. Continue the chain in the same way fo r as many com p onents as you have. Note 1⢠R e m o t e o p er ation may not be p ossible if dir ect light fr om a str ong fluor escent lamp is shining on the IR r eceiver r emote sensor window. ⢠Note that othe r manufactu r er s may not use the IR te r minology. Refe r to the manual that came with you r com p onen t to check fo r IR com p atibility. ⢠If using two r emote cont r ols (at the same time), the IR r eceiver âÂÂs r emote senso r takes pr io r ity ove r the r emote senso r on the f r ont p anel. RS-232C HDMI ASSIGNABLE COMPONENT VIDEO ASSIGNABLE MONITOR OUT ZONE 2 OUT IN Y ANTENNA FM UNBAL 75 AM LOOP ZONE2 OUT ZONE3 OUT DVD IN TV/SAT IN VIDEO IN DVR/ OUT P R P B 1 IN BD IN 1 IN 2 IN 3 1 4 ( DVD ) IN 2 ( DVR/BDR ) IN 3 ( VIDEO ) CONTROL EXTENSION IR 12 V TRIGGER IN IN IN OUT OUT 1 2 1 2 (OUTPUT 12 V TOTAL 150 mA MAX) IN 4 ( OUTPUT 5 V 150 mA MAX ) SPEAKERS Class 2 Wiring SEE INSTRUCTIO MANUAL SELECTABLE VOIR LE MODE D'EMPLOI SELECTABLE IN IR IN OUT CONTROL IR r eceive r Closet o r shelving unit Non-Pionee r com p onent Pionee r com p onent 2 ⢠If you want to co nt r ol all you r com p onents using this r eceiver âÂÂs r emote cont r ol, see Setting the remote to contro l other components on p age 68. ⢠If you have connected a r emote cont r ol to the CONTROL IN jack (using a mini-p lug cable), you wonâÂÂt be able to contr ol this unit using the r emote sensor . CONTROL IN OUT RS-232C MONITOR OUT ZONE 2 OUT Y ANTENNA FM UNBAL 75 AM LOOP P R P B EXTENSION IR 12 V TRIGGER IN IN OUT 1 2 1 2 (OUTPUT 12 V TOTAL 150 mA MAX) ( OUTPUT 5 V 150 mA MAX ) SPEAKERS Class 2 Wiring SEE INSTRUCTI O MANUAL SELECTABLE VOIR LE MODE D'EMPLOI SELECTABLE CONTROL IN OUT IN OUT CONTROL SC-1525_UXJC B.book 36 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼ å¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂç«æÂÂæÂÂ¥ ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Connecting your equipment 03 37 En Switching components on and o ff using the 12 volt trigger You can connect com p onen ts in you r system (such as a sc r een o r pr ojecto r ) to this r eceiver so that they swit ch on o r off using 12 volt t r igge r s when you select an in p ut function. Howeve r , you must s p ecify which in p ut functions switc h on the t r igger using the The Input Setup menu on p age 40. Note that this will only wo r k with com p onents that have a stan dby mode. ⢠Connect the 12 V TRIGGER jack o f this r eceiver t o the 12 V trigger of another component. Use a cable with a mono mini- p lug on each end fo r the connection. Afte r youâÂÂve s p ecified the in p ut functions tha t will swi tch on the t r igger , youâÂÂll be able to switch th e com p onent on o r off just by pr essing the in p ut function(s) youâÂÂve set on p age 40. It is also p ossible to have the com p onen t switch not when the in p ut function is switch ed, but when HDMI OUT is switched. Fo r details, see HDMI Set up on p age 57. Plugging in the receiver Only p lug in afte r you have connected all you r com p onents to this r eceive r , including the s p eake r s. 1 Plug the su pplied power cord i nto the AC IN socket on the back of the receiver . 2 Plug the other end i nto a power outlet. 1 CAUTION ⢠Handle the p ower co r d by the p lug p ar t. Do not p ull out the p lug by tugging the co r d, and neve r touch the p ower cor d when your hands ar e wet, a s this could cause a sho r t ci r cuit o r elect r ic shock. Do not p lace the unit, a p iec e of fu r nitur e, o r othe r o bject on the p ower cor d or p inch the cor d in any other way. Never make a knot in the co r d o r tie it with othe r cables. The p ower cor ds should be r outed so that they ar e not likely to be ste pp ed on. A damaged p ower co rd can cause a fi r e o r give you an elect r ic shock. C heck the p ower cor d once in a while. If you find it damaged, ask you r nea r est Pionee r autho r ized inde p endent se r vice com p any fo r a r ep lacement. ⢠Do not use any p owe r co r d othe r than the one su pp lied with this unit. ⢠Do not use the su pp lied p ower co r d fo r any p u rp ose othe r than that desc r ibed below . â¢T h e r eceiver should be disconnected by r emoving the mains p lug f r om the wall socket when not in r egula r use, e.g., when on vacation. â¢M a k e s u r e the blue ïµ STANDBY/O N light has gone out befo r e un p lugging. ⢠If you have connected s p eaker s with a 6 é im p edance, change the im p edance setting befo r e tu r ning on the p owe r . 12 V TRIGGER 1 2 (OUTPUT 12 V TOTAL 150 mA MAX) RS-232C HDMI ASSIGNABLE COMPONENT VIDEO ASSIGNABLE MONITOR OUT ZONE 2 OUT IN Y ANTENNA FM UNBAL 75 AM LOOP CD IN VIDE MONITOR OUT ZONE2 OUT ZONE3 OUT DVD IN TV/SAT IN VIDEO IN DVR/BDR PHONO IN OUT IN P R P B 1 IN BD IN 1 IN 2 IN 3 OUT 1 ( CONTROL ) OUT 1 4 ( DVD ) IN 2 ( DVR/BDR ) IN 3 ( VIDEO ) CONTROL EXTENSION IR IN IN IN OUT OUT 1 2 IN 4 ( OUTPUT 5 V 150 mA MAX ) SPEAKERS Class 2 Wiring SIGNAL GND R FRONT HEIGHT/W SEE INSTRUCTION MANUAL SELECTABLE VOIR LE MODE D'EMPLOI SELECTABLE 12 V TRIGGER INPUT Note 1A f t e r this r eceiver is connected to an AC outlet, a 2 second to 10 second HDMI initialization pr ocess begins . You cannot ca rr y out any o pe r ations du r ing this pr ocess. The HDMI indica to r in the f r ont p anel dis p lay blinks du r ing this pr ocess, and you can tu r n on this r eceiver once it has sto pp ed blinking. When you set the Control with HDMI to OFF , you can ski p this process. Fo r details about the Control with HDMI featu r e, see Control with HDMI function on p age 57. SC-1525_UXJC B.book 37 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼ å¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂç«æÂÂæÂÂ¥ ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Basic Setup 04 38 En Chapter 4: Basic Setup Changing the OSD display language (OSD Language) The language used on the G r ap hical U se r Inte r face sc r een can be changed. â¢T h e e x p lanations in these op er ating instr uctions ar e fo r when English is selected fo r the GUI sc r een. 1 Switch on the receiver and your TV. Make su r e that the TVâÂÂs video in p ut is set to this r eceiver (fo r exam p le, if y ou connected this r eceive r to the VIDEO jacks on you r TV, make su r e that the VIDEO in p ut is now selected). 2 Press on the remote control, then press HOME MENU . A G r ap hical Use r Inte r face (GUI) sc r een a pp ea r s on you r TV. Use ï©/ïª/ï«/ï¬ and ENTER to navigate th r ough the sc r eens and select menu items. P r ess RETUR N to exit the cu rr ent menu. 3 Select â System Setup â from t he Home Menu . 4 Select â OSD Language â from the System Setup menu. 5 Select the desired language. 6 Select â OK â to change the language. The setting is com p leted and the Sys tem Setup menu r ea pp ear s aut omatically. Automatically conducting optimum sound tuni ng (Full Au to MCACC) The Full Auto MCACC Setu p measu r es the acoustic cha r acte r isti cs of you r listenin g a r ea, ta king into account ambient noise, s p eaker connection and s p eaker size, and tests fo r both channel dela y and channel level. Afte r you have set u p the mic r op hone pr ovided with you r system, the r eceive r uses the info r mation f r om a se r ies of test tones to o p timize the s p eaker sett ings and eq ualization fo r you r p ar ticula r r oom. Important â¢M a k e s u r e the micr op hone and sp eak e r s a r e not moved du r ing the Full Auto MCACC Setu p . ⢠Using the Full Auto MCACC Setu p will ove r wr ite any existing settings fo r the MCACC pr eset you select. â¢B e f o r e u sing the Full Auto MCACC Setu p , the head p hones should be disconnected. CAUTION ⢠The test tones used in the Full Auto MCACC Setu p a r e out p ut at high volume. THX î â¢T H X i s a t r ademar k of THX Ltd., which m ay be r egister ed in some jur isdictions. All r ights r eser ved. 1 Switch on the receiver and your TV. Make su r e that the TVâÂÂs video in p ut is set to th is r eceiver . 2 Connect the microphone to the MCACC SETUP MIC jack on the front panel. ⢠Push down on the lowe r p or tion of the f r ont p an el doo r to access the MCACC SETUP MIC jack. RECEIVER SC-1525_UXJC B.book 38 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼ å¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂç«æÂÂæÂÂ¥ ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Basic Setup 04 39 En Make su r e the r e a r e no obstacles between the s p eake r s and the mic r op hone. If you have a t r ip od, use it to p lace the mic r op hone so that itâÂÂs about ea r level at you r no r mal li stening p osition. If you do not have a t r ip od, use some othe r object to install the mic r op hone. 1 The Full Auto MCACC dis p lay a pp ea r s once the mic r op hone is connec ted. 2 3 Select the parameters you want to set. 3 If the s p eaker s a r e connected using any setu p othe r than Normal(SB/FH) , be su r e to set Speaker System befo r e the Full Auto MCACC Setu p . See Speaker syste m setting on p age 85. ⢠Speaker System 4 â Shows the cu rr ent settings. When this is selec ted and ENTER is pr essed, the s p eake r system selection sc r een a pp ea r s. Select the pr o pe r s p eake r system , then pr ess RETURN to r etu r n. ⢠EQ Type â This dete r mines how the f r equency balance is adjus ted. ⢠MCACC â The six MCACC pr esets a r e used fo r sto r ing su rr ound sound settings fo r diffe r ent listening p ositions . Sim p ly choose an unused pr eset fo r now (you can r ename it late r in Data Management on p age 82). ⢠THX Speaker â Select YES if you a r e using THX s p eake r s (set all s p eake r s to SMALL ), othe r wise leave it set to NO . 4 Press on the remote control, then select START . 5 Follow the inst ructions on-screen. Make su r e the mic r op hone is connected, and if youâ r e using a subwoofe r , make su r e it is switc hed on and se t to a comfo r table volume le vel. 6 Wait for th e test tones to finish , then confirm th e speaker configuration in the GUI screen. A pr og r ess r ep or t is dis p layed on-sc r een while the r eceiver outp uts test tones to deter mine the sp eaker s pr esent in you r setup . Tr y to be as quiet as p ossible while itâÂÂs doing t his. If no o p er ations a r e p er for med fo r 10 seconds while the s p eake r config u r ation check sc r een is being dis p layed, the Full Auto MCACC Setu p wi ll r esume autom atically. In this case, you donâÂÂt need to select â OK â and pr ess ENTER in ste p 7. â¢W i t h e rr o r messages (such as Too much ambient noise! o r Check microphone. ), select RETRY afte r checking fo r am bient noise (see Problems when using the Auto MCACC Setup on p age 40) and ve r if ying the mic co nnection. If the r e doesnâÂÂt seem to be a pr oblem, you can sim p ly select GO NEXT and continue. The configu r ation show n on-sc r een should r eflect the actual s p eaker s you have. Note 1 I nstall the mic r op hone on a stable floo r . Placing the mic r op hone on any of the following su r faces may make accu r ate measu r ement im p ossible: ⢠Sofas o r other soft su r faces. ⢠High places such as tableto p s and sofa to p s. 2 I f you leave the GUI sc r een fo r ove r five minutes, the sc r een save r will a pp ea r . 3⢠W h e n d a t a m e a s u r ement is taken, the r ever b char acter istics data (both befor e- and after -calibr ation) that this r eceiver had been stor ing will be ove r wr itten. If you want to save the r ever b cha r acter istics data befo r e measu r ing, connect a USB memo r y de vice to this r eceive r and t r ansfe r the data. ⢠When measu r em ent is taken of the r eve r b cha r acter ist ics data othe r than SYMMET RY , the data a r e not measur ed after the co rr ection. If you will need to measu r e afte r co rr ecting data, take the measu r em ent using the EQ P r ofessional menu in the Manual MCACC setu p ( p age 77). 4 I f you a r e p lanning on bi-am p ing you r fr ont s p eaker s, o r setting u p a se p ar ate s p eaker system in anoth e r r oom, r ead th r oug h Speaker system setting on p age 85 and make sur e to connect your sp eaker s as nece ssar y be for e continuing to step 4. PHONES SPEAKERS CONTROL MULTI-ZONE ON/OFF MCACC SETUP MIC PARAMETER ENTER (TUNE) (TUNE) (PRESET) (PRESET) AUDIO VIDEO TUNER EDIT USB HDMI 5 VIDEO CAMERA iPod iPhone AUTO SURR/ALC/ STREAM DIRECT HOME THX STANDARD SURROUND ADVANCED SURROUND STEREO BAND HOME ME NU RETURN Mic r op hone T ri p od Speaker System : Normal ( SB/FH ) 1a.Full Auto MCACC A/V RECEIVER Exit Return ST ART EQ T ype : SYMMETRY MCACC : M1.MEMORY 1 THX Speaker : NO RECEIVER Now Analyzing... 2/10 Environment Check 1a.Full Auto MCACC A/V RECEIVER Exit Cancel Ambient Noise : OK Microphone : Speaker YES/NO : L : YE S FHL : YES C : YES FHR : YES R : YES SR : YES SBR : YES SBL : YES SL : YES SW : YES 1a.Full Auto MCACC 10 OK RETRY A/V RECEIVER Exit Cancel SC-1525_UXJC B.book 39 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼ å¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂç«æÂÂæÂÂ¥ ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Basic Setup 04 40 En ⢠If you see an ERR message (o r the s p ea ker configu r ation dis p layed isnâÂÂt co rr ect), the r e may be a pr oblem with the s p eaker connection. If selecting RETRY doesnâÂÂt wo r k, tu r n o ff the p ower and check the s p eaker connections. If the r e doesnâÂÂt seem to be a pr oblem, you can sim p ly use ï©/ïª to select the s p eaker and ï«/ï¬ to change the setting and continue. â¢I f Reverse Phase is dis p la yed, the s p ea ker âÂÂs wi r ing ( and âÂÂ) may be inve r ted. Check the s p eaker connections. 1 â If the connections we r e w r ong, tu r n off the p owe r , disconnect the p ower co r d, then r econnect pr op er ly. Afte r this, p er fo r m the Full Auto MCACC pr ocedu r e again. â If the connections we r e r ight , select GO NEXT and continue. 7 Make sure â OK â is selected, then press ENTER . A pr og r ess r ep or t is dis p layed on -sc r een while th e r eceiver outp uts mor e test tones to deter mine the o p timum r eceive r settings. Again, t r y to be as quiet as p ossible while this is ha pp ening. It may take 3 to 10 minutes. 8 The Full Auto MCACC Setup p rocedure is completed and the Home Menu menu reappears automatically. Be su r e to disconnect the mic r op hone f r om this r eceiver u p on com p letion of the Full Auto MCACC Setu p. The settings made in the Full Auto MCACC Setu p should give you excellent su rr ound sound f r om you r system, but it is also p ossible to adjust these settings manually using The Advanced MCACC m enu on p age 75 o r Th e System Setup and Other Setup me nus on p age 84. 2 Problems when using the Auto MCACC Setup If the r oom envi r onment is not o p timal fo r the Auto MCACC Set u p ( t o o m u c h b a c k g r ound noise, e cho off the walls, obst acles blocking the s p eaker s f r om the mic r op hone) the final settings may be inco rr ect. Check fo r household a pp liances ( ai r conditione r , fr idge, fa n, etc.), that may be affecting the envi r onment and switch them off if necessa r y. If the r e a r e any in str uctions showing in the f r ont p anel dis p lay, p lease follow them. ⢠Some olde r TVs m ay inte r fer e with the o p er ation of the mic r op hone. If this seems to be h a pp ening, switch off th e TV when doing the Auto MCACC Setu p . The Input Setup menu You only need to make settings in the Input Setup menu if you didnâÂÂt hook u p you r digital equi p ment acco r ding to the default settings (see Input function default and possible setting s on p age 41). In this case, you need to tell the r eceiver what equi p ment is hooked u p to which te r minal so the buttons on the r emote cont r ol co rr es p ond to the com p onents youâÂÂve connected. 1 Press on the remote control, then press HOME MENU . A G r ap hical Use r In te r face (GUI) sc r een a pp ea r s on you r TV. Use ï©/ïª/ï«/ ï¬ and ENTER to navigate th r ough the sc r eens and select menu items. P r ess RETURN to confi r m and exit the cu rr ent menu. 2 Select â System Setup â from the Home Menu . 3 Select â Input Setup â from the System Setup menu. 4 Select the input funct ion that you want to set up. The default names co rr es p ond with the names next to the te r minals on the r ea r p anel (such as DVD o r VIDEO ) which, in tu r n, co rr es p ond with the names on the r emote cont r ol. 5 Select the input(s) to which youâÂÂve connected your component. Fo r exam p le, if you r DVD p laye r only has an o p tical out p ut, you will need to change the DVD in p ut functionâÂÂs Digital In setting f r om COAX-1 (default ) to the o p tical in p ut youâÂÂve connected it to. The numbe r ing ( OPT-1 to 3 ) co rr es p onds with the numbe r s beside the in p uts on the back of the r eceiver . Note 1I f t h e s p eaker is not p ointed to the micr op hone (listening p osition) or when using sp eaker s that affect the p hase (dip ole sp eaker s, r eflectiv e s p eake r s, etc.), Reverse P hase may be dis played eve n if the s p eaker s a r e pr op er ly connected. 2⢠D e p ending on the char acter istics of your r oom , sometimes identical sp ea ke r s with cone sizes of a r ound 12 cm (5 inches) will end u p with diffe r ent size settings. You can co rr ect the setting manually using the Manual speaker setup on p age 84. ⢠The subwoofe r distance setting may be fa r ther than the actual distance f r om the listening position. This setting should be accu r ate (tak ing delay and r oom cha r acter istics into account) and gene r ally does not need to be changed. ⢠If Full Auto MCACC Setu p mea su r emen t r esults a r e inco rr ect due to the inte r action of the s p eake r s and viewing envi r onment, we r ecommend adjusting the settings manually. RECEIVER A/V RECEIVER Exit Return a.Manual SP Setup b. Input Setup c. OSD Language d. Network Setup e. Other Setup 4.System Setup 4b.Input Setup A/V RECEIVER Exit Finish Input : DVD Input Name : Rename Digital In : COAX-1 HDMI Input : --- Input Skip : OFF Component In : Comp-1 12V Trigger1 : OFF 12V Trigger2 : OFF SC-1525_UXJC B.book 40 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼ å¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂç«æÂÂæÂÂ¥ ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Basic Setup 04 41 En 6 When yo uâÂÂre finishe d, proceed to t he settings fo r other inputs. The r e a r e o p tion al sett ings in a ddition to the ass ignment of the in p ut jacks: ⢠Input Name â You can choose to r en ame the in p ut function fo r ea sie r identifica tion. Select Rename to do so, o r Defaul t to r etur n to the system default. ⢠Input Skip â When set to ON , that i n p ut is ski pp ed when selecting the in p ut usin g INPUT SELECT . ( DVD and othe r in p uts can be still be sele cted di r ectly with the in p ut function button s.) ⢠12V Trigger1 /2 â Afte r connecting a com p onent to one of the 12 volt t r igger s (see Switching components on and off using the 12 volt trigger on p age 37), select MAIN , ZONE 2 , ZONE 3 o r OFF fo r the co rr esp onding t r igge r setting to switch it on automatical ly along with the (main o r sub) zone s p ecified. 1 7 When yo uâÂÂre finished, press RETURN . You will r etur n to the System Setup menu. Input function default and possible settings The te r minals on the r eceiver gene r ally co rr es p ond to the name of one of the in p ut functions. If you have connected com p onents to this r eceive r diffe r ently f r om (o r in addition to) the defaults below, see The Input Setup menu on p age 40 to tell the r eceive r how youâÂÂve connected u p . The dots ( ï« ) indi cate p ossible assignments. Note 1 De vices connected to 12 volt t r igger s can be associated with HDMI OUT switching. Fo r details, see HDMI Setup on p age 57. Input function Input Terminals Digital HDMI Component DVD COAX-1 ï« a a. With Control with HDMI set to ON , assignments ca nnot be made (see Control with HDMI function on p age 57). IN 1 BD (BD ) TV/SAT OPT-1 ï« a ï« DVR/BDR OPT-2 ï« a IN 2 VIDEO OPT-3 ï« a IN 3 HDMI 1 ï« ( HDMI-1 ) HDMI 2 ( HDMI-2) HDMI 3 ( HDMI-3 ) HDMI 4 ( HDMI-4 ) HDMI 5 (f r ont panel) ( HDMI-5 ) INTERNET RADIO iPod/USB XM RADIO CD COAX-2 CD-R/TAPE ï« TUNER ADAPTER PORT PHONO MULTI CH IN ï« a SIRIUS ï« SC-1525_UXJC B.book 41 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼ å¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂç«æÂÂæÂÂ¥ ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Basic playback 05 42 En Chapter 5: Basic playback Playing a source He r e a r e the basic inst r uctions fo r p laying a sour ce (such as a DVD disc) with you r home theate r system. 1 Switch on your system components and receiver. Make su r e that the TVâÂÂs video in p ut is set to this r eceiver . 2 Press on the remote control. 3 Select the input functio n you want to play. You can use the in p ut function buttons on the r emote cont r ol, INPUT SELECT , o r the f r ont p anel INPUT SELECTOR dial. 1 4 Press AUTO/ALC/DIRECT ( AUTO SURR / ALC / STREAM DIRECT ) to se lect â AUTO SURROUND â and start playback of the source. 2 If youâ r e p laying a Dolby Digital o r DTS su rr ound sound sou r ce, you should hea r su rr ound sound. If you a re p laying a ster eo sour ce, you will only h ear sound fr om the f r ont left/ r ight s p eake r s in the default listening mode. ⢠S ee also Listening to y our system on p age 5 3 fo r info r mation on diffe r ent ways of listening to sou r ces. It is p ossible to check on the f r ont p anel dis p lay whethe r o r not multi- channel p layba ck is being pe r fo r med pr o pe r ly. Fo r details, see Auto Surround, ALC and Stream Direct with different input signal formats on p age 106. When using a su rround bac k s p eaker , 2 D PLIIx MOVIE is dis p layed when p laying D olby Digital signals, an d DTS Neo:6 is di s p layed when p laying DTS 5.1- channel signals. If the dis p lay doe s not co rr esp ond to the in p ut signal and listening mode, check the connections and setti ngs. 5 Use the volume control to adjust the volume level. Tu r n down the volume of you r TV so that all sound is coming f r om the s p eaker s connected to this r eceiver . Playing a source with HDMI connection ⢠Press on the r emote control, then use INPUT SEL ECT to select the HDMI input youâÂÂve connected to (for example, HDMI 1 ). You can also p er for m the same o p eratio n by using the INPUT SELE CTOR dial on the f r ont p anel o r by pr essing HDMI on the r emo te contr ol r ep eatedly. â¢S e t t h e H D M I p ar ameter in Setting the Audio options on p age 60 to THROUGH if you want to hea r HDMI audio out p ut f r om your TV (no soun d will be hea r d f r om this r eceive r ). ⢠If the video signal does not a pp ea r on your TV, tr y adjusting the r esolution settings on you r com p onent o r dis p lay. Note that some com p onents (such as video game units) have r esolutio ns that may not be conve r ted. In this case, use an analog video connection. Selecting the multichannel analog inputs If you have connected a de code r or a DVD p layer as above, you must select the analog multichannel in p uts fo r su rr ound sound p layb ack. 3 1 Make sure you have set the playback sourc e to the proper output setting. Fo r exam p le, you might n eed to set you r DVD p laye r to out p ut multichannel analog audio. 2 Press on the remote control, then use INPUT SEL ECT to sele ct MULTI CH IN . You can also use the INPUT SELECTOR dial on the f r ont p anel. â¢D e p ending on th e DVD p layer yo uâÂÂr e using, the analog out p ut level of the subwoo fe r channel may be too low. In this case, t he out p ut level of the subwoofe r can be inc r eased by 10 dB in the Multi Ch In Se tup in Other Setup . Fo r de tails, see Mul ti Channe l Input Setup on p age 90. Note 1 If you need to manually switch the in p ut signal ty p e pr ess SIGNAL SEL (p age 56 ). 2 You may need to check the digital audio out p ut settings on you r DVD p layer o r digital satellite r eceiver . It should be set to out p ut Dolby Digital, DTS and 88.2 kHz / 96 kHz P CM (2 channe l) audio, an d if the r e is an MPEG audio o p tion, set this to conve r t the MPEG audio to PCM. RECEIVER 3⢠W h e n p layback f r om the multicha nnel in p uts is selected, only the volume and channel levels can be set. ⢠You canâÂÂt listen to you r sp eaker B system dur ing p layback fr om the multichannel inp uts. ⢠With MULTI C H IN in p uts, it is p ossible to p lay p ictur es si multaneo usly. Fo r d etails, se e Multi Channel Input Setup on p age 90. RECEIVER RECEIVER SC-1525_UXJC B.book 42 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼ å¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂç«æÂÂæÂÂ¥ ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Basic playback 05 43 En Playing an iPod This r eceiver has the iPod/iPhone/USB ter minal that will allow you to cont r ol p l ayback of audio con tent f r om you r iPod using the cont r ols of this r eceiver . 1 1 Switch on the receiver and your TV. See Connecting an iP od on p age 35. â¢I t i s a l s o p ossible to o p er ate the iPod o n the iPod itself, witho ut using the TV sc r een. Fo r details, see Switching the iPod co ntrols on p age 43. 2P r e s s iPod USB on the remote control to switch the receiver to the iPod/USB . Loading a pp ea r s in the GUI sc r een while the r eceive r ve r ifies the conn ection and ret r ie ves data f r om the iPod. When the dis p lay shows the iPod to p menu you â r e r eady to p lay music f r om the iPod. 2 Playing back audio files stored on an iPod To navigate songs on you r iPod, you can take adva ntage of the GUI sc r een of you r TV connected to this r eceiver . 3 You can als o cont r ol all o p er ations fo r music in the f r ont p anel d is p lay of this r eceiver . Finding what you want to play When you r iPod is connected to this r eceiver , you c an b r owse songs sto r ed on you r iPod by p laylist, a r tist nam e, album name, song name, gen r e o r com p ose r , simila r to using you r iPod di r ectly. 1U s e ï©/ïª to select âÂÂMusicâ from the i Pod top menu. 2U s e ï©/ïª to select a category, then press ENTER to browse that category. â¢T o r etur n to the pr evious level any time, pr ess RETURN . 3U s e ï©/ïª to browse the selected catego ry (e.g., albums). â¢U s e ï«/ï¬ to move to pr evious/next levels. 4 Continue browsing unt il you arrive at what you want to play, then press ï¤ to start playback. Tip â¢Y o u c a n p lay all of the songs in a p ar ticular catego r y by selecting the All item at the to p of each catego r y list. Fo r exam p le, you can p lay al l the songs by a p ar ticular ar tist. Basic playback controls This r eceive r âÂÂs r emote cont r ol buttons can be used fo r basic p layback of files sto r ed on an iPod. 4 â¢P r ess iPo d USB to switch the r emote contr ol to the iPod/USB o p er ation mode. Switching the iPod controls 5 You can switch ove r the iPod cont r ols between the iP od and the r eceiver . 1P r e s s iPod CTRL to switch the iPod controls. This enables o p er ation and dis p lay on you r iPod, and this r eceiver âÂÂs r emote contr ol and G UI scr een become inactive. 2P r e s s iPod CTRL again to switc h back to the receiv er controls. Note 1 ⢠This syste m is com p atible with the audio and video of the iPod nano (audio only fo r the iP od nano 1G/2G), iPo d fifth gene r ation (audio only), iPod classic, iPod to uch and iPhone. Howeve r , some of the functions may be r estr icted for some models. The system is not comp atible with the iPod shuffle. ⢠Com p atibility may va r y de p ending on the softwa r e ve r sion of you r iPod and iPhone. Please be su r e to use the latest available softwa r e ve r sion. ⢠iPod and iPhone a r e licensed fo r r e pr oduction of non-co p yr ighted mate r ials o r mate r ials the use r is legally p er mitted to r e pr oduc e. ⢠Featu r es such as the equalize r cannot be cont r olled using this r eceiver , and we r ecommend switching the e qualize r off befo r e connecting. ⢠Pionee r cannot unde r any ci r cumstances acce p t r esp onsibility fo r any di r ect o r indi r ect loss a r ising f r om any inconvenience o r loss of r ecor ded mater ial r esulting fr om the iPod failu r e. ⢠When listening to a t r ack on the iPod in th e main zone, it is p ossible to cont r ol the sub zone, but not to listen to a diffe r ent t r ack i n the sub zone f r om the one p laying in the main zone. 2 T he cont r ols of you r iPod will be ino p er able when connected to this r ece ive r . 3 ⢠Note that cha r acter s that cannot be dis p layed on this r eceiver ar e dis p layed as # . ⢠This featu r e is not available fo r p hotos o n you r iPod. To dis p lay photos, switch iPod o p er ation to the iPod (see Switching the iPod controls on p age 43). 4D u r ing Audiobook p layback, pr ess ï©/ïª to switch the p layback sp eed: Faste r ï¦ Nor mal ï¦ Slower 5 Y ou cannot use this functio n, when an iPod of fifth gene r ation o r iPod nano of fi rst gene r a tion is connect ed. iPod CTRL HOME MENU TUNE TUNE TOOLS LIST PRESET TOP MENU BAND GUIDE T .EDIT VIDEO P ARAMETER AUDIO P ARAMETER ENTER PRESET RETURN CA TEGORY SIGNAL SEL MCACC SLEEP HDMI OUT TV / DTV MPX PQLS PHASE CTRL ST ATUS THX STEREO DIRECT ST ANDARD ADV SURR AUDIO INFO DISP HDD DVD 5 46 2 13 SC-1525_UXJC B.book 43 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼ å¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂç«æÂÂæÂÂ¥ ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Basic playback 05 44 En Playing a USB device It is p ossible to p lay files 1 using the USB inte r face on the f r ont of this r eceive r. 1 Switch on the receiver and your TV. See Connecting a USB device on p age 35. 2 2 Press iPod USB on the rem ote control to switch the receiver to the iPod/USB . 3 Loading a pp ea r s in the GUI sc r een as this r eceive r sta r ts r ecognizing the USB device connected. When the disp lay shows the USB Top menu youâ r e r eady to p lay f r om the USB device. Important If an Over Current message lights in the dis p lay, the p ower r equir em ents of the USB device ar e too high f or this r eceive r . T r y following the p oints below: ⢠S witch the r eceiver off, then on ag ain. ⢠R econnect the USB device with the r eceiver switched off. ⢠Use a dedica ted A C ada p ter (su pp lied with the device) fo r USB p ower . If this doesnâÂÂt r emedy the pr oblem, it is likely you r USB device is incom p atible. Playing back audio files stored on a USB memory device The maximum numbe r of levels that you can select in Ste p 2 (below) is 8. Also, you can dis p lay and p lay back u p to 30 000 folde r s and files within a USB memo r y device. 4 1U s e ï©/ïª to sele ct âÂÂMusicâ fr om the USB Top menu. 2U s e ï©/ïª to select a folder, then press ENTER to browse that fold er. â¢T o r etur n to the pr evious level any tim e, pr ess RETURN . 3 Continue browsing u ntil you arrive at what you want to play, then press ï¤ to start playba ck. 5 Basic play back controls This r eceive r âÂÂs r emote cont r ol bu ttons can be used fo r basic p layback of files sto r ed on USB memo r y devices. â¢P r ess iPod USB to switch the r emote cont r ol to the iPod/USB o p er ation mode. Playing back photo files stored on a USB memory device 6 1U s e ï©/ïª to sel ect â Photo sâ from the USB Top menu. 2U s e ï©/ïª to select a folder, then press ENTER to browse that folder. ⢠To r etur n to the pr evious level any time, pr ess RETURN . 3 Continue browsing u ntil you arrive at what you want to play, then press ï¤ to start playback. 7 The selected content is dis p laye d in full s c r een and a slideshow sta r ts. Afte r a slideshow launches, pr essing ENTER toggles between p lay and p ause (only when Theme on the Slideshow Se tu p is set to Normal (OFF) ). Basic play back controls Note 1⢠C o m p atible USB devi ces include exter nal magnetic har d dr ives, p or table flash me mor y dr ives (p ar ticular ly key dr ives) and digital audio p layer s (MP3 p layer s) of for mat FAT16/32. ⢠Pionee r cann ot gua r antee com p atibility (o p er ation and/o r bus p ower ) with all USB mass sto r age devices and assumes no r esponsibility fo r any loss of data that may occu r when connected to this r ece ive r . 2M a k e s u r e the r eceive r is in standby when disconnecting the USB device. 3 The iPod/USB function cannot be sele cted in the main zone when the Inte r net r adio function is selected in the sub zone. Also, the iPod/USB function cannot be selected in the sub zone w hen the Inte r net r adio function is selected in the main zone. 4 Note that non-Roman cha r acter s in the p laylist a r e dis p laye d as # . 5⢠C o p yr ighted audio files cannot be p layed back on this r eceiver . ⢠DRM- pr otected audio files cannot be p layed back on this r eceiver . 6 Photo files cannot be p layed in the sub zone. 7 If the slideshow is left in the p ause mo de fo r five minutes, the list sc r een r ea pp ear s. Button(s ) What it does ENTER , ï¤ Sta r ts dis p laying a p hoto and p laying a slide show. RETURN , ï« Sto p s the p laye r and r etu r ns to the pr ev ious menu. ï¯ a a.You can only use this button when Theme on the Slideshow Setu p is set to Normal (OFF) Dis p lays the pr evious p hoto content. ï° a Dis p lays the next p hoto conten t. ïÂÂ¥ a Pauses/un p auses the slideshow. DISP a Dis p lays the p hoto info r mation. iPod CTRL HOME MENU TUNE TUNE TOOLS LIST PRESET TOP MENU BAND GUIDE T .EDIT VIDEO P ARAMETER AUDIO P ARAMETER ENTER PRESET RETURN CA TEGORY SIGNAL SEL MCACC SLEEP HDMI OUT TV / DTV MPX PQLS PHASE CTRL ST ATUS THX STEREO DIRECT ST ANDARD ADV SURR AUDIO INFO DISP HDD DVD 5 46 2 13 SC-1525_UXJC B.book 44 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼ å¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂç«æÂÂæÂÂ¥ ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Basic playback 05 45 En Slideshow Setup Make the va r ious settings fo r p la ying slidesho ws of p hoto files he r e. 1U s e ï©/ïª to select â Slideshow Setup â from th e USB Top menu. 2 Select the setting you want. ⢠Theme â Add va r ious effects to the s lideshow. ⢠Interval â Set the inte r val fo r switching the p hotos. This may not be available de p ending on the Theme setting. ⢠BGM â Play musi c files sto r ed on the USB device while dis p laying p hotos. ⢠Music Select â Select the folde r containing the music files to be p layed when BGM is se t to ON . 3 When yo uâÂÂre finished, press RETURN . You will r etur n to the USB Top menu. About playable file format s The USB function of this r eceiver su pp o r ts the following file fo r mats. Note that some file fo r mats a r e not available fo r p layback although they a r e listed as p layable file fo r mats. Music files Photo files Category Exte nsion Strea m MP3 a a. âÂÂMPEG Layer-3 audio decoding technology license d from Fraunhofer IIS and Thomson multimedia. â .m p 3 MPEG-1, 2, 2.5 Audio Laye r -3 Sam p ling f r equency 8 kHz to 48 kH z Quantization bi t r ate 16 bit Channel 2 ch Bit r ate 8 kb p s to 320 kb ps VBR/CBR Su pp o r ted/Su ppo r ted WAV .wav LPCM Sam p ling f r equency 32 kHz, 44.1 kHz, 48 kHz Quantization bi t r ate 8 bi t, 16 bit Channel 2 ch, Monau r al WMA .wma WMA8/9 b b.Files encoded using Wind ows Media Codec 9 may be p layable but som e p ar ts of the s p ecification a r e not su pp o r ted; s pecifically, P r o, Lossless, Voice. Sam p ling f r equency 8 kHz to 48 kHz Quantization bi t r ate 16 bit Channel 2 ch Bit r ate 8 kb p s to 320 kb ps VBR/CBR Su pp o r ted/Su ppo r ted Category Extension JPEG .j p g .j p eg .j p e .jif .jfif Fo r mat Meeting the f ollowing conditions: ⢠Baseline JPEG fo r mat (including files r ecor ded in Exif/DC F fo r mat) ⢠Y:Cb:C r - 4:4:4, 4:2:2 o r 4:2:0 Resolution 30 to 8184 p ixels ve r tical, 40 to 8184 p ixels hor izont al SC-1525_UXJC B.book 45 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼ å¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂç«æÂÂæÂÂ¥ ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Basic playback 05 46 En Listening to the radi o The following ste p s show you how to tune in to FM and AM r adio b r oadcasts using the aut omatic (sea r ch) and manual (ste p ) tuning functions. If you al r eady know the f r equency of the station you want, see Tuning directly to a station below. Once you a r e tuned to a statio n you can memo r ize the f r equency fo r r ec all late r âÂÂsee Saving station presets below fo r mo r e on how to do this. 1 Press TUNER to select the tuner. 2 Use BAND to chang e the band (FM or AM) , if necessary. 3 Tune to a station. The r e a r e th r ee ways to do this: Automatic tuning â To sea r ch fo r stations in the cu rr ently selected band, pr ess and hold TUNE ï©/ïª fo r about a second. The r ece ive r will sta r t sea r ching fo r the next stati on, sto pp ing when it has found one. Re p eat to sea r ch fo r othe r stations. Manual tu ning â To c hang e the f r equency one ste p at a ti me, pr ess TUNE ï©/ïª . High speed tunin g â P r ess and hold TUNE ï©/ïª fo r high s p eed tuning. Release the button at the f r equency you want. Improving FM sound If the TUNED o r STEREO indica to r doesnâÂÂt light when tuning to an FM station because the signal is wea k, pr ess MPX to switch the r eceiver into mono r ecep ti on mode. This should im pr ove the sound quality and allow you to enjoy the b r oadcast. Using the noise cut mode The two noise cut modes can be used when r eceiving AM b r oadcasts. P r ess MPX to select the noise cut mode (1 to 2). Using Neural Surround This featu r e uses Neu r al Su rr ound⢠technologies to achieve o p timal su rr ound sound f r om FM r adio. ⢠W hile listening to FM r adio, pr ess AUTO/ALC/ DIRECT fo r Neur al Su rr ound. The Neural Surround mode can be selected also with STANDARD . Tuning directly to a station 1 Press TUNER to select the tuner. 2 Use BAND to change the band (FM or AM), if necessary. 3 Press D.ACCESS (Direct Access). 4 Use the number buttons to ent er the frequency of the radio station. Fo r exam p le, to tune to 106.00 (FM), pr ess 1 , 0, 6, 0, 0 . If you make a mista ke halfway th r ough, pr ess D.ACCESS twice to cancel the f r equen cy and sta r t ove r . Saving station presets If you often listen to a p ar ti cular r ad io station, it âÂÂs convenient to have the r eceiver sto r e the f r equen cy fo r easy r ecall wheneve r you want to listen to that station. This saves the effo r t of manually tuning in each time. This r eceiver can memor ize up to 63 stations, sto r ed in seven banks, o r classes (A to G) of 9 stations each. 1 Tune to a station you want to memorize. See Listening to the radio above fo r mo r e on this. 2 Press T.EDIT ( TUNER EDIT ). The dis p lay shows PRESET ME MORY , then a blinking memo r y class. 3 Press CLASS to select one of the seven classes, then press PRESET ï«/ï¬ to select the station preset you want. You can also use the numbe r bu ttons to select a station pr eset. 4 Press ENTER . Afte r pr essing ENTER , the pr eset class and numbe r stop blinking and the r eceiver sto r es the station. Listening to station presets 1 Press TUNER to select the tuner. 2 Press CLASS to select the class in which the station is stored. P r ess re p eatedly to cycle th r ough clas ses A to G. 3 Press PRESET ï«/ï¬ to select the station preset you want. ⢠You can also use the numbe r buttons on the r emo te cont r ol to r ecall the station pr eset. Naming station presets Fo r easie r identification, you ca n name you r station pr esets. 1 Choose the station preset you want to name. See Listening to station presets above fo r how to do this. SC-1525_UXJC B.book 46 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼ å¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂç«æÂÂæÂÂ¥ ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Basic playback 05 47 En 2P r e s s T.EDIT ( TUNER EDIT ). The dis p lay shows PRESET NAME , then a blinkin g cu r sor at the fi r st cha r acter p osition. 3 Input the name you want. Use ï©/ïª t o s e l e c t a c h a r acte r , ï«/ï¬ to set the p osition, and ENTER to confi r m you r selectio n. Tip â¢T o e r ase a station name, sim p ly r ep eat step s 1 to 3 and in p ut eight s p aces instead of a n ame. ⢠Once you have named a station pr eset, you can pr ess DISP when listening to a stat ion to switch the dis p lay between name and f r equency. Listening to Satellite Radio To listen to Satellite Radio, yo uâÂÂll need to connect eithe r a SIRIUS o r X M Sate llite Rad io tune r (sold se p ar ately) to you r satellit e- r eady r ece iver . Satellite R adio is availa ble to r esidents of the US (excep t Ala ska and Hawaii) and Canada. Satellite Rad io delive r s a va riety of comme r cial- f r ee music f r om catego r ies r anging fr om P op , Rock, C ount r y, R&B, Dance, Jazz, Classical and many mo r e p lus cove r age of all the to p pr ofessional and coll ege s p or ts including p lay by p lay games f r om select leagues and teams. Additional pr og r amming includes ex p er t s p or ts talk, uncenso r ed ente r tainment, comedy, family pr og r amming, local tr affic and weather and news fr om you r most t r uste d sou r ces. Whethe r you p ur chase a SIRIUS o r XM tune r , yo uâÂÂll need to activate and sub sc r ibe to begin enjoying the se r vice. Easy to follow installation and setu p inst r uctions a r e pr ovided with the satellite tune r s. Whichever ser vice you choose, the r e a r e a va r iety of pr ogr amming p ackages available, incl uding the o p tion of adding âÂÂThe Best of SIRIUSâ pr og r am ming to you r XM tu ne r o r âÂÂThe Best of XMâ pr og r amming to you r SIRIUS tune r , enabling you to enjoy the most p op ular pr ogr am ming among both se r vices. The âÂÂBest ofâ p ackages a r e no t available to SIRIUS o r XM Canada subsc r iber s at this time. Family f r iendly p ack ages a r e also availa ble to r est r ict channels featu r ing content that may be ina ppr opr iate fo r child r en. To subsc r ibe to XM, U.S. custom e r s should visit xm r adio.com o r call 1-800-XMRADIO (1-800-967-2346); Canadian custome r s should visit xm r adio.ca o r call XM Listene r Ca r e at 1-877-GETXMSR (1-877-438-9677). To subsc r ibe to SIRIUS, U.S. and Canadian custome r s can call 1-888-539-SIRI (1-888-539-7474) o r visit si r ius.com (U S) o r si r iuscanada.ca (C anada). Listening to XM Radio Fo r details on XM Radio, see About SIRIUS and XM on p age 105. 1P r e s s XM to switch to the XM RADIO input. Fo r best r ece p tion, you may need to mo ve the XM Mini- Tune r antenna nea r a window (the southe r nmost window should pr oduce the best r esults). â¢I f a f t e r pr essing XM the disp lay shows Ch eck XM Tuner o r Check Antenn a , t r y disconnectin g the r eceiver and tuner connections, and then p lugging them back in. 1 Afte r connecting, you will be able to use this r eceive r to select channe ls and navigate catego r ies using the GUI sc r een. 2 Selecting channels and browsing by genre F r om the XM Channe l Guide, you can b r owse XM Radio channels in the o r der that they a pp ea r , o r you can na rr ow you r channel sea r ch by gen r e. 3 1P r e s s ï©/ïª to enter the XM Channel Guid e, navigate through the channels one at time with ï©/ïª , then press ENTER to listen to the XM radi o broadcast. â¢T o b r owse by genr e, fir st pr ess CATEGORY , use ï©/ïª to select a g en r e, then pr ess ENTER . ⢠To cancel and exit any time, pr ess RETURN . Tip ⢠You can sel ect channels di r ectly by pr essing D.ACCESS , then the th r ee-digit channel nu mbe r . â¢Y o u c a n pr ess DISP to c h a n g e X M R ad io in f o r mation in the f r ont p anel dis p lay. â¢T h e c u rr ently selected chan nel is automatically chosen (without pr essing ENTER ) afte r five seconds. Using XM HD Surround XM HD Su rr ound uses Neu r al Su rr ound⢠technologies to achieve o p timal su rr ound sound f r om XM r adio. XM HD Su rr ound So und is available on select XM channels only. ⢠While listening to XM Radio, press AUTO/ALC/ DIRECT for XM HD Surround l istening. XM HD Su rr ound can be selected also with STANDARD . Note 1 You can check the st r ength of r ecep tion in Using the XM Menu on p age 48. 2 ItâÂÂs easiest if you have you r TV switched on to take a dvantage of the GUI sc r eens. You can, howeve r , use just the f r ont p anel dis p lay to do eve r ything if you pr efe r . 3 Select 0 ( RADIO ID ) f r om the GUI to c heck the Radio ID of the XM Mini-Tune r . SC-1525_UXJC B.book 47 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼ å¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂç«æÂÂæÂÂ¥ ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Basic playback 05 48 En Saving channel preset s This r eceive r can memo r ize u p to 63 channels, sto r ed in seven banks, o r classes (A to G) of 9 channels each. 1 1 Select the channel you want to memorize. See Selecting channels and browsing by genre on p age 47. 2 Press T.EDIT . The dis p lay shows a blinking memo r y class. 3 Press CLASS to select one of th e seven classes, then press ï«/ï¬ to select the channel preset you w ant. You can also use the numbe r buttons to select a pr eset. ⢠The default fo r all pr esets is XM1 . 4 Press ENTER . Afte r pr essing ENTER , the pr eset class and numbe r stop blinking and the r eceiver sto r es the XM channel. Tip â¢Y o u c a n a l s o pr ess MEMORY du r ing r ecep tion dis p lay to save the info r mation of u p to five songs. See Using the XM Me nu below to r ecall this info r mation. Listening to channel presets 1 Press CLASS to select the class in which the channel is sto red. P r ess re p eatedly to cycle th r ough classes A to G. 2 Press ï«/ï¬ to select the channel preset you want. ⢠You can also use the numbe r buttons on the r emote cont r ol to r ecall the channel pr eset. Using the XM Menu The XM Menu pr ovides addi tional XM Radio fe atu r es. 2 1 Press TOP MENU . 2U s e ï©/ïª to select a menu item, then press ENTER . Choose f r om the following menu items: ⢠Channel Sk ip/Add â Use ï©/ïª and ENTER to select channels you would like to r emove/r estor e f r om /to the channel guide. ⢠Antenn a Aiming â Check the st r ength o f satellite and te rr est r ial r ecep tion. ⢠Memory Recall â Use ï©/ïª to b r owse yo u r saved song info r mation (see Tip above). 3 When youâÂÂre finished press TOP MENU to return to the reception display. Listening to SIRIUS Radio Fo r d e t a i l s o n S I R I U S R a d i o , s e e About SIRIUS and XM on p age 105. 1 Press SIRIUS to switch to the SIRIUS input. Fo r best r ece p tion, you may need to move the Si r iusConnect⢠tune r antenna nea r a wi ndow ( r efe r to the manual fo r the Si r iusC onnect⢠Hom e tune r fo r antenna pla cement r ecommendation s). 3 â¢I f a f t e r pr essing SIRIUS the disp lay shows Antenna Error , t r y disconnecting the antenna a nd r econnecting. 4 If the dis p lay shows Check Sirius Tuner , check the connection of the AC ada p ter and this r eceive r to the Si r iusConnect⢠tune r . Afte r connecting, you will be a ble to use this r eceive r to select channels and navigate catego r ies using the GUI sc r een dis p lay. 5 Selecting channels and bro wsing by genre F r om the SIRIUS Channel Guide, you can b r owse SIRIUS Radio channels in the o r der that they a pp ea r , o r you can na rr ow you r channel sea r ch by gen r e. 1 Press ï©/ïª to enter the SIRIUS Channel Guide, navigate through the channels one at time with ï©/ïª , then press ENTER to listen to the SIRIUS radio broadcast. â¢T o b r owse by genr e, fir st pr ess CATEGORY , use ï©/ïª to select a gen r e, then pr ess ENTER . ⢠To cancel and exit any time, pr ess RETURN . Tip ⢠You can select ch annels di r ectly by pr essing D.ACCESS , then the th r ee-digit channel number . â¢Y o u c a n pr ess DISP to change SIRIUS Radio info r mation in the f r ont p anel dis p lay. Note 1 You can r eset the channel pr esets and memo r y in Resetting the system on p age 66. 2 You can r eset the Channel Ski p /Add settings in Resetting the system on p age 66. 3⢠I n o r de r to activate your r adio subscr ip tion, you will need the SIRIUS ID (SID) which uniquely identifies your tuner . The SID may be found on a sticke r located on the p ackaging, o r on the bott om of the tune r itself. The label will have a pr inted 12-digit SID numbe r . When you have located the SID, w r ite it down in the s p ace pr ovided nea r the end of this manual. Contact SIRIUS on the inte r net at: htt p s:// activate.si r ius r adio.com Follow the pr om p ts to activate you r subsc r ip tion, o r you can also call SIRIUS toll-f r ee at 1-888-539-S IR IUS (1-8 88-539-7474). ⢠Select 0 ( SIRIU S ID ) f r om the on-sc r een dis p lay to check t he Radio ID of the Si r iusConnect⢠tune r (see Selecting channels and browsing by genre on p age 48). 4 You can check the st r ength of r ecep tion in Using the SI RIUS Menu on p age 49. 5 ItâÂÂs easiest if you have you r TV switched on to take advantage of the GUI sc r eens. You can, however , use just the f r ont p anel dis p lay to do eve r ything if you pr efe r . SC-1525_UXJC B.book 48 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼ å¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂç«æÂÂæÂÂ¥ ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Basic playback 05 49 En â¢T h e c u rr entl y selected cha nnel is automa tically chosen (without pr essing ENTER ) afte r five seconds. Saving channel presets This r eceive r ca n memo r ize u p to 63 chan nels, sto r ed in seven banks, o r classes (A to G) o f nine channels each. 1 1 Select the channel you want to memorize. See Selecting ch annels and browsing by genre on p age 48. 2P r e s s T.EDIT . The dis p lay shows a blinking memo r y class. 3P r e s s CLASS to select one of the seven classes, then press ï«/ï¬ to select the channel preset you want. You can also use the numbe r buttons to select a pr eset. 4P r e s s ENTER . Afte r pr essing ENTER , the pr eset class and numbe r stop blinking and the r eceiver sto r es the SIRIUS chan nel. Tip â¢Y o u c a n a l s o pr ess MEMORY du r ing r ecep tion dis p lay to save the info r mation of u p to five songs. See Using the SIRIUS Me nu below to r ecall this info r mation. Listening to channel preset s 1P r e s s CLASS to select the class in which the channel is stored. P r ess re p eatedly to cycle th r ough classes A to G. 2P r e s s ï«/ï¬ to select th e channel preset you want. ⢠You can also use the numbe r buttons on the r emote cont r ol to r ecall the chan nel pr eset. Using the SIRIUS Menu The SIRIUS Menu pr ovides addition al SIRIUS Radio featu r es. 2 1P r e s s TOP MENU . 2U s e ï©/ïª to select a menu item, then press ENTER . Choose f r om the following menu items: ⢠Channel Skip/Add â Use ï©/ïª and EN TER to select channels y ou would like to r emove/r estor e f r om/to the channel gu ide. ⢠Parental Lo ck â Use ï©/ïª and ENTER to select channels y ou would like to p lace unde r p ar enta l lock. Channels p ut under p ar en tal lock ar e not disp layed in the Channel Guide, but may be accessed by di r ectly in p utting thei r channel numbe r and pr oviding the p ar ental lock p asswor d. ⢠Antenna Aiming â Check the st r ength of sate llite and te rr est r ial r ecep ti on. ⢠Memory Recall â Use ï©/ïª to b r owse you r saved song info r mation (see Tip above). ⢠Password Se t â Set the pa r ental lo ck p asswor d. 3 When youâÂÂre finish ed press TOP MENU to return to the reception display. Listening to Intern et radio stations Inte r net r adio is an audio b r oadcasting ser vice t r ansmitted via the Inte r net. 3 The r e a r e a la r ge numbe r of Inte r net r adio stations b r oadcasting a va r iety of se r vices f r om eve r y co r ne r of the wo r ld. Some a r e ho sted, managed, and b r oadcast by pr ivate individuals while othe r s a r e by the co rr es p onding t r adit ional te rrest r ial r adio stations or r adio networ ks. Wher eas te rr estr ial, o r OTA (ove r -the-air ), r adio stations a r e geog r ap hically r estr icted on the r ange of r adio waves br oadcast fr om a t r ansmitte r th r ough the ai r , I nte r net r adio station s a r e accessible f r om anywhe r e in the wo r ld, as long as the r e is a connection to the Inte r net, as se r vices a r e not t r ansmitted th r ough the ai r but a r e delive r ed ove r the Wo r ld Wide Web. On this r eceive r you ca n select Inte r net r adio stations by genr e as well as by r egion. Important â¢B e f o r e listen ing to Inter net r adio, you nee d to pr og r am the Inte r net r adio stations you wish to listen to onto this unit. See Programming the Internet radio stations on p age 50 fo r how to pr og r am. Though the Inte r net r adio station s a r e pr ogr ammed in this r eceiver befor e it leaves the factor y, the link may have ex p ir ed. In that case, pr eset the st ations again you r self. 1P r e s s NET RADIO to switch to the Internet radio input. 4 The Inte r net Radio list sc r een is dis p layed. Note 1 Y ou can r eset the Channel pr esets and memo r y in Resetting the system on p age 66. 2 Y ou can r eset the Channel Ski p /Add, Pa r ental Lock and Passwo r d settings in Resetting the system on p age 66. 3 ⢠To listen to Inte r net r adio stations, you must h ave high-s p eed b roadband Inte r net access. With a 56 K o r ISDN modem, you may not enjoy the full benefits of Inte r net r adio. ⢠The p or t numbe r va r ies de p ending on the Inte r net r adio station. Check the fi r ewall settings. ⢠B r oadcasts may be sto pp ed o r inte rr u p ted de p ending on the Inte r net r adio station. In this case, you cannot listen to a r adio station selected f r om the list of Inte r net r adio stations. 4 T he Inte r net r adio function cannot be selected in the main zone when the iPod/USB func tion is select ed in the sub z one. Also , the Inte r net r adio function cannot be selected in the sub zone when the iPod/USB function is selected in the main zone. SC-1525_UXJC B.book 49 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼ å¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂç«æÂÂæÂÂ¥ ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Basic playback 05 50 En 2U s e ï©/ïª to select the Internet radio station to play back, and then pr ess ENTER . P r ess ï©/ïª to sc r oll u p and down the list and select the desi r ed item . When you pr ess ENTE R , p layback st a r ts with th e p layback sc r een being dis p layed fo r th e selected item. De p ending on the Inte r net line c onditions, the sound may not be smooth when p laying Inte r net r adio. To r etu r n to the list sc r een, pr ess RETURN . 1 Programming the Internet radio stations By pr og r amming the Inte r net r adio stations you wish to listen to onto this r eceiver , you will be able to select thos e Inte r net r adio stations. You can pr og r am u p to 24 stations. The r e a r e two methods of pr og r amming: o ne lets you use the GUI sc r een on thi s r eceiver ; the othe r lets you connect you r com p uter and use that sc r een. Program ming with the GU I screen 1 Press TOP MENU when the Internet Radio statio n list is displ ayed. The Inte r net Radio Setu p sc r een is dis p layed. 2U s e ï©/ïª to select the Internet Radio station list screen you wish to edit, and then press ENTER . 3U s e ï«/ï¬ to sele ct âÂÂEditâÂÂ. â¢I f y o u s e l e c t â Delete â , info r mation r egar ding the Inte r net r adio stations pr ogr ammed into the cu rr ently selected memo r y will be deleted. 4 Enter the URL of the Intern et radio station you wish to program. 2 Use ï©/ïª to selec t a lette r and ï«/ï¬ to move t he cu r sor . ⢠A URL containing u p to 192 lette r s c an be e nte r ed. 5 Enter the title of the Internet radio stat ion. Use ï©/ïª to selec t a lette r and ï«/ï¬ to move t he cu r sor . ⢠A title containin g u p to 22 lette r s can be ente r ed. Program ming on the co mputer screen You can ente r the Inte r net r adio list on the sc r een of a com p ute r that is connected to the same LAN as this r eceiver , and se nd the list to this unit. The com p uter needs to be connected in a dvance to the netwo r k of this r eceiv e r and set u p . 1 Turn on the computer and launch the Internet browser. 2 In the address bar on the browser, enter the IP address assigned to this receiver. Fo r exam p le, if the IP add r ess of this r eceive r is âÂÂ192.168.0.2âÂÂ, ente r âÂÂh tt p ://192.168.0.2/âÂÂ. When the connection is made with the r eceiver , a To p Menu will be dis p layed. â¢T h i s r eceiver âÂÂs IP addr ess can be found in the âÂÂIP add r ess, P r oxyâ menu ( p age 87). 3 Select âÂÂInternet Radio Setti ngâÂÂ. The followin g pr og r amming sc r een will be shown on the b r owse r. 4 Enter the title and URL of the Internet radio statio n you wish to program, t hen press âÂÂUpdateâÂÂ. The ente r ed info r mation will be t r ansmitted to the r eceiver . The connection to the URL designated f r om the com p ute r will be confi r med: If connection is successful, â Connection OK â will be dis p layed on sc r een, and the selected Inte r net r adio station will begi n p layin g via this r eceiver . If the connect ion failed, â Connection NG â wi ll be dis p layed. Check to see if the URL you ente r ed is co rr ect. Important â¢â Connection OK â and â Connectio n NG â a r e only dis p layed when this r eceive r is set to th e Inte r net r adio function. ⢠When ente r ing the title and URL of Inte r net r adio station, do not pr ess â Update â while you a r e connected to othe r stations (i.e., labelled as â Connectin g... âÂÂ). Note 1 When the list sc r een is dis p layed f r om the p layback sc r een, the p layback sc r ee n r ea pp ea r s automatically if no o p er ation is p er fo r med fo r 10 seconds while the list sc r een is dis p layed. 2 The URL can also be ente r ed by connecting a USB keyboar d (see Connecting a USB device on p age 35). Internet Radio Setting 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 Title URL Title URL Title URL Title URL Title URL Title URL Title URL Title URL Top Menu Connection OK T op Menu Pioneer Update Connection OK Update Connection OK Update Connection OK Update Connection OK Update Connection OK Update Connection OK Update Connection OK Update J-POP http://www.xxxxxxx.net:9500 Rock http://www.xxxxxxx.com:8096 Classic http://www.yyyyyyy .com:8800 ST A TION6 http://zzzzzzz.com:7040 ENKA http://www.zyxzyx.com:6000 SC-1525_UXJC B.book 50 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼ å¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂç«æÂÂæÂÂ¥ ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Basic playback 05 51 En Bluetooth ADAPTER for Wireless Enjoyment of Music Wireless music play When the Bluetooth ADAPTER (Pionee r Mode l No. AS- BT100) 1 is connected to this unit, a pr oduct equi pp ed with Bluetooth wi r eless technology ( p or table cell p ho ne, digital mu sic p layer , etc.) can be us ed to listen to music wi r elessly. Also, by using a comme r c ially available t r ansmitte r su ppo r ting Blu etooth wi r eless technology, you can listen to music on a dev ice not equi pp ed with Bluetooth wi r eless technology. The AS-BT100 model su pp o r ts SCMS-T contents pr otection, so music can also be enjoyed on devices equi pp ed with SC MS-T ty p e Bluetooth wi r eless technology. Remote control operation The r emote cont r ol su pp lied with this un it allows y ou to p lay and stop media, and p er for m other op e r ation s. 2 Pairing the Bluetooth ADAPTER and Bluetooth wireless technology device âÂÂPai r ingâ must be done befo r e you sta r t p la yback of Bluetooth wi r eless technology content using the Bluetooth ADAPTER. Make su r e to p er for m p air ing the fi r st time you o p er ate the system o r an y time p ai r ing data is clea r ed. The p air ing step is necessar y to r egister the Bluetooth wi r eless technology device to enable Bluetooth communica tions. 3 Fo r mo r e details, see also the o pe r ating inst r uctions of you r Bluetooth wi r eless technology device. 1 Press on t he remote control, then press HOME MENU . 2S e l e c t â System Setup âÂÂ, then press ENTER . 3S e l e c t â Other Setup âÂÂ, then press ENTER . 4S e l e c t â Pairing Bluetooth Device âÂÂ, then press ENTER . 5 Sele ct the â Passcode â setting you w ant. Select the same p asscode as the Bluetoot h wi r eless technology device you wish to conn ect. ⢠0000 /1234 /8888 â Select the p asscode fr om these o p tions. These a r e the p asscodes that can be used in most cases. ⢠Others â Select to use a p asscode othe r than those mentioned above. 6 If you selected Others in step 5, enter the passcode. Use ï©/ïª to select a numbe r and ï«/ï¬ to move the cu r so r . 7 Follow the instructions displayed on the GUI screen to conduct pairing with t he Bluetooth wireless technology device. Switch on the Bluetooth wi r eless technology device that you want to make p air , p lace it nea r th e r eceiver and set it to the p air ing mode. 8 Check to see that the Bluetooth ADAPTER is detected by the Bluetooth wireless technology device. When the Bluetoot h wireless technology device is connec ted: CONNECTED a pp ea r s in the r eceive r dis p lay. 4 When the Bluetoot h wireless technology device is not connec ted: Go back to the p asscode setting in ste p 5. In this case, p er for m the connection op er ation fr om the Bluetooth wi r eless technology device. Note 1T h e Bluetooth ADAPTER (AS-BT100) is sold se p ar ately. 2 ⢠It must be necessa r y that the Bluetoot h wi r eless technology enabled devic e su pp o r ts AVRCP pr ofiles. ⢠Remote cont r ol o p er ations cannot be gua r anteed fo r all Bluetoot h wi r eless technology enabled devices. This receiver Remote control operation Music data Bluetooth î ADAPTER Bluetooth wireless technology enabled device: cell phone Bluetooth wireless technology enabled device: Digital music player Device not equipped with Bluetooth wireless technology : Digital music player Bluetooth audio transmitter (sold commercially) 3⢠P a i r ing is r equir ed when you fir st use the Bluetooth wi r eless technology device and Bluetooth ADA PTER. ⢠To enable Bluetooth communication, p air ing should be done with both you r system and Bluetooth wi r ele ss technology device. 4 T he system can dis p lay al p hanumer ic cha r acter s only. Othe r cha r acter s may not be dis played co rr ectly. RECEIVER SC-1525_UXJC B.book 51 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼ å¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂç«æÂÂæÂÂ¥ ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Basic playback 05 52 En 9 From the Bluetooth wireless technology device list, select Bluetooth ADAPTER and enter the Passcode selected in step 5. 1 Listening to music contents of a Bluetooth wireless technology devi ce with your system 1 Press ADAPTER on the remote control to switch the receiver to ADAPTER PORT input. 2 2F r o m t h e Bluetooth wireless technology device, perform the operat ion to connect to the Bluetooth ADAPTER. 3 Start playback of m usic contents stored on the Bluetooth wireless technology device. This r eceive r âÂÂs r emote cont r ol bu ttons can be used fo r basic p layback of f iles sto r ed on Bluetooth wi r eless technology devices. 3 The Bluetooth î wo r d ma r k and logos a r e r egister ed t r adema r ks owned by Bluetooth SIG, Inc. and any use of such ma r ks by Pionee r Co rp o r ation is unde r license. Othe r t r adema r ks and t r ade names a r e those of thei r r esp ective owner s. Note 1T h e p assc ode may in some cases be r efe rr ed to as PASSKEY or PIN code. 2 When the Bluetooth ADAPTER is not p lugged into the ADAPTER PORT , NO ADAPTER will be dis p layed if ADAPTER PORT in p ut is selected. 3⢠Bluetooth wi r eless tec hnology devi ce should b e com p atible wi th AVRCP pr ofile. ⢠De p ending on the Bluetooth wi r eles s technology device you use, o p er ation may diffe r f r om what is shown in the r emote cont r ol buttons. HDMI OUT TV / DTV MPX PQLS PHASE CTRL ST ATUS THX STEREO DIRECT ST ANDARD ADV SURR AUDIO HDD DVD 2 13 SC-1525_UXJC B.book 52 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼ å¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂç«æÂÂæÂÂ¥ ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Listening to your system 06 53 En Chapter 6: Listening to your system Important ⢠The listening modes and many featu r es desc r ib ed in this section may not be available de p ending on the cu rr ent sou r ce, settings a nd status of the r eceive r . Auto playback The r e a r e many wa ys to listen back to so u r ces using this r eceiver , but the simp lest, most dir ect listening op tion is the Auto Su rr ound featu r e. The r eceiver automatically detects what kind of sou r ce youâ r e p laying an d selects multichannel o r ste r eo p laybac k as necessa r y. 1 Press on t he remote control. 2 While listening to a source, press AUTO/ALC/ DIRECT ( AUTO SURR / ALC / STREAM DI RECT ) for auto playback of a source. AUTO SURROUND shows b r iefly in th e dis p lay befo r e showing the decoding o r p layback fo r mat. Check the digital f o rmat ind icato r s in the f r ont p anel dis p lay to see how the sou r ce is being pr ocessed. â¢I f t h e s o u r ce is Dolby Digital, DTS, or Dolby Su rr ound encoded, the pr o pe r decoding fo r mat will automatically be selected and shows in the dis p lay. ⢠When listening to the FM r adio, the Neu r al Su rr ound featu r e is selected automatically (see Using Neural Surround on p age 46 fo r mo r e on this). ⢠When li stening to the ADAPTER PORT in p ut , the SOUND RETRIEVER AIR featu r e is selected automatically (see Liste ning in st ereo on p age 5 5 fo r mo r e on this). ⢠When listening to XM Radio, the XM HD S u rr ound featu r e is selected automatically (see Using XM HD Surround on p age 47 fo r mo r e on this). ALC â In the Auto le vel cont r ol ( ALC ) mode, this r eceiver equalizes p layback sound levels. Tip â¢W h e n ALC is selected, the effect level can be adjusted using the EFFECT pa r amete r in Setting the Audio options on p age 60. Listening in surround sound Using th is r eceiver , you can listen to a ny sou r ce in su rr ound sound. Howeve r , the o p tions available will de p end on you r s p eake r setu p and the ty p e of sou r ce youâ r e listening to. Standard surround sound The following modes pr ovide basic su rr ound sound f o r ste r eo and m ultichannel sou r ces. 1 Press on t he remote control. 2 While listening to a source, press STANDARD ( STANDARD SURROUND ). If necessa r y, pr ess r ep eatedly to select a listening mode. â¢I f t h e s o u r ce is Dolby Digital, DTS, or Dolby Su rr ound encoded, the pr o pe r decoding fo r mat will automatically be selected and shows in the dis p lay. 1 With two channel sources , you can select f r om: ⢠2 Pro Logic IIx MOVIE â U p to 7.1 channel sound (su rr ound back) , es p ecia lly suited to mo vie sou r ces ⢠2 Pro Logic IIx MUSIC â U p to 7.1 channel sound (su rr ound back) , es p ecia lly suited to music sou r ces 2 ⢠2 Pro Logic IIx GAME â U p to 7.1 channel sound (su rr ound back), es p ecially suited to video games ⢠2 PRO LOGIC â 4.1 channel su rr ou nd sound (sound f r om the su rr ound s p eake r s is mono) ⢠2 Pro Logic IIz HEIGHT â U p to 7.1 channel sound (f r ont height) 3 ⢠WIDE SURROUND MOVIE â U p to 7.1 channel sound (f r ont wide), e s p ecially suited to m ovie sou r ces 4 ⢠WIDE SURROUND MUSIC â U p to 7.1 channel sound (f r ont wide), es p ecially suited to music sou r ces 4 ⢠Neo:6 CINEMA â 7.1 c hannel sound (su rr ound back), es p ecially suited to movie sou r ces 5 ⢠Neo:6 MUSIC â 7.1 chan nel sound (su rr ound back), es p ecially su ited to music s ou r ces 5 RECEIVER Note 1I f t h e s u rr ound back s p eaker s ar e not connect ed or V.SB is switched OFF (p age 61), 2 Pro Logic IIx becomes 2 Pro Logic II (5.1 channel sound). 2 When listening to 2-channel sou r ces in Dolby P r o Logic IIx Music mode, the r e a r e th r ee fu r ther p a r ameter s you can adjust: C.WIDTH , DIMENSION and PANORAMA . See Sett ing the Audio options on p age 60 to adjust them. 3⢠This mode can only be selected when Speaker System is set to Normal(SB/FH) . ⢠When liste ning sou r ces in 2 Pro Logic IIz HEIGHT mode, you can also adjust the H.GAIN effect (see Setting the Audio options on p age 60). 4 This mode can only be selected when Speaker System is set to Norm al(SB/FW) . 5 When listening to 2-channel sou r ces in Neo:6 Cinema o r Neo:6 Music m ode, you ca n also adju st the cen te r image effect (see Setting the Audio options on p age 60). RECEIVER SC-1525_UXJC B.book 53 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼ å¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂç«æÂÂæÂÂ¥ ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Listening to y our system 06 54 En ⢠Neural Surround â U p to 7.1 channel sound (su rr ound back), es p ecially suited to music sou r ces 1 ⢠XM HD Surround â U p to 7.1 channel sound, es p ecially suited to music sou r ces 2 With multichannel sources, if you have connected surround back, front height or front wide speakers , yo u can select (acco r ding to fo r mat): ⢠2 Pro Logic IIx MOVI E â See above ⢠2 Pro Logic IIx MUSIC â See above ⢠Dolby Di gital EX â C r eates su rr ound back channel sound fo r 5.1 channe l sou r ces and pr ovides p ur e decoding fo r 6.1 ch annel sour ces (like Dolby Digital Su rr ound EX) ⢠DTS-ES â Allows you to hea r 6.1 channel p layba ck with DTS- ES encode d sou r ces ⢠DTS Neo :6 â Allows you to hea r 6.1 channel p laybac k with DTS e ncoded s ou r ces ⢠2 Pro Logic IIz HEIGHT â See above 3 ⢠WIDE SU RROUND MOVI E â See above 4 ⢠WIDE SU RROUND MUSIC â See above 4 â¢S t r aight Decode â Pla ys back withou t the effects above. Using the Home THX modes THX and Home THX a r e technical standa r ds c r eated by THX Ltd. fo r cinema and home thea te r sound. Home THX is designed to make home theate r audio sound mor e like what you hea r in a cinema. Diffe r ent THX o p tions will be availab le de p ending on the sou r ce and the setting fo r su rr ound back channel pr ocessing (see THX Audio Setting on p age 87 fo r mo r e on this). 1 Press on the remote control. ⢠Press THX ( HOME THX ) to select a listeni ng mode. With two channel sources , pr ess THX re p eatedly to select a mat r ix-decoding pr ocess fo r th e THX CINEMA mode (see THX Audio Setting on p age 87 fo r an ex p lanation o f each pr ocess): ⢠THX CINEMA ⢠THX MUSIC ⢠THX GAMES ⢠2 Pro Logi c IIx MOVI E THX CIN EMA ⢠2 PRO LOGIC THX CINEMA ⢠Neo:6 CINEMA THX CI NEMA ⢠2 Pro Logi c IIx M USIC TH X MUSIC ⢠Neo:6 MUSIC THX MUSIC ⢠2 Pro Logic IIx GAME THX GAMES ⢠2 Pro Logic IIz HEIGHT THX CINEMA 3 ⢠2 Pro Logic IIz HEIGHT THX MUSIC 3 ⢠2 Pro Logic IIz HEIGHT THX GAMES 3 ⢠THX SELECT2 GAMES 5 With multichannel sources , pr ess THX ( HOME THX ) r ep eatedly to select fr om: ⢠THX CINEMA ⢠THX MUSIC ⢠THX GAMES ⢠THX Surround EX â Allows you to hea r 6.1 o r 7.1 channel p layback with 5.1 channel sou r ces ⢠Neo:6 CINEMA THX CI NEMA ⢠2 Pro Logi c IIx M OVIE THX CINEMA ⢠THX SELECT2 CINEMA 5 â Allows you to hea r 7.1 channel p layback with 5.1 channel sou r ces ⢠2 Pro Logi c IIx M USIC TH X MUSIC ⢠2 Pro Logic IIz HEIGHT THX CINEMA 3 ⢠2 Pro Logic IIz HEIGHT THX MUSIC 3 ⢠2 Pro Logic IIz HEIGHT THX GAMES 3 ⢠THX SELECT2 MUSIC 5 â This mod e is suited not on ly fo r sou r ces r ecor ded in Dolby Digital and DTS, but also to all multi-channel mu sic sou r ces (DVD-Audio, etc.). ⢠THX SELECT2 GAMES 5 â This mod e is suited to p laying the sound of games. Using the Advanced surround effects The Advanced su rr oun d effects can be us ed fo r a va r iety of additional su rr ound sound eff ects. Most A dvanced Su rr ound modes a r e designed to be used with film soundt r acks, but some modes a r e also suited fo r music sou r ces. T r y diffe r ent settings with va r ious soundt r acks to see which you like. 1 Press on the remote control. 2 Press ADV SURR ( ADVANCED SURROUND ) repeatedly to select a listeni ng mode. ⢠ACTION â Designed fo r action movies with dynamic soundt r acks ⢠DRAMA â Designed fo r movies with lots of dia log Note 1 Neural Surround can be selected fo r 2-channel signals fo r which the in p ut signal is PCM (48 kHz o r less), Dolby Digital, DTS o r analog 2- channel sou r ces. 2 XM HD Surround can be selected only with the XM in p ut. 3⢠This mode can only be selected when Speaker System is set to Normal(SB/ FH) . ⢠When listening sou r ces in 2 Pro Logic IIz HEIGHT mode, you can also adjust the H.GAIN effect (see Setting the Audio options on p age 60). 4 This mode can only be selected when Speaker System is set to Normal(SB/FW) . RECEIVER 5 Unavailable with only one su rr ound back s p eaker connected o r not connected. RECEIVER SC-1525_UXJC B.book 54 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼ å¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂç«æÂÂæÂÂ¥ ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Listening to your system 06 55 En ⢠SCI-FI â Designed fo r science fiction with lots of s p ecial effects ⢠MONO FILM â C r eates su rr ound sound f r om mon o soundt r acks ⢠ENT.SHOW â Suitable fo r musical sou r ces ⢠EXPANDED â C r eates an ext r a wide ste r eo field ⢠TV SURROUND â P r ovides su rr ound sound fo r both mono and ste r eo TV sou r ces ⢠ADVANCED GAME â Suitable fo r video games ⢠SPORTS â Suitable fo r s po r ts pr og r ams ⢠CLASSICAL â Gives a la r ge conce r t h all-ty p e sound ⢠ROCK/POP â C r eates a live conce r t sound fo r r ock and/o r p op music ⢠UNPLUGGED â Suitable fo r acoustic music sou r ces ⢠EXT. STEREO â Gives m ultichannel sound to a ste r eo sou r ce, using a ll of you r s p eake r s ⢠PHONES SURR â When listening th r ough head p hones, you can still get th e effect of ove r all su rr ound. Tip ⢠When an Advanced Su rr ound listening mode is selected, the effect level c an be adjusted using the EFFECT pa r amete r in Setting the Audio options on p age 60. Listening in stereo When you select STEREO , you will hea r th e sou r ce th r ough just the f r ont left and r ight s p ea ke r s (and p ossibly your subwoofer dep ending on your sp eaker settings). Multichannel sou r ces a r e downmixed to ste r eo. 1 Press on t he remote control. 2 While listening to a source, press STEREO for stereo playback. P r ess re p eatedly to switch between: ⢠STEREO â The audio is hea r d with you r sound settings and you can still use the audio o p tions. ⢠F.S.SURR FOCUS â See Using Front Stage Surround Advance below fo r mor e on this. ⢠F.S.SURR WIDE â See Using Front Stage Surround Advance below fo r mor e on this. ⢠SOUND RETRIEVER AIR 1 â Suitable fo r listening to the sound f r om a Bluetooth wi r eless technology device. Using Front Stage Surround Advance The F r ont Stage Su rr ound Advance function allows you to c r eate natu r al su rr ound sound effects using just the f r on t s p eake r s and the subwoofe r. 1 Press on t he remote control. 2 While listening to a source, press STEREO to select Front Stage Surround Advance modes. ⢠STEREO â See Listening in stereo above fo r mo r e on this. ⢠F.S.SURR FOCU S â Use to pr ovide a r ich su rr ound sound effect di r ecte d to the ce nte r of whe r e the f r ont left and r ight s p eaker s sound pr ojectio n a r ea conve r ges. ⢠F.S.SURR WIDE â Use t o pr ovide a su rr ound sound effect to a wide r ar ea than FOCUS mode. Using Stream Direct Use the St r eam Di r ect modes when you want to hea r the t r uest p ossible r e pr oduction of a sour ce. All unnecessar y signal pr ocessing is by p assed, and youâ r e lef t with the p ur e analog o r digital sound sou r ce. P r ocessing diffe r s de p ending on the in p ut signal and whethe r o r not su rr ound back s p eake r s a r e connect ed. Fo r details, see Auto Surround, ALC and Stream Direct with different input signal formats on p age 106. 1 Press on t he remote control. 2 While listening to a source, press AUTO/ALC/ DIRECT ( AUTO SURR / ALC / STREAM DIRECT ) to select the mode you want. Check the digital fo r mat indicato r s in the f r ont p an el dis p lay to see how the sou r ce is bein g pr ocessed. ⢠AUTO SURROUND â See Auto playback on p age 53. ⢠ALC â Listening in Auto level cont r ol mo de ( p age 53). ⢠DIRECT â Plays back sound f r om the sou r ce with the least modification next to PURE DIRECT . With DIRECT , the only modifications added to PURE DIRECT p layback ar e calib r ation of the so und field by the MCACC system and the Phase Co nt r ol effect. Note 1T h e SOUND RETRIEVER AIR listening mode can only selected when the ADAPTER PORT in p ut. RECEIVER RECEIVER FOCUS p osition (Recommended) WIDE p osition F r ont left s p eake r F r ont r ight s p eake r F r ont left s p eake r F r ont r ight s p eake r RECEIVER SC-1525_UXJC B.book 55 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼ å¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂç«æÂÂæÂÂ¥ ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Listening to y our system 06 56 En ⢠PURE DIRECT â Plays back unmodified sound f r om sou r ce with only minimal digital t r eatment. No sound is out p ut f r om the S p eaker B in this mode. Selecting MCACC presets â¢D e f a u l t s e t t i n g : MEMORY 1 If you have calib r ated you r system fo r diffe r ent listening p ositions, you can switch between settings to suit the kind of sou r ce youâ r e listening to and wh e r e youâ r e sitting (fo r exam p le, watching movies f r o m a sofa , o r p laying a video game close to the TV). 1 Press on the remote control. 2 While listening to a source, press MCACC . P r ess r ep eatedly to select one of the six MCACC pr esets 1 . See Data Management on p age 82 to check a nd manage you r cu rr ent settings. Choosing t he input signal On this r eceiver , it is p ossible to switch the in p ut signals fo r the differ ent in p uts as desc r ibed below. 2 1 Press on the remote control. 2 Press SIGNAL SEL to select the input signal corresponding to t he source component. Each pr ess cycles th r ough the o p ti ons as fol lows: ⢠AUTO â The r eceive r selects th e fi r st availa ble signal in the following o r der : HDMI; DIGITAL ; ANALOG . ⢠ANALOG â Selects an analog signal. ⢠DIGI TAL â Selects an o p tical or coaxial digital signal. ⢠HDMI â Sel ects an HDMI signal. 3 ⢠PCM â Fo r PCM in p ut signals. 4 The r eceiver selects the fi r st available signal in the following o r der : HDMI ; DIGITAL . When set to DIGITAL , HDMI o r AUTO (only selected DIGITAL o r HDMI ), the indicato r s light accor ding to the signal being decoded (see Displ ay on p age 12). Better sound using Phase Control This r eceive r âÂÂs Phase Cont r ol featu r e uses p hase co rr ection measu r es to make su r e yo u r sound sou r ce a rr ives at the listening p osition in p hase, pr eventing unwanted disto r tion and/o r colo r ing of the sound. Phase Cont r ol techn ology pr ovides cohe r ent sound r e pr oduction thr ough the use of p hase matching 5 fo r an o p timal sound image. The default setting is on and we r ecommend leav ing Phase Con tr ol switched on for all sound sou r ces. 1 Press on the remote control. ⢠Press PHASE CTRL ( PHASE CONTROL ) to swit ch on phase correction. The PHASE CONTROL indicato r on the f r ont p anel lights. Note 1 ⢠These settings have no effect when head p hones a r e connected. ⢠You can also pr ess ï«/ ï¬ to select the MCACC pr eset. 2 ⢠This r eceiver can only p lay back Dolby Digital, PCM (32 kHz to 192 kHz), DTS (including DTS 96/24) and WMA9 P r o digital s ignal fo r mats. The com p atible signals via the HDMI te r minals a r e: Dolby Digital, DTS, WMA9 P ro, PCM (32 kHz to 192 kHz), Dolby T r ueHD, Dolby Digital Plus, DTS-EXPRESS, DTS-HD Maste r Audio and SACD. ⢠You may get digital noise when an LD, CD, DVD o r BD p layer com p atible with DTS is p laying an analog signal. To pr event noise, make the pr o pe r digital connections ( p age 29) and set the signal in p ut to DIGITAL. ⢠Some DVD p layer s donâÂÂt out p ut DTS signals. Fo r mo r e details, r efe r to the inst r uction manual su pp lied with you r DVD p layer . 3 When the HDMI audio out p ut p ar ameter is set to THROUGH , the sound will be hea r d t h r ough you r TV, not f r om this r eceiver . RECEIVER RECEIVER 4 ⢠This is useful if you find the r e is a slight delay befo r e AUTO r ecognizes the PCM signal on a CD, fo r instance. ⢠When PCM is selected, noise may be out p ut dur ing p layback of non-PCM sou r ces. Please select anothe r in p ut signal if this is a pr oblem. 5 ⢠Phase matching is a ve r y imp or tant facto r in achieving pr o pe r sound repr oduction. If two wavefo r ms a r e âÂÂin p haseâÂÂ, t hey c r est and t r ough togethe r , r esulting in inc r eased am p litude, cla r ity and pr esence of the sound signal. If a c r est of a wave meets a t r ough, then the sound will be âÂÂout of p haseâ and an un r eliable sound image will be pr oduced. ⢠The PHASE CONTROL featu r e is available even when the head p hones a r e p lugged in. ⢠If you r subwoofe r has a p hase co ntr ol switch, set it to the plus ( ) s ign (o r 0ð). Howeve r , t he effect you can actually feel when PHASE CONTROL is set to ON on this r ece ive r de p ends on the ty p e of you r subwoofe r . Set you r subwoofe r to maximize the effect. It is also r ecommended you tr y changing the or ientation or the p lace of your subwoofer . ⢠Set the built-in low p ass filte r switch of you r subwoofe r to off. If this can not be do ne on you r subwoofe r , set the cutoff f r equency to a highe r value. ⢠If the s p eaker distance is not pr o pe r ly set, you may not have a maximiz ed PHASE CONTROL effect. ⢠The PHASE CONTROL mode cannot be set to ON in the following cases: â When the PURE DIRECT mode is switched on. â When MULTI CH IN in p ut is selected. â When the HDMI audio out p ut p ar ameter is set t o THROUGH in Setting the Audio options on p age 60. RECEIVER SC-1525_UXJC B.book 56 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼ å¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂç«æÂÂæÂÂ¥ ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Control with HDMI function 07 57 En Chapter 7: Control with HDMI function Synch r onized o p er at ions belo w with a Contr ol with HDMI-com p atible Pion ee r TV o r Blu- r ay disc p laye r o r with a com p onent of anothe r make that su pp o r ts the Control with HDMI functions a r e p ossible when the com p onent is connected to the r eceive r using an HDMI cable. â¢T h e r eceiver âÂÂs volume can be set a nd the sound can be muted using the TVâÂÂs r emote cont r ol. â¢T h e r eceiver âÂÂs inp ut switches over a utomatica lly when the TVâÂÂs channel is chan ged o r a Contr ol with HDMI-com p atible co m p onent is p layed. â¢T h e r eceiver âÂÂs p ower is also set to standby, when the TVâÂÂs p owe r is set to standby. Important â¢W i t h P i o n e e r devices, the Control with HDMI functions a r e r efe rr ed to as â KURO LINKâÂÂ. ⢠You cannot use th is function with com p onents that do not su pp o r t Control with HDMI. ⢠We do not gua r antee this r eceiver will wo r k with Pionee r Control with HDMI-com p atible c om p onents o r com p onents of othe r m akes that su ppo r t the Control with HDMI function. We do not gua r antee that all synch r onized o p er ations will wo r k with com p onents of othe r m akes that su pp o r t th e Control with HDMI function. â¢U s e a H i g h S p eed HDMI î cable when you want to use the Control with HDMI function. The Contro l with HDMI function may not wo r k pr op er ly if a diffe r ent ty p e of HDMI cable is used. â¢F o r de tails abou t concr ete op er ations, settings, etc., r efer to also the op er ating instr uction s fo r each com p onent. Making Control with HDMI connections You can use synch r onized o p er atio n fo r a connected TV and u p to five othe r com p onents. â¢B e s u r e to connect the TVâÂÂs audio cable to the audio in p ut of this unit. When the TV and r eceive r a r e connected by HDMI co nnections, if the TV su pp o r ts the HDMI Audio Retu r n Channel functio n, the sound of the TV i s in p ut to the r eceiver via the HDMI OUT 1 te r minal, so the r e is no need to connect a n audio cable. In this case, set TV Audio at HDMI Setup to via HDMI (see HDMI Setup on p age 57). Fo r details, see Connecting your TV and playback components on p age 24. Important ⢠When connecting this sy stem o r changing connections, be su r e to switch the p ower off and disconnect the p ower co r d f r om the wall socket. Afte r com p leting all connections, connect th e p owe r co r ds to the wall socket. â¢A f t e r this r ece ive r is co nnected to an A C outlet, a 2 second to 10 se cond HDMI i nitializatio n pr ocess begins. You canno t ca rr y out any o p er ations du r ing initialization. The HDMI ind icato r on the dis p lay unit blinks du r ing initialization, and you can tu r n thi s r eceiver on once it has sto pp ed blinking. ⢠To get the mo st out of this function, we r ecommend that you connect you r HDMI com p onent not to a TV bu t r ather dir ectly to the HDMI ter minal on this r eceiver . â¢W h i l e t h e r eceiver is equi pp ed with six HDMI in p uts (BD, HDMI 1 to 5), the Co ntrol with HDMI function can only be used with u p to th r ee DVD o r Blu- r ay disc p layer s or up to thr ee DVD or Blu-r ay disc r ecor der s. â¢T h e Control with HDMI function ca n be used with a TV connected to the HDMI OUT 1 te r minal, but not with a TV connected to the HDMI O UT 2 te r minal. HDMI Setup You must adju st the settin gs of this r eceiver a s w e l l a s t h e connected Control with HDMI-com p atible c om p onents in o r der t o m a k e u se o f th e Control with HDMI function. Fo r mo r e info r mation see the o p er ating inst r uctions fo r each com p onent. 1 Press on t he remote control, then press HOME MENU . 2S e l e c t â System Setup âÂÂ, then press ENTER . 3S e l e c t â Other Setup âÂÂ, then press ENTER . 4S e l e c t â HDMI Setup âÂÂ, then press ENTER . 5 Sele ct the â Control â setting you want. Choose whethe r to set this unitâÂÂs Control with HDMI function ON o r OFF . Y ou will n eed to set i t to ON to use the Contr ol with HDMI function. When using a com p onent tha t does not su pp o r t the Control with HDMI function, set this to OFF . ⢠ON â Enables the Control with HDMI function. When this unitâÂÂs p ower is tu r ned off and you h ave a su pp o r ted sou r ce begin p layback while using the Control with HDMI function, the audio and video out p uts f r om th e HDMI connection ar e out p ut f r om the TV. RECEIVER SC-1525_UXJC B.book 57 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼ å¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂç«æÂÂæÂÂ¥ ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Control with HDMI function 07 58 En ⢠OFF â The Contr ol with HDMI is disabled. Synch r onized o p er ations cannot be used. When th is unitâÂÂs p ower is tur ned off, audio and video of sour ces connected via HDMI a r e not ou t p ut. 6 Select the â Control Mod e â setting you want. Choose whethe r you want to enable HDM I fo r all lin ked functions o r the PQLS func tion only. Howeve r , Dis p lay Powe r Off will activate the settings set fo r th in ste p 7 below. ⢠ALL â Enabled fo r all linked functio ns. ⢠PQLS â Enabled only fo r the PQLS function. When PQLS is selected, link fu nctions othe r than the PQLS function may not wo r k pr o pe r ly. If you wish to use a ll link func tions, select ALL . 7 Select the â Display Power Off â setting you want. If the TVâÂÂs p ower is t u r ned off while us ing the Control with HDMI function, the r eceiver âÂÂs p ower is also tu r ned off (all p ower off function). This fu nction can be disabled. ⢠YES â The all p ower off func tion is enabled. The r eceiver âÂÂs p ower tur ns off togeth er with the TVâÂÂs p owe r . This function only wo r ks wh en the in p ut fo r a com p onent con nected to the r eceive r by HDMI connection is selected o r when watchi ng the TV. ⢠NO â The al l p ower off fu nction is disabled. The r eceiver âÂÂs p ower is no t a ff ec te d wh en th e T V âÂÂs p ower is tu r ned off. 8 Select the â Standby Through â setting you want. It is p ossible to t r ansfer signals f r om an HDMI-con nected p layer to the TV when this r eceiver 's p ower is o n s ta nd by as long as Control is ON , but the amount of en e r gy consumed r ises. It is, howeve r , p ossible to minimize ene r gy consum p ti on when powe r is set to standby. ⢠Normal â Regu la r setting. Powe r -up time f r om standby is sho r t. ⢠Eco â Conse r ves ene r gy while standby. Powe r -u p time is longe r than when set to Normal . 9 Select the âÂÂTV Audioâ setting you want. When a TV su pp o r ting the HDMI Audio Retu r n Channel function is connected to the r eceiver , the sound of the TV can be in p ut via the HDM I te r minal. ⢠Normal â The TVâÂÂs so und is in p ut f r om the Audio in p ut te r minals ot he r than HDMI in p uts. ⢠via HDMI â The TVâÂÂs sound is in p ut via th e HDMI te r minal. This can only be selected when Control is set to ON . 10 Select the âÂÂ12V Triggerâ setting you want. The com p onent connec ted to the 12V TRIGGER jack can be tu r ned on and off when HDMI OUT is switched. HDMI OUT 1 , HD MI OUT 2 o r OF F can be selected. Sele ct OFF when you want the com p onent to switch when the in p ut function is switched. 11 When youâÂÂre finished, pre ss HOME MENU . Before using synchronization Once you have finished all conn ections and settings, you must: 1 Put all components int o standby mode. 2 Turn the power on for all componen ts, with the power for the TV being turned on last. 3 Choose the HDMI input to which the TV is connected to this receiver, and see if video output from connected components displays properly on the screen or not. 4 Check wh ether the comp onents connected to all HDMI inputs are properly displayed. About synchronized operations The Control with HDMI-com p at ible com p onent connected to the r eceiver op er ates in sync as desc r ibed below. â¢F r o m the menu scr een of the Control with HDMI- com p atible TV, set a udio to be p layed th r ough this r eceiver , and the r eceiver will switch to the synch r onized a m p mode. ⢠When in the synch r onized am p mode, you can adjust the r eceive r âÂÂs volume o r mute th e sound using the TVâÂÂs r emote cont r ol. ⢠When in the synch r onized am p mode, the synch r onized a m p mode is canceled when the r eceiver âÂÂs p ower is tur ned off. To tur n the synch r onized a m p mode back on, set au dio to be p layed thr ough the r eceiver fr om the TVâÂÂs me nu sc r een, etc. This r eceive r wi ll p owe r up and switch to the synch r onized am p mode. ⢠When the synch ronized am p mode is canceled, the r eceiver âÂÂs p ower tur ns off if you we r e viewing an HDMI in p ut o r a TV pr og r am on the TV. ⢠When in the synch r onized am p mode, the synch r onized a m p mode is canceled if an o p er atio n that pr oduces sound f r om the TV is p er fo r med f r om the TVâÂÂs menu sc r een, etc. ⢠When the TVâÂÂs p ower is set to standby, the r eceiver âÂÂs p ower is also set to standby. (Only when the inp ut for a com p onent connected to the r eceiver by HDMI connection is selected o r when watching the TV.) â¢T h e r eceiver âÂÂs inp ut swi tches automatically when the Control with HDMI-com p atible comp onent is p layed. â¢T h e r eceiver âÂÂs inp ut switches automatically when the TVâÂÂs channel is switched. â¢T h e s y n c h r onized amp mode r emains in effect even if the r eceiver âÂÂs inp ut is switched to a comp one nt othe r than one connected by HDMI. SC-1525_UXJC B.book 58 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼ å¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂç«æÂÂæÂÂ¥ ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Control with HDMI function 07 59 En The o p er ations below ca n also be used on Pionee r Control with HDMI-com p atib le TVs. â¢W h e n t h e r eceiver âÂÂs volume is adjusted o r the sound is muted, the volume status is dis p la yed on the TVâÂÂs sc r een. ⢠When the OSD language is switched on the TV, th e r eceiver âÂÂs language setting also switches acco r dingly. About connections with a product of a different brand that supports the Control with HDMI function The synch r onized o p er ations below can be used when the r eceive r âÂÂs Control with HDMI function is co nnected to a TV of a b r and othe r than Pionee r that su pp o r ts t he Control with HDMI func tion. (De p en ding on the TV, howeve r , some of the Control with H DMI functi ons may not wo r k.) â¢W h e n t h e T V â s p ower i s set to s tandby, th e r eceiver âÂÂs p ower is also set to standby. (Only when the inp ut for a com p onent connected to the r eceiver by HDMI connection is sel ected o r when watching the TV) â¢T h e s o u n d o f T V pr og r ams o r an exte r nal in p ut connected to the TV can also b e out p ut f r om the s p eake r s connected to the r eceive r . (If the TV does not su pp o r t the HDM I Audio Retu r n Channel function, this r equir es connection of an o p ti cal digital c able, etc., in addition to the HDMI cable.) The synch r onized o p er ations below can be used when the r eceive r âÂÂs Control with HDMI function is co nnected to a p layer o r r ecor der of a b r and othe r than Pionee r that su pp o r ts the Control with HDMI fu nction. â¢W h e n p layba ck star ts on the p layer or r ecor der , the r eceiver âÂÂs inp ut switches to the HDMI inp ut to which that com p onent is connected. See the Pionee r website fo r the lat est info r ma tion on the models of non-Pionee r b r ands and pr oducts that su pp o r t the Control with HDMI func tion. Setting the PQLS function PQLS (P r ecision Quar t z Lock System ) is a digi tal audio signal t r ansfer cont r ol technology using the Control with HDMI function. It of fe r s highe r -quality audi o p layback by cont r olling audio signals f r om the r eceiver to a PQLS com p atible p laye r , etc. This enables r emoving jitte r that has a negative effect on the quality of th e sound and is gene r ated u p on tr ansmission. â¢O n p layer s comp atible w ith PQLS M ulti Su rr ound, PQLS wo r ks fo r all sou r ces. S et the p layer âÂÂs audio out p ut to Linea r PCM. â¢O n p layer s comp atible w ith PQLS 2 ch Au dio, PQLS only wo rks when p layin g CDs. Please r efe r to the o p er ating inst r uc tions su pp lied with you r p la ye r fo r mo r e info r mation. This f unction is activated when Control is set to ON . 1 ⢠Press o n the remote control, then press PQLS to select the PQLS setting. The settin g is dis p layed on the f r ont p anel dis p lay. ⢠PQLS AUTO â PQLS is enabled. A pr ecision qua r tz cont r olle r in this r eceive r eliminates disto r tion caused by timin g e rr o r s (jit te r ), giving you the best p ossible digital- to-analog conve r sion when you use the HDMI inte r face. Thi s is valid as an HDM I function fo r PQLS-com p atible p laye r s. ⢠PQLS OFF â PQLS is disabled. Cautions on the Control with HDMI function ⢠Connect the TV di r ectly to this r eceiver. Inte rr u p ting a di r ect connection with othe r am p s o r an AV conve r te r (such as a n HDMI switch) can cau se o p er ational e rro r s. ⢠Only connect com p onents (Blu- r ay di sc p layer , etc. ) you intend to use as a so u r ce to the HDMI in p ut of this r eceive r . Inte rr u p ting a di r ect connection with othe r am p s o r an AV conv e r te r (such as an HDMI switch) can cause o p er at ional e rr o r s. â¢W h e n Control is set to ON , HDMI In p ut in The Input Setup menu on p age 40 is automatically set to OFF . â¢W h e n t h e r eceiver âÂÂs Control is tu r ned ON , e ven if the r eceiver âÂÂs p ower is i n the standby mode, it is p ossible to out p ut the audio and video signals f r om a p laye r via HDMI to the TV without pr oducing sound f r om the r eceiver , but only when a Control with HDMI- com p atible com p onent (Blu-r ay disc p laye r , etc.) and com p atible TV a r e connected. In this case, the r eceiver âÂÂs p ower tur ns on and the p ower and HDMI indicato r s light. Note 1 ⢠I f a l i s t e n in g m o d e o t h e r than AUTO SURROUND , ALC, DIRECT , PU RE DIRECT o r STEREO is selected while the PQLS effect is enab led, the PQLS effect is disabled. ⢠When this r eceiver is conn ected by HDMI cable to a Pionee r p layer that is com p atible with the PQLS function via HDMI connection and HDMI r eauthentication is p er fo r med (the HDMI indicato r blinks), the PQLS effe ct is enabled and the lis tening m ode is set to AUTO SURROUND if a listening mode othe r than AUTO SURROUND , ALC , DIRECT , PURE DI RECT o r STEREO is selected. RECEIVER SC-1525_UXJC B.book 59 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼ å¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂç«æÂÂæÂÂ¥ ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Using other functions 08 60 En Chapter 8: Using other functions Setting the Audi o options The r e a r e a numbe r of additional so und settings you can make using the AUDIO PARAMETER menu. The defaults, if not stated, a r e listed in bold. Important ⢠Note that if a setting d oesnâÂÂt a pp ea r in the AUDIO PARAMETER menu, it is unavailable due to the cu rr ent sou r ce, settings and status of the r e ceive r . 1 Press on the remote cont rol, then press AUDIO PARAMETER . 2U s e ï©/ïª to select the setting you want to adjust. De p ending on the cu rr ent status/mode of the r eceive r , ce r tain o p tions may not be able to be selected. Ch eck the table below fo r note s on this. 3U s e ï«/ï¬ to set as nece ssary. See the table below fo r the o p tions av ailable fo r each setting. 4 Press RETURN to con firm an d exit th e menu. Setting What it does Option(s) MCACC (MCACC pr eset) Selects you r favo r ite MCACC pr eset mem o r y when multip le pr eset me mo r ies ar e saved. When an MCACC pr eset memo r y has been r enamed , the gi ven na me is dis p layed. M1. MEMORY 1 to M6. MEMORY 6 Default: M1. MEMORY 1 EQ (Acoustic Calib r ation EQ) Switches on/off th e effects of EQ P r o. ON OFF S-WAVE (Standing Wave) Switches on/off the effects of Standing Wave Cont r ol. ON OFF DELAY (Sound Delay) Some monito r s h ave a slight delay when showing video, so the soundt r ack will be slightly out of sync with the p ictur e. By adding a bit of delay, you can adjust the sound to match t he pr esentati on of the video. 0.0 to 10.0 (f r ames) 1 second = 30 frames (NTSC) Default: 0.0 MIDNIGHT Allows you to hea r effective su rr ound sound of movies at low volumes. MIDNIGHT/ LOUDNESS OFF MIDNIGHT ON LOUDNESS Used to get good b ass and t r eble f r om music sou r ces at low volumes. LOUDNESS ON RECEIVER TONE (Tone Cont r ol) A pp lies the t r eble and ba ss tone cont r ols to a sou r ce, o r by p asses them com p letely. BYPASS ON BASS a Adjusts the amou nt of bass. âÂÂ6 to 6 (dB) Default: 0 (dB) TREBLE a Adjusts the amount of t r eble. âÂÂ6 to 6 (dB) Default: 0 (dB) S.RTRV (Sound Ret r ieve r ) With the Sound Ret r ieve r function, DS P pr oces sing is us ed to com p ensate fo r th e loss of audio data u p on com pr ession, im pr oving the soundâÂÂs sense of density and modu lation. OFF b ON DNR (Digital Noise Reduction) May im pr ove the quality of sound in a noisy sou r ce (fo r exam p le, video ta p e with lots of backg r ound noise) when switched on. OFF ON DIALOG E (Dialog Enhance ment) Locali zes dial og in the cente r channel to make it stand out f r om othe r backgr ound sounds in a TV o r movie soundt r ack. By moving f r om UP1 th r ough UP 2 and UP3 u p to UP4, you can ma ke the sound sou r ce seem to r elocate u p wa r ds. OFF FLAT UP1/UP2/UP3/ UP4 c Hi-bit (High Bit/ High Sam p ling) C r eates a wide r dynamic r ange with digital sou r ces like CDs or DVDs. Smoothe r , mo r e delicate musical ex pr ession can be achieved by r equantizing 16 bit PCM or 20 bit com pr essed audio signals to 24 bit. OFF ON DUAL (Dual Mono) S p ecifies how dual mono encoded Do lby Digital soundt r acks should be p layed. Dual mono is not wi dely used, but is sometimes necessa r y wh en two language s need to be sent to se p ar ate channels. CH1 â Channel 1 is hea r d only CH2 â Channel 2 is hea r d only CH1 CH2 â Both channels hea r d f r om f r ont s p eake rs DRC (Dynamic Range Cont r ol) Adjusts the level of dynamic r ange for movie soun dt racks o p timized fo r Dolby Digit al, DTS, Dolby Digital P lus, Dolby T r ueHD, DTS-HD and DTS-HD Maste r Audio (you may need to use t his featu r e when listening to su rr ound sound at low volumes). AUTO d MAX MID OFF Setting What it does Option(s) SC-1525_UXJC B.book 60 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼ å¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂç«æÂÂæÂÂ¥ ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Using other functions 08 61 En LFE (LFE Attenuate) Some audio sou r ces include ult r a-low bass tones. Set the LFE attenuato r as necessa r y to pr event the u lt r a-low bass tones f r om disto r tin g the sound f r om the s p eaker s. The LFE is not l imited when set to 0 dB, which is the r ecommende d value. When set to âÂÂ5 dB, âÂÂ10 dB, âÂÂ15 dB o r âÂÂ20 dB, the L FE is limited by the r esp ective deg r ee. When OFF is sele cted, no sound is out p ut f r om the LFE channel. 0dB / âÂÂ5dB/ âÂÂ10dB/ âÂÂ15dB/ âÂÂ20dB OFF SACD GAIN e B r ings out detail in SACDs by maximizing the dynamic r ange (du r ing digit al pr ocessing). 0dB 6 dB HDMI f (HDMI Audio) S p ecifies the r outing of the HDMI audio signal out of this r eceiver ( amp ) o r through to a TV . When THROUGH is selected, n o sound is out p ut f r om this r eceiver . AMP THROUGH A. DELAY (Auto delay) This featu r e automatically co rr ects the audio-to -video delay between com p onents connected with an HDMI cabl e. The audio delay time is set de p ending on the o pe r ational status of the dis p lay connected with an HDMI cabl e. The video d elay time is automatically adjusted acco r ding to the audi o delay time. g OFF ON C. WIDTH h (Cente r Width) (A pp licable only when using a cente r s p eake r) P r ovides a be tte r blend of the f r ont s p eake r s by s pr eading t he cente r channel between th e f r ont r ight and left sp eaker s, making it sound wide r (highe r settings) o r na rr owe r (lowe r settings). 0 to 7 Default: 3 DIMENSION h Adjusts the de p th of the su rr ound sound balance f r om f r ont t o back, making the soun d mo r e distant (minus settings), o r mo r e fo r war d ( p ositive se ttings). âÂÂ3 to 3 Default: 0 PANORAMA h Extends the f r ont ste r eo image to include t he su rr ound s p eaker s fo r a âÂÂw r ap ar oundâ effe ct. OFF ON C. IMAGE i (Cente r Image) (A pp licable only when using a cente r s p eake r) Adjusts the cente r image to c r eate a wide r ste r eo effect with vocals. Adjust the effect f r om 0 (all cente r channel sent to f r ont r ight and left sp eaker s) to 10 (cente r channel sent to the cente r s p eake r only). 0 to 10 Defaults : Neo:6 MUSIC: 3 Neo:6 CINEMA: 10 Setting What it does Option(s) EFFECT Sets the effect l evel fo r the cu rr ently selected Advanced Su rr ound o r ALC mode (eac h mode can be set se p ar at ely). 10 to 90 Defaults: EXT.STEREO: 90 Othe r s: 50 H.GAIN (Height Gain) Adjusts the out p ut f r om the f r ont height s p eaker when listening in DOLBY PLIIz HEIGHT mode. If set to HIGH , the sound f r om th e to p will be mo r e em p hasized. LOW MID HIGH V.SB (Vi r tual Su rr ound Back) When youâ r e not usin g su rr ound back s p eaker s, selecting this mode allows yo u to hea r a vir tual su rr ound back channel th r ough you r su rr ound s p eake r s. You can choose to listen to sou r ces with no su rr ound back channel info r mation , o r if the mate r ial sounds bette r in the fo r mat (fo r exam p le, 5.1) fo r which it was o r iginally encoded, you ca n have the r eceive r only a pp ly this effect to 6.1 encode d sou r ces like Dolby Digital EX o r DTS-ES. j OFF ON V.HEIGHT (Vi r tual Height) When youâ r e not usin g f r ont height s p eaker s, selecting this mode allows yo u to hea r a vir tual f r ont height c hannel th r ough you r f r ont s p eake r s. k OFF ON a. The adjustment can be made only when TONE is set to ON . b.Wit h the iPod/USB , INTERNET RADIO o r ADAPT ER PORT in p ut function, by default S.RTRV is set to ON . c. UP1 to UP4 can be selected only wh en the f r ont height s p eaker is connected. The pr esence o r absence of effec ts de p ends on the listening mode. d.The initi ally set AUTO is only available fo r Dolby T r ueHD signals. Select MAX o r MID for signals othe r than Dolby T r ueHD. e.You shouldnâÂÂt have any pr oblems using this with most SACD discs, but if the sound disto r ts, it is best to switch the gain setting back to 0 dB. f. ⢠The HDMI Audio setting cannot be switched while p er for ming synch r onized am p mode o p er ations. ⢠The synch r onized am p mode must be tu r ned o n in o r der to p lay the r ece ive r âÂÂs HDMI audio and video in p ut signals f r om the TV with the r eceive r âÂÂs p ower in the standby mode. See About synchronized operations on p age 58. g.Thi s featu r e is only available when the connected dis p lay su pp o r ts the automatic audio/video synch r onizing ca p ability (âÂÂli p syncâÂÂ) fo r HDMI. If you find the automatically set delay time unsuitable, set A. DELAY to OFF and adjust the delay tim e manually. Fo r mor e details about the li p sync featu r e of you r dis p lay, contac t the manufactu r er di r ectly. h.Only when listening to 2-channel sou r ces in Dolby P r o Logic IIx Music/Do lby P r o Logic II Music mode. i. Only when listening to 2-channel sou r c es in Neo:6 MUSIC/CINEMA mode. Setting What it d oes Option (s) SC-1525_UXJC B.book 61 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼ å¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂç«æÂÂæÂÂ¥ ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Using other functions 08 62 En Setting the Video options The r e a r e a numbe r of additional p ic tu r e settings you can make using the VIDEO PARAMETER menu. The defaults, if not stated, a r e listed in bold. Important ⢠Note that if an o p tion cannot be selected on the VIDEO PARAMETER menu, it is unavaila ble due to the cu rr ent sou r ce, setting and status of the r eceiver . ⢠All of the se tting ite ms can be s et fo r each in p ut function. ⢠S etting items othe r than V. CONV ca n only be selected when V. CONV is set to ON . 1 Press on the remote cont rol, then press VIDEO PARAMETER . 2U s e ï©/ïª to select the setting you want to adjust. De p ending on the cu rr ent status/mode of the r eceive r , ce r tain o p tions may not be able to be selected. Ch eck the table below fo r note s on this. 3U s e ï«/ï¬ to set as nece ssary. See the table below fo r the o p tions av ailable fo r each setting. 4 Press RETURN to con firm an d exit th e menu. j. ⢠You canâÂÂt us e the Vi r tual Su rr ound Back mode when the head p hones a r e connected to this r eceive r o r when any of the ste r eo, F r ont Stage Su rr ound Advance, Sound Ret r iever Ai r o r St r eam Di r ect modes is selected. ⢠You can only use the Vi r tual Su rr ound Back mode if the su rr ound s p eake r s a r e on and the SB setting is set to NO o r if Front Bi-Amp o r ZONE 2 is selec ted at S p eaker System. It can a lso be used when Speaker B is selected at S p eaker system and SP ï¤ AB is selected with the SPEAKERS button. ⢠When in p utting Dolby T r ue HD, DTS-HD o r DTS Ex pr ess audio signals , the Vi r tual Su rr ound Back mode cannot be used if no su rr ound signals a r e reco r ded in the sou r ce. k. ⢠You canâÂÂt use the Vi r tual Height mode wh en the h ead p hon es ar e connected to th is r eceiver o r when any of the ste r eo, F r ont Stage Su rr ound Advance, Sound Ret r ieve r Ai r o r St r eam Di r e ct modes is selected. ⢠The Vi r tual Height mode cannot be used when no su rr ound s p eake r is connected. It can also not be used when p laying sign als containing actual f r ont height channel info r matio n. ⢠When in p utting ce r tain Dolby T r ueHD, DTS-HD o r DTS Ex pr ess audio signals, the Vi r tual Height mode cannot be used if no su rr ound signals a r e reco r ded in the sou r ce. Setting What it d oes Option(s ) V. CONV a (Digital Video Conve r sion) Conve r ts video signals fo r out put f r om the MONITOR OUT jacks (including HDMI OUT connec to r ) fo r all video t y p es (see p age 22). ON OFF RECEIVER RES b (Resolution) S p ecifies the out p ut r esolution of the video sign al (when video in p ut signals a r e out p ut at the HDMI OUT connecto r , select this acco r ding to the r esolution of you r monito r and the images you wish to watch). AUTO PURE 480p/576p 720p 1080i 1080p 1080/24p ASP c (As p ect) S p ecifies the as p ect r atio when in p ut signals a r e out p ut at the HDMI out p ut. Make you r de si r ed settings while checking each setting on you r dis p lay (if the image doesnâÂÂt match you r monito r ty p e, c r o pp ing o r black bands a pp ea r ). THROUGH NORMAL PCINEMA d,e (Pu r eCinema) This settin g o p timizes the o pe r ation of the pr og r essive scanning ci r cuit fo r p laying film mate r ials. No r mally set it to AUTO . If the p ictur e seems un natu r al, switch this to ON o r OFF . AUTO ON OFF P.MOTION d,e (P r og r essive Motion) Adjusts the motion and still p ictur e quality when video out p ut is set to pr og r essive. âÂÂ4 to 4 Default: 0 YNR d Reduces noise in t he luminance (Y) signal. 0 to 8 Default: 0 CNR d Reduces noise in the in p utâÂÂs colo r (C) signal. 0 to 8 Default: 0 BNR d Reduces bloc k noise (block - sha p ed disto r tion g ene r ated u p on MPEG com pr ession ) in the p ictur e. 0 to 8 Default: 0 MNR d Reduces mosquito noise (disto r tion g ene r ated at the contou r s of the p ictu r e u p on MPEG com pr ession ) in the p ictur e. 0 to 8 Default: 0 DETAIL d Adjusts how sha rp edges a pp ea r .0 t o 8 Default: 0 BRIGHT d (B r ightness) Adjusts the ove r all b r ightness. âÂÂ6 to 6 Default: 0 CONTRAST d Adjusts the cont r ast between light and da r k. âÂÂ6 to 6 Default: 0 HUE d Adjusts the r ed/gr een balance. âÂÂ6 to 6 Default: 0 CHROMA d (Ch r oma Level) Adjusts satu r ation f r om du ll to b r ight. âÂÂ6 to 6 Default: 0 BLK SETUP f Co rr ects th e black de p th in the b r ightness signal. No r mally select 7.5 . If the d a r k p ar ts of the p ictur e ar e a ll black with this sett ing, select 0 . 7.5 0 Setting What it does Option(s) SC-1525_UXJC B.book 62 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼ å¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂç«æÂÂæÂÂ¥ ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Using other functions 08 63 En Switching the speaker terminal s If you selected Speaker B at Speaker system setting on p age 85, yo u can switch betwe en s p eaker s using the SPEAKERS button. If you selected Normal(SB/FH) , Normal(SB/FW) , Front Bi-Amp o r ZONE 2 , the button will sim p ly switch you r main s p eaker te r minals on o r o ff. The o p tions below a r e fo r the Speaker B setting only. 1 â¢U s e SPEAKERS on the front panel to select a speaker system setting. As mentioned above, if you have selected Normal(SB/ FH) o r Normal(SB/FW) , the button will sim p ly switch you r main s p eake r te r minal (A) on o r off. P r ess re p eatedly to choose a s p eake r te r minal o p tion: ⢠SP ï¤ A â Sound is out p ut f r om the A-s p eake r te r minals (u p to 7 channels (including su rr ound back channels), de p ending on the sou r ce). ⢠SP ï¤ B â Sound is out p ut f r om the two s p eake r s connected to the B-s p eaker te r minals. Multicha nnel sou r ces will not be hea r d. ⢠SP ï¤ AB â Sound is out p ut f r om the A-s p eake r te r minals (u p to 5 channels, de p en ding on the sou r ce), the two s p eake r s connected to the B- s p eake r te r minals, and the subwoofe r . The sound f r om the B-s p eake r te r minals will be the same as the sound f r om the A-s p eake r te r minals (multich annel sou r ces will be downmixed to 2 channels). ⢠SP ï¤ (off) â No sound is out p ut f r om the s p eake r s. Using the MULTI-ZONE controls The following ste p s use the f r ont p an el contr ols to adjust the sub zone volume and select sou r ces. See MULTI- ZONE remote controls on p age 64. 1P r e s s MULTI-ZONE ON/OFF on the front panel . Each pr ess selects a MULTI-ZONE o p tion: ⢠ZONE 2 ON â Selects you r pr ima r y ( ZONE 2 ) sub zone ⢠ZONE 2&3 ON â Select both sub zones ⢠ZONE 3 ON â Selects you r seconda r y ( ZONE 3 ) sub zone ⢠MULTI ZONE OFF â Switches the MULTI-ZONE featu r e off The MULTI-ZONE indicato r lights when the MUL TI-ZONE cont r ol has been switched ON. 2P r e s s MULTI-ZONE CONTROL on the front panel to select the sub zone(s) you want. If you selected ZONE 2&3 ON above, you can toggle between ZONE 2 and ZONE 3 . a.If the vi deo p ictur e dete r ior ates when this se ttings is switched ON , switch it OFF . b.⢠When set to a r esolution with which the TV (monito r ) is not com p atible, no p ictu r e is out p ut. Also, in some cases no p ictu r e will be out p ut due to co p yr ight pr otection signals. In this case, change the setting. ⢠When AUTO is selected, the r esolution is selected automatically acco r ding to the ca p acity of the TV (monito r ) co nnecte d by HDM I. When PURE is selected, the signals a r e out p ut with the same r esolution as when inp ut (see About the video converter on p age 22). ⢠If this is set to something othe r than AUTO , PURE and 480 i/576i analog signals a r e in p ut, 480 p /576p signals a r e out p ut f r om the com p onent out p ut te r minals. ⢠When 1080/24 p is se lected, de p ending on the sou r ce mate r ial the m ovement may be unnatu r al o r the p ictur e may not be clea r . In this case, set the r esolution to something othe r than 1080/24 p . ⢠1080/24 p is mainly effective fo r mov ie sou rce mate r ials. c. ⢠If the image doesnâÂÂt match you r monito r ty p e, ad just the as p ect r atio o n the sou r ce comp onent or on the monitor . ⢠This setting is only dis p layed when 480i/ p or 576i/ p video signals a r e being in p ut . d.This setting is only dis p layed when the video signals below a r e being in p ut: ⢠480i, 576i, 480 p , 57 6 p, 720 p , 1080i analog video signals ⢠480i, 576i, 480 p , 57 6 p, 720 p , 1080i, 1080 p , 1080 p 24 HDMI video signals e. ⢠This setting is valid fo r com p onent out p uts a nd HDM I out p ut. ⢠This se ttin g have the effect only fo r p ictur es r ecor ded in the inte r laced scan fo r mat (480i/5 76i o r 1080i signals). ⢠P.MOTION is di sabled when PCINEMA is set to ON . f. You canâÂÂt use this setting when the HDMI o r com p onent video signals a r e being in p ut . Note 1 ⢠The subwoofe r out p ut de p ends on the settings you made in Manual speaker setup on p age 84. Howeve r , if SP ï¤ B is selected above, no sound is hea r d f r om the subwoofe r (the LFE channel is not downmixed). ⢠All s p eaker systems (exce p t Speaker B c onnections) a r e switched off when head p hones a r e connected. SC-1525_UXJC B.book 63 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼ å¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂç«æÂÂæÂÂ¥ ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Using other functions 08 64 En ⢠When the r eceiver is on, 1 make s u r e that any o pe r ations fo r the sub zone a r e done while ZONE and you r selected sub zone(s) show in the dis p lay. If this is not showing, the f r ont p anel cont r ols aff ect the main zone on ly. 3U s e t h e INPUT SELECTOR dial to select the source for the zone you have selected. Fo r exam p le, ZONE 2 CD-R sends the sou r ce connected to the CD-R in p uts to the pr ima r y ( ZONE 2 ) sub r oom. â¢I f y o u s e l e c t TUNER , you can use the tune r contr ols to select a pr eset station (see Saving station presets on p age 46 if youâ r e unsu r e how to do t his). 2 4 When Speaker System is set to ZONE 2 , use the MASTER VOLUME dial to adjust the volume for th e sub zone. 5 When youâÂÂre finished, press MULTI-ZONE CONTROL again to return to t he main zone controls. You can also pr ess MULTI-ZONE ON/OFF on the f r ont p anel to switch off all outp ut to the sub zone(s). 3 MULTI-ZONE remo te controls Set the MULTI-ZONE o p er atio n switch to ZONE 2 o r ZONE 3 to o p er ate the co rr esp onding zone. The following table shows the p ossible MULTI-ZONE r emote contr ols: Making an audio o r a video record ing You can make an audio o r a video r ecor ding f r om the built-in tu ne r , o r f r om an audio o r video sou r ce connected to the r eceiver (such as a CD p layer or TV). 4 Kee p in mind y ou canâÂÂt ma ke a digital r ecor ding fr om a n analog sou r ce o r vice-ve r sa, so make su r e the com p onents you a r e r eco r ding to/f r om a r e hooked u p in the same way (see Connecting your equipment on p age 16 for mor e on conne ctions). Since the video conve r ter is not availab le when making r ecor dings (fr om the video OUT jacks) m ake s ur e to use the same ty p e of video cable fo r connecting you r r ecor der as you used to connect you r video sou r ce (the one you want to r ecor d) to this r eceiver . Fo r exam p le, you must connect you r r ecor der using Com p onent video if you r sou r ce ha s also been connected using Co m p onent video. 1 Select the source you want to record. Use the in p ut function bu ttons (o r INPUT SELECT ). 2 Prepare the source you want to record. Tune to the r adio station, load the CD, video , DVD etc. 3 Select the input signal acco rding to the signal to be recorded. Use the r emote cont r olâÂÂs SIGNA L SEL button. 4 Prepare the recorder. Inse r t a blank t a p e, MD, video etc. into the r eco r ding device and set the r ecor ding levels. Refe r to the inst r uctions that came with the r eco r de r if you a r e unsu r e how to do this. Most video r eco r de r s set the audio r ecor ding level automaticallyâÂÂche ck the comp onentâÂÂs inst r uction manual if youâ r e unsu r e. 5 Start re cording, then st art playback of the source component. Reducing the level of an analog signal The in p ut atten uato r lowe r s the in p ut level of an analog signal when itâÂÂs too st r ong. You can use this if you find that the OVER indicato r lights oft en o r you can hea r disto r tion in the sound. 5 ⢠Press on the remote control, then press A.ATT to switch the input attenuator on or of f. Note 1I f t h e r eceiver is in standby, the dis p lay is dimmed, and ZONE and you r selected sub zone(s) continue to show in the dis p lay. 2 The tune r cannot be tuned to mo r e than one station at a time. The r efor e, changing the station in one zone also changes the station in the othe r zone. Please be ca r eful not to change stations when r ec o r ding a r adio b r oadcast. 3 ⢠You wonâÂÂt be able to s witch the main zone off com p letely unless youâÂÂve switched off the MUL TI-ZONE cont r ol fi r st. ⢠If you donâÂÂt p lan to use the MULTI-ZONE featu r e fo r a while, tu r n off the p ower in both the sub and main r ooms so that this r eceiver is in standby. Button What it does ïµ Switches on /off p ower in the sub zone. INPUT SELECT Use to select the in p ut function in the sub zone. In p ut function buttons Use to select the in p ut functi on di r ectly (this may not wo r k fo r some fun ctions) in the sub zone. MASTER VOLUME / â Use to set the listeni ng volume in the sub zone. a a. You can only use this button when Speaker System is set to ZONE 2 . MUTE Mutes the sound o r r estor es the sou nd if it has been muted (adjusting the volume also r estor es the s ound). a 4⢠T h e r ece iver âÂÂs volume, Audio p ar ameter s (the tone cont r ols, fo r exam p le), and su rr ound effects have no effect on the r ecor ded signal. ⢠Some digital sou r ces a r e co p y- pr otected, and can only be r ecor ded in analog. ⢠Some video sou r ces a r e co p y- pr otected. Thes e cannot be r ecor ded. 5 The attenuato r isnâÂÂt available with digital sou r ces, o r when using the St r eam Di rect (ANALOG DIRECT) modes. RECEIVER SC-1525_UXJC B.book 64 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼ å¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂç«æÂÂæÂÂ¥ ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Using other functions 08 65 En Using the sleep timer The slee p time r switches the r eceiver in to standby afte r a s p ecified amount of time so you can fall asle e p without wo rr ying about th e r eceive r being left on all night. Use the r emote cont r ol to set the slee p tim e r . ⢠Press on the remote control, then press SLEEP repeatedly to set the sleep time. ⢠You can check the r emaining slee p time at any time by pr essin g SLEEP once. P r essing r ep eatedly will cycle th r ough the slee p op ti ons again . 1 Dimming the display You can choose between fou r br ightness levels fo r the f r ont p ane l dis p lay. Note that when selecting sou r ces, the dis p lay automatically b r ightens f o r a few seconds. ⢠Press on the remote control, then press DIMMER repeatedly to change the b rightness of the front panel display. Switching the HDMI output Set which te r min al to use when ou tp utting video and audio signals f r om the HDMI out p ut te r mi nals. The HDMI OUT1 te r minal is co m p atible with the Control with HDMI function. ⢠Press on the remote control, then press HDMI OUT . Please wait a while when Please wai t ... is dis p layed. The out p ut switches among HDMI OUT ALL , HDMI OUT 1 and HDMI OUT 2 each t ime the bu tton is pr essed. 2 Using the Web Control func tion The r eceive r can be o p er ated using a b r owse r f r om a com p ute r connected on the same LAN as the r eceive r . 1 Turn on the comput er and launch the Intern et browser. 2 In the address bar o n the browser, enter the IP address assigned to this receiver. Fo r exam p le, if the IP add r ess of this r eceive r is âÂÂ192.168.0.2âÂÂ, ente r âÂÂhtt p ://192.168.0.2/âÂÂ. When the connection is ma de with the r eceiver , a Top Menu will be dis p layed. This r eceiver âÂÂs IP addr ess can be f ound in the âÂÂIP a ddr ess, P r oxyâ menu ( p age 87). 3 Once the Top Menu is displayed, click th e button for the zone you want to oper ate. 4 Operate from th e screen for th e individual zone. ⢠Even when the r eceiver is in the standby mo de, it can be tu r ned on usin g the Web Control function. Fo r details, see Network Standby on p age 88. Checking your sy stem settings Use the status dis p lay sc r een to check you r cu rr ent settings fo r featu r es such as su rr ound back channel pr ocessing and you r cu rr ent MCACC pr eset. 1 Press on t he remote control, then press STATUS to check the system settings. The f r ont p anel dis p lay shows each of the following settings fo r th r ee seconds each: Input function , Sampling Fre quency , MCACC preset , ZONE 2 input , ZONE 3 input and HDMI OUT . 2 When youâÂÂre finished, press STATUS again to switch off t he displa y. Note 1 T he slee p time r is valid fo r all zones. If any zone is on, the slee p time r continues functioning. 2⢠T h e s y n c h r onized amp mode is canceled when the HDMI outp ut is switched. If you wish to use the synchr onized a mp mode, switch to HDMI OUT 1 , then select the synch r onized am p mode on the TV using the TVâÂÂs r emote c ont r ol. ⢠When the p ower is tu r ned off then back on afte r switching the HDMI out p ut, the in p ut is set to a setting between HDMI 1 and HDMI 4, o r BD. RECEIVER 30 min 60 min 90 min Off RECEIVER RECEIVER Web Control ZONE 2 POWER INPUT SELECT LISTENING MODE STEREO AUTO SURR/ALC/ STREAM DIRECT HOME THX STANDARD SURROUND ADVANCED SURROUND STEREO DVD VOLUME MUTE -60.0dB ON OFF Top Menu Main ZONE ZONE 3 RECEIVER SC-1525_UXJC B.book 65 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼ å¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂç«æÂÂæÂÂ¥ ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Using other functions 08 66 En Resetting the system Use this pr ocedu r e to r eset all the r eceive r âÂÂs settings to the facto r y default. Use the f r ont p anel c ontr ols to do th is. Set MULTI-ZONE to OFF . ⢠Disconnect the iP od and USB mem o r y device f r om the r eceive r befo r ehand. 1 Switch the receiver into st andby. 2 While holding d own ENTER on the front panel, press ïµ STANDBY/ON . The dis p lay shows RESET ï£ NO ï¤ . 3 Select â RESET â using PRESET ï«/ï¬ , then pr ess ENTER on the front panel. The dis p lay shows RESET? OK . 4 Press ENTER to con firm. OK a pp ea r s in the dis p lay to indicate that the r eceive r has been reset to the facto r y default settings. ⢠N ote that all settings wi ll be saved, even if the r eceiver is unp lugged. Default system s ettings Setting Default Digital Vide o Conve r sion ON SPEAKERS A S p eake r System No r mal (SB/FH) S p eake r Setting F r ont SMALL Cente r SMALL FH/FW SMALL Su rr SMALL SB SMALLx2 SW YES Su rr ound Position IN REAR C r ossove r 80 Hz X-Cu r ve OFF THX Audio Sett ing 4 ft< DIMMER B r ightest Netwo r k Standby OFF Inputs See Input function default and possible settings on p age 41. HDMI HDMI Audio Am p HDMI out p ut HDMI OUT ALL Cont r ol ON Cont r ol Mo de ALL DIs p lay Powe r Off YES DSP Powe r On Level LAST Volume Limit OFF Mute Level FULL Phase Cont r ol ON Sound Ret r iever iPod/USB, INTERNE T RADIO, ADAPTE R PORT function ON Othe r functions OFF Sound Delay 0.0 f r ame Dual Mono CH1 DRC AUTO SACD Gain 0 dB LFE Attenuate 0 dB Auto delay OFF Digital Safe ty OFF Effect Level ExtendedSte r eo 90 Othe r modes 50 2 PL II Music O p tions Cente r Width 3 Dimension 0 Pano r ama OFF Neo:6 O p tion s Cent e r Image Neo:6 MUSIC: 3 Neo:6 CINEMA: 10 All In p uts Listening Mode (2 ch/multi ch) AUTO SURROUND Listening Mode (H P) STEREO See also Setting the Audio options on p ag e 60 fo r othe r de fault DSP settin gs. MCACC MCACC Position Memo r y M1: MEMORY 1 Channel Level (M1 to M6 ) 0.0 dB S p eake r Distance (M1 to M6) 10.00 ft Standing Wave (M1 to M6) ATT of all channels/ filte r s 0.0 dB SWch Wide T r im 0.0 dB EQ Data (M1 to M6) All channels/ba nds 0.0 dB EQ Wide T r im 0.0 dB Setting Default SC-1525_UXJC B.book 66 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼ å¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂç«æÂÂæÂÂ¥ ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Controlling the rest of your system 09 67 En Chapter 9: Controlling the rest of your system About the Remote Setup men u The Remote Setu p mode is set by pr essing the numbe r button whi le pr essing R.SETUP . The diffe r ent item s on the Remote Setu p menu a re desc r ibed b elow. Fo r thei r setting pr ocedu r es, r efe r to the ex p lanatio ns fo r the r esp ective items. Note â¢Y o u c a n c a n c e l o r exit any of the step s by pr essing R.SETUP . â¢A f t e r o ne minute of inactivity, the r emote automatically exits the o p er ation. Operating multiple receivers U p to fou r r eceiver s can be op er ated discr etely using this r eceiver 's r emote contr ol when using multip le r eceiver s, pr ovided they a r e of the same model as this r eceiver . The r eceiver to be op er ated i s switched by inp utting the pr eset code to set the r emo te contr ol setting. ⢠Set the r emote modes on the r eceiver s befo r e using this functi on (see Remote Control Mode Setup on p age 89). 1 Press and hold R.SETUP , then press âÂÂ4â for three seconds. The LED flashes continuously. ⢠To cancel the preset setu p mode pr ess R.SETUP . 2 Press the number bu tton for the receiver (â Receiver 1 â to â Receiver 4 âÂÂ) you wish to oper ate. Fo r exam p le, to o p er ate âÂÂReceive r 2âÂÂ, pr ess â 2 âÂÂ. If the LED lights fo r one second, the setting h as been successfully com p leted. When the pr eset code is in p ut, the LED fla shes thr ee times to in dicate th at the se tting has f ailed. Setting What it does Preset recall P r eset codes can be set fo r the var ious inp ut functions . The r emote cont r ol codes of a numbe r of othe r devices (in cluding pr oducts of othe r b r ands) a r e pr eset in th e r emote con t r ol to allow these device s to be o p er ated. See âÂÂSelecting pr eset codes di r ec tlyâ on p age 68. Code learning If the desi r ed o p er ations cannot be p er for med even thou gh you have set th e pr eset codes, the r emote co ntr ol sign als of other devices can be lea r ned di r ectly. See âÂÂP r og r amming signals f rom othe r r emote cont r olsâ on page 68. Multi operation A se r ies of the r emote cont r ol o p er at ions fo r sta r ting listen ing o r viewing can be pr og r ammed. Multi p le r emote cont r ol codes can be set fo r th e diffe r ent in p ut function s. See âÂÂMulti o p e r ation and System offâ on p age 70. System off This is a function fo r automatically tu r ning off the p ower of devices connected to th e r eceive r . Multi p le r emote cont r ol codes can be set, as desi r ed. See âÂÂMulti op er ation and S ystem offâ on p age 70. Direct function This is a setting fo r changing on ly the r emote cont r ol unitâÂÂs o p er ation sc r een, wit hout cha nging the r eceive r âÂÂs in p ut, when th e r emote cont r ol unitâÂÂs in p ut functi on buttons a r e pr essed. This is convenient fo r using the r emote cont r ol u nit fo r devices not connected to the r ece iver . See âÂÂDi r ect functionâ on p age 69. Erase learning This functi on is used to e r ase r emote cont r ol codes that have been lea r ned. Code s lea r ned fo r the diffe r en t in p ut functions can be e r ased individually. See âÂÂE r asing one of th e r emote cont r ol button settingsâ on p age 69. Back light The backlight li ghting p atter n can be selected f r om among fou r modes, in conside r ation of convenience and batte r y se r vice life. See âÂÂSetting the backlight mode â on p age 70. Reset function This is a fu nction fo r r esetting pr eset codes that have been set. Key r esettin g can be done for individual in p ut functions . See âÂÂE r asing a ll lea r nt settings that a r e in on e in p ut functionâ on p age 69. All reset This is a function fo r r esetting all remot e cont r ol unit settings you have made to the defaults set u p on shi p ment f r om the fact o r y. See âÂÂResetting the r emote cont r ol sett ingsâ on p age 72. Change RC mode If you have m ulti p le Pionee r r eceivers, am p lifier s, etc., this setting can be used to pr event othe r units f r om o pe r ating s imultaneously when th e r emote cont r ol unit is o p er ated. S ee â O p er ating multi p le r eceiver sâ on p age 67. Setting What it d oes SC-1525_UXJC B.book 67 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼ å¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂç«æÂÂæÂÂ¥ ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Controlling the rest of your system 09 68 En Setting the remo te to control other components Most com p onents can be assigned to one of the in p ut function buttons (suc h as DVD o r CD ) using the com p onentâÂÂs manufactur er pr eset code sto r ed in th e r emote. Howeve r , the r e a r e cases whe r e only ce r tain functions may be cont r ollable after assigning the pr o pe r pr eset code, o r the codes fo r th e manufact u r er in th e r emote cont r ol will not wo r k fo r th e model that you a r e using. If you canâÂÂt find a pr eset code that matches the com p onent you want to cont r ol, you ca n still teach t he r emote individual commands fr om another r emote cont r ol (see Programming signals from other remote controls on p age 68). â¢F o r gr eater convenience, assign th e TV connected to the MONITOR OUT te r m inal to the TV CTRL button, and assi gn you r satellite/cable r eceive r o r set-to p box connected to the TV in p ut te r minal to the TV in p ut button. If a single device is connected to both te r minals, that device should be assigned t o both the TV CTRL and TV in p ut buttons. ⢠D evices may be assigned to the following in p ut function buttons. Selecting preset codes directly 1 Press and hold R.SETUP , then press âÂÂ1â for three seconds. The LED flashes continuously. ⢠To cancel the pr eset setu p mode pr ess R.SETUP . 2 Press the input function button for the component you want to control. When assigning pr eset codes to TV C ONTROL , pr ess TV CTRL he r e. The LED blinks once and flas hes continuously. 3 Use the number buttons to enter the 4-digi t preset code. See Preset cod e list on p age 107. If the LED lights fo r one second, the setting has been successfully com p leted. When the pr eset code is fully in p ut, the LED flashes th r ee times to indicate that the setting has failed. If this ha pp ens, ente r th e 4-digit pr eset code again. 4 Repeat steps 2 through 3 for the other components you want to control. To t r y out the r emote cont r ol, switch the com p onent on o r off (into standby) by pr essing ïµ SOURCE . If it doesnâÂÂt seem to wo r k, select the n ext code fr om the list (if the r e is one). 5 Press R.SETUP to exit the preset setup mode. Programming signals f rom other remote controls If the pr eset code fo r you r com p onent is not available, o r the available pr eset codes do not o p er ate co rr ectly, you can pr og r am sig nals f r om the r emote cont r ol of anothe r com p onent. This can also be used to pr og r am additiona l o pe r ations (buttons not c ove r ed in the pr esets) afte r assigning a pr eset code. 1 Ce r tain butt ons r e pr esent o p er ations that cannot be lea r ned f r om othe r r emote co nt r ols. The buttons available a r e shown below: 1 Press and hold R.SETUP , then press âÂÂ2â for three seconds. The LED flashes continuously. ⢠To cancel the pr eset setu p mode pr ess R.SETUP . 2 Press the input function button for the co mponent you want to control. The LED blinks once and fla shes continuously. INPUT SELECT TV CTRL iPod USB TUNER SIRIUS XM ADAPTER NET RADIO CD TV BD DVD R.SETUP SOURCE RECEIVER MUL TI OPERA TION DVR/BDR HDMI RECEIVER Note 1 T h e r emote can sto r e about 120 pr eset codes f r om othe r com p onents (this has been tested with c odes of Pionee r fo r mat only). AUTO / ALC / DIRECT D.ACCESS CH LEVEL A. A TT DIMMER SIGNAL SEL MCACC SLEEP HDMI OUT TV / DTV MPX PQLS PHASE CTRL ST ATUS THX PGM STEREO iPod CTRL HOME MENU TUNE TUNE TOOLS LIST PRESET TOP MENU BAND GUIDE T .EDIT VIDEO P ARAMETER AUDIO P ARAMETER ENTER PRESET RETURN CA TEGORY MEMORY ST ANDARD MENU ADV SURR AUDIO INFO CLASS ENTER DISP HDD DVD 5 46 8 0 79 2 13 / CLR CH CH TV CONTROL INPUT INPUT SELECT TV CTRL iPod USB TUNER SIRIUS XM ADAPTER NET RADIO CD TV BD DVD R.SETUP SOURCE RECEIVER MUL TI OPERA TION DVR/BDR HDMI RECEIVER MUTE MASTER VOLUME VOL SC-1525_UXJC B.book 68 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼ å¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂç«æÂÂæÂÂ¥ ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Controlling the rest of your system 09 69 En 3 Point the two remote controls towards each other, then press the button that will be doing the learning on this r eceiverâÂÂs remote co ntrol. The LED blinks once and flash es continuously. â¢T h e r emote cont r ols should be 3 cm (1 inch) a p ar t. 4 Press the corresp onding button on the other remo te control that is sending (teac hing) the sign al to this receiverâÂÂs remote control. If the LED lights fo r o ne second, the setting has been successfully com p leted. 1 5 To program additi onal signals for the current component repeat steps 3 and 4. To pr og r am signal s fo r anothe r com p onent, exit and r ep eat step s 2 thr ough 4. 6P r e s s R.SETUP to exit the pro gramming mode. Erasing one of the remote control button settin gs This e r ases o ne of the buttons you have pr og r ammed and r estor es the button to the factor y default. 1 Press and hold R.SETUP , then press âÂÂ7â for three seconds. The LED flashes con tinuously. ⢠To cancel the pr eset setu p mode pr ess R.SETUP . 2 Press the input f unction button correspo nding to the command to be er ased, th en pres s ENTER . The LED flashes once. 3 Press and hold the button to be erased for three seconds. If the LED lights fo r one second, the e r asing has been successfully com p leted. 4 Repeat step 3 to erase other buttons. 5P r e s s R.SETUP to exit the erasing mode. Erasing all learnt settings that are in one input function This o p er ation e r ases al l the o p er ational settings of ot he r devices that have been pr og r amm ed in one in p ut function, and r estor es the facto r y default. This functi on is handy fo r er asing all data pr ogr ammed fo r devices no longe r being used. 1 Press and hold R.SETUP , then press âÂÂ9â for three seconds. The LED flashes continuously. ⢠To cancel the preset setu p mode pr ess R.SETUP . 2 Press and ho ld the input fu nction button corresponding to the command to be erased for thr ee seconds. If the LED lights fo r one second, the e r asing has been successfully com p leted. Direct function ⢠Default setting: On You can use the di r ect function featu r e to cont r ol one com p onent using the r emote con t r ol while at the same time using you r r eceiver to p lay a di ffe r ent com p onent. This could let you, fo r exam p le, use the r emote cont r ol to set u p and listen to a CD on the r eceiver , and then use the r emote contr ol to r ewind a tap e in your VCR while you continue to listen to you r CD p layer . When di rect func tion is on, any co m p onent you select (using t he in p u t f u n c t i o n b u t t o n s ) w i l l b e s e l e c t e d b y b o t h the r eceiver and the r emote contr ol. When you t u r n di r ect function off, you can o p e r ate the r emote cont r ol without affecting the r ece iver . 1 Press and hold R.SETUP , then press âÂÂ5â for three seconds. The LED flashes continuously. ⢠To cancel the preset setu p mode pr ess R.SETUP . 2 Press the input function button for t he component you want to control . 3 Press âÂÂ1â (On) or âÂÂ0â (Off ) to switch the direct function mode. If the LED lights fo r one second, the setting h as been successfully com p leted. If the LED flashes th r ee times, the setting has failed. 4P r e s s R.SETUP to exit the setup. Note 1 ⢠Note that inte r fer ence f r om TV s o r othe r devices will sometimes r esult in the r emote cont r ol lear ning the w r ong signal. ⢠Some commands f r om othe r r emote cont r ols cannot be lea r ned, but in most cases the r emotes just need to be moved close r toget he r o r fa r the r a p art. ⢠If the LED flashes fo r five seconds, it means the memo r y is full. See E rasing al l learnt setting s that ar e in one input fu nction on p age 69 to e r ase a pr og r ammed button youâ r e not using to f r ee u p mo r e memo r y (note that some signals may take mo r e memo r y than othe r s). 3 cm (1 inch) This r eceive r âÂÂs r emote contr ol Othe r r emote cont r ol SC-1525_UXJC B.book 69 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼ å¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂç«æÂÂæÂÂ¥ ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Controlling the rest of your system 09 70 En Setting the backlight mode â¢D e f a u l t s e t t i n g : 1 (normal mode) The backlight lighting p atter n can be selected f r om among fou r mo d e s , i n c o n s i d e r ation of convenience and batte r y se r vice life. 1 Press and hold R.SETUP , then press âÂÂ6â for three seconds. The LED flashes continuously. ⢠To cancel the pr eset setu p mode pr ess R.SETUP . 2 Press the number button for the backlight mode you want to set. ⢠âÂÂ1â (normal mode) â The backlight is tu r ned on and off with the light button. Afte r it lights, it tu r ns of f automatica lly if no o p er ation is p er for med fo r 10 seconds. ⢠âÂÂ2â ( frequent lighti ng mode ) â The backlight tu r ns on when any button on the r em ote cont r ol is pr essed. It is tu r ned off with the lig ht button . Afte r it lights, it tu r ns off automaticall y if no o p er ation i s p er for med fo r 10 seconds. ⢠âÂÂ3â (eco mode) â The backlig ht is tu r ned on and off with the li ght button . Afte r it lights, i t tu r ns off automatica lly if no o p er ation is p er for med fo r 5 seconds. ⢠âÂÂ4â (off mode) â The backlight does not t u r n on eve n when the light button is pr essed. If the LED lights fo r on e second, the setting has been successfully com p leted. If the LED flash es th r ee, the setting has fa iled. 3 Press R.SETUP to exit the setup. Multi operation and System off The Multi o p e r ation featu r e allo ws you to pr og r am a se r ies of u p to 5 commands fo r the com p onents in you r system. ⢠Be su r e to call u p the pr eset codes of devices o r p er for m pr ogr amming signals for other r emote cont r ols befo r e multi o p e r ation memor y pr og r amming ( p age 68). The Multi o p er ation f eatu r e makes it easy to p er for m the following o p er ations by pr essing just two buttons. P r ess MULTI OPERATIO N and then the DV D in p ut function button to: 1. Swit ch this r eceive r on. 2. Swit ch this r eceive r âÂÂs in p ut to DVD. 3. T r ansm it a sequence of u p to five pr og r ammed commands. Simila r to Multi o p er ations, System off allows you to use two buttons to sto p and switch off a se r ies of com p onents in you r system at the same time. 1 Only one System off o pe r ation sequence may be pr og r ammed. P r ess MULTI OPERAT ION and then ïµ SOURCE to: 1. T r ansm it a sequence of u p to five pr og r ammed commands. 2. Switch off all Pion ee r devices including the r eceiver (exce p t DVD r eco r de r s and VCRs). Fo r g r eate r convenience, pr og r am this r eceive r to p er for m p ower on/off and p layback op er ations on non- Pionee r devices as well. 2 (The signals fo r Pionee r devices desc r ibed above a r e not contingent o n pr og r amming fo r non-Pionee r devices.) The buttons that can be pr og r ammed using Multi o pe r ation o r Sy stem off a r e the same buttons as those that can be pr og r ammed fo r othe r r emote cont r ols (see Programming signals from other remote controls on p age 68). Note 1⢠B e f o r e Multi op er atio n and System off will wo r k co rr ectly, you must set u p the r emote to wo r k with you r TV and othe r com p onents (see Setting the remote to control othe r components on p age 68 fo r mo r e on this). ⢠Some units may take some time to p ower up , in which case multi ple o p er ations may not be p ossible. ⢠Powe r on and off commands only wo r k with com p onents that have a standby mode. 2S o m e r emote contr oller s for other manufactur er s' devices use the same signals for switching the p ower o n a n d o f f . I n s o m e c a s e s , e v e n i f t h i s r eceiver is pr ogr ammed to p er for m these commands, p ower to the non-Pioneer devices may not be switched on and off co rr ectly. Pr ogr am the r ece ive r to p er fo r m these commands if the non-Pionee r device uses se p ar ate signals fo r p ower on/off. SC-1525_UXJC B.book 70 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼ å¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂç«æÂÂæÂÂ¥ ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Controlling the rest of your system 09 71 En Programming a Multi operation or a shutdown sequence 1 Press and hold R.SETUP , then press âÂÂ3â for three seconds. The LED flashes con tinuously. ⢠To cancel the pr eset setu p mode pr ess R.SETUP . 2 Press the input f unction button (or ïµ SOURCE button). For Multi o perations, pr ess the i n p ut function you wish to pr og r am (for examp le, if you wa nt to star t t he sequ ence by switching on you r DVD p layer , pr ess DVD ). 1 For System off, pr ess the ïµ SO URCE button. The LED blinks twic e and flashes c ontinuously. 3 If necessary, press the input function button for the component whose command you want to input. This is only necessa r y if the comm and is fo r a new com p onent (in p ut function). 4 Select the button for the command yo u want to input. The LED blinks once and flash es continuously. ⢠You donâÂÂt need to pr og r am the r eceiver to switch on o r off. This i s done automa tically. With Pionee r com p onents, you donâÂÂt need to pr og r am the p owe r to switch off in a shutdown sequence (exce p t DVD r eco r de r s). 5 Repeat steps 3 to 4 to progr am a sequence of up to five commands. If you pr ess R.SETUP befo r e pr ogr amming is comp leted, commands pr og r ammed u p to that p oint will be sto r ed. 6P r e s s R.SETUP to exit the pro gramming mode. Using multi operations 1P r e s s MULTI OPERATION . The LED flashes con tinuously. 2 Within five seconds , press an input function button that has been set u p with a multi operati on. The r eceive r switches on (if it was in standby) and the pr og r ammed multi op er ation is p er for med automatically. Using System off 1P r e s s MULTI OPERATION . The LED flashes continuously. 2 Within five seconds, press ïµ SOURCE . The command sequ ence you pr og r ammed will r un, the n all Pionee r com p onents will switch off 2 , followed by this r eceiver (switch of all the zones becomes off). Erasing the settings for the multi-operation This e r ases all the settings pr og r ammed in the r emote cont r ol fo r the multi-o p er ation. 1 Press and hold R.SETUP , then press âÂÂ8â for three seconds. The LED flashes continuously. ⢠To cancel the preset setu p mode pr ess R.SETUP . 2 Press the input function button contai ning the program you want to cancel or the ïµ SOURCE button for three seconds. If the LED lights fo r one second, the e r asing has been successfully com p leted. Note 1 W ith Multi o p er ation, the HDMI and TV CTRL settings cannot be made. Fo r other setta ble inp ut functions, see Setting the remote to control other component s on p age 68. 2I n o r der to avoid accidently switching off a DVD r ecor der that is cu rr ently r ecor ding, no DVD r ecor der p ower off codes ar e sent. SC-1525_UXJC B.book 71 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼ å¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂç«æÂÂæÂÂ¥ ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Controlling the rest of your system 09 72 En Resetting the remote control set tings Use this pr ocedu r e to r eset all the r emote cont r olâÂÂs settings to the facto r y default. 1 1 Press and hold R.SETUP , then press âÂÂ0â for three seconds. The LED flashes continuously. 2 Press and hold the ENTER button for t hree seconds. If the LED lights fo r on e second, the e r asing has been successfully com p leted. Default preset codes Controlling components This r emote cont r ol can cont r ol com p onents afte r ente r ing the pr o pe r codes (see Setting the remote to control other components on p age 68 fo r mo r e on this). Use the in p ut function bu ttons to select the co m p onent. â¢T h e TV CONTROL buttons on the r emote cont r ol a r e dedicated to cont r ol the TV assigned to th e TV CTRL button. If you have two TVs, assign the main TV to th e TV CTRL button. Note 1 When pr eset codes a r e set, all the signals lear ned in the inp ut function buttons ar e clear ed. This function is convenient when you want to r eset some but not all of in p ut function buttons. Input funct ion butto n Preset code DVD 2158 BD 2160 DVR/BDR 2150 HDMI 2159 TV 0116 CD 5066 TV CTRL 0116 RECEIVER ZONE 2 ZONE 3 LIGHT AUTO / ALC / DIRECT D.A CCESS CH LEVEL A.A TT DIMMER SIGNAL SEL MCACC SLEEP HDMI OUT TV / DTV MPX PQLS PHASE CTRL S TAT US THX PGM STEREO iPod CTRL HOME MENU TUNE TUNE TOOLS LIST CH TV CONTROL INPUT INPUT SELECT TV CTRL iPod USB TUNER SIRIUS XM ADAPTER NET RADIO CD TV BD DVD R.SETUP SOURCE RECEIVER MUL TI OPERA TION DVR/BDR HDMI RECEIVER MUTE MASTER VOLUME VOL PRESET TOP MENU BAND GUIDE T .EDIT VIDEO P ARAMETER AUD I O P ARAMETER ENTER PRESET RETURN CA TEGORY MEMORY ST ANDARD MENU ADV SURR AUD I O INFO CLASS ENTER DISP HDD DVD 5 46 8 0 79 2 13 / CLR CH SC-1525_UXJC B.book 72 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼ å¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂç«æÂÂæÂÂ¥ ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Controlling the rest of your system 09 73 En a. Cont r ols fo r BD. Button(s) TV TV (Mon itor) BD/DVD HDD/DVR VCR SAT/CATV ïµ SOURCE POWER ON/OFF POWER ON/OFF POWER ON/OFF POWER ON/OFF POWER ON/OFF POWER ON/OFF Numbe r buttons numerics numerics nume rics numerics numerics numerics ⢠(dot) ⢠(dot) KURO LINK CLEAR - ïª ENTER (CLASS) ENTER CH ENTER ENTER ENTER - ENTER EXIT/INFO EXIT TOP MENU TOP MENU - LIST TOOLS/GUI DE/ EPG USER MENU TOOLS GUIDE - G UIDE ï© /ïª /ï« / ï•© / ïª/ ï«/ ï•© / ïª/ ï«/ ï•© / ïª/ ï«/ ï•© / ïª/ ï«/ ï¬ - ï©/ ïª/ ï«/ ï¬ ENTER ENTER ENTER E NTER ENT ER - ENTER HOME MENU HOME MENU HOME MENU HOME MENU - HOME / MENU RETURN RETURN RETURN RETURN - RETURN HDD ( Red) Re d Red -H D D - Red DVD (Green) Green Green -D V D - Green (Yellow) Yellow Yellow -V C R - Yellow (Blue) Blue Blue MENU MENU - Blue ï¤ - - ï¤ï¤ï¤ï¤ ïÂÂ¥ - AUTO SETUP ïÂ¥ïÂ¥ïÂ¥ïÂÂ¥ ï§ - FREEZE ï§ï§ï§ï§ ï - - ïÂÂïÂÂïÂÂï ï® - - ï®ï®ï®ï® ï¯ ANT AV SELEC TION ï¯ï¯ - ï¯ ï° -S C R E E N S I Z E ï°ï° - ï° AUDIO AUDIO AUDIO AUDIO AUDIO A UDIO AUD IO DISP DIS PLAY DISPLAY D ISPLAY DISPLAY - DIS PLAY/INFO CH /â CH / - CH / - OUTPUT RESOLUT ION / - a CH / - CH / - CH / - SC-1525_UXJC B.book 73 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼ å¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂç«æÂÂæÂÂ¥ ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Controlling the rest of your system 09 74 En a. Cont r ols fo r SACD. b. Co nt r ols f o r MD. Button(s) LD CD/CD-R/SACD MD/DAT TAPE ïµ SOURCE POWER ON/OF F POWE R ON/OFF POWER ON/OFF POWER ON /OFF Numbe r bu ttons numerics numerics numerics - ⢠(dot) 10 >10/CLEAR CLEAR b CLEAR ENTER (CLASS) ENTER DISC/ENTER OPEN/CLOSE b ENTER T O P M E N U - -M S ï£ - LEGATO LINK a -M S ï¤ ï© /ïª /ï« / ï•© / ïª/ ï«/ ï¬ - - ïÂÂ¥ / ï§ / ï / ï® ENTER E N T E R - - - - SACD SETUP a - - RETURN - - - ï¤ ï¤ï¤ï¤ï¤ ïÂÂ¥ ïÂ¥ïÂ¥ïÂ¥ïÂÂ¥ ï§ ï§ï§ï§ï§ ï ïÂÂïÂÂïÂÂï ï® ï®ï®ï®ï® ï¯ ï¯ï¯ï¯ï¯ ï° ï°ï°ï°ï° AUDIO AUDIO PURE AUDIO a - - DISP DISPLAY/INFO TIME a - - Button(s) TV (Proje ctor) ïµ SOURCE POWER ON 1 MOVIE 2 STANDARD 3 DYNAMIC 4 USER1 5 USER2 6 USER3 7 COLOR 8 SHARP 9 GAMMA 0 COLOR - ⢠(dot) SHARP - ENTER (CLASS) COLOR TEMP EXIT INFO ï© /ïª /ï« / ï•© / ïª / ï«/ ï¬ ENTER ENTER TEST HIDE MENU ï HDMI1 ï¤ HDMI2 ï® COMP. ï¯ VIDEO ïÂÂ¥ S-VIDEO ï§ BRIGHT - ï° BRIGHT AUDIO POWER OFF DISP ASPECT CH /â CONTRAST / - SC-1525_UXJC B.book 74 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼ å¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂç«æÂÂæÂÂ¥ ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
The Advanced MCACC menu 10 75 En Chapter 10: The Advanced MCACC menu Making receiver settings from the Advanced MCACC menu The Advanced MCACC (Mul ti Channel ACoust ic Calib r ation) system was develo p ed in Pionee r âÂÂs labo r ato r ies with the aim of making it p ossible fo r home use r s to p er fo r m adjustments of the same level as in a studio easily and with high pr ecision. The acoustic cha r acte r istics of the listening envi r onment a r e measu r ed and the f r equency r es p onse is calib r ated acco r dingly t o allow hig h pr ecision, auto matic analysis and o p timal calib r ation of the sound field to b r ing it close r to a studio envi r onmen t than eve r befo r e. Fu r the r mo r e, while it was pr eviously difficul t to eliminate standing waves, this r eceiver is equi pp ed with a standing wave cont r ol function usin g a unique pr ocess to p er for m acoustic analysis and r educe thei r in fluenc e. This sectio n desc r ibes how to ca lib r ate the sound field automatically and fine-adjust the sound field data manually. 1 Switch on the receiver and your TV. Make su r e that the TVâÂÂs video in p ut is set to this r eceive r . 2 Press on the remote control, then press HOME MENU . A G r ap hical Use r Inte r face (GUI) sc r een a pp ea r s on you r TV. Use ï©/ïª/ï«/ ï¬ and ENTE R to navigate th r ough the sc r eens and select menu items. P r ess RETURN to confi r m and exit the cu rr ent menu. â¢P r ess HOME MENU at any time to exit the Home Menu . 3 Select â Advanced MCAC C â from the Home Menu , then press ENTER . 4 Select the setting yo u wa nt to adjust. ⢠Full Auto MCACC â See Automatically conducting optimum sound tuning (F ull Auto MCACC) on p age 38 fo r a quick and effective automatic su rr ound setu p . ⢠Auto MCACC â See Automatic MCACC (Expert) below fo r a mo r e detailed MCACC setu p . ⢠Manual MC ACC â Fine-tunes you r sp eake r settings and customizes the Acoustic Calib r ation EQ (see Manual MCACC setup on p age 77). ⢠Demo â No settings a r e save d and no e rro r s occu r . When the s p eaker s a r e connected to this r eceiver , the test tone is out p ut r ep eatedly. P r ess RETURN to cancel the test tone. Automatic MCACC (Expert) If you r setu p r equir es mo r e detailed settings than those pr ovided in Automatically conducting optimum sound tuning (Full Auto MCACC) on p age 38, yo u can customize you r setu p o p tions below. You can calib r ate you r system diffe r ently fo r u p to six diffe r ent MCA CC pr esets, which a r e useful if you have diffe r ent listening p os itions de p ending on the ty p e of sou r ce (fo r exa m p le, watching movies f r om a sofa, o r p laying a video game close to the TV). Important â¢M a k e s u r e the micr op hone/sp ea ker s ar e not moved du r ing th e Auto MCACC Setu p . â¢T h e s c r een saver will automat ically a pp ear after five minutes of inactivity . CAUTION ⢠The test tones used in the Auto M CACC Setu p ar e out p ut at high volume. THX î THX is a t r ademar k of THX Ltd., wh ich may be r egister ed in some ju r isdic tions. All r ights r eser ved. 1S e l e c t â Auto MCAC C â from the Advanced MCACC menu, then press ENTER . If the Advanced MCACC sc r een is n ot dis p layed, r efer to Making receiver settin gs from the Advanced MCACC menu above. RECEIVER SC-1525_UXJC B.book 75 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼ å¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂç«æÂÂæÂÂ¥ ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
The Advanced MCACC menu 10 76 En 2 Select the parameters you want to set. Use ï©/ïª to select the item, then use ï«/ï¬ to set. ⢠Auto MCA CC â The default is ALL ( r ecommended), but you can limit the system calib r ation to only one setting (to save time) if you want. 1 ⢠EQ Type (only available when the Auto MCACC Menu above is EQ Pro & S-Wa ve ) â This d ete r mines how the f r equency balance is adjusted. Afte r a single calib r at ion is p er fo r med, each of the following t h r ee co rr ection cu r ves ca n be sto r ed se p ar ately in the MCACC memo r y. SYMMETRY im p lements symmet r ic co rr ection fo r each p ai r of left and r ight s p eake r s to flat ten the f r equency-amp litude cha r acte r istics. ALL CH ADJ is a âÂÂflatâ se tting wh e r e all the s p eaker s a r e set individually so no s p ecia l weighti ng is given to any one channel. FRONT ALIGN 2 sets all s p eake r s in acco r dance wi th the f r ont s p eake r settings (no equalization is a pp li ed to the f r ont left and r ig ht channels). ⢠THX Speaker (only available when the Aut o MCACC Menu above is AL L or Speaker Setting ) â Select YES if you a r e using THX s p eaker s (set all s p eaker s to SMALL ), othe r wise leave it set to NO . ⢠STAND.WAVE Multi-Point (only avai lable when th e Auto MCA CC Menu above is EQ Pro & S-Wav e ) â In addition to measu r ements at the listening p osition, you can use two mo r e r efer ence p oi nts for which test tones will be analyzed fo r standing waves. This is useful if you want to get a balanced âÂÂflatâ c alib r ation fo r seve r al seating p ositions in you r list ening a r ea. Place the mic r op hone at th e r efer ence p oin t indicated on-sc r e en and note that the last microphone plac ement will be at your main l istening position: 3 Connect the microphone to the MCACC SETUP MIC jack on the front panel. Make su r e the r e a r e no obstacles between the s p eaker s and the mic r op ho ne. If you have a t r ip od, use it to p lace the mic r op hone so that itâÂÂs about e a r level at you r no r mal listening p osition. If you do not have a t r ip od, use some othe r object to install t he mic r op hone. 3 4 When youâÂÂre finished setting the options, select START then press ENTER . 5 Follow the instructions on-screen. 6 Wait for the Auto MCACC Setup to finish outputting test tones. A pr og r ess r ep or t is dis p layed on-sc r een while th e r eceiver outp uts test tones to deter mine the sp eaker s pr esent in you r setup . Tr y to be as quiet as p ossible while itâÂÂs doing this. 4 â¢W i t h e rr o r messages (such as Too m uch ambient noise! o r Ch eck microphone ) select RETRY afte r checking fo r ambient noise (see Problems when using the Auto MCACC Setup on p age 40) and ve r ifying the mic connection. If the r e doesnâÂÂt seem to be a pr oblem, you ca n sim p ly select GO NEXT and continue. 7 If necessary, confirm the speaker configuration in the GUI screen. The configu r ation shown on-sc r een should r eflect the actual s p eaker s you have . Note 1⢠W h e n d a t a m e a s u r em ent is taken (after selecting ALL or Keep SP System ), t he r ever b c ha r acter istics data (both befo r e- and afte r - calib r ation) that this r eceive r had been stor ing will be over wr itten. If you want to save the r ever b char acter istics data befor e measur ing, connect a USB memo r y device to this r eceiver and t r ansfer the data. ⢠When measu r eme nt is taken of data othe r than SYMMET RY (afte r se lecting ALL o r Keep SP System ), the data a r e not measur ed af te r the co rr ection. If you will need to mea su r e afte r co rr ection data, take the measu r ement using the EQ P r ofessional menu in the Manual MCACC setu p ( p age 77). ⢠The EQ Pro & S-Wave measu r em ent is also taken when Keep SP Syste m o r E Q Pro & S-Wave is selected. S ee Acoustic Calibration EQ Professional on p age 79 for mor e on this. ⢠Eithe r effec t of Acoustic Calib r ation E Q P r ofessional and Standing Wave can be switched on and off in the r es p ec tive MCACC pr eset . Fo r details, see Setting the Audio options on p age 60. 2 If you selected ALL o r Keep SP System as you r Auto MCACC m enu, you can sp ecify the MCAC C pr eset w he r e you want to save the SYMMETRY , ALL CH ADJ and FRONT ALIGN settings. 1 2 3 2nd r efe r ence p oint 3 r d r efe r ence p oint Main listening p osition 3 It may not be p ossible to measu r e co rr ectly if the mic r op hone is p laced on a table, sofa, etc. 4 Do not adjust the volume du r ing the test tones. This may result in inco rr ect s p eake r settings. PHONES SPEAKERS CONTROL MULTI-ZONE ON/OFF MCACC SETUP MIC PARAMETER ENTER (TUNE) (TUNE) (PRESET) (PRESET) AUDIO VIDEO TUNER EDIT USB HDMI 5 VIDEO CAMERA iPod iPhone AUTO SURR/ALC/ STREAM DIRECT HOME THX STANDARD SURROUND ADVANCED SURROUND STEREO BAND HOME ME NU RETURN Mic r op hone T ri p od SC-1525_UXJC B.book 76 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼ å¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂç«æÂÂæÂÂ¥ ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
The Advanced MCACC menu 10 77 En If no o p er ations a r e p er for med fo r 10 seconds while the s p eake r configu r atio n check sc r een is being dis p layed, the Auto MCACC Setu p w ill r esume autom atically. In this case, you donâÂÂt need to select â OK â and pr ess ENTER in ste p 8. ⢠If you see an ERR me ssage (o r the s p eaker configu r ation dis p la yed isnâÂÂt co rr ect), the r e ma y be a pr oblem with the s p eaker connec tion. If selecting RETRY doesnâÂÂt wo r k, tur n off the p ower and check the s p eaker co nnections. If the r e doesnâÂÂt seem to be a pr oblem, you can sim p ly use ï©/ïª to select the s p eaker and ï«/ï¬ to change the setting and continue. â¢I f Reverse Phase is dis p layed, the s p eaker âÂÂs wi r ing ( an d âÂÂ) may be inve r ted . Check the s p eaker connection s. 1 â If the connections we r e w r on g, tu r n off the p ower , disconnect the p ower co r d, then r econnect pr op er ly. Afte r this, p er fo r m the Fu ll Auto MCACC pr ocedu r e again. â If the connections we r e r ight, select GO NEX T and continue. 8 Make sure â OK â is select ed, then pres s ENTER . A pr og r ess r ep or t is dis p layed on-sc r een while the r eceiver outp uts mor e test tones to deter mine the o p timum r eceive r settings. Again, t r y to be as quiet as p ossible while this is ha pp ening. It may take 3 to 7 minutes. ⢠If you selected a STAND.W AVE Mult i-Point setu p (in ste p 2), you will be asked to p lace the mic at the 2nd and 3 r d r ef e r ence p oints befo r e finally p lacing i t at you r main liste ning p osition . 9 The Auto MCACC Setup procedure i s completed and the Advanced MCACC menu re appears automat ically. The settings made in the Auto MCACC Setu p shoul d give you excellent su rr ound sound f r om yo u r system, but it is also p ossible to adjust these settings manually using the Manual MCACC setu p menu (sta r ting below) o r Manual SP Setup menu (sta r ting on p age 84). 2 You can also choose to view the settings by sele cting individual p ar amete r s f r om the MCACC Data Check sc r een (see Checking MCACC Data on p age 81). P r ess RETURN afte r you have finished checking each sc r een. When youâ r e finished, select RETURN to go back to the Home Menu . Be su r e to disconnect th e mic r op hone f r om this r eceiver u p on com p letion of the Auto MCACC Setu p. Manual MCACC setup You can use the settings in th e Manual MCACC se tu p menu to make detailed adjustments when youâ r e mo r e familia r with the system. Befo r e making th ese settings, you should have al r eady com p leted Automatically conducting optimum sound tuning (Full Auto MCACC) on p age 38. You only need to make these settings once (unless you change the p lacement of you r cu rr ent s p eaker system o r add new s p eaker s). CAUTION ⢠The test tones used in the Manual MC ACC setu p a r e out p ut at high volu me. Important â¢P r ess the MCACC button while the p er tinent setup sc r eens a r e dis p layed to select MCACC pr esets. â¢F o r some of the settings below, youâÂÂll h ave to connect the setu p micr op hone to the f r ont p anel and p lace it about ea r level a t you r no r mal listening p osition. P r ess HO ME MENU to di s p lay the Home Menu befo r e you con nect the mic r op hone to this r eceive r . â¢S e e Proble ms when using the Auto MCACC Setup on p age 40 for notes r egar ding high backgr ound noise levels and othe r p ossible inte r fer ence. â¢I f y o u â r e using a su bwoofer , switch it on and tur n up the volume to the middle p osition. 1S e l e c t â Manual MCACC â from the Advanced MCACC menu. See Making receiver settings fr om the Advanced MCACC menu on p age 75 if youâ r e not a l r eady at this sc r een. 2 Select th e setting you want to adjust . If youâ r e doing this fo r the fi r st time, you might want to make these settings in o r der . ⢠Fine Channel Level â Ma ke fine adjustments to the ove r all balan ce of you r s p eaker system (see Fine Channel Level on p age 78). ⢠Fine SP Distance â Make pr ecise delay settings fo r you r s p eake r system (see Fine S peaker Distance on p age 78). Note 1I f t h e s p eaker is not p ointed to th e mic r op hone (listening p osition) o r when using s p eaker s th at affect the p hase (di p ole s p eaker s, r eflective s p eake r s, etc.) , Reverse Phase may be dis p layed even if the s p eake r s a r e pro pe r ly connected. 2⢠D e p ending on the char acter istics of your r oom, sometimes identical sp eaker s with cone sizes of ar ound 12 cm (5 inches) will end up with diffe r ent size settings. You can co rr ect the setting manually using t he Manual speaker setup on p age 84. ⢠The subwoofe r dist an ce s et ti ng may be fa r ther than the actual distance f r om the listening p osition. This setti n g s hou ld be acc u r ate (taking delay and r oom cha r acter istics into account) and gene r ally does not need to be changed. ⢠If Auto MCAC C Setu p measu r eme nt r esults a r e inco rr ect due to the inte r action of the sp eaker s and viewing envir onme nt, we r ecommend adjusting the settings manually. SC-1525_UXJC B.book 77 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼ å¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂç«æÂÂæÂÂ¥ ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
The Advanced MCACC menu 10 78 En ⢠Standing Wave â Cont r ol over ly r esonant low f r equencies in you r listening r oo m (see Standing Wave on p age 78). The last two settings a r e s p ecifi cally fo r customizing the p ar ameter s exp lained in Acoustic C alibratio n EQ Adjust on p age 79: ⢠EQ Adjust â Manually adjust the f r equen cy balance of you r sp eaker system while listenin g to test tones (see Acoustic Calibration EQ Adjus t on p age 79). ⢠EQ Professional â Calib r ate you r system based on the di r ect sound coming f r om the s p eaker s and make detailed settings acco r ding to you r r oomâÂÂs r ever b cha r acte r istics (see Acoustic Calibration EQ Professional on p age 79). Fine Channel Level â¢D e f a u l t s e t t i n g : 0.0dB (all channels) You can achieve bette r su rr ound sound by pr o pe r ly adjusting t he ove r all balance of you r s p eak er system. You can adjust the Channel Level of ea ch s p eaker in 0.5 dB inc r ements. The following setting can hel p you make detailed adjustments that you may no t achieve using the Manual speaker setup on p age 84. 1 Select â Fine Channel Level â from the Manual MCACC setup menu . The volume inc r eases to the 0.0 dB r efer en ce level. 2 Adjust the level of the left channel. This will b e the r efer ence s p eaker level, so you may want to kee p the level a r ound 0.0dB so that youâÂÂll have p lenty of r oom to adj ust the othe r sp eaker levels. â¢A f t e r pr essing ENTER , test tones will be outp ut. 3 Select each channel in turn and adjust the levels ( / âÂÂ12.0 dB ) as necessary. Use ï«/ï¬ to adjust the volume of the s p eake r you selected to match the r efe r ence s p eaker . When it sounds like both tones a r e the same volume, pr ess ïª to confi r m and continue to the ne xt channel. â¢F o r comp ar iso n p u rp oses, the r efer ence sp eaker will change de p ending on which s p eake r you select. ⢠If you want to go back and adj ust a channel, sim p ly use ï©/ïª to select it. 4 When youâÂÂre finished, press RETURN . You will r etur n to the Manual MCACC setu p menu. Fine Speaker D istance ⢠Default s etting: 10âÂÂ00â (all s p eaker s) Fo r pr o pe r sound de p th and se pa r ation with you r system, it is necess a r y to add a slight bit of delay to some s p eake r s so that all sounds will a rr ive at the listening p osition at the same time. You can adjust the distance of each s p eaker in half inch inc r ements. Th e following setting can hel p you make de tailed ad justments that you may not achieve using the Manual speaker setup on p age 84. 1 Select â Fine SP Distance â from the Manual MCACC setup menu. 2 Adjust the distance of the left channel from the listening position. 3 Select each channel in turn and adjust the dist ance as necessary. Use ï«/ï¬ to adjust the delay of the s p eaker you selected to match the r efer ence s p eake r . Listen to the r efer ence s p eaker and use it to measu r e the ta r get channel. F r om the listening p osit ion, face the two s p eake r s with you r a r ms outst r etched p ointing at ea ch s p eake r . T r y to make the two tones sound as if they a r e a rr iving simultaneously at a p osition s lightly in f r ont of you and between you r ar m s p an. 1 When it sounds like the delay settings a r e matched u p , pr ess ïª to confi r m and continue to the next ch annel. â¢F o r com p ar ison p u rp oses, the r efer ence s p eaker will change de p ending on which s p eaker you select. ⢠If you want to go back and adjust a channel, sim p ly use ï©/ ïª to select it. 4 When youâÂÂre finished, press RETURN . You will r etur n to the Manual MC ACC setu p menu. Standing Wav e ⢠Default s etting: ON 2 / ATT 0.0dB (all filt e r s) Acoustic standing waves occu r when, under ce r tain conditions, sou nd waves f r om your sp eaker system r esonate mutually with sound waves r eflected off the walls in you r listening a r ea. This can have a negative effect on the ove r all sound, es p ecially at ce r tain lowe r f r equenci es. De p ending on s p eaker p lacement, you r listening p osition, and ultimately the shap e of your r oo m, Note 1 ⢠If you canâÂÂt seem to achieve this by adjusting th e distance setting, you may need to change the angle of you r sp eaker s ve r y slightly. ⢠Fo r bet te r audibility, the subwoofe r emits a continuous test tone (oscillating p ulses a r e hea r d f r om you r othe r sp eake r s). Note that it may be difficult to com p ar e this tone with the othe r sp eaker s in your setu p (de p ending on the low f r equency r es p onse of the r efe r ence s p ea ke r ). 2 You can switch on o r off the Standing Wave and Acoustic Calib r ation EQ featu r e in the AUDIO PARAMETER menu. See Setting the Audi o options on p age 60 for mor e on this. SC-1525_UXJC B.book 78 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼ å¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂç«æÂÂæÂÂ¥ ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
The Advanced MCACC menu 10 79 En it r esults in an ove r ly r eso nant (âÂÂboomyâÂÂ) sound. The Standing Wave Cont r ol uses filte r s to r educe the effect of ove r ly r esonant sounds in you r listening a r ea. Du r ing p layback of a sour ce, you can customize the filter s used fo r Standing Wave Cont r ol fo r each of you r MCACC pr esets. 1 1 Select â Standing W ave â from the Manual MCACC setup menu. 2 Adjust the parameters for the Standing Wave Control. ⢠Filter Channel â Select the channel to which you will a pp ly the filte r (s): MAIN (all exce p t cente r ch annel and subwo ofe r ), Cen ter or SW (subwoofer ). ⢠TRIM (only available when the filt er channel abov e is SW ) â Adjust the subwoofe r channel level (to com p ensate fo r the diffe r ence in out p ut p ost-fi lte r ). ⢠Freq / Q / ATT â These a r e the filte r p ar ameter s wher e Freq re pr esents the f r equency you will be ta r geting and Q is the bandwidth (the highe r the Q, the na rr owe r the bandwidth, o r r ange) of the attenu ation ( ATT , the amount of r eduction to the ta r geted f r equency ). 3 When yo uâÂÂre finished, press RETURN . You will r etur n to the Manual MCACC setup me nu. Acoustic Calibration EQ Adjust ⢠Default setting: ON / 0.0dB (all channels/b ands) Acoustic Ca lib r ation E qualization is a kind of r oom equalize r fo r you r s p eake r s (exclud ing the su bwoofe r ). It wo r ks by measu r ing the acoustic c ha r acte r istics of you r r oom and neutr al izing the ambient char acter istics that can colo r the o r iginal sou r ce mate r ial ( pr oviding a âÂÂflatâ equalization setting). If youâ r e no t satisfied with th e adjustment pr ovided in Automatically conducting optimum sound tuning (Full Au to MCACC) on p age 38 o r Automatic MCACC (Expert) on p age 75, you can also adjust these settings manually to get a f r equency balance th at suits you r tastes. 1 Select â EQ Adjust â from the Manual MCACC setup menu. 2 Select the channel(s) you want and adjust to yo ur liking. Use ï©/ïª to select the channe l. Use ï«/ï¬ to select the f r equency and ï©/ïª to boost o r cut the EQ. When youâ r e finished, go ba ck to the to p of the sc r een and pr ess ï« to r etur n to Ch , then use ï©/ïª to select the channe l. â¢T h e OVER! indicato r shows in the disp lay if the f r equency a djustment is too d r astic and migh t disto r t. If this ha pp ens, b r in g the level down until OVER! disa pp ea r s fr om the disp la y. Tip â¢C h a n g i n g t h e f r equency cur ve of one ch annel too d r astically wi ll affect the ove r all balance . If the s p eaker balance seems un even, you can r aise o r lowe r channel levels using te st tones with the TRIM featu r e. Use ï©/ ïª to select TRIM , then use ï«/ï¬ to r aise o r lowe r the channel level fo r the cu rr ent s p eak er . 3 When youâÂÂre finished, press RETURN . You will r etu r n to the Manual MCAC C setu p menu. Acoustic Calibration EQ Professional This setu p m inimizes the unwanted effe cts of r oom r ever ber ation by allo wing you to calib r ate your system based on the di r ect sound coming f r om the s p eaker s. How to use Acoustic Calibration EQ Profes sional If you find that lowe r f r equencie s seem ove r ly r ever ber ant in you r listening r oom (i.e. it sounds âÂÂboomyâÂÂ), o r that diffe r ent chann els seem to exhibit diffe r ent r eve r b cha r acte r is tics (when Ty p e A o r Ty p e B shown on the diag r ams on the following a pp lies), select EQ Pro. & S- Wave (o r ALL ) fo r the Auto MCACC setting in Automatic MCACC (Expert) on p age 75 to calib r ate the r oom automatically. ⢠Type A: Reve rberance of high vs. lo w frequencies ⢠Type B: Reverb cha rac teristics for different channels If the p atter n is as shown above, select the 30-50ms setting. If not, this setting is no t necessa r y. Note 1 S tanding Wave cont r ol filte r settings cannot be chang ed du r ing p layback of sou r ces using the HDMI connection. Level Low f r equencies Acoustic Cal. EQ P r o. calib r ation r ange Time (in msec) 80 160 High f r equencies Conventional MCACC EQ calib r ation r ange 0 Level F r ont L Acoustic Cal. EQ P r o. calib r ation r ange Time (in ms ec) 80 160 F r ont R Conventional MCACC EQ calib r ation r ange 0 SC-1525_UXJC B.book 79 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼ å¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂç«æÂÂæÂÂ¥ ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
The Advanced MCACC menu 10 80 En Using Acoustic Calibration EQ Profess ional 1 Select â EQ Professional âÂÂ, then press ENTER . 2 Select an option and press ENTER . ⢠Reverb Measuremen t â Use this to meas u r e the r ever b char acter istics befor e and a fter calibr ation. ⢠Reverb View â You can check t he r ever b measu r ements made for sp ecified fr equen cy r anges in each ch annel. 1 ⢠Advanced EQ Setup â Use this to select the time p er iod that will be used fo r f r equency adjustment and calib r ation, based on the r eve r b measu r ement of you r listening a r ea. Note that customizing system calib r ation using this setu p will al te r the settings you made i n Automatically conducting optimum sound tuning (Full Auto MCAC C) on p age 38 o r Automatic MCACC (Expert) on p age 75 and is not necessa r y if youâ r e satisfied with these settings. 3 If you selected â Reverb Measurement âÂÂ, select EQ ON or OFF , and then START . The following o p tions dete r mine how the r ever b cha r acte r istics of you r listening a r ea a r e dis p layed i n Reverb View : ⢠EQ OFF â You will see the r eve r b cha r acte r ist ics of you r listening a rea without the equalization p er for med by this r eceiver (befor e calibr ation ). ⢠EQ ON â You will see the r eve r b cha r acte r ist ics of you r listening a rea with the equalization p er fo r med by this r eceiver (afte r calib r ation). 2 Note that the EQ r esp onse may not a pp ear entir ely flat due to adjustments necessa r y fo r you r listening ar ea. 3 When the r ever b measu r ement is finished, you can select Reverb View to see the r esults on-sc r een. See Professional Cal ibratio n EQ graphical output on p age 96 fo r t r oubleshooting info r mation. 4 If you selected â Reverb Vi ew âÂÂ, you can check the reverb characteristics for ea ch channel. Press RETURN when youâÂÂre done. The r eve r b cha r acte r istics a r e dis p layed when the Full Auto MCACC o r Reverb Measurement measu r ements a r e conducted. 4 Use ï«/ï¬ to select the chann el, f r equency and calib r ation setting you want to check. Use ï©/ïª to go back and fo r th between the th r ee. The r eve r b cha r acte r isti cs g r ap h befo r e and afte r EQ calib r ation can be dis p layed by selecting Calibrati on : Before / After . Note that the ma r kers on the ve r tical axis indicate decibels in 2 dB ste p s. 5I f â Advanced EQ Setup â is select ed, select the MCACC memory to be stored, then enter the desired time setting for cali bration, and then select START . 5 Based on the r ever b measu r ement above, you ca n choose the time p er iod that will be used fo r the final f r equency a djustment and calib r ation. Even though you can make thi s settin g without r ever b measu r ement, it is best to use the measu r ement r esults as a r efer ence fo r you r time setting. Fo r an o p timal system calib r ation based on the di r ect sound coming f r om the s p eaker s, we r ecommend using the 30-50ms setting. Use ï«/ï¬ to select the setting. Use ï©/ïª to switch between them. Select the setting f r om the fo llowing tim e p er iods (in milliseconds): 0-20ms , 10-30ms , 20-40ms , 30-50ms , 40- 60ms , 50-70ms and 60-80ms . This setting will be a pp lied to all channels du r ing calib r ation. When youâ r e finished, select START . It will take about 2 to 4 minutes fo r the cali b r ation to f inish. Afte r the Acoustic Cal ib r ation Equalization is set, you a r e given the o p tion to check the settin gs on-sc r een. Note 1I f t h e Reverb View pr ocedu r e is pe r fo r med afte r the Automatically conducting o ptimum sound tuning (Full Auto MCACC) on p age 38 or Reverb Measurement o p er ation, de p ending on the standing wave cont r ol setting, diffe r ences may a pp ea r on the r eve r b g r ap h. With the Auto MCACC function, the r ever ber ations a r e measu r ed with the standing waves cont r olled, so the r eve r b char acter istics g r ap h shows the cha r acte r istics with the effect of the standing waves eliminated. By cont r ast, the Reverb Measurement function measu r es the r ever ber ations without cont r olling the standing waves, so the g r ap h indicates the r ever b cha r acter istics including the effect of th e standing wave s. If you wish to check the r ever b cha r acter istics of the r oom itself (with the standing waves as such), we r ecommend using the Reverb Measurement function. 2 ⢠The calib r ation co rr es p onding to the cu rr ently selected M CACC pr eset will be used when EQ ON is selected. To use anothe r MC ACC pr eset, pr ess MCACC to select the MCACC memo r y you want to stor e. ⢠The pr edicted r ever b cha r acter istics afte r calib r ation can be acqui r ed with the Full Auto MCACC function ( Automati cally conducting optimum sound tu ning (Full Auto MCACC) on p age 38), but he r e the actually measu r ed r ever b char acter istics after calibr ation can be acquir ed. 3A f t e r auto calib r ation with EQ Type : SYMMETRY ( Full Auto MCACC , etc.), the gr ap h for the infe rr ed r ever b ch a r acter istics can b e dis p layed by select ing Reverb View . To dis p lay the actually measu r ed r ever b c ha r acter istics afte r EQ calib r ation, measu r e with EQ ON . 4T h e Afte r dis p lay when measur ements have been made using the Full Au to MCACC o r Auto MCACC ( ALL o r KEEP SP system ) function shows the g r ap h fo r the infe rr ed r ever b cha r acte r istics after EQ Type : SYMMETRY calibr ation. 5T o s p ecify the p lace wher e the MCACC memor y is to be stor ed, pr ess MCACC to select the MCACC memor y you want to stor e. SC-1525_UXJC B.book 80 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼ å¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂç«æÂÂæÂÂ¥ ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
The Advanced MCACC menu 10 81 En Checking MCACC Data At the pr ocedu r e of Automatically cond uc ting optimum sound tuning (Full Auto MCACC) on p age 38, the pr ocedu r e of Automatic MCACC (Expert) on p age 75 or afte r fine-adjusting at Manual MCACC setup on p age 77, you can check you r calib r ated settings using the GUI sc r een. The data can be t r ansfe rr ed to a com p ute r using a USB device to check it on the co m p uter âÂÂs sc r een as well. 1 Press on the remote control, then press HOME MENU . A G r ap hical Use r Inte r face (GUI) sc r een a pp ea r s on you r TV. Use ï©/ïª/ï«/ ï¬ and ENTE R to navigate th r ough the sc r eens and select menu items. P r ess RETURN to confi r m and exit the cu rr ent menu. 2 Select â MCACC Data Check â from the Home Menu . 3 Select the setting you want to check. ⢠Speaker Setting â Used to check the settings of the s p eake r systems. See Speaker Setting on p age 81 fo r mo r e on this. ⢠Channel Level â Used to check the out p ut level of the diffe r ent s p eake r s. See Channel Level on p age 81 fo r mo r e on this. ⢠Speaker Distance â Used to check the distance to the diffe r ent s p eaker s. See Speaker Distance on p age 81 for mor e on this. ⢠Standing Wave â Used to check the standing wave cont r ol filte r settings. See Standing Wave on p age 81 fo r mo r e on th is. ⢠Acoustic Cal EQ â Used to check the calib r ation values of the listening envi r onmentâÂÂs f r equency r esp onse. See Acoustic Cal EQ on p age 81 fo r mo r e on this. ⢠Output MCACC data â See Output MCACC data on p age 82 for mor e on this. 4P r e s s RETURN to go back to the MCACC Data Check menu, repeating steps 2 and 3 to check other settings. 5 When yo uâÂÂre finished, press RETURN . You will r etur n to the Home Menu . Speaker S etting Use this to dis p lay the s p eake r size an d numbe r of s p eake r s. See Speaker Setting on p age 85 fo r mo r e on this. 1 Select â Speaker Setting â from the MCACC Data Check menu. 2 Select the channel you want to check. Use ï©/ïª to select the channel. T he co rr es p ondi ng channel on the layout diag r am is highligh ted. Channel Level Use this t o dis p lay the level of the va r ious channels. See Channel Level on p age 86 fo r mo r e on this. 1S e l e c t â Channel Level â from t he MCACC Data Check menu. 2 When â MCACC â is highlighted, use ï«/ï¬ to select the MCACC preset you want to check. The level of the va r ious channels set at the selected MCACC pr eset is dis p layed. â --- â is disp layed for channe ls that a r e not connected. Speaker D istance Use this to d is p lay the distance f r om the diffe r ent channels to the listening p osition. S ee Speaker Distance on p age 86 fo r mo r e on this. 1S e l e c t â Speaker Distance â from the MCACC Data Check menu. 2 When â MCACC â is highlighted, use ï«/ï¬ to select the MCACC preset you want to check. The distance f r om the va r ious channel s set at the selected MCACC pr eset is dis p layed. â --- â is dis p layed fo r channels that a r e not conn ected. Standing Wave Use this to dis p lay the standing wave r elated adjustment values fo r the va r ious MCACC memo r ies. See Standing Wave on p age 78 fo r mo r e on th is. 1S e l e c t â Standing Wave â from the MCACC Data Check menu. 2 When â Filter Channel â is highlighted, use ï©/ïª to select the channel for which you want to check standing wave control . The standing wave r elated calib r ation value fo r the selected channe l sto r ed at the selected M CACC pr eset and its g r ap h a r e dis p layed. 3P r e s s ï« to highlight â MCACC âÂÂ, then use ï©/ïª to select the MCACC preset you want to check. Acoustic Cal EQ Use this to d is p lay the calib r ation valu es fo r the f r equency r es p onse of the va r ious channels set in the diffe r ent MCACC pr esets. See Acoustic Calibration EQ Adjust on p age 79 for mor e on this. 1S e l e c t â Acoustic Cal E Q â from t he MCACC Data Check menu. 2 When â Ch â is highl ighted, u se ï©/ïª to select the channel. The calib r ation value fo r the f r equency r es p onse of the selected channe l sto r ed at the selected M CACC pr eset and its g r ap h a r e dis p layed. RECEIVER SC-1525_UXJC B.book 81 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼ å¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂç«æÂÂæÂÂ¥ ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
The Advanced MCACC menu 10 82 En 3 Press ï« to highlight â MCACC âÂÂ, then use ï©/ïª to select the MCACC preset you want to check. Output MCACC data Befo r e continuing, make su r e you have com p leted ste p 2 in Checking MCACC Data on p age 81. The da ta measu r ed with the Advanced MC ACC function is t r ansmitted to the USB device. 1 The 3D g r ap hs of the r ever b cha r acter is tics befo r e and afte r calib r ation and the MCACC r esults ( pa r amete r s) can be che cked on y ou r com p ute r. 1 Select â Output MCACC data â from the MCACC Data Check menu. When the r eceiver is r eady fo r tr ansmission, âÂÂPlease connect your U SB memory for the MCACC data, then press OK to output them.â shows on the GUI sc r een. 2 Connect your USB device to the USB terminal on the front panel, then select âÂÂOKâÂÂ. âÂÂPlease wa it...â will be dis p layed on the sc reen and t r ansmission of measu r ement data to the USB device will begin. T r ansmission is com p lete when âÂÂCompleteâ is dis p layed. 2 Data Management This system allows you to sto r e u p to six MCACC pr esets, allowing you to calib r ate you r system fo r diffe r ent listening p osit ions (or f r equency adjustments fo r the same listening p osition). 3 This is useful fo r alte r nate settings to match the kind of sou r ce youâ r e listening to and whe r e youâ r e sitting (fo r exam p le, watching movies f r om a sofa, o r p laying a video game clos e to the TV). F r om this menu you can co p y f r om one pr eset to anot he r , name pr esets fo r easier identificat ion and clear a ny ones you donâÂÂt need. 1 Press on the remote control, then press HOME MENU . A G r ap hical Use r Inte r face (GUI) sc r een a pp ea r s on you r TV. Use ï©/ïª/ï«/ï¬ and ENTER to navigate th r ough th e sc r eens and select menu items. P r ess RETURN to confi r m and exit the cu rr ent menu. 2 Select â Data Management â from the Home Menu . 3 Select the setting you want to adjust. ⢠Memory Rename â Name you r MCACC pr es ets fo r easy identification (see Renaming MCACC presets below). ⢠MCACC Memory Cop y â Co p y settings f r om one MCACC pr eset to anothe r (see Cop ying MCACC preset data on p a ge 83). ⢠MCACC Memory Clear â Clea r any MCACC pr esets that you donâÂÂt want (see Clearing MCACC presets on p age 83). Renaming MCACC presets If you have seve r al diffe r ent MCACC pr esets that youâ r e using, you may want to r ename the m fo r easie r identificat ion. 1 Select â Memory Rename â from t he Data Manageme nt setup menu. 2 Select the MCACC preset you want to rename, then select an appropriate preset name. Use ï©/ïª to select the pr eset, th en ï«/ï¬ to select a pr eset name. 3 Repeat for as many MCAC C presets as necessary, then press RETURN when youâÂÂre fi nished. You will r etur n to the Data Management setu p menu. Note 1 MCACC da ta and p ar ameter s a r e t r ansfe rr ed f r om this r eceive r to a USB device and by connecting the USB device to a com p ute r , the data is im po r ted via the MCACC softwa r e in the com p ute r . See Connecting a USB device for Advanced MCACC output on p age 35 fo r mo r e on this. 2 Only one set of r ever b cha r acter istics is sto r ed on the r eceiver . If you wish to com p ar e seve r al diffe r ent measu r ement r esults, t r ansmit the data to the USB memo r y each time r ever b measu r eme nts a r e taken. 3 This can be done in Automatically conducting optim um sound tuning (Full Au to MCACC) on p age 38 o r Automatic MCACC (Expert) on p age 7 5, eithe r of which you should have al r eady com p leted. RECEIVER SC-1525_UXJC B.book 82 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼ å¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂç«æÂÂæÂÂ¥ ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
The Advanced MCACC menu 10 83 En Copying MCACC preset data If you want to man ually adjust the Acoustic Calib r ation EQ (see Manual MCACC setup on p age 77), we r ecommend cop ying your cu rr ent settings 1 to an unused MCACC pr eset. Instead of just a fla t EQ cu r ve, this will give you a r efer ence p oint f r om which to sta r t. 1 Select â MCACC Memory Cop y â from the Data Manageme nt setup menu. 2 Select the setting you want to copy. ⢠All Data â Co p ies all the settings of the select ed MCACC pr eset memo r y. ⢠Level & Distance â Co p ies only the channel leve l and s p eake r distance settings of the selected MCACC pr eset memo r y. 3 Select the MCACC preset youâÂÂll be copying the settings â From âÂÂ, then specify where you want to copy them (â To âÂÂ). Make su r e you donâÂÂt ove r wr ite an MCACC pr eset youâ r e cu rr ently using (thi s canâÂÂt be undone). 4 Select â OK â to confirm and copy t he settings. When MCACC Memory Copy? is dis p layed, select YES . If NO is selected, the memo r y is not co p ied. Completed ! shows in the GUI sc r een to confir m the MCACC pr eset has been co p ied, then you automatically r etur n to the Data M anagement se tup menu. Clearing MCACC presets If you a r e no long e r using one of the MCACC pr esets sto r ed in memo r y, you can choose to clea r the calib r ation settings of that pr eset. 1 Select â MCACC Memory Clear â from t he Data Manageme nt setup menu. 2 Select the MCACC preset you want to clear. Make su r e you donâÂÂt clea r an MCACC preset youâ r e cu rr ently using (thi s canâÂÂt be undone). 3 Select â OK â to confirm and clear t he preset. When MCACC Memory Clear? is dis p layed, select YES . If NO is selected, the memo r y is not clea r ed. Completed ! shows in the GUI sc r een to confir m the MCACC pr eset has been clea r ed, then you automatically r etur n to the Data M anagement se tup menu. Note 1 T he settings made in Auto matically conducting optimum sound tuning (Full Auto MCACC) on p age 38 o r Automatic MCACC (Expert) on p age 75. SC-1525_UXJC B.book 83 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼ å¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂç«æÂÂæÂÂ¥ ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
The System Setup and Other Setup menus 11 84 En Chapter 11: The System Setup and Other Setup menus Making receiver settings from the System Setup menu The following section desc r ibes how to change the s p eake r- r elated settings manually and m ake va r ious othe r settings ( in p ut selec tion, OSD lan guage select ion, etc.). 1 Switch on the receiver and your TV. Make su r e that the TVâÂÂs video in p ut is set to this r eceiver . 2 Press on the remote cont rol, then press HOME MENU . A G r ap hical Use r Inte r face (GUI) sc r een a pp ea r s on you r TV. Use ï©/ïª/ï«/ï¬ and ENTER to navigate th r ough the sc r eens and select menu items. P r ess RETUR N to confi r m and exit the cu rr ent menu. â¢P r ess HOME MENU at any time to exit the Home Menu . 3 Select â System Setup â from th e Home Menu , then press ENTER . 4 Select the setting you want to adjust. ⢠Manual SP Setu p â Sets the ty p e of connection used fo r su rr ound back te r minals and the size, numbe r distance and ove r all balance of the connected s p eake r s (see Manual speaker setup below). ⢠Input Se tup â S p ecifies what youâÂÂve connected to the digital, HDMI and com p onent video inp uts (see The Input Setup menu on p age 40). ⢠OSD Langu age â The GUI sc r eenâÂÂs dis p lay la nguage can be changed (see Changing the OSD di splay language (OSD Language) on p age 38). ⢠Network Setu p â Conducts the setu p necessa r y to connect thi s unit to the netwo r k (see Network Setup menu on p age 87). ⢠Other Setup â Makes customized settings to r eflect how you a r e using the r eceiver (see The Other Setup menu on p age 89). Manual speaker setup This r eceive r allows you to make detailed settings to o p timize the s u rr ound soun d p er for mance. You only need to make these settings once (unless you change the p lacement of your cu rr ent sp eaker system or add new s p eake r s). These settings a r e designed to customize yo u r system, but if youâ r e satisfied with the settings made in Automatically cond ucting optimum sound tu ning (Full Auto MCACC) on p age 38, it isnâÂÂt necessa r y to make all of these settings. CAUTION ⢠The test tones used in the Manual SP Setup a r e out p ut at high volume. 1 Select â Manual SP Setu p âÂÂ, then press ENTER . See Making receiver sett ings from the System Setup me nu above if youâ r e not a l r eady at this scr een. 2 Select the setting you want to adjust. If you a r e doing this fo r the fi r st time, you may want to adjust these settings in o r de r : ⢠Speaker System â S p ecifies how you a r e using you r su rr ound back s p eake r s ( p age 85). ⢠Speaker Setting â S p ecifies the size and numbe r of s p eake r s youâÂÂve connected ( p age 85). ⢠Channel Le vel â Adjusts the ove r all bala nce of you r s p eake r syste m ( p age 86). ⢠Speaker Distance â S p ecifies the distance of you r s p eake r s f r om th e listening p osition ( p age 86). ⢠X-Curve â Adjusts the tonal balance of you r s p eaker system fo r movie soundt r acks ( p age 87). ⢠THX Audio Setting â S p ecifies whethe r you a r e using a THX s p eaker set u p (p age 87). 3 Make the adjustments necessa ry for each setting, pressing RETURN to confirm after each screen. RECEIVER SC-1525_UXJC B.book 84 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼ å¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂç«æÂÂæÂÂ¥ ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
The System Setup and Other Setup menus 11 85 En Speaker system setting ⢠Default setting: Normal(SB/FH ) The r e a r e seve r al ways you can use the s p eake r te r minals with this r eceiver . In addition to a no r mal home thea te r setu p whe r e they a r e used fo r the f r ont h eight s p eake r s o r f r ont wide s p eake r s, they can be used fo r bi-am p ing the f r ont s p eaker s o r as a n inde p endent s p eaker syste m in anothe r r oom. 1 Select â Speaker System â from the Manual SP Setup menu. See Making receiver settings from the System Setup menu on p age 84 if youâ r e not al r eady at this sc r een. 2 Select the speaker system setting. ⢠Normal(SB/FH) â Select fo r no r mal ho me thea te r use with f r ont height s p eaker s in you r main (s p eaker system A) setu p . ⢠Normal(SB/FW) â Select fo r no r mal home theate r use with f r ont wide s p eaker s in you r main (s p eake r system A) setu p . ⢠Speaker B â Sel ect to use the B s p eaker te r minals to listen to ste r eo p laybac k in anothe r r oom (see Switching the speaker ter minals on p age 63). ⢠Front Bi-Amp â Select this setting if youâ r e bi- am p ing you r f r ont s p eake r s (see Bi-amping your speakers on p age 21). ⢠ZONE 2 â Select to use the (su rr ound back) B s p eake r te r minals fo r an inde p endent syste m in anothe r zone (see Using the MUL TI-ZONE controls on p age 63). 3I f y o u s e l e c t e d Normal(SB/ FH) , Normal(SB/ FW) , or Speaker B in Step 2, select the placement of the surround speakers. In a 7.1-channel su rr ound system with su rr ound s p eake r s p laced di r ectly at the sides of the listening p osition, the su rr ound sound of 5.1-channel sour ces is hea r d f r om the side. This function mixes the sound of the su rr ound s p eake r s with the su rr ound back s p eake r s so that the su rr ound sound is hea r d f r om diagonally to the r ear as it sho uld be. 1 ⢠ON SIDE â Select when the su rr ound s p eake r s is p ositioned r ight beside you. ⢠IN REAR â Select when the su rr ound s p ea ke r is p ositioned ob liquely beh ind you. 4 When â Setting Change? â is display ed, select Yes . If No is selected, the setting is not changed. You will r etu r n to the Man ual SP Setup menu. Speaker S etting Use this s etting to s p ecify you r sp eak er configu r ation (size, numbe r of s p eaker s and c r ossover f r equency) 2 . It is a good idea to make su r e that the settings made in Automatically conducting optimum sound tuning (Full Auto MCACC) on p age 3 8 a r e co rr ect. Note that this setting a pp lies to all MCACC pr esets, and cannot be set inde p endently. 1S e l e c t â Speaker Setting â from the Manual SP Setup menu. 2 Choose the set of speakers that you want to set, then select a speaker size. Use ï«/ï¬ to select the siz e (and n umbe r ) of eac h of the following s p eaker s: 3 ⢠Front â Select LARGE if you r f r ont s p eak e r s r e pr oduce bass fr equencies effectively, or if you didnâÂÂt connect a subwoofe r . Select SMALL to send the bass f r equencies to the subwoofe r . ⢠Center â Select LARGE if you r cente r s p ea ke r r e pr oduces bass fr equencies effectively, or select SMALL to send bass f r equenci es to the othe r s p eake r s o r subwoofe r . If you didnâÂÂt connect a c ente r s p eake r , choose NO (the cente r c hannel is sent to the f r ont s p eaker s). ⢠FH â Select LARGE if you r f r ont height s p eake r s r e pr oduce bass fr eque ncies effectively, o r sel ect SMALL to send bass f r equenci es to the othe r s p eake r s o r subwo ofe r . If you didnâÂÂt connect f r ont height s p eake r s, ch oose NO (the f r ont height channel is sent to th e f r ont s p eaker s). 4 ⢠FW â Select LARGE if you r f r ont wide s p eake r s r e pr oduce bass fr equencies effectively, or select SMALL to send bass f r equenci es to the othe r s p eake r s o r subwo ofe r . If you didnâÂÂt connect f r ont wide s p eaker s, choose NO (the f r ont wide channel is sent to the f r ont s p eaker s). 5 Note 1D e p ending on th e p ositions of the s p eaker s and the sound sou r ce, in some cases it may not be p ossible to achieve good r esults. In th is case, set the setting to ON SIDE o r IN REAR. 2I f y o u â r e using a THX sp eaker setup , set all sp eaker s to SMA LL . 3 I f you select SMALL fo r the f r ont s p eaker s the subwoofe r will automatically be fixed to YES . Also, the ce nte r , su rr ound, su rr ound back, f r ont height and f r ont wide s p eaker s canâÂÂt be set to LARGE if the f r ont sp eaker s ar e set to SMA LL . In this case, all bass f r equencies ar e sent to the subwoofe r . 4 ⢠You can adjust this setting only when Speaker Sy stem setting is Norm al(SB/FH) . ⢠If the su rr ound s p eaker s ar e set to NO , this se tting will automatically be set to NO . 5 ⢠Yo u can adjust this setting only when Speaker System setting is Normal(SB/FW) . ⢠If the su rr ound s p eaker s ar e set to NO , this se tting will automatically be set to NO . SC-1525_UXJC B.book 85 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼ å¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂç«æÂÂæÂÂ¥ ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
The System Setup and Other Setup menus 11 86 En ⢠Surr â Select LARGE if you r su rr ound s p eake r s r e pr oduce bass fr equencies effectively. Select SMALL to send bass f r equencies to the other s p eake r s o r subwoofe r . If you didnâÂÂt connect su rr ound s p eake r s choose NO (the sound of the su rr ound chann els is sent t o the f r ont s p eake r s o r a subwoofe r ). ⢠SB â Select the numbe r of su rr ound back s p eaker s you have (one, two o r non e). 1 Select LARGEx2 o r LARGEx1 if you r su rr ound back sp eaker s r e pr oduce bass f r equencies effectively. Select SMALLx2 o r SMALLx1 to send bass f r equencies to the other s p eake r s o r subwoofe r . If you didnâÂÂt connect su rr ound back s p eake r s choose NO . ⢠SW â LFE signals and bass f r equencies of channels set to SMALL a r e out p ut f r om the subwoofe r when YES is selected. Choose the PLUS setting if you want the subwoofe r to out p ut bass sound contin uously o r you want dee p er bass (the bass f r equencie s that would no r mally come out the f r ont and cen te r s p eake r s a r e also r outed to the subwoofe r ). 2 If you did not connect a subwoofe r cho ose NO (the bass f r equencies a r e out p ut f r om othe r s p eake r s). 3 Select â X. OVER â and set the crossover frequency. 3 F r equenc ies below th is p oint will be sent to the subwoofe r (o r LARGE sp eake r s). 4 When youâÂÂre finished, press RETURN . You will r etur n to the Manual SP Setup menu. Channel Level Using the cha nnel level setting s, you can adj ust the ove r all balance of you r s p eake r system, an im p or tant facto r when setting u p a hom e theate r system. 1 Select â Channel Level â from the Manual SP Setup menu. The test tones will sta r t. 2 Adjust the level of each channel using ï«/ï¬ . Use ï©/ïª to switch s p eake r s. Adjust the level of each s p eaker a s the test tone is emitted. 4 3 When youâÂÂre finished, press RETURN . You will r etur n to the Manual SP Setup menu. Tip ⢠You can change th e channel levels by pr ess RECEIVER , then pr ess CH LEVEL , and then using ï«/ ï¬ on the r emo te contr ol. Speaker Di stance Fo r good sound de p th and se p ar ation f r om you r system, you need to s p ecify the distance of yo u r sp eaker s f r om the listening p ositio n. The r eceiver can then add the pr o pe r delay needed fo r effective su rr ound sound. 1 Select â Speaker Distance â from t he Manual SP Setup menu. 2 Adjust the distance of each speaker using ï«/ï¬ . You can adjust the dista nce of each s p eaker in 1 / 2 inch Inc r ements. 3 When youâÂÂre finished, press RETURN . You will r etur n to the Manual SP Setup menu. Tip â¢F o r best su rr ound sound, make su r e the su rr ound back s p eaker s a r e the same distance f r om the listening p osition. Note 1 ⢠If you selected ZONE 2 o r Front Bi-Amp (in Speaker system setting on p age 85) you canâÂÂt adjust the su rr ound back settings. ⢠If the su rr ound s p eaker s a r e set to NO , the su rr ound back s p eaker s will automatically be set to NO . 2 If you have a subwoofe r and like lots of bass, it may seem logical to select LARGE fo r you r fr ont s p eaker s and PLUS fo r the subwoofe r . This may not, howeve r , yield the best bass r esults. De p ending on the s p eaker p lacement of you r r oom you may actually ex p er ience a dec r ease in the amount of bass due low f r equency cancellations. In this case, t r y ch anging the p osition o r di r ection of s p eaker s. If you canâÂÂt get good r esults, listen to the bass r es p onse with it set to PLUS and YES or the f r ont s p eaker s set to LARGE and SMALL alte rnatively and let you r ea r s judge which sounds best. If youâ r e having pr oblems, the easie st o p tion is to r oute all the bass sounds to the subwoofe r by selecting SMAL L fo r the f r ont s p eake r s. 3 ⢠This setting decides the cutoff between bass sounds p laying back f r om the s p eake r s selected as LARGE , o r the subwoofe r , and bass sounds p laying back fr om those selected as SMALL . It also decides whe r e the cutoff will be for bass sounds in the LFE channel. ⢠With Full Auto MCACC Setu p or Auto MCACC Setu p ( ALL or Speaker Setting ), the setting her e will not a pp ly and the c r ossover fr equency will be automatically set. C r ossover f r equency is a f r equency aimed at achieving the o ptimal sound field taking into account the bass ca p acity of all connected s p ea ke r s and human au r al cha r acte r istics. ⢠If youâ r e using THX s p eaker s, confi r m that the c r ossover f r equency is set to 80Hz . 4I f y o u a r e using a Sound Pr essur e Level (SPL) meter , take the r eadings fr om your main listening p osition and adjust the level of each sp eaker to 75 dB SPL (C-weighting/slow r eading). SC-1525_UXJC B.book 86 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼ å¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂç«æÂÂæÂÂ¥ ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
The System Setup and Other Setup menus 11 87 En X-Curve Most so undt r acks mixed fo r cinema sound too b r ight when p layed back in lar ge r ooms. The X-Cur ve sett ing acts as a kind of r e-equalization fo r home theater listening, and r estor es pr op e r tonal balance of movie so undtr acks. 1 1 Select â X-Curve â from the Manual SP Setup menu. 2 Choose the X-Curve setting you want. Use ï«/ï¬ to adjust the setting. The X-Cu r ve is ex pr essed as a downwa r ds slo p e in decibels p er octave, sta r ting at 2 kHz. The sound becomes less b r ight as the slo p e inc r eases (to a maximum of âÂÂ3.0dB/oct ). Use the following guidel ines to set the X-Cu r ve acco r ding to you r r oom size: â¢I f y o u s e l e c t OFF , th e f r equency cu r ve will be flat and the X-Cu r ve has no effect . 3 When yo uâÂÂre finished, press RETURN . THX Audio Setting This menu allow s the use r t o a d j u s t v a r ious THX featu r es includ ing Loudness Plu s, SBch pr ocessing, SB S p eaker Position, THX Select2 Sub woofe r (on /off), and Bounda r y Gain Cont r ol . Please see p age 103 fo r details r egar ding these THX featu r es. 1 Select â THX Audio Setting â from t he Manual SP setup menu. 2 Select either ON or OFF for the THX Loudness Plu s setting. 3 Specify whether the SBch processing is AUTO or MANUAL. ⢠AUTO â When su rr ound back s p eaker s a r e connected, whethe r o r not su rr ound back channel signals a r e pr esent in the audio signals being in p ut is detected and the a ppr opr iate THX su rr ound mode is set. ⢠MANUAL â The desi r ed THX su rr ound mode can be selected rega r dless of whethe r o r not su rr ound back channel sign als a r e pr esent in the au dio signals being in p ut. 4 Specify the distance of your sur round back speakers from each other. ⢠0âÂÂ1 ft â Su rr ound back s p eake r s withi n 1 foot a p ar t. ⢠>1âÂÂ4 ft â Su rr ound back s p eake r s between 1 and 4 feet a p ar t. ⢠4 ft< â Su rr ound back s p eake r s m o r e than 4 feet a pa r t (default). 5 Specify whether your subwo ofer is Select2 certified or not. If you r subwoofe r isnâÂÂt THX Select2 c e r tified, but you still want to switch bounda r y gain com p ensation on, select YES he r e, but the effect might not wor k pr op er ly. 6 Select either ON or OFF for Boundar y Gain Compensation setting. 7 When youâÂÂre finished, press RETURN . You will r etu r n to the Man ual SP Setup menu. Network Setup menu Setting u p the netwo r k to listen to Inte r net r adio on this r eceiver . 1 Press on t he remote control, then press HOME MENU . A G r ap hical Use r Inte r face (GUI) sc r een a pp ea r s on you r TV. Use ï©/ïª/ï«/ï¬ and ENTER to navigate th r ough the sc r eens and select men u items. P r ess RETURN to confi r m and exit the cu rr ent menu. 2S e l e c t â System Setup â from the Home Menu . 3S e l e c t â Network Setup â from the System Setup menu. 4 Select th e setting you want to adjust . If you a r e doin g this fo r the fi r st time, you may want to adjust these settings in o r der : ⢠IP Address, Proxy â Sets u p the IP add r ess/P r oxy of this r eceive r ( p age 8 8). ⢠Information â Checks the MAC add r ess and the fi r mwa r e ve r sion of the Netwo r k section of this r eceiver (p age 88). ⢠Network Standby â Allows the Web Cont r ol function to be used even when the r eceive r is in the standby mode ( p age 88). Note 1S i n c e t h e pr inci p al is the same, X-Cu r ve isnâÂÂt a pp lied when youâ r e using any of the Home THX o r Pu r e di r ect modes. Room size (ft 2 ) ⤠400 ⤠550 ⤠650 ⤠800 ⤠2200 ⤠1 2000 X-Curve (dB/oct) âÂÂ0.5 âÂÂ1.0 âÂÂ1.5 â 2.0 âÂÂ2.5 âÂÂ3.0 RECEIVER SC-1525_UXJC B.book 87 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼ å¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂç«æÂÂæÂÂ¥ ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
The System Setup and Other Setup menus 11 88 En IP address/Proxy setting In case the r outer connected to the LAN te r minal on this r eceiver is a br oadband r outer (with a built-in DHCP se r ve r function), sim p ly tu r n on the DHC P se rve r function, and you will not need to set u p the netwo r k manually. You must set u p the netwo r k as desc r ibed below only when you ha ve connected this r eceiver to a b r oadband r oute r without a DHCP se r ve r fun ction. Befo r e you set u p the netwo r k, consult with you r ISP o r the netwo r k manage r fo r the r equir ed settin gs. It is advised that you also r efer to th e o p er ation manua l su pp lied with you r netwo r k com p onent. 1 IP Address The IP add r ess to be ente r ed must be defined within the following r anges. If the IP addr ess defined is beyond the following r anges, you cannot listen to Inte r net r adio stations. Class A: 10.0.0.1 to 10.255.255.254 Class B: 172.16.0.1 to 172.31.255.254 Class C: 192.168.0.1 to 192.168.255.254 Subnet Mask In ca se an x DS L m o de m o r a te r minal ada p te r is di r ectly connected to this r eceiver , ente r the subnet ma sk pr ovided by you r ISP on p ap er . In most case s, ente r 255.255.255.0. Default Gateway In case a gateway ( r outer ) is connected to this r eceiver , ente r the co rr es p onding IP add r ess. Primary DNS Server/Secondary DNS Server In case the r e is only on e DNS se r ver add r ess pr ovided by you r ISP on p ap er , ente r it in the âÂÂPrimary DNS Serverâ field. In case the r e a r e mo r e than two DNS se r ve r ad d r esses, ente r â Secondary DNS Serverâ in the othe r DNS se r ver add r ess fi eld. Proxy Hostname/Proxy Port This setting is r equir ed w hen you conne ct this r eceiver to the Inte r net via a pr oxy se r ve r . Enter th e IP add r ess of you r pr oxy se rve r in the âÂÂProxy Hostnameâ field. Also, ente r the p or t numbe r of you r pr oxy se r ve r in the âÂÂProxy Portâ field. Tip â¢P r ess ï©/ïª or the numer ic bu ttons to ent er al p hanume r ic cha r acte r s. To delete al p hanume r ic ch a r acte r s en te r ed one at a tim e, pr ess CLEAR . 1 Select â IP Address, Proxy â from the Network Setup menu. 2 Select the DHCP setting you want. When you select ON, the netwo r k is automatically set u p , and you do not need to fo llow Ste p s 3. P r oceed with Ste p 4. If the r e is no DHCP se r ver on th e netwo r k and you select ON , this r eceiver will use its own Auto IP function to dete r mine the IP add r ess. 2 3 Enter th e IP Addre ss , Subnet Mask , Default Gateway , Primary DNS Server and Secondary DNS Server . P r ess ï©/ïª to select a numbe r and ï«/ï¬ to move the cu r so r . 4 Select â OFF â or â ON â for the Enable Proxy Server setting to deactivate or a ctivate the proxy server. In case you select âÂÂOFFâ , pr oceed with Ste p 7. In case you select âÂÂONâ , on the ot he r hand, pr ocee d with Ste p 5. 5 Enter the address of your proxy server or the domain name. 6 Enter the port number of your proxy ser ver. Use the nume r ic buttons to ente r the p or t num be r . 7 Select â OK â to confirm the IP Address/Proxy setup. Checking the MAC address You can check the MAC add r ess. 1 Select â Information â from the Network Setup menu. Network Standb y This setting allows the Web Control functi on ( p age 65) fo r o p er ating the r eceive r f r om a com p ute r connected on the same LAN as the r eceiver to be used even when the r eceiver is in the standby mode. 1 Select âÂÂNetwork Standbyâ from the Network Setup menu. 2 Specify whether the Network Standby i s ON or OFF. ⢠ON â The Web Cont r ol function can be used even when the r eceiver is in the standby mode. ⢠OFF â The Web Cont r ol function cannot be used when the r eceiver is in the standby mode (This lets you r educe p owe r consum p tion in the standby mode). Note 1 In case you make changes to the netwo r k configu r ation without the DHCP se r ver function, make th e co rr es ponding changes to the netwo r k settings of this r eceiver . 2T h e I P a d d r ess deter mined by the Auto IP function i s 169 .254.X.X. You cannot listen to an Inter net r adio station if the IP addr ess is set for the Auto IP function. SC-1525_UXJC B.book 88 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼ å¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂç«æÂÂæÂÂ¥ ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
The System Setup and Other Setup menus 11 89 En The Other Setup menu The Other Setu p menu is whe r e you can make customized set tings to r eflect h ow you a r e using th e r eceiver . 1 Press on the remote control, then press HOME MENU . A G r ap hical Use r Inte r face (GUI) sc r een a pp ea r s on you r TV. Use ï©/ïª/ï«/ ï¬ and ENTE R to navigate th r ough the sc r eens and select menu items. P r ess RETURN to confi r m and exit the cu rr ent menu. 2 Select â System Setup â from the Home Menu . 3 Select â Other Setup âÂÂ, then press ENTER . 4 Select the setting yo u wa nt to adjust. If you a r e doing this fo r the fi r st time, you may want to adjust these settings in o r der : ⢠HDMI Setup â Synch r onizes this r eceive r with you r Pionee r com p onent su pp o r ting Control with HDMI ( p age 57). ⢠Volume Se tup â Sets u p the volum e- r elated o pe r ations of this r eceive r (see below) . ⢠Remote Control Mode Setup â Sets this r eceive r âÂÂs r emote contr ol mode (see below). ⢠Flicker Reductio n â Adjusts the way the GUI sc r een looks ( p age 90). ⢠EXTENSION Setup â Allows the CU-RF100 to be used even when the r eceiver is in the standby mode ( p age 90). ⢠Multi Ch In Se tup â S p ecifies the o p tional settings fo r a multi-channel in p ut ( p age 90). ⢠Pairing Blueto oth Setup â Use to p ai r a Bluetooth ADAPTER and Bluetooth wi r eless technology device ( p age 51). 5 Make the adjustments necessary for ea ch setting, pressing RETURN to confirm after each screen. Volume Setup You can set the maximum volume of this r eceiver or s p ecify what the volume level will be when the p owe r is tu r ned on. 1S e l e c t â Volume Setup â from the Other Setup menu. 2 Sele ct the Power ON Level setting you wa nt. The volume can b e set so th at it is always set to the same level when the r eceiver âÂÂs p ower is tu r ned o n. ⢠LAST (default) â When the p owe r is tu r ned on, the volume is set to the same level as when the p ower was last tu r ned off. â¢â --- â â When th e p ower is tur ned on, the volume is set to minimum level. ⢠âÂÂ80.0dB to 12. 0dB â S p ecify the volum e to be set when the p ower is tu r ned on, in st e p s of 0 .5 dB. It is not p ossible to set a volume level g r eater than the value s p ecified at Volume Limit setu p (see below). 3 Sele ct the Volume Limit setting you want. Use this function to limi t the maximum volume. The volume cannot be inc r eased above the level set he r e, even by o p er ating MASTER VOLUME button (or the dial on the f r ont p an el). ⢠OFF (default ) â The maximum volume is not limited. ⢠âÂÂ20.0dB/ âÂÂ10.0d B / 0.0dB â The maximum volume is limited to the value set he r e. 4 Sele ct the Mute Level setting you want. This sets how much the volume is to be tu r ned down when MUTE is pr essed. ⢠FULL (default) â No sound. ⢠âÂÂ40.0dB/ âÂÂ20.0d B â The volume will be tu r ned dow n to the level s p ecified he r e. 5 When youâÂÂre finished, press RETURN . You will r etu r n to the Other Setup menu. Remote Control Mode Setup ⢠Default setting: 1 This sets this r eceiver âÂÂs r emote cont r ol mode to pr event e rr oneous o pe r ation when mul ti p le units of the r e ceiver a r e being used. 1S e l e c t â Remote Control Mode Setup â from t he Other Setup menu. 2 Select the Remote Control Mode setting you want. 3S e l e c t â OK â to change the remote control mode. 4 Follow the instructions on the screen to change the remote co ntrolâÂÂs settin g. See Operatin g multip le receivers on p age 67. 5 When youâÂÂre finished, press RETURN . You will r etu r n to the Other Setup menu. RECEIVER SC-1525_UXJC B.book 89 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼ å¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂç«æÂÂæÂÂ¥ ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
The System Setup and Other Setup menus 11 90 En Flicker Reduction Setup â¢D e f a u l t s e t t i n g : OFF The GUI sc r eenâÂÂs r esolution can be inc reased. If you feel the GUI sc r een is ha r d to see, tr y changing this setting. Note that the r esolution in this set ting only affects the GUI sc r een; it has no influence on the video out p ut. 1 Select â Flicker Reductio n Setup â from the Other Setup menu. 2 Select the Flicker Reduction setting you want. 3 When youâÂÂre finished, press RETURN . You will r etur n to the Other Setup menu. EXTENSION Setup â¢D e f a u l t s e t t i n g : OFF The CU-RF100 can be used to o p er ate the r eceiver by RF communications. To do so, set the EXTENSION setting to ON . When ON is set he r e, the r eceiver can be op er ated even when the r eceiver is in the standby mode. 1 Select â EXTENSION Setup â from the Other Setup menu. 2 Select the EXTENSION setting you want. 3 When youâÂÂre finished, press RETURN . You will r etur n to the Other Setup menu. Multi Channel Input Setup You can adjust the level of th e subwoofe r fo r a multi- channel in p ut. Al so, when the multi- channel inp ut is selected as an in p ut function, you can dis p lay the video images of othe r in p ut fu nctions. In the Multi C hannel In p ut Setu p , you can assign a video in p ut to the multi- channel in p ut. 1 Select â Multi Ch In Setup â from the Other Setup menu. 2 Select the â SW Input Gain â setting you want. ⢠0dB â Out p uts sound of the subwoofe r at the level o r iginally r eco r ded on the sou r ce. ⢠10dB â Out p uts sound of the subwoofe r at the level inc r eased by 10 dB. 3 Select the â Video Inpu t â setting yo u want. When the multi-channel in p ut is select ed as an in p ut function, you can dis p lay the video images of o the r in p ut functions. The video in p ut can be selected f r om the following: DVD , TV/SAT , DVR/BDR , VIDEO , OFF . 4 When youâÂÂre finished, press RETURN . You will r etur n to the Other Setup menu. SC-1525_UXJC B.book 90 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼ å¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂç«æÂÂæÂÂ¥ ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Additional in formation 12 91 En Chapter 12: Additional information Speaker Setting Guide In o r der to achieve an even bette r su rr ound effect, it is im p or tant to accu r ately p ositio n the sp eaker s and make thei r volume an d tone cha r acte r istics unifo r m so as to finely focus t he multi-channe l sound. The th r ee majo r elements in p ositioning the s p eak er s a r e distance , an gle and orientatio n (the di r ection in which the s p eaker s a r e p ointing). Distance : The distance of all the s p eaker s should be equal. Angle : The s p eaker s should be hor izontally symm etr ical. Orientation : The o r ientation should be ho r izontall y symmet r ical. In most homes, howeve r , it is not p ossible to achieve this envi r onment. Fo r the distanc e, on this r eceiv e r it is p os sible to aut omatically co rr ect the s p eake r distance elect r ically to a pr ec ision of 1 / 2 inch using the Full Auto MCACC Setu p function ( p age 38). Step 1: Speaker layout and dist ance adjustment Use s p eaker stands o r the like to make su r e the s p eaker s a r e steady, and leave at least 10 cm (4 inches) f r om the su rr ounding walls. Position the s p eake r s attentively so that the s p eaker s on the left and r ight a r e at equal angles f r om the listeni ng p osition (cente r of the adjustments). (We r ecomm end using co r ds, etc., wh en adjusting the layout.) Ideally all the s p eaker s should be equidistant f r om the listeni ng p osition. Tip â¢I f t h e s p eaker s cannot be set at equal d istances (on a ci r cle), use th e Auto MCACC Set u p s p eaker distance co rr ection and Fine S p eake r D istance functions to make them equalize the distance a r ti ficially . Step 2: Adjust ing the speak er height Adjust the heights (angles) of the diffe r en t s p eaker s. Adjust so that the f r ont s p eaker units r e pr oducing mid- and high f r equencies is roughly at th e height of the ea r s. If the cente r s p eaker cannot be set at the same height as the f r ont s p eaker s, adjust its angle of elevation to p oint it to the listen ing p ositio n. Set su rr ound s p eake r 1 so that it is not unde r the height of the ea r s. Step 3: Adjusting the speaker orientation If the left and r ight s p eaker s a r e not pointing in the same di r ection, the tone will not be the same on the r ight and left, and as a r esult th e sound field will not be r e pr oduced pr o pe r ly. Howeve r , if all the s p eake r s a r e p ointed towa r ds the listening p osition, the sound field will seem c r amp ed. Testing by the Pion ee r Multi-chann el Resea r ch G r oup has shown that a good sense of sound p ositioning can be achieved by p ointing all the s p eake r s towa r ds an a r ea 30 cm to 80 cm (12 inches to 31 inch es) behind the listening p osition (between the su rr o und s p eake r s and the listeni ng p ositio n). Howeve r , the sense of sound p ositioning can diffe r acco r ding to the conditions in the r oom and the s p eake r s being used. In smalle r en vi r onments in p ar ticula r (when the f r ont s p eaker s a r e close to the listening p osition), with this method the s p eaker s will be p ointed to o inwa r d. We suggest you use this exam p le of installa tion as r efer ence when tr ying out differ e nt installation methods. Step 4: Positioning and adjusting the subwoof er Placing the subwoofe r between the cente r and f r ont s p eake r s makes even music sou r ces sound mo r e natu r al (if the r e is only one subwoo fer , it doesnâÂÂt matte r if it is p laced on the le ft or r ight side). The low bass sound out p ut f r om the subwoofe r is not di r ectional an d the r e is no need to adjust the height. N o r mally the subwoofe r is p laced on the floor . Put it in a p osition at whic h it will n ot cancel out the bass sound out p ut f r om the othe r s p eake r s. Also note that p lacing it nea r a wall may r esult in sym p athetic vib r ations with the bu ilding th at could excessively am p lify the bass sound. If the subwoofe r must be installed nea r a wall, p lace it at an angle so that it is not p ar a llel to th e wall su r fa ce. This can hel p r educe any sym p athetic vib r at ions, b ut de p ending on the sha p e of the r oom this c ould r esult in standing waves. Howeve r , even if standing waves a r e gene r ated, thei r influ ence on the soun d quality can be pr evented using the Auto MCACCâÂÂs standing wave cont r ol function ( p age 81). Step 5: Default settings with the Auto MCACC Setup (auto sound field correction) func tion It is mo r e effective to p er for m the Full Auto MC ACC Setu p ( p age 38) pr ocedu r e once the adju stments desc r ibed above have been com p leted. Tip ⢠The distance to the subwoofe r may be slightly la r ge r than the dista nce actually measu r ed with a ta p e measu r e, etc. This is because this distance is co rr ected fo r elect r ic dela y, and is not a pr oblem. SC-1525_UXJC B.book 91 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼ å¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂç«æÂÂæÂÂ¥ ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Additional information 12 92 En Positional relationship betw een speakers and monitor Position of front speakers and monitor The f r ont s p eaker s should be as equidistant as p ossible to the monito r . Position of center speaker and m onitor Since mostly dialogs a r e out p ut f r om the center s p eaker , kee p ing the cen te r s p eake r as close as p ossible to the sc r een makes the ove r all sound mo r e natu r al. Fo r TVs using B r aun tubes, howeve r , when installing the cente r s p eake r on the flo o r , adjust its angle of elevation to p oint it towa r ds the listening p o sition. â¢I f t h e c e n t e r s p eaker is not of the shielded typ e, install it away f r om the TV. ⢠When installing the cente r sp eaker on to p of the monito r , p lace it facing slight ly downwa r ds towa r ds the listening p osition. Troubleshootin g Inco rr ect o p er ations a r e often mistaken fo r t r ouble and malfunctions. If you think that the r e is something w r ong with this com p onent, check the p oints below. Sometimes the t r ouble may lie in anothe r com p onen t. Investigate the othe r com p onents and elect r ical a pp liances being used. If the t r ouble cannot be r ectified even afte r exe r cising the checks listed below, ask you r nea r est Pionee r autho r ized inde p endent se r vice com p any to ca rr y out r ep ai r wo r k. Note ⢠If the unit does not o p er ate no r mally due to exte r nal effects such as static elect r icity disconnect the p ower p lug f r om the outlet a nd inse r t again to r etu r n to no r mal o pe r at ing condition s. Power TV L R 45ð to 60ð Installation on floo r (Diag r am as seen f r om the side) Monito r Sympt om Remedy The p owe r does not tu r n on. ⢠Make su r e that th e p ower cor d is p lugged in to an active p owe r outlet. ⢠T r y disconnecting f r om th e p ower outlet, then p lugging back in. Powe r cannot be tu r ned off. ( ZONE 2 ON o r ZONE 3 ON is dis p layed.) ⢠P r ess the r emote cont r olâÂÂs ZONE 2 or ZONE 3 , then pr ess ïµ RECEI VER to switch the su b zone off. The r ece iver suddenly switches off o r the iPod iPhone indicato r blinks. ⢠Check that the r e a r e no loose st r ands of s p eaker wi r e touching the r ear p anel o r anoth e r set of wi r es. If so, r e-attach the s p eaker wi r es, making su r e the r e a r e no str ay st r an ds. ⢠The r eceiver may have a se r ious pr oblem. Disconnect f r om the p ower and call a Pionee r author ized inde p endent ser vice com p any. Du r ing loud p layback the p ower suddenly switches off. ⢠Tu r n down the volume. ⢠Lowe r the 63 Hz and 125 Hz equalize r levels in the Manual MCACC setup on p age 77. ⢠Switch on the digital safety featu r e. While holding d own ENTER on the f r ont p anel, pr ess ïµ STANDBY/ON to set this r ec eive r to the standby mode. Use TUNE ï©/ïª to select D.SAFETY ï£ OFFï¤ , and the n use PRESET ï«/ï¬ to select 1 o r 2 (select D .SAFETY ï£ OFF ï¤ to deactivate this featu r e). If the p owe r switches off even with 2 switched on, tu r n down the volume. With 1 o r 2 on, some feat u r es may be unavailable. The unit does not r esp ond when the buttons a r e pr essed. ⢠T r y switching the r eceiver off, th en back on again. ⢠T r y disconnecting the p ower co r d, then conne ct again. SC-1525_UXJC B.book 92 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼ å¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂç«æÂÂæÂÂ¥ ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Additional in formation 12 93 En No sound AMP ERR blinks in the dis p lay, then the p ower automa tically switches off. The ADVANCED MCACC blinks and the p ower does not tu r n on. ⢠The r eceiver may have a se r ious pr o blem. Do not t r y switching the r ece iver on. Unp lug the r eceiver f r om the wall an d call a Pionee r autho r ized inde p endent se r vice com p any. The PQLS flashes and p owe r tu r ns off. ⢠The r e is a pr oblem with the r eceiver âÂÂs p ower unit o r fan. T r y tu r ning on th e p ower afte r 1 minute. If the same th ing ha pp ens, the r eceiver is d amaged. Un p lug the r eceiver fr om the wall and call a Pionee r autho r ized inde p endent se r vice comp any. (Ot he r sym p toms may a pp ea r when the p ower is tu r ned on.) OVERHEAT blinks in the dis p lay o r AMP OVERHEAT and the indi cato r at the c ente r of the r ecei ver flash and the p ower tur ns off. ⢠Allow the unit to cool down in a well-ventilated p lace be fo r e switching back on. ⢠Wait at le ast 1 minute, then t r y tu r ning the p ower on again. The r eceive r suddenly p owe r off o r ADVANCED MCA CC flashes. ⢠The p ower unit is dama ged. Un p lug the r eceive r f r om the wall and call a Pionee r autho r ized inde p endent se r vice com p any. Dis p lay blinks 12V TRG ERR .⢠A n e rr o r has a r isen in the 12 V t r igge r jacks. Reconne ct accu r ately then tu r n the p ower back on. Symptom Remedy No sound is out p ut when an in p ut function is selected. No sound is out p ut f r om the f r ont s p eake r s. ⢠Check the vo lume, mute settin g ( pr ess MUTE ) and s p eaker settin g ( pr ess SPEAKERS ). ⢠Make su r e the co rr ect in p u t function is selected. ⢠Check that th e MCACC setu p micr op hone is d isconnected. ⢠Make su r e the co rr ect in p u t signal is selected ( pr ess SIGNAL SEL ). Note th at when PCM is selected, you wonâÂÂt be able to hea r any othe r signal fo r mat. ⢠Check that th e sou r ce comp onent is connected pr o pe r ly (see Connecting your equipment on p age 16). ⢠Check that the s p eaker s a re connected pr o pe r ly (see Connecting the speakers on p age 1 9). No sound f r om the su rr ound o r cente r s peake rs. ⢠Check that the Ste r eo listening mo de o r the F ront Stage Su rr ound Advance mode isnâÂÂt selected; select one of the su rr ound listening modes (see Listening in surround sound on p ag e 53) . ⢠Check that th e su rr ound/cente r sp eaker s a r e not set to NO (see Speaker Setting on p age 85) . ⢠Check the chann el level settings (se e Channel Level on p age 86). ⢠Check the s p eaker conn ections (see Conn ecting th e speakers on p age 19). No sound f r om su rr ou nd back s p eake r s. ⢠Check that th e su rr ound back s p eake r s ar e set to LAR GE or SMALL , and the su rr ound sp eaker s a r e not set to NO (see Speaker Settin g on p age 85) . ⢠Check the s p eaker conn ections (see Conn ecting th e speakers on p age 19). If only one su rr ound back s p eaker is connected, m ake su r e itâÂÂs connec ted to the lef t channel s p eaker te r minal. ⢠Su rr ound back s p eaker s will not p lay while the Speaker Sy stem is set to Speaker B and audio is being p layed th r ough s p eaker B. No sound f r om f r ont heig ht o r f r ont wide s p eake r s. ⢠Check that the f r ont height o r fr ont wide s p eake r s a r e set to LARGE o r SMALL , and the su rr ound s p eake r s a r e not set to NO (see Speake r Setting on p age 85). ⢠Check the s p eaker conn ections (see Conn ecting th e speakers on p age 19). No sound f r om sub woo fe r . ⢠Check that th e subwoofe r is connected pr o pe r ly, switched on and the volume tu r ned up . ⢠If you r subw oofe r has a sl ee p function, make su r e it is switched off. ⢠Make su r e that the Subwoo fe r setting is YES o r PLUS (see Speaker Sett ing on p age 85) . ⢠The c r ossover fr equency may be se t too low; t r y setting it highe r to match the cha r acter istics of you r othe r s peake r s (see Speaker Setting on p age 85). ⢠If the r e is ve r y little low f r equency info r mation in the so u r ce ma te r ial, change you r s p ea ker settings to F r ont: SMALL / Subwoofer : YES, or Fr ont: LARGE / Subwoofer : PLUS (s ee Speaker Sett ing on p age 85). ⢠Check that the LFE channel is no t set to OFF , o r to a ve r y quiet sett ing (see Settin g the Audio opti ons on p age 60) . ⢠Check the s p eaker level settings (see Channel Level on p age 86). Symptom Remedy SC-1525_UXJC B.book 93 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼ å¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂç«æÂÂæÂÂ¥ ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Additional information 12 94 En Other audio problems No sound f r om one s p eaker .⢠C h e c k t h e s p eaker connection (see Connecting the speakers on p age 1 9). ⢠Check the s p eaker level settings (see Channel Level on p age 86) . ⢠Check that th e s p eaker hasnâÂÂt been set to NO (see Speaker Setting on p age 85). ⢠The channel m ay not be r ecor ded in the sou r ce. By using one of th e ad vanced effect listening modes, yo u may be able to c r eate the mis sing channel (see Listening in surround sound on p age 53). Sound is pr oduced f r om analog com p o nents, but not f r om digita l ones (DVD, LD , CD-ROM, etc.). ⢠Check that th e in p ut signal ty p e is set to DIGITAL (see Choosing the input signal on p age 56). ⢠Make su r e that the digita l in p ut is assigned co rr ectly f o r the in p ut jack the com p onent is connected to (see The Input Setup menu on p age 40). ⢠Check the digi tal out p ut settin gs on the sou r ce com p onent. ⢠If the s ou r ce comp onent has a di gital volume cont r ol, make su r e this is not tu r ned down. ⢠Make su r e that the m ultichannel analog in p uts a r e n ot selected. Select any othe r in p ut function. No sound is out p ut o r a noise is out p ut when Dolby D igital/DTS softwa r e is p layed back. ⢠Check that you r DVD p layer is com patible with Dolby Digital/DT S discs. ⢠Check the digi tal out p ut sett ings of you r DVD p layer . Make su r e that the DTS sig nal out p ut is set to On. ⢠If the s ou r ce comp onent has a di gital volume cont r ol, make su r e this is no t tu r ned down. No sound when u sing the Home Menu . ⢠If the HDMI in p ut function is sele cted, sound is muted until exiting the Home Menu . Sympt om Remedy B r oadcast sta tions cannot b e selected automati cally, o r the r e is conside r able noise in r adio br oadcasts. For FM broadcasts ⢠Fully extend the FM wi r e antenna, adjust the p osition fo r best r ecep tio n and secu r e to a wall, etc. ⢠Use an ou tdoo r antenna fo r better r ecep tion (see p age 32). For AM broadcasts ⢠Adjust the p ositi on and di r ection of the AM antenna. ⢠Use an ou tdoo r antenna fo r better r ecep tion (see p age 32). ⢠Noise may be caused by inte r fe r ence fr om other equip ment, such as a fluor es cent light, moto r , etc. Switch off o r move the othe r eq ui p ment, o r move the AM antenna. Noise is ou t p ut when scannin g a DTS CD. ⢠This is no t a malfunction of the r eceiver . The scan function of you r p laye r alte r s the digital info r mation, m aking it u n r eadabl e, r esulting in noise being out p ut. Lowe r the volume when scanning. When p laying a DTS fo r mat LD the r e is audible noise on the soundt r ack. ⢠Make su r e that the in p ut signal typ e is set to DIGITAL (see Choosing the input signal on p age 56). CanâÂÂt r ec o r d audio. ⢠You can only make a digital r eco r ding f r om a digita l sou r ce, and an analog r eco r ding f rom an analog sou r ce. ⢠Fo r digital sou r ces, make su r e that wh at youâ r e r eco r ding isnâÂÂt co p y pr otected. ⢠Check that the OUT jacks a r e pr op er ly connected to the r eco r der s in p ut jacks (see Connecting the multichannel analog inputs on p age 29) . Subwoofe r out p ut is ve r y low. ⢠To r oute mo r e signal to the subwoofe r , set it to PLUS o r set the f r ont s p eake r s to SMALL (see Speaker Se tting on p age 85) . Eve r ything seems to be set u p co rr ectly, but the p layb ack sound is odd. ⢠The s p eaker s may be out of p hase. Chec k that the p ositive/negative s p eaker te r minals on the r eceiver a r e matched with th e co rr esp onding ter minals on the sp eaker s (see Connecting the speakers on p age 19) . The PHASE C ONTROL featu r e doesn âÂÂt seem to have an audible effe ct. ⢠If a pp licable, check that the low p ass filte r switch on you r subwoofe r is of f, or the low p ass cutoff i s set to the hig hest f r equency setting. If the r e is a PHASE se tting on you r subwoo fe r , set it to 0ú (o r de p ending on the subwoo fe r , the setting whe r e you think it has the best ove r all effe ct on the sou nd). ⢠Make su r e the s p eaker distance setting is co rr ect fo r all s p eaker s (s ee Speaker Distance on p age 86). Noise o r hum can be hea r d even when the r e is no sound being in p ut. ⢠Check th at p er sonal com p ute r s o r othe r digita l com p onents connected to the same p ower sou r ce a r e not causing in te r fe r ence. Sympt om Remedy SC-1525_UXJC B.book 94 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼ å¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂç«æÂÂæÂÂ¥ ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Additional in formation 12 95 En ADAPTER PORT Video CanâÂÂt select som e In p ut functions by the INPUT SELECTOR on th e f r ont p anel o r the INPUT SELE CT button on the r emote c ont rol. ⢠Check the Input Skip settings in the Input Se tup men u. ⢠Check the HDMI In p ut assignment in the In p ut Setu p menu then t r y OFF. The r e seems to be a time lag between t he s p eaker s an d the out p ut of the su bwoofe r . ⢠See Automatically conducting optimum sound tuning (Full Auto MCACC) on p age 38 to set u p you r system again using MCACC (t his will automatically com p ensate fo r a delay in the subwoofe r out p ut). S p eake r switching sound (clicking sound) is hea r d f r om r eceiver dur ing p layback . ⢠De p ending on the listening mode, t he f r ont height (o r f r ont wide) and su rrou nd back s p eaker s may switch automatically in f unction of change s in the in p ut audio. A s p eaker switching sound (clicking sound) will be hea r d f r om the r eceiv er at this time. I f this sound bo the r s you, we r ecommend changing the liste ning mode (see Listening in surround sound on p age 53). The maximum volume available (shown in t he f r ont p anel disp lay) is lower than the 12dB maximum. ⢠Check that the V olume Limit is set to OFF (see Volume Setup on p age 89). ⢠The channel level setting may be ove r 0dB . Symptom Remedy The Bluetooth wi r eless technology device cannot be connected o r op er ated. Sound f r om the Bluetooth wi r eless technology device is not emitted o r the sound is inte rr u p ted. ⢠Check that no object that emits elect r omagnetic waves in the 2.4 GHz band (mic r owave oven, wi r eless LAN device o r Bluetooth wi r eless technology a pp a r atus) is nea r the unit. If such an object is nea r the unit, set the unit far fr om it. O r , sto p us ing the object emitting the elect r omagnetic waves. ⢠Check that the Bluetooth wi r eless technology device is not too fa r from the unit and that obst r uctions a r e not set between the Bluetooth wi r eless technology device and the unit. Set the Bluetooth wi r eless technology device and the unit so that the distance between them is less than about 10 m and no obst r uctions exist between them. ⢠Check that the Bluetooth ADAPTER and the ADAPTER PORT of the unit a r e co rr ectly connected. ⢠The Bluetooth wi r eless technology device may not be set to the communication mode su pp o r ting the Bluetooth wi r eless technology . Check the setting of the Bluetoo th wi r eless technology device. ⢠Check that p air ing is co rr ect. The p air ing setting was deleted fr om this unit or the Bluetooth wi r eless technology device. Reset the pai r ing . ⢠Check that the pr ofile is co rr ect. Use a Bluetooth wi r eless technology device that su pp o r ts A2DP pr ofile and A VRCP pr ofile. Symptom Remedy No image is out p ut when an in p ut is selected. ⢠Check the video connections of th e sou r ce comp onent (see p age 27). ⢠Fo r HDMI, o r when digital video conve r sion is set to OFF and a TV and anothe r comp onent ar e connected with diffe r ent co r ds (in Se tting the Video options on p age 62 ), you must connect you r TV to this r eceiver u sing the same ty p e of video cable as you used to c onnect you r video com p onent. ⢠Make su r e the in p ut assignmen t is co rr ect fo r com p onents connected usi ng com p onen t video o r HDMI cables (see The Input Setup menu on p age 40). ⢠Check the video out p ut settings of the sou r ce com p onent. ⢠Check that th e video in p ut you select ed on you r TV is co rr ect. ⢠Some com p onents (such as video game uni ts) have r esolutions that may not be conve r ted. If adjusting thi s r ecei ver âÂÂs Resolution setting (in Setting the Video options on p age 62) and/o r the r esolution set tings on your comp onent or di sp lay doesnâÂÂt wor k, tr y switching Digital Video Conve r sion (in Setting the Video options on p age 62) to OFF . CanâÂÂt r eco r d v ideo. ⢠Check that the so u r ce is not co p y- pr otected. ⢠The vid eo conve r ter is not available when making r ecor dings. Check th at the same ty p e of video cable is used fo r connecting both the r ecor der and the video sou r ce (the one you want to r ecor d) to this r eceiv e r . Symptom Remedy SC-1525_UXJC B.book 95 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼ å¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂç«æÂÂæÂÂ¥ ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Additional information 12 96 En Settings Professional Calibration EQ graphical output Noisy, inte r mittent, o r disto r te d p ictur e. ⢠Sometim es a video deck m ay out p ut a noisy video signal (du r ing scanning, fo r exam p le), o r the video quality may just be p oor (with some video ga me units, fo r exam p le). The p ictur e quality may also de p end on the settings, etc. o f you r dis p lay device. Switch off the video conve r ter and r econnect the s ou r ce and dis p lay device usin g the same ty p e of connecti on (com p onent o r com p osite), then sta r t p layback again. Video sig nals a r e not out p ut f r om the c om p onent te r minal. ⢠When a monito r on ly com p atible with r esolu tions of 480i is connected to the com p on ent te r mina l and anothe r monito r is connected to the HDMI te r minal, the video signals may not be out p ut to the monito r co nnected to the com p onent te r minal. If t his ha pp ens, do the fo llowing: â Tu r n off the p ower of the monito r conne cted to the HDMI te r minal. â Change the VIDEO PARAMETER menu RES setting. â Video s ignals f r om the HDMI te r minal cannot be ou t p ut to the com p onent te r mina ls. In p ut the video signals f r om the p layer o r othe r sou r ce to the com p osite o r com p onent te r minals. When using the com p onent te r minal, assign it at Input Setup . The p ictu r eâÂÂs moveme nt is unnatu r al. ⢠When Resolution unde r VIDEO PARAMETER is set to 1080/24p , the p ictur e may not be disp layed pr o pe r ly fo r some sou r ce mate r ials. In this case, set the r esolution to something othe r than 1080/24 p ( p age 62). Sympt om Remedy The Auto MCACC Setu p continually shows an e rr o r. ⢠The ambient no ise level may be too hig h. Kee p the noise level in the r oom as low as p ossible (se e also Problems when using the Auto MCACC Setup on p age 4 0). If the n oise level ca nnot be ke p t low enough, you will have to set u p the su rr ound sound ma nually ( p age 84). ⢠When usin g only one su rr ound back s p eaker , connect it to the SURROUND BACK L (Single) te r minals. ⢠To use a 5.1 -channel s p eaker set, use the su rr ound s p eaker s fo r the su rr ound channel, not th e su rr ound ba ck channel. ⢠Make su r e the r e a r e no obstacle s between the s p eaker s and the mic r op hone. ⢠If Reve rse Phase is dis p layed, t r y the following: â The s p eaker âÂÂs wi ring ( and âÂÂ) may be inve r ted. Check the s p eaker connections. â De p ending on the ty p e of s p eake r s and thei r install ation conditions, Reverse Phase may be dis p layed even if the s p eake r s a r e pr o pe r ly co nn ec te d. If t his h a pp ens, select GO NEXT and continue. â If the s p eake r is not p ointed to the mic r op hone (l isteni ng p osition) o r when using s p eake r s that affect t he p hase (di p ole s p eaker s, r eflective sp eaker s, etc.), it may not be p ossible to pr op er ly identify the p ola r ity. Afte r using the Auto MC ACC Setu p , the s p eake r size setting is inco rr ect. ⢠The r e may have been some low f r equency n oise in the r oom f r om an ai r -condit ioner , moto r , etc. Switch off all othe r a pp liances in the r oom and us e Auto MCACC Se tu p again. ⢠De p ending on a numbe r of factor s (bass r e pr oduction cap abilities of the sp eaker s, r oom size, s p eake r p lacem ent, etc.) this may occu r in some c ases. Change the s p eake r setting manually in Speaker Setting on p age 85, an d use the A LL (Keep SP System) o p tion fo r the Auto MCACC menu in Automatic MCACC (Expert) on p age 75 if this is a r ecu rr ing pr oblem. CanâÂÂt adjus t the Fin e S p eaker Distance setting ( p age 78) pr o pe r ly. ⢠Check that the s p eaker s a r e all in p hase (make su r e the p ositi ve ( ) and ne gative ( â ) te r minals a r e matched u p pr op er ly). The dis p lay shows KEY LOCK ON when you t r y to make settings. ⢠With the r eceiver in standby, pr ess ïµ STANDBY/ON fo r about 10 seco nds while holding down SPEAKERS to disable the key loc k. Most r ecent settings have been e r ased. ⢠The p ower cor d was d isconnected f r om th e wall while adjusting thi s setting. ⢠Settings a r e only sto r ed if all the zones a r e tu r ned off. Tu r n off all the zones befo r e un p lugging the p ower cor d. The va r ious system settings a r e not sto r ed. ⢠Make su r e the blue ïµ STANDBY /ON light has gone out befo r e un p lugging. Sympt om Remedy The EQ r esp onse disp layed in the g r ap hical outp ut followin g calib r ation does no t a pp ea r enti r ely flat . ⢠The r e a r e cases whe r e the g r ap h does not a pp ea r flat (even when selecting ALL CH ADJ in the Auto MCACC Setu p ) due to adjustments made to com p ensate fo r r oo m char acter istics to achieve op tima l sound. ⢠A r eas of the g r ap h may a pp ea r identical (befo r e and aft e r ) when the r e is little or no adjust ment needed. ⢠The g r ap h may a pp ea r to have shifted ve r tica lly when com p ar ing befo r e and afte r measu r ements. Sympt om Remedy SC-1525_UXJC B.book 96 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼ å¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂç«æÂÂæÂÂ¥ ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Additional in formation 12 97 En Displa y Remote control EQ adjustments made using the Manual MCACC setup on p age 77 do no t a pp ea r to change the g r ap hica l out p ut. ⢠Des p ite level adjustments being made, the filte r s us ed fo r anal ysis may n ot dis p lay these adjustments in the g r ap hical out p ut. Howeve r , thes e adjust ments a r e taken into account by the filte r s dedicate d to ove r all system calib r ation. Lowe r f requency r es p onse cu r ves do not seem to ha ve been calib r ated fo r SMALL s p eake r s. ⢠Low f r equencies used in b ass management (t he subwoofe r channel) will not change fo r sp eaker s that have been s p ecified as SMALL in the configu r atio n, o r do not out p ut these f r equencies. ⢠Calib r ation is p er for med, but due to yo u r sp eaker sâ low f r equency limitations, no measu r able sound is out p ut fo r dis p lay. Symptom Remedy The dis p lay is da r k o r off. ⢠Pr ess DIMMER r ep eatedly to select a diffe r ent b r ightness. You canâÂÂt g et DIGITAL to dis p lay when using SIGNAL SEL . ⢠Check the digi tal connecti ons and make su r e that the di gital in p uts a r e assigned co rr ectl y (see The Input Setup menu on p age 40). ⢠If the multicha nnel analog in p uts a r e selected, sele ct a diffe r ent in p ut func tion. 2 DIGITAL o r DTS does not light when p laying Dolby/DTS softwa r e. ⢠These indic ato r s do not lig ht if p layback is p aused. ⢠Check the p laybac k (es p ecially the digi tal out p ut) settings of t he sou r ce com p onent. When p laying Dolby Digital o r DTS sou r ces, the r eceiver âÂÂs fo r mat indicato r s do not light . ⢠Check that the p layer is connected using a digital con nection. ⢠Make su r e that the r eceiver is set to AUTO o r DIGITAL (see Choosing the input signal on p age 5 6). ⢠Check that the p layer isnâÂÂt set u p so that Dolby Digital and DTS sou r ces a r e conve r ted to PCM. ⢠Ensu r e that if th e r e a r e seve r al audio t racks on the disc, the Dolby Digita l o r DTS is selected. When p laying ce r tain discs, none of the r eceiver âÂÂs fo r mat indicato r s lig ht. ⢠The disc may no t contain 5.1/6.1 chann el mate r ial. Check the disc p ackaging fo r mo r e on what audio t r acks a r e r eco r de d on the disc. When p laying a disc with the listening mo de set to Auto Su rr ound o r ALC, 2 PL II o r Neo:6 a pp ea r on the receive r . ⢠Make su r e that the r eceiver is set to AUTO o r DIGITAL (see Choosing the input signal on p age 5 6). ⢠If a two cha nnel soundt r ack is cu rr entl y p laying ( including Dolby Su rr ound encode d), then this is not a malfunct ion. Check the disc p ackaging fo r details about the au dio t r acks available. Du r ing p layback of DVD-Audi o, the dis p lay sh ows PCM . ⢠This will occu r when p laying DVD-Audio mate r ial ove r the HDMI connection. This is not a malfunction. The p owe r tu r ns off automatically and some indicato r flashes, o r some indicato r flashes and th e p ower does not tu r n on. ⢠See the Power section ( p age 92). Symptom Remedy Cannot be r emote cont r olled. ⢠Set the r emote cont r ol unitâÂÂs r emote cont r ol mode so that it matches the settin g on the main unit (see Operating multiple receivers on p age 6 7). ⢠Check whethe r th e r eceiver âÂÂs r emote contr ol mode is pr o pe r ly set (see Remote Contro l Mode Setup on p age 89) . ⢠T r y r ep lacing t he batte r ies in the r emote cont r ol (s ee Loading the batteries on p ag e 10). ⢠Be su r e to o p er ate within 7 m (23 feet) and a 30ú angl e of the r emot e senso r on the f r ont p anel (see Operating range of remote control unit on p age 1 0). ⢠Check that th e r e a r e no obstacles be tween the r ec eiver and the r emote cont r ol. ⢠Make su r e that the r e is no fl uo r escent o r othe r str ong light shining on to the r emote sens o r . ⢠Check the conn ections of the CONTROL IN jacks (see Operating other Pioneer components with this unitâÂÂs sens or on p age 36). Othe r com p onents canâÂÂt be o pe r ated with the system r emote. ⢠If the bat te r y r an down, the pr eset codes may have been clea r ed. Re-e nte r the pr eset codes. ⢠The pr eset code may be inco rr ect. Redo the pr oced u re fo r ente r ing pr eset codes. ⢠When command s f r om th e r emote cont r ol u nits of oth e r devices a r e r egis te r ed using the lea r ning function, in some cases they may not be lea r ne d pr o pe r ly. In this case, r egiste r the commands again using the lea r ning function (see Programming signals from other remote controls on p age 68) . If they still do not wo r k, they may be in a s p ecial fo r mat that cannot be r eg ister ed on this r eceiver âÂÂs r emot e cont r ol. O p er ate the device using anothe r r emote cont r ol. Symptom Remedy SC-1525_UXJC B.book 97 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼ å¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂç«æÂÂæÂÂ¥ ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Additional information 12 98 En Web Control HDMI Sympt oms Causes Remedies To p Menu sc r een is not dis p layed on b r owse r . This r eceive r âÂÂs IP add r ess has not been ente red into the b r owser co rr ectly. Check the r ec eive r âÂÂs IP add r ess and ent e r it co rr ectly in the b r owse r ( p age 87). Receive r cannot be o p er ated f r om b r owse r. JavaSc r ip t is disabled on the inte r net b r owse r .E n a b l e J a v a S c r ip t. The b r owser is not com p atible with Jav aSc r ip t. Use an inte r net b r owser that is com p atible with JavaSc r ip t. Receive r âÂÂs p owe r do es not tu r n on when the p owe r is tu r ned on using the Web Control functi on. Network St andby at Network Setup is set to OFF . Set Network Stand by at Network Setup to ON ( p age 88). Sympt om Remedy The HDMI indic ato r blinks continuo usly. ⢠Check all the p oints below. No p ictu r e o r sound. ⢠This r eceiver is HDCP-comp atible. Check that the comp onents you ar e connecting ar e a lso HDCP- com p atibl e. If they a r e not, p lease connect them using the com p onent o r com p osite vide o jacks. ⢠De p ending on the con nected sou r ce com p onent, itâÂÂs p ossible that it will not wo r k with this r ece ive r (even if it is HDCP-com p atible). In this case, connect us ing the com p onent o r com p osite video ja cks between sou r ce and r eceiver . ⢠If the pr oblem still p er sists when connecting you r HDMI com p onent di r ectly to you r moni to r , p lease consult th e com p onent o r monitor manual o r contact t he manufactu r er fo r su pp o r t. ⢠If vid eo images d o not a pp ea r on you r TV, t r y adjusting the r esolution, Dee p Colo r or othe r setting fo r you r co m p onent. ⢠While analog video signals a r e being out p ut ove r HDMI, use a se p ar a te connection fo r audio out p ut. ⢠To out p ut signals in Dee p Colo r , use an HDMI cable (High Sp eed HDMI î Cable) to c onnect this r eceiver to a comp on ent or TV with the Deep Color feat ur e. No p ictu r e. ⢠T r y changing the Re solution settin g (in Setting the Video opti ons on p age 62) . ⢠Set the HD MI out p ut setting to th e connected HDMI OUT te r minal ( in Switching the HDMI out put on p age 65) . No sound, o r sound suddenly ceases. ⢠Check that the H DMI AV setting is set t o AMP/THROUGH . ⢠If the c om p onent is a DVI device, use a se p ar ate conne ction fo r the audio. ⢠If analog video is be ing out p ut ove r HDMI, p lease use a se p ar ate connection fo r the audio. ⢠Check the aud io out p ut settings of the sou r ce com p onent. ⢠HDMI fo r mat d igital audio t r ansmissions r equir e a longe r time to be recognized. Due to this, inte rr u p tion in the audio m ay occu r when switchin g between audi o fo r mats o r beginning p layback. ⢠Tu r ning on/off the device connecte d to this unit's HD MI OUT te r minal du r ing p layback , o r disconnectin g/connecting the H DMI cable du r ing p layback, may cause noise or inte rr u p ted audio. Noisy o r distor ted p ictur e. ⢠Sometimes a vide o deck may out p ut a noisy video signal (du r ing scanning, for examp le), or the video quality may just be p oor (with some video ga me units, fo r exam p le). The p ictu r e quality may also de p end on the settings, etc. of you r dis p lay device. Switch off the video conve r ter and r econnect the sou r ce and dis p lay device using the same ty p e of connec tion (com p onent o r com p osite), th en sta r t p layback again. ⢠If the pr oblem still p er sists when connecting you r HDMI com p onent di r ectly to you r moni to r , p lease consult th e com p onent o r monitor manual o r c ontact the manufactu r e r fo r su ppo r t. HDCP ERROR sh ows in the dis p lay. ⢠Check whethe r or not the connected com p on ent is com p atible with HDCP. If it is not com p atible with HDCP, r econnect the sou r ce device using a diffe r ent typ e of connection (comp onent or com p osite). Some com p onents that a r e com p atible with HDCP still ca use this message to be dis p layed, but so long as the r e is no pr oblem with dis p laying video, this is not a malfunctio n. When Control with HDMI is set to ON , the HDMI Input assignment at Input Setup is canceled. ⢠Even when Control with HDMI is set to ON , fo r Digital In assignment of HDMI 1 is not canceled, so in this case use the HDMI 1 in p ut. SC-1525_UXJC B.book 98 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼ å¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂç«æÂÂæÂÂ¥ ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Additional in formation 12 99 En Important information rega rding the HDMI connection The r e a r e cases whe r e you m ay not be able to r oute HDMI signals th r ough thi s r eceiver (this de p ends on the HDMI- equi pp ed com p onent you a r e connectingâÂÂcheck with the manufactu r e r fo r HDMI com p atibility info r mat ion). If you a r enâÂÂt r eceiving HDMI signals pr o pe r ly th r ough this r eceive r (f r om yo u r com p onent), p lease t r y one of the following conf igu r ations when conn ecting u p . Configuration A Use com p onent video cables to connect the video out p ut of you r HDMI-equi pp ed co m p onent to the r eceiver âÂÂs com p onent video in p ut. The r eceive r can then conve r t th e analog com p onent video signal to a digital HDMI signal fo r t r ansmi ssion to the dis p lay. Fo r this configu r ation, use the most convenient connection ( digital is r ecommended) for sending audio to the r eceiver . See the o pe r ating inst r uc tions fo r mo r e on audio connections. Note â¢T h e p ictur e qual ity will chan ge slightl y dur ing conve r sion. Configuration B Connect you r HDMI-equi pp ed com p onent di r ectly to the dis p lay using an HDMI cable. Then use the most convenient connection (digital is r ecommended) fo r sending audio to the r eceiver . See the o p er ating inst r uctions fo r mo r e on audio connections. Set the dis p lay volume to mi nimum whe n using thi s configu r ation. Note â¢I f y o u r disp lay only has one HDMI ter minal, you can only r eceive HDMI video f r om the connected com p onent. â¢D e p ending on the comp onent, audio o utp ut may be limited to the numbe r of channels avai lable f r om the connected dis p lay unit (fo r exam p le audio ou t p ut is r educed to 2 channels for a mon itor with ster eo audio limitations). ⢠If you want to switch the in p ut f unction, yo uâÂÂll have to switch functions on both the r eceiver and your dis p lay unit. ⢠Since the sound is muted on the dis p lay when using the HDMI connection, yo u must adjust the volume o n the dis p lay eve r y time y ou switch in p ut functions. USB interface Synch r onized o p er ation not p ossible usi ng Control with HDMI function. ⢠Check the HDMI co nnections. ⢠The cable may be damaged. ⢠Select ON fo r the Control with HDMI setting (see HDMI Setup on p age 57). ⢠Select ALL fo r the Control Mode with HDMI setting (see HDMI Setup on p age 57). ⢠Tu r n the TVâÂÂs p ower on befo r e tu r ning on this r ece iver âÂÂs p ower . ⢠Set the TV side Cont r ol with HDMI setting to on (see TV âÂÂs o p er ating inst r uction s). ⢠Connect the TV to the HDMI OUT 1 te rminal and set the HDMI out p ut to HDMI OU T 1 . Then tu r n on fi r st the TVâÂÂs p ower , then this r eceiv er âÂÂs p ower . Symptom Remedy Symptoms Causes Remedies The folde r s/files stor ed on a USB memo r y device a r e not dis p layed. The folde r s/files a r e cu rr ently s to r ed in a r egion othe r than t he FAT (File All ocation T able) r egion. Sto r e the folde r s/files in the FAT r egion. The numbe r of levels in a folde r is mo r e than 8. Limit the maximum numbe r of levels in a f olde r to 8 ( p age 44). The r e a r e mo r e th an 30 000 folde r s/files sto r ed in a USB memo r y de vice. Limit the maximum n umbe r of folde r s/files sto r ed in a USB memo r y de vice to 30 000 ( p age 44). The audio fil es a r e co p yr ighted. Cop yr ighted audio files sto r ed on a USB memo r y device cannot be p layed back ( p age 44). SC-1525_UXJC B.book 99 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼ å¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂç«æÂÂæÂÂ¥ ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Additional information 12 100 En Internet radio A USB memo ry devic e is not r ecognized. The USB memo r y device does not su pp o r t the mass sto r age class s p ecific ations. T r y using a USB memo r y device comp atible with the mass sto r age class s p ecifications. Note that the r e a r e cases whe r e even the audio files sto r ed on a USB memo r y device com p atible with the mass sto r age c lass s p ecifications a r e not p layed back on this r eceiver (p age 44). Connect th e USB memo r y device and switch on this r eceive r ( p age 35). A USB hub is cu rr ent ly being used. This r eceiver does not su pp o r t USB hubs ( p age 44). This r eceive r r ecog nizes the USB memo r y device as a f r aud. Switch off and on ag ain this r eceiver . A USB memo r y devic e is connecte d and dis p layed, but the audio files st o r ed on the USB memo r y device cann ot be p layed back. Some fo r mats of USB memo r y devices, including FAT 12, NTFS, a nd HFS, cannot be p layed back on this r eceive r . Check whethe r the fo r ma t of you r USB memo r y device is e ithe r FAT 16 o r FAT 32. Note that t he FAT 12, NTFS, a nd HFS fo r mats c annot be p layed back on this r eceiver (p age 44). The file fo r mat cannot be pr o pe r ly p laye d back on this r eceive r . See the list of file fo r mats that can be p layed back on this r eceiver (p age 45). Cannot detect USB keyboa r d. The USB keyb oa r d is r outed th r ough a USB hub. This r eceiver is not com p atible with USB hubs. Plug th e keyboa r d di r ectly into the r eceiver . A PS2 keyboa r d is r oute d th r ough a PS2/US B connecto r . PS2 keyboa r ds cannot be used with this r eceiver , even if r outed t h r ough a PS2/ USB connect o r . Use a USB keyboa r d. Keyboa r d is not a USB HID Class device. Some devices will not be detected. Use a USB HID Class keyboa r d. Cannot en te r co rr ect text using the USB ke yboa r d. Keyboa r d is not US-inte r nati onal layout keyboa r d. Use a US-inte r national layout keyboa r d. NB: Some cha r ac ter s cannot be ente r ed. Sympt oms Causes Remedies Cannot acc ess the ne two r k. (â Connection Er ror â shows in the dis p lay.) The LAN cable is no t fi r mly connected. Fi r mly connect the LAN cable ( p age 33). The r oute r is not switched on. Switch on the r outer . The netwo r k device wa s switched on when this r eceiver was alr eady on. Switch the netwo r k device on befo r e the r ecei ve r . Cannot l isten to Inte r net r adio stations. (â Connection Er ror â shows in the dis p lay.) The fi r ewall settings fo r com p onen ts on the netwo r k a r e cu rr ently in o p er ation. Check the fi r ewall settings fo r com p onen ts on the netwo r k. You a r e cu rr ently disconnected f r om the Inte r net. Check the connection settings fo r com p onents on the netwo r k, and consult with you r netwo r k se r vice pr ovide r if necessa r y ( p age 87). The URL fo r th e Inte r net r adio station is inco rr ectly pr og r ammed. Check that th e URL was co rr ectly ente r ed when pr og r amming. The b r oadc asts f rom an Int e r net r adio station a r e sto pp ed o r inte rr u p ted. B r oadcasts may be inte rr u p ted o r sus p ended by the r adio station. An Inte r net r adio station is selecte d whose pr otocol this r ec eiver does not r ecognize. This r eceive r does not r ecognize pr otocols oth e r than âÂÂhtt p â and âÂÂm msâÂÂ. An Inte r net r adio station had closed o r moved. Ente r new inte r net r adio station on the Inte r net Radio Setu p . Cannot l isten to Inte r net r adio stations. (â File Form at Error â shows in the dis p lay.) B r oadcast is i n a fo r mat not com p atib le with this r eceiver . This r eceive r canno t p lay audio in fo r mats othe r than MP3 o r WMA. Also, even if they a r e MP3 o r WMA fo r mats, this r eceive r may not be able to p lay back. Sympt oms Causes Remedies SC-1525_UXJCB.bo ok 100 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ æÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂç« æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ æÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Additional in formation 12 101 En XM radio messages The Inte r ne t r adio settings sc r een cannot be dis p layed on the com p ut er Inte r net b r owse r. This r eceive r âÂÂs IP add r ess has not be en ente r ed into the b r owser co rr ectly. Check the r eceive râÂÂs IP add r ess and ente r it co rr ectly o n the b r owser (p age 87). JavaSc r ip t is disabled on the Inte r net b r owser .E n a b l e J a v a S c r ip t. The b r owser is not com p atible with JavaSc r ip t. Use an Inte r net b r owser that is com p atible wit h JavaSc r ip t. Symptoms Causes Remedies Status messag es Cau se Action Check XM Tuner The XM Mini-Tun e r is not installed o r not fully seated in the XM Mini-Tun e r Home Dock o r the XM Mini- Tune r Dock is not con nected to th is r eceive r . Confi r m the XM Mini-Tune r is fully seat ed in the dock and check the XM Mini-Tune r Home Dock cable is connected t o this r eceiver . Check Antenna The XM antenna is not connected to the XM Mini- Tune r Home Dock o r the X M antenna cable is damaged. Check th at the XM antenna is secu r ely connected to the XM Mini-Tune r Home Dock and check the antenna cable fo r damage . Rep lace the XM antenna if the cable is dama ged. Loading The XM Mini-Tune r is acquir ing audio or pr ogr am info r mati on f r om the XM satellite signal. This messag e can als o occu r in weak XM signal conditions. Note that this r eceiver may not r esp ond to some buttons while this message is dis p layed. This message should disa pp ea r in a few seconds in good signal conditions. If you see this message often, r ep osition the XM antenna fo r bett e r signal r ecep tion . Use the Antenna Aiming o p tion to o p ti mize the antenna p osition. No Signal The XM Mini-Tune r is not r eceiving the XM satellite signal. Someth ing may be blocking th e XM antennaâÂÂs view of the satellites o r the anten na is not pr o pe r ly aimed. Check fo r antenna obst r uctions and r ep osition the XM antenna to ge t bette r signal r ecep tion. Use the Antenna Aiming o p tion to o p timize the an tenna p osition. See inst r uctions su pp lied with the XM Mini-Tune r and Home Dock fo r antenna installatio n info r mati on. Off Air The XM channel you selected is not cu rr entl y b r oadcasting. Check back late r . CH Unauthorized You selected an XM chan nel that is blocked o r cannot be r eceived with you r XM subsc r i p tion p ackage. Consult the lates t channel guide at www.xm r adio.com fo r the cu rr ent list of cha nnels. Fo r info r mati on on r eceiving this channel, visit www.xm r adio.com o r contact XM Satellite Radio at 1-800-967-2346 . CH Unavailabl e The se lected channel is not available. The cha nnel may have been r eassigned to a diffe r ent channel numbe r . This message may occu r initially with a new r adio o r a r adio that has not r eceived XMâ s signal fo r an extended p er iod. Consult the lates t channel guide at www.xm r adio.com fo r the cu rr ent list of cha nnels. Fo r cases of a new r ad io o r a r adio that has n ot r eceived XMâÂÂs signal for an extend ed p er iod, allow the r adio to r eceive the XM sa tellite signal fo r at leas t 5 minute s and then t r y to select the channel again. â â â â â â â â No a r tist na me o r song title is available fo r this selection. No action r eq ui r ed. SC-1525_UXJCB.bo ok 101 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ æÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂç« æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ æÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Additional information 12 102 En SIRIUS radio messages If the pr oblem is not solved afte r the t r oubleshooting above, if the sc r een f r ee zes unex p ectedly o r if the buttons on the r emote contr ol or f r ont p anel stop wor king comp l etely, do th e following: â¢P r ess ïµ STA NDBY/ON on the fr ont p anel to tur n off the p ower , then tur n the p ower back on. â¢I f t h e p ower c annot be tu r ned off, pr ess and hold ïµ STA NDBY/ON on the f r ont p anel fo r ove r 10 seconds. The p ower will tur n off. (In this case, th e var ious settings made on the r eceiver may be clear ed.) Upgrade XM Tuner The connected XM CNP-1000 is incom p atible. This r eceiver featur es advanced technology that is designed fo r use with the XM Mini-Tune r . Contact XM Liste ne r Ca r e (1-800-967-2346) and ask about u p gr adin g you r XM CNP-1000 to an XM Mini- Tune r . Have this r eceiver âÂÂs model name an d CNP-1000 XM Radio ID numbe r r ea dy befor ehand , and exp lain that this r eceiver is disp laying the message Upgrade X M Tuner . If you al r eady have an XM Mini-Tune r connected and you see this message, tu r n off thi s r ecei ver , make su r e the XM Mini-Tun e r is pr op er ly seat ed in the Mini-Tune r Home Dock, and then tu r n this r ecei ve r on again. If the message r ea pp ear s, contact XM Listene r Ca r e and ex p lain the issue that youâ r e ex p er iencing and the co rr e ctive actio ns youâ ve t r ied. XM Power Erro r A sho r t-cir cuit occu rr ing in the antenna o r su rr ounding an tenna cable. Make su r e that the r e is nothing unus ual with the antenna o r anten na cable. Switch the p ower off, then back on again. Status messages Cause Action Antenna Error The SIRIUS antenna is not pr o pe r ly connected. Check that the antenna cable is a ttached secu r ely. Check Sirius Tuner The Si r iusConnect⢠tune r is not pr o pe r ly connected. Check that the 8 p in mini D IN cable a nd AC Adap ter ar e attached secu r ely. Acquiring Signal The SIRIUS signal is too weak at the cu rr ent location. Check fo r antenna obst r uctions and r ep osition the SIRIUS antenna to get bette r signal r ecep tion. Use the Antenna Aiming o p tion to o p ti mize the antenna p osit ion. Subscription Upda ting Unit is u p dating subsc r ip tion. W ait until the ch annel subsc r ip tion has been u p dated. Updating Channels Unit is u p dating the chan nel info r mation. Wait until the channel info r mation has bee n u p dated. Invalid Channel Selected channel is not availa ble/does no t exist. Select anot he r cha nnel. Firmware Upda ting The Si r iusConnect⢠tune r âÂÂs fi r mwar e is being u p date d. Wait fo r u p dating to f inish. Status messages Cause Action SC-1525_UXJCB.bo ok 102 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ æÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂç« æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ æÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Additional in formation 12 103 En Surround sound formats Below is a b r ief des c r ip tion of the main su rr oun d sound fo r mats youâÂÂll fin d on BDs, DVDs, satellite, cable and te rr est r ial b r oadcasts, and video cassettes. Dolby The Dolby technologies a r e ex p lained below. See www.dolby.com fo r mo r e detailed info r mation. Manufactured under lice nse from Dolby Laboratories. â Dolbyâ , â Pro Logicâ , â Surround EXâ and the double-D symbol are trademarks of Dolby Laboratories. DTS The DTS techno logies a r e ex p lained below. See www.dtstech.com fo r mo re detailed info r mation. Manufactured under license under U.S. Patent #âÂÂs: 5,451,94 2; 5,956,674; 5,974, 380; 5,978,762; 6,22 6,616; 6,487,535; 7,212,872; 7,33 3,929; 7,392,195; 7,272,567 & other U.S. and world wide patents issued & pendin g. DTS and the Symbol are reg istered trademarks, & DTS-H D, DTS- HD Master Audio, and the DT S logos are trademarks of DTS, Inc. Prod uct includes software. é DTS, In c. All Rights Reserved. Windows Media Audio 9 Professional Windows Media Audio 9 P r ofessional (W MA9 P r o) is a disc r ete su rr ound fo r mat develo p ed by Mic r osoft Co rp o r ation. Windows Media and the Windows logo are trademarks or registered trademarks of Micros oft Corporation in the United States and/or other countri es. About THX The THX technologi es a r e ex p lained below. Se e www.thx.com fo r mo r e detailed info r mation. ⢠THX Cinema processing THX is an exclusive set of standa r ds and technologies established by THX Ltd. THX g r ew f r om Geo r ge Lucasâ p er sonal desi r e to ma ke you r ex p er ience of the film soundt r ack, in both m ovie theat r es and in you r home the at r e, as faithful as p ossible to what the di r ector intended. Movie soundt r acks a r e mixed in s p ecial movie theat r es called dubbing stages and a r e designed to be p layed back in movie theat r es with simila r equi p ment and conditions. This same soundt r ack is then t r ansfe rr ed di r ectly onto Lase r disc, VHS ta p e, DVD, etc., and is not changed fo r p layback in a small home theat r e envi r onment. THX enginee r s develo p ed p atented technologies to accu r ately t r anslate the sound f r om the movie theat r e envi r onment into the home, co rr ecting the tonal and s p atial e rr o r s that occu r . On this pr oduct, when the THX indicato r is on, THX featu r es a r e automatically added in Cinema modes (e.g. THX Cinema, THX Su rr ound EX). ⢠Re-Equalization The tonal balance of a film soundt r ack will be excessively b r ight and ha r sh when p layed back ove r audio equi p ment in the home because film soundt r acks we r e designed to be p layed back in la r ge m ovie theat e r s using ve r y diffe r ent pr ofessional equi p ment. Re-Equalization r estor es the co rr ect tonal balance fo r watching a movie soundtr ack in a small home envi r onment. ⢠Timbre Matching The human ea r changes ou r p er cep tion of a sound de p ending on the di r ection f r om which the sound is co ming. In a movie theat r e, the r e is an a rr ay of su rr ound s p eaker s so that the su rr ound info r matio n is all a r ound you. In a home theat r e, yo u use only two s p eake r s located to the side of you r head. The Timb r e Matching featu r e fi lte r s the info r mation going to the su rr ound s p eaker s so that they mo r e closely match the tonal cha r acter istics of the sound coming f r om the f r ont s p eaker s. This ensu r es seamless p anning between the f r ont and su rr ound s p eake r s. ⢠Adaptive Decorrel ation In a movie theat r e, a la r ge numbe r of su rr ound s p eaker s hel p cr eate an envelo p ing su rr ound sound ex p er ience, but in a home theat r e the r e a r e usually only two s p eake r s. This can make the su rr ound s p eake r s sound like head p hones that lack s p aciousness and envelo p ment. The su rr ound sounds will also colla p se into the closest s p eake r as you move away f r om the middle seating p osition. Ada p tive Deco rr elation slightly changes one su rr ound channelâÂÂs time and p hase r elationship with r esp ect to the o the r su rr ound channel. This ex p ands the listening p osition and c r eatesâÂÂwith only two s p eake r sâ the sa me s p acious su rr ound ex p er ience as in a movie theat r e. ⢠THX Select2 Plus Befo r e any home theat r e com p onent can be THX Select2 Plus ce r tified, it must inco rp o r ate all the featu r es above and also p ass a r igor ous ser ies of quality and p er for mance tests. Only then can a pr oduct featu r e the THX Select2 Plus logo, which is you r guar antee that the Home Theat r e pr oducts you p ur chase will g ive you su p er b p er for mance for many year s to come. THX Select2 Plus r equir ements cove r eve r y as p ect of the pr oduc t including pr e-am p lifier and p ower am p lifie r p er fo r mance and o p er ation, and hund r eds of othe r p ar am ete r s in both the digital and analog domain. SC-1525_UXJCB.bo ok 103 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ æÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂç« æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ æÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Additional information 12 104 En ⢠THX Surround EX THX Su rr ound EX - Dolby Digital Su rr ound EX is a joint develo p ment of Dolby Labo r ator ies and the THX Ltd. In a movie theate r , film soundt r acks that have been encoded with Dolby Digital Su rr ound EX technology a r e able to r e pr oduce an ext r a channel which has been added du r ing the mixing of the pr og r am. This channel, ca lled Su rr ound Back, p laces sounds behind the listene r in addition to the cu rr ently available f r ont left, f r ont cente r , f r ont r ight, su rr ound r ight, su rr ound left and subwoofe r channels. This additional channel pr ovides the opp o r tunity fo r mo r e detailed imaging behind the listene r and b r ings mo r e de p th, s p acious ambience and sound localization than eve r bef o r e. Movies that we r e c r eated using th e Dolby Digita l Su rr ound EX technology, when r eleased into the home consume r ma r ke t may exhibit wo r ding to tha t effect on the p ackaging. A list of movies cr eated using this technology can be found on the Dolby web site at www.dolby.com. Only am p lifier and cont r oller pr oducts bear ing the THX Su rr ound EX logo, when in the THX Su rr ound EX mode, faithfully r e pr oduce this new technology in the home. This pr oduct may also engage the âÂÂTHX Su rr ound EXâ mode du r ing the p layback of 5.1 channel mate r ial that is not D olby Digital Su rr ound EX encod ed. In such case the in fo r mation delive r ed to the Su rr ound Back channel will be pr og r am de p endent and may o r may not be ve r y p leasing de p ending on the p ar ticular soundt r ack and the tastes of the individual listene r . ⢠Boundary Gain Compensation⢠De p ending on the listene r âÂÂs and the subwoofe r âÂÂs p osition, the listener may ex p er ienc e an excessive bass effect. This featur e com p ensates fo r excessive bass r esulting f r om a bounda r y gain effect. This featu r e is designed to o p er ate when used with a subwoofe r ce r tified to THX Select2⢠s p ecifications. ⢠THX Loudness Plus Descr iption THX Loudness Plus is a new volume cont r ol technology featur ed in THX Ult r a2 Plus⢠and THX Select2 Plus⢠Ce r tified am p lifier s. With THX Loudness Plus, home theat e r audie nces can now ex p er ience the r ich details in a su rr ound mix at any volume level. A conseque nce of tu r ning the volume below Refe r ence Level is that ce r tain sound elements can be lost o r p erceived diffe r ently by the listene r . THX Loudness Plus com p ensates fo r the tonal and s p atial shifts that occu r when the volume is r educed by intelligent ly adjusting ambient su rr ound channel levels and f requency r esp onse. This enables user s to ex p er ience the t r ue im p act of sound t r acks r egar dles s of the volume setting. THX Loudness Plus is automatically a pp lied when listening in any THX listening mode. The new THX Cinema, THX Music, and THX Games modes a r e tailo r ed to a pp ly the pr o pe r THX Loudness Plus settings fo r ea ch ty p e of co ntent. ⢠THX Select2 Cinema THX Select2 Cinema mode p lays 5.1 movies using all 8 s p eaker s giving you the best p ossible movie watching ex p er ience. In this mode, ASA pr ocessing blends the side su rr ound s p eaker s and back su rr ound s p eake rs pr oviding the o p timal mix of ambient and di r ectional su rr ound sounds. DTS-ES (Mat r ix and 6.1 Disc r ete) and Dolby Digital Su rr ound EX encoded soundt r acks will be automatically detected in Select2 Cinema mode if the a ppr opr iate flag ha s been encoded. Some Dolby Digital Su rr ound EX soundt r acks a r e missing the digital flag that allows automatic switchin g. If you know that the movie that you a r e watching is encoded in Su rr ound EX, you can manually select the THX Su rr ound EX p layback mode, othe r wise THX Select2 Cinema mode will a pp ly AS A pr ocessing to pr ovide o p timum r ep lay. ⢠THX Select2 Music Fo r the p layback of multi-ch annel music the THX Select2 Music mode s h o u l d b e s e l e c t e d . I n t h i s m o d e T H X A S A pr ocessing is a pp lied to the su rr ound channels of all 5.1 encoded m usic sou r ces such as DTS, Dolby Digital and DVD-Audio to pr ovide a wide stable r ear soundstage. ⢠THX Select2 Games Fo r the p layback of ste r eo and multi-channel game audio the THX Select2 Games mode should be se lected. In this mode THX ASA pr ocessing is app lied to the su rr ound channels of all 5.1 and 2.0 encoded g ame sou r ces such as analog, PCM, DTS and Dolby Digital. This accu r ately p laces all game audio su rr ound info r mation, pr oviding a full 360 deg r ee p layback e nvir onment. THX Select2 Games mode is unique as it gives you a smooth t r ansition of audio in all p oints of the su rr ound field. THX, the THX logo and Sel ect2 Plus are trademarks of THX Ltd. wh ich may be registered in some jurisdicti ons. All rights reserved . All other trademarks are th e property of their re spective owners. About iPod âÂÂMade fo r iPodâ means that an e lect r onic accesso r y has been designed to connect s p ecifica lly to iPod and has been ce r tified by the develo p er to meet A pp le p er for mance standar ds . âÂÂWo r ks with iPhoneâ means that an elect r onic accesso r y has been designed to connect s p ecific ally to iPhone and has been ce r tified by the develo p er to meet A pp le p er for mance standar ds . A pp le is not r es p onsible fo r the o pe r ation of this device o r its com p liance with safety and r egu lator y standa r ds. iPod is a trademark of Apple In c., registered in the U.S. and other countries. iPhone is a tradem ark of Apple Inc. SC-1525_UXJCB.bo ok 104 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ æÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂç« æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ æÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Additional in formation 12 105 En About SIRI US and X M SIRIUS, XM and all related marks and logos are trademarks of Sirius XM Radio Inc. and its subsidiaries . All other marks and logos are the property of their respective owners. All rights reserved. SIRIUS and XM subscriptions sold separately. Taxes and a one-time activation fe e may apply. XM tuners and home do cks or SI RIUS tuners (each sold separately) are required to receive the SIRIUS or XM satellite radio service. All programming and fees su bject to change. It is prohibited to copy, decompile, disassemble, re verse engineer, hack, manipulate or otherwise make available any tec hnology or software incorporated in receivers compatible with the SIRIUS or XM Satellite Radio Systems. Service not available in Alaska and Hawaii. SIRIUS, XM and all related ma rks and logos ar e trademarks o f Sirius XM Radio Inc. and its subsidi aries. All rights reserv ed. Service not avai lable in Alask a and Haw aii. Record the SiriusConnect⢠tu ner ID below for reference. Record the XM Radio ID below for reference. Note: The XM Radio ID does not use the letters âÂÂIâÂÂ, âÂÂOâÂÂ, âÂÂSâ or âÂÂFâÂÂ. 12he_Additional_ info.fm 105 ãÂÂ㼠㸠ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼ å¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂÂ¥ ãÂÂç«æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂå å¾Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Additional information 12 106 En Auto Surround, ALC and Stream Direct with diff erent input signal formats The following cha r ts show what you will hea r with diffe r en t in p ut signal fo r mats, de p end ing on the St r eam Di r ect mode (see Using Str eam Dire ct on p age 55) you h ave selected. Stereo (2 cha nnel) signal formats Multichannel signal formats Input signal format Auto Surround / AL C / DIRECT PURE DIRECT Surroun d Back speaker( s): Connected Dolby Digital Su rr ound 2 Pro Logic llx MO VIE 2 Pro Logic llx MOVIE DTS Su rr ound Neo:6 CINEMA Neo:6 CINEMA Othe r ste r eo sou r ces Ste r eo p layback Ste reo p layback Analog sou r ces As above ANALOG DIRECT (ster eo) PCM sou r ces As above PCM DIRECT DVD-A sou r ce s As above As above SACD sou r ces As above As above Surround Back speaker (s): Not connecte d Dolby Digital Su rr ound 2 Pro Logic ll MOVIE 2 Pro Logi c ll MOVIE DTS Su rr ound Neo:6 CINEMA Neo:6 CINEMA Othe r ste r eo sou r ces Ste r eo p layback Ste reo p layback Analog sou r ces As above ANALOG DIRECT (ster eo) PCM sou r ces As above PCM DIRECT DVD-A sou r ce s As above As above SACD sou r ces As above As above Input signal format Auto Surround / AL C PURE DIRECT / DIRE CT Surroun d Back speaker( s): Connected Dolby Digita l EX (6.1 channe l flagged) Dolby Digital EX 2 Pro Logic llx MOVIE a a. Unavailable with only one su rr ound back s p eaker connected. Dolby Digital EX 2 Pro Logic llx MOVIE a DTS-ES (6.1 channel sou r ces/6.1 cha nnel flagged) DTS-ES (Mat r ix/Discr ete) DTS-ES (Mat r ix/Discr ete) DTS sou r ces (5.1 ch annel encoding) St r aight decodi ng St r aight decod ing DTS-HD sou r ces As above As above Othe r 5.1/6.1/7.1 c hannel sou r ces As above As above Surround Back speaker (s): Not connecte d DVD-A sou r ces/Multi-ch PCM Str aight decoding St r aight decod ing SACD sou r ces (5.1 channel e ncoding) As above As above Othe r 5.1/6.1/7.1 c hannel sou r ces As above As above SC-1525_UXJCB.bo ok 106 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ æÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂç« æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ æÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Additional in formation 12 107 En Preset code list You should have no problem cont r olling a com p onen t if you find the manufactu r er in this lis t, but p lease note that the r e a r e cases whe r e codes fo r the manufactu r e r in the lis t will not wo r k fo r the model that you a r e usin g. The r e a r e also cases wh e r e only ce r tain func tions may be cont r olla ble afte r assigning the pr o pe r pr eset code. Important ⢠We do not gua r antee the o p er ations of all the manufactur er s and devices listed. O p er ation may not be p ossible even if a pr eset code is ente r ed. If you canâÂÂt fin d a pr eset code that matches the com p onent you want to cont r ol, you can still tea ch the r emote individual commands f r om anothe r r emote cont r ol (see Programming signals from other remote controls on p age 68). TV Pioneer 0004, 0006, 0113 , 0115, 0116, 01 17, 011 9, 0122 , 0123 Admiral 0001, 0014 Adventura 0012 Aiwa 0002 Akai 0002, 0100 Albatron 0097 Alleron 0009 America Action 0104 Amtron 0008 Anam 0104 Anam Na tional 0003, 0008 AOC 0004, 0 005, 00 06, 010 0 Apex 0021, 0102, 0106 Audiovox 0008, 0104 Aventur a 0103 Axion 0094 Bang & Ol ufsen 0111 Belcor 0004 Bell & Howell 0001 Benq 0064 Bradfo rd 0008, 0104 Brillian 0109 Brockwood 0004 Broksonic 0104 Candle 0004, 0006, 0012 , 0100 Carnivale 0100 Carver 0101 CCE 0110 Celebri ty 0002 Celera 0106 Changhong 0106 Citizen 0004, 0006, 0008 , 0100 Clari on 0104 Coby 0056 Colort yme 0004, 0006 Concerto 0004, 0006 Contec 0104 Contec/Cony 0007, 0008 Craig 0008, 0104 Crosl ey 0081, 0101 Crown 0008, 0104 CTX 0063 Curtis Mathes 0000, 0004, 0006 , 0014, 0100, 01 01 CXC 0008, 01 04 Cytron 0093 Daewoo 0004, 0005, 000 6, 0023 Daytron 0004, 0006 Dell 0073 DiamondVision 0096 Dimensia 0000 Disney 0046 Dumont 0004, 00 11, 00 99 Durabrand 0041, 0103, 01 04 Dwin 0014 Electroband 0002 Electro graph 0107 Electrohome 0002, 00 03, 000 4, 0006 Element 0082 Emerson 0004, 00 06, 00 07, 000 8, 0009, 0023, 01 03, 0104 Emprex 0092 Envisi on 0004, 0006, 010 0 Epson 0061 ESA 0103 Fujitsu 0009 Funai 0008, 0 009, 01 03, 010 4 Futuretech 0008, 010 4 Gateway 0067, 01 07, 010 8 GE 0000, 0 003, 00 04, 00 06, 001 0, 0016, 0039 GFM 0080, 0084 Gibralter 0004, 0011, 0099, 01 00 Goldstar 0004, 0005, 0006 , 0007, 0100 Gradiente 0066 Grunpy 0008, 0009, 0104 Haier 0112 Hallmark 0004, 00 06 Harman/K ardon 0101 Harvard 0008, 0104 Havermy 0014 Hewlett Packar d 0053 Hisense 0069 Hitachi 0004, 0006, 00 07 Hyundai 0098 Ilo 0089, 00 91 IMA 0008 Infinity 0101 InFocus 0074 Initial 0091 Insignia 0085, 0086 Inteq 0099 Janeil 0012 JBL 0101 JC Penney 0000, 00 04, 00 05, 000 6, 0010 JCB 0002 Jensen 0004, 00 06 JVC 0007, 0010, 00 44, 5064 Kawasho 0002, 0004, 00 06 KEC 0104 Kenwood 0004, 0 006, 01 00 KLH 0106 Kloss Novabeam 0008, 0012 KTV 0008, 0100, 01 04, 0110 LG 0005, 00 52, 00 78, 009 7 Logik 0001 Luxman 0004, 0006 LXI 0000, 00 06, 01 01, 010 2 Magnavox 0004, 0006, 00 19, 0020, 0037, 0042, 010 0, 0101 Majestic 0001 Marantz 0004, 0006, 0062, 010 0, 0101 Matsushita 0105 Maxent 0087, 0107 Megapo wer 0097 Megatron 0006 Memorex 0001, 00 05, 00 06, 004 1 MGA 0004, 0005, 00 06, 0100 Midland 0010, 0011, 0099 Mintek 0091 Mitsubishi 0004, 0005, 000 6, 0014, 0045 Monivision 0097 Montgomery W ard 0001 Motorola 0003, 0014 MTC 0004, 0005, 0006 , 0100 Multitech 0008, 01 04, 01 10 NAD 0006, 0102 NEC 0003, 0004, 00 05, 0006, 0100 Net-TV 0107 Nikko 0006, 0100 Norcent 0060 Olevia 0048, 0054, 00 59 Onwa 0008, 0104 Oppo 0095 Optimus 0105 Optoma 0075 Optonica 0014 Orion 0025 Panasonic 0003, 0010, 0017 , 0027, 0105, 0114 , 0120, 0121, 0 124, 0125 Penney 0100, 0102 Philco 0003, 0004, 0005, 0006 , 0007, 0100, 010 1 Philips 0003, 0004, 0007 , 0019, 0020, 0101 Philips Magnavox 0019 Pilot 0004, 0100 Polaroid 0057, 0106 Portland 0004, 0005, 00 06 Prima 0065 Princeton 0097 Prism 0010 Proscan 0000 Proton 0004, 0006, 0007 Protron 0055 Proview 0068 Pulsar 0004, 00 11, 00 99 Quasar 0003, 0010, 0105 Radio Shack 0100, 0104 Radio Shack/Realistic 0000, 0004 , 0006, 000 7, 0008 RCA 0000, 0003, 0004, 00 05, 0006, 0013, 002 4, 0035 Realistic 0100, 0104 Runco 0011, 0 099, 01 00 Sampo 0004, 0 006, 01 00, 010 7 TV Pioneer 0004 example: Catego r y P r eset code Manufactu r er SC-1525_UXJCB.bo ok 107 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ æÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂç« æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ æÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Additional information 12 108 En Samsung 0004, 00 05, 00 06, 000 7, 0022, 0032, 0076, 00 77, 0083, 0100, 0110 Sansui 0025 Sanyo 0004, 0050 Sceptre 0072 Scotch 0006 Scott 0004, 00 06, 00 07, 000 8, 0009 , 0090, 0104 Sears 0000, 00 04, 00 06, 000 9, 0101 , 0102, 0103 Sharp 0004, 0006, 00 07, 0014, 0033 Sheng Chia 0014 Shogun 0004 Signature 0001 Sony 0002, 0 018, 00 29, 00 30, 003 1, 0034 Soundesign 0004, 0006, 0008, 0009, 0104 Squarev iew 0103 SSS 0004, 0008, 0104 Starlite 0008, 010 4 Superscan 0014 Supre-Macy 0012 Supreme 0002 SVA 0088 Sylvania 0004, 0006, 0049, 007 9, 0080, 0100, 01 01, 0103 Symphonic 0008, 0041, 0103, 010 4 Syntax 0054 Syntax-Brillian 0054 Tandy 0014 Tatung 0003, 01 08 Technics 0010, 01 05 Techwood 0004, 0006, 0010 Teknika 0001, 00 04, 000 5, 0006 , 0007, 0008 , 0009, 01 01, 0104 TMK 0004, 0006 TNCi 0099 Toshiba 0026, 0 028, 00 36, 00 38, 0040, 0043 , 0102 Vector Research 0100 Vidikron 0101 Vidtech 0004, 0005, 0006 Viewsonic 0058, 010 7 Viking 0012 Viore 0089 Vizio 0004, 0070, 00 71, 0108 Wards 0000, 0001, 0004, 000 5, 0006, 0009, 010 0, 0101 Waycon 0102 Westinghouse 0047, 0051 White Westinghouse 0023 Yamaha 0004, 0005, 0006 , 0100 Zenith 0001, 0004, 0 011, 0015, 0099 DVD If operations are not pos sible using the preset codes below, you may be able to conduct oper ations with the preset codes for the BD , DVR (BDR, HDR) . Pioneer 2014, 2158 Accurian 2092 Advent 2072 Aiwa 2012 Akai 2066 Alco 2070 Allegro 2087 Amphion MediaWorks 2037 AMW 2037 Apex 2002, 2018, 2079 , 2080 Apple 2058 Arrgo 2088 Aspire 2073 Astar 2052 Audiovox 2070 Axion 2040 Bang & Olufsen 2081 Blaupunkt 2080 Blue Parade 2078 Boston 2059 Broksonic 2066 California Audio Labs 2068 CambridgeSoundWorks 2065 CineVision 2087 Coby 2029 Curtis Mathes 2089 CyberHome 2000, 208 8 Cytron 2039 Daewoo 2021, 2087 Denon 2026, 2068 Desay 2055 DiamondVision 2042 Disney 2022 Durabrand 2090 Emerson 2067, 2082, 20 91 Enterprise 2082 ESA 2053, 2091 Fisher 2083 Funai 2091 GE 2016, 2 077, 20 80 GFM 2043 Go Video 2087 Gradiente 2068 Greenhill 2080 Haier 2094 Harman/Kardon 2030, 2084 Hitachi 2011 Hiteker 2079 iLive 2062 Ilo 2038 Initial 2038, 2080 Insignia 2036, 20 64, 209 1 Integra 2078 iSymphony 2060 JBL 2084 JVC 2013 Kawasaki 2070 Kenwood 2028, 2068 KLH 2070, 2080 Koss 2024, 2069, 20 75 Landel 2093 Lasonic 2085 Lenoxx 2074, 2090 LG 2019, 20 51, 206 1, 2082 , 2087 Liquid Video 2075 Liteon 2025, 2092 Magnavox 2067, 2076, 2091 Memorex 2066 Microsoft 2077 Mintek 2038, 20 80, 208 6 Mitsubishi 2020 Nesa 2080 Next Base 2093 Nexxtech 2056 Onkyo 2076 Oppo 2041, 2057 Oritron 2069, 207 5 Panasonic 2005, 2007, 20 17, 2032, 2033, 2050 , 2068, 20 76 Philips 2045, 2076 Proceed 2079 Proscan 2077 Qwestar 2069 RCA 2008, 2016, 2070 , 2077, 2078, 2080 Regent 2074 Rio 2087 Rowa 2071 Samsung 2009, 2 011, 20 15, 203 1, 2044, 206 8 Sansui 2066 Sanyo 2066, 20 83 Sharp 2035 Sherwood 2063 Shinsonic 2086 Sonic Blue 2087 Sony 2003, 2004, 2010 , 2012, 2027, 2046, 204 7, 2048 Sungale 2054 Superscan 2067 Sylvania 2023, 2067, 2091 Symphonic 2023 Teac 2070 Technics 2068 Theta Digital 2078 Toshiba 2001, 2006, 204 9, 2066, 2076 Trutech 2000 Urban C oncepts 2076 US Logic 2086 Venturer 2070 Xbox 2077 Yamaha 2005, 2068 Zenith 2019, 20 76, 208 2, 2087 BD If operations are not pos sible using the preset codes below, you may be able to conduct oper ations with the preset codes for the DVD , DVR (BDR, HDR) . Pioneer 2159, 2160 Denon 2147, 2148, 214 9 Hitachi 2144, 214 5, 214 6 JVC 2127, 2128, 2130 , 2131, 2132, 2133 Kenwood 2044 LG 2123, 2124 Marant z 2139, 2140 Mitsubish i 2137, 2138 Onkyo 2126 Panasonic 2114, 2115, 21 16 Philips 2117 Samsung 2119 Sharp 2141, 2 142, 21 43 Sony 2120, 2121, 212 2, 2129 Toshiba 2125, 2099 Yamaha 2134, 2135, 2136 DVR (BDR, HDR) If operations are not pos sible using the preset codes below, you may be able to conduct oper ations with the preset codes for the DVD , BD . Pioneer 2103, 21 50, 21 51, 215 2, 2153, 2154, 215 5, 2156, 2157 Panasonic 2100, 2106 Sharp 2104, 2112 Sony 2105, 2 108, 21 09, 21 10, 211 3 Toshiba 2111 SC-1525_UXJCB.bo ok 108 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ æÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂç« æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ æÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Additional in formation 12 109 En VCR Pioneer 1035 ABS 1017 Adventura 1005 Aiwa 1005 Alienware 1017 American High 1004 Asha 1002 Audio Dynamics 1000 Audiovox 1003 Bang & Ol ufsen 1032 Beaumar k 1002 Bell & Howell 1001 Calix 1003 Candle 1002, 1003 Canon 1004 Citizen 1002, 1003 Colort yme 1000 Craig 1002, 1003 Curtis Mathes 1000, 10 02, 100 4 Cyberne x 1002 CyberP ower 1017 Daewoo 1005 DBX 1000 Dell 1017 DIRECTV 1016, 1020, 1022 , 1023, 1024, 1027, 1030 , 1031 Dish N etwork 1029 Dishpro 1029 Durab rand 1018 Dynate ch 1005 Echostar 1029 Electrohome 1003 Electrophonic 1003 Emerson 1003, 1004, 10 05 Expressvu 1029 Fisher 1001 Fuji 1004 Funai 1005 Garrard 1005 Gateway 1017 GE 1002, 1004 GOI 1029 Goldstar 1000, 1003 Gradiente 1005 Harley Davidson 1005 Harman/Kardon 1000 Headquarter 1001 Hewlett Packar d 1017 HNS 1016 Howard Computers 1017 HP 1017 HTS 1029 Hughes Network Systems 1016, 1020, 1022, 1023 , 1024 Humax 1016, 1020 Hush 1017 iBUYPOWER 1017 Instant Replay 1004 JC Penney 1000, 1001, 1002 , 1003, 1004 JCL 1004 JVC 1000, 10 01, 102 0, 1029 Kenwood 1000, 1001 Kodak 1003, 1004 LG 1003 Linksys 1017 LloydâÂÂs 1005 LXI 1003 Magnav ox 1004, 1018 Magnin 1003 Marant z 1000, 10 01, 10 04 Marta 1003 Matsushita 1004 Media Center PC 1017 MEI 1004 Memorex 1001, 1002, 1003 , 1004, 1005, 1018, 1019 MGN Technology 1002 Microsoft 1017 Mind 1017 Mitsubish i 1010 Motorola 1004 MTC 1002 Multitech 1002, 10 05 NEC 1000, 100 1 Nikko 1003 Niveus Media 1017 Noblex 1002 Northgate 1017 Olympus 1004 Optimus 1003 Orion 1014, 1019 Panasonic 1004, 1008 Philco 1004 Philips 1004, 1 011, 10 16, 10 20, 102 2, 1023, 1024, 1025 Philips M agnavo x 1011 Pilot 1003 Proscan 1030 Pulsar 1018 Quarter 1001 Quartz 1001 Quasar 1004 Radio Shack 1003 Radio Shack/Realisti c 1001, 100 2, 1003, 1004, 1005 Radix 1003 Randex 1003 RCA 1002, 1004, 1007 , 1016, 1020, 1022, 1030, 1031 Realistic 1001, 1002, 100 3, 1004, 1005 ReplayTV 1026 Ricavisio n 1017 Runco 1018 Samsun g 1002, 1016, 1022 , 1024 Sanky 1018 Sansui 1014, 1019 Sanyo 1001, 1002 Sears 1001, 1003, 1004 Sharp 1012 Shogun 1002 Singer 1004 Sonic Blue 1026 Sony 1006, 1 009, 10 17, 102 1 Stack 1017 STS 1004 Sylvania 1004, 1005 Symphonic 1005 Systemax 1017 Tagar Systems 1017 Tandy 1001 Tashiko 1003 Teac 1005 Technics 1004 Teknika 1003, 1004, 1005 Tivo 1016, 10 20, 102 1, 1022 , 1025 TMK 1002 Toshiba 1015, 10 17, 102 8 Totevi sion 1002, 1003 Touch 1017 UltimateTV 1031 Unitech 1002 Vector Research 1000 Video Concepts 1000 Videosonic 1002 Viewsonic 1017 Voodoo 1017 Wards 1002, 1003, 10 04, 1005 XR-1000 1004, 1005 Yamaha 1000, 1001 Zenith 1013, 1018 ZT Group 1017 Satellite Set Top Box Pioneer 0126, 6097, 6098 , 6145 ADB 6035, 6001 Akai 6102 Alba 6005, 6013, 60 11 Allsat 6102 Alltech 6011 Amstrad 6033, 6 030, 60 44 Anttron 6013 Asat 6102 Austar 6000, 6045 BELL 6160 Bell Exp ressVu 6002, 60 03 British Sky Broadcasting 6030 Canal 6105 Chaparral 6034 CNS 6001 Coolsat 6021 Crossdigital 6043 Digenius 6104 Digiwave 6053 DirecTV 6070, 6110, 6111, 606 2, 6063, 61 13, 600 8, 6038 , 6054 , 6069, 6060, 60 59, 604 3, 6018 , 6114 , 6115, 6116, 6093 Dish Network System 6002, 6089 , 6003, 6004 Dishpro 6002, 6089, 60 04 DX Antenna 6140 E Aichi 6141 Echostar 6002, 6 089, 60 36, 60 05, 6003, 6004, 6146 Express vu 6002, 60 04 Fujitsu 6133, 6134, 6135 Fortec Star 6123, 602 3 Fresat 6014 Funai 6070 GE 6111 General In strument 6032 GOI 6002, 60 04 Grundig 6007, 6030 Hirschmann 6033 Hisense 6020 Hitachi 6038, 6 049, 61 32 Houston 6002 HTS 6002, 6004 Hughes Network Systems 6113, 6038, 60 54, 611 4, 6115 , 6116 Hyundai 6016 iLo 6020 Innova 6059 Jerrold 6032, 6128, 61 49, 6150, 6151, 61 52, 615 3, 6154 , 6155 , 6156, 6157 JVC 6002, 60 03, 600 4 Kathrein 6096 Lava 6053 LG 6047, 6018 Marant z 6102 McIntosh 6032 Mitsubish i 6038 Motorola 6032, 6042 NEC 6050, 613 1 Netsat 6059 Next Level 6032 nfusion 6015 Nokia 6025, 60 26, 611 8, 6119 , 6121 Pace 6035, 6005, 6030 , 6031 Panarex 6016 Panasonic 6008, 6009, 603 0, 6136, 6137, 6138 Pansat 6016, 6022 Philips 6002, 6 113, 60 38, 60 54, 606 0, 6059, 61 02, 610 3, 6030 , 6114 Primesta r 6032, 6147 Proscan 6110, 6111 Proton 6020 RadioShack 6002, 6 111, 60 32 Radix 6036 RCA 6002, 6110, 6111 , 6113, 6109, 6061, 61 14, 614 2, 6144 , 6148 SA 6124, 6 126, 61 58, 615 9 Saba 6014 Sagem 6041, 612 0 Samsun g 6070, 6113, 6091 , 6043, 6017, 6114, 6093 Sanyo 6046 Sat Cruiser 6015 Schwai ger 6066 SEI 6139 Siemen s 6007, 60 36 SKY 6042, 60 59, 603 0, 6031 SM Elect ronic 6011 Smart 6051 Sonicvi ew 6055, 6107 Sony 6062, 6 063, 60 30, 614 3 Star Cho ice 6032 Star Tra k 6032 TechniSat 6033 Thomso n 6110, 6111, 6014 Tivo 6113, 61 14, 611 5, 6116 Toshiba 6038, 60 54, 603 9, 6130 TPS 6041 Triasat 6033 Ultrasat 6021 US Digital 6020 USDTV 6020 ViewSat 6048 Voom 6032 Zehnder 6101 Zenith 6042, 6069, 603 7, 6125, 6127, 6129 SC-1525_UXJCB.bo ok 109 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ æÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂç« æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ æÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Additional information 12 110 En Satellite Set Top Box (SAT/PVR C ombination) Pioneer 0126, 0128 Bell ExpressVu 6002, 6003 DirecTV 6070, 6110, 6062 , 6113, 6060, 605 9, 6114 , 6115 , 6116 Dish Network System 6002, 6089 Dishpro 6002, 6089 Echostar 6002, 6089, 6003 Expressvu 6002 Hughes Network Systems 6113, 6114, 611 5, 6116 JVC 6003 Motorola 6032 Philips 6113, 6114 Proscan 6110 Samsung 6114 Sonicview 6055, 6107 Sony 6062 Star Choice 6032 Tivo 6113, 6114, 6115 , 6116 Cable Set Top Box Pioneer 6028, 6 029, 60 95, 609 9 ABC 6122 Accuphase 6122 Amino 6077, 6078 Auna 6082 BCC 6072 Bell & Howell 6122 Bright House 6074, 6029 Cable One 6074, 6029 Cablevision 6074, 6029 Charter 6074, 6029, 6058 Cisco 6029, 6028, 6083 Comcast 6074, 6 029, 19 82 Cox 6074, 6029 Digeo 6029, 60 58 Director 6073 Emerson 6122 Fosgate 6072 General Instrument 6073, 6072, 6122 Homecast 6024 i3 Micro 6077 Insight 6074, 6073, 6029 Jebsee 6122 Jerrold 6073, 6 072, 61 22 Knology 6029 Macab 6040 Mediacom 6074, 6029 Memorex 6112 Motorola 6074, 60 73, 60 72, 602 9, 6122, 609 4 MTS 6094 Myrio 6077, 6078 Noos 6040 Pace 6074, 60 29, 602 8, 6106 , 6083 Panasonic 6112, 6083 Paragon 6112 Penney 6112 Philips 6012 Pulsar 6112 Quasar 6112 Regal 6072 Rogers 6029 Runco 6112 Samsung 6095 Scientific Atlanta 6029, 6028, 6027, 6112 Sejin 6077 Shaw 6074 Starcom 6122 Stargate 6122 Suddenlink 6074, 60 29 Supercab le 6072 Time Warner 6074, 6 029, 60 58 Tivo 6076 Toshiba 6112 United Cable 6072, 6122 US Electronics 6072 Videoway 6112 Zenith 6112 Cable Set Top Box (Cable /PVR Combin ation) Pioneer 0127, 6029 Amino 6078 Bright House 6074, 6029 Cable One 6074, 6029 Cablevision 6074, 6029 Charter 6074, 6029, 60 58 Cisco 6029, 6083 Comcast 6074, 6 029, 60 83, 607 6 Cox 6074, 6029 Digeo 6081, 605 8 Homecast 6024 Insight 6074, 6029 Knology 6029 Mediacom 6074, 6029 Motorola 6074, 6081 Myrio 6078 Pace 6029 Panasonic 6083 Rogers 6029 Scientific At lanta 6029 Shaw 6074 Suddenlink 6074, 60 29 Supercab le 6072 Time Warner 6074, 6 029, 60 58 Tivo 6076 CD Pioneer 5065, 5066 AKAI 5043 Asuka 5045 Denon 5019 Fisher 5048 Goldstar 5040 Hitachi 5042 Kenwood 5020, 50 21, 503 1 Luxman 5049 Marantz 5033 Onkyo 5017, 5 018, 50 30, 50 50 Panasonic 5036 Philips 5022, 5032, 5044 RCA 5013, 5029 Roadstar 5052 Sharp 5051 Sony 5012, 5023, 5026 , 5027, 5028, 5039 TEAC 5015, 50 16, 503 4, 5035 , 5037 Technics 5041 Victor 5014 Yamaha 5024, 5 025, 50 38, 50 46, 5047 CD-R Pioneer 5067 Philips 5054 Yamaha 5055 Laser Disc Player Pioneer 5062, 5063 Cassete Deck Pioneer 5058, 505 9, 5070 Digital Tape Pioneer 5069 MD Pioneer 5068 SC-1525_UXJCB.bo ok 110 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ æÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂç« æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ æÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Additional in formation 12 111 En Specifications Amplifier Section Continuous averag e power output of 140 watts* per channel, min., at 8 oh ms, from 20 Hz to 20 000 Hz with no more than 0. 08 %** total harmonic distortion. Multi channel simultaneou s p ower out p ut (1 kHz, 1 %, 8 é ) 7 ch total . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 630 W Continuous Powe r Out p ut (20 Hz to 20 kHz, 8 é , 0.08 %) F r ont . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140 W 140 W Cente r . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140 W Su rr ound . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140 W 140 W Su rr ound back (F r ont height/wide) . . . . . . 140 W 140 W Continuous Powe r Out p ut (1 kHz, 6 é , 1.0 %) F r ont . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180 W 180 W Cente r . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180 W Su rr ound . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180 W 180 W Su rr ound back (F r ont height/wide) . . . . . . 180 W 180 W Total ha r monic disto rtion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0.05 % (20 Hz to 20 kHz, 130 W, 8 é ) * Measured pursuant to the Federal Trade CommissionâÂÂs Trade Regulation rule on Powe r Output Claims f or Amplifiers ** Measured by Audio Spectrum A nalyzer Audio Section In p ut (Sensitivity/Im p edance) PHONO MM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 mV/47 k é LINE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 400 mV/47 k é Out p ut (Level/Im p edance) REC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 400 mV/2.2 k é Signal-to-Noise Ratio (IHF, sho r t ci r cuited, A netwo r k) LINE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .103 dB F r equency Res p onse . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 Hz to 100 000 Hz dB (Pu r e Di r ect Mode) Tuner Section F r equency Range (FM) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87.5 MHz to 108 MHz Antenna In p ut ( FM) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75 é unbalanc ed F r equency Range (AM). . . . . . . . . . . . . . 531 kHz to 1602 kHz Antenna (AM) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Loo p antenna (balanced) Video Section Signal level Com p osite Video . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 V p -p (75 é ) Com p onent Video . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Y: 1.0 V p -p (75 é ), PB, PR: 0.7 V p -p (75 é ) Co rr es p onding maximum r esolution Com p onent Video . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1080 p (1125 p ) (Video conve r t off) Digital In/Out Section HDMI te r minal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19- p in (Not DVI) HDMI out p ut ty p e . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 V, 100 mA USB te r minal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . USB2.0 Full S p eed (Ty p e A) iPod te r minal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . USB, and Vid eo (Com p osite) SIRIUS antenna cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8- p in mini DIN cable ADAPTER POR T te r minal. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 V, 100 mA Integrated Control Section Cont r ol (SR) te r minal . . . . . . . . . . . . à3.5 Mini-jack (MONO) Cont r ol (IR) te r minal . . . . . . . . . . . . . à3.5 Mini-jack (MONO) IR signal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . High Active (High Level: 2.0 V) 12 V T r igger te r minal . . . . . . . . . . . . . à3.5 Mini-jack (MONO) 12 V T r igger out p ut t y p e . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 V, Total 150 mA RS-232C cable ty p e . . . . . . . 9- p in, c r oss ty p e, fema le-female EXTENSION te r minal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 V, 150 mA Network Section LAN te r minal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 BASE-T/100 BASE-TX Mis cel la neo us Powe r r eq ui r ements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .AC 120 V, 60 Hz Powe r consum p tion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 330 W In standby . . . . . . . . 0.2 W (HDMI Setu p â Cont r ol : OFF) 0.3 W (HDMI Setu p â Cont r ol : ON) Dimensions . . . . . . 420 mm (W) x 200 mm (H) x 460 mm (D) (16 9 / 16 in. (W) x 7 7 / 8 in. (H) x 18 1 / 8 in. (D)) Weight (without p ackage) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18.5 kg (40.8 lb) Number of Furnished Parts MCACC Setu p mic r op hone (APM7009). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 Remote cont r ol unit (AXD7591) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 AAA size IEC R03 d r y cell batte r ies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 iPod cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 AM loo p antenna . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 FM wi r e antenna . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 Powe r co r d . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 These o p e r ating inst r uctions Note â¢S p ecifications and the design ar e subject to p ossible modifications without notice, due to im pr ovements. Cleaning the unit â¢U s e a p o lishing cloth o r d r y cloth to wi p e off dust and di r t. â¢W h e n t h e s u r face is dir ty, wip e with a sof t cloth di pp ed in some neut r al cleanse r diluted five o r six times with wate r , and w r ung out well, and then wi p e again with a d r y cloth. Do n ot use fu r niture wax o r cleanse r s. â¢N e v e r use thinner s, benzene, insecticide s pr ays or othe r chemicals on o r nea r thi s unit, s ince these will co rr ode the su r face. This product includes FontAven ue î fonts licenced by NEC corporation. FontAvenue is a registered trad emark of NEC Corporat ion SC-1525_UXJCB.bo ok 111 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ æÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂç« æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ æÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Additional information 12 112 En SC-1525_UXJCB.bo ok 112 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ æÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂç« æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ æÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Additional in formation 12 113 En SC-1525_UXJCB.bo ok 113 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ æÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂç« æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ æÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Additional information 12 114 En SC-1525_UXJCB.bo ok 114 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ æÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂç« æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ æÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Additional in formation 12 115 En LIMITED WARRANTY WARRANTY VALID ONLY IN COUNTRY OF PRODUCT PURCHASE WARRANTY Pioneer Electronics (USA) Inc. (PUSA), and Pioneer Electronics Of Canada, Inc. (POC), warrant that products distributed by PUSA in the U.S.A., and by POC in Canada that fail to function properly under normal use due to a manufacturing defect when installed and operated according to the ownerâÂÂs manual enclosed with the unit will be repaired or replaced with a unit of comparable value, at the option of PUSA or POC, without charge to you for parts or actual repair work. Parts supplied under this warranty may be new or rebuilt at the option of PUSA or POC. THIS LIMITED WARRANTY APPLIES TO THE ORIGINAL OR ANY SUBSEQUENT OWNER OF THIS PIONEER PRODUCT DURING THE WARRANTY PERIOD PROVID ED THE PRODUCT WAS PURCHASED FROM AN AUTHORIZED PIONEER DISTRIBUTOR/DEALER IN THE U.S.A. OR CANADA. YOU WILL BE REQUIRED TO PROVIDE A SALES RECEIPT OR OTHER VALID PROOF OF PURCHASE SHOWING THE DATE OF ORIGINAL PURCHASE OR, IF RENTED, YOUR RENTAL CONTRACT SHOWING THE PLACE AND DATE OF FIRST RENTAL . IN THE EVENT SERVICE IS REQUIRED, THE PRODUCT MUST BE DELIVERED WITHIN THE WARRANTY PERIOD, TRANSPOR TATION PREPAID, ONLY FROM WITHIN THE COUNTRY OF PURCHASE AS EXPLAINED IN THIS DOCUMENT. YOU WILL BE RESPONSIBLE FOR REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION OF THE PRODUCT. PUSA OR POC, AS APPROPRIATE, WILL PAY TO RETURN THE REPAIRED OR REPLACEMENT PRODUCT TO YOU WITHIN THE COUNTRY OF PURC HASE. PRODUCT WARRANTY PERIOD Home Audio and Video ........................................................................................................ ................................................. Microphones, Headphones, Phono Cartridges and Styluses ....................................................................... ......................... Shorter li mited warranty periods apply to some models. Please refer to the limited warranty document enclosed with the product for a definitive statement of the warranty period. The warranty period for retail customers who rent the product commences upon the date product is first put into use (a) during the rental period or (b) retail sale, whichever occurs first. WHAT IS NOT COVERED IF THIS PRODUCT WAS PURCHASED FROM AN UNAUTHORIZED DISTRIBUTOR, THERE ARE NO WARRANTIES, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING THE IMPL IED WARRANTY OF MERCHANTABILITY AND THE IMPLIED WARRANTY OF FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE AND THIS PRODUCT IS SOLD STRICTLY âÂÂAS ISâ AND âÂÂWITH ALL FAULTS". PIONEER SHALL NOT BE LIABLE FOR ANY CONSEQUENTIAL AND/OR INCIDENTAL DAMAGES. PIONEER DOES NOT WARRANT ANY PRODUCT LISTED ABOVE WHEN IT IS USED IN A TRADE OR BUSINESS OR IN ANY INDUSTRIAL OR COMMERCIAL APP LICATION. THIS WARRANTY DOES NOT APPLY IF THE PRODUCT HAS BEEN SUBJECTED TO POWER IN EXCESS OF ITS PUBLISHED POWER RATING. THIS WARRANTY DOES NOT COVER TELEVISION OR DISPLAY SCREENS DAMAGED BY STATIC, NON-MOVING, IMAGES APPLIED FOR LENGTHY PERIODS (B URN-IN). THIS WARRANTY DOES NOT COVER THE CABINET OR ANY APPEARANCE ITEM, USER ATTACHED ANTENNA, ANY DAMAGE TO RECORDS OR RECORDING TAPES OR DISCS, ANY DAMAGE TO THE PRODUCT RESULTING FROM ALTERATIONS, MODIFICATIONS NOT AUTHORIZED IN WRITING BY PIONEER, ACCIDENT, MISUSE OR ABUSE, DAMAGE DUE TO LIGHTNING OR TO POWER SURGES, SUBSEQUENT DAMAGE FROM LEAKING, DAMAGE FROM INOPERATIVE BATTERIES, OR THE USE OF BATTERIES NOT CONFORMING TO THOSE SPECIFIED IN THE OWNERâÂÂS MANUAL. THIS WARRANTY DOES NOT COVER THE COST OF PARTS OR LABOR WHICH WOULD BE OTHERWISE PROVIDED WITHOUT CHARGE UNDER THIS WARRANTY OB TAINED FROM ANY SOURCE OTHER THAN A PIONEER AUTHORIZED SERVICE COMPANY OR OTHER DESIGNATED LOCATION. THIS WARRANTY DOES NOT COVER DEFECTS OR DAMAGE CAUSED BY THE USE OF UNAUTHORIZED PARTS OR LABOR OR FROM IMPROPER MAINTENANCE. ALTERED, DEFACED, OR REMOVED SERIAL NUMBERS VOID THIS ENTIRE WARRANTY NO OTHER WARRANTIES IN THE U.S.A. - PIONEER LIMITS ITS OBLIGATIONS UNDER ANY IMPLIED WARRANTIES INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE, TO A PERIOD NOT TO EXCEED THE WARRANTY PERIOD. NO WARRANTIES SHALL APPLY AFTER THE WARRANTY PERIOD. SOME STATES DO NOT ALLOW LIMITATIONS ON HOW LONG AN IMPLIED WARRANTY LASTS AND SOME STATES DO NOT ALLOW THE E XCLUSIONS OR LIMITATIONS OF INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES, SO THE ABOVE LIMITATIONS OR EXCLUSIONS MAY NOT APPLY TO YOU. THIS WARRANTY GIVES YOU SPECIFIC LEGAL RIGHTS AND YOU MAY HAVE OTHER RIGHTS WHICH MAY VARY FROM STATE TO STATE. IN CANADA - EXCEPT AS EXPRESSLY PROVIDED HEREIN, THERE ARE NO REPRESENTATIONS, WARRANTIES, OBLIGATIONS OR CONDITIONS, IMPLIED, STATUTORY OR OTHERWISE, APPLICABLE TO THIS PRODUCT. TO OBTAIN SERVICE PUSA and POC have appointed a number of Authorized Service Companies throughout the U.S.A. and Canada should your product requi re service. To receive warranty service you need to present your sales receipt or, if rented, your rental contract showing place and date of original ownerâÂÂs transacti on. If shipping the unit you will need to package it carefully and send it, transportation prepaid by a traceable, insured method, to an Authorized Service Company. Package the product using adequate padding material to prevent damage in transit. The original container is ideal for this purpose. Include your name, address and telephone number where you can be reached during business hours. On all complaints and concerns in the U.S.A. call Customer Support at 1-800-421-1404, or, in Canada, call Customer Satisfaction at 1-877-283-5901. DISPUTE RESOLUTION IN THE U.S.A. - Following our response to any initial request to Customer Support, should a dispute arise between you and Pioneer, Pioneer m akes available its Complaint Resolution Program to resolve the dispute. The Complaint Resolution Program is available to you without charge. You are required to use the Complaint Resolution Program before you exercise any rights under, or seek any remedies, created by Title I of the Magnuson-Moss Warranty-Federal Trade Commission Improvement Act, 15 U.S.C. 2301 et seq. To use the Complaint Resolution Program call 1-800-421-1404 and explain to the customer service representative the problem you are experiencing, steps you have taken to have the product repaired during the warranty period and the name of the authorized Distributor/Dealer from whom the Pioneer product was purchased. After the complaint has been explained to the representative, a resolution number will be issued. Within 40 days of receiving your complaint, Pioneer will investigate the dispute and will either: (1) respond to your complaint in writing informing you what action Pioneer will take, and in what time period, to resolve the dispute; or (2) respond to your complaint in writing informing you why it will not take any action. IN CANADA - Call the Customer Satisfaction Manager at (905) 946-7446 to discuss your complaint and to obtain a prompt resolution. PIONEER ELECTRONICS (USA) INC. PIONEER ELECTRONICS OF CANADA, INC. IN THE U.S.A. For hook-up and operation of your unit or to locate an Authorized Service Company, please call or write: PIONEER ELECTRONICS SERVICE, INC. P.O. BOX 1760 LONG BEACH, CALIFORNIA 90801 1-800-421-1404 http://www.pioneerelectro nics.com IN CANADA For additional information on this warranty, please call or write: CUSTOMER SATISFACTION GROUP PIONEER ELECTRONICS OF CANADA, INC. 300 ALLSTATE PARKWAY MARKHAM, ON L3R 0P2 (905) 479-4411 1-877-283-5901 http://www.pioneerelectronics.ca RECORD THE PLACE AND DATE OF PURCHASE FOR FUTURE REFERENCE Model No. ____________________________________________ Serial No. _________________________________________ Purchase Date __ _____________________ Purchased From _____________________________________________________________________________________________________________ __________________ KEEP THIS INFORMATION AND YOUR SALES RECEIPT IN A SAFE PLACE Parts Labor 1 Year 1 Year 90 D ays 90 D a ys SC-1525_UXJCB.bo ok 115 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ æÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂç« æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ æÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Printed in <ARB7447-B> T o register your product, find the nearest authorized ser vice location, to purchase replacement parts, operating instructions, or accessories, please go to one of following URLs : P our enregistrer votre produit, trouver le ser vice après-vente agréé le plus proche et pour acheter des pièces de rechange, des modes dâÂÂemploi ou des accessoires, reportez-vous aux URL suivantes : In the USA/A ux Etats-Unis http://www .pioneerelectronics.com In Canada/A ux Canada http://www .pioneerelectronics.ca S018_B1_EnFr Published b y Pioneer Cor poration. Copyright é 2010 Pioneer Corporation. All rights reser ved. PIONEER CORPORA TION 1-1, Shin-ogura, Saiwai-ku, Ka wasaki-shi, Kanagaw a 212-0031, Japan PIONEER ELECTRONICS (USA) INC. P .O. BO X 1540, Long Beach, California 90801-1540, U .S.A. TEL: (800) 421-1404 PIONEER ELECTRONICS OF CANAD A, INC. 300 Allstate P arkway , Markham, Ontario L3R 0P2, Canada TEL: 1-877-283-5901, 905-479-4411 PIONEER EUROPE NV Hav en 1087, Keetberglaan 1, B-9120 Melsele , Belgium TEL: 03/570.05.11 PIONEER ELECTRONICS ASIA CENTRE PTE. L TD. 253 Alexandr a Road, #04-01, Singapore 159936 TEL: 65-6472-7555 PIONEER ELECTRONICS A USTRALIA PTY . L TD. 178-184 Boundary Road, Braeside, Victoria 3195, Australia, TEL: (03) 9586-6300 PIONEER ELECTRONICS DE MEXICO S.A. DE C.V . Blvd.Manuel A vila Camacho 138 10 piso Col.Lomas de Chapultepec, Me xico, D .F . 11000 TEL: 55-9178-4270 K002_B1_En 99he_Backcov er.fm 115 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼ å¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂç«æÂÂæÂÂ¥ ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
The exclamation point within an equilateral triangle is intended to alert the user to the presence of important operating and maintenance (ser vicing) instructions in the literature accompanying the appliance. The lightning flash with arrowhead symbol, within an equilateral triangle, is intended to alert the user to the presence of uninsulated âÂÂdangerous voltageâ within the productâÂÂs enclosure that may be of sufficient magnitude to constitute a risk of electric shock to persons. CAUTION: TO PREVENT THE RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK, DO NOT REMOVE COVER (OR BACK). NO USER-SERVICEABLE P ARTS INSIDE. REFER SERVICING TO QUALIFIED SERVICE PERSONNEL. CAUTION RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK DO NOT OPEN IMPOR T ANT D3-4-2-1-1_A1_En W ARNING This equipment is not waterproof . T o prevent a fire or shock hazard, do not place any container filled with liquid near this equipment (such as a vase or flower pot) or expose it to dripping, splashing, rain or moisture. D3-4-2-1-3_A1_En W ARNING Before plugging in for the first time, r ead the following section carefully . The voltage of the available power supply differs according to country or region. Be sur e that the power supply voltage of the area wher e this unit will be used meets the requir ed voltage (e.g., 230 V or 120 V) written on the rear panel. D3-4-2-1-4*_A1_En Operating Environment Operating environment temperature and humidity : 5 ðC to 35 ðC ( 41 ðF to 95 ðF); less than 85 %RH (cooling vents not blocked) Do not install this unit in a poorly ventilated area, or in locations exposed to high humidity or direct sunlight (or strong artificial light) D3-4-2-1-7c*_A1_En W ARNING T o prevent a fire hazard, do not place any naked flame sources (such as a lighted candle) on the equipment. D3-4-2-1-7a_A1_En Caution T o prevent fire hazard, the Class 2 W iring Cable should be used for connection with speaker , and should be routed away from hazards to avoid damage to the insulation of the cable. D3-7-13-67*_A1_En Read these instructions. Keep these instructions. Heed all warnings. F ollow all instructions. Do not use this apparatus near water . Clean only with dr y cloth. Do not block any ventilation openings. Install in accordance with the manufacturer âÂÂs instructions. Do not install near any heat sources such as radiators, heat registers, stoves, or other apparatus (including amplifiers) that produce heat. Do not defeat the safety purpose of the polarized or grounding-type plug. A polarized plug has two blades with one wider than the other . A grounding type plug has two blades and a third grounding prong. The wide blade or the third prong are provided for your safety . If the provided plug does not fit into your outlet, consult an electrician for replacement of the obsolete outlet. P rotect the power cord from being walked on or pinched particularly at plugs, convenience receptacles, and the point where they exit from the apparatus. 1) 2) 3) 4) 5) 6) 7) 8) 9) 10) Only use attachments/accessories specified by the manufacturer . Use only with the cart, stand, tripod, bracket, or table specified by the manufacturer , or sold with the apparatus. When a cart is used, use caution when moving the cart/apparatus combination to avoid injur y from tip-over . Unplug this apparatus during lightning storms or when unused for long periods of time. Refer all servicing to qualified ser vice personnel. Ser vicing is required when the apparatus has been damaged in any way , such as power-supply cord or plug is damaged, liquid has been spilled or objects have fallen into the apparatus, the apparatus has been exposed to rain or moisture, does not operate normally , or has been dropped. D3-7-13-69_En 11) 12) 13) 14) SC-1525_UXJCB.bo ok 2 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ æÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂç« æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ æÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
VENTILA TION CAUTION When installing this unit, make sure to leave space around the unit for ventilation to improve heat radiation (at least 20 cm at top, 10 cm at rear , and 20 cm at each side). W ARNING Slots and openings in the cabinet are provided for ventilation to ensure reliable operation of the product, and to protect it from overheating. T o prevent fire hazard, the openings should never be blocked or covered with items (such as newspapers, table-cloths, curtains) or by operating the equipment on thick carpet or a bed. D3-4-2-1-7b*_A1_En If the AC plug of this unit does not match the AC outlet you want to use, the plug must be removed and appropriate one fitted. Replacement and mounting of an AC plug on the power supply cord of this unit should be per formed only by qualified ser vice personnel. If connected to an AC outlet, the cut-off plug can cause severe electrical shock. Make sure it is properly disposed of after removal. The equipment should be disconnected by removing the mains plug from the wall socket when left unused for a long period of time (for example, when on vacation). D3-4-2-2-1a_A1_En CAUTION The ïµ STANDBY/ON switch on this unit will not completely shut off all power from the AC outlet. Since the power cord ser ves as the main disconnect device for the unit, you will need to unplug it from the AC outlet to shut down all power . Therefore, make sure the unit has been installed so that the power cord can be easily unplugged from the AC outlet in case of an accident. T o avoid fire hazard, the power cord should also be unplugged from the AC outlet when left unused for a long period of time (for example, when on vacation). D3-4-2-2-2a*_A1_En NOTE: This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device, pursuant to P art 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential installation. This equipment generates, uses, and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the instructions, may cause harmful inter ference to radio communications. However , there is no guarantee that inter ference will not occur in a particular installation. If this equipment does cause harmful inter ference to radio or television reception, which can be determined by turning the equipment off and on , the user is encouraged to tr y to correct the inter ference by one or more of the following measures: â Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna. â Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver . â Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the receiver is connected. â Consult the dealer or an experienced radio/TV technician for help. D8-10-1-2_A1_En Information to User Alterations or modifications carried out without appropriate authorization may invalidate the user âÂÂs right to operate the equipment. D8-10-2_A1_En CAUTION This product satisfies FCC regulations when shielded cables and connectors are used to connect the unit to other equipment. T o prevent electromagnetic inter ference with electric appliances such as radios and televisions, use shielded cables and connectors for connections. D8-10-3a_A1_En FEDERAL COMMUNICA TIONS COMMISSION DECLARA TION OF CONFORMITY This device complies with part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) This device may not cause harmful inter ference, and (2) this device must accept any inter ference received, including inter ference that may cause undesired operation. P roduct Name: AUDIO/VIDEO MUL TI-CHANNEL RECEIVER Model Number: SC -1525-K Responsible P arty Name: PIONEER ELECTRONICS (USA) INC. SERVICE SUPPORT DIVISION Address: 1925 E. DOMINGUEZ ST . LONG BEACH , CA 90810-1003, U.S.A. Phone: 1-800-421-1404 URL: http://www .pioneerelectronics.com D8-10-4*_C1_En IMPORT ANT NOTICE THE MODEL NUMBER AND SERIAL NUMBER OF THIS EQUIPMENT ARE ON THE REAR OR BOT TOM. RECORD THESE NUMBERS ON YOUR ENCL OSED W ARRANTY P AGE 115 FOR FUTURE REFERENCE. D36-AP9-1_A1_En SC-1525_UXJCB.bo ok 3 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ æÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂç« æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ æÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
This product is for general household purposes. Any failure due to use for other than household purposes (such as long-term use for business purposes in a restaurant or use in a car or ship) and which requires repair will be charged for even during the warranty period. K041_A1_En The Safety of Y our Ears is in Y our Hands Get the most out of your equipment by playing it at a safe level â a level that lets the sound come through clearly without annoying blaring or distortion and, most importantly , without affecting your sensitive hearing. Sound can be deceiving. Over time, your hearing âÂÂcomfort levelâ adapts to higher volumes of sound, so what sounds âÂÂnormalâ can actually be loud and harmful to your hearing. Guard against this by setting your equipment at a safe level BEFORE your hearing adapts. EST ABLISH A SAFE LEVEL: ⢠Set your volume control at a low setting. ⢠Slowly increase the sound until you can hear it comfortably and clearly , without distortion. ⢠Once you have established a comfortable sound level, set the dial and leave it there. BE SURE TO OBSERVE THE FOLLOWING GUIDELINES: ⢠Do not turn up the volume so high that you canâÂÂt hear whatâÂÂs around you. ⢠Use caution or temporarily discontinue use in potentially hazardous situations. ⢠Do not use headphones while operating a motorized vehicle; the use of headphones may create a traffic hazard and is illegal in many areas. S001a_A1_En SC-1525_UXJCB.bo ok 4 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ æÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂç« æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ æÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
5 En Contents 01 Before you start Ou r p hiloso p hy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 Featu r es . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 Checking whatâÂÂs in the box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 Installing the r eceiver . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 Loading the batte r ies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 0 O pe r ating r ange of r emote cont r ol unit . . . . . . . . . . . 10 02 Controls and displays Remote cont r ol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11 Dis p lay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 F r ont p anel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14 03 Connecting your equipment Rea r p anel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16 Dete r mining the s p eake r sâ a pp licatio n . . . . . . . . . . . 17 Othe r s p eake r connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18 Placing the s p eaker s . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18 THX s p eaker system setu p . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18 Some ti p s fo r im pr oving so und quality . . . . . . . . . . 18 Connecting the s p eaker s . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19 Installing yo u r sp eaker system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20 Standa r d su rr ound conn ection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20 Bi-am p ing you r s p eake r s . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21 Bi-wi r ing you r s p eake r s . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21 Selecting th e S p eaker system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22 F r ont height setu p . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22 F r ont wide setu p . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22 S p ea ke r B setu p . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22 Bi-Am p ing setu p . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 2 ZONE 2 setu p . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22 About the audio connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22 About the video conve r ter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22 About HDMI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23 Connecting you r TV and p layback com p onents . . . . . 24 Connecting using HDMI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24 Connecting you r DVD p layer with no HDMI out p ut . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25 Connecting you r TV with no HDMI in p ut . . . . . . . . . 26 Connecting an HDD/DVD r ecor der , BD r ecor der and othe r video sou r ces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27 Connecting a satellite/ cable r eceiver or othe r set-to p box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28 Connecting the multichannel analog in p uts . . . . . . . 29 Connecting othe r audio com p onen ts . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30 About the WMA9 P r o decode r . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30 Connecting additional am p lifie r s . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 1 Connect ing AM/FM antennas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31 Connecting exte r nal ante nnas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32 MULTI-ZONE setu p . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 2 Making MULTI-ZONE connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32 Connecting to the netwo r k th r ough LAN inte r face . . . 33 Connecting O p tional Bluetoothî ADAPTER . . . . . . . 34 Connecting an HDMI -equi pp ed com p onent to the f r ont p anel i n p ut . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34 Connecting an XM Ra dio tune r . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34 Connecting a Si r iusConn ect⢠tune r . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34 Connecting an iPo d . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35 Connecting a USB device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35 Connecting a USB device fo r Advanced MCACC out p ut . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35 Connecting an IR r eceiver . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36 O pe r ating othe r Pionee r com p onents with this unitâÂÂs senso r . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36 Switching com p onents on and off using the 12 volt t r igger . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37 Plugging in the r eceiver . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37 04 Basic Setup Changing the OSD dis play language (OSD Language) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38 Automatically con ducting o p timum sound tuning (Full Au to MCA CC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38 P r oblems when using the Auto MCACC Setu p . . . . 40 The In p ut Setu p menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40 In p ut function default and p ossible settings . . . . . . 41 05 Basic playback Playing a so u r ce . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42 Playing a sou r ce with HDMI connection . . . . . . . . . 42 Selecting the mu ltichannel ana log in p uts . . . . . . . . 42 Playin g an iPod . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43 Playing back audio files sto r ed on an iPod . . . . . . . 43 Playing a USB device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 Playing back audio files sto r ed on a USB memo r y device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 Playing back p hoto files sto r ed on a USB memo r y device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 About p layable file fo r mats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45 Listen ing to th e r adio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46 Im pr oving FM sound . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46 Using the noise cut mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46 Using Neu r al Su rr ound . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46 Tuning di r ectly to a station . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46 Saving s tation pr esets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46 Listening to station pr esets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46 Naming station pr esets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46 Listening t o Satellit e Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47 Listening t o XM Radi o . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47 Using XM HD Su rr ound . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47 Saving channel pr esets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48 Using the XM Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48 Listening to SIRIUS Radi o . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48 Saving channel pr esets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49 Using the SIRIUS Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49 Listening to Inte r net r adio stations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49 P r og r amm ing the Inte r net r adio stations . . . . . . . . 50 Thank you for buying this P ioneer product. Please read through these operating instructions so you will know how to operate your model properly . Af ter you have finished reading the instructions, put them away in a safe place for future reference. SC-1525_UXJCB.bo ok 5 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ æÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂç« æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ æÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
6 En Bluetooth ADAPTER fo r Wir eless Enjoyment of Music . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51 Wi r eless music p lay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 1 Pai r ing the Blu etooth ADAPT ER and Bluetoo th wi r eless technology device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51 Listening to music contents of a Bluetooth wi r eless technology device with you r system . . . . . . 52 06 Listening to your system Auto p layback . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53 Listening in su rr ound sound . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53 Standa r d su rr ound sou nd . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53 Using the Home THX modes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 4 Using the Advanced su rr ound effects . . . . . . . . . . . 54 Listening in ste r eo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55 Using F r ont Stage Su rr ound Advance . . . . . . . . . . . . 55 Using St r eam Di r ect . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55 Selecting MCAC C pr esets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56 Choosing the in p ut signal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56 Bette r sound using Phase Con t r ol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56 07 Control with HDMI function Making Cont r ol with HDMI connections . . . . . . . . . . . 57 HDMI Setu p . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57 Befo r e using synch r onization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58 About synch r onized o p er ations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58 About connections with a pr oduct of a diffe r ent b r and that su pp o r ts the Cont r ol with HDMI function . . . . . 59 Setting th e PQLS functi on . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59 Cautions on the C ont r ol with HDMI function . . . . . . . 59 08 Using other functions Setting th e Audio o p tions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60 Setting the Video o p tions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62 Switching t he s p eaker te r minals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63 Using the MULTI-ZONE co nt r ols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63 Making an audio o r a video r ecor ding . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64 Reducing the level of an analog signal . . . . . . . . . . . . 64 Using the sl ee p time r . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65 Dimming the dis p lay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65 Switching t he HDMI out p ut . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65 Using the Web Cont r ol function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65 Checking you r system settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65 Resetting the system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66 Default system settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66 09 Controlling the rest of your system About the Remote Se tu p menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67 O pe r ating multi p le r eceive rs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67 Setting the r emote to cont r ol othe r com p onents . . . . 68 Selecting pr eset codes di r ec tly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68 P r og r amming signals f r om othe r r emote cont r ol s . . . 68 E r asing one of the r emo te cont r ol button se ttings . . . 6 9 E r asing all lea r nt setti ngs that a r e in one in p ut function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69 Di r ect function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69 Setting the backl ight mod e . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70 Multi o p er ation and System of f . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70 P r og r amming a Mult i o pe r ation o r a shutdown sequence . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71 Using multi o p er ations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71 Using System off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71 E r asing t he settin gs fo r the m ulti-o p er ation . . . . . . . 71 Resettin g the r emote cont r ol settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72 Default pr eset codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72 Cont r olling com p onents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72 10 The Advanced MCACC menu Making r eceive r settings f r om the Advanced MCACC me nu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75 Automatic MCACC (Ex p er t) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75 Manual MC ACC setu p . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77 Fine Channel Level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78 Fine S p eaker Distance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78 Standing Wave . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78 Acoustic Cali b r ation EQ Adjust . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79 Acoustic Cali b r ation EQ P r of essional . . . . . . . . . . . 79 Checking MCACC Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81 S p eake r Setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81 Channel Level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81 S p eake r Distance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81 Standing Wave . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81 Acoustic Cal EQ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81 Out p ut MCACC d ata . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82 Data Management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82 Renaming MCACC pr esets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82 Co p ying MCACC pr eset data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83 Clea r ing MCACC pr esets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83 SC-1525_UXJCB.bo ok 6 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ æÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂç« æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ æÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
7 En 11 The System Setup and Other S etup menus Making r eceive r settings f r om the System Setu p menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84 Manual s p eaker setu p . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84 S p eake r system setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 5 S p eake r Setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85 Channel Level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86 S p eake r Distance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86 X-Cu r ve . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87 THX Audio Setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 7 Netwo r k Setu p menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87 IP add r ess/Pr oxy setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 8 Checking the MAC add r ess . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88 Netwo r k Standby . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 8 The Othe r Setu p menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 9 Volume Setu p . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89 Remote Cont r ol Mode Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 9 Flicke r Reduction Setu p . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90 EXTENSION Setu p . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90 Multi Channe l In p ut Setu p . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 0 12 Additional in formation S p eake r Setting Guide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91 Positional r elationshi p between s peake r s and monito r . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92 T r oubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92 Powe r . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92 No sound . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93 Othe r audio pr oblems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94 ADAPTER PORT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95 Video . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95 Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96 P r ofessional Calib r ation EQ g ra p hical o ut p ut . . . . . 9 6 Dis p lay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97 Remote cont r ol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97 Web Cont r ol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98 HDMI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98 Im p or tant inf o r mation r ega r ding the HDMI connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99 USB inte r face . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99 Inte r net r adio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100 XM r adio me ssages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101 SIRIUS r adio messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102 Su rr ound sound fo r mats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103 Do lby . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 3 DTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103 Windows Media Audio 9 P r of essional . . . . . . . . . . 10 3 About THX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103 About iPod . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104 About SIRIUS and XM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 05 Auto Su rr ound, ALC and St r eam Di r ect with diffe r ent in p ut signal fo r mats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 6 P r eset code list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107 S p ecifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111 Cleaning the unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111 SC-1525_UXJCB.bo ok 7 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ æÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂç« æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ æÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
8 En Flow of settings on the receiver The unit is a full-fledged AV rece iver eq uipped with an ab undance of func tions and termina ls. It can be use d easily after following the procedure belo w to make the connect ions and settings. The colors of the steps indicate the following: Required settin g item Setting to be made as necessary 1 Before you start ⢠Checking whatâÂÂs in the box (page 10) ⢠Loading the batteries (page 10) ïª 2 Determining the speakersâ app lication (page 17) ⢠7.1 channel surround system (Front height) ⢠7.1 channel surround system (Front wide) ⢠7.1 channel surround system & Speaker B connection ⢠5.1 channel surround system & Front Bi-amping connection (High quality surr ound) ⢠5.1 channel surround syst em & ZONE 2 connection (Multi Zone) ïª 3 Connecting the speakers ⢠Placing the speakers (page 18) ⢠Connecting the speakers (page 19) ⢠Installing your speaker system (page 20) ⢠Bi-amping your speakers (page 21) ïª 4 Connecting the components ⢠About the audio connection (page 22) ⢠About the video converter (page 22) ⢠Connecting your TV and playback components (page 24) ⢠Connecting AM/FM antennas (page 31) ⢠Plugging in the receiver (page 37) ïª 5P o w e r O n ïª 6 Changing the OSD d isplay lang uage (OSD Language) ( page 38) ïª 7 MCACC speaker settings ⢠Automatically conducting optimum sound tuning (Full Auto MCACC) (page 38) ïª 8 The Input Setup menu (page 40) (When using connecti ons other than the recommended connections) ïª 9 Basic playback (page 42) ïª 10 Switching the HDMI output (page 65) ïª 11 Adjusting the sound and picture quality as desired ⢠Using the various listening modes (page 53) ⢠Better sound using Phase Control (page 56) ⢠Measuring the all EQ type (SYMMETRY/ALL CH ADJ/FRONT ALIGN) (page 75) ⢠Changing the channe l level while listening ( Tip on page 86) ⢠Switching on/off the Acoust ic Calibrati on EQ, Sound retriever or Dialog Enhan cement (page 60) ⢠Setting the PQLS function (page 59) ⢠Setting the Audio options (Tone, Loudness or Sound delay, etc.) (page 60) ⢠Setting the Video options (page 62) ïª 12 Other optional adju stments and settings ⢠Control with HDMI function (page 57) ⢠The Advanced MC ACC menu (page 75) ⢠The System Setup and Other Setup menus (page 84) ïª 13 Making maximum use of the remote con trol ⢠Operating multiple recei vers (page 67) ⢠Setting the remote to control other components (page 68) 00he_Flow_chart. fm 8 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ æÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂç« æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ æÂÂï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Before you start 01 9 En Chapter 1: Before you start Our philosophy Pionee r is dedicated to making you r home theate r listening ex p er ience as close as p ossible to the vision of the moviemake r s and maste r in g enginee r when they c r eated the o r iginal soundt r ack. We do this by focusing on th r ee im p or ta nt ste p s: 1 Achieving the highest possi ble sound quality 2 Allowing for customized acoustic calibration according to any listening area 3 Fine-tuning the receiver with the help of world- class studio engineer s * * With the cooperatio n of AIR Studios, this receiver has been designated AIR Studios Monitor: Features ⢠Direct Energy HD Amplifier Th r ough a collabo r ation, Pione e r and ICE p ower have jointly develo p ment a unique class D am p lifier called a âÂÂDi r ect Ene r gy HD (H igh Fidelity Class D ) am p lifie r âÂÂ. This new gene r ation r efer ence am p lifier offe r s outstanding p er for mance with high sound quality and r e pr oduces the latest in mul ti-channel di gital con tents. ⢠HDMI (Ver.1.4a wit h 3D, Audio Return Channel) A com p atible com p onent is r equir ed to use the above function. ⢠Remote operation on an i Phone/iPod touch O pe r ation via LAN is p ossible f r om an iPhone o r iPod touch by downloading a Pionee r or iginal a pp lication (iCont r olAV) f r om the iTun es Sto r e. ⢠iPhone/iPod playback You r iPhone o r iPod can be connected to the r eceive r âÂÂs USB te r minal to p lay the music/video files on the iPhone/ iPod. â¢P Q L S 1 Jitte r less high qu ality p layback is p ossible by connect ing a PQLS-com p atible p layer with HDMI connections. ⢠Dolby Pro Logic llz compatible Adding a p air of s p eaker s above the f r ont left and r ight s p eake r s adds ex pr essiveness in the ve r tical di r e ction to the pr evious ho r izontally-or iented sound field. The height channel st r engthens the sound fieldâÂÂs sense of th r ee- dimensionalit y and ai r , pr oduci ng pr esence and ex p ansion. ⢠Internet Radio By connecting this r eceiver to the netwo r k via the LAN te r minal, you can listen to Inte r net r adio stations. ⢠XM and SIRIUS Ready With the XM and SIRIUS Radio te r minals, youâÂÂll be u p and r unning in no time. ⢠Bluetooth compatible Using the Bluetooth ADAPTER (Pionee r Model No. A S- BT100) 2 lets you enjoy music files on an iPh one o r othe r Bluetooth wi r eless technology device wir elessly. ⢠Sound Retriever and Sound Retri ever Air The Sound Ret r iever featu r e em p loys DSP technology to r estor e sound pr essur e an d smooth jag ged ar tifacts left ove r afte r com pr ession. Sound Ret r ieve r Ai r com p ensates fo r r educed sound quality due to com pr ession when sending Bluetooth signals. ⢠Easy setup using Advanced MCACC The Auto MCACC Setu p pr ovid es a quick b ut accu r ate su rr ound sound setu p , wh ich includes the advan ced featu r es of P r ofessiona l Acoustic Calib r atio n EQ. ⢠Web control The r eceive r can be o p er ated using a b r owse r f r om a com p ute r connected on the same LAN as the r eceive r . ⢠RF two-way communications function Using the CU-RF100 3 , the info r mation shown of the r eceiver âÂÂs disp lay can be disp layed on the r emote contr ol in you r hands and you can o p er ate the r emote cont r ol without wo rr ying about obstacles o r the di r ection in which the r emote cont r ol is p ointing. Note 1 T he PQLS functions su pp o r ted fo r the PQLS Multi Su rr ound and PQLS 2ch Audio. 2 The AS-BT100 is sold se p ar ately. 3 T he CU-RF100 is sold se p ar ately. SC-1525_UXJCB.bo ok 9 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ æÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂç« æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ æÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Before you start 01 10 En Checking whatâÂÂs in the box Please check that youâÂÂve r eceived the follo wing su pp lied accesso r ies: â¢S e t u p micr op hone (cable: 5 m (16.4 ft.)) ⢠Remote cont r ol unit ⢠AAA size IEC R03 d r y cell batte r ies (to confi r m system o pe r ation) x2 â¢A M l o o p antenna â¢F M w i r e antenna ⢠iPod cable â¢P o w e r cor d â¢T h e s e o p er ating instr uctions Installing the receiver ⢠When installing this unit , make su r e to p ut it o n a level and stable su r face. DonâÂÂt insta ll it on the fol lowing p lac es: â on a colo r TV (the sc r een may disto r t) â nea r a cassette de ck (o r close to a device th at gives off a magnetic field). This may inte r fer e with the sound. â in di r ect sunlight â in dam p or wet a r eas â in ext r emely hot o r cold a r eas â in p laces whe r e the r e is vib r ation o r othe r movement â in p laces that a r e ve r y dusty â in p laces that have hot fumes o r oils (such as a kitchen) ⢠Do not touch this r eceiver âÂÂs botto m p anel while the p ower is on or just after it is tur ned off. The bottom p anel becomes hot when the p ower is on (or r ight afte r it is tu r ned off) and could cause bu r ns. Loading the bat teries The batte r ies included w ith the unit a r e to check in itial o pe r ations; they may not last ove r a long pe r iod. We r ecommend usin g alkaline bat ter ies that have a longe r life. CAUTION Inco rr ect use of batte r ies may r esult in suc h haza r ds as leakage an d bu r sting. Obse r ve the following pr ecautions: ⢠Neve r use new and ol d batte r ies to gethe r . â¢I n s e r t the p lus and minus sides of the batter ies pr o pe r ly acco r ding to the ma r ks in th e batte r y case. â¢B a t t e r ies with the same shap e may ha ve differ ent voltages. Do not use diffe r ent batte r ies togethe r . ⢠When dis p osing of used batte r ies, p lease com p ly with gove r nmental r egulations o r envi r on mental p ublic instr uctionâÂÂs r ul es th at a pp ly in you r count r y o r a r ea. ⢠WARNING Do not use o r sto r e batte r ies in di r ect sunlight o r othe r excessively hot p lace, such as insid e a ca r o r nea r a heat e r . This ca n cause ba tte r ies to leak, ove r heat, ex p lode o r catch f i r e. It can also r educe the life o r p er for mance of batte r ies. Operating range of remote control unit The r emote cont r ol may not wo r k pr o pe r ly if: â¢T h e r e ar e obstacles between the r emote contr ol and the r eceive r âÂÂs r emote senso r . â¢D i r ect su nlight or fluor escent light is sh ining onto the r emote sensor . â¢T h e r e ceiver is located nea r a device that is emitting inf r ar ed r ays. â¢T h e r eceiver is op er ated simult aneously with anoth e r inf r ar ed r emote cont r ol unit. Tip ⢠By connecting an RF ada p ter to the RS-232C and EXTENSION te r minals, the CU-RF100 omni- di r ectional r emote cont r ol can be used fo r RF two- way communications with the r eceiver . 1 W i t h R F t w o - way communications, the info r mation of the r eceiver âÂÂs disp lay can be disp layed on th e r emote cont r ol i n you r hands and the r emote con t r ol can be o pe r ated without wo rr ying about obstacles o r the di r ection in which the r emote cont r ol is p ointi ng. 2 Note 1 The RF ada p ter and CU -RF100 o mni-di r ectional r emote cont r ol a r e sold se p ar ately. 2 The maximum line-of-sight distance fo r RF two-way communications is about 10 mete r s. This line-of-sight communications di stance is a r ough indication, and may diffe r acco r ding to the su rr ounding envi r onment. 7 m (23 ft. ) 30ð 30ð SC-1525_UXJC B.book 10 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼ å¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂç«æÂÂæÂÂ¥ ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Controls and displays 02 11 En Chapter 2: Controls and displays Remote control This sectio n ex p lains how to o p er ate the r emote co nt r ol fo r the r eceive r . The remote has been conveniently color-coded accord ing to compo nent con trol using the foll owing s ystem: ⢠White â Receive r cont r ol, TV cont r ol ⢠Blue â Othe r cont r ols (See p age 43, 44, 46, 47, 51 and 72.) 1 ïµ RECEIVER This switches between standb y and on fo r this r eceiver . 2 MULTI OPERATION â Use to p er for m m ulti o pe r ations ( p age 70). R.SETUP â Use to in p ut the pr eset code when making r emote contr ol settings and to se t the r emote cont r ol mode ( p age 67). 3 Input functi on buttons P r ess to select cont r ol of othe r com p onents ( p age 67). Use INPUT SELECT to select the in p ut function ( p age 42). 4 TV CTRL Set the pr eset code of you r TVâÂÂs manufactu r er when cont r olling the TV ( p age 68). 5 TV CONTROL buttons These buttons a r e dedicated to cont r ol the TV assigned to the TV C TRL button. 6 Receiver setting b uttons P r ess fi r st to access: AUDIO PARAMETER â Use to access the Audio o p tions ( p age 60). VIDEO PARAMETER â Use to access the Video o p tions ( p age 62). HOME MENU â Use to access the Home Menu ( p ages 38, 40, 57, 75, 84 and 87). RETURN â P r ess to confir m and exit the cu rr ent menu sc r een. 7 ï©/ïª/ï«/ï¬ / ENTER Use the a rr ow buttons when setting u p you r su rr ound sound system (see p age 75) and the Audio o r Video o p tions ( p age 60 o r 62). 8 Receiver Contro l buttons P r ess fi r st to access: AUTO/ALC/DIRECT â Switches between Auto Su rr ound ( p age 53) , Auto Level Cont r ol mode and St r eam Di r ect m ode ( p age 55). STEREO â Switches between ste r eo p layback and F r ont Stage Su rr ound Advance modes ( p age 55). RECEIVER ZONE 2 ZONE 3 LIGHT AUTO / ALC / DIRECT D.A CCESS CH LEVEL A .A TT DIMMER SIGNAL SEL MCACC SLEEP HDMI OUT TV / DTV MPX PQLS PHASE CTRL ST A TUS THX PGM STEREO iPod CTRL HOME MENU TUNE TUNE TOOLS LIST CH TV CONTROL INPUT INPUT SELECT TV CTRL iPod USB TUNER SIRIUS XM ADAPTER NET RADIO CD TV BD DVD R.SETUP SOURCE RECEIVER MUL TI OPERA TION DVR/BDR HDMI RECEIVER MUTE MASTER VOLUME VOL PRESET TOP MENU BAND GUIDE T .EDIT VIDEO P ARAMETER AUDIO P ARAMETER ENTER PRESET RETURN CA TEGORY MEMORY ST ANDARD MENU ADV SURR AUDIO INFO CLASS ENTER DISP HDD DVD 5 46 8 0 79 2 13 / CLR CH 1 2 3 4 8 9 5 6 7 10 11 12 13 14 RECEIVER RECEIVER SC-1525_UXJC B.book 11 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼ å¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂç«æÂÂæÂÂ¥ ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Controls and displays 02 12 En STANDARD â P r ess for Standar d decoding and to switch va r ious modes ( 2 P r o Logic, Neo:6, etc.) ( p age 53). ADV SURR â Use to switch bet ween the va r io us su rr ound modes ( p age 54). THX â P r ess to select a Home THX listening mode ( p age 54). PHASE CTRL â P r ess to switch on/off Phas e Cont r ol ( p age 56). STATUS â P r ess to check selected r eceiver settin gs ( p age 65). PQLS â P r ess to select the PQLS setting (p age 59). HDMI OUT â Swit ch the HDMI out p ut te r minal ( p age 65). SIGNAL SEL â Use to s elect an in p ut signal ( p a ge 56). MCACC â P r ess to switch between MCACC pr esets ( p age 56). SLEEP â Use to p ut the r eceiver in sleep mode and select the amount of ti me befo r e slee p (p age 65). CH LEVEL â P r ess r ep eated ly to sele ct a channel, then use ï«/ï¬ to adjust the level ( p age 86). A.ATT â Attenuates (lowe r s) th e level of an ana log in p ut signal to pr event disto r tion ( p age 64). DIMMER â Dims o r br ightens th e disp lay (p age 65). 9 MULTI-ZONE select buttons Switch to p er for m op er ations in ZON E 2 and ZONE 3 ( p age 64). 10 Remote control LED Lights when a command is sent f r om the r emote cont r ol. 11 Switch es the r emote to cont r ol the r eceiver (used to select the white commands). Switch to p er for m op er ations in th e main zone. Also use this button to set u p su rr ound sound. 12 MASTER VOLUME /â Use to set the listening volume. 13 MUTE Mutes the sound o r r estor es the sound if it has been muted (adjusting the volume also r estor es the sound). 14 P r ess to tu r n on/off the il lumination fo r the buttons. The way the bu ttons ligh t can be selected f r om fou r modes ( p age 70). Display 1 SIGNAL indicators Light to indicate the cu rr ently selected in p ut signal. AUTO lights wh en the r eceiver is set to select the inp ut signal aut omatically ( p age 56). 2 Program format i ndicators Light to indicat e the ch annels to which digital signals a r e being in p ut. L/R â Left f r ont/Right fr ont chan nel C â Cente r channel SL / SR â Left su rr ound/Right su rr ound ch annel LFE â Low f r equency effects channel (the (( )) indicato r s light when an LFE signal is being in p ut) XL / XR â Two channels othe r than the ones above XC â Eithe r one channel other than the ones above, the mono su rr ound channel o r mat r ix encode f lag 3 Digital f ormat indicators Light when a signal encoded in the co rr es p ondi ng for mat is detected. 2 DIGITAL â Lights with Dolby Digital decoding. 2 DIGITAL PLUS â Lights with Dolby Digital Pl us decoding. 2 TrueHD â Ligh ts with Dolby T r ueHD decoding. DTS â Lights with DTS decoding. DTS HD â Lights with DTS-HD decod ing. 96/24 â Lights with DTS 96/24 decoding. WMA9 Pro â Lights to indic ate that a WMA9 P r o signal is being decoded. DSD PCM â Light du r ing DSD (Di r ect St r eam Digital) to PCM conve r sion with SACDs. RECEIVER PCM HDMI DIGITAL ANALOG L C R SL SR XL XR XC LFE AUTO DIGITAL PLUS AUTO SURROUND STREAM DIRECT PROLOGIC x Neo:6 THX ADV.SURROUND STEREO STANDARD SP AB SLEEP DSD PCM DTS HD ES 96/24 MSTR S.RTRV SOUND UP MIX OVER MONO dB 2 MULTI-ZONE STEREO TrueHD WMA9Pro PQLS ALC ATT 2 2 USB XM VIDEO TV DVD HDMI DVR BD CD TUNER SIRIUS CD-R iPod [ 2 ] [ 3 ] [ 4 ] TUNED PHONO 2 1 3 8 4 9 5 7 10 11 12 18 17 19 14 15 16 13 6 6 SC-1525_UXJC B.book 12 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼ å¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂç«æÂÂæÂÂ¥ ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Controls and displays 02 13 En PCM â Lights du r ing p layback of PCM signals. MSTR â Lights du r ing p layback of DTS-HD Master Audio signals. 4 MULTI-ZONE Lights when the MULTI-ZONE featu r e is a ctive ( p age 63). 5 SOUND Lights when any of the Midnight, Loudness o r tone cont r ols featu r es is selected ( p age 60). Lights when Dialog Enhancement is switched on . 6 Listening mode indicators AUTO SURROUND â Lights when the Auto Su rr ound featu r e is switched on ( p age 53). ALC â Lights when the ALC (Auto level cont r ol) mode is selected ( p a ge 55). STREAM DIRECT â Lights when Di r ect/Pur e Di r ect is selected ( p age 55). ADV.SURROUND â Lights when one of the Advanced Su rr ound modes has been selected ( p age 54). STEREO â Lights when ste r eo listening is swi tched on ( p age 55). STANDARD â Lights when one of the Standa r d Su rr ound modes is switched on ( p age 53). THX â Lights when one of the Home THX modes is selected ( p age 54). 7 ( PHASE CONTROL ) Lights when the Phase Cont r ol is switched on ( p age 56). 8 Analog signal indicat ors Light to indicate r educing the level of an analog signal ( p age 64). 9 Tuner indicators TUNED â Lights when a b r oadcast is being r eceived. STEREO â Lights when a ste r eo FM b r oadcast is being r eceived in auto ster eo mode. MONO â Lights when the mono mode is set using MPX . 10 Lights when the sound is muted ( p age 12). 11 Master volume level Shows the ove r all volume level. â --- â indicates the minimum level, and â 12dB â indicates the maximum level. 12 Input function indicat ors Light to indicate the in p ut function you have selected. 13 Scroll indicators Light when the r e a r e mo r e select able items when making the va r ious settings. 14 Speaker indicators Lights to in dicate the cu rr ent s p eaker system , A and/o r B ( p age 63). 15 SLEEP Lights when the r eceiver is in slee p mode ( p age 65). 16 Matrix decoding format i ndicators 2 PRO LOGIC IIx â This lights to indicate 2 P r o Logic II / 2 P ro Logic IIx decoding ( p age 53). Neo:6 â When one of the Neo:6 modes of the r eceiver is on, this lights to indicate Neo:6 pr ocessing ( p age 53) . 17 S.RTRV Lights when the Sound Ret r iever function is active ( p age 60) . 18 Character display Dis p lays va r ious system info r mation. 19 Remote control mode i ndicator Lights to indicate the r eceiver âÂÂs r emote cont r ol mode setting. (Not dis p layed when set to 1 .) ( p age 67) SC-1525_UXJC B.book 13 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼ å¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂç«æÂÂæÂÂ¥ ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Controls and displays 02 14 En Front panel 1 ïµ STANDBY/ON Switches the r eceiver between on and standby. 2 INPUT SELECTOR dial Use to select an in p ut func tion. 3 Indicators ADVANCED MCACC â Lights when EQ is set to ON in the AUDIO PARAMETER menu ( p age 60) . PQLS â Lights when the PQLS featu r e is active ( p age 59). HDMI â Blinks when co nnecting an HDMI- equi pp ed com p onent; ligh ts when the com p onent is connected ( p age 24) . iPod/iPhone â Lights to indi cate iPod/iPhone is connected ( p age 35). 4 Remote sensor Receives the signals f r om th e r emote cont r ol (see Operating range of remote control unit on p age 10). 5 Character display See Display on p age 12. 6 MASTER VOLUME dial 7 Front panel controls To access the f r ont p anel c ont r ols, p ush gently on the lowe r thi r d p or tion of the p anel with you r finge r . 8 AUDIO PARAMETER Use to access the Audio o p ti ons ( p age 60). 9 VIDEO PARAMETER Use to access the Video o p tions ( p age 62). 10 ï©/ïª/ï«/ï¬ ( TUNE / PRESET ) / ENTER Use the a rr ow buttons when setting u p you r Home Menu . Use TUNE ï©/ïª to find r adio fr equenc ies and use PRESET ï«/ï¬ to find pr eset sta tions ( p age 46). ïµ ST ANDBY/ON INPUT SELECTOR ADV ANCED MCACC iPod iPhone PQLS HDMI MASTER VOLUME PHONES SPEAKERS CONTROL MULTI-ZONE ON/OFF MCACC SETUP MIC PARAMETER ENTER (TUNE) (TUNE) (PRESET) (PRESET) AUDIO VIDEO TUNER EDIT USB HDMI 5 VIDEO CAMERA iPod iPhone AUTO SURR/ALC/ STREAM DIRECT HOME THX STANDARD SURROUND ADVANCED SURROUND STEREO BAND HOME MENU RETURN 1 7 23 8 16 17 9 11 12 15 14 10 4 5 6 13 20 21 18 19 SC-1525_UXJC B.book 14 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼ å¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂç«æÂÂæÂÂ¥ ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Controls and displays 02 15 En 11 TUNER EDIT Use with ï©/ïª/ï«/ï¬ / ENTER to me mo r ize and n ame stations fo r r eca ll ( p age 46). 12 BAND Switches between AM and FM r adio bands ( p a ge 46). 13 Listening mode button s AUTO SURR / ALC/ STREAM DIRECT â Switches between Auto Su rr ound ( p age 53) , Auto Level Cont r ol mode and St r eam Di r ect mode ( p age 55) . HOME THX â P r ess to select a Home THX listening mode ( p age 54). STANDARD SURROUND â P r es s fo r Standa r d decoding and to switch va r ious modes ( 2 P r o Logic, Neo:6, etc.) ( p age 53). ADVANCED SURROUND â Use to swit ch between the va r ious su rr o und modes ( p age 54). STEREO â Switches between ste r eo p layback and F r ont Sta ge Su rr ound Advance modes ( p age 55). 14 MULTI-ZONE controls If youâÂÂve made MULTI-ZONE connections (see MULTI- ZONE setup on p age 32) use these cont r ols to cont rol the sub zone f r om the main zone (see Using the MULTI-ZONE controls on p age 63). 15 SPEAKERS Use to change the s p eaker te r minal ( p age 63) . 16 HOME MENU P r ess to access the Home Menu ( p ages 38, 40, 57, 75, 84 and 87). 17 RETURN P r ess to confi r m and exit the cu rren t menu sc r een. 18 HDMI input co nnector Use fo r connection to a comp atib le HDMI de vice (Video came r a, etc.) ( p age 34). 19 iPod/iPhone/USB terminals Use to connect you r A pp le iP od as an audio and vi deo sou r ce, o r connect a USB device fo r audio and p hoto p layback (p age 35). 20 MCACC SETUP MIC jack Use to connec t the su pp li ed mic r op hone ( p age 38). 21 PHONES jack Use to connect head p hones. When the head p hones a r e connected, the r e is no sound o ut p ut f r om the s p eaker s. SC-1525_UXJC B.book 15 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼ å¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂç«æÂÂæÂÂ¥ ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Connecting your equipment 03 16 En Chapter 3: Connecting your equipment This r eceive r pr ovides you with many connection p ossibilities, but it doesnâÂÂt ha ve to be di fficult. Th is cha p ter ex p lains the kinds of com p onents you can connect to m ake u p you r home thea te r system. Rear panel Note â¢T h e i n p ut functions below ar e assigned by default to the r eceive r âÂÂs diffe r ent in p ut te r minals. Refe r to The Input Setup menu on p age 40 to change the assignments if othe r connection s a r e used. ⢠The CU-RF100 omni-di r ectional r emote contr ol (se p ar ately sold) can be connected to the RS-232C and EXTENSION te r minals. Using the CU-RF100 lets you dis p lay the r eceiver âÂÂs dis p la y info r mation on the r emote contr ol disp lay in your ha nds and op er ate it without wo rr yin g about obstacles o r the di r ection in which the r emote cont r ol is p ointing. CAUTION â¢B e f o r e m aking or changing the connections, switch off the p ower and disconnect the p ower co r d f r om the p ower o utlet. Plugging in should be the final ste p . RS-232C HDMI ASSIGNABLE COAXIAL COMPONENT VIDEO ASSIGNABLE OPTICAL ASSIGNABLE ASSIGNABLE MONITOR OUT ZONE 2 OUT IN Y CD-R/T APE ANTENNA FM UNBAL 75 AM LOOP AC IN IN CD IN VIDEO MONITOR OUT OUT ZONE2 OUT ZONE3 OUT DVD IN TV/SA T IN VIDEO IN DVR/BDR PHONO IN OUT IN P R P B 1 IN BD IN 1 IN 2 IN 3 OUT 1 ( CONTROL ) OUT 2 1 4 ( DVD ) IN 2 ( DVR/BDR ) IN 3 ( VIDEO ) IN 1 ( DVD ) IN 1 ( TV/SA T ) IN 2 ( DVR/BDR ) IN OUT FRONT CENTER SURROUND SURR BACK (Single) FH/FW 3 ( VIDEO ) IN 2 ( CD ) CONTROL EXTENSION IR 12 V TRIGGER IN IN IN OUT OUT 1 2 1 2 (OUTPUT 12 V TOTAL 150 mA MAX) SUBWOOFER IN 4 LAN ( 10/100 ) ( OUTPUT 5 V 100 mA MAX ) ADAPTER PORT PRE OUT ( OUTPUT 5 V 150 mA MAX ) XM IN SIRIUS IN SPEAKERS Class 2 Wiring MULTI CH IN SIGNAL GND FRONT CENTER SUBWOOFER SURROUND SURR BACK L R CAUTION: SPEAKER IMPEDANCE 6 é - 16 é . A T TENTION: ENCEINTE D'IMPEDANCE DE 6 é - 16 é . A SURROUND BA CK (Single) B R FRONT HEIGHT/WIDE/ LR L R L R L SURROUND FRONT CENTER SEE INSTRUCTION MANUAL SELECT ABLE VOIR LE MODE D'EMPLOI SELECT ABLE Input func tion Input Terminal s Digital HDMI Component DVD COAX-1 IN 1 BD (BD ) TV/SAT OPT-1 DVR/BDR OPT-2 IN 2 VIDEO OPT-3 IN 3 HDMI 1 ( HDMI-1 ) HDMI 2 ( HDMI-2 ) HDMI 3 ( HDMI-3 ) HDMI 4 ( HDMI-4 ) HDMI 5 (f r ont p anel) ( HDMI-5 ) CD COAX-2 CD-R/TAPE RS-232C EXTENSION ( OUTPUT 5 V 150 mA MAX ) SC-1525_UXJC B.book 16 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼ å¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂç«æÂÂæÂÂ¥ ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Connecting your equipment 03 17 En Determining the speakersâ application This unit p ermits you t o bu ild various surround systems, in accordance with the number o f speakers you have. ⢠Be sure to connect speakers to the front left and right channels ( L an d R ). ⢠It is also possi ble to only connect one of the surround back speakers ( SB ) or neither. Choose one from Plans [A] to [E] below. [A] 7.1 channel surround system (Front height) *Default setting ⢠Speaker System setting: Normal(S B/FH) A 7.1 ch surround system connects the left and right front speake rs ( L /R ), the center speaker ( C ), the le ft and right front height speakers ( FHL /FHR ), the left and right surround speakers ( SL / SR ), the left and right surro und back speakers ( SBL / SBR ), and the subwoofe r ( SW ). 1 This surround system produces a more true- to-life sound from above. [B] 7.1 ch annel surroun d system (Fron t wide) ⢠Speaker System setting: Normal(SB/FW) This plan replaces t he left and right front hei ght speakers shown in [A] with the left and right front wide speakers ( FWL/ FWR ). 1 This surround system produces a true-to-life so und over a wider area. [C] 7.1 channel surround system & Speaker B connection ⢠Speaker System setting: Spe aker B With these connections you can simultaneously enjoy 5.1-channel surround sound in the main zone with stereo playback of the same sound on the B speakers. The same connections also allow for 7.1-channel surround sound in the main zone when not using the B speakers. [D] 5.1 channel surround system & Fron t Bi- amping connection (High quality surround) ⢠Speaker System setting: Front Bi-Amp Bi-amping connection of th e front speakers for high sound quality with 5.1-channel surround so und. Note 1 I t is not possible to p roduce sound simult aneously from the front height or front wi de speakers and the surround back s peakers . SL L FHL SW C R FHR SR SBL SBR FWR FWL L SW C R SBL SBR SL SR SL L SW C R SR SBL SBR L R Speaker B L R SL SW C SR Front Bi-Amp 03he_Connecting_ up.fm 17 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ã ç«æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾ ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Connecting your equipment 03 18 En [E] 5.1 ch annel surro und system & ZONE 2 connection (Multi Zone) ⢠Speaker System setting: ZONE 2 With these connections you can simultan eously enjoy 5.1-channel su rr ound sound in the main zone with ste r eo p layback on anothe r com p onent in ZONE 2. (The selection of in p ut devices is limited.) Important â¢T h e Speaker System setting must be made if you use any of the connect ions shown abo ve othe r than [A] (see Speaker system setti ng on p age 85). ⢠Sound does not come th r ough simu ltaneously fr om the f r ont height, f r ont wide, s p eaker B and su rr ound back s p eaker s. Out p ut s p eaker s a r e diffe r ent de p ending on the in p ut signal o r listening mode. Other speaker co nnections â¢Y o u r favor ite sp eaker c onnections can be selected even if you have fewe r than 5.1 s p eaker s (exce p t f r ont left/ r ight s p eake r s). ⢠When not connecting a subwoofe r , connect s p eak er s with low f r equency r e pr oduction ca p abilities to the f r ont channel . (The subwoofe r âÂÂs low f r equ ency com p onent is p layed f r om the f r ont s p eake r s, so the s p eake r s could be damaged.) ⢠After connecting, be sure t o conduct the Full Auto MCACC (speaker environment setting) procedure. See Automatically conducting optimum s ound tuning (Full Auto MCACC) on p a ge 38. Placing the speakers Refe r to the cha r t below fo r p lacement of the s p eake r s you int end to connect . â¢P l a c e t h e s u rr ound s p eaker s at 120ú fr om the center . If you, (1) use the su rr ound back s p eaker , and, (2) donâÂÂt use the f r ont height s p eake r s / f r ont wide s p eake r s, we r ecommend p lacing the su rr ound s p eake r r ight beside you. ⢠If you intend to connect only one su rr ound back s p eake r , p lace it di r ectly behind you. ⢠Place the left and r ight f r ont height s p eaker s at least one mete r (3.3 ft.) di r ectly above the left and r ight f r ont s p eake r s. THX speaker syst em setup If you a r e using a THX ce r tified subwoofe r , use the THX INPUT jack on the subwoo fe r (if your subwoofer has one) o r switch the filt e r p osit ion to THX on you r subwoofe r . See also THX Audio Setting on p age 87 to make the settings that will give you the best sound ex p er ience when using the Home THX modes ( p age 54). Some tips for imp roving so und qual ity Whe r e you p ut you r s p eake r s in the r oom has a big effect on the quality of the sound. The fo llowing guidelines should hel p you to get the best sound f r om your system. â¢T h e s u b w o o f e r can be p laced on the f loor . Ideally, the othe r s p eake r s should be at about ea r -level when youâ r e listening to them. Putting the s peake r s on the floo r (exce p t the subwoofe r ), o r mounting them ve r y high on a wa ll is not r eco mmended. â¢F o r the best ster eo effect, p la ce the fr ont s p eaker s 2 m to 3 m (6 ft. to 9 ft.) a p ar t, at equal distance f r om the TV. â¢I f y o u â r e going to p lace sp eaker s ar ound your CRT TV, use shi elded s p eaker s o r p lace the sp eaker s at a sufficient d istance f r om you r CRT TV. â¢I f y o u â r e using a center sp eaker , p lace the fr ont s p eake r s at a wide r angle. If not, p lace them at a na rr owe r angle. L L R R SL SW C SR Main zone Sub zone ZONE 2 L SW C FHL FWL SL SBL SBR SB SR FWR R FHR 30 30 60 60 60 120 120 SC-1525_UXJC B.book 18 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼ å¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂç«æÂÂæÂÂ¥ ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Connecting your equipment 03 19 En ⢠Place the ce nte r sp eaker above o r below the TV so that the sound of the cente r channel i s localized a t the TV sc r een. Also, make su r e the cent e r sp eaker does not c r oss the line fo r med by the leading edge of the f r ont left and r ight s p eaker s. ⢠It is best to angle the s p eaker s towar ds the listen ing p osition. T he angle de p ends on the size of the r oo m. Use less of an angle fo r bigge r r ooms. â¢S u rr ound an d surr ound bac k s p eaker s should be p ositioned 60 cm to 90 cm (2 f t. to 3 ft.) higher than you r ea r s and tilted slightly downwa r d. Make su r e the s p eake r s donâÂÂt face each ot he r . Fo r DVD-Audio, the s p eake r s should be mo r e di r ectly behind the listene r than fo r home theate r p la yback. â¢T r y no t to p lace the su rr ound s p eake r s fa r the r away f r om the listening p osition than the f r ont and cente r s p eake r s. Doing so can weaken the su rr ound sound effect. Connecting the speakers Each s p eaker connection on th e r eceiver com pr ises a p ositive ( ) and negative (âÂÂ) ter minal. Mak e su r e to match these u p with the te r minals on the s p eaker s themselves. CAUTION â¢T h e s e s p eaker ter minals ca rr y HA ZARDOUS LIVE voltage . To pr event the r isk of electr ic shock when connecting o r disconnecting the s p eaker cables, disconnect the p ower co r d befo r e touching any uninsulated p ar ts. â¢M a k e s u r e that all the bar e sp eaker wir e is twist ed togeth e r and inse r ted fully into the s p eake r te r minal. If any of the ba r e s p eaker wi r e touches the back p anel it may cause the p ower to cut off as a safety measu r e. Bare wire connections 1 Twist exposed wire st rands together. (fig. A) 2 Loosen terminal and insert exposed wire. (fig. B) 3 Tighten terminal. (fig. C) Banana plug connections If you want to use s p eaker ca bles te r minated with banana p lugs, scr ew the sp eaker ter minal fully shut, then p lug the banana p lug into the end of the s p eaker te r minal. Important â¢P l e a s e r efer to the manual that came with your s p eake r s fo r details on ho w to connect th e othe r end of the s p eaker cables to you r sp eaker s. ⢠Use an RCA cable to connect the subwoofe r . It is not p ossible to connect using sp eaker cables. CAUTION â¢M a k e s u r e that all sp eaker s ar e secur ely installed. This not o nly im pr oves sound quality, but also r educes the r isk of damage or injur y r esulting fr om s p eake r s being knocked ove r o r falling in the event of exte r nal shocks such as ea r thquakes . fig. A fig. B fig. C 10 mm ( 3 / 8 in.) SC-1525_UXJC B.book 19 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼ å¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂç«æÂÂæÂÂ¥ ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Connecting your equipment 03 20 En Installing your speaker syste m At the ve r y least, f r ont left and r ight s p eaker s only a r e necessa r y. Note that you r main su rr ound s p eaker s should always be connected as a p air , but you can connect just one su rr ound back s p eaker if you like (it must be connected to the left su rr ound back te r minal). Standard surround connectio n RS-232C HDMI ASSIGNABLE COAXIAL COMPONENT VIDEO ASSIGNABLE OPTICAL ASSIGNABLE ASSIGNABLE MONITOR OUT ZONE 2 OUT IN Y CD-R/TAPE ANTENNA FM UNBAL 75 AM LOOP AC IN IN CD IN VIDEO MONITOR OUT OUT ZONE2 OUT ZONE3 OUT DVD IN TV/SAT IN VIDEO IN DVR/BDR PHONO IN OUT IN P R P B 1 IN BD IN 1 IN 2 IN 3 OUT 1 ( CONTROL ) OUT 2 1 4 ( DVD ) IN 2 ( DVR/BDR ) IN 3 ( VIDEO ) IN 1 ( DVD ) IN 1 ( TV/SAT ) IN 2 ( DVR/BDR ) IN OUT FRONT CENTER SURROUND SURR BA CK (Single) FH/FW 3 ( VIDEO ) IN 2 ( CD ) CONTROL EXTENSION IR 12 V TRIGGER IN IN IN OUT OUT 1 2 1 2 (OUTPUT 12 V TOTAL 150 mA MAX) SUBWOOFER IN 4 LAN ( 10/100 ) ( OUTPUT 5 V 100 mA MAX ) ADAPTER PORT PRE OUT ( OUTPUT 5 V 150 mA MAX ) XM IN SIRIUS IN SPEAKERS Class 2 Wiring MULTI CH IN SIGNAL GND FRONT CENTER SUBWOOFER SURROUND SURR BACK L R CAUTION: SPEAKER IMPEDANCE 6 é - 16 é . A T TENTION: ENCEINTE D'IMPEDANCE DE 6 é - 16 é . A SURROUND BACK (Single) B R FRONT HEIGHT/WIDE/ LR L R L R L SURROUND FRONT CENTER SEE INSTRUCTION MANUAL SELECTABLE VOIR LE MODE D'EMPLOI SELECTABLE LINE LEVEL INPUT F r ont left Subwoofe r Cente r Su rr ound r ight Not con necte d Not connected F r ont r ight Su rr ound left The su rr ound back te r minals can also be used fo r ZONE 2. 5.1 ch su rr ound setting Su rr ound back Not connected Su rr ound back left ZONE 2 setting ZONE 2 - Right ZONE 2 - Left 6.1 ch su rr ound setting Su rr ound back r ight 7.1 ch su rr ound setting S p eake r B - left S p eake r B - r ight S p eake r B setting F r ont wide left F r ont wide r ight F r ont height left F r ont height setting F r ont height r ight The f r ont height te r minals can also be used fo r the f r ont wide and S p eake r B s p eake r s. F r ont wide setting SC-1525_UXJC B.book 20 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼ å¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂç«æÂÂæÂÂ¥ ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Connecting your equipment 03 21 En Bi-amping your spe akers Bi-am p ing is when you connect the high f r equency d r ive r and low f r equency d r iver of you r sp eak er s to diffe r ent am p lifie r s fo r bette r c r ossove r p er fo r mance. You r s p eake r s must be bi-am p able to do this (having se p ar ate te r minals for high and low) and the sound im pr ovement will de p end on the kind of s p eaker s youâ r e using. CAUTION â¢M o s t s p eaker s with both Hi gh and Low te r minals have two metal p lates that connect the High to the Low te r minals. These must be r emoved when you ar e bi-am p ing the s p eake r s o r yo u could sev e r ely damage the am p lifie r . See you r sp eaker manua l fo r mo r e info r mation. â¢I f y o u r s p eaker s have a r emovable cr ossover ne twor k, make su r e you do not r emove it fo r bi-am p ing. Doing so may damage you r sp eaker s. Bi-wiring your speakers You r s p eake r s can also be bi-wi r ed if they su pp o r t bi- am p ing. ⢠With these connections, the Speaker System settin g makes no diffe r ence . ⢠To bi-wire a speaker, conn ect two speaker cords to the speaker terminal on the receiver. Using a banana p lug fo r the second connecti on is r ecommended. CAUTION ⢠DonâÂÂt connect diffe r ent s p eaker s f r om the same te r minal in this way. â¢W h e n b i - w i r ing as well, heed the cautions fo r bi- am p ing show n at the lef t. RS-232C HDMI ASSIGNABLE COAXIAL COMPONENT VIDEO ASSIGNABLE OPTICAL ASSIGNABLE ASSIGNABLE MONITOR OUT ZONE 2 OUT IN Y CD-R/TAPE ANTENNA FM UNBAL 75 AM LOOP AC IN IN CD IN VIDEO MONITOR OUT OUT ZONE2 OUT ZONE3 OUT DVD IN TV/SAT IN VIDEO IN DVR/BDR PHONO IN OUT IN P R P B 1 IN BD IN 1 IN 2 IN 3 OUT 1 ( CONTROL ) OUT 2 1 4 ( DVD ) IN 2 ( DVR/BDR ) IN 3 ( VIDEO ) IN 1 ( DVD ) IN 1 ( TV/SAT ) IN 2 ( DVR/BDR ) IN OUT FRONT CENTER SURROUND SURR BA CK (Single) FH/FW 3 ( VIDEO ) IN 2 ( CD ) CONTROL EXTENSION IR 12 V TRIGGER IN IN IN OUT OUT 1 2 1 2 (OUTPUT 12 V TOTAL 150 mA MAX) SUBWOOFER IN 4 LAN ( 10/100 ) ( OUTPUT 5 V 100 mA MAX ) ADAPTER PORT PRE OUT ( OUTPUT 5 V 150 mA MAX ) XM IN SIRIUS IN SPEAKERS Class 2 Wiring MULTI CH IN SIGNAL GND FRONT CENTER SUBWOOFER SURROUND SURR BACK L R CAUTION: SPEAKER IMPEDANCE 6 é - 16 é . A T TENTION: ENCEINTE D'IMPEDANCE DE 6 é - 16 é . A SURROUND BACK (Single) B R FRONT HEIGHT/WIDE/ L RL R L R L SURROUND FRONT CENTER SEE INSTRUCTION MANUAL SELECTABLE VOIR LE MODE D'EMPLOI SELECTABLE High Low High Low F r ont left Subwoofe r Cente r Su rr ound r ight F r ont r ight Su rr ound left Bi-am p com p atible s p eake r Bi-am p com p atible s p eake r SC-1525_UXJC B.book 21 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼ å¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂç«æÂÂæÂÂ¥ ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Connecting your equipment 03 22 En Selecting the Speaker sy stem The f r ont height te r minals ca n be used fo r f r ont w ide and S p eake r B con nections, i n additi on to fo r th e f r ont height s p eake r s. Also, the su rr ound back te r minals can be used fo r bi-am p ing and ZONE 2 connection s, in additi on to fo r the su rr ound back s p eake r s. Make this setting acco r ding to the a pp licati on. Front height setup *Default setting 1 Connect a pair of speakers t o the front height speaker terminals. See Standard surround connection on p age 20. 2 If necessary, select â Normal(SB/FH) â from the Speaker System menu. See Speaker system setting on p age 85 to do this. Front wide setup 1 Connect a pair of speakers t o the front height speaker terminals. See Standard surround connection on p age 20. 2 Select â Normal(SB/FW) â from the Speaker System menu. See Speaker system setting on p age 85 to do this. Speaker B setup You can listen to ste r eo p layback in ano the r r oom. 1 Connect a pair of speakers t o the front height speaker terminals. See Standard surround connection on p age 20. 2 Select â Speaker B â from the Speaker System menu. See Speaker system setting on p age 85 to do this. Bi-Amping setup Bi-am p ing connection of the f r on t s p eaker s fo r high sound quality with 5.1-channel su rr ound sound. 1 Connect bi-amp compatibl e speakers to the front and surround back speaker terminals. See Bi-amping your speake rs on p a ge 21. 2 Select â Front Bi-Amp â from t he Speaker System menu. See Speaker system setting on p age 85 to do this. ZONE 2 setup With these connection s you can simultane ously enjoy 5.1-channel su rr ou nd sound in the main zo ne with ste r eo p layback on another comp onent in ZONE 2. 1 Connect a pair of sp eakers to the surround back speaker terminals. See Standard surround connection on p age 20. 2 Select â ZONE 2 â from the Speaker System menu. See Speaker syste m setting on p age 85 to do this. About the audio connection ⢠With an HDMI cable, video and audio si gnals can be t r ansfe rr ed in high quality ove r a single cable . About the video converter The video conve r ter ensu r es that all video sou r ces a r e out p ut th r ough all of the MONITOR VID EO OUT jacks. The only exce p tion is HDMI: since this r esolutio n cannot be downsam p led, you must conne ct you r monito r /TV to the r eceive r âÂÂs HDMI video out p uts when connecting this video sou r ce. 1 Types of cables and terminals Transferable audio signals Sound signal pr io r ity ï¬ HDMI HD audio Digital (Coaxial) Conventional digital audio Digital (O p tical) RCA (Analog) (Whit e/Red) Conventional analog audio Note 1 ⢠If the video signal does not a pp ea r on you r TV, t r y adjusting the r esolution settings on you r com p onent o r dis p lay. Note that some com p onents (such as video game units) have r esolutions that may not be conve r ted. In this case, t r y switching Digita l Video Conve r sion (in Setting the Video optio ns on p age 62) OFF . ⢠The signal in p ut r esolutions that can be conve r ted f r om the com p onent video in p ut fo r the HDMI out p ut a r e 480i/576 i, 480 p /576p , 720 p and 1080i. 1080 p signals cannot be conve r ted. ⢠Only signals with an in p ut r esolution of 480i/576i can be conve r ted f r om the com p onent video in p ut fo r the com p osite MONITOR OUT te r minals. SC-1525_UXJC B.book 22 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼ å¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂç«æÂÂæÂÂ¥ ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Connecting your equipment 03 23 En If seve r al video com p on ents a r e assigned to the same in p ut function (see The Input Setup menu on p age 40), the conve r ter gives pr io r ity to HDMI, com p onent, then com p osite (in that o r de r ). â¢F o r op ti mal video p e r for mance, THX r ecommends switching Digital Vi deo Conve r sion (in Setting the Video options on p age 62) OFF . About HDMI 1 The HDMI connection t r ansfer s uncom pr essed digital video, as well as almost eve r y kind of digital audio. This r eceive r inco rp o r a tes High-De finition Mu ltimedia Inte r face (HDMI î ) technology. This r eceive r su pp o r ts the functions desc r ibed below th r ough HDMI connec tions. 2 â¢D i g i t a l t r an sfer of uncom pr essed video (contents pr otected by HDCP (1080 p /24, 1080p /60, etc.)) â¢3 D s i g n a l t r ansfer 3 â¢D e e p Color signal tr ansf er 3 ⢠x.v.Colo r signal t r ansfe r 3 â¢A u d i o R e t u r n Channel 3 â¢I n p ut of multi-channel linear PCM d igital audio signals (192 kHz o r less) fo r up to 8 channels â¢I n p ut of the following digit al audio fo r mats: 4 â Dolby Digital, Dolby Digi tal Plus, DTS, High bit r ate audio (Dolby T r ueHD, DTS-HD Maste r Audi o, DTS- HD High Resolu tion Audio), DVD-Audio , CD, SACD (DSD signal), Video CD, Su p er VCD â¢S y n c h r onized op er ation with com p onents using the Control with HDMI function (see Contr ol with HDMI function on p age 57) HDMI, the HD MI logo an d High-De finition M ultimed ia Interface are trademarks or re gistered trademarks of H DMI Licensing, LLC in the United States and o ther countries. âÂÂx.v.Colorâ and x.v.Col or logo are trademarks o f Sony Corporation. VIDEO IN VIDEO MONITOR OUT COMPONENT VIDEO IN Y P B P R YP B P R COMPONENT VIDEO MONITOR OUT HDMI IN HDMI OUT High p ictu r e quality Te r minal fo r connection with sou r ce device Te r minal fo r connection with TV monito r Video signals can be out p ut This product incorporates copyright protection technology that is protected by U.S. patents and other intellectual property rights. Use of this copyright protection t echnology must be authorized by Rovi Corporation, and is intended for home and other limited viewing uses only unless othe rwise author ized by R ovi Corporation. Reverse engineering or disassembly is prohibited. Note 1 ⢠An HDMI connection can only be made with DVI-equi pp ed com p onents com patible with both DVI and High Bandwidth Digital Content P r otection (HDCP). If you choose to connect t o a DVI connecto r , you will need a se p ar ate ada p tor (DVI ï¤ HDMI) to do so. A DVI connection, howeve r , does not su pp o r t audio signals. Consult you r local audio deale r fo r mo r e info r mation. ⢠If you connect a com p onent that is n ot com p atible with HDCP, an HDCP ERRO R message is dis p layed on the f r ont p anel dis p lay. Some com p onents that a r e com p atible with HDCP still cause this message to be dis p layed, but so long as the r e is no pr oblem with dis p laying video this is not a malfunction. ⢠De p ending on the com p onent you have connected, using a DVI connection may r esult in un r eliable signal t r ansfer s. ⢠This r eceiver su pp o r ts SACD, Dolby Digital Plus, Dolby T r ueHD and DTS- HD Maste r Audio. To take advantage of these fo r mats, howeve r , make s u r e t hat the com p onent connected to th is r eceive r also su pp or ts the co rr esp onding for mat. 2⢠U s e a H i g h S p eed HDMI î cable. If an HDMI cable othe r than a High S p eed HDMI î cable is used, it may not wo r k pr op er ly. ⢠When an HDMI cable with a b uilt-in equalize r is connected, it may not o p er ate pr op er ly. 3 Signal t r ansfer is only p ossible when connected to a com p atible com p onent. 4⢠H D M I f o r mat digital audio tr ansmissions r eq ui r e a longe r time to be r ecognized. Due to this, inte rr u p tion in the audio may occu r when switching between audio fo r mats o r beginning p layback. ⢠Tu r ning on/off the device connected to this unit's HDMI OUT te r minal d u r ing p layback, or disconnecting/connecting the HDMI cable du r ing p layback, may cause noise o r inte rr up ted audio. SC-1525_UXJC B.book 23 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼ å¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂç«æÂÂæÂÂ¥ ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Connecting your equipment 03 24 En Connecting your TV and playback components Connecting using HDMI If you have an HDMI o r DVI (with HDCP) equi pp ed com p onent (Blu- r ay di sc p layer (BD), etc.), yo u can connect it to this r eceive r using a co mme r cially available HDMI ca ble. If the TV and p layba ck com p onents su pp o r t the Control with HDMI featu r e, the convenien t Control with HDMI functions can be used (se e Control with HDMI function on p age 57). ⢠When connecting to an HDMI/DVI-com p atible monit o r using the HDMI OUT 2 te r minal, switch the HDMI out p ut setting to HDMI OUT 2 o r HD MI OUT ALL . See Switching th e HDM I output on p age 65. â¢F o r inp ut comp onents, connecti ons othe r than HDMI connections a r e also p ossible (see Connecti ng your DVD player with no HD MI output on p age 25). ⢠If you want to listen to the sound of the TV ove r the r eceiver , connect the r eceiver and TV wi th audio cables. 1 RS-232C HDMI ASSIGNABLE COAXIAL COMPONENT VIDEO ASSIGNABLE OPTICAL ASSIGNABLE ASSIGNABLE MONITOR OUT ZONE 2 OUT IN Y CD-R/TAPE ANTENNA FM UNBAL 75 AM LOOP IN CD IN VIDEO MONITOR OUT OUT ZONE2 OUT ZONE3 OUT DVD IN TV/SAT IN VIDEO IN DVR/BDR PHONO IN OUT IN P R P B 1 IN BD IN 1 IN 2 IN 3 OUT 1 ( CONTROL ) OUT 2 1 4 ( DVD ) IN 2 ( DVR/BDR ) IN 3 ( VIDEO ) IN 1 ( DVD ) IN 1 ( TV/SAT ) IN 2 ( DVR/BDR ) IN OUT FRONT CENTER SURROUND SURR BA CK (Single) FH/FW 3 ( VIDEO ) IN 2 ( CD ) CONTROL EXTENSION IR 12 V TRIGGER IN IN IN OUT OUT 1 2 1 2 (OUTPUT 12 V TOTAL 150 mA MAX) SUBWOOFER IN 4 LAN ( 10/100 ) ( OUTPUT 5 V 100 mA MAX ) ADAPTER PORT PRE OUT ( OUTPUT 5 V 150 mA MAX ) XM IN SIRIUS IN SPEAKERS Class 2 Wiring SIGNAL GND FRONT CE N SUB W CAUTION: SPEAKER IMPEDANCE 6 é - 16 é . A T TENTION: ENCEINTE D'IMPEDANCE DE 6 é - 16 é . SURROUND BACK (Single) B R FRONT HEIGHT/WIDE/ LR L R L SURROUND SEE INSTRUCTION MANUAL SELECTABLE VOIR LE MODE D'EMPLOI SELECTABLE DIGITAL OUT COAXIAL OPTIC AL ANALOG RL AUDIO OUT HDMI IN HDMI OUT HDMI OUT Othe r HDMI/DVI- equi pp ed com p onent HDMI/DVI-com p atible Blu- r ay disc p layer HDMI/DVI-com p atible monito r Select one This connection is r equir ed in or der to listen to the sound of the TV ove r the r eceiver . 1 Note 1 When the TV and r ece ive r a r e connected by HDMI connections, if the TV su pp o r ts the HDMI Audio Retu r n Channel function, the sound of the TV is in p ut to the r eceiver via the HDMI OUT 1 te r minal, so the r e is no need to connect an audio cable. In this case, set TV Audio at HD MI Setup to via HDMI (see HDMI Setup on p age 57). SC-1525_UXJC B.book 24 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼ å¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂç«æÂÂæÂÂ¥ ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Connecting your equipment 03 25 En Connecting your D VD player wi th no HDMI ou tput This diag r am shows connections of a TV (w ith HDM I in p ut) and DVD p layer (o r othe r p layback com p onent with no HDMI out p ut) to the r eceiver . ⢠If you want to listen to the sou nd of the TV ove r the r eceiver , connect th e r eceiver and TV with audio cables ( p age 24). 1 ⢠If you use an o p tical digital audio cabl e, youâÂÂll need to tell the r eceiver which digital in p ut you connected the p layer to (see The Input Setup menu on p age 40). RS-232C HDMI ASSIGNABLE COAXIAL COMPONENT VIDEO ASSIGNABLE OPTICAL ASSIGNABLE ASSIGNABLE MONITOR OUT ZONE 2 OUT IN Y CD-R/TAPE ANTENNA FM UNBAL 75 AM LOOP IN CD IN VIDEO MONITOR OUT OUT ZONE2 OUT ZONE3 OUT DVD IN TV/SAT IN VIDEO IN DVR/BDR PHONO IN OUT IN P R P B 1 IN BD IN 1 IN 2 IN 3 OUT 1 ( CONTROL ) OUT 2 1 4 ( DVD ) IN 2 ( DVR/BDR ) IN 3 ( VIDEO ) IN 1 ( DVD ) IN 1 ( TV/SAT ) IN 2 ( DVR/ BDR ) IN OUT FRONT CENTER SURROUND SURR BA CK (Single) FH/FW 3 ( VIDEO ) IN 2 ( CD ) CONTROL EXTENSION IR 12 V TRIGGER IN IN IN OUT OUT 1 2 1 2 (OUTPUT 12 V TOTAL 150 mA MAX) SUBWOOFER IN 4 LAN ( 10/100 ) ( OUTPUT 5 V 100 mA MAX ) ADAPTER PORT PRE OUT ( OUTPUT 5 V 150 mA MAX ) XM IN SIRIUS IN SPEAKERS Class 2 Wiring SIGNAL GND FRONT CENTER SUBWOOFE R S CAUTION: SPEAKER IMPEDANCE 6 é - 16 é . A T TENTION: ENCEINTE D'IMPEDANCE DE 6 é - 16 é . SURROUND BACK (Single) B R FRONT HEIGHT/WIDE/ LR L R L SURROUND SEE INSTRUCTION MANUAL SELECTABLE VOIR LE MODE D'EMPLOI SELECTABLE HDMI IN ANALOG R AUDIO OUT VIDEO OUT VIDEO Y P B P R COMPONENT VIDEO OUT DIGITAL OUT COAXIAL OPTICAL L DVD p layer , etc. HDMI/DVI-com p atible monito r Select one Select one Note 1 When the TV and r eceiver a r e c o n n ec t e d b y H D M I c on n e c t i o n s , i f t h e T V s u pp or ts the HDMI Audio Retu r n Channel function, the sound of the TV is in p ut to the r eceiver via the HDMI OUT 1 te r minal, so the r e is no need to connect an audio cable. In this case, set TV Audio at HDMI Setup to via HDMI (see HDMI Setup on p age 57). SC-1525_UXJC B.book 25 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼ å¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂç«æÂÂæÂÂ¥ ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Connecting your equipment 03 26 En Connecting your TV with no HDMI input This diag r am shows connections of a TV (with no HDMI in p ut) and DVD p layer (o r othe r p la yback com p on ent) to th e r eceiver . ⢠With these connections, the p ictur e is not outp ut to the TV even if the DVD p layer i s c o n n e c t e d w i t h a n H D M I c a b l e . Connect the DVD p lay er âÂÂs video signals using a com posite o r com p onent co r d. ⢠Connect using an HDMI cable to listen to HD audio on the r eceiver . Do not use an HDMI cable to in p ut video signals. De p ending on the video com p onent, it may not be p ossible to outp ut signals connected by HDMI and othe r methods simultaneously, and it may be necessa r y to make out p ut settings. Please r efer to the o pe r ating inst r uctions su pp lied with you r com p onent fo r mo r e info r mation. ⢠If you want to listen to the sound of the TV ove r the r eceiver , connect the r eceiver and TV wi th audio cables ( p age 24). â¢I f y o u u s e a n o p tical digi tal audio cab le, youâÂÂll need to tell the r eceiver which dig ital in p u t you connected the p layer to (see The Input Setup menu on p age 40). RS-232C HDMI ASSIGNABLE COAXIAL COMPONENT VIDEO ASSIGNABLE OPTICAL ASSIGNABLE ASSIGNABLE MONITOR OUT ZONE 2 OUT IN Y CD-R/TAPE ANTENNA FM UNBAL 75 AM LOOP IN CD IN VIDEO MONITOR OUT OUT ZONE2 OUT ZONE3 OUT DVD IN TV/SAT IN VIDEO IN DVR/BDR PHONO IN OUT IN P R P B 1 IN BD IN 1 IN 2 IN 3 OUT 1 ( CONTROL ) OUT 2 1 4 ( DVD ) IN 2 ( DVR/BDR ) IN 3 ( VIDEO ) IN 1 ( DVD ) IN 1 ( TV/SAT ) IN 2 ( DVR/BDR ) IN OUT FRONT CENTER SURROUND SURR BACK (Single) FH/FW 3 ( VIDEO ) IN 2 ( CD ) CONTROL EXTENSION IR 12 V TRIGGER IN IN IN OUT OUT 1 2 1 2 (OUTPUT 12 V TOTAL 150 mA MAX) SUBWOOFER IN 4 LAN ( 10/100 ) ( OUTPUT 5 V 100 mA MAX ) ADAPTER PORT PRE OUT ( OUTPUT 5 V 150 mA MAX ) XM IN SIRIUS IN SPEAKERS Class 2 Wiring SIGNAL GND FRONT CENTER SUBWOOFE R S CAUTION: SPEAKER IMPEDANCE 6 é - 16 é . A T TENTION: ENCEINTE D'IMPEDANCE DE 6 é - 16 é . SURROUND BACK (Single) B R FRONT HEIGHT/WIDE/ LR L R L SURROUND SEE INSTRUCTION MANUAL SELECTABLE VOIR LE MODE D'EMPLOI SELECTABLE ANALOG R AUDIO OUT VIDEO IN Y P B P R COMPONENT VIDEO IN VIDEO OUT VIDEO VIDEO Y P B P R COMPONENT VIDEO OUT DIGITAL OUT COAXIAL OPTICAL HDMI OUT L DVD p layer , etc. TV Select one Select on e Select one SC-1525_UXJC B.book 26 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼ å¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂç«æÂÂæÂÂ¥ ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Connecting your equipment 03 27 En Connecting an HDD/DVD recorder, BD recorder and other video sources This r eceive r has two sets of audio/video in p uts and out p uts sui table fo r connecting analog o r digital video devices, including HDD/DVD r ecor de r s and BD r ecor der s. When you set u p the r eceiver youâÂÂll need to tell the r eceiver which in p ut you connected the r ecor der to (see also The Input Setup menu on p age 40). ⢠In o r der to r ecor d, you must connect the analog audio cables (the digital connection is fo r p layback only) ( p age 64). â¢I f y o u r HDD/DVD r ecor der , BD r ecor der , etc., is equi pp ed with an HDMI out p ut te r minal, we r ecommend connecting it to the r eceiver âÂÂs HDMI IN te r minal. When doing so, also connect the r eceive r an d TV by HDMI (see Connec ting using HDMI on p age 24). RS-232C HDMI ASSIGNABLE COAXIAL COMPONENT VIDEO ASSIGNABLE OPTICAL ASSIGNABLE ASSIGNABLE MONITOR OUT ZONE 2 OUT IN Y CD-R/TAPE ANTENNA FM UNBAL 75 AM LOOP IN CD IN VIDEO MONITOR OUT OUT ZONE2 OUT ZONE3 OUT DVD IN TV/SAT IN VIDEO IN DVR/BDR PHONO IN OUT IN P R P B 1 IN BD IN 1 IN 2 IN 3 OUT 1 ( CONTROL ) OUT 2 1 4 ( DVD ) IN 2 ( DVR/BDR ) IN 3 ( VIDEO ) IN 1 ( DVD ) IN 1 ( TV/SAT ) IN 2 ( DVR/BDR ) IN OUT FRONT CENTER SURROUND SURR BA CK (Single) FH/FW 3 ( VIDEO ) IN 2 ( CD ) CONTROL EXTENSION IR 12 V TRIGGER IN IN IN OUT OUT 1 2 1 2 (OUTPUT 12 V TOTAL 150 mA MAX) SUBWOOFER IN 4 LAN ( 10/100 ) ( OUTPUT 5 V 100 mA MAX ) ADAPTER PORT PRE OUT ( OUTPUT 5 V 150 mA MAX ) XM IN SIRIUS IN SPEAKERS Class 2 Wiring SIGNAL GND FRONT CENTER SUBWOOFER S CAUTION: SPEAKER IMPEDANCE 6 é - 16 é . A T TENTION: ENCEINTE D'IMPEDANCE DE 6 é - 16 é . SURROUND BACK (Single) B R FRONT HEIGHT/WIDE/ LR L R L SURROUND SEE INSTRUCTION MANUAL SELECTABLE VOIR LE MODE D'EMPLOI SELECTABLE DIGITAL OUT COAXIAL OPTICAL ANALOG RL ANALOG R L AUDIO OUT AUDIO IN VIDEO OUT VIDEO VIDEO VIDEO IN HDD/DVD r eco r de r , BD reco r de r , etc. Select one SC-1525_UXJC B.book 27 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼ å¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂç«æÂÂæÂÂ¥ ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Connecting your equipment 03 28 En Connecting a satelli te/cable receiver or other se t-top box Satellite an d cable r eceiver s, and te rr est r ial dig ital TV tu ne r s a r e all exam p les of so-called âÂÂset-to p boxesâÂÂ. When you set u p the r eceiver youâÂÂll need to tell the r eceiver which in p ut you connected th e set-to p box to (see The Input Setup menu on p age 40). â¢I f y o u r set-top box is equi pp ed with an HD MI outp ut te r minal , we r ecommend connecting it to the r eceiver âÂÂs HDMI IN ter minal. When doing so, also connect the r eceiver and TV by HDMI (see Connecting using HDMI on p age 24). RS-232C HDMI ASSIGNABLE COAXIAL COMPONENT VIDEO ASSIGNABLE OPTICAL ASSIGNABLE ASSIGNABLE MONITOR OUT ZONE 2 OUT IN Y CD-R/TAPE ANTENNA FM UNBAL 75 AM LOOP IN CD IN VIDEO MONITOR OUT OUT ZONE2 OUT ZONE3 OUT DVD IN TV/SAT IN VIDEO IN DVR/BDR PHONO IN OUT IN P R P B 1 IN BD IN 1 IN 2 IN 3 OUT 1 ( CONTROL ) OUT 2 1 4 ( DVD ) IN 2 ( DVR/BDR ) IN 3 ( VIDEO ) IN 1 ( DVD ) IN 1 ( TV/SAT ) IN 2 ( DVR/BDR ) IN OUT FRONT CENTER SURROUND SURR BA CK (Single) FH/FW 3 ( VIDEO ) IN 2 ( CD ) CONTROL EXTENSION IR 12 V TRIGGER IN IN IN OUT OUT 1 2 1 2 (OUTPUT 12 V TOTAL 150 mA MAX) SUBWOOFER IN 4 LAN ( 10/100 ) ( OUTPUT 5 V 100 mA MAX ) ADAPTER PORT PRE OUT ( OUTPUT 5 V 150 mA MAX ) XM IN SIRIUS IN SPEAKERS Class 2 Wiring SIGNAL GND FRONT CENTER SUBWOOFER S U CAUTION: SPEAKER IMPEDANCE 6 é - 16 é . A T TENTION: ENCEINTE D'IMPEDANCE DE 6 é - 16 é . SURROUND BACK (Single) B R FRONT HEIGHT/WIDE/ LR L R L SURROUND SEE INSTRUCTION MANUAL SELECTABLE VOIR LE MODE D'EMPLOI SELECTABLE VIDEO OUT VIDEO ANALOG R AUDIO OUT DIGITAL OUT COAXIAL OPTICAL L STB Select one SC-1525_UXJC B.book 28 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼ å¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂç«æÂÂæÂÂ¥ ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Connecting your equipment 03 29 En Connecting the multichannel analog inputs Fo r DVD Audio and SACD p layback, you r DVD p layer may have 5.1, 6.1 o r 7.1 channel analog out p uts (de pending on whethe r you r p layer su pp or ts su rr o u n d b a c k c h a n n e l s ) . M a k e s u r e that the p lay er is set to outp u t multichannel ana log audio. â¢I f t h e r e is a single su rr ound bac k outp ut, connect it to the SURROUND BACK L jac k on this r eceiver . ⢠To use a 5.1-channel s p eaker set, use the su rr ound s p eake r s fo r the su rr ound channel, not the su rr ound back channel. ⢠The audio sign al in p ut to MULT I CH IN cannot be downmixed. COAXIAL OPTICAL ASSIGNABLE ASSIGNABLE CD-R/T APE FM UNBAL 75 IN CD IN VIDEO MONITOR OUT OUT ZONE2 OUT ZONE3 OUT DVD IN TV/SA T IN VIDEO IN DVR/BDR PHONO IN OUT IN IN 1 IN 2 IN 3 OUT 1 ( CONTROL ) OUT 2 IN 1 ( DVD ) IN 1 ( TV/SA T ) IN 2 ( DVR/BDR ) IN OUT FRONT CENTER SURROUND SURR BACK (Single) FH/FW 3 ( VIDEO ) IN 2 ( CD ) IR 12 V TRIGGER IN IN OUT 1 2 1 2 (OUTPUT 12 V TOTAL 150 mA MAX) SUBWOOFER IN 4 LAN ( 10/100 ) ( OUTPUT 5 V 100 mA MAX ) ADAPTER PORT PRE OUT XM IN SIRIUS IN SPEAKERS Class 2 Wiring MULTI CH IN SIGNAL GND FRONT CENTER SUBWOOFER SURROUND SURR BACK L R CAUTION: SPEAKER IMPEDANCE 6 é - 16 é . A T TENTION: ENCEINTE D'IMPEDANCE DE 6 é - 16 é . SURROUND BA CK (Single) B R FRONT HEIGHT/WIDE/ LR L R L R L SURROUND FRONT CENTER SEE INSTRUCTION MANUAL SELECT ABLE VOIR LE MODE D'EMPLOI SELECT ABLE RL FRONT OUTPUT RL SURROUND OUTPUT CENTER OUTPUT SUBWOOFER OUTPUT RL SURROUND BACK OUTPUT VIDEO OUT VIDEO DVD p laye r , etc. SC-1525_UXJC B.book 29 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼ å¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂç«æÂÂæÂÂ¥ ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Connecting your equipment 03 30 En Connecting other audio components This r eceive r has both digital and analog in p ut s, allowing you to connect audio c om p onents fo r p layback. When you set u p the r eceiver youâÂÂll n eed to tell the r eceive r which in p ut you connected the com p onent to (see also The Input Setup menu on p age 40). â¢I f y o u â r e connectin g a r ecor der , connect the analog audio out p ut s to the analog au dio in p uts on the r ecor der . ⢠You canâÂÂt hea r HDMI audio th r ough this r eceiver âÂÂs digital o ut jack. Turntables only: â¢I f y o u r tur ntable has a gr ounding wir e, secur e it to the g r ound te r minal on this r eceive r. â¢I f y o u r tur ntable has line-level o utp uts (i.e., it has a built-in p hono pr e-am p ), connect i t to the CD in p uts instead. About the WM A9 Pro dec oder This unit ha s an on-boa r d Windows Media⢠Audio 9 P r ofessional 1 (WMA9 P r o) decode r , so it is p ossible to p layback WMA9 Pr o-encoded audio using HDMI, coaxial o r o p tica l digital connection when connected to a WMA9 P r o-com p atible p laye r . Howeve r , the connected DVD p layer , set-top b o x , e t c . m u s t b e a b l e t o o u t p ut WMA9 Pr o fo r mat audio signals th r ough a coaxial o r o p tical digital out p ut. COAXIAL OPTICAL ASSIGNABLE ASSIGNABLE CD-R/TAPE IN CD IN VIDEO MONITOR OUT OUT TV/SAT IN VIDEO IN DVR/BDR PHONO IN OUT IN IN 3 OUT 1 ( CONTROL ) OUT 2 IN 1 ( DVD ) IN 1 ( TV/SAT ) IN 2 ( DVR/BDR ) IN OUT FRONT CENTER SURROUND SURR BA CK (Single) FH/FW 3 ( VIDEO ) IN 2 ( CD ) 12 V TRIGGER 1 2 (OUTPUT 12 V TOTAL 150 mA MAX) SUBWOOFER IN 4 LAN ( 10/100 ) ( OUTPUT 5 V 100 mA MAX ) ADAPTER PORT PRE OUT XM IN SIRIUS IN SPEAKERS Class 2 Wiring SIGNAL GND FRONT CENTER SUBWOOFER SURROUND CAUTION: SPEAKER IMPEDANCE 6 é - 16 é . A T TENTION: ENCEINTE D'IMPEDANCE DE 6 é - 16 é . SURROUND BACK (Single) B R FRONT HEIGHT/WIDE/ LR L R L R SURROUND SEE INSTRUCTION MANUAL SELECTABLE VOIR LE MODE D'EMPLOI SELECTABLE DIGITAL OUT COAXIAL OPTIC AL ANALOG RL AUDIO OUT ANALOG RL AUDIO IN DIGITAL IN OPTICAL CD-R, MD, DAT, etc. Select one Select one Tu r ntable Note 1⢠Windo ws Media and the Windows logo are trademarks or re gistered trademarks of Microso ft Corporation in the United States an d/or other countries. ⢠With WMA9 P r o, sound pr oblems may occu r de p ending on your com p uter system. N ote th at WM A9 P r o 96 kHz sou r ces will be downsam p led to 48 kHz. SC-1525_UXJC B.book 30 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼ å¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂç«æÂÂæÂÂ¥ ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Connecting your equipment 03 31 En Connecting additional amplifiers This r eceive r has mo r e than enough p owe r fo r any home use, but itâÂÂs p ossible to add additional am p lifier s to eve r y channel of you r system using the pr e-outs . Make the connections shown below to ad d am p lifier s to p ower you r s p eake r s. ⢠You can use the additional a m p lifier on the su rr ound back channel pr e-outs fo r a single s p eaker as well. In this case p lug the am p lif ier into the left ( L (Single) ) te r minal only. â¢T h e s o u n d f r om the su rr ound back ter minals will de p end on how you have configu r ed the Speaker system settin g on p age 85. â¢T o h e a r sound only fr om the pr e-outs, switch the s p eake r system to OFF , o r si m p ly disc onnect any s p eake r s that a r e conne cted di r ectly to the r eceive r. If youâ r e not using a subwoofe r , change the f r ont s p eaker setting (see Speaker Setting on p age 85) to LARGE . Connecting AM/FM antennas Connect the AM loo p ante nna and the FM wi r e an tenna as shown below. To im pr ove r ecep tion and sound qual ity, connect exte r nal antennas (see Connecting external antennas on p age 32). 1 Pull off t he protective shields of both A M antenna wires. 2 Push open the tabs, then insert one wire fully into each terminal, then rel ease the tabs to secure the AM antenna wires. 3 Fix the AM loop antenn a to the attached stand. To fix the stand to the antenna, bend in the di r ection indicated by the a rr ow ( fig. a ) then cli p the loo p onto the stand ( fig. b ). â¢I f y o u p lan to mount the AM antenna to a wall o r othe r su r face, secur e th e stand with sc r ews ( fig. c ) befo r e cli pp ing the lo o p to the sta nd. Make su r e the r ecep tion is clear . 4 Place the AM antenna on a flat surface and in a direction giving the best reception. 5 Connect the FM wire antenna into the FM antenna socket. Fo r best r esults, extend the FM antenna fully and fix to a wall o r doo r f r ame. DonâÂÂt d r ap e loosely o r leave coiled u p . A L OPTICAL ASSIGNABLE ASSIGNABLE IN 1 ( TV/SAT ) IN 2 ( DVR/BDR ) IN OU T FRONT CENTER SURROUND SURR BACK (Single) FH/FW 3 ( VIDEO ) IN 2 ( CD ) IN 3 ( CD-R ) SUBWOOFER / 100 ) ( OUTPUT 5 V 100 mA MAX ) ADAPTER PORT PRE OUT XM IN FRONT CEN T SUBW O T ION: R IMPEDANCE 6 é - 16 é . N TION: E D'IMPEDANCE DE 6 é - 16 é . SURROUND BACK (Single) LR L SURROUND R L ANALOG INPUT R L ANALOG INPUT R L ANALOG INPUT ANALOG INPUT ANALOG INPUT R L ANALOG INPUT Powe r ed subwoofe r F r ont channel am p lifi e r Cente r channel am p lifie r (mono) Su rr ound channel am p lifier Su rr ound back channel am p lifier F r ont heig ht o r F r ont wide channel am p lifier ANTENNA FM UNBAL 75 AM LOOP 3 1 4 fig. a fig. b fig. c 5 2 SC-1525_UXJC B.book 31 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼ å¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂç«æÂÂæÂÂ¥ ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Connecting your equipment 03 32 En Connecting ex ternal antenna s To im pr ove FM r ecep tion, connect an exte r nal FM antenna to FM UNBAL 75 é . To im pr ove AM r ecep tion, connect a 5 m to 6 m (16 ft. to 20 ft.) length of vinyl-coated wi r e to the AM LOOP te r minals without disconnecting the su pp lied AM loo p antenn a. Fo r the best p ossible r ece p tion, sus p end ho r izontally outdoo r s. MULTI-ZONE setup This r eceiver can p ower up to thr ee i ndep endent systems in se p ar ate r ooms after yo u have made the pr o p e r MULTI- ZONE connections. Diffe r ent sou r ces ca n be p laying in th r ee zones at the same time o r , de p ending on you r needs, the same sou r ce can also be us ed. The main a nd sub zones have inde p endent p ower (the main zone p ower can be off while one (o r both) of the sub zones is on) and the sub zones can be cont r olled by the r emote or fr ont p anel contr ols. Making MULTI- ZONE connecti ons It is p ossible to make th ese connections if you h ave a se p ar ate TV and s p eake r s fo r you r pr ima r y ( ZONE 2 ) s ub zone, and a se p ar ate TV an d a se p ar ate am p lifier (and s p eake r s) fo r you r seconda r y ( ZONE 3 ) sub zone. You will also need a se p ar ate a m p lifier if you a r e not using the MULTI-ZONE setup u sing speaker terminals (ZON E 2) on p age 33 for your pr imar y sub zo ne. The r e a r e two pr ima r y sub zone setu p s p ossible with this system. Choose whicheve r wo r ks best fo r you. MULTI-ZONE listening options The following table shows the signals that can be out p ut to ZONE 2 and ZONE 3 1 : Basic MULTI-ZONE setup (ZONE 2) ⢠Connect a separate amplifier to the AUDIO ZONE 2 OUT jacks and a TV monitor to the VIDEO ZO NE 2 OUT 2 jack, both on this receiver. You should have a p air of s p eaker s attached to the sub zone am p lifi er as shown in the following illust r ation. ANTENNA FM UNBAL 75 AM LOOP 75 é coaxial cable ANTENNA FM UNBAL 75 AM LOOP Outdoo r antenn a Indoo r antenna (vinyl-coated wi r e) 5 m to 6 m (16 ft. to 20 ft.) Sub Zone Input functions available ZONE 2 DVD, TV/SAT, DVR/ BDR, VIDEO, INTERNET RADIO, iPod/USB, XM RADIO, CD, CD-R/TAPE, TUNER, AD APTER PO RT, SIRIU S (Out p uts analog au dio, com p osite vide o and com p onent video.) ZONE 3 Same as ZONE 2 above. (Out p uts analog audio and com p osi te video.) Note 1F o r the INTERNET RADIO, XM RADIO, SIRIUS and iPod/USB inp uts, it is not p ossible use the same in p ut in ZONE 2 and ZONE 3 simultaneously. 2⢠COMPONENT VI DEO ZONE 2 OUT can be used to out p ut c lea r images. ⢠The GUI sc r een is not dis p layed if only the COMPONENT VIDEO ZONE 2 OUT jack is co nnected. ⢠The v ideo c onve r t function does not wo r k fo r ZONE 2. Connect the com p osite video and com p onent video to the same ty p es of jacks for the in p uts and out p uts. RS-232C HDMI ASSIGNABLE COMPONENT VIDEO ASSIGNABLE MONITOR OUT ZONE 2 OUT IN Y ANTENNA FM UNBAL 75 AM LOOP ZONE2 OUT ZONE3 OUT D P R P B 1 IN BD IN 1 IN 2 1 4 ( DVD ) IN 2 ( DVR/BDR ) IN 3 ( VIDEO ) CONTROL EXTENSION IR IN IN IN OUT OUT 1 2 ( OUTPUT 5 V 150 mA MAX ) RL AUDIO IN VIDEO IN Main zone Sub zone ( ZONE 2 ) SC-1525_UXJC B.book 32 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼ å¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂç«æÂÂæÂÂ¥ ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Connecting your equipment 03 33 En MULTI-ZONE setup using speaker terminals (ZONE 2) You must select ZONE 2 in Speaker sy stem setting on p age 85 to use this setup . ⢠Connect a TV monitor to the VIDEO ZONE 2 OUT jacks on this receiver. 1 You should have a p air of s p eaker s attached to the su rr ound back s p eake r te r minals as shown belo w. Secondary MULTI-ZONE setup (ZONE 3) ⢠Connect a separate amplifier to the AUDIO ZONE 3 OUT jacks and a TV mo nitor to th e VIDEO ZONE 3 OUT jack, both on this recei ver. You should have a p air of s p eaker s attached to the sub zone am p lifie r as shown in the followin g illust r atio n. Connecting to the network thr ough LAN interface By connecting this r eceiver to the netwo r k via the LAN te r minal, you can listen to Inte r net r adio stations. 2 Connect the LAN te r minal o n this r eceiver to the LAN te r minal o n you r r outer (with or with out th e built-in D HCP se r ve r functi on) with a s t r aight LAN cable (CAT 5 o r highe r ). Tu r n on the DHCP se r ve r f u nc t i o n o f y o u r r oute r . In case you r r oute r does not have the built-in DHCP se r ve r function, it is necessa r y to set u p the netwo r k manually. Fo r details, see Network Setup menu on p age 87. LAN terminal specification s LAN te r minal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E the r net jack 10BASE-T/100BASE-TX Note 1⢠COMPONENT VIDEO ZONE 2 OUT can be used to out p ut clea r images. ⢠The GUI sc r een is not d is p layed if only the COMPONENT VIDEO ZONE 2 OUT jack is connected . ⢠The video conve r t function does not wo r k fo r ZONE 2. Connect the com p osite video and com p onent video to the same ty p es of jacks fo r the in p uts and out p uts. ENT VIDEO NABLE MONITOR OUT ZONE 2 OUT IN ANTENNA FM UNBAL 75 AM LOOP ZONE2 OUT ZONE3 OUT DVD IN P R P B 1 IN BD IN 1 IN 2 ( DVD ) IN 2 ( DVR/BDR ) IN 3 ( VIDEO ) CONTROL IR 1 T IN IN IN OUT OUT 1 2 1 2 ( 1 T 1 COAXIAL OPTICAL ASSIGNABLE ASSIGNABLE CD-R/TAPE IN CD IN DEO OUT OUT 2 IN 1 ( DVD ) IN 1 ( TV/SAT ) IN 2 ( DVR/ BDR ) IN OUT FRONT CENTER SURROUND SURR BACK (Single) FH/FW 3 ( VIDEO ) IN 2 ( CD ) SUBWOOFER LAN ( 10/100 ) ( OUTPUT 5 V 100 mA MAX ) ADAPTER P PRE OU XM IN SIRIUS IN L CAUTION: SPEAKER IMPEDANCE 6 é - 16 é . A T TENTION: ENCEINTE D'IMPEDANCE DE 6 é - 16 é . SURROUND BACK (Single) B HT/WIDE/ L RL R SU VIDEO IN R L Main zone Sub zone ( ZONE 2 ) RS-232C HDMI ASSIGNABLE COMPONENT VIDEO ASSIGNABLE MONITOR OUT ZONE 2 OUT IN Y ANTENNA FM UNBAL 75 AM LOOP ZONE2 OUT ZONE3 OUT DVD IN TV / I P R P B 1 IN BD IN 1 IN 2 I N 3 1 4 ( DVD ) IN 2 ( DVR/BDR ) IN 3 ( VIDEO ) CONTROL EXTENSION IR 12 V TRI G IN IN IN OUT OUT 1 2 1 2 (OU T 12 V TOT A 150 m ( OUTPUT 5 V 150 mA MAX ) RL AUDIO IN VIDEO IN Main zone Sub zone ( ZONE 3 ) 2 T o listen to Inte r net r adio stations, you must sign a cont r act with an ISP (Inte r net Se r vice P r ovider ) befo r ehand. COAXIAL OPTICAL ASSIGNABLE ASSIGNABLE CD-R/TAPE IN CD IN VIDEO MONITOR OUT OUT DVR/BDR PHONO IN OUT IN OUT 1 ( CONTROL ) OUT 2 IN 1 ( DVD ) IN 1 ( TV/SAT ) IN 2 ( DVR/BDR ) FRONT CENTER SURROUND IN 2 ( CD ) SUBWOOFER LAN ( 10/100 ) XM IN SIRIUS IN K ERS W iring SIGNAL GND SURROUND BACK (Singl e B R FRONT HEIGHT/WIDE/ LR L T RUCTION L T ABLE MODE O I T ABLE WAN 321 LAN LAN cable (sold se p ar ately) to LAN p or t Route r Modem Inte r net PC SC-1525_UXJC B.book 33 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼ å¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂç«æÂÂæÂÂ¥ ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Connecting your equipment 03 34 En Connecting Optional Bluetooth î ADAPTER When the Blueto oth ADAPTER (Pion ee r Model No. AS- BT100) 1 is connected to this r eceiver , a pr oduct equi pp ed with Bluetooth wi r eless technology ( p or table cell p hone, digital music p layer , etc .) can be used to listen to music wi r elessly. 2 ⢠Switch the receiver into st andby and connect Bluetooth ADAPTER to the ADAPTER PORT . â¢F o r instr uctions on p laying the Bluetooth wir eless technology device, see Pairing the Bluetooth ADAPTER and Bluetooth wire less technology device on p age 51. Important ⢠Do not move the r ece iver with the Bluetooth ADAPTER connected. Doing so could cau se damage o r faulty contact. Connecting an HDMI-equipped component to the fron t panel input Connecting an XM Radio tuner Afte r p ur chasing an XM Mini-Tune r and Home Dock (both sold se p ar ately), you will also need to activate the XM Radio se r vice to begin r eceiving b r oadc asts. â¢F o r ins tr uctions on p laying the XM Radio, see Listening to XM Radi o on p age 47. Connecting a SiriusConnect⢠tuner To r eceive SIRIUS Satellite Radio b r oadcasts, you will need to activate you r Si r iusConnec t⢠tune r . You will also need to co nnect the antenna a nd AC ada p te r to the Si r iusConnect⢠tune r . Fo r inst r uctions on p la ying the SIRIUS Radio, see Listening to SIRIUS Radio on p age 48. Note 1T h e Bluetooth ADAPTER (AS- BT100) is sold se p ar ately. 2⢠T h e Bluetooth wi r eless technology enabled device must su pp o r t A2DP pr ofiles. ⢠Pionee r does not gua r antee pr op er connection and o p er ation of this unit with all Blue tooth wi r eless technology enabled devices. COAXIAL OPTICAL ASSIGNABLE ASSIGNABLE CD-R/TAPE A C IN CD IN VIDEO OUT OUT 2 IN 1 ( DVD ) IN 1 ( TV/SAT ) IN 2 ( DVR/BDR ) IN OUT FRONT CENTER SURROUND SURR BACK (Single) FH/FW 3 ( VIDEO ) IN 2 ( CD ) SUBWOOFER LAN ( 10/100 ) ( OUTPUT 5 V 100 mA MAX ) ADAPTER PORT PRE OUT XM IN SIRIUS IN MULTI CH IN G NAL GND FRONT CENTER SUBWOOFER SURROUND SURR BACK L R Bluetooth î AD APTER (sold se p ar ately) PHONES SPEAKERS CONTROL MULTI-ZONE ON/OFF MCACC SETUP MIC TUNER EDIT USB HDMI 5 VIDEO CAMERA iPod iPhone AUTO SURR/ALC/ STREAM DIRECT HOME THX STANDARD SURROUND ADVANCED SURROUND STEREO BAND Video came r a, etc. COAXIAL OPTICAL ASSIGNABLE ASSIGNABLE - R/TAPE AC IN IN IN 1 ( DVD ) IN 1 ( TV/SAT ) IN 2 ( DVR/BDR ) IN OUT FRONT CENTER SURROUND SURR BACK (Single) FH/FW 3 ( VIDEO ) IN 2 ( CD ) SUBWOOFER L AN ( 10/100 ) ( OUTPUT 5 V 100 mA MAX ) ADAPTER PORT PRE OUT XM IN MULTI CH IN FRONT CENTER SUBWOOFER SURROUND SURR BACK L R SATELLiTE RADiO SATELLiTE RADiO XM Mini-Tune r and Home Dock with antenna COAXIAL OPTICAL ASSIGNABLE ASSIGNABLE CD-R/TAPE IN CD IN VIDEO MONITOR OUT OUT DVR/BDR PHONO IN TI N OUT 1 ( CONTROL ) OUT 2 IN 1 ( DVD ) IN 1 ( TV/SAT ) IN 2 ( DVR/ BDR ) IN OUT FRONT CENTER SURROUND SURR BACK (Single) FH/FW 3 ( VIDEO ) IN 2 ( CD ) SUBWOOFER LAN ( 10/100 ) ( OUTPUT 5 V 100 mA MAX ) ADAPTER PORT PRE OUT XM IN SIRIUS IN MULTI CH IN SIGNAL GND FRONT CENTER SUBWOOFER SURROUND SURR BACK L R SIRIUS H SIRIUS H Antenna Si r iusConnect⢠HOME tune r AC ada p ter SC-1525_UXJC B.book 34 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼ å¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂç«æÂÂæÂÂ¥ ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Connecting your equipment 03 35 En Connecting an iPod This r eceive r has a dedicated iPod ter minal that wi ll allow you to cont r ol p laybac k of audio content f r om you r iPod using the cont r ols of this r eceiver . ⢠Switch the receiver into standby then use the supplied iPod cable to connect your iPod to th e iPod/ iPhone/USB terminal on th e front panel of this receiver. â¢I t i s a l s o p ossible to connect usin g the cable included with the iPod , but in this ca se it is not p ossible to view p ictur es vi a the r eceiver . â¢F o r the ca ble connection, also r efer to the op er ating inst r uctions fo r you r iPod. â¢F o r instr uc tions on p laying the iPod, see Playing an iPod on p age 43. Connecting a USB device It is p ossible to p lay audi o and p hoto files by co nnecting USB devices to this r eceiver . It is also possible to connect a USB keyboa r d (US-in te r natio nal layout) to the r eceiver to ente r text in the follow ing GUI sc r eens. ⢠Change the in p ut name in th e Input Setup menu ( p age 40). ⢠Add names to r adio station pr esets ( p age 46). â¢E n t e r Inter net r adio station URLs ( p age 49) . ⢠Switch the receiver into standby then connect your USB device to the USB t erminal on the front panel of this receiver. 1 â¢F o r instr uctions on p laying the USB device, see Playing a USB devi ce on p age 44. Connecting a USB de vice for Advanced MCACC outp ut When using Full Auto MC ACC ( p age 38), Auto MCACC ( p age 75) o r Acoust ic Calib r ation EQ P r ofessiona l ( p age 79) to calib r ate the r eve r b cha r acte r istics of you r listening r oom, the 3D g r ap hs of the r eve r b cha r acte r is tics in you r listening r oom (be fo r e and afte r calib r ation) can be checked on a co m p uter sc r een. The va r ious MCACC p ar ameter s can also be checked on the com p uter . MCACC data and p ar ameter s a r e t r ansfe rr ed f r om this r eceive r to a USB device and by connecting the USB device to a com p uter , the data is im p or ted via the MCACC softwa r e in the com p uter . The MCACC softwa r e to out p ut the r esults is available f r om the su ppo r t a r ea o f the Pionee r website (htt p :// www. p ionee r elect r onics.com/ PUSA/ Home E nte r tainment Custom Install). Inst r uctions fo r using the softwa r e a r e also availa ble he r e. If you have any questions r egar ding, p lease contact the Custome r Su pp o r t Division of Pio nee r. See the docume ntation pr ovided with th e Advanced MC ACC PC Dis p lay A pp lica tion Softwa r e fo r mo r e info r mati on. â¢F o r the USB device connectio n and op er ations, see Output MCACC data on p age 82 2 . PHONES SPEAKERS CONTROL MULTI-ZONE ON/OFF MCACC SETUP MIC TUNER EDIT USB HDMI 5 VIDEO CAMERA iPod iPhone AUTO SURR/ALC/ STREAM DIRECT HOME THX STANDARD SURROUND ADVANCED SURROUND STEREO BAND MENU ï¤ïÂÂ¥ ï° ï¯ iPod iPod cable (su pp lied) Note 1T h i s r eceiver does not su pp or t a USB hub. 2T h e v a r ious p ar amete r s and the r eve r b char acter istics data used for disp lay on the comp uter a r e not clear ed when the p ower is tur ned off (see Output MCACC data on p age 82). PHONES SPEAKERS CONTROL MULTI-ZONE ON/OFF MCACC SETUP MIC TUNER EDIT USB HDMI 5 VIDEO CAMERA iPod iPhone AUTO SURR/ALC/ STREAM DIRECT HOME THX STANDARD SURROUND ADVANCED SURROUND STEREO BAND USB mass sto r age device USB keyboa r d SC-1525_UXJC B.book 35 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼ å¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂç«æÂÂæÂÂ¥ ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Connecting your equipment 03 36 En Connecting an IR receiver If you kee p you r ste r eo com p onents in a closed cabinet o r shelving unit, o r you wish to use the sub zone r emote cont r ol i n anothe r zone, you can use an o p ti onal IR r eceiver (such as a Niles or Xante ch unit) to cont r ol your system instead of the r emote senso r on the f r ont p anel of this r eceive r . 1 1 Connect the IR receiver sensor to the IR IN jack on the rear of this receiver. 2 Connect the IR IN jack of another component to the IR OUT jack on the r ear of this recei ver to link it to the IR receiver. Please see the manual su pp lied with you r IR r eceiver fo r the ty p e of cable necessa r y fo r the connection. ⢠If yo u want to link a Pionee r com p onent to the IR r eceiver , see Operating other Pioneer components with this unitâÂÂs sensor below to connect to the CONTROL jacks instead of the IR OUT jack. Operating other Pioneer components with this un itâÂÂs sensor Many Pi onee r com p onents have SR CONTROL jacks which can be used to link com p onents togethe r so that you can use just the r em ote senso r of one com p on ent. When you use a r emote cont r ol, th e cont r ol signal is p assed along the chain to the a ppr o pr iate com p onent. 2 Important ⢠Note that if you use this featu r e, make sure that you also have at least one set of analog audio, video or HDMI jacks conne cted to anothe r com p onent fo r g r ounding p u rp oses. 1 Decide which component you want to use the remote sensor of. When you want to cont r ol any comp onent in the chain, this is the r emote senso r at which youâÂÂll p oint the co rr es p onding r emote cont r ol. 2 Connect the CONTROL OUT jack of that component to the CONTROL IN jack of another Pioneer co mponent. Use a cable with a mono mini- p lug on each end fo r the connection. Continue the chain in the same way fo r as many com p onents as you have. Note 1⢠R e m o t e o p er ation may not be p ossible if dir ect light fr om a str ong fluor escent lamp is shining on the IR r eceiver r emote sensor window. ⢠Note that othe r manufactu r er s may not use the IR te r minology. Refe r to the manual that came with you r com p onen t to check fo r IR com p atibility. ⢠If using two r emote cont r ols (at the same time), the IR r eceiver âÂÂs r emote senso r takes pr io r ity ove r the r emote senso r on the f r ont p anel. RS-232C HDMI ASSIGNABLE COMPONENT VIDEO ASSIGNABLE MONITOR OUT ZONE 2 OUT IN Y ANTENNA FM UNBAL 75 AM LOOP ZONE2 OUT ZONE3 OUT DVD IN TV/SAT IN VIDEO IN DVR/ OUT P R P B 1 IN BD IN 1 IN 2 IN 3 1 4 ( DVD ) IN 2 ( DVR/BDR ) IN 3 ( VIDEO ) CONTROL EXTENSION IR 12 V TRIGGER IN IN IN OUT OUT 1 2 1 2 (OUTPUT 12 V TOTAL 150 mA MAX) IN 4 ( OUTPUT 5 V 150 mA MAX ) SPEAKERS Class 2 Wiring SEE INSTRUCTIO MANUAL SELECTABLE VOIR LE MODE D'EMPLOI SELECTABLE IN IR IN OUT CONTROL IR r eceive r Closet o r shelving unit Non-Pionee r com p onent Pionee r com p onent 2 ⢠If you want to co nt r ol all you r com p onents using this r eceiver âÂÂs r emote cont r ol, see Setting the remote to contro l other components on p age 68. ⢠If you have connected a r emote cont r ol to the CONTROL IN jack (using a mini-p lug cable), you wonâÂÂt be able to contr ol this unit using the r emote sensor . CONTROL IN OUT RS-232C MONITOR OUT ZONE 2 OUT Y ANTENNA FM UNBAL 75 AM LOOP P R P B EXTENSION IR 12 V TRIGGER IN IN OUT 1 2 1 2 (OUTPUT 12 V TOTAL 150 mA MAX) ( OUTPUT 5 V 150 mA MAX ) SPEAKERS Class 2 Wiring SEE INSTRUCTI O MANUAL SELECTABLE VOIR LE MODE D'EMPLOI SELECTABLE CONTROL IN OUT IN OUT CONTROL SC-1525_UXJC B.book 36 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼ å¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂç«æÂÂæÂÂ¥ ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Connecting your equipment 03 37 En Switching components on and o ff using the 12 volt trigger You can connect com p onen ts in you r system (such as a sc r een o r pr ojecto r ) to this r eceiver so that they swit ch on o r off using 12 volt t r igge r s when you select an in p ut function. Howeve r , you must s p ecify which in p ut functions switc h on the t r igger using the The Input Setup menu on p age 40. Note that this will only wo r k with com p onents that have a stan dby mode. ⢠Connect the 12 V TRIGGER jack o f this r eceiver t o the 12 V trigger of another component. Use a cable with a mono mini- p lug on each end fo r the connection. Afte r youâÂÂve s p ecified the in p ut functions tha t will swi tch on the t r igger , youâÂÂll be able to switch th e com p onent on o r off just by pr essing the in p ut function(s) youâÂÂve set on p age 40. It is also p ossible to have the com p onen t switch not when the in p ut function is switch ed, but when HDMI OUT is switched. Fo r details, see HDMI Set up on p age 57. Plugging in the receiver Only p lug in afte r you have connected all you r com p onents to this r eceive r , including the s p eake r s. 1 Plug the su pplied power cord i nto the AC IN socket on the back of the receiver . 2 Plug the other end i nto a power outlet. 1 CAUTION ⢠Handle the p ower co r d by the p lug p ar t. Do not p ull out the p lug by tugging the co r d, and neve r touch the p ower cor d when your hands ar e wet, a s this could cause a sho r t ci r cuit o r elect r ic shock. Do not p lace the unit, a p iec e of fu r nitur e, o r othe r o bject on the p ower cor d or p inch the cor d in any other way. Never make a knot in the co r d o r tie it with othe r cables. The p ower cor ds should be r outed so that they ar e not likely to be ste pp ed on. A damaged p ower co rd can cause a fi r e o r give you an elect r ic shock. C heck the p ower cor d once in a while. If you find it damaged, ask you r nea r est Pionee r autho r ized inde p endent se r vice com p any fo r a r ep lacement. ⢠Do not use any p owe r co r d othe r than the one su pp lied with this unit. ⢠Do not use the su pp lied p ower co r d fo r any p u rp ose othe r than that desc r ibed below . â¢T h e r eceiver should be disconnected by r emoving the mains p lug f r om the wall socket when not in r egula r use, e.g., when on vacation. â¢M a k e s u r e the blue ïµ STANDBY/O N light has gone out befo r e un p lugging. ⢠If you have connected s p eaker s with a 6 é im p edance, change the im p edance setting befo r e tu r ning on the p owe r . 12 V TRIGGER 1 2 (OUTPUT 12 V TOTAL 150 mA MAX) RS-232C HDMI ASSIGNABLE COMPONENT VIDEO ASSIGNABLE MONITOR OUT ZONE 2 OUT IN Y ANTENNA FM UNBAL 75 AM LOOP CD IN VIDE MONITOR OUT ZONE2 OUT ZONE3 OUT DVD IN TV/SAT IN VIDEO IN DVR/BDR PHONO IN OUT IN P R P B 1 IN BD IN 1 IN 2 IN 3 OUT 1 ( CONTROL ) OUT 1 4 ( DVD ) IN 2 ( DVR/BDR ) IN 3 ( VIDEO ) CONTROL EXTENSION IR IN IN IN OUT OUT 1 2 IN 4 ( OUTPUT 5 V 150 mA MAX ) SPEAKERS Class 2 Wiring SIGNAL GND R FRONT HEIGHT/W SEE INSTRUCTION MANUAL SELECTABLE VOIR LE MODE D'EMPLOI SELECTABLE 12 V TRIGGER INPUT Note 1A f t e r this r eceiver is connected to an AC outlet, a 2 second to 10 second HDMI initialization pr ocess begins . You cannot ca rr y out any o pe r ations du r ing this pr ocess. The HDMI indica to r in the f r ont p anel dis p lay blinks du r ing this pr ocess, and you can tu r n on this r eceiver once it has sto pp ed blinking. When you set the Control with HDMI to OFF , you can ski p this process. Fo r details about the Control with HDMI featu r e, see Control with HDMI function on p age 57. SC-1525_UXJC B.book 37 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼ å¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂç«æÂÂæÂÂ¥ ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Basic Setup 04 38 En Chapter 4: Basic Setup Changing the OSD display language (OSD Language) The language used on the G r ap hical U se r Inte r face sc r een can be changed. â¢T h e e x p lanations in these op er ating instr uctions ar e fo r when English is selected fo r the GUI sc r een. 1 Switch on the receiver and your TV. Make su r e that the TVâÂÂs video in p ut is set to this r eceiver (fo r exam p le, if y ou connected this r eceive r to the VIDEO jacks on you r TV, make su r e that the VIDEO in p ut is now selected). 2 Press on the remote control, then press HOME MENU . A G r ap hical Use r Inte r face (GUI) sc r een a pp ea r s on you r TV. Use ï©/ïª/ï«/ï¬ and ENTER to navigate th r ough the sc r eens and select menu items. P r ess RETUR N to exit the cu rr ent menu. 3 Select â System Setup â from t he Home Menu . 4 Select â OSD Language â from the System Setup menu. 5 Select the desired language. 6 Select â OK â to change the language. The setting is com p leted and the Sys tem Setup menu r ea pp ear s aut omatically. Automatically conducting optimum sound tuni ng (Full Au to MCACC) The Full Auto MCACC Setu p measu r es the acoustic cha r acte r isti cs of you r listenin g a r ea, ta king into account ambient noise, s p eaker connection and s p eaker size, and tests fo r both channel dela y and channel level. Afte r you have set u p the mic r op hone pr ovided with you r system, the r eceive r uses the info r mation f r om a se r ies of test tones to o p timize the s p eaker sett ings and eq ualization fo r you r p ar ticula r r oom. Important â¢M a k e s u r e the micr op hone and sp eak e r s a r e not moved du r ing the Full Auto MCACC Setu p . ⢠Using the Full Auto MCACC Setu p will ove r wr ite any existing settings fo r the MCACC pr eset you select. â¢B e f o r e u sing the Full Auto MCACC Setu p , the head p hones should be disconnected. CAUTION ⢠The test tones used in the Full Auto MCACC Setu p a r e out p ut at high volume. THX î â¢T H X i s a t r ademar k of THX Ltd., which m ay be r egister ed in some jur isdictions. All r ights r eser ved. 1 Switch on the receiver and your TV. Make su r e that the TVâÂÂs video in p ut is set to th is r eceiver . 2 Connect the microphone to the MCACC SETUP MIC jack on the front panel. ⢠Push down on the lowe r p or tion of the f r ont p an el doo r to access the MCACC SETUP MIC jack. RECEIVER SC-1525_UXJC B.book 38 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼ å¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂç«æÂÂæÂÂ¥ ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Basic Setup 04 39 En Make su r e the r e a r e no obstacles between the s p eake r s and the mic r op hone. If you have a t r ip od, use it to p lace the mic r op hone so that itâÂÂs about ea r level at you r no r mal li stening p osition. If you do not have a t r ip od, use some othe r object to install the mic r op hone. 1 The Full Auto MCACC dis p lay a pp ea r s once the mic r op hone is connec ted. 2 3 Select the parameters you want to set. 3 If the s p eaker s a r e connected using any setu p othe r than Normal(SB/FH) , be su r e to set Speaker System befo r e the Full Auto MCACC Setu p . See Speaker syste m setting on p age 85. ⢠Speaker System 4 â Shows the cu rr ent settings. When this is selec ted and ENTER is pr essed, the s p eake r system selection sc r een a pp ea r s. Select the pr o pe r s p eake r system , then pr ess RETURN to r etu r n. ⢠EQ Type â This dete r mines how the f r equency balance is adjus ted. ⢠MCACC â The six MCACC pr esets a r e used fo r sto r ing su rr ound sound settings fo r diffe r ent listening p ositions . Sim p ly choose an unused pr eset fo r now (you can r ename it late r in Data Management on p age 82). ⢠THX Speaker â Select YES if you a r e using THX s p eake r s (set all s p eake r s to SMALL ), othe r wise leave it set to NO . 4 Press on the remote control, then select START . 5 Follow the inst ructions on-screen. Make su r e the mic r op hone is connected, and if youâ r e using a subwoofe r , make su r e it is switc hed on and se t to a comfo r table volume le vel. 6 Wait for th e test tones to finish , then confirm th e speaker configuration in the GUI screen. A pr og r ess r ep or t is dis p layed on-sc r een while the r eceiver outp uts test tones to deter mine the sp eaker s pr esent in you r setup . Tr y to be as quiet as p ossible while itâÂÂs doing t his. If no o p er ations a r e p er for med fo r 10 seconds while the s p eake r config u r ation check sc r een is being dis p layed, the Full Auto MCACC Setu p wi ll r esume autom atically. In this case, you donâÂÂt need to select â OK â and pr ess ENTER in ste p 7. â¢W i t h e rr o r messages (such as Too much ambient noise! o r Check microphone. ), select RETRY afte r checking fo r am bient noise (see Problems when using the Auto MCACC Setup on p age 40) and ve r if ying the mic co nnection. If the r e doesnâÂÂt seem to be a pr oblem, you can sim p ly select GO NEXT and continue. The configu r ation show n on-sc r een should r eflect the actual s p eaker s you have. Note 1 I nstall the mic r op hone on a stable floo r . Placing the mic r op hone on any of the following su r faces may make accu r ate measu r ement im p ossible: ⢠Sofas o r other soft su r faces. ⢠High places such as tableto p s and sofa to p s. 2 I f you leave the GUI sc r een fo r ove r five minutes, the sc r een save r will a pp ea r . 3⢠W h e n d a t a m e a s u r ement is taken, the r ever b char acter istics data (both befor e- and after -calibr ation) that this r eceiver had been stor ing will be ove r wr itten. If you want to save the r ever b cha r acter istics data befo r e measu r ing, connect a USB memo r y de vice to this r eceive r and t r ansfe r the data. ⢠When measu r em ent is taken of the r eve r b cha r acter ist ics data othe r than SYMMET RY , the data a r e not measur ed after the co rr ection. If you will need to measu r e afte r co rr ecting data, take the measu r em ent using the EQ P r ofessional menu in the Manual MCACC setu p ( p age 77). 4 I f you a r e p lanning on bi-am p ing you r fr ont s p eaker s, o r setting u p a se p ar ate s p eaker system in anoth e r r oom, r ead th r oug h Speaker system setting on p age 85 and make sur e to connect your sp eaker s as nece ssar y be for e continuing to step 4. PHONES SPEAKERS CONTROL MULTI-ZONE ON/OFF MCACC SETUP MIC PARAMETER ENTER (TUNE) (TUNE) (PRESET) (PRESET) AUDIO VIDEO TUNER EDIT USB HDMI 5 VIDEO CAMERA iPod iPhone AUTO SURR/ALC/ STREAM DIRECT HOME THX STANDARD SURROUND ADVANCED SURROUND STEREO BAND HOME ME NU RETURN Mic r op hone T ri p od Speaker System : Normal ( SB/FH ) 1a.Full Auto MCACC A/V RECEIVER Exit Return ST ART EQ T ype : SYMMETRY MCACC : M1.MEMORY 1 THX Speaker : NO RECEIVER Now Analyzing... 2/10 Environment Check 1a.Full Auto MCACC A/V RECEIVER Exit Cancel Ambient Noise : OK Microphone : Speaker YES/NO : L : YE S FHL : YES C : YES FHR : YES R : YES SR : YES SBR : YES SBL : YES SL : YES SW : YES 1a.Full Auto MCACC 10 OK RETRY A/V RECEIVER Exit Cancel SC-1525_UXJC B.book 39 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼ å¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂç«æÂÂæÂÂ¥ ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Basic Setup 04 40 En ⢠If you see an ERR message (o r the s p ea ker configu r ation dis p layed isnâÂÂt co rr ect), the r e may be a pr oblem with the s p eaker connection. If selecting RETRY doesnâÂÂt wo r k, tu r n o ff the p ower and check the s p eaker connections. If the r e doesnâÂÂt seem to be a pr oblem, you can sim p ly use ï©/ïª to select the s p eaker and ï«/ï¬ to change the setting and continue. â¢I f Reverse Phase is dis p la yed, the s p ea ker âÂÂs wi r ing ( and âÂÂ) may be inve r ted. Check the s p eaker connections. 1 â If the connections we r e w r ong, tu r n off the p owe r , disconnect the p ower co r d, then r econnect pr op er ly. Afte r this, p er fo r m the Full Auto MCACC pr ocedu r e again. â If the connections we r e r ight , select GO NEXT and continue. 7 Make sure â OK â is selected, then press ENTER . A pr og r ess r ep or t is dis p layed on -sc r een while th e r eceiver outp uts mor e test tones to deter mine the o p timum r eceive r settings. Again, t r y to be as quiet as p ossible while this is ha pp ening. It may take 3 to 10 minutes. 8 The Full Auto MCACC Setup p rocedure is completed and the Home Menu menu reappears automatically. Be su r e to disconnect the mic r op hone f r om this r eceiver u p on com p letion of the Full Auto MCACC Setu p. The settings made in the Full Auto MCACC Setu p should give you excellent su rr ound sound f r om you r system, but it is also p ossible to adjust these settings manually using The Advanced MCACC m enu on p age 75 o r Th e System Setup and Other Setup me nus on p age 84. 2 Problems when using the Auto MCACC Setup If the r oom envi r onment is not o p timal fo r the Auto MCACC Set u p ( t o o m u c h b a c k g r ound noise, e cho off the walls, obst acles blocking the s p eaker s f r om the mic r op hone) the final settings may be inco rr ect. Check fo r household a pp liances ( ai r conditione r , fr idge, fa n, etc.), that may be affecting the envi r onment and switch them off if necessa r y. If the r e a r e any in str uctions showing in the f r ont p anel dis p lay, p lease follow them. ⢠Some olde r TVs m ay inte r fer e with the o p er ation of the mic r op hone. If this seems to be h a pp ening, switch off th e TV when doing the Auto MCACC Setu p . The Input Setup menu You only need to make settings in the Input Setup menu if you didnâÂÂt hook u p you r digital equi p ment acco r ding to the default settings (see Input function default and possible setting s on p age 41). In this case, you need to tell the r eceiver what equi p ment is hooked u p to which te r minal so the buttons on the r emote cont r ol co rr es p ond to the com p onents youâÂÂve connected. 1 Press on the remote control, then press HOME MENU . A G r ap hical Use r In te r face (GUI) sc r een a pp ea r s on you r TV. Use ï©/ïª/ï«/ ï¬ and ENTER to navigate th r ough the sc r eens and select menu items. P r ess RETURN to confi r m and exit the cu rr ent menu. 2 Select â System Setup â from the Home Menu . 3 Select â Input Setup â from the System Setup menu. 4 Select the input funct ion that you want to set up. The default names co rr es p ond with the names next to the te r minals on the r ea r p anel (such as DVD o r VIDEO ) which, in tu r n, co rr es p ond with the names on the r emote cont r ol. 5 Select the input(s) to which youâÂÂve connected your component. Fo r exam p le, if you r DVD p laye r only has an o p tical out p ut, you will need to change the DVD in p ut functionâÂÂs Digital In setting f r om COAX-1 (default ) to the o p tical in p ut youâÂÂve connected it to. The numbe r ing ( OPT-1 to 3 ) co rr es p onds with the numbe r s beside the in p uts on the back of the r eceiver . Note 1I f t h e s p eaker is not p ointed to the micr op hone (listening p osition) or when using sp eaker s that affect the p hase (dip ole sp eaker s, r eflectiv e s p eake r s, etc.), Reverse P hase may be dis played eve n if the s p eaker s a r e pr op er ly connected. 2⢠D e p ending on the char acter istics of your r oom , sometimes identical sp ea ke r s with cone sizes of a r ound 12 cm (5 inches) will end u p with diffe r ent size settings. You can co rr ect the setting manually using the Manual speaker setup on p age 84. ⢠The subwoofe r distance setting may be fa r ther than the actual distance f r om the listening position. This setting should be accu r ate (tak ing delay and r oom cha r acter istics into account) and gene r ally does not need to be changed. ⢠If Full Auto MCACC Setu p mea su r emen t r esults a r e inco rr ect due to the inte r action of the s p eake r s and viewing envi r onment, we r ecommend adjusting the settings manually. RECEIVER A/V RECEIVER Exit Return a.Manual SP Setup b. Input Setup c. OSD Language d. Network Setup e. Other Setup 4.System Setup 4b.Input Setup A/V RECEIVER Exit Finish Input : DVD Input Name : Rename Digital In : COAX-1 HDMI Input : --- Input Skip : OFF Component In : Comp-1 12V Trigger1 : OFF 12V Trigger2 : OFF SC-1525_UXJC B.book 40 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼ å¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂç«æÂÂæÂÂ¥ ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Basic Setup 04 41 En 6 When yo uâÂÂre finishe d, proceed to t he settings fo r other inputs. The r e a r e o p tion al sett ings in a ddition to the ass ignment of the in p ut jacks: ⢠Input Name â You can choose to r en ame the in p ut function fo r ea sie r identifica tion. Select Rename to do so, o r Defaul t to r etur n to the system default. ⢠Input Skip â When set to ON , that i n p ut is ski pp ed when selecting the in p ut usin g INPUT SELECT . ( DVD and othe r in p uts can be still be sele cted di r ectly with the in p ut function button s.) ⢠12V Trigger1 /2 â Afte r connecting a com p onent to one of the 12 volt t r igger s (see Switching components on and off using the 12 volt trigger on p age 37), select MAIN , ZONE 2 , ZONE 3 o r OFF fo r the co rr esp onding t r igge r setting to switch it on automatical ly along with the (main o r sub) zone s p ecified. 1 7 When yo uâÂÂre finished, press RETURN . You will r etur n to the System Setup menu. Input function default and possible settings The te r minals on the r eceiver gene r ally co rr es p ond to the name of one of the in p ut functions. If you have connected com p onents to this r eceive r diffe r ently f r om (o r in addition to) the defaults below, see The Input Setup menu on p age 40 to tell the r eceive r how youâÂÂve connected u p . The dots ( ï« ) indi cate p ossible assignments. Note 1 De vices connected to 12 volt t r igger s can be associated with HDMI OUT switching. Fo r details, see HDMI Setup on p age 57. Input function Input Terminals Digital HDMI Component DVD COAX-1 ï« a a. With Control with HDMI set to ON , assignments ca nnot be made (see Control with HDMI function on p age 57). IN 1 BD (BD ) TV/SAT OPT-1 ï« a ï« DVR/BDR OPT-2 ï« a IN 2 VIDEO OPT-3 ï« a IN 3 HDMI 1 ï« ( HDMI-1 ) HDMI 2 ( HDMI-2) HDMI 3 ( HDMI-3 ) HDMI 4 ( HDMI-4 ) HDMI 5 (f r ont panel) ( HDMI-5 ) INTERNET RADIO iPod/USB XM RADIO CD COAX-2 CD-R/TAPE ï« TUNER ADAPTER PORT PHONO MULTI CH IN ï« a SIRIUS ï« SC-1525_UXJC B.book 41 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼ å¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂç«æÂÂæÂÂ¥ ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Basic playback 05 42 En Chapter 5: Basic playback Playing a source He r e a r e the basic inst r uctions fo r p laying a sour ce (such as a DVD disc) with you r home theate r system. 1 Switch on your system components and receiver. Make su r e that the TVâÂÂs video in p ut is set to this r eceiver . 2 Press on the remote control. 3 Select the input functio n you want to play. You can use the in p ut function buttons on the r emote cont r ol, INPUT SELECT , o r the f r ont p anel INPUT SELECTOR dial. 1 4 Press AUTO/ALC/DIRECT ( AUTO SURR / ALC / STREAM DIRECT ) to se lect â AUTO SURROUND â and start playback of the source. 2 If youâ r e p laying a Dolby Digital o r DTS su rr ound sound sou r ce, you should hea r su rr ound sound. If you a re p laying a ster eo sour ce, you will only h ear sound fr om the f r ont left/ r ight s p eake r s in the default listening mode. ⢠S ee also Listening to y our system on p age 5 3 fo r info r mation on diffe r ent ways of listening to sou r ces. It is p ossible to check on the f r ont p anel dis p lay whethe r o r not multi- channel p layba ck is being pe r fo r med pr o pe r ly. Fo r details, see Auto Surround, ALC and Stream Direct with different input signal formats on p age 106. When using a su rround bac k s p eaker , 2 D PLIIx MOVIE is dis p layed when p laying D olby Digital signals, an d DTS Neo:6 is di s p layed when p laying DTS 5.1- channel signals. If the dis p lay doe s not co rr esp ond to the in p ut signal and listening mode, check the connections and setti ngs. 5 Use the volume control to adjust the volume level. Tu r n down the volume of you r TV so that all sound is coming f r om the s p eaker s connected to this r eceiver . Playing a source with HDMI connection ⢠Press on the r emote control, then use INPUT SEL ECT to select the HDMI input youâÂÂve connected to (for example, HDMI 1 ). You can also p er for m the same o p eratio n by using the INPUT SELE CTOR dial on the f r ont p anel o r by pr essing HDMI on the r emo te contr ol r ep eatedly. â¢S e t t h e H D M I p ar ameter in Setting the Audio options on p age 60 to THROUGH if you want to hea r HDMI audio out p ut f r om your TV (no soun d will be hea r d f r om this r eceive r ). ⢠If the video signal does not a pp ea r on your TV, tr y adjusting the r esolution settings on you r com p onent o r dis p lay. Note that some com p onents (such as video game units) have r esolutio ns that may not be conve r ted. In this case, use an analog video connection. Selecting the multichannel analog inputs If you have connected a de code r or a DVD p layer as above, you must select the analog multichannel in p uts fo r su rr ound sound p layb ack. 3 1 Make sure you have set the playback sourc e to the proper output setting. Fo r exam p le, you might n eed to set you r DVD p laye r to out p ut multichannel analog audio. 2 Press on the remote control, then use INPUT SEL ECT to sele ct MULTI CH IN . You can also use the INPUT SELECTOR dial on the f r ont p anel. â¢D e p ending on th e DVD p layer yo uâÂÂr e using, the analog out p ut level of the subwoo fe r channel may be too low. In this case, t he out p ut level of the subwoofe r can be inc r eased by 10 dB in the Multi Ch In Se tup in Other Setup . Fo r de tails, see Mul ti Channe l Input Setup on p age 90. Note 1 If you need to manually switch the in p ut signal ty p e pr ess SIGNAL SEL (p age 56 ). 2 You may need to check the digital audio out p ut settings on you r DVD p layer o r digital satellite r eceiver . It should be set to out p ut Dolby Digital, DTS and 88.2 kHz / 96 kHz P CM (2 channe l) audio, an d if the r e is an MPEG audio o p tion, set this to conve r t the MPEG audio to PCM. RECEIVER 3⢠W h e n p layback f r om the multicha nnel in p uts is selected, only the volume and channel levels can be set. ⢠You canâÂÂt listen to you r sp eaker B system dur ing p layback fr om the multichannel inp uts. ⢠With MULTI C H IN in p uts, it is p ossible to p lay p ictur es si multaneo usly. Fo r d etails, se e Multi Channel Input Setup on p age 90. RECEIVER RECEIVER SC-1525_UXJC B.book 42 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼ å¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂç«æÂÂæÂÂ¥ ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Basic playback 05 43 En Playing an iPod This r eceiver has the iPod/iPhone/USB ter minal that will allow you to cont r ol p l ayback of audio con tent f r om you r iPod using the cont r ols of this r eceiver . 1 1 Switch on the receiver and your TV. See Connecting an iP od on p age 35. â¢I t i s a l s o p ossible to o p er ate the iPod o n the iPod itself, witho ut using the TV sc r een. Fo r details, see Switching the iPod co ntrols on p age 43. 2P r e s s iPod USB on the remote control to switch the receiver to the iPod/USB . Loading a pp ea r s in the GUI sc r een while the r eceive r ve r ifies the conn ection and ret r ie ves data f r om the iPod. When the dis p lay shows the iPod to p menu you â r e r eady to p lay music f r om the iPod. 2 Playing back audio files stored on an iPod To navigate songs on you r iPod, you can take adva ntage of the GUI sc r een of you r TV connected to this r eceiver . 3 You can als o cont r ol all o p er ations fo r music in the f r ont p anel d is p lay of this r eceiver . Finding what you want to play When you r iPod is connected to this r eceiver , you c an b r owse songs sto r ed on you r iPod by p laylist, a r tist nam e, album name, song name, gen r e o r com p ose r , simila r to using you r iPod di r ectly. 1U s e ï©/ïª to select âÂÂMusicâ from the i Pod top menu. 2U s e ï©/ïª to select a category, then press ENTER to browse that category. â¢T o r etur n to the pr evious level any time, pr ess RETURN . 3U s e ï©/ïª to browse the selected catego ry (e.g., albums). â¢U s e ï«/ï¬ to move to pr evious/next levels. 4 Continue browsing unt il you arrive at what you want to play, then press ï¤ to start playback. Tip â¢Y o u c a n p lay all of the songs in a p ar ticular catego r y by selecting the All item at the to p of each catego r y list. Fo r exam p le, you can p lay al l the songs by a p ar ticular ar tist. Basic playback controls This r eceive r âÂÂs r emote cont r ol buttons can be used fo r basic p layback of files sto r ed on an iPod. 4 â¢P r ess iPo d USB to switch the r emote contr ol to the iPod/USB o p er ation mode. Switching the iPod controls 5 You can switch ove r the iPod cont r ols between the iP od and the r eceiver . 1P r e s s iPod CTRL to switch the iPod controls. This enables o p er ation and dis p lay on you r iPod, and this r eceiver âÂÂs r emote contr ol and G UI scr een become inactive. 2P r e s s iPod CTRL again to switc h back to the receiv er controls. Note 1 ⢠This syste m is com p atible with the audio and video of the iPod nano (audio only fo r the iP od nano 1G/2G), iPo d fifth gene r ation (audio only), iPod classic, iPod to uch and iPhone. Howeve r , some of the functions may be r estr icted for some models. The system is not comp atible with the iPod shuffle. ⢠Com p atibility may va r y de p ending on the softwa r e ve r sion of you r iPod and iPhone. Please be su r e to use the latest available softwa r e ve r sion. ⢠iPod and iPhone a r e licensed fo r r e pr oduction of non-co p yr ighted mate r ials o r mate r ials the use r is legally p er mitted to r e pr oduc e. ⢠Featu r es such as the equalize r cannot be cont r olled using this r eceiver , and we r ecommend switching the e qualize r off befo r e connecting. ⢠Pionee r cannot unde r any ci r cumstances acce p t r esp onsibility fo r any di r ect o r indi r ect loss a r ising f r om any inconvenience o r loss of r ecor ded mater ial r esulting fr om the iPod failu r e. ⢠When listening to a t r ack on the iPod in th e main zone, it is p ossible to cont r ol the sub zone, but not to listen to a diffe r ent t r ack i n the sub zone f r om the one p laying in the main zone. 2 T he cont r ols of you r iPod will be ino p er able when connected to this r ece ive r . 3 ⢠Note that cha r acter s that cannot be dis p layed on this r eceiver ar e dis p layed as # . ⢠This featu r e is not available fo r p hotos o n you r iPod. To dis p lay photos, switch iPod o p er ation to the iPod (see Switching the iPod controls on p age 43). 4D u r ing Audiobook p layback, pr ess ï©/ïª to switch the p layback sp eed: Faste r ï¦ Nor mal ï¦ Slower 5 Y ou cannot use this functio n, when an iPod of fifth gene r ation o r iPod nano of fi rst gene r a tion is connect ed. iPod CTRL HOME MENU TUNE TUNE TOOLS LIST PRESET TOP MENU BAND GUIDE T .EDIT VIDEO P ARAMETER AUDIO P ARAMETER ENTER PRESET RETURN CA TEGORY SIGNAL SEL MCACC SLEEP HDMI OUT TV / DTV MPX PQLS PHASE CTRL ST ATUS THX STEREO DIRECT ST ANDARD ADV SURR AUDIO INFO DISP HDD DVD 5 46 2 13 SC-1525_UXJC B.book 43 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼ å¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂç«æÂÂæÂÂ¥ ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Basic playback 05 44 En Playing a USB device It is p ossible to p lay files 1 using the USB inte r face on the f r ont of this r eceive r. 1 Switch on the receiver and your TV. See Connecting a USB device on p age 35. 2 2 Press iPod USB on the rem ote control to switch the receiver to the iPod/USB . 3 Loading a pp ea r s in the GUI sc r een as this r eceive r sta r ts r ecognizing the USB device connected. When the disp lay shows the USB Top menu youâ r e r eady to p lay f r om the USB device. Important If an Over Current message lights in the dis p lay, the p ower r equir em ents of the USB device ar e too high f or this r eceive r . T r y following the p oints below: ⢠S witch the r eceiver off, then on ag ain. ⢠R econnect the USB device with the r eceiver switched off. ⢠Use a dedica ted A C ada p ter (su pp lied with the device) fo r USB p ower . If this doesnâÂÂt r emedy the pr oblem, it is likely you r USB device is incom p atible. Playing back audio files stored on a USB memory device The maximum numbe r of levels that you can select in Ste p 2 (below) is 8. Also, you can dis p lay and p lay back u p to 30 000 folde r s and files within a USB memo r y device. 4 1U s e ï©/ïª to sele ct âÂÂMusicâ fr om the USB Top menu. 2U s e ï©/ïª to select a folder, then press ENTER to browse that fold er. â¢T o r etur n to the pr evious level any tim e, pr ess RETURN . 3 Continue browsing u ntil you arrive at what you want to play, then press ï¤ to start playba ck. 5 Basic play back controls This r eceive r âÂÂs r emote cont r ol bu ttons can be used fo r basic p layback of files sto r ed on USB memo r y devices. â¢P r ess iPod USB to switch the r emote cont r ol to the iPod/USB o p er ation mode. Playing back photo files stored on a USB memory device 6 1U s e ï©/ïª to sel ect â Photo sâ from the USB Top menu. 2U s e ï©/ïª to select a folder, then press ENTER to browse that folder. ⢠To r etur n to the pr evious level any time, pr ess RETURN . 3 Continue browsing u ntil you arrive at what you want to play, then press ï¤ to start playback. 7 The selected content is dis p laye d in full s c r een and a slideshow sta r ts. Afte r a slideshow launches, pr essing ENTER toggles between p lay and p ause (only when Theme on the Slideshow Se tu p is set to Normal (OFF) ). Basic play back controls Note 1⢠C o m p atible USB devi ces include exter nal magnetic har d dr ives, p or table flash me mor y dr ives (p ar ticular ly key dr ives) and digital audio p layer s (MP3 p layer s) of for mat FAT16/32. ⢠Pionee r cann ot gua r antee com p atibility (o p er ation and/o r bus p ower ) with all USB mass sto r age devices and assumes no r esponsibility fo r any loss of data that may occu r when connected to this r ece ive r . 2M a k e s u r e the r eceive r is in standby when disconnecting the USB device. 3 The iPod/USB function cannot be sele cted in the main zone when the Inte r net r adio function is selected in the sub zone. Also, the iPod/USB function cannot be selected in the sub zone w hen the Inte r net r adio function is selected in the main zone. 4 Note that non-Roman cha r acter s in the p laylist a r e dis p laye d as # . 5⢠C o p yr ighted audio files cannot be p layed back on this r eceiver . ⢠DRM- pr otected audio files cannot be p layed back on this r eceiver . 6 Photo files cannot be p layed in the sub zone. 7 If the slideshow is left in the p ause mo de fo r five minutes, the list sc r een r ea pp ear s. Button(s ) What it does ENTER , ï¤ Sta r ts dis p laying a p hoto and p laying a slide show. RETURN , ï« Sto p s the p laye r and r etu r ns to the pr ev ious menu. ï¯ a a.You can only use this button when Theme on the Slideshow Setu p is set to Normal (OFF) Dis p lays the pr evious p hoto content. ï° a Dis p lays the next p hoto conten t. ïÂÂ¥ a Pauses/un p auses the slideshow. DISP a Dis p lays the p hoto info r mation. iPod CTRL HOME MENU TUNE TUNE TOOLS LIST PRESET TOP MENU BAND GUIDE T .EDIT VIDEO P ARAMETER AUDIO P ARAMETER ENTER PRESET RETURN CA TEGORY SIGNAL SEL MCACC SLEEP HDMI OUT TV / DTV MPX PQLS PHASE CTRL ST ATUS THX STEREO DIRECT ST ANDARD ADV SURR AUDIO INFO DISP HDD DVD 5 46 2 13 SC-1525_UXJC B.book 44 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼ å¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂç«æÂÂæÂÂ¥ ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Basic playback 05 45 En Slideshow Setup Make the va r ious settings fo r p la ying slidesho ws of p hoto files he r e. 1U s e ï©/ïª to select â Slideshow Setup â from th e USB Top menu. 2 Select the setting you want. ⢠Theme â Add va r ious effects to the s lideshow. ⢠Interval â Set the inte r val fo r switching the p hotos. This may not be available de p ending on the Theme setting. ⢠BGM â Play musi c files sto r ed on the USB device while dis p laying p hotos. ⢠Music Select â Select the folde r containing the music files to be p layed when BGM is se t to ON . 3 When yo uâÂÂre finished, press RETURN . You will r etur n to the USB Top menu. About playable file format s The USB function of this r eceiver su pp o r ts the following file fo r mats. Note that some file fo r mats a r e not available fo r p layback although they a r e listed as p layable file fo r mats. Music files Photo files Category Exte nsion Strea m MP3 a a. âÂÂMPEG Layer-3 audio decoding technology license d from Fraunhofer IIS and Thomson multimedia. â .m p 3 MPEG-1, 2, 2.5 Audio Laye r -3 Sam p ling f r equency 8 kHz to 48 kH z Quantization bi t r ate 16 bit Channel 2 ch Bit r ate 8 kb p s to 320 kb ps VBR/CBR Su pp o r ted/Su ppo r ted WAV .wav LPCM Sam p ling f r equency 32 kHz, 44.1 kHz, 48 kHz Quantization bi t r ate 8 bi t, 16 bit Channel 2 ch, Monau r al WMA .wma WMA8/9 b b.Files encoded using Wind ows Media Codec 9 may be p layable but som e p ar ts of the s p ecification a r e not su pp o r ted; s pecifically, P r o, Lossless, Voice. Sam p ling f r equency 8 kHz to 48 kHz Quantization bi t r ate 16 bit Channel 2 ch Bit r ate 8 kb p s to 320 kb ps VBR/CBR Su pp o r ted/Su ppo r ted Category Extension JPEG .j p g .j p eg .j p e .jif .jfif Fo r mat Meeting the f ollowing conditions: ⢠Baseline JPEG fo r mat (including files r ecor ded in Exif/DC F fo r mat) ⢠Y:Cb:C r - 4:4:4, 4:2:2 o r 4:2:0 Resolution 30 to 8184 p ixels ve r tical, 40 to 8184 p ixels hor izont al SC-1525_UXJC B.book 45 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼ å¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂç«æÂÂæÂÂ¥ ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Basic playback 05 46 En Listening to the radi o The following ste p s show you how to tune in to FM and AM r adio b r oadcasts using the aut omatic (sea r ch) and manual (ste p ) tuning functions. If you al r eady know the f r equency of the station you want, see Tuning directly to a station below. Once you a r e tuned to a statio n you can memo r ize the f r equency fo r r ec all late r âÂÂsee Saving station presets below fo r mo r e on how to do this. 1 Press TUNER to select the tuner. 2 Use BAND to chang e the band (FM or AM) , if necessary. 3 Tune to a station. The r e a r e th r ee ways to do this: Automatic tuning â To sea r ch fo r stations in the cu rr ently selected band, pr ess and hold TUNE ï©/ïª fo r about a second. The r ece ive r will sta r t sea r ching fo r the next stati on, sto pp ing when it has found one. Re p eat to sea r ch fo r othe r stations. Manual tu ning â To c hang e the f r equency one ste p at a ti me, pr ess TUNE ï©/ïª . High speed tunin g â P r ess and hold TUNE ï©/ïª fo r high s p eed tuning. Release the button at the f r equency you want. Improving FM sound If the TUNED o r STEREO indica to r doesnâÂÂt light when tuning to an FM station because the signal is wea k, pr ess MPX to switch the r eceiver into mono r ecep ti on mode. This should im pr ove the sound quality and allow you to enjoy the b r oadcast. Using the noise cut mode The two noise cut modes can be used when r eceiving AM b r oadcasts. P r ess MPX to select the noise cut mode (1 to 2). Using Neural Surround This featu r e uses Neu r al Su rr ound⢠technologies to achieve o p timal su rr ound sound f r om FM r adio. ⢠W hile listening to FM r adio, pr ess AUTO/ALC/ DIRECT fo r Neur al Su rr ound. The Neural Surround mode can be selected also with STANDARD . Tuning directly to a station 1 Press TUNER to select the tuner. 2 Use BAND to change the band (FM or AM), if necessary. 3 Press D.ACCESS (Direct Access). 4 Use the number buttons to ent er the frequency of the radio station. Fo r exam p le, to tune to 106.00 (FM), pr ess 1 , 0, 6, 0, 0 . If you make a mista ke halfway th r ough, pr ess D.ACCESS twice to cancel the f r equen cy and sta r t ove r . Saving station presets If you often listen to a p ar ti cular r ad io station, it âÂÂs convenient to have the r eceiver sto r e the f r equen cy fo r easy r ecall wheneve r you want to listen to that station. This saves the effo r t of manually tuning in each time. This r eceiver can memor ize up to 63 stations, sto r ed in seven banks, o r classes (A to G) of 9 stations each. 1 Tune to a station you want to memorize. See Listening to the radio above fo r mo r e on this. 2 Press T.EDIT ( TUNER EDIT ). The dis p lay shows PRESET ME MORY , then a blinking memo r y class. 3 Press CLASS to select one of the seven classes, then press PRESET ï«/ï¬ to select the station preset you want. You can also use the numbe r bu ttons to select a station pr eset. 4 Press ENTER . Afte r pr essing ENTER , the pr eset class and numbe r stop blinking and the r eceiver sto r es the station. Listening to station presets 1 Press TUNER to select the tuner. 2 Press CLASS to select the class in which the station is stored. P r ess re p eatedly to cycle th r ough clas ses A to G. 3 Press PRESET ï«/ï¬ to select the station preset you want. ⢠You can also use the numbe r buttons on the r emo te cont r ol to r ecall the station pr eset. Naming station presets Fo r easie r identification, you ca n name you r station pr esets. 1 Choose the station preset you want to name. See Listening to station presets above fo r how to do this. SC-1525_UXJC B.book 46 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼ å¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂç«æÂÂæÂÂ¥ ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Basic playback 05 47 En 2P r e s s T.EDIT ( TUNER EDIT ). The dis p lay shows PRESET NAME , then a blinkin g cu r sor at the fi r st cha r acter p osition. 3 Input the name you want. Use ï©/ïª t o s e l e c t a c h a r acte r , ï«/ï¬ to set the p osition, and ENTER to confi r m you r selectio n. Tip â¢T o e r ase a station name, sim p ly r ep eat step s 1 to 3 and in p ut eight s p aces instead of a n ame. ⢠Once you have named a station pr eset, you can pr ess DISP when listening to a stat ion to switch the dis p lay between name and f r equency. Listening to Satellite Radio To listen to Satellite Radio, yo uâÂÂll need to connect eithe r a SIRIUS o r X M Sate llite Rad io tune r (sold se p ar ately) to you r satellit e- r eady r ece iver . Satellite R adio is availa ble to r esidents of the US (excep t Ala ska and Hawaii) and Canada. Satellite Rad io delive r s a va riety of comme r cial- f r ee music f r om catego r ies r anging fr om P op , Rock, C ount r y, R&B, Dance, Jazz, Classical and many mo r e p lus cove r age of all the to p pr ofessional and coll ege s p or ts including p lay by p lay games f r om select leagues and teams. Additional pr og r amming includes ex p er t s p or ts talk, uncenso r ed ente r tainment, comedy, family pr og r amming, local tr affic and weather and news fr om you r most t r uste d sou r ces. Whethe r you p ur chase a SIRIUS o r XM tune r , yo uâÂÂll need to activate and sub sc r ibe to begin enjoying the se r vice. Easy to follow installation and setu p inst r uctions a r e pr ovided with the satellite tune r s. Whichever ser vice you choose, the r e a r e a va r iety of pr ogr amming p ackages available, incl uding the o p tion of adding âÂÂThe Best of SIRIUSâ pr og r am ming to you r XM tu ne r o r âÂÂThe Best of XMâ pr og r amming to you r SIRIUS tune r , enabling you to enjoy the most p op ular pr ogr am ming among both se r vices. The âÂÂBest ofâ p ackages a r e no t available to SIRIUS o r XM Canada subsc r iber s at this time. Family f r iendly p ack ages a r e also availa ble to r est r ict channels featu r ing content that may be ina ppr opr iate fo r child r en. To subsc r ibe to XM, U.S. custom e r s should visit xm r adio.com o r call 1-800-XMRADIO (1-800-967-2346); Canadian custome r s should visit xm r adio.ca o r call XM Listene r Ca r e at 1-877-GETXMSR (1-877-438-9677). To subsc r ibe to SIRIUS, U.S. and Canadian custome r s can call 1-888-539-SIRI (1-888-539-7474) o r visit si r ius.com (U S) o r si r iuscanada.ca (C anada). Listening to XM Radio Fo r details on XM Radio, see About SIRIUS and XM on p age 105. 1P r e s s XM to switch to the XM RADIO input. Fo r best r ece p tion, you may need to mo ve the XM Mini- Tune r antenna nea r a window (the southe r nmost window should pr oduce the best r esults). â¢I f a f t e r pr essing XM the disp lay shows Ch eck XM Tuner o r Check Antenn a , t r y disconnectin g the r eceiver and tuner connections, and then p lugging them back in. 1 Afte r connecting, you will be able to use this r eceive r to select channe ls and navigate catego r ies using the GUI sc r een. 2 Selecting channels and browsing by genre F r om the XM Channe l Guide, you can b r owse XM Radio channels in the o r der that they a pp ea r , o r you can na rr ow you r channel sea r ch by gen r e. 3 1P r e s s ï©/ïª to enter the XM Channel Guid e, navigate through the channels one at time with ï©/ïª , then press ENTER to listen to the XM radi o broadcast. â¢T o b r owse by genr e, fir st pr ess CATEGORY , use ï©/ïª to select a g en r e, then pr ess ENTER . ⢠To cancel and exit any time, pr ess RETURN . Tip ⢠You can sel ect channels di r ectly by pr essing D.ACCESS , then the th r ee-digit channel nu mbe r . â¢Y o u c a n pr ess DISP to c h a n g e X M R ad io in f o r mation in the f r ont p anel dis p lay. â¢T h e c u rr ently selected chan nel is automatically chosen (without pr essing ENTER ) afte r five seconds. Using XM HD Surround XM HD Su rr ound uses Neu r al Su rr ound⢠technologies to achieve o p timal su rr ound sound f r om XM r adio. XM HD Su rr ound So und is available on select XM channels only. ⢠While listening to XM Radio, press AUTO/ALC/ DIRECT for XM HD Surround l istening. XM HD Su rr ound can be selected also with STANDARD . Note 1 You can check the st r ength of r ecep tion in Using the XM Menu on p age 48. 2 ItâÂÂs easiest if you have you r TV switched on to take a dvantage of the GUI sc r eens. You can, howeve r , use just the f r ont p anel dis p lay to do eve r ything if you pr efe r . 3 Select 0 ( RADIO ID ) f r om the GUI to c heck the Radio ID of the XM Mini-Tune r . SC-1525_UXJC B.book 47 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼ å¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂç«æÂÂæÂÂ¥ ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Basic playback 05 48 En Saving channel preset s This r eceive r can memo r ize u p to 63 channels, sto r ed in seven banks, o r classes (A to G) of 9 channels each. 1 1 Select the channel you want to memorize. See Selecting channels and browsing by genre on p age 47. 2 Press T.EDIT . The dis p lay shows a blinking memo r y class. 3 Press CLASS to select one of th e seven classes, then press ï«/ï¬ to select the channel preset you w ant. You can also use the numbe r buttons to select a pr eset. ⢠The default fo r all pr esets is XM1 . 4 Press ENTER . Afte r pr essing ENTER , the pr eset class and numbe r stop blinking and the r eceiver sto r es the XM channel. Tip â¢Y o u c a n a l s o pr ess MEMORY du r ing r ecep tion dis p lay to save the info r mation of u p to five songs. See Using the XM Me nu below to r ecall this info r mation. Listening to channel presets 1 Press CLASS to select the class in which the channel is sto red. P r ess re p eatedly to cycle th r ough classes A to G. 2 Press ï«/ï¬ to select the channel preset you want. ⢠You can also use the numbe r buttons on the r emote cont r ol to r ecall the channel pr eset. Using the XM Menu The XM Menu pr ovides addi tional XM Radio fe atu r es. 2 1 Press TOP MENU . 2U s e ï©/ïª to select a menu item, then press ENTER . Choose f r om the following menu items: ⢠Channel Sk ip/Add â Use ï©/ïª and ENTER to select channels you would like to r emove/r estor e f r om /to the channel guide. ⢠Antenn a Aiming â Check the st r ength o f satellite and te rr est r ial r ecep tion. ⢠Memory Recall â Use ï©/ïª to b r owse yo u r saved song info r mation (see Tip above). 3 When youâÂÂre finished press TOP MENU to return to the reception display. Listening to SIRIUS Radio Fo r d e t a i l s o n S I R I U S R a d i o , s e e About SIRIUS and XM on p age 105. 1 Press SIRIUS to switch to the SIRIUS input. Fo r best r ece p tion, you may need to move the Si r iusConnect⢠tune r antenna nea r a wi ndow ( r efe r to the manual fo r the Si r iusC onnect⢠Hom e tune r fo r antenna pla cement r ecommendation s). 3 â¢I f a f t e r pr essing SIRIUS the disp lay shows Antenna Error , t r y disconnecting the antenna a nd r econnecting. 4 If the dis p lay shows Check Sirius Tuner , check the connection of the AC ada p ter and this r eceive r to the Si r iusConnect⢠tune r . Afte r connecting, you will be a ble to use this r eceive r to select channels and navigate catego r ies using the GUI sc r een dis p lay. 5 Selecting channels and bro wsing by genre F r om the SIRIUS Channel Guide, you can b r owse SIRIUS Radio channels in the o r der that they a pp ea r , o r you can na rr ow you r channel sea r ch by gen r e. 1 Press ï©/ïª to enter the SIRIUS Channel Guide, navigate through the channels one at time with ï©/ïª , then press ENTER to listen to the SIRIUS radio broadcast. â¢T o b r owse by genr e, fir st pr ess CATEGORY , use ï©/ïª to select a gen r e, then pr ess ENTER . ⢠To cancel and exit any time, pr ess RETURN . Tip ⢠You can select ch annels di r ectly by pr essing D.ACCESS , then the th r ee-digit channel number . â¢Y o u c a n pr ess DISP to change SIRIUS Radio info r mation in the f r ont p anel dis p lay. Note 1 You can r eset the channel pr esets and memo r y in Resetting the system on p age 66. 2 You can r eset the Channel Ski p /Add settings in Resetting the system on p age 66. 3⢠I n o r de r to activate your r adio subscr ip tion, you will need the SIRIUS ID (SID) which uniquely identifies your tuner . The SID may be found on a sticke r located on the p ackaging, o r on the bott om of the tune r itself. The label will have a pr inted 12-digit SID numbe r . When you have located the SID, w r ite it down in the s p ace pr ovided nea r the end of this manual. Contact SIRIUS on the inte r net at: htt p s:// activate.si r ius r adio.com Follow the pr om p ts to activate you r subsc r ip tion, o r you can also call SIRIUS toll-f r ee at 1-888-539-S IR IUS (1-8 88-539-7474). ⢠Select 0 ( SIRIU S ID ) f r om the on-sc r een dis p lay to check t he Radio ID of the Si r iusConnect⢠tune r (see Selecting channels and browsing by genre on p age 48). 4 You can check the st r ength of r ecep tion in Using the SI RIUS Menu on p age 49. 5 ItâÂÂs easiest if you have you r TV switched on to take advantage of the GUI sc r eens. You can, however , use just the f r ont p anel dis p lay to do eve r ything if you pr efe r . SC-1525_UXJC B.book 48 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼ å¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂç«æÂÂæÂÂ¥ ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Basic playback 05 49 En â¢T h e c u rr entl y selected cha nnel is automa tically chosen (without pr essing ENTER ) afte r five seconds. Saving channel presets This r eceive r ca n memo r ize u p to 63 chan nels, sto r ed in seven banks, o r classes (A to G) o f nine channels each. 1 1 Select the channel you want to memorize. See Selecting ch annels and browsing by genre on p age 48. 2P r e s s T.EDIT . The dis p lay shows a blinking memo r y class. 3P r e s s CLASS to select one of the seven classes, then press ï«/ï¬ to select the channel preset you want. You can also use the numbe r buttons to select a pr eset. 4P r e s s ENTER . Afte r pr essing ENTER , the pr eset class and numbe r stop blinking and the r eceiver sto r es the SIRIUS chan nel. Tip â¢Y o u c a n a l s o pr ess MEMORY du r ing r ecep tion dis p lay to save the info r mation of u p to five songs. See Using the SIRIUS Me nu below to r ecall this info r mation. Listening to channel preset s 1P r e s s CLASS to select the class in which the channel is stored. P r ess re p eatedly to cycle th r ough classes A to G. 2P r e s s ï«/ï¬ to select th e channel preset you want. ⢠You can also use the numbe r buttons on the r emote cont r ol to r ecall the chan nel pr eset. Using the SIRIUS Menu The SIRIUS Menu pr ovides addition al SIRIUS Radio featu r es. 2 1P r e s s TOP MENU . 2U s e ï©/ïª to select a menu item, then press ENTER . Choose f r om the following menu items: ⢠Channel Skip/Add â Use ï©/ïª and EN TER to select channels y ou would like to r emove/r estor e f r om/to the channel gu ide. ⢠Parental Lo ck â Use ï©/ïª and ENTER to select channels y ou would like to p lace unde r p ar enta l lock. Channels p ut under p ar en tal lock ar e not disp layed in the Channel Guide, but may be accessed by di r ectly in p utting thei r channel numbe r and pr oviding the p ar ental lock p asswor d. ⢠Antenna Aiming â Check the st r ength of sate llite and te rr est r ial r ecep ti on. ⢠Memory Recall â Use ï©/ïª to b r owse you r saved song info r mation (see Tip above). ⢠Password Se t â Set the pa r ental lo ck p asswor d. 3 When youâÂÂre finish ed press TOP MENU to return to the reception display. Listening to Intern et radio stations Inte r net r adio is an audio b r oadcasting ser vice t r ansmitted via the Inte r net. 3 The r e a r e a la r ge numbe r of Inte r net r adio stations b r oadcasting a va r iety of se r vices f r om eve r y co r ne r of the wo r ld. Some a r e ho sted, managed, and b r oadcast by pr ivate individuals while othe r s a r e by the co rr es p onding t r adit ional te rrest r ial r adio stations or r adio networ ks. Wher eas te rr estr ial, o r OTA (ove r -the-air ), r adio stations a r e geog r ap hically r estr icted on the r ange of r adio waves br oadcast fr om a t r ansmitte r th r ough the ai r , I nte r net r adio station s a r e accessible f r om anywhe r e in the wo r ld, as long as the r e is a connection to the Inte r net, as se r vices a r e not t r ansmitted th r ough the ai r but a r e delive r ed ove r the Wo r ld Wide Web. On this r eceive r you ca n select Inte r net r adio stations by genr e as well as by r egion. Important â¢B e f o r e listen ing to Inter net r adio, you nee d to pr og r am the Inte r net r adio stations you wish to listen to onto this unit. See Programming the Internet radio stations on p age 50 fo r how to pr og r am. Though the Inte r net r adio station s a r e pr ogr ammed in this r eceiver befor e it leaves the factor y, the link may have ex p ir ed. In that case, pr eset the st ations again you r self. 1P r e s s NET RADIO to switch to the Internet radio input. 4 The Inte r net Radio list sc r een is dis p layed. Note 1 Y ou can r eset the Channel pr esets and memo r y in Resetting the system on p age 66. 2 Y ou can r eset the Channel Ski p /Add, Pa r ental Lock and Passwo r d settings in Resetting the system on p age 66. 3 ⢠To listen to Inte r net r adio stations, you must h ave high-s p eed b roadband Inte r net access. With a 56 K o r ISDN modem, you may not enjoy the full benefits of Inte r net r adio. ⢠The p or t numbe r va r ies de p ending on the Inte r net r adio station. Check the fi r ewall settings. ⢠B r oadcasts may be sto pp ed o r inte rr u p ted de p ending on the Inte r net r adio station. In this case, you cannot listen to a r adio station selected f r om the list of Inte r net r adio stations. 4 T he Inte r net r adio function cannot be selected in the main zone when the iPod/USB func tion is select ed in the sub z one. Also , the Inte r net r adio function cannot be selected in the sub zone when the iPod/USB function is selected in the main zone. SC-1525_UXJC B.book 49 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼ å¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂç«æÂÂæÂÂ¥ ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Basic playback 05 50 En 2U s e ï©/ïª to select the Internet radio station to play back, and then pr ess ENTER . P r ess ï©/ïª to sc r oll u p and down the list and select the desi r ed item . When you pr ess ENTE R , p layback st a r ts with th e p layback sc r een being dis p layed fo r th e selected item. De p ending on the Inte r net line c onditions, the sound may not be smooth when p laying Inte r net r adio. To r etu r n to the list sc r een, pr ess RETURN . 1 Programming the Internet radio stations By pr og r amming the Inte r net r adio stations you wish to listen to onto this r eceiver , you will be able to select thos e Inte r net r adio stations. You can pr og r am u p to 24 stations. The r e a r e two methods of pr og r amming: o ne lets you use the GUI sc r een on thi s r eceiver ; the othe r lets you connect you r com p uter and use that sc r een. Program ming with the GU I screen 1 Press TOP MENU when the Internet Radio statio n list is displ ayed. The Inte r net Radio Setu p sc r een is dis p layed. 2U s e ï©/ïª to select the Internet Radio station list screen you wish to edit, and then press ENTER . 3U s e ï«/ï¬ to sele ct âÂÂEditâÂÂ. â¢I f y o u s e l e c t â Delete â , info r mation r egar ding the Inte r net r adio stations pr ogr ammed into the cu rr ently selected memo r y will be deleted. 4 Enter the URL of the Intern et radio station you wish to program. 2 Use ï©/ïª to selec t a lette r and ï«/ï¬ to move t he cu r sor . ⢠A URL containing u p to 192 lette r s c an be e nte r ed. 5 Enter the title of the Internet radio stat ion. Use ï©/ïª to selec t a lette r and ï«/ï¬ to move t he cu r sor . ⢠A title containin g u p to 22 lette r s can be ente r ed. Program ming on the co mputer screen You can ente r the Inte r net r adio list on the sc r een of a com p ute r that is connected to the same LAN as this r eceiver , and se nd the list to this unit. The com p uter needs to be connected in a dvance to the netwo r k of this r eceiv e r and set u p . 1 Turn on the computer and launch the Internet browser. 2 In the address bar on the browser, enter the IP address assigned to this receiver. Fo r exam p le, if the IP add r ess of this r eceive r is âÂÂ192.168.0.2âÂÂ, ente r âÂÂh tt p ://192.168.0.2/âÂÂ. When the connection is made with the r eceiver , a To p Menu will be dis p layed. â¢T h i s r eceiver âÂÂs IP addr ess can be found in the âÂÂIP add r ess, P r oxyâ menu ( p age 87). 3 Select âÂÂInternet Radio Setti ngâÂÂ. The followin g pr og r amming sc r een will be shown on the b r owse r. 4 Enter the title and URL of the Internet radio statio n you wish to program, t hen press âÂÂUpdateâÂÂ. The ente r ed info r mation will be t r ansmitted to the r eceiver . The connection to the URL designated f r om the com p ute r will be confi r med: If connection is successful, â Connection OK â will be dis p layed on sc r een, and the selected Inte r net r adio station will begi n p layin g via this r eceiver . If the connect ion failed, â Connection NG â wi ll be dis p layed. Check to see if the URL you ente r ed is co rr ect. Important â¢â Connection OK â and â Connectio n NG â a r e only dis p layed when this r eceive r is set to th e Inte r net r adio function. ⢠When ente r ing the title and URL of Inte r net r adio station, do not pr ess â Update â while you a r e connected to othe r stations (i.e., labelled as â Connectin g... âÂÂ). Note 1 When the list sc r een is dis p layed f r om the p layback sc r een, the p layback sc r ee n r ea pp ea r s automatically if no o p er ation is p er fo r med fo r 10 seconds while the list sc r een is dis p layed. 2 The URL can also be ente r ed by connecting a USB keyboar d (see Connecting a USB device on p age 35). Internet Radio Setting 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 Title URL Title URL Title URL Title URL Title URL Title URL Title URL Title URL Top Menu Connection OK T op Menu Pioneer Update Connection OK Update Connection OK Update Connection OK Update Connection OK Update Connection OK Update Connection OK Update Connection OK Update J-POP http://www.xxxxxxx.net:9500 Rock http://www.xxxxxxx.com:8096 Classic http://www.yyyyyyy .com:8800 ST A TION6 http://zzzzzzz.com:7040 ENKA http://www.zyxzyx.com:6000 SC-1525_UXJC B.book 50 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼ å¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂç«æÂÂæÂÂ¥ ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Basic playback 05 51 En Bluetooth ADAPTER for Wireless Enjoyment of Music Wireless music play When the Bluetooth ADAPTER (Pionee r Mode l No. AS- BT100) 1 is connected to this unit, a pr oduct equi pp ed with Bluetooth wi r eless technology ( p or table cell p ho ne, digital mu sic p layer , etc.) can be us ed to listen to music wi r elessly. Also, by using a comme r c ially available t r ansmitte r su ppo r ting Blu etooth wi r eless technology, you can listen to music on a dev ice not equi pp ed with Bluetooth wi r eless technology. The AS-BT100 model su pp o r ts SCMS-T contents pr otection, so music can also be enjoyed on devices equi pp ed with SC MS-T ty p e Bluetooth wi r eless technology. Remote control operation The r emote cont r ol su pp lied with this un it allows y ou to p lay and stop media, and p er for m other op e r ation s. 2 Pairing the Bluetooth ADAPTER and Bluetooth wireless technology device âÂÂPai r ingâ must be done befo r e you sta r t p la yback of Bluetooth wi r eless technology content using the Bluetooth ADAPTER. Make su r e to p er for m p air ing the fi r st time you o p er ate the system o r an y time p ai r ing data is clea r ed. The p air ing step is necessar y to r egister the Bluetooth wi r eless technology device to enable Bluetooth communica tions. 3 Fo r mo r e details, see also the o pe r ating inst r uctions of you r Bluetooth wi r eless technology device. 1 Press on t he remote control, then press HOME MENU . 2S e l e c t â System Setup âÂÂ, then press ENTER . 3S e l e c t â Other Setup âÂÂ, then press ENTER . 4S e l e c t â Pairing Bluetooth Device âÂÂ, then press ENTER . 5 Sele ct the â Passcode â setting you w ant. Select the same p asscode as the Bluetoot h wi r eless technology device you wish to conn ect. ⢠0000 /1234 /8888 â Select the p asscode fr om these o p tions. These a r e the p asscodes that can be used in most cases. ⢠Others â Select to use a p asscode othe r than those mentioned above. 6 If you selected Others in step 5, enter the passcode. Use ï©/ïª to select a numbe r and ï«/ï¬ to move the cu r so r . 7 Follow the instructions displayed on the GUI screen to conduct pairing with t he Bluetooth wireless technology device. Switch on the Bluetooth wi r eless technology device that you want to make p air , p lace it nea r th e r eceiver and set it to the p air ing mode. 8 Check to see that the Bluetooth ADAPTER is detected by the Bluetooth wireless technology device. When the Bluetoot h wireless technology device is connec ted: CONNECTED a pp ea r s in the r eceive r dis p lay. 4 When the Bluetoot h wireless technology device is not connec ted: Go back to the p asscode setting in ste p 5. In this case, p er for m the connection op er ation fr om the Bluetooth wi r eless technology device. Note 1T h e Bluetooth ADAPTER (AS-BT100) is sold se p ar ately. 2 ⢠It must be necessa r y that the Bluetoot h wi r eless technology enabled devic e su pp o r ts AVRCP pr ofiles. ⢠Remote cont r ol o p er ations cannot be gua r anteed fo r all Bluetoot h wi r eless technology enabled devices. This receiver Remote control operation Music data Bluetooth î ADAPTER Bluetooth wireless technology enabled device: cell phone Bluetooth wireless technology enabled device: Digital music player Device not equipped with Bluetooth wireless technology : Digital music player Bluetooth audio transmitter (sold commercially) 3⢠P a i r ing is r equir ed when you fir st use the Bluetooth wi r eless technology device and Bluetooth ADA PTER. ⢠To enable Bluetooth communication, p air ing should be done with both you r system and Bluetooth wi r ele ss technology device. 4 T he system can dis p lay al p hanumer ic cha r acter s only. Othe r cha r acter s may not be dis played co rr ectly. RECEIVER SC-1525_UXJC B.book 51 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼ å¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂç«æÂÂæÂÂ¥ ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Basic playback 05 52 En 9 From the Bluetooth wireless technology device list, select Bluetooth ADAPTER and enter the Passcode selected in step 5. 1 Listening to music contents of a Bluetooth wireless technology devi ce with your system 1 Press ADAPTER on the remote control to switch the receiver to ADAPTER PORT input. 2 2F r o m t h e Bluetooth wireless technology device, perform the operat ion to connect to the Bluetooth ADAPTER. 3 Start playback of m usic contents stored on the Bluetooth wireless technology device. This r eceive r âÂÂs r emote cont r ol bu ttons can be used fo r basic p layback of f iles sto r ed on Bluetooth wi r eless technology devices. 3 The Bluetooth î wo r d ma r k and logos a r e r egister ed t r adema r ks owned by Bluetooth SIG, Inc. and any use of such ma r ks by Pionee r Co rp o r ation is unde r license. Othe r t r adema r ks and t r ade names a r e those of thei r r esp ective owner s. Note 1T h e p assc ode may in some cases be r efe rr ed to as PASSKEY or PIN code. 2 When the Bluetooth ADAPTER is not p lugged into the ADAPTER PORT , NO ADAPTER will be dis p layed if ADAPTER PORT in p ut is selected. 3⢠Bluetooth wi r eless tec hnology devi ce should b e com p atible wi th AVRCP pr ofile. ⢠De p ending on the Bluetooth wi r eles s technology device you use, o p er ation may diffe r f r om what is shown in the r emote cont r ol buttons. HDMI OUT TV / DTV MPX PQLS PHASE CTRL ST ATUS THX STEREO DIRECT ST ANDARD ADV SURR AUDIO HDD DVD 2 13 SC-1525_UXJC B.book 52 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼ å¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂç«æÂÂæÂÂ¥ ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Listening to your system 06 53 En Chapter 6: Listening to your system Important ⢠The listening modes and many featu r es desc r ib ed in this section may not be available de p ending on the cu rr ent sou r ce, settings a nd status of the r eceive r . Auto playback The r e a r e many wa ys to listen back to so u r ces using this r eceiver , but the simp lest, most dir ect listening op tion is the Auto Su rr ound featu r e. The r eceiver automatically detects what kind of sou r ce youâ r e p laying an d selects multichannel o r ste r eo p laybac k as necessa r y. 1 Press on t he remote control. 2 While listening to a source, press AUTO/ALC/ DIRECT ( AUTO SURR / ALC / STREAM DI RECT ) for auto playback of a source. AUTO SURROUND shows b r iefly in th e dis p lay befo r e showing the decoding o r p layback fo r mat. Check the digital f o rmat ind icato r s in the f r ont p anel dis p lay to see how the sou r ce is being pr ocessed. â¢I f t h e s o u r ce is Dolby Digital, DTS, or Dolby Su rr ound encoded, the pr o pe r decoding fo r mat will automatically be selected and shows in the dis p lay. ⢠When listening to the FM r adio, the Neu r al Su rr ound featu r e is selected automatically (see Using Neural Surround on p age 46 fo r mo r e on this). ⢠When li stening to the ADAPTER PORT in p ut , the SOUND RETRIEVER AIR featu r e is selected automatically (see Liste ning in st ereo on p age 5 5 fo r mo r e on this). ⢠When listening to XM Radio, the XM HD S u rr ound featu r e is selected automatically (see Using XM HD Surround on p age 47 fo r mo r e on this). ALC â In the Auto le vel cont r ol ( ALC ) mode, this r eceiver equalizes p layback sound levels. Tip â¢W h e n ALC is selected, the effect level can be adjusted using the EFFECT pa r amete r in Setting the Audio options on p age 60. Listening in surround sound Using th is r eceiver , you can listen to a ny sou r ce in su rr ound sound. Howeve r , the o p tions available will de p end on you r s p eake r setu p and the ty p e of sou r ce youâ r e listening to. Standard surround sound The following modes pr ovide basic su rr ound sound f o r ste r eo and m ultichannel sou r ces. 1 Press on t he remote control. 2 While listening to a source, press STANDARD ( STANDARD SURROUND ). If necessa r y, pr ess r ep eatedly to select a listening mode. â¢I f t h e s o u r ce is Dolby Digital, DTS, or Dolby Su rr ound encoded, the pr o pe r decoding fo r mat will automatically be selected and shows in the dis p lay. 1 With two channel sources , you can select f r om: ⢠2 Pro Logic IIx MOVIE â U p to 7.1 channel sound (su rr ound back) , es p ecia lly suited to mo vie sou r ces ⢠2 Pro Logic IIx MUSIC â U p to 7.1 channel sound (su rr ound back) , es p ecia lly suited to music sou r ces 2 ⢠2 Pro Logic IIx GAME â U p to 7.1 channel sound (su rr ound back), es p ecially suited to video games ⢠2 PRO LOGIC â 4.1 channel su rr ou nd sound (sound f r om the su rr ound s p eake r s is mono) ⢠2 Pro Logic IIz HEIGHT â U p to 7.1 channel sound (f r ont height) 3 ⢠WIDE SURROUND MOVIE â U p to 7.1 channel sound (f r ont wide), e s p ecially suited to m ovie sou r ces 4 ⢠WIDE SURROUND MUSIC â U p to 7.1 channel sound (f r ont wide), es p ecially suited to music sou r ces 4 ⢠Neo:6 CINEMA â 7.1 c hannel sound (su rr ound back), es p ecially suited to movie sou r ces 5 ⢠Neo:6 MUSIC â 7.1 chan nel sound (su rr ound back), es p ecially su ited to music s ou r ces 5 RECEIVER Note 1I f t h e s u rr ound back s p eaker s ar e not connect ed or V.SB is switched OFF (p age 61), 2 Pro Logic IIx becomes 2 Pro Logic II (5.1 channel sound). 2 When listening to 2-channel sou r ces in Dolby P r o Logic IIx Music mode, the r e a r e th r ee fu r ther p a r ameter s you can adjust: C.WIDTH , DIMENSION and PANORAMA . See Sett ing the Audio options on p age 60 to adjust them. 3⢠This mode can only be selected when Speaker System is set to Normal(SB/FH) . ⢠When liste ning sou r ces in 2 Pro Logic IIz HEIGHT mode, you can also adjust the H.GAIN effect (see Setting the Audio options on p age 60). 4 This mode can only be selected when Speaker System is set to Norm al(SB/FW) . 5 When listening to 2-channel sou r ces in Neo:6 Cinema o r Neo:6 Music m ode, you ca n also adju st the cen te r image effect (see Setting the Audio options on p age 60). RECEIVER SC-1525_UXJC B.book 53 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼ å¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂç«æÂÂæÂÂ¥ ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Listening to y our system 06 54 En ⢠Neural Surround â U p to 7.1 channel sound (su rr ound back), es p ecially suited to music sou r ces 1 ⢠XM HD Surround â U p to 7.1 channel sound, es p ecially suited to music sou r ces 2 With multichannel sources, if you have connected surround back, front height or front wide speakers , yo u can select (acco r ding to fo r mat): ⢠2 Pro Logic IIx MOVI E â See above ⢠2 Pro Logic IIx MUSIC â See above ⢠Dolby Di gital EX â C r eates su rr ound back channel sound fo r 5.1 channe l sou r ces and pr ovides p ur e decoding fo r 6.1 ch annel sour ces (like Dolby Digital Su rr ound EX) ⢠DTS-ES â Allows you to hea r 6.1 channel p layba ck with DTS- ES encode d sou r ces ⢠DTS Neo :6 â Allows you to hea r 6.1 channel p laybac k with DTS e ncoded s ou r ces ⢠2 Pro Logic IIz HEIGHT â See above 3 ⢠WIDE SU RROUND MOVI E â See above 4 ⢠WIDE SU RROUND MUSIC â See above 4 â¢S t r aight Decode â Pla ys back withou t the effects above. Using the Home THX modes THX and Home THX a r e technical standa r ds c r eated by THX Ltd. fo r cinema and home thea te r sound. Home THX is designed to make home theate r audio sound mor e like what you hea r in a cinema. Diffe r ent THX o p tions will be availab le de p ending on the sou r ce and the setting fo r su rr ound back channel pr ocessing (see THX Audio Setting on p age 87 fo r mo r e on this). 1 Press on the remote control. ⢠Press THX ( HOME THX ) to select a listeni ng mode. With two channel sources , pr ess THX re p eatedly to select a mat r ix-decoding pr ocess fo r th e THX CINEMA mode (see THX Audio Setting on p age 87 fo r an ex p lanation o f each pr ocess): ⢠THX CINEMA ⢠THX MUSIC ⢠THX GAMES ⢠2 Pro Logi c IIx MOVI E THX CIN EMA ⢠2 PRO LOGIC THX CINEMA ⢠Neo:6 CINEMA THX CI NEMA ⢠2 Pro Logi c IIx M USIC TH X MUSIC ⢠Neo:6 MUSIC THX MUSIC ⢠2 Pro Logic IIx GAME THX GAMES ⢠2 Pro Logic IIz HEIGHT THX CINEMA 3 ⢠2 Pro Logic IIz HEIGHT THX MUSIC 3 ⢠2 Pro Logic IIz HEIGHT THX GAMES 3 ⢠THX SELECT2 GAMES 5 With multichannel sources , pr ess THX ( HOME THX ) r ep eatedly to select fr om: ⢠THX CINEMA ⢠THX MUSIC ⢠THX GAMES ⢠THX Surround EX â Allows you to hea r 6.1 o r 7.1 channel p layback with 5.1 channel sou r ces ⢠Neo:6 CINEMA THX CI NEMA ⢠2 Pro Logi c IIx M OVIE THX CINEMA ⢠THX SELECT2 CINEMA 5 â Allows you to hea r 7.1 channel p layback with 5.1 channel sou r ces ⢠2 Pro Logi c IIx M USIC TH X MUSIC ⢠2 Pro Logic IIz HEIGHT THX CINEMA 3 ⢠2 Pro Logic IIz HEIGHT THX MUSIC 3 ⢠2 Pro Logic IIz HEIGHT THX GAMES 3 ⢠THX SELECT2 MUSIC 5 â This mod e is suited not on ly fo r sou r ces r ecor ded in Dolby Digital and DTS, but also to all multi-channel mu sic sou r ces (DVD-Audio, etc.). ⢠THX SELECT2 GAMES 5 â This mod e is suited to p laying the sound of games. Using the Advanced surround effects The Advanced su rr oun d effects can be us ed fo r a va r iety of additional su rr ound sound eff ects. Most A dvanced Su rr ound modes a r e designed to be used with film soundt r acks, but some modes a r e also suited fo r music sou r ces. T r y diffe r ent settings with va r ious soundt r acks to see which you like. 1 Press on the remote control. 2 Press ADV SURR ( ADVANCED SURROUND ) repeatedly to select a listeni ng mode. ⢠ACTION â Designed fo r action movies with dynamic soundt r acks ⢠DRAMA â Designed fo r movies with lots of dia log Note 1 Neural Surround can be selected fo r 2-channel signals fo r which the in p ut signal is PCM (48 kHz o r less), Dolby Digital, DTS o r analog 2- channel sou r ces. 2 XM HD Surround can be selected only with the XM in p ut. 3⢠This mode can only be selected when Speaker System is set to Normal(SB/ FH) . ⢠When listening sou r ces in 2 Pro Logic IIz HEIGHT mode, you can also adjust the H.GAIN effect (see Setting the Audio options on p age 60). 4 This mode can only be selected when Speaker System is set to Normal(SB/FW) . RECEIVER 5 Unavailable with only one su rr ound back s p eaker connected o r not connected. RECEIVER SC-1525_UXJC B.book 54 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼ å¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂç«æÂÂæÂÂ¥ ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Listening to your system 06 55 En ⢠SCI-FI â Designed fo r science fiction with lots of s p ecial effects ⢠MONO FILM â C r eates su rr ound sound f r om mon o soundt r acks ⢠ENT.SHOW â Suitable fo r musical sou r ces ⢠EXPANDED â C r eates an ext r a wide ste r eo field ⢠TV SURROUND â P r ovides su rr ound sound fo r both mono and ste r eo TV sou r ces ⢠ADVANCED GAME â Suitable fo r video games ⢠SPORTS â Suitable fo r s po r ts pr og r ams ⢠CLASSICAL â Gives a la r ge conce r t h all-ty p e sound ⢠ROCK/POP â C r eates a live conce r t sound fo r r ock and/o r p op music ⢠UNPLUGGED â Suitable fo r acoustic music sou r ces ⢠EXT. STEREO â Gives m ultichannel sound to a ste r eo sou r ce, using a ll of you r s p eake r s ⢠PHONES SURR â When listening th r ough head p hones, you can still get th e effect of ove r all su rr ound. Tip ⢠When an Advanced Su rr ound listening mode is selected, the effect level c an be adjusted using the EFFECT pa r amete r in Setting the Audio options on p age 60. Listening in stereo When you select STEREO , you will hea r th e sou r ce th r ough just the f r ont left and r ight s p ea ke r s (and p ossibly your subwoofer dep ending on your sp eaker settings). Multichannel sou r ces a r e downmixed to ste r eo. 1 Press on t he remote control. 2 While listening to a source, press STEREO for stereo playback. P r ess re p eatedly to switch between: ⢠STEREO â The audio is hea r d with you r sound settings and you can still use the audio o p tions. ⢠F.S.SURR FOCUS â See Using Front Stage Surround Advance below fo r mor e on this. ⢠F.S.SURR WIDE â See Using Front Stage Surround Advance below fo r mor e on this. ⢠SOUND RETRIEVER AIR 1 â Suitable fo r listening to the sound f r om a Bluetooth wi r eless technology device. Using Front Stage Surround Advance The F r ont Stage Su rr ound Advance function allows you to c r eate natu r al su rr ound sound effects using just the f r on t s p eake r s and the subwoofe r. 1 Press on t he remote control. 2 While listening to a source, press STEREO to select Front Stage Surround Advance modes. ⢠STEREO â See Listening in stereo above fo r mo r e on this. ⢠F.S.SURR FOCU S â Use to pr ovide a r ich su rr ound sound effect di r ecte d to the ce nte r of whe r e the f r ont left and r ight s p eaker s sound pr ojectio n a r ea conve r ges. ⢠F.S.SURR WIDE â Use t o pr ovide a su rr ound sound effect to a wide r ar ea than FOCUS mode. Using Stream Direct Use the St r eam Di r ect modes when you want to hea r the t r uest p ossible r e pr oduction of a sour ce. All unnecessar y signal pr ocessing is by p assed, and youâ r e lef t with the p ur e analog o r digital sound sou r ce. P r ocessing diffe r s de p ending on the in p ut signal and whethe r o r not su rr ound back s p eake r s a r e connect ed. Fo r details, see Auto Surround, ALC and Stream Direct with different input signal formats on p age 106. 1 Press on t he remote control. 2 While listening to a source, press AUTO/ALC/ DIRECT ( AUTO SURR / ALC / STREAM DIRECT ) to select the mode you want. Check the digital fo r mat indicato r s in the f r ont p an el dis p lay to see how the sou r ce is bein g pr ocessed. ⢠AUTO SURROUND â See Auto playback on p age 53. ⢠ALC â Listening in Auto level cont r ol mo de ( p age 53). ⢠DIRECT â Plays back sound f r om the sou r ce with the least modification next to PURE DIRECT . With DIRECT , the only modifications added to PURE DIRECT p layback ar e calib r ation of the so und field by the MCACC system and the Phase Co nt r ol effect. Note 1T h e SOUND RETRIEVER AIR listening mode can only selected when the ADAPTER PORT in p ut. RECEIVER RECEIVER FOCUS p osition (Recommended) WIDE p osition F r ont left s p eake r F r ont r ight s p eake r F r ont left s p eake r F r ont r ight s p eake r RECEIVER SC-1525_UXJC B.book 55 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼ å¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂç«æÂÂæÂÂ¥ ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Listening to y our system 06 56 En ⢠PURE DIRECT â Plays back unmodified sound f r om sou r ce with only minimal digital t r eatment. No sound is out p ut f r om the S p eaker B in this mode. Selecting MCACC presets â¢D e f a u l t s e t t i n g : MEMORY 1 If you have calib r ated you r system fo r diffe r ent listening p ositions, you can switch between settings to suit the kind of sou r ce youâ r e listening to and wh e r e youâ r e sitting (fo r exam p le, watching movies f r o m a sofa , o r p laying a video game close to the TV). 1 Press on the remote control. 2 While listening to a source, press MCACC . P r ess r ep eatedly to select one of the six MCACC pr esets 1 . See Data Management on p age 82 to check a nd manage you r cu rr ent settings. Choosing t he input signal On this r eceiver , it is p ossible to switch the in p ut signals fo r the differ ent in p uts as desc r ibed below. 2 1 Press on the remote control. 2 Press SIGNAL SEL to select the input signal corresponding to t he source component. Each pr ess cycles th r ough the o p ti ons as fol lows: ⢠AUTO â The r eceive r selects th e fi r st availa ble signal in the following o r der : HDMI; DIGITAL ; ANALOG . ⢠ANALOG â Selects an analog signal. ⢠DIGI TAL â Selects an o p tical or coaxial digital signal. ⢠HDMI â Sel ects an HDMI signal. 3 ⢠PCM â Fo r PCM in p ut signals. 4 The r eceiver selects the fi r st available signal in the following o r der : HDMI ; DIGITAL . When set to DIGITAL , HDMI o r AUTO (only selected DIGITAL o r HDMI ), the indicato r s light accor ding to the signal being decoded (see Displ ay on p age 12). Better sound using Phase Control This r eceive r âÂÂs Phase Cont r ol featu r e uses p hase co rr ection measu r es to make su r e yo u r sound sou r ce a rr ives at the listening p osition in p hase, pr eventing unwanted disto r tion and/o r colo r ing of the sound. Phase Cont r ol techn ology pr ovides cohe r ent sound r e pr oduction thr ough the use of p hase matching 5 fo r an o p timal sound image. The default setting is on and we r ecommend leav ing Phase Con tr ol switched on for all sound sou r ces. 1 Press on the remote control. ⢠Press PHASE CTRL ( PHASE CONTROL ) to swit ch on phase correction. The PHASE CONTROL indicato r on the f r ont p anel lights. Note 1 ⢠These settings have no effect when head p hones a r e connected. ⢠You can also pr ess ï«/ ï¬ to select the MCACC pr eset. 2 ⢠This r eceiver can only p lay back Dolby Digital, PCM (32 kHz to 192 kHz), DTS (including DTS 96/24) and WMA9 P r o digital s ignal fo r mats. The com p atible signals via the HDMI te r minals a r e: Dolby Digital, DTS, WMA9 P ro, PCM (32 kHz to 192 kHz), Dolby T r ueHD, Dolby Digital Plus, DTS-EXPRESS, DTS-HD Maste r Audio and SACD. ⢠You may get digital noise when an LD, CD, DVD o r BD p layer com p atible with DTS is p laying an analog signal. To pr event noise, make the pr o pe r digital connections ( p age 29) and set the signal in p ut to DIGITAL. ⢠Some DVD p layer s donâÂÂt out p ut DTS signals. Fo r mo r e details, r efe r to the inst r uction manual su pp lied with you r DVD p layer . 3 When the HDMI audio out p ut p ar ameter is set to THROUGH , the sound will be hea r d t h r ough you r TV, not f r om this r eceiver . RECEIVER RECEIVER 4 ⢠This is useful if you find the r e is a slight delay befo r e AUTO r ecognizes the PCM signal on a CD, fo r instance. ⢠When PCM is selected, noise may be out p ut dur ing p layback of non-PCM sou r ces. Please select anothe r in p ut signal if this is a pr oblem. 5 ⢠Phase matching is a ve r y imp or tant facto r in achieving pr o pe r sound repr oduction. If two wavefo r ms a r e âÂÂin p haseâÂÂ, t hey c r est and t r ough togethe r , r esulting in inc r eased am p litude, cla r ity and pr esence of the sound signal. If a c r est of a wave meets a t r ough, then the sound will be âÂÂout of p haseâ and an un r eliable sound image will be pr oduced. ⢠The PHASE CONTROL featu r e is available even when the head p hones a r e p lugged in. ⢠If you r subwoofe r has a p hase co ntr ol switch, set it to the plus ( ) s ign (o r 0ð). Howeve r , t he effect you can actually feel when PHASE CONTROL is set to ON on this r ece ive r de p ends on the ty p e of you r subwoofe r . Set you r subwoofe r to maximize the effect. It is also r ecommended you tr y changing the or ientation or the p lace of your subwoofer . ⢠Set the built-in low p ass filte r switch of you r subwoofe r to off. If this can not be do ne on you r subwoofe r , set the cutoff f r equency to a highe r value. ⢠If the s p eaker distance is not pr o pe r ly set, you may not have a maximiz ed PHASE CONTROL effect. ⢠The PHASE CONTROL mode cannot be set to ON in the following cases: â When the PURE DIRECT mode is switched on. â When MULTI CH IN in p ut is selected. â When the HDMI audio out p ut p ar ameter is set t o THROUGH in Setting the Audio options on p age 60. RECEIVER SC-1525_UXJC B.book 56 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼ å¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂç«æÂÂæÂÂ¥ ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Control with HDMI function 07 57 En Chapter 7: Control with HDMI function Synch r onized o p er at ions belo w with a Contr ol with HDMI-com p atible Pion ee r TV o r Blu- r ay disc p laye r o r with a com p onent of anothe r make that su pp o r ts the Control with HDMI functions a r e p ossible when the com p onent is connected to the r eceive r using an HDMI cable. â¢T h e r eceiver âÂÂs volume can be set a nd the sound can be muted using the TVâÂÂs r emote cont r ol. â¢T h e r eceiver âÂÂs inp ut switches over a utomatica lly when the TVâÂÂs channel is chan ged o r a Contr ol with HDMI-com p atible co m p onent is p layed. â¢T h e r eceiver âÂÂs p ower is also set to standby, when the TVâÂÂs p owe r is set to standby. Important â¢W i t h P i o n e e r devices, the Control with HDMI functions a r e r efe rr ed to as â KURO LINKâÂÂ. ⢠You cannot use th is function with com p onents that do not su pp o r t Control with HDMI. ⢠We do not gua r antee this r eceiver will wo r k with Pionee r Control with HDMI-com p atible c om p onents o r com p onents of othe r m akes that su ppo r t the Control with HDMI function. We do not gua r antee that all synch r onized o p er ations will wo r k with com p onents of othe r m akes that su pp o r t th e Control with HDMI function. â¢U s e a H i g h S p eed HDMI î cable when you want to use the Control with HDMI function. The Contro l with HDMI function may not wo r k pr op er ly if a diffe r ent ty p e of HDMI cable is used. â¢F o r de tails abou t concr ete op er ations, settings, etc., r efer to also the op er ating instr uction s fo r each com p onent. Making Control with HDMI connections You can use synch r onized o p er atio n fo r a connected TV and u p to five othe r com p onents. â¢B e s u r e to connect the TVâÂÂs audio cable to the audio in p ut of this unit. When the TV and r eceive r a r e connected by HDMI co nnections, if the TV su pp o r ts the HDMI Audio Retu r n Channel functio n, the sound of the TV i s in p ut to the r eceiver via the HDMI OUT 1 te r minal, so the r e is no need to connect a n audio cable. In this case, set TV Audio at HDMI Setup to via HDMI (see HDMI Setup on p age 57). Fo r details, see Connecting your TV and playback components on p age 24. Important ⢠When connecting this sy stem o r changing connections, be su r e to switch the p ower off and disconnect the p ower co r d f r om the wall socket. Afte r com p leting all connections, connect th e p owe r co r ds to the wall socket. â¢A f t e r this r ece ive r is co nnected to an A C outlet, a 2 second to 10 se cond HDMI i nitializatio n pr ocess begins. You canno t ca rr y out any o p er ations du r ing initialization. The HDMI ind icato r on the dis p lay unit blinks du r ing initialization, and you can tu r n thi s r eceiver on once it has sto pp ed blinking. ⢠To get the mo st out of this function, we r ecommend that you connect you r HDMI com p onent not to a TV bu t r ather dir ectly to the HDMI ter minal on this r eceiver . â¢W h i l e t h e r eceiver is equi pp ed with six HDMI in p uts (BD, HDMI 1 to 5), the Co ntrol with HDMI function can only be used with u p to th r ee DVD o r Blu- r ay disc p layer s or up to thr ee DVD or Blu-r ay disc r ecor der s. â¢T h e Control with HDMI function ca n be used with a TV connected to the HDMI OUT 1 te r minal, but not with a TV connected to the HDMI O UT 2 te r minal. HDMI Setup You must adju st the settin gs of this r eceiver a s w e l l a s t h e connected Control with HDMI-com p atible c om p onents in o r der t o m a k e u se o f th e Control with HDMI function. Fo r mo r e info r mation see the o p er ating inst r uctions fo r each com p onent. 1 Press on t he remote control, then press HOME MENU . 2S e l e c t â System Setup âÂÂ, then press ENTER . 3S e l e c t â Other Setup âÂÂ, then press ENTER . 4S e l e c t â HDMI Setup âÂÂ, then press ENTER . 5 Sele ct the â Control â setting you want. Choose whethe r to set this unitâÂÂs Control with HDMI function ON o r OFF . Y ou will n eed to set i t to ON to use the Contr ol with HDMI function. When using a com p onent tha t does not su pp o r t the Control with HDMI function, set this to OFF . ⢠ON â Enables the Control with HDMI function. When this unitâÂÂs p ower is tu r ned off and you h ave a su pp o r ted sou r ce begin p layback while using the Control with HDMI function, the audio and video out p uts f r om th e HDMI connection ar e out p ut f r om the TV. RECEIVER SC-1525_UXJC B.book 57 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼ å¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂç«æÂÂæÂÂ¥ ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Control with HDMI function 07 58 En ⢠OFF â The Contr ol with HDMI is disabled. Synch r onized o p er ations cannot be used. When th is unitâÂÂs p ower is tur ned off, audio and video of sour ces connected via HDMI a r e not ou t p ut. 6 Select the â Control Mod e â setting you want. Choose whethe r you want to enable HDM I fo r all lin ked functions o r the PQLS func tion only. Howeve r , Dis p lay Powe r Off will activate the settings set fo r th in ste p 7 below. ⢠ALL â Enabled fo r all linked functio ns. ⢠PQLS â Enabled only fo r the PQLS function. When PQLS is selected, link fu nctions othe r than the PQLS function may not wo r k pr o pe r ly. If you wish to use a ll link func tions, select ALL . 7 Select the â Display Power Off â setting you want. If the TVâÂÂs p ower is t u r ned off while us ing the Control with HDMI function, the r eceiver âÂÂs p ower is also tu r ned off (all p ower off function). This fu nction can be disabled. ⢠YES â The all p ower off func tion is enabled. The r eceiver âÂÂs p ower tur ns off togeth er with the TVâÂÂs p owe r . This function only wo r ks wh en the in p ut fo r a com p onent con nected to the r eceive r by HDMI connection is selected o r when watchi ng the TV. ⢠NO â The al l p ower off fu nction is disabled. The r eceiver âÂÂs p ower is no t a ff ec te d wh en th e T V âÂÂs p ower is tu r ned off. 8 Select the â Standby Through â setting you want. It is p ossible to t r ansfer signals f r om an HDMI-con nected p layer to the TV when this r eceiver 's p ower is o n s ta nd by as long as Control is ON , but the amount of en e r gy consumed r ises. It is, howeve r , p ossible to minimize ene r gy consum p ti on when powe r is set to standby. ⢠Normal â Regu la r setting. Powe r -up time f r om standby is sho r t. ⢠Eco â Conse r ves ene r gy while standby. Powe r -u p time is longe r than when set to Normal . 9 Select the âÂÂTV Audioâ setting you want. When a TV su pp o r ting the HDMI Audio Retu r n Channel function is connected to the r eceiver , the sound of the TV can be in p ut via the HDM I te r minal. ⢠Normal â The TVâÂÂs so und is in p ut f r om the Audio in p ut te r minals ot he r than HDMI in p uts. ⢠via HDMI â The TVâÂÂs sound is in p ut via th e HDMI te r minal. This can only be selected when Control is set to ON . 10 Select the âÂÂ12V Triggerâ setting you want. The com p onent connec ted to the 12V TRIGGER jack can be tu r ned on and off when HDMI OUT is switched. HDMI OUT 1 , HD MI OUT 2 o r OF F can be selected. Sele ct OFF when you want the com p onent to switch when the in p ut function is switched. 11 When youâÂÂre finished, pre ss HOME MENU . Before using synchronization Once you have finished all conn ections and settings, you must: 1 Put all components int o standby mode. 2 Turn the power on for all componen ts, with the power for the TV being turned on last. 3 Choose the HDMI input to which the TV is connected to this receiver, and see if video output from connected components displays properly on the screen or not. 4 Check wh ether the comp onents connected to all HDMI inputs are properly displayed. About synchronized operations The Control with HDMI-com p at ible com p onent connected to the r eceiver op er ates in sync as desc r ibed below. â¢F r o m the menu scr een of the Control with HDMI- com p atible TV, set a udio to be p layed th r ough this r eceiver , and the r eceiver will switch to the synch r onized a m p mode. ⢠When in the synch r onized am p mode, you can adjust the r eceive r âÂÂs volume o r mute th e sound using the TVâÂÂs r emote cont r ol. ⢠When in the synch r onized am p mode, the synch r onized a m p mode is canceled when the r eceiver âÂÂs p ower is tur ned off. To tur n the synch r onized a m p mode back on, set au dio to be p layed thr ough the r eceiver fr om the TVâÂÂs me nu sc r een, etc. This r eceive r wi ll p owe r up and switch to the synch r onized am p mode. ⢠When the synch ronized am p mode is canceled, the r eceiver âÂÂs p ower tur ns off if you we r e viewing an HDMI in p ut o r a TV pr og r am on the TV. ⢠When in the synch r onized am p mode, the synch r onized a m p mode is canceled if an o p er atio n that pr oduces sound f r om the TV is p er fo r med f r om the TVâÂÂs menu sc r een, etc. ⢠When the TVâÂÂs p ower is set to standby, the r eceiver âÂÂs p ower is also set to standby. (Only when the inp ut for a com p onent connected to the r eceiver by HDMI connection is selected o r when watching the TV.) â¢T h e r eceiver âÂÂs inp ut swi tches automatically when the Control with HDMI-com p atible comp onent is p layed. â¢T h e r eceiver âÂÂs inp ut switches automatically when the TVâÂÂs channel is switched. â¢T h e s y n c h r onized amp mode r emains in effect even if the r eceiver âÂÂs inp ut is switched to a comp one nt othe r than one connected by HDMI. SC-1525_UXJC B.book 58 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼ å¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂç«æÂÂæÂÂ¥ ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Control with HDMI function 07 59 En The o p er ations below ca n also be used on Pionee r Control with HDMI-com p atib le TVs. â¢W h e n t h e r eceiver âÂÂs volume is adjusted o r the sound is muted, the volume status is dis p la yed on the TVâÂÂs sc r een. ⢠When the OSD language is switched on the TV, th e r eceiver âÂÂs language setting also switches acco r dingly. About connections with a product of a different brand that supports the Control with HDMI function The synch r onized o p er ations below can be used when the r eceive r âÂÂs Control with HDMI function is co nnected to a TV of a b r and othe r than Pionee r that su pp o r ts t he Control with HDMI func tion. (De p en ding on the TV, howeve r , some of the Control with H DMI functi ons may not wo r k.) â¢W h e n t h e T V â s p ower i s set to s tandby, th e r eceiver âÂÂs p ower is also set to standby. (Only when the inp ut for a com p onent connected to the r eceiver by HDMI connection is sel ected o r when watching the TV) â¢T h e s o u n d o f T V pr og r ams o r an exte r nal in p ut connected to the TV can also b e out p ut f r om the s p eake r s connected to the r eceive r . (If the TV does not su pp o r t the HDM I Audio Retu r n Channel function, this r equir es connection of an o p ti cal digital c able, etc., in addition to the HDMI cable.) The synch r onized o p er ations below can be used when the r eceive r âÂÂs Control with HDMI function is co nnected to a p layer o r r ecor der of a b r and othe r than Pionee r that su pp o r ts the Control with HDMI fu nction. â¢W h e n p layba ck star ts on the p layer or r ecor der , the r eceiver âÂÂs inp ut switches to the HDMI inp ut to which that com p onent is connected. See the Pionee r website fo r the lat est info r ma tion on the models of non-Pionee r b r ands and pr oducts that su pp o r t the Control with HDMI func tion. Setting the PQLS function PQLS (P r ecision Quar t z Lock System ) is a digi tal audio signal t r ansfer cont r ol technology using the Control with HDMI function. It of fe r s highe r -quality audi o p layback by cont r olling audio signals f r om the r eceiver to a PQLS com p atible p laye r , etc. This enables r emoving jitte r that has a negative effect on the quality of th e sound and is gene r ated u p on tr ansmission. â¢O n p layer s comp atible w ith PQLS M ulti Su rr ound, PQLS wo r ks fo r all sou r ces. S et the p layer âÂÂs audio out p ut to Linea r PCM. â¢O n p layer s comp atible w ith PQLS 2 ch Au dio, PQLS only wo rks when p layin g CDs. Please r efe r to the o p er ating inst r uc tions su pp lied with you r p la ye r fo r mo r e info r mation. This f unction is activated when Control is set to ON . 1 ⢠Press o n the remote control, then press PQLS to select the PQLS setting. The settin g is dis p layed on the f r ont p anel dis p lay. ⢠PQLS AUTO â PQLS is enabled. A pr ecision qua r tz cont r olle r in this r eceive r eliminates disto r tion caused by timin g e rr o r s (jit te r ), giving you the best p ossible digital- to-analog conve r sion when you use the HDMI inte r face. Thi s is valid as an HDM I function fo r PQLS-com p atible p laye r s. ⢠PQLS OFF â PQLS is disabled. Cautions on the Control with HDMI function ⢠Connect the TV di r ectly to this r eceiver. Inte rr u p ting a di r ect connection with othe r am p s o r an AV conve r te r (such as a n HDMI switch) can cau se o p er ational e rro r s. ⢠Only connect com p onents (Blu- r ay di sc p layer , etc. ) you intend to use as a so u r ce to the HDMI in p ut of this r eceive r . Inte rr u p ting a di r ect connection with othe r am p s o r an AV conv e r te r (such as an HDMI switch) can cause o p er at ional e rr o r s. â¢W h e n Control is set to ON , HDMI In p ut in The Input Setup menu on p age 40 is automatically set to OFF . â¢W h e n t h e r eceiver âÂÂs Control is tu r ned ON , e ven if the r eceiver âÂÂs p ower is i n the standby mode, it is p ossible to out p ut the audio and video signals f r om a p laye r via HDMI to the TV without pr oducing sound f r om the r eceiver , but only when a Control with HDMI- com p atible com p onent (Blu-r ay disc p laye r , etc.) and com p atible TV a r e connected. In this case, the r eceiver âÂÂs p ower tur ns on and the p ower and HDMI indicato r s light. Note 1 ⢠I f a l i s t e n in g m o d e o t h e r than AUTO SURROUND , ALC, DIRECT , PU RE DIRECT o r STEREO is selected while the PQLS effect is enab led, the PQLS effect is disabled. ⢠When this r eceiver is conn ected by HDMI cable to a Pionee r p layer that is com p atible with the PQLS function via HDMI connection and HDMI r eauthentication is p er fo r med (the HDMI indicato r blinks), the PQLS effe ct is enabled and the lis tening m ode is set to AUTO SURROUND if a listening mode othe r than AUTO SURROUND , ALC , DIRECT , PURE DI RECT o r STEREO is selected. RECEIVER SC-1525_UXJC B.book 59 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼ å¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂç«æÂÂæÂÂ¥ ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Using other functions 08 60 En Chapter 8: Using other functions Setting the Audi o options The r e a r e a numbe r of additional so und settings you can make using the AUDIO PARAMETER menu. The defaults, if not stated, a r e listed in bold. Important ⢠Note that if a setting d oesnâÂÂt a pp ea r in the AUDIO PARAMETER menu, it is unavailable due to the cu rr ent sou r ce, settings and status of the r e ceive r . 1 Press on the remote cont rol, then press AUDIO PARAMETER . 2U s e ï©/ïª to select the setting you want to adjust. De p ending on the cu rr ent status/mode of the r eceive r , ce r tain o p tions may not be able to be selected. Ch eck the table below fo r note s on this. 3U s e ï«/ï¬ to set as nece ssary. See the table below fo r the o p tions av ailable fo r each setting. 4 Press RETURN to con firm an d exit th e menu. Setting What it does Option(s) MCACC (MCACC pr eset) Selects you r favo r ite MCACC pr eset mem o r y when multip le pr eset me mo r ies ar e saved. When an MCACC pr eset memo r y has been r enamed , the gi ven na me is dis p layed. M1. MEMORY 1 to M6. MEMORY 6 Default: M1. MEMORY 1 EQ (Acoustic Calib r ation EQ) Switches on/off th e effects of EQ P r o. ON OFF S-WAVE (Standing Wave) Switches on/off the effects of Standing Wave Cont r ol. ON OFF DELAY (Sound Delay) Some monito r s h ave a slight delay when showing video, so the soundt r ack will be slightly out of sync with the p ictur e. By adding a bit of delay, you can adjust the sound to match t he pr esentati on of the video. 0.0 to 10.0 (f r ames) 1 second = 30 frames (NTSC) Default: 0.0 MIDNIGHT Allows you to hea r effective su rr ound sound of movies at low volumes. MIDNIGHT/ LOUDNESS OFF MIDNIGHT ON LOUDNESS Used to get good b ass and t r eble f r om music sou r ces at low volumes. LOUDNESS ON RECEIVER TONE (Tone Cont r ol) A pp lies the t r eble and ba ss tone cont r ols to a sou r ce, o r by p asses them com p letely. BYPASS ON BASS a Adjusts the amou nt of bass. âÂÂ6 to 6 (dB) Default: 0 (dB) TREBLE a Adjusts the amount of t r eble. âÂÂ6 to 6 (dB) Default: 0 (dB) S.RTRV (Sound Ret r ieve r ) With the Sound Ret r ieve r function, DS P pr oces sing is us ed to com p ensate fo r th e loss of audio data u p on com pr ession, im pr oving the soundâÂÂs sense of density and modu lation. OFF b ON DNR (Digital Noise Reduction) May im pr ove the quality of sound in a noisy sou r ce (fo r exam p le, video ta p e with lots of backg r ound noise) when switched on. OFF ON DIALOG E (Dialog Enhance ment) Locali zes dial og in the cente r channel to make it stand out f r om othe r backgr ound sounds in a TV o r movie soundt r ack. By moving f r om UP1 th r ough UP 2 and UP3 u p to UP4, you can ma ke the sound sou r ce seem to r elocate u p wa r ds. OFF FLAT UP1/UP2/UP3/ UP4 c Hi-bit (High Bit/ High Sam p ling) C r eates a wide r dynamic r ange with digital sou r ces like CDs or DVDs. Smoothe r , mo r e delicate musical ex pr ession can be achieved by r equantizing 16 bit PCM or 20 bit com pr essed audio signals to 24 bit. OFF ON DUAL (Dual Mono) S p ecifies how dual mono encoded Do lby Digital soundt r acks should be p layed. Dual mono is not wi dely used, but is sometimes necessa r y wh en two language s need to be sent to se p ar ate channels. CH1 â Channel 1 is hea r d only CH2 â Channel 2 is hea r d only CH1 CH2 â Both channels hea r d f r om f r ont s p eake rs DRC (Dynamic Range Cont r ol) Adjusts the level of dynamic r ange for movie soun dt racks o p timized fo r Dolby Digit al, DTS, Dolby Digital P lus, Dolby T r ueHD, DTS-HD and DTS-HD Maste r Audio (you may need to use t his featu r e when listening to su rr ound sound at low volumes). AUTO d MAX MID OFF Setting What it does Option(s) SC-1525_UXJC B.book 60 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼ å¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂç«æÂÂæÂÂ¥ ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Using other functions 08 61 En LFE (LFE Attenuate) Some audio sou r ces include ult r a-low bass tones. Set the LFE attenuato r as necessa r y to pr event the u lt r a-low bass tones f r om disto r tin g the sound f r om the s p eaker s. The LFE is not l imited when set to 0 dB, which is the r ecommende d value. When set to âÂÂ5 dB, âÂÂ10 dB, âÂÂ15 dB o r âÂÂ20 dB, the L FE is limited by the r esp ective deg r ee. When OFF is sele cted, no sound is out p ut f r om the LFE channel. 0dB / âÂÂ5dB/ âÂÂ10dB/ âÂÂ15dB/ âÂÂ20dB OFF SACD GAIN e B r ings out detail in SACDs by maximizing the dynamic r ange (du r ing digit al pr ocessing). 0dB 6 dB HDMI f (HDMI Audio) S p ecifies the r outing of the HDMI audio signal out of this r eceiver ( amp ) o r through to a TV . When THROUGH is selected, n o sound is out p ut f r om this r eceiver . AMP THROUGH A. DELAY (Auto delay) This featu r e automatically co rr ects the audio-to -video delay between com p onents connected with an HDMI cabl e. The audio delay time is set de p ending on the o pe r ational status of the dis p lay connected with an HDMI cabl e. The video d elay time is automatically adjusted acco r ding to the audi o delay time. g OFF ON C. WIDTH h (Cente r Width) (A pp licable only when using a cente r s p eake r) P r ovides a be tte r blend of the f r ont s p eake r s by s pr eading t he cente r channel between th e f r ont r ight and left sp eaker s, making it sound wide r (highe r settings) o r na rr owe r (lowe r settings). 0 to 7 Default: 3 DIMENSION h Adjusts the de p th of the su rr ound sound balance f r om f r ont t o back, making the soun d mo r e distant (minus settings), o r mo r e fo r war d ( p ositive se ttings). âÂÂ3 to 3 Default: 0 PANORAMA h Extends the f r ont ste r eo image to include t he su rr ound s p eaker s fo r a âÂÂw r ap ar oundâ effe ct. OFF ON C. IMAGE i (Cente r Image) (A pp licable only when using a cente r s p eake r) Adjusts the cente r image to c r eate a wide r ste r eo effect with vocals. Adjust the effect f r om 0 (all cente r channel sent to f r ont r ight and left sp eaker s) to 10 (cente r channel sent to the cente r s p eake r only). 0 to 10 Defaults : Neo:6 MUSIC: 3 Neo:6 CINEMA: 10 Setting What it does Option(s) EFFECT Sets the effect l evel fo r the cu rr ently selected Advanced Su rr ound o r ALC mode (eac h mode can be set se p ar at ely). 10 to 90 Defaults: EXT.STEREO: 90 Othe r s: 50 H.GAIN (Height Gain) Adjusts the out p ut f r om the f r ont height s p eaker when listening in DOLBY PLIIz HEIGHT mode. If set to HIGH , the sound f r om th e to p will be mo r e em p hasized. LOW MID HIGH V.SB (Vi r tual Su rr ound Back) When youâ r e not usin g su rr ound back s p eaker s, selecting this mode allows yo u to hea r a vir tual su rr ound back channel th r ough you r su rr ound s p eake r s. You can choose to listen to sou r ces with no su rr ound back channel info r mation , o r if the mate r ial sounds bette r in the fo r mat (fo r exam p le, 5.1) fo r which it was o r iginally encoded, you ca n have the r eceive r only a pp ly this effect to 6.1 encode d sou r ces like Dolby Digital EX o r DTS-ES. j OFF ON V.HEIGHT (Vi r tual Height) When youâ r e not usin g f r ont height s p eaker s, selecting this mode allows yo u to hea r a vir tual f r ont height c hannel th r ough you r f r ont s p eake r s. k OFF ON a. The adjustment can be made only when TONE is set to ON . b.Wit h the iPod/USB , INTERNET RADIO o r ADAPT ER PORT in p ut function, by default S.RTRV is set to ON . c. UP1 to UP4 can be selected only wh en the f r ont height s p eaker is connected. The pr esence o r absence of effec ts de p ends on the listening mode. d.The initi ally set AUTO is only available fo r Dolby T r ueHD signals. Select MAX o r MID for signals othe r than Dolby T r ueHD. e.You shouldnâÂÂt have any pr oblems using this with most SACD discs, but if the sound disto r ts, it is best to switch the gain setting back to 0 dB. f. ⢠The HDMI Audio setting cannot be switched while p er for ming synch r onized am p mode o p er ations. ⢠The synch r onized am p mode must be tu r ned o n in o r der to p lay the r ece ive r âÂÂs HDMI audio and video in p ut signals f r om the TV with the r eceive r âÂÂs p ower in the standby mode. See About synchronized operations on p age 58. g.Thi s featu r e is only available when the connected dis p lay su pp o r ts the automatic audio/video synch r onizing ca p ability (âÂÂli p syncâÂÂ) fo r HDMI. If you find the automatically set delay time unsuitable, set A. DELAY to OFF and adjust the delay tim e manually. Fo r mor e details about the li p sync featu r e of you r dis p lay, contac t the manufactu r er di r ectly. h.Only when listening to 2-channel sou r ces in Dolby P r o Logic IIx Music/Do lby P r o Logic II Music mode. i. Only when listening to 2-channel sou r c es in Neo:6 MUSIC/CINEMA mode. Setting What it d oes Option (s) SC-1525_UXJC B.book 61 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼ å¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂç«æÂÂæÂÂ¥ ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Using other functions 08 62 En Setting the Video options The r e a r e a numbe r of additional p ic tu r e settings you can make using the VIDEO PARAMETER menu. The defaults, if not stated, a r e listed in bold. Important ⢠Note that if an o p tion cannot be selected on the VIDEO PARAMETER menu, it is unavaila ble due to the cu rr ent sou r ce, setting and status of the r eceiver . ⢠All of the se tting ite ms can be s et fo r each in p ut function. ⢠S etting items othe r than V. CONV ca n only be selected when V. CONV is set to ON . 1 Press on the remote cont rol, then press VIDEO PARAMETER . 2U s e ï©/ïª to select the setting you want to adjust. De p ending on the cu rr ent status/mode of the r eceive r , ce r tain o p tions may not be able to be selected. Ch eck the table below fo r note s on this. 3U s e ï«/ï¬ to set as nece ssary. See the table below fo r the o p tions av ailable fo r each setting. 4 Press RETURN to con firm an d exit th e menu. j. ⢠You canâÂÂt us e the Vi r tual Su rr ound Back mode when the head p hones a r e connected to this r eceive r o r when any of the ste r eo, F r ont Stage Su rr ound Advance, Sound Ret r iever Ai r o r St r eam Di r ect modes is selected. ⢠You can only use the Vi r tual Su rr ound Back mode if the su rr ound s p eake r s a r e on and the SB setting is set to NO o r if Front Bi-Amp o r ZONE 2 is selec ted at S p eaker System. It can a lso be used when Speaker B is selected at S p eaker system and SP ï¤ AB is selected with the SPEAKERS button. ⢠When in p utting Dolby T r ue HD, DTS-HD o r DTS Ex pr ess audio signals , the Vi r tual Su rr ound Back mode cannot be used if no su rr ound signals a r e reco r ded in the sou r ce. k. ⢠You canâÂÂt use the Vi r tual Height mode wh en the h ead p hon es ar e connected to th is r eceiver o r when any of the ste r eo, F r ont Stage Su rr ound Advance, Sound Ret r ieve r Ai r o r St r eam Di r e ct modes is selected. ⢠The Vi r tual Height mode cannot be used when no su rr ound s p eake r is connected. It can also not be used when p laying sign als containing actual f r ont height channel info r matio n. ⢠When in p utting ce r tain Dolby T r ueHD, DTS-HD o r DTS Ex pr ess audio signals, the Vi r tual Height mode cannot be used if no su rr ound signals a r e reco r ded in the sou r ce. Setting What it d oes Option(s ) V. CONV a (Digital Video Conve r sion) Conve r ts video signals fo r out put f r om the MONITOR OUT jacks (including HDMI OUT connec to r ) fo r all video t y p es (see p age 22). ON OFF RECEIVER RES b (Resolution) S p ecifies the out p ut r esolution of the video sign al (when video in p ut signals a r e out p ut at the HDMI OUT connecto r , select this acco r ding to the r esolution of you r monito r and the images you wish to watch). AUTO PURE 480p/576p 720p 1080i 1080p 1080/24p ASP c (As p ect) S p ecifies the as p ect r atio when in p ut signals a r e out p ut at the HDMI out p ut. Make you r de si r ed settings while checking each setting on you r dis p lay (if the image doesnâÂÂt match you r monito r ty p e, c r o pp ing o r black bands a pp ea r ). THROUGH NORMAL PCINEMA d,e (Pu r eCinema) This settin g o p timizes the o pe r ation of the pr og r essive scanning ci r cuit fo r p laying film mate r ials. No r mally set it to AUTO . If the p ictur e seems un natu r al, switch this to ON o r OFF . AUTO ON OFF P.MOTION d,e (P r og r essive Motion) Adjusts the motion and still p ictur e quality when video out p ut is set to pr og r essive. âÂÂ4 to 4 Default: 0 YNR d Reduces noise in t he luminance (Y) signal. 0 to 8 Default: 0 CNR d Reduces noise in the in p utâÂÂs colo r (C) signal. 0 to 8 Default: 0 BNR d Reduces bloc k noise (block - sha p ed disto r tion g ene r ated u p on MPEG com pr ession ) in the p ictur e. 0 to 8 Default: 0 MNR d Reduces mosquito noise (disto r tion g ene r ated at the contou r s of the p ictu r e u p on MPEG com pr ession ) in the p ictur e. 0 to 8 Default: 0 DETAIL d Adjusts how sha rp edges a pp ea r .0 t o 8 Default: 0 BRIGHT d (B r ightness) Adjusts the ove r all b r ightness. âÂÂ6 to 6 Default: 0 CONTRAST d Adjusts the cont r ast between light and da r k. âÂÂ6 to 6 Default: 0 HUE d Adjusts the r ed/gr een balance. âÂÂ6 to 6 Default: 0 CHROMA d (Ch r oma Level) Adjusts satu r ation f r om du ll to b r ight. âÂÂ6 to 6 Default: 0 BLK SETUP f Co rr ects th e black de p th in the b r ightness signal. No r mally select 7.5 . If the d a r k p ar ts of the p ictur e ar e a ll black with this sett ing, select 0 . 7.5 0 Setting What it does Option(s) SC-1525_UXJC B.book 62 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼ å¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂç«æÂÂæÂÂ¥ ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Using other functions 08 63 En Switching the speaker terminal s If you selected Speaker B at Speaker system setting on p age 85, yo u can switch betwe en s p eaker s using the SPEAKERS button. If you selected Normal(SB/FH) , Normal(SB/FW) , Front Bi-Amp o r ZONE 2 , the button will sim p ly switch you r main s p eaker te r minals on o r o ff. The o p tions below a r e fo r the Speaker B setting only. 1 â¢U s e SPEAKERS on the front panel to select a speaker system setting. As mentioned above, if you have selected Normal(SB/ FH) o r Normal(SB/FW) , the button will sim p ly switch you r main s p eake r te r minal (A) on o r off. P r ess re p eatedly to choose a s p eake r te r minal o p tion: ⢠SP ï¤ A â Sound is out p ut f r om the A-s p eake r te r minals (u p to 7 channels (including su rr ound back channels), de p ending on the sou r ce). ⢠SP ï¤ B â Sound is out p ut f r om the two s p eake r s connected to the B-s p eaker te r minals. Multicha nnel sou r ces will not be hea r d. ⢠SP ï¤ AB â Sound is out p ut f r om the A-s p eake r te r minals (u p to 5 channels, de p en ding on the sou r ce), the two s p eake r s connected to the B- s p eake r te r minals, and the subwoofe r . The sound f r om the B-s p eake r te r minals will be the same as the sound f r om the A-s p eake r te r minals (multich annel sou r ces will be downmixed to 2 channels). ⢠SP ï¤ (off) â No sound is out p ut f r om the s p eake r s. Using the MULTI-ZONE controls The following ste p s use the f r ont p an el contr ols to adjust the sub zone volume and select sou r ces. See MULTI- ZONE remote controls on p age 64. 1P r e s s MULTI-ZONE ON/OFF on the front panel . Each pr ess selects a MULTI-ZONE o p tion: ⢠ZONE 2 ON â Selects you r pr ima r y ( ZONE 2 ) sub zone ⢠ZONE 2&3 ON â Select both sub zones ⢠ZONE 3 ON â Selects you r seconda r y ( ZONE 3 ) sub zone ⢠MULTI ZONE OFF â Switches the MULTI-ZONE featu r e off The MULTI-ZONE indicato r lights when the MUL TI-ZONE cont r ol has been switched ON. 2P r e s s MULTI-ZONE CONTROL on the front panel to select the sub zone(s) you want. If you selected ZONE 2&3 ON above, you can toggle between ZONE 2 and ZONE 3 . a.If the vi deo p ictur e dete r ior ates when this se ttings is switched ON , switch it OFF . b.⢠When set to a r esolution with which the TV (monito r ) is not com p atible, no p ictu r e is out p ut. Also, in some cases no p ictu r e will be out p ut due to co p yr ight pr otection signals. In this case, change the setting. ⢠When AUTO is selected, the r esolution is selected automatically acco r ding to the ca p acity of the TV (monito r ) co nnecte d by HDM I. When PURE is selected, the signals a r e out p ut with the same r esolution as when inp ut (see About the video converter on p age 22). ⢠If this is set to something othe r than AUTO , PURE and 480 i/576i analog signals a r e in p ut, 480 p /576p signals a r e out p ut f r om the com p onent out p ut te r minals. ⢠When 1080/24 p is se lected, de p ending on the sou r ce mate r ial the m ovement may be unnatu r al o r the p ictur e may not be clea r . In this case, set the r esolution to something othe r than 1080/24 p . ⢠1080/24 p is mainly effective fo r mov ie sou rce mate r ials. c. ⢠If the image doesnâÂÂt match you r monito r ty p e, ad just the as p ect r atio o n the sou r ce comp onent or on the monitor . ⢠This setting is only dis p layed when 480i/ p or 576i/ p video signals a r e being in p ut . d.This setting is only dis p layed when the video signals below a r e being in p ut: ⢠480i, 576i, 480 p , 57 6 p, 720 p , 1080i analog video signals ⢠480i, 576i, 480 p , 57 6 p, 720 p , 1080i, 1080 p , 1080 p 24 HDMI video signals e. ⢠This setting is valid fo r com p onent out p uts a nd HDM I out p ut. ⢠This se ttin g have the effect only fo r p ictur es r ecor ded in the inte r laced scan fo r mat (480i/5 76i o r 1080i signals). ⢠P.MOTION is di sabled when PCINEMA is set to ON . f. You canâÂÂt use this setting when the HDMI o r com p onent video signals a r e being in p ut . Note 1 ⢠The subwoofe r out p ut de p ends on the settings you made in Manual speaker setup on p age 84. Howeve r , if SP ï¤ B is selected above, no sound is hea r d f r om the subwoofe r (the LFE channel is not downmixed). ⢠All s p eaker systems (exce p t Speaker B c onnections) a r e switched off when head p hones a r e connected. SC-1525_UXJC B.book 63 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼ å¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂç«æÂÂæÂÂ¥ ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Using other functions 08 64 En ⢠When the r eceiver is on, 1 make s u r e that any o pe r ations fo r the sub zone a r e done while ZONE and you r selected sub zone(s) show in the dis p lay. If this is not showing, the f r ont p anel cont r ols aff ect the main zone on ly. 3U s e t h e INPUT SELECTOR dial to select the source for the zone you have selected. Fo r exam p le, ZONE 2 CD-R sends the sou r ce connected to the CD-R in p uts to the pr ima r y ( ZONE 2 ) sub r oom. â¢I f y o u s e l e c t TUNER , you can use the tune r contr ols to select a pr eset station (see Saving station presets on p age 46 if youâ r e unsu r e how to do t his). 2 4 When Speaker System is set to ZONE 2 , use the MASTER VOLUME dial to adjust the volume for th e sub zone. 5 When youâÂÂre finished, press MULTI-ZONE CONTROL again to return to t he main zone controls. You can also pr ess MULTI-ZONE ON/OFF on the f r ont p anel to switch off all outp ut to the sub zone(s). 3 MULTI-ZONE remo te controls Set the MULTI-ZONE o p er atio n switch to ZONE 2 o r ZONE 3 to o p er ate the co rr esp onding zone. The following table shows the p ossible MULTI-ZONE r emote contr ols: Making an audio o r a video record ing You can make an audio o r a video r ecor ding f r om the built-in tu ne r , o r f r om an audio o r video sou r ce connected to the r eceiver (such as a CD p layer or TV). 4 Kee p in mind y ou canâÂÂt ma ke a digital r ecor ding fr om a n analog sou r ce o r vice-ve r sa, so make su r e the com p onents you a r e r eco r ding to/f r om a r e hooked u p in the same way (see Connecting your equipment on p age 16 for mor e on conne ctions). Since the video conve r ter is not availab le when making r ecor dings (fr om the video OUT jacks) m ake s ur e to use the same ty p e of video cable fo r connecting you r r ecor der as you used to connect you r video sou r ce (the one you want to r ecor d) to this r eceiver . Fo r exam p le, you must connect you r r ecor der using Com p onent video if you r sou r ce ha s also been connected using Co m p onent video. 1 Select the source you want to record. Use the in p ut function bu ttons (o r INPUT SELECT ). 2 Prepare the source you want to record. Tune to the r adio station, load the CD, video , DVD etc. 3 Select the input signal acco rding to the signal to be recorded. Use the r emote cont r olâÂÂs SIGNA L SEL button. 4 Prepare the recorder. Inse r t a blank t a p e, MD, video etc. into the r eco r ding device and set the r ecor ding levels. Refe r to the inst r uctions that came with the r eco r de r if you a r e unsu r e how to do this. Most video r eco r de r s set the audio r ecor ding level automaticallyâÂÂche ck the comp onentâÂÂs inst r uction manual if youâ r e unsu r e. 5 Start re cording, then st art playback of the source component. Reducing the level of an analog signal The in p ut atten uato r lowe r s the in p ut level of an analog signal when itâÂÂs too st r ong. You can use this if you find that the OVER indicato r lights oft en o r you can hea r disto r tion in the sound. 5 ⢠Press on the remote control, then press A.ATT to switch the input attenuator on or of f. Note 1I f t h e r eceiver is in standby, the dis p lay is dimmed, and ZONE and you r selected sub zone(s) continue to show in the dis p lay. 2 The tune r cannot be tuned to mo r e than one station at a time. The r efor e, changing the station in one zone also changes the station in the othe r zone. Please be ca r eful not to change stations when r ec o r ding a r adio b r oadcast. 3 ⢠You wonâÂÂt be able to s witch the main zone off com p letely unless youâÂÂve switched off the MUL TI-ZONE cont r ol fi r st. ⢠If you donâÂÂt p lan to use the MULTI-ZONE featu r e fo r a while, tu r n off the p ower in both the sub and main r ooms so that this r eceiver is in standby. Button What it does ïµ Switches on /off p ower in the sub zone. INPUT SELECT Use to select the in p ut function in the sub zone. In p ut function buttons Use to select the in p ut functi on di r ectly (this may not wo r k fo r some fun ctions) in the sub zone. MASTER VOLUME / â Use to set the listeni ng volume in the sub zone. a a. You can only use this button when Speaker System is set to ZONE 2 . MUTE Mutes the sound o r r estor es the sou nd if it has been muted (adjusting the volume also r estor es the s ound). a 4⢠T h e r ece iver âÂÂs volume, Audio p ar ameter s (the tone cont r ols, fo r exam p le), and su rr ound effects have no effect on the r ecor ded signal. ⢠Some digital sou r ces a r e co p y- pr otected, and can only be r ecor ded in analog. ⢠Some video sou r ces a r e co p y- pr otected. Thes e cannot be r ecor ded. 5 The attenuato r isnâÂÂt available with digital sou r ces, o r when using the St r eam Di rect (ANALOG DIRECT) modes. RECEIVER SC-1525_UXJC B.book 64 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼ å¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂç«æÂÂæÂÂ¥ ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Using other functions 08 65 En Using the sleep timer The slee p time r switches the r eceiver in to standby afte r a s p ecified amount of time so you can fall asle e p without wo rr ying about th e r eceive r being left on all night. Use the r emote cont r ol to set the slee p tim e r . ⢠Press on the remote control, then press SLEEP repeatedly to set the sleep time. ⢠You can check the r emaining slee p time at any time by pr essin g SLEEP once. P r essing r ep eatedly will cycle th r ough the slee p op ti ons again . 1 Dimming the display You can choose between fou r br ightness levels fo r the f r ont p ane l dis p lay. Note that when selecting sou r ces, the dis p lay automatically b r ightens f o r a few seconds. ⢠Press on the remote control, then press DIMMER repeatedly to change the b rightness of the front panel display. Switching the HDMI output Set which te r min al to use when ou tp utting video and audio signals f r om the HDMI out p ut te r mi nals. The HDMI OUT1 te r minal is co m p atible with the Control with HDMI function. ⢠Press on the remote control, then press HDMI OUT . Please wait a while when Please wai t ... is dis p layed. The out p ut switches among HDMI OUT ALL , HDMI OUT 1 and HDMI OUT 2 each t ime the bu tton is pr essed. 2 Using the Web Control func tion The r eceive r can be o p er ated using a b r owse r f r om a com p ute r connected on the same LAN as the r eceive r . 1 Turn on the comput er and launch the Intern et browser. 2 In the address bar o n the browser, enter the IP address assigned to this receiver. Fo r exam p le, if the IP add r ess of this r eceive r is âÂÂ192.168.0.2âÂÂ, ente r âÂÂhtt p ://192.168.0.2/âÂÂ. When the connection is ma de with the r eceiver , a Top Menu will be dis p layed. This r eceiver âÂÂs IP addr ess can be f ound in the âÂÂIP a ddr ess, P r oxyâ menu ( p age 87). 3 Once the Top Menu is displayed, click th e button for the zone you want to oper ate. 4 Operate from th e screen for th e individual zone. ⢠Even when the r eceiver is in the standby mo de, it can be tu r ned on usin g the Web Control function. Fo r details, see Network Standby on p age 88. Checking your sy stem settings Use the status dis p lay sc r een to check you r cu rr ent settings fo r featu r es such as su rr ound back channel pr ocessing and you r cu rr ent MCACC pr eset. 1 Press on t he remote control, then press STATUS to check the system settings. The f r ont p anel dis p lay shows each of the following settings fo r th r ee seconds each: Input function , Sampling Fre quency , MCACC preset , ZONE 2 input , ZONE 3 input and HDMI OUT . 2 When youâÂÂre finished, press STATUS again to switch off t he displa y. Note 1 T he slee p time r is valid fo r all zones. If any zone is on, the slee p time r continues functioning. 2⢠T h e s y n c h r onized amp mode is canceled when the HDMI outp ut is switched. If you wish to use the synchr onized a mp mode, switch to HDMI OUT 1 , then select the synch r onized am p mode on the TV using the TVâÂÂs r emote c ont r ol. ⢠When the p ower is tu r ned off then back on afte r switching the HDMI out p ut, the in p ut is set to a setting between HDMI 1 and HDMI 4, o r BD. RECEIVER 30 min 60 min 90 min Off RECEIVER RECEIVER Web Control ZONE 2 POWER INPUT SELECT LISTENING MODE STEREO AUTO SURR/ALC/ STREAM DIRECT HOME THX STANDARD SURROUND ADVANCED SURROUND STEREO DVD VOLUME MUTE -60.0dB ON OFF Top Menu Main ZONE ZONE 3 RECEIVER SC-1525_UXJC B.book 65 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼ å¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂç«æÂÂæÂÂ¥ ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Using other functions 08 66 En Resetting the system Use this pr ocedu r e to r eset all the r eceive r âÂÂs settings to the facto r y default. Use the f r ont p anel c ontr ols to do th is. Set MULTI-ZONE to OFF . ⢠Disconnect the iP od and USB mem o r y device f r om the r eceive r befo r ehand. 1 Switch the receiver into st andby. 2 While holding d own ENTER on the front panel, press ïµ STANDBY/ON . The dis p lay shows RESET ï£ NO ï¤ . 3 Select â RESET â using PRESET ï«/ï¬ , then pr ess ENTER on the front panel. The dis p lay shows RESET? OK . 4 Press ENTER to con firm. OK a pp ea r s in the dis p lay to indicate that the r eceive r has been reset to the facto r y default settings. ⢠N ote that all settings wi ll be saved, even if the r eceiver is unp lugged. Default system s ettings Setting Default Digital Vide o Conve r sion ON SPEAKERS A S p eake r System No r mal (SB/FH) S p eake r Setting F r ont SMALL Cente r SMALL FH/FW SMALL Su rr SMALL SB SMALLx2 SW YES Su rr ound Position IN REAR C r ossove r 80 Hz X-Cu r ve OFF THX Audio Sett ing 4 ft< DIMMER B r ightest Netwo r k Standby OFF Inputs See Input function default and possible settings on p age 41. HDMI HDMI Audio Am p HDMI out p ut HDMI OUT ALL Cont r ol ON Cont r ol Mo de ALL DIs p lay Powe r Off YES DSP Powe r On Level LAST Volume Limit OFF Mute Level FULL Phase Cont r ol ON Sound Ret r iever iPod/USB, INTERNE T RADIO, ADAPTE R PORT function ON Othe r functions OFF Sound Delay 0.0 f r ame Dual Mono CH1 DRC AUTO SACD Gain 0 dB LFE Attenuate 0 dB Auto delay OFF Digital Safe ty OFF Effect Level ExtendedSte r eo 90 Othe r modes 50 2 PL II Music O p tions Cente r Width 3 Dimension 0 Pano r ama OFF Neo:6 O p tion s Cent e r Image Neo:6 MUSIC: 3 Neo:6 CINEMA: 10 All In p uts Listening Mode (2 ch/multi ch) AUTO SURROUND Listening Mode (H P) STEREO See also Setting the Audio options on p ag e 60 fo r othe r de fault DSP settin gs. MCACC MCACC Position Memo r y M1: MEMORY 1 Channel Level (M1 to M6 ) 0.0 dB S p eake r Distance (M1 to M6) 10.00 ft Standing Wave (M1 to M6) ATT of all channels/ filte r s 0.0 dB SWch Wide T r im 0.0 dB EQ Data (M1 to M6) All channels/ba nds 0.0 dB EQ Wide T r im 0.0 dB Setting Default SC-1525_UXJC B.book 66 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼ å¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂç«æÂÂæÂÂ¥ ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Controlling the rest of your system 09 67 En Chapter 9: Controlling the rest of your system About the Remote Setup men u The Remote Setu p mode is set by pr essing the numbe r button whi le pr essing R.SETUP . The diffe r ent item s on the Remote Setu p menu a re desc r ibed b elow. Fo r thei r setting pr ocedu r es, r efe r to the ex p lanatio ns fo r the r esp ective items. Note â¢Y o u c a n c a n c e l o r exit any of the step s by pr essing R.SETUP . â¢A f t e r o ne minute of inactivity, the r emote automatically exits the o p er ation. Operating multiple receivers U p to fou r r eceiver s can be op er ated discr etely using this r eceiver 's r emote contr ol when using multip le r eceiver s, pr ovided they a r e of the same model as this r eceiver . The r eceiver to be op er ated i s switched by inp utting the pr eset code to set the r emo te contr ol setting. ⢠Set the r emote modes on the r eceiver s befo r e using this functi on (see Remote Control Mode Setup on p age 89). 1 Press and hold R.SETUP , then press âÂÂ4â for three seconds. The LED flashes continuously. ⢠To cancel the preset setu p mode pr ess R.SETUP . 2 Press the number bu tton for the receiver (â Receiver 1 â to â Receiver 4 âÂÂ) you wish to oper ate. Fo r exam p le, to o p er ate âÂÂReceive r 2âÂÂ, pr ess â 2 âÂÂ. If the LED lights fo r one second, the setting h as been successfully com p leted. When the pr eset code is in p ut, the LED fla shes thr ee times to in dicate th at the se tting has f ailed. Setting What it does Preset recall P r eset codes can be set fo r the var ious inp ut functions . The r emote cont r ol codes of a numbe r of othe r devices (in cluding pr oducts of othe r b r ands) a r e pr eset in th e r emote con t r ol to allow these device s to be o p er ated. See âÂÂSelecting pr eset codes di r ec tlyâ on p age 68. Code learning If the desi r ed o p er ations cannot be p er for med even thou gh you have set th e pr eset codes, the r emote co ntr ol sign als of other devices can be lea r ned di r ectly. See âÂÂP r og r amming signals f rom othe r r emote cont r olsâ on page 68. Multi operation A se r ies of the r emote cont r ol o p er at ions fo r sta r ting listen ing o r viewing can be pr og r ammed. Multi p le r emote cont r ol codes can be set fo r th e diffe r ent in p ut function s. See âÂÂMulti o p e r ation and System offâ on p age 70. System off This is a function fo r automatically tu r ning off the p ower of devices connected to th e r eceive r . Multi p le r emote cont r ol codes can be set, as desi r ed. See âÂÂMulti op er ation and S ystem offâ on p age 70. Direct function This is a setting fo r changing on ly the r emote cont r ol unitâÂÂs o p er ation sc r een, wit hout cha nging the r eceive r âÂÂs in p ut, when th e r emote cont r ol unitâÂÂs in p ut functi on buttons a r e pr essed. This is convenient fo r using the r emote cont r ol u nit fo r devices not connected to the r ece iver . See âÂÂDi r ect functionâ on p age 69. Erase learning This functi on is used to e r ase r emote cont r ol codes that have been lea r ned. Code s lea r ned fo r the diffe r en t in p ut functions can be e r ased individually. See âÂÂE r asing one of th e r emote cont r ol button settingsâ on p age 69. Back light The backlight li ghting p atter n can be selected f r om among fou r modes, in conside r ation of convenience and batte r y se r vice life. See âÂÂSetting the backlight mode â on p age 70. Reset function This is a fu nction fo r r esetting pr eset codes that have been set. Key r esettin g can be done for individual in p ut functions . See âÂÂE r asing a ll lea r nt settings that a r e in on e in p ut functionâ on p age 69. All reset This is a function fo r r esetting all remot e cont r ol unit settings you have made to the defaults set u p on shi p ment f r om the fact o r y. See âÂÂResetting the r emote cont r ol sett ingsâ on p age 72. Change RC mode If you have m ulti p le Pionee r r eceivers, am p lifier s, etc., this setting can be used to pr event othe r units f r om o pe r ating s imultaneously when th e r emote cont r ol unit is o p er ated. S ee â O p er ating multi p le r eceiver sâ on p age 67. Setting What it d oes SC-1525_UXJC B.book 67 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼ å¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂç«æÂÂæÂÂ¥ ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Controlling the rest of your system 09 68 En Setting the remo te to control other components Most com p onents can be assigned to one of the in p ut function buttons (suc h as DVD o r CD ) using the com p onentâÂÂs manufactur er pr eset code sto r ed in th e r emote. Howeve r , the r e a r e cases whe r e only ce r tain functions may be cont r ollable after assigning the pr o pe r pr eset code, o r the codes fo r th e manufact u r er in th e r emote cont r ol will not wo r k fo r th e model that you a r e using. If you canâÂÂt find a pr eset code that matches the com p onent you want to cont r ol, you ca n still teach t he r emote individual commands fr om another r emote cont r ol (see Programming signals from other remote controls on p age 68). â¢F o r gr eater convenience, assign th e TV connected to the MONITOR OUT te r m inal to the TV CTRL button, and assi gn you r satellite/cable r eceive r o r set-to p box connected to the TV in p ut te r minal to the TV in p ut button. If a single device is connected to both te r minals, that device should be assigned t o both the TV CTRL and TV in p ut buttons. ⢠D evices may be assigned to the following in p ut function buttons. Selecting preset codes directly 1 Press and hold R.SETUP , then press âÂÂ1â for three seconds. The LED flashes continuously. ⢠To cancel the pr eset setu p mode pr ess R.SETUP . 2 Press the input function button for the component you want to control. When assigning pr eset codes to TV C ONTROL , pr ess TV CTRL he r e. The LED blinks once and flas hes continuously. 3 Use the number buttons to enter the 4-digi t preset code. See Preset cod e list on p age 107. If the LED lights fo r one second, the setting has been successfully com p leted. When the pr eset code is fully in p ut, the LED flashes th r ee times to indicate that the setting has failed. If this ha pp ens, ente r th e 4-digit pr eset code again. 4 Repeat steps 2 through 3 for the other components you want to control. To t r y out the r emote cont r ol, switch the com p onent on o r off (into standby) by pr essing ïµ SOURCE . If it doesnâÂÂt seem to wo r k, select the n ext code fr om the list (if the r e is one). 5 Press R.SETUP to exit the preset setup mode. Programming signals f rom other remote controls If the pr eset code fo r you r com p onent is not available, o r the available pr eset codes do not o p er ate co rr ectly, you can pr og r am sig nals f r om the r emote cont r ol of anothe r com p onent. This can also be used to pr og r am additiona l o pe r ations (buttons not c ove r ed in the pr esets) afte r assigning a pr eset code. 1 Ce r tain butt ons r e pr esent o p er ations that cannot be lea r ned f r om othe r r emote co nt r ols. The buttons available a r e shown below: 1 Press and hold R.SETUP , then press âÂÂ2â for three seconds. The LED flashes continuously. ⢠To cancel the pr eset setu p mode pr ess R.SETUP . 2 Press the input function button for the co mponent you want to control. The LED blinks once and fla shes continuously. INPUT SELECT TV CTRL iPod USB TUNER SIRIUS XM ADAPTER NET RADIO CD TV BD DVD R.SETUP SOURCE RECEIVER MUL TI OPERA TION DVR/BDR HDMI RECEIVER Note 1 T h e r emote can sto r e about 120 pr eset codes f r om othe r com p onents (this has been tested with c odes of Pionee r fo r mat only). AUTO / ALC / DIRECT D.ACCESS CH LEVEL A. A TT DIMMER SIGNAL SEL MCACC SLEEP HDMI OUT TV / DTV MPX PQLS PHASE CTRL ST ATUS THX PGM STEREO iPod CTRL HOME MENU TUNE TUNE TOOLS LIST PRESET TOP MENU BAND GUIDE T .EDIT VIDEO P ARAMETER AUDIO P ARAMETER ENTER PRESET RETURN CA TEGORY MEMORY ST ANDARD MENU ADV SURR AUDIO INFO CLASS ENTER DISP HDD DVD 5 46 8 0 79 2 13 / CLR CH CH TV CONTROL INPUT INPUT SELECT TV CTRL iPod USB TUNER SIRIUS XM ADAPTER NET RADIO CD TV BD DVD R.SETUP SOURCE RECEIVER MUL TI OPERA TION DVR/BDR HDMI RECEIVER MUTE MASTER VOLUME VOL SC-1525_UXJC B.book 68 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼ å¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂç«æÂÂæÂÂ¥ ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Controlling the rest of your system 09 69 En 3 Point the two remote controls towards each other, then press the button that will be doing the learning on this r eceiverâÂÂs remote co ntrol. The LED blinks once and flash es continuously. â¢T h e r emote cont r ols should be 3 cm (1 inch) a p ar t. 4 Press the corresp onding button on the other remo te control that is sending (teac hing) the sign al to this receiverâÂÂs remote control. If the LED lights fo r o ne second, the setting has been successfully com p leted. 1 5 To program additi onal signals for the current component repeat steps 3 and 4. To pr og r am signal s fo r anothe r com p onent, exit and r ep eat step s 2 thr ough 4. 6P r e s s R.SETUP to exit the pro gramming mode. Erasing one of the remote control button settin gs This e r ases o ne of the buttons you have pr og r ammed and r estor es the button to the factor y default. 1 Press and hold R.SETUP , then press âÂÂ7â for three seconds. The LED flashes con tinuously. ⢠To cancel the pr eset setu p mode pr ess R.SETUP . 2 Press the input f unction button correspo nding to the command to be er ased, th en pres s ENTER . The LED flashes once. 3 Press and hold the button to be erased for three seconds. If the LED lights fo r one second, the e r asing has been successfully com p leted. 4 Repeat step 3 to erase other buttons. 5P r e s s R.SETUP to exit the erasing mode. Erasing all learnt settings that are in one input function This o p er ation e r ases al l the o p er ational settings of ot he r devices that have been pr og r amm ed in one in p ut function, and r estor es the facto r y default. This functi on is handy fo r er asing all data pr ogr ammed fo r devices no longe r being used. 1 Press and hold R.SETUP , then press âÂÂ9â for three seconds. The LED flashes continuously. ⢠To cancel the preset setu p mode pr ess R.SETUP . 2 Press and ho ld the input fu nction button corresponding to the command to be erased for thr ee seconds. If the LED lights fo r one second, the e r asing has been successfully com p leted. Direct function ⢠Default setting: On You can use the di r ect function featu r e to cont r ol one com p onent using the r emote con t r ol while at the same time using you r r eceiver to p lay a di ffe r ent com p onent. This could let you, fo r exam p le, use the r emote cont r ol to set u p and listen to a CD on the r eceiver , and then use the r emote contr ol to r ewind a tap e in your VCR while you continue to listen to you r CD p layer . When di rect func tion is on, any co m p onent you select (using t he in p u t f u n c t i o n b u t t o n s ) w i l l b e s e l e c t e d b y b o t h the r eceiver and the r emote contr ol. When you t u r n di r ect function off, you can o p e r ate the r emote cont r ol without affecting the r ece iver . 1 Press and hold R.SETUP , then press âÂÂ5â for three seconds. The LED flashes continuously. ⢠To cancel the preset setu p mode pr ess R.SETUP . 2 Press the input function button for t he component you want to control . 3 Press âÂÂ1â (On) or âÂÂ0â (Off ) to switch the direct function mode. If the LED lights fo r one second, the setting h as been successfully com p leted. If the LED flashes th r ee times, the setting has failed. 4P r e s s R.SETUP to exit the setup. Note 1 ⢠Note that inte r fer ence f r om TV s o r othe r devices will sometimes r esult in the r emote cont r ol lear ning the w r ong signal. ⢠Some commands f r om othe r r emote cont r ols cannot be lea r ned, but in most cases the r emotes just need to be moved close r toget he r o r fa r the r a p art. ⢠If the LED flashes fo r five seconds, it means the memo r y is full. See E rasing al l learnt setting s that ar e in one input fu nction on p age 69 to e r ase a pr og r ammed button youâ r e not using to f r ee u p mo r e memo r y (note that some signals may take mo r e memo r y than othe r s). 3 cm (1 inch) This r eceive r âÂÂs r emote contr ol Othe r r emote cont r ol SC-1525_UXJC B.book 69 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼ å¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂç«æÂÂæÂÂ¥ ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Controlling the rest of your system 09 70 En Setting the backlight mode â¢D e f a u l t s e t t i n g : 1 (normal mode) The backlight lighting p atter n can be selected f r om among fou r mo d e s , i n c o n s i d e r ation of convenience and batte r y se r vice life. 1 Press and hold R.SETUP , then press âÂÂ6â for three seconds. The LED flashes continuously. ⢠To cancel the pr eset setu p mode pr ess R.SETUP . 2 Press the number button for the backlight mode you want to set. ⢠âÂÂ1â (normal mode) â The backlight is tu r ned on and off with the light button. Afte r it lights, it tu r ns of f automatica lly if no o p er ation is p er for med fo r 10 seconds. ⢠âÂÂ2â ( frequent lighti ng mode ) â The backlight tu r ns on when any button on the r em ote cont r ol is pr essed. It is tu r ned off with the lig ht button . Afte r it lights, it tu r ns off automaticall y if no o p er ation i s p er for med fo r 10 seconds. ⢠âÂÂ3â (eco mode) â The backlig ht is tu r ned on and off with the li ght button . Afte r it lights, i t tu r ns off automatica lly if no o p er ation is p er for med fo r 5 seconds. ⢠âÂÂ4â (off mode) â The backlight does not t u r n on eve n when the light button is pr essed. If the LED lights fo r on e second, the setting has been successfully com p leted. If the LED flash es th r ee, the setting has fa iled. 3 Press R.SETUP to exit the setup. Multi operation and System off The Multi o p e r ation featu r e allo ws you to pr og r am a se r ies of u p to 5 commands fo r the com p onents in you r system. ⢠Be su r e to call u p the pr eset codes of devices o r p er for m pr ogr amming signals for other r emote cont r ols befo r e multi o p e r ation memor y pr og r amming ( p age 68). The Multi o p er ation f eatu r e makes it easy to p er for m the following o p er ations by pr essing just two buttons. P r ess MULTI OPERATIO N and then the DV D in p ut function button to: 1. Swit ch this r eceive r on. 2. Swit ch this r eceive r âÂÂs in p ut to DVD. 3. T r ansm it a sequence of u p to five pr og r ammed commands. Simila r to Multi o p er ations, System off allows you to use two buttons to sto p and switch off a se r ies of com p onents in you r system at the same time. 1 Only one System off o pe r ation sequence may be pr og r ammed. P r ess MULTI OPERAT ION and then ïµ SOURCE to: 1. T r ansm it a sequence of u p to five pr og r ammed commands. 2. Switch off all Pion ee r devices including the r eceiver (exce p t DVD r eco r de r s and VCRs). Fo r g r eate r convenience, pr og r am this r eceive r to p er for m p ower on/off and p layback op er ations on non- Pionee r devices as well. 2 (The signals fo r Pionee r devices desc r ibed above a r e not contingent o n pr og r amming fo r non-Pionee r devices.) The buttons that can be pr og r ammed using Multi o pe r ation o r Sy stem off a r e the same buttons as those that can be pr og r ammed fo r othe r r emote cont r ols (see Programming signals from other remote controls on p age 68). Note 1⢠B e f o r e Multi op er atio n and System off will wo r k co rr ectly, you must set u p the r emote to wo r k with you r TV and othe r com p onents (see Setting the remote to control othe r components on p age 68 fo r mo r e on this). ⢠Some units may take some time to p ower up , in which case multi ple o p er ations may not be p ossible. ⢠Powe r on and off commands only wo r k with com p onents that have a standby mode. 2S o m e r emote contr oller s for other manufactur er s' devices use the same signals for switching the p ower o n a n d o f f . I n s o m e c a s e s , e v e n i f t h i s r eceiver is pr ogr ammed to p er for m these commands, p ower to the non-Pioneer devices may not be switched on and off co rr ectly. Pr ogr am the r ece ive r to p er fo r m these commands if the non-Pionee r device uses se p ar ate signals fo r p ower on/off. SC-1525_UXJC B.book 70 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼ å¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂç«æÂÂæÂÂ¥ ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Controlling the rest of your system 09 71 En Programming a Multi operation or a shutdown sequence 1 Press and hold R.SETUP , then press âÂÂ3â for three seconds. The LED flashes con tinuously. ⢠To cancel the pr eset setu p mode pr ess R.SETUP . 2 Press the input f unction button (or ïµ SOURCE button). For Multi o perations, pr ess the i n p ut function you wish to pr og r am (for examp le, if you wa nt to star t t he sequ ence by switching on you r DVD p layer , pr ess DVD ). 1 For System off, pr ess the ïµ SO URCE button. The LED blinks twic e and flashes c ontinuously. 3 If necessary, press the input function button for the component whose command you want to input. This is only necessa r y if the comm and is fo r a new com p onent (in p ut function). 4 Select the button for the command yo u want to input. The LED blinks once and flash es continuously. ⢠You donâÂÂt need to pr og r am the r eceiver to switch on o r off. This i s done automa tically. With Pionee r com p onents, you donâÂÂt need to pr og r am the p owe r to switch off in a shutdown sequence (exce p t DVD r eco r de r s). 5 Repeat steps 3 to 4 to progr am a sequence of up to five commands. If you pr ess R.SETUP befo r e pr ogr amming is comp leted, commands pr og r ammed u p to that p oint will be sto r ed. 6P r e s s R.SETUP to exit the pro gramming mode. Using multi operations 1P r e s s MULTI OPERATION . The LED flashes con tinuously. 2 Within five seconds , press an input function button that has been set u p with a multi operati on. The r eceive r switches on (if it was in standby) and the pr og r ammed multi op er ation is p er for med automatically. Using System off 1P r e s s MULTI OPERATION . The LED flashes continuously. 2 Within five seconds, press ïµ SOURCE . The command sequ ence you pr og r ammed will r un, the n all Pionee r com p onents will switch off 2 , followed by this r eceiver (switch of all the zones becomes off). Erasing the settings for the multi-operation This e r ases all the settings pr og r ammed in the r emote cont r ol fo r the multi-o p er ation. 1 Press and hold R.SETUP , then press âÂÂ8â for three seconds. The LED flashes continuously. ⢠To cancel the preset setu p mode pr ess R.SETUP . 2 Press the input function button contai ning the program you want to cancel or the ïµ SOURCE button for three seconds. If the LED lights fo r one second, the e r asing has been successfully com p leted. Note 1 W ith Multi o p er ation, the HDMI and TV CTRL settings cannot be made. Fo r other setta ble inp ut functions, see Setting the remote to control other component s on p age 68. 2I n o r der to avoid accidently switching off a DVD r ecor der that is cu rr ently r ecor ding, no DVD r ecor der p ower off codes ar e sent. SC-1525_UXJC B.book 71 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼ å¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂç«æÂÂæÂÂ¥ ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Controlling the rest of your system 09 72 En Resetting the remote control set tings Use this pr ocedu r e to r eset all the r emote cont r olâÂÂs settings to the facto r y default. 1 1 Press and hold R.SETUP , then press âÂÂ0â for three seconds. The LED flashes continuously. 2 Press and hold the ENTER button for t hree seconds. If the LED lights fo r on e second, the e r asing has been successfully com p leted. Default preset codes Controlling components This r emote cont r ol can cont r ol com p onents afte r ente r ing the pr o pe r codes (see Setting the remote to control other components on p age 68 fo r mo r e on this). Use the in p ut function bu ttons to select the co m p onent. â¢T h e TV CONTROL buttons on the r emote cont r ol a r e dedicated to cont r ol the TV assigned to th e TV CTRL button. If you have two TVs, assign the main TV to th e TV CTRL button. Note 1 When pr eset codes a r e set, all the signals lear ned in the inp ut function buttons ar e clear ed. This function is convenient when you want to r eset some but not all of in p ut function buttons. Input funct ion butto n Preset code DVD 2158 BD 2160 DVR/BDR 2150 HDMI 2159 TV 0116 CD 5066 TV CTRL 0116 RECEIVER ZONE 2 ZONE 3 LIGHT AUTO / ALC / DIRECT D.A CCESS CH LEVEL A.A TT DIMMER SIGNAL SEL MCACC SLEEP HDMI OUT TV / DTV MPX PQLS PHASE CTRL S TAT US THX PGM STEREO iPod CTRL HOME MENU TUNE TUNE TOOLS LIST CH TV CONTROL INPUT INPUT SELECT TV CTRL iPod USB TUNER SIRIUS XM ADAPTER NET RADIO CD TV BD DVD R.SETUP SOURCE RECEIVER MUL TI OPERA TION DVR/BDR HDMI RECEIVER MUTE MASTER VOLUME VOL PRESET TOP MENU BAND GUIDE T .EDIT VIDEO P ARAMETER AUD I O P ARAMETER ENTER PRESET RETURN CA TEGORY MEMORY ST ANDARD MENU ADV SURR AUD I O INFO CLASS ENTER DISP HDD DVD 5 46 8 0 79 2 13 / CLR CH SC-1525_UXJC B.book 72 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼ å¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂç«æÂÂæÂÂ¥ ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Controlling the rest of your system 09 73 En a. Cont r ols fo r BD. Button(s) TV TV (Mon itor) BD/DVD HDD/DVR VCR SAT/CATV ïµ SOURCE POWER ON/OFF POWER ON/OFF POWER ON/OFF POWER ON/OFF POWER ON/OFF POWER ON/OFF Numbe r buttons numerics numerics nume rics numerics numerics numerics ⢠(dot) ⢠(dot) KURO LINK CLEAR - ïª ENTER (CLASS) ENTER CH ENTER ENTER ENTER - ENTER EXIT/INFO EXIT TOP MENU TOP MENU - LIST TOOLS/GUI DE/ EPG USER MENU TOOLS GUIDE - G UIDE ï© /ïª /ï« / ï•© / ïª/ ï«/ ï•© / ïª/ ï«/ ï•© / ïª/ ï«/ ï•© / ïª/ ï«/ ï¬ - ï©/ ïª/ ï«/ ï¬ ENTER ENTER ENTER E NTER ENT ER - ENTER HOME MENU HOME MENU HOME MENU HOME MENU - HOME / MENU RETURN RETURN RETURN RETURN - RETURN HDD ( Red) Re d Red -H D D - Red DVD (Green) Green Green -D V D - Green (Yellow) Yellow Yellow -V C R - Yellow (Blue) Blue Blue MENU MENU - Blue ï¤ - - ï¤ï¤ï¤ï¤ ïÂÂ¥ - AUTO SETUP ïÂ¥ïÂ¥ïÂ¥ïÂÂ¥ ï§ - FREEZE ï§ï§ï§ï§ ï - - ïÂÂïÂÂïÂÂï ï® - - ï®ï®ï®ï® ï¯ ANT AV SELEC TION ï¯ï¯ - ï¯ ï° -S C R E E N S I Z E ï°ï° - ï° AUDIO AUDIO AUDIO AUDIO AUDIO A UDIO AUD IO DISP DIS PLAY DISPLAY D ISPLAY DISPLAY - DIS PLAY/INFO CH /â CH / - CH / - OUTPUT RESOLUT ION / - a CH / - CH / - CH / - SC-1525_UXJC B.book 73 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼ å¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂç«æÂÂæÂÂ¥ ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Controlling the rest of your system 09 74 En a. Cont r ols fo r SACD. b. Co nt r ols f o r MD. Button(s) LD CD/CD-R/SACD MD/DAT TAPE ïµ SOURCE POWER ON/OF F POWE R ON/OFF POWER ON/OFF POWER ON /OFF Numbe r bu ttons numerics numerics numerics - ⢠(dot) 10 >10/CLEAR CLEAR b CLEAR ENTER (CLASS) ENTER DISC/ENTER OPEN/CLOSE b ENTER T O P M E N U - -M S ï£ - LEGATO LINK a -M S ï¤ ï© /ïª /ï« / ï•© / ïª/ ï«/ ï¬ - - ïÂÂ¥ / ï§ / ï / ï® ENTER E N T E R - - - - SACD SETUP a - - RETURN - - - ï¤ ï¤ï¤ï¤ï¤ ïÂÂ¥ ïÂ¥ïÂ¥ïÂ¥ïÂÂ¥ ï§ ï§ï§ï§ï§ ï ïÂÂïÂÂïÂÂï ï® ï®ï®ï®ï® ï¯ ï¯ï¯ï¯ï¯ ï° ï°ï°ï°ï° AUDIO AUDIO PURE AUDIO a - - DISP DISPLAY/INFO TIME a - - Button(s) TV (Proje ctor) ïµ SOURCE POWER ON 1 MOVIE 2 STANDARD 3 DYNAMIC 4 USER1 5 USER2 6 USER3 7 COLOR 8 SHARP 9 GAMMA 0 COLOR - ⢠(dot) SHARP - ENTER (CLASS) COLOR TEMP EXIT INFO ï© /ïª /ï« / ï•© / ïª / ï«/ ï¬ ENTER ENTER TEST HIDE MENU ï HDMI1 ï¤ HDMI2 ï® COMP. ï¯ VIDEO ïÂÂ¥ S-VIDEO ï§ BRIGHT - ï° BRIGHT AUDIO POWER OFF DISP ASPECT CH /â CONTRAST / - SC-1525_UXJC B.book 74 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼ å¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂç«æÂÂæÂÂ¥ ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
The Advanced MCACC menu 10 75 En Chapter 10: The Advanced MCACC menu Making receiver settings from the Advanced MCACC menu The Advanced MCACC (Mul ti Channel ACoust ic Calib r ation) system was develo p ed in Pionee r âÂÂs labo r ato r ies with the aim of making it p ossible fo r home use r s to p er fo r m adjustments of the same level as in a studio easily and with high pr ecision. The acoustic cha r acte r istics of the listening envi r onment a r e measu r ed and the f r equency r es p onse is calib r ated acco r dingly t o allow hig h pr ecision, auto matic analysis and o p timal calib r ation of the sound field to b r ing it close r to a studio envi r onmen t than eve r befo r e. Fu r the r mo r e, while it was pr eviously difficul t to eliminate standing waves, this r eceiver is equi pp ed with a standing wave cont r ol function usin g a unique pr ocess to p er for m acoustic analysis and r educe thei r in fluenc e. This sectio n desc r ibes how to ca lib r ate the sound field automatically and fine-adjust the sound field data manually. 1 Switch on the receiver and your TV. Make su r e that the TVâÂÂs video in p ut is set to this r eceive r . 2 Press on the remote control, then press HOME MENU . A G r ap hical Use r Inte r face (GUI) sc r een a pp ea r s on you r TV. Use ï©/ïª/ï«/ ï¬ and ENTE R to navigate th r ough the sc r eens and select menu items. P r ess RETURN to confi r m and exit the cu rr ent menu. â¢P r ess HOME MENU at any time to exit the Home Menu . 3 Select â Advanced MCAC C â from the Home Menu , then press ENTER . 4 Select the setting yo u wa nt to adjust. ⢠Full Auto MCACC â See Automatically conducting optimum sound tuning (F ull Auto MCACC) on p age 38 fo r a quick and effective automatic su rr ound setu p . ⢠Auto MCACC â See Automatic MCACC (Expert) below fo r a mo r e detailed MCACC setu p . ⢠Manual MC ACC â Fine-tunes you r sp eake r settings and customizes the Acoustic Calib r ation EQ (see Manual MCACC setup on p age 77). ⢠Demo â No settings a r e save d and no e rro r s occu r . When the s p eaker s a r e connected to this r eceiver , the test tone is out p ut r ep eatedly. P r ess RETURN to cancel the test tone. Automatic MCACC (Expert) If you r setu p r equir es mo r e detailed settings than those pr ovided in Automatically conducting optimum sound tuning (Full Auto MCACC) on p age 38, yo u can customize you r setu p o p tions below. You can calib r ate you r system diffe r ently fo r u p to six diffe r ent MCA CC pr esets, which a r e useful if you have diffe r ent listening p os itions de p ending on the ty p e of sou r ce (fo r exa m p le, watching movies f r om a sofa, o r p laying a video game close to the TV). Important â¢M a k e s u r e the micr op hone/sp ea ker s ar e not moved du r ing th e Auto MCACC Setu p . â¢T h e s c r een saver will automat ically a pp ear after five minutes of inactivity . CAUTION ⢠The test tones used in the Auto M CACC Setu p ar e out p ut at high volume. THX î THX is a t r ademar k of THX Ltd., wh ich may be r egister ed in some ju r isdic tions. All r ights r eser ved. 1S e l e c t â Auto MCAC C â from the Advanced MCACC menu, then press ENTER . If the Advanced MCACC sc r een is n ot dis p layed, r efer to Making receiver settin gs from the Advanced MCACC menu above. RECEIVER SC-1525_UXJC B.book 75 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼ å¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂç«æÂÂæÂÂ¥ ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
The Advanced MCACC menu 10 76 En 2 Select the parameters you want to set. Use ï©/ïª to select the item, then use ï«/ï¬ to set. ⢠Auto MCA CC â The default is ALL ( r ecommended), but you can limit the system calib r ation to only one setting (to save time) if you want. 1 ⢠EQ Type (only available when the Auto MCACC Menu above is EQ Pro & S-Wa ve ) â This d ete r mines how the f r equency balance is adjusted. Afte r a single calib r at ion is p er fo r med, each of the following t h r ee co rr ection cu r ves ca n be sto r ed se p ar ately in the MCACC memo r y. SYMMETRY im p lements symmet r ic co rr ection fo r each p ai r of left and r ight s p eake r s to flat ten the f r equency-amp litude cha r acte r istics. ALL CH ADJ is a âÂÂflatâ se tting wh e r e all the s p eaker s a r e set individually so no s p ecia l weighti ng is given to any one channel. FRONT ALIGN 2 sets all s p eake r s in acco r dance wi th the f r ont s p eake r settings (no equalization is a pp li ed to the f r ont left and r ig ht channels). ⢠THX Speaker (only available when the Aut o MCACC Menu above is AL L or Speaker Setting ) â Select YES if you a r e using THX s p eaker s (set all s p eaker s to SMALL ), othe r wise leave it set to NO . ⢠STAND.WAVE Multi-Point (only avai lable when th e Auto MCA CC Menu above is EQ Pro & S-Wav e ) â In addition to measu r ements at the listening p osition, you can use two mo r e r efer ence p oi nts for which test tones will be analyzed fo r standing waves. This is useful if you want to get a balanced âÂÂflatâ c alib r ation fo r seve r al seating p ositions in you r list ening a r ea. Place the mic r op hone at th e r efer ence p oin t indicated on-sc r e en and note that the last microphone plac ement will be at your main l istening position: 3 Connect the microphone to the MCACC SETUP MIC jack on the front panel. Make su r e the r e a r e no obstacles between the s p eaker s and the mic r op ho ne. If you have a t r ip od, use it to p lace the mic r op hone so that itâÂÂs about e a r level at you r no r mal listening p osition. If you do not have a t r ip od, use some othe r object to install t he mic r op hone. 3 4 When youâÂÂre finished setting the options, select START then press ENTER . 5 Follow the instructions on-screen. 6 Wait for the Auto MCACC Setup to finish outputting test tones. A pr og r ess r ep or t is dis p layed on-sc r een while th e r eceiver outp uts test tones to deter mine the sp eaker s pr esent in you r setup . Tr y to be as quiet as p ossible while itâÂÂs doing this. 4 â¢W i t h e rr o r messages (such as Too m uch ambient noise! o r Ch eck microphone ) select RETRY afte r checking fo r ambient noise (see Problems when using the Auto MCACC Setup on p age 40) and ve r ifying the mic connection. If the r e doesnâÂÂt seem to be a pr oblem, you ca n sim p ly select GO NEXT and continue. 7 If necessary, confirm the speaker configuration in the GUI screen. The configu r ation shown on-sc r een should r eflect the actual s p eaker s you have . Note 1⢠W h e n d a t a m e a s u r em ent is taken (after selecting ALL or Keep SP System ), t he r ever b c ha r acter istics data (both befo r e- and afte r - calib r ation) that this r eceive r had been stor ing will be over wr itten. If you want to save the r ever b char acter istics data befor e measur ing, connect a USB memo r y device to this r eceiver and t r ansfer the data. ⢠When measu r eme nt is taken of data othe r than SYMMET RY (afte r se lecting ALL o r Keep SP System ), the data a r e not measur ed af te r the co rr ection. If you will need to mea su r e afte r co rr ection data, take the measu r ement using the EQ P r ofessional menu in the Manual MCACC setu p ( p age 77). ⢠The EQ Pro & S-Wave measu r em ent is also taken when Keep SP Syste m o r E Q Pro & S-Wave is selected. S ee Acoustic Calibration EQ Professional on p age 79 for mor e on this. ⢠Eithe r effec t of Acoustic Calib r ation E Q P r ofessional and Standing Wave can be switched on and off in the r es p ec tive MCACC pr eset . Fo r details, see Setting the Audio options on p age 60. 2 If you selected ALL o r Keep SP System as you r Auto MCACC m enu, you can sp ecify the MCAC C pr eset w he r e you want to save the SYMMETRY , ALL CH ADJ and FRONT ALIGN settings. 1 2 3 2nd r efe r ence p oint 3 r d r efe r ence p oint Main listening p osition 3 It may not be p ossible to measu r e co rr ectly if the mic r op hone is p laced on a table, sofa, etc. 4 Do not adjust the volume du r ing the test tones. This may result in inco rr ect s p eake r settings. PHONES SPEAKERS CONTROL MULTI-ZONE ON/OFF MCACC SETUP MIC PARAMETER ENTER (TUNE) (TUNE) (PRESET) (PRESET) AUDIO VIDEO TUNER EDIT USB HDMI 5 VIDEO CAMERA iPod iPhone AUTO SURR/ALC/ STREAM DIRECT HOME THX STANDARD SURROUND ADVANCED SURROUND STEREO BAND HOME ME NU RETURN Mic r op hone T ri p od SC-1525_UXJC B.book 76 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼ å¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂç«æÂÂæÂÂ¥ ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
The Advanced MCACC menu 10 77 En If no o p er ations a r e p er for med fo r 10 seconds while the s p eake r configu r atio n check sc r een is being dis p layed, the Auto MCACC Setu p w ill r esume autom atically. In this case, you donâÂÂt need to select â OK â and pr ess ENTER in ste p 8. ⢠If you see an ERR me ssage (o r the s p eaker configu r ation dis p la yed isnâÂÂt co rr ect), the r e ma y be a pr oblem with the s p eaker connec tion. If selecting RETRY doesnâÂÂt wo r k, tur n off the p ower and check the s p eaker co nnections. If the r e doesnâÂÂt seem to be a pr oblem, you can sim p ly use ï©/ïª to select the s p eaker and ï«/ï¬ to change the setting and continue. â¢I f Reverse Phase is dis p layed, the s p eaker âÂÂs wi r ing ( an d âÂÂ) may be inve r ted . Check the s p eaker connection s. 1 â If the connections we r e w r on g, tu r n off the p ower , disconnect the p ower co r d, then r econnect pr op er ly. Afte r this, p er fo r m the Fu ll Auto MCACC pr ocedu r e again. â If the connections we r e r ight, select GO NEX T and continue. 8 Make sure â OK â is select ed, then pres s ENTER . A pr og r ess r ep or t is dis p layed on-sc r een while the r eceiver outp uts mor e test tones to deter mine the o p timum r eceive r settings. Again, t r y to be as quiet as p ossible while this is ha pp ening. It may take 3 to 7 minutes. ⢠If you selected a STAND.W AVE Mult i-Point setu p (in ste p 2), you will be asked to p lace the mic at the 2nd and 3 r d r ef e r ence p oints befo r e finally p lacing i t at you r main liste ning p osition . 9 The Auto MCACC Setup procedure i s completed and the Advanced MCACC menu re appears automat ically. The settings made in the Auto MCACC Setu p shoul d give you excellent su rr ound sound f r om yo u r system, but it is also p ossible to adjust these settings manually using the Manual MCACC setu p menu (sta r ting below) o r Manual SP Setup menu (sta r ting on p age 84). 2 You can also choose to view the settings by sele cting individual p ar amete r s f r om the MCACC Data Check sc r een (see Checking MCACC Data on p age 81). P r ess RETURN afte r you have finished checking each sc r een. When youâ r e finished, select RETURN to go back to the Home Menu . Be su r e to disconnect th e mic r op hone f r om this r eceiver u p on com p letion of the Auto MCACC Setu p. Manual MCACC setup You can use the settings in th e Manual MCACC se tu p menu to make detailed adjustments when youâ r e mo r e familia r with the system. Befo r e making th ese settings, you should have al r eady com p leted Automatically conducting optimum sound tuning (Full Auto MCACC) on p age 38. You only need to make these settings once (unless you change the p lacement of you r cu rr ent s p eaker system o r add new s p eaker s). CAUTION ⢠The test tones used in the Manual MC ACC setu p a r e out p ut at high volu me. Important â¢P r ess the MCACC button while the p er tinent setup sc r eens a r e dis p layed to select MCACC pr esets. â¢F o r some of the settings below, youâÂÂll h ave to connect the setu p micr op hone to the f r ont p anel and p lace it about ea r level a t you r no r mal listening p osition. P r ess HO ME MENU to di s p lay the Home Menu befo r e you con nect the mic r op hone to this r eceive r . â¢S e e Proble ms when using the Auto MCACC Setup on p age 40 for notes r egar ding high backgr ound noise levels and othe r p ossible inte r fer ence. â¢I f y o u â r e using a su bwoofer , switch it on and tur n up the volume to the middle p osition. 1S e l e c t â Manual MCACC â from the Advanced MCACC menu. See Making receiver settings fr om the Advanced MCACC menu on p age 75 if youâ r e not a l r eady at this sc r een. 2 Select th e setting you want to adjust . If youâ r e doing this fo r the fi r st time, you might want to make these settings in o r der . ⢠Fine Channel Level â Ma ke fine adjustments to the ove r all balan ce of you r s p eaker system (see Fine Channel Level on p age 78). ⢠Fine SP Distance â Make pr ecise delay settings fo r you r s p eake r system (see Fine S peaker Distance on p age 78). Note 1I f t h e s p eaker is not p ointed to th e mic r op hone (listening p osition) o r when using s p eaker s th at affect the p hase (di p ole s p eaker s, r eflective s p eake r s, etc.) , Reverse Phase may be dis p layed even if the s p eake r s a r e pro pe r ly connected. 2⢠D e p ending on the char acter istics of your r oom, sometimes identical sp eaker s with cone sizes of ar ound 12 cm (5 inches) will end up with diffe r ent size settings. You can co rr ect the setting manually using t he Manual speaker setup on p age 84. ⢠The subwoofe r dist an ce s et ti ng may be fa r ther than the actual distance f r om the listening p osition. This setti n g s hou ld be acc u r ate (taking delay and r oom cha r acter istics into account) and gene r ally does not need to be changed. ⢠If Auto MCAC C Setu p measu r eme nt r esults a r e inco rr ect due to the inte r action of the sp eaker s and viewing envir onme nt, we r ecommend adjusting the settings manually. SC-1525_UXJC B.book 77 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼ å¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂç«æÂÂæÂÂ¥ ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
The Advanced MCACC menu 10 78 En ⢠Standing Wave â Cont r ol over ly r esonant low f r equencies in you r listening r oo m (see Standing Wave on p age 78). The last two settings a r e s p ecifi cally fo r customizing the p ar ameter s exp lained in Acoustic C alibratio n EQ Adjust on p age 79: ⢠EQ Adjust â Manually adjust the f r equen cy balance of you r sp eaker system while listenin g to test tones (see Acoustic Calibration EQ Adjus t on p age 79). ⢠EQ Professional â Calib r ate you r system based on the di r ect sound coming f r om the s p eaker s and make detailed settings acco r ding to you r r oomâÂÂs r ever b cha r acte r istics (see Acoustic Calibration EQ Professional on p age 79). Fine Channel Level â¢D e f a u l t s e t t i n g : 0.0dB (all channels) You can achieve bette r su rr ound sound by pr o pe r ly adjusting t he ove r all balance of you r s p eak er system. You can adjust the Channel Level of ea ch s p eaker in 0.5 dB inc r ements. The following setting can hel p you make detailed adjustments that you may no t achieve using the Manual speaker setup on p age 84. 1 Select â Fine Channel Level â from the Manual MCACC setup menu . The volume inc r eases to the 0.0 dB r efer en ce level. 2 Adjust the level of the left channel. This will b e the r efer ence s p eaker level, so you may want to kee p the level a r ound 0.0dB so that youâÂÂll have p lenty of r oom to adj ust the othe r sp eaker levels. â¢A f t e r pr essing ENTER , test tones will be outp ut. 3 Select each channel in turn and adjust the levels ( / âÂÂ12.0 dB ) as necessary. Use ï«/ï¬ to adjust the volume of the s p eake r you selected to match the r efe r ence s p eaker . When it sounds like both tones a r e the same volume, pr ess ïª to confi r m and continue to the ne xt channel. â¢F o r comp ar iso n p u rp oses, the r efer ence sp eaker will change de p ending on which s p eake r you select. ⢠If you want to go back and adj ust a channel, sim p ly use ï©/ïª to select it. 4 When youâÂÂre finished, press RETURN . You will r etur n to the Manual MCACC setu p menu. Fine Speaker D istance ⢠Default s etting: 10âÂÂ00â (all s p eaker s) Fo r pr o pe r sound de p th and se pa r ation with you r system, it is necess a r y to add a slight bit of delay to some s p eake r s so that all sounds will a rr ive at the listening p osition at the same time. You can adjust the distance of each s p eaker in half inch inc r ements. Th e following setting can hel p you make de tailed ad justments that you may not achieve using the Manual speaker setup on p age 84. 1 Select â Fine SP Distance â from the Manual MCACC setup menu. 2 Adjust the distance of the left channel from the listening position. 3 Select each channel in turn and adjust the dist ance as necessary. Use ï«/ï¬ to adjust the delay of the s p eaker you selected to match the r efer ence s p eake r . Listen to the r efer ence s p eaker and use it to measu r e the ta r get channel. F r om the listening p osit ion, face the two s p eake r s with you r a r ms outst r etched p ointing at ea ch s p eake r . T r y to make the two tones sound as if they a r e a rr iving simultaneously at a p osition s lightly in f r ont of you and between you r ar m s p an. 1 When it sounds like the delay settings a r e matched u p , pr ess ïª to confi r m and continue to the next ch annel. â¢F o r com p ar ison p u rp oses, the r efer ence s p eaker will change de p ending on which s p eaker you select. ⢠If you want to go back and adjust a channel, sim p ly use ï©/ ïª to select it. 4 When youâÂÂre finished, press RETURN . You will r etur n to the Manual MC ACC setu p menu. Standing Wav e ⢠Default s etting: ON 2 / ATT 0.0dB (all filt e r s) Acoustic standing waves occu r when, under ce r tain conditions, sou nd waves f r om your sp eaker system r esonate mutually with sound waves r eflected off the walls in you r listening a r ea. This can have a negative effect on the ove r all sound, es p ecially at ce r tain lowe r f r equenci es. De p ending on s p eaker p lacement, you r listening p osition, and ultimately the shap e of your r oo m, Note 1 ⢠If you canâÂÂt seem to achieve this by adjusting th e distance setting, you may need to change the angle of you r sp eaker s ve r y slightly. ⢠Fo r bet te r audibility, the subwoofe r emits a continuous test tone (oscillating p ulses a r e hea r d f r om you r othe r sp eake r s). Note that it may be difficult to com p ar e this tone with the othe r sp eaker s in your setu p (de p ending on the low f r equency r es p onse of the r efe r ence s p ea ke r ). 2 You can switch on o r off the Standing Wave and Acoustic Calib r ation EQ featu r e in the AUDIO PARAMETER menu. See Setting the Audi o options on p age 60 for mor e on this. SC-1525_UXJC B.book 78 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼ å¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂç«æÂÂæÂÂ¥ ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
The Advanced MCACC menu 10 79 En it r esults in an ove r ly r eso nant (âÂÂboomyâÂÂ) sound. The Standing Wave Cont r ol uses filte r s to r educe the effect of ove r ly r esonant sounds in you r listening a r ea. Du r ing p layback of a sour ce, you can customize the filter s used fo r Standing Wave Cont r ol fo r each of you r MCACC pr esets. 1 1 Select â Standing W ave â from the Manual MCACC setup menu. 2 Adjust the parameters for the Standing Wave Control. ⢠Filter Channel â Select the channel to which you will a pp ly the filte r (s): MAIN (all exce p t cente r ch annel and subwo ofe r ), Cen ter or SW (subwoofer ). ⢠TRIM (only available when the filt er channel abov e is SW ) â Adjust the subwoofe r channel level (to com p ensate fo r the diffe r ence in out p ut p ost-fi lte r ). ⢠Freq / Q / ATT â These a r e the filte r p ar ameter s wher e Freq re pr esents the f r equency you will be ta r geting and Q is the bandwidth (the highe r the Q, the na rr owe r the bandwidth, o r r ange) of the attenu ation ( ATT , the amount of r eduction to the ta r geted f r equency ). 3 When yo uâÂÂre finished, press RETURN . You will r etur n to the Manual MCACC setup me nu. Acoustic Calibration EQ Adjust ⢠Default setting: ON / 0.0dB (all channels/b ands) Acoustic Ca lib r ation E qualization is a kind of r oom equalize r fo r you r s p eake r s (exclud ing the su bwoofe r ). It wo r ks by measu r ing the acoustic c ha r acte r istics of you r r oom and neutr al izing the ambient char acter istics that can colo r the o r iginal sou r ce mate r ial ( pr oviding a âÂÂflatâ equalization setting). If youâ r e no t satisfied with th e adjustment pr ovided in Automatically conducting optimum sound tuning (Full Au to MCACC) on p age 38 o r Automatic MCACC (Expert) on p age 75, you can also adjust these settings manually to get a f r equency balance th at suits you r tastes. 1 Select â EQ Adjust â from the Manual MCACC setup menu. 2 Select the channel(s) you want and adjust to yo ur liking. Use ï©/ïª to select the channe l. Use ï«/ï¬ to select the f r equency and ï©/ïª to boost o r cut the EQ. When youâ r e finished, go ba ck to the to p of the sc r een and pr ess ï« to r etur n to Ch , then use ï©/ïª to select the channe l. â¢T h e OVER! indicato r shows in the disp lay if the f r equency a djustment is too d r astic and migh t disto r t. If this ha pp ens, b r in g the level down until OVER! disa pp ea r s fr om the disp la y. Tip â¢C h a n g i n g t h e f r equency cur ve of one ch annel too d r astically wi ll affect the ove r all balance . If the s p eaker balance seems un even, you can r aise o r lowe r channel levels using te st tones with the TRIM featu r e. Use ï©/ ïª to select TRIM , then use ï«/ï¬ to r aise o r lowe r the channel level fo r the cu rr ent s p eak er . 3 When youâÂÂre finished, press RETURN . You will r etu r n to the Manual MCAC C setu p menu. Acoustic Calibration EQ Professional This setu p m inimizes the unwanted effe cts of r oom r ever ber ation by allo wing you to calib r ate your system based on the di r ect sound coming f r om the s p eaker s. How to use Acoustic Calibration EQ Profes sional If you find that lowe r f r equencie s seem ove r ly r ever ber ant in you r listening r oom (i.e. it sounds âÂÂboomyâÂÂ), o r that diffe r ent chann els seem to exhibit diffe r ent r eve r b cha r acte r is tics (when Ty p e A o r Ty p e B shown on the diag r ams on the following a pp lies), select EQ Pro. & S- Wave (o r ALL ) fo r the Auto MCACC setting in Automatic MCACC (Expert) on p age 75 to calib r ate the r oom automatically. ⢠Type A: Reve rberance of high vs. lo w frequencies ⢠Type B: Reverb cha rac teristics for different channels If the p atter n is as shown above, select the 30-50ms setting. If not, this setting is no t necessa r y. Note 1 S tanding Wave cont r ol filte r settings cannot be chang ed du r ing p layback of sou r ces using the HDMI connection. Level Low f r equencies Acoustic Cal. EQ P r o. calib r ation r ange Time (in msec) 80 160 High f r equencies Conventional MCACC EQ calib r ation r ange 0 Level F r ont L Acoustic Cal. EQ P r o. calib r ation r ange Time (in ms ec) 80 160 F r ont R Conventional MCACC EQ calib r ation r ange 0 SC-1525_UXJC B.book 79 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼ å¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂç«æÂÂæÂÂ¥ ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
The Advanced MCACC menu 10 80 En Using Acoustic Calibration EQ Profess ional 1 Select â EQ Professional âÂÂ, then press ENTER . 2 Select an option and press ENTER . ⢠Reverb Measuremen t â Use this to meas u r e the r ever b char acter istics befor e and a fter calibr ation. ⢠Reverb View â You can check t he r ever b measu r ements made for sp ecified fr equen cy r anges in each ch annel. 1 ⢠Advanced EQ Setup â Use this to select the time p er iod that will be used fo r f r equency adjustment and calib r ation, based on the r eve r b measu r ement of you r listening a r ea. Note that customizing system calib r ation using this setu p will al te r the settings you made i n Automatically conducting optimum sound tuning (Full Auto MCAC C) on p age 38 o r Automatic MCACC (Expert) on p age 75 and is not necessa r y if youâ r e satisfied with these settings. 3 If you selected â Reverb Measurement âÂÂ, select EQ ON or OFF , and then START . The following o p tions dete r mine how the r ever b cha r acte r istics of you r listening a r ea a r e dis p layed i n Reverb View : ⢠EQ OFF â You will see the r eve r b cha r acte r ist ics of you r listening a rea without the equalization p er for med by this r eceiver (befor e calibr ation ). ⢠EQ ON â You will see the r eve r b cha r acte r ist ics of you r listening a rea with the equalization p er fo r med by this r eceiver (afte r calib r ation). 2 Note that the EQ r esp onse may not a pp ear entir ely flat due to adjustments necessa r y fo r you r listening ar ea. 3 When the r ever b measu r ement is finished, you can select Reverb View to see the r esults on-sc r een. See Professional Cal ibratio n EQ graphical output on p age 96 fo r t r oubleshooting info r mation. 4 If you selected â Reverb Vi ew âÂÂ, you can check the reverb characteristics for ea ch channel. Press RETURN when youâÂÂre done. The r eve r b cha r acte r istics a r e dis p layed when the Full Auto MCACC o r Reverb Measurement measu r ements a r e conducted. 4 Use ï«/ï¬ to select the chann el, f r equency and calib r ation setting you want to check. Use ï©/ïª to go back and fo r th between the th r ee. The r eve r b cha r acte r isti cs g r ap h befo r e and afte r EQ calib r ation can be dis p layed by selecting Calibrati on : Before / After . Note that the ma r kers on the ve r tical axis indicate decibels in 2 dB ste p s. 5I f â Advanced EQ Setup â is select ed, select the MCACC memory to be stored, then enter the desired time setting for cali bration, and then select START . 5 Based on the r ever b measu r ement above, you ca n choose the time p er iod that will be used fo r the final f r equency a djustment and calib r ation. Even though you can make thi s settin g without r ever b measu r ement, it is best to use the measu r ement r esults as a r efer ence fo r you r time setting. Fo r an o p timal system calib r ation based on the di r ect sound coming f r om the s p eaker s, we r ecommend using the 30-50ms setting. Use ï«/ï¬ to select the setting. Use ï©/ïª to switch between them. Select the setting f r om the fo llowing tim e p er iods (in milliseconds): 0-20ms , 10-30ms , 20-40ms , 30-50ms , 40- 60ms , 50-70ms and 60-80ms . This setting will be a pp lied to all channels du r ing calib r ation. When youâ r e finished, select START . It will take about 2 to 4 minutes fo r the cali b r ation to f inish. Afte r the Acoustic Cal ib r ation Equalization is set, you a r e given the o p tion to check the settin gs on-sc r een. Note 1I f t h e Reverb View pr ocedu r e is pe r fo r med afte r the Automatically conducting o ptimum sound tuning (Full Auto MCACC) on p age 38 or Reverb Measurement o p er ation, de p ending on the standing wave cont r ol setting, diffe r ences may a pp ea r on the r eve r b g r ap h. With the Auto MCACC function, the r ever ber ations a r e measu r ed with the standing waves cont r olled, so the r eve r b char acter istics g r ap h shows the cha r acte r istics with the effect of the standing waves eliminated. By cont r ast, the Reverb Measurement function measu r es the r ever ber ations without cont r olling the standing waves, so the g r ap h indicates the r ever b cha r acter istics including the effect of th e standing wave s. If you wish to check the r ever b cha r acter istics of the r oom itself (with the standing waves as such), we r ecommend using the Reverb Measurement function. 2 ⢠The calib r ation co rr es p onding to the cu rr ently selected M CACC pr eset will be used when EQ ON is selected. To use anothe r MC ACC pr eset, pr ess MCACC to select the MCACC memo r y you want to stor e. ⢠The pr edicted r ever b cha r acter istics afte r calib r ation can be acqui r ed with the Full Auto MCACC function ( Automati cally conducting optimum sound tu ning (Full Auto MCACC) on p age 38), but he r e the actually measu r ed r ever b char acter istics after calibr ation can be acquir ed. 3A f t e r auto calib r ation with EQ Type : SYMMETRY ( Full Auto MCACC , etc.), the gr ap h for the infe rr ed r ever b ch a r acter istics can b e dis p layed by select ing Reverb View . To dis p lay the actually measu r ed r ever b c ha r acter istics afte r EQ calib r ation, measu r e with EQ ON . 4T h e Afte r dis p lay when measur ements have been made using the Full Au to MCACC o r Auto MCACC ( ALL o r KEEP SP system ) function shows the g r ap h fo r the infe rr ed r ever b cha r acte r istics after EQ Type : SYMMETRY calibr ation. 5T o s p ecify the p lace wher e the MCACC memor y is to be stor ed, pr ess MCACC to select the MCACC memor y you want to stor e. SC-1525_UXJC B.book 80 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼ å¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂç«æÂÂæÂÂ¥ ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
The Advanced MCACC menu 10 81 En Checking MCACC Data At the pr ocedu r e of Automatically cond uc ting optimum sound tuning (Full Auto MCACC) on p age 38, the pr ocedu r e of Automatic MCACC (Expert) on p age 75 or afte r fine-adjusting at Manual MCACC setup on p age 77, you can check you r calib r ated settings using the GUI sc r een. The data can be t r ansfe rr ed to a com p ute r using a USB device to check it on the co m p uter âÂÂs sc r een as well. 1 Press on the remote control, then press HOME MENU . A G r ap hical Use r Inte r face (GUI) sc r een a pp ea r s on you r TV. Use ï©/ïª/ï«/ ï¬ and ENTE R to navigate th r ough the sc r eens and select menu items. P r ess RETURN to confi r m and exit the cu rr ent menu. 2 Select â MCACC Data Check â from the Home Menu . 3 Select the setting you want to check. ⢠Speaker Setting â Used to check the settings of the s p eake r systems. See Speaker Setting on p age 81 fo r mo r e on this. ⢠Channel Level â Used to check the out p ut level of the diffe r ent s p eake r s. See Channel Level on p age 81 fo r mo r e on this. ⢠Speaker Distance â Used to check the distance to the diffe r ent s p eaker s. See Speaker Distance on p age 81 for mor e on this. ⢠Standing Wave â Used to check the standing wave cont r ol filte r settings. See Standing Wave on p age 81 fo r mo r e on th is. ⢠Acoustic Cal EQ â Used to check the calib r ation values of the listening envi r onmentâÂÂs f r equency r esp onse. See Acoustic Cal EQ on p age 81 fo r mo r e on this. ⢠Output MCACC data â See Output MCACC data on p age 82 for mor e on this. 4P r e s s RETURN to go back to the MCACC Data Check menu, repeating steps 2 and 3 to check other settings. 5 When yo uâÂÂre finished, press RETURN . You will r etur n to the Home Menu . Speaker S etting Use this to dis p lay the s p eake r size an d numbe r of s p eake r s. See Speaker Setting on p age 85 fo r mo r e on this. 1 Select â Speaker Setting â from the MCACC Data Check menu. 2 Select the channel you want to check. Use ï©/ïª to select the channel. T he co rr es p ondi ng channel on the layout diag r am is highligh ted. Channel Level Use this t o dis p lay the level of the va r ious channels. See Channel Level on p age 86 fo r mo r e on this. 1S e l e c t â Channel Level â from t he MCACC Data Check menu. 2 When â MCACC â is highlighted, use ï«/ï¬ to select the MCACC preset you want to check. The level of the va r ious channels set at the selected MCACC pr eset is dis p layed. â --- â is disp layed for channe ls that a r e not connected. Speaker D istance Use this to d is p lay the distance f r om the diffe r ent channels to the listening p osition. S ee Speaker Distance on p age 86 fo r mo r e on this. 1S e l e c t â Speaker Distance â from the MCACC Data Check menu. 2 When â MCACC â is highlighted, use ï«/ï¬ to select the MCACC preset you want to check. The distance f r om the va r ious channel s set at the selected MCACC pr eset is dis p layed. â --- â is dis p layed fo r channels that a r e not conn ected. Standing Wave Use this to dis p lay the standing wave r elated adjustment values fo r the va r ious MCACC memo r ies. See Standing Wave on p age 78 fo r mo r e on th is. 1S e l e c t â Standing Wave â from the MCACC Data Check menu. 2 When â Filter Channel â is highlighted, use ï©/ïª to select the channel for which you want to check standing wave control . The standing wave r elated calib r ation value fo r the selected channe l sto r ed at the selected M CACC pr eset and its g r ap h a r e dis p layed. 3P r e s s ï« to highlight â MCACC âÂÂ, then use ï©/ïª to select the MCACC preset you want to check. Acoustic Cal EQ Use this to d is p lay the calib r ation valu es fo r the f r equency r es p onse of the va r ious channels set in the diffe r ent MCACC pr esets. See Acoustic Calibration EQ Adjust on p age 79 for mor e on this. 1S e l e c t â Acoustic Cal E Q â from t he MCACC Data Check menu. 2 When â Ch â is highl ighted, u se ï©/ïª to select the channel. The calib r ation value fo r the f r equency r es p onse of the selected channe l sto r ed at the selected M CACC pr eset and its g r ap h a r e dis p layed. RECEIVER SC-1525_UXJC B.book 81 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼ å¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂç«æÂÂæÂÂ¥ ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
The Advanced MCACC menu 10 82 En 3 Press ï« to highlight â MCACC âÂÂ, then use ï©/ïª to select the MCACC preset you want to check. Output MCACC data Befo r e continuing, make su r e you have com p leted ste p 2 in Checking MCACC Data on p age 81. The da ta measu r ed with the Advanced MC ACC function is t r ansmitted to the USB device. 1 The 3D g r ap hs of the r ever b cha r acter is tics befo r e and afte r calib r ation and the MCACC r esults ( pa r amete r s) can be che cked on y ou r com p ute r. 1 Select â Output MCACC data â from the MCACC Data Check menu. When the r eceiver is r eady fo r tr ansmission, âÂÂPlease connect your U SB memory for the MCACC data, then press OK to output them.â shows on the GUI sc r een. 2 Connect your USB device to the USB terminal on the front panel, then select âÂÂOKâÂÂ. âÂÂPlease wa it...â will be dis p layed on the sc reen and t r ansmission of measu r ement data to the USB device will begin. T r ansmission is com p lete when âÂÂCompleteâ is dis p layed. 2 Data Management This system allows you to sto r e u p to six MCACC pr esets, allowing you to calib r ate you r system fo r diffe r ent listening p osit ions (or f r equency adjustments fo r the same listening p osition). 3 This is useful fo r alte r nate settings to match the kind of sou r ce youâ r e listening to and whe r e youâ r e sitting (fo r exam p le, watching movies f r om a sofa, o r p laying a video game clos e to the TV). F r om this menu you can co p y f r om one pr eset to anot he r , name pr esets fo r easier identificat ion and clear a ny ones you donâÂÂt need. 1 Press on the remote control, then press HOME MENU . A G r ap hical Use r Inte r face (GUI) sc r een a pp ea r s on you r TV. Use ï©/ïª/ï«/ï¬ and ENTER to navigate th r ough th e sc r eens and select menu items. P r ess RETURN to confi r m and exit the cu rr ent menu. 2 Select â Data Management â from the Home Menu . 3 Select the setting you want to adjust. ⢠Memory Rename â Name you r MCACC pr es ets fo r easy identification (see Renaming MCACC presets below). ⢠MCACC Memory Cop y â Co p y settings f r om one MCACC pr eset to anothe r (see Cop ying MCACC preset data on p a ge 83). ⢠MCACC Memory Clear â Clea r any MCACC pr esets that you donâÂÂt want (see Clearing MCACC presets on p age 83). Renaming MCACC presets If you have seve r al diffe r ent MCACC pr esets that youâ r e using, you may want to r ename the m fo r easie r identificat ion. 1 Select â Memory Rename â from t he Data Manageme nt setup menu. 2 Select the MCACC preset you want to rename, then select an appropriate preset name. Use ï©/ïª to select the pr eset, th en ï«/ï¬ to select a pr eset name. 3 Repeat for as many MCAC C presets as necessary, then press RETURN when youâÂÂre fi nished. You will r etur n to the Data Management setu p menu. Note 1 MCACC da ta and p ar ameter s a r e t r ansfe rr ed f r om this r eceive r to a USB device and by connecting the USB device to a com p ute r , the data is im po r ted via the MCACC softwa r e in the com p ute r . See Connecting a USB device for Advanced MCACC output on p age 35 fo r mo r e on this. 2 Only one set of r ever b cha r acter istics is sto r ed on the r eceiver . If you wish to com p ar e seve r al diffe r ent measu r ement r esults, t r ansmit the data to the USB memo r y each time r ever b measu r eme nts a r e taken. 3 This can be done in Automatically conducting optim um sound tuning (Full Au to MCACC) on p age 38 o r Automatic MCACC (Expert) on p age 7 5, eithe r of which you should have al r eady com p leted. RECEIVER SC-1525_UXJC B.book 82 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼ å¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂç«æÂÂæÂÂ¥ ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
The Advanced MCACC menu 10 83 En Copying MCACC preset data If you want to man ually adjust the Acoustic Calib r ation EQ (see Manual MCACC setup on p age 77), we r ecommend cop ying your cu rr ent settings 1 to an unused MCACC pr eset. Instead of just a fla t EQ cu r ve, this will give you a r efer ence p oint f r om which to sta r t. 1 Select â MCACC Memory Cop y â from the Data Manageme nt setup menu. 2 Select the setting you want to copy. ⢠All Data â Co p ies all the settings of the select ed MCACC pr eset memo r y. ⢠Level & Distance â Co p ies only the channel leve l and s p eake r distance settings of the selected MCACC pr eset memo r y. 3 Select the MCACC preset youâÂÂll be copying the settings â From âÂÂ, then specify where you want to copy them (â To âÂÂ). Make su r e you donâÂÂt ove r wr ite an MCACC pr eset youâ r e cu rr ently using (thi s canâÂÂt be undone). 4 Select â OK â to confirm and copy t he settings. When MCACC Memory Copy? is dis p layed, select YES . If NO is selected, the memo r y is not co p ied. Completed ! shows in the GUI sc r een to confir m the MCACC pr eset has been co p ied, then you automatically r etur n to the Data M anagement se tup menu. Clearing MCACC presets If you a r e no long e r using one of the MCACC pr esets sto r ed in memo r y, you can choose to clea r the calib r ation settings of that pr eset. 1 Select â MCACC Memory Clear â from t he Data Manageme nt setup menu. 2 Select the MCACC preset you want to clear. Make su r e you donâÂÂt clea r an MCACC preset youâ r e cu rr ently using (thi s canâÂÂt be undone). 3 Select â OK â to confirm and clear t he preset. When MCACC Memory Clear? is dis p layed, select YES . If NO is selected, the memo r y is not clea r ed. Completed ! shows in the GUI sc r een to confir m the MCACC pr eset has been clea r ed, then you automatically r etur n to the Data M anagement se tup menu. Note 1 T he settings made in Auto matically conducting optimum sound tuning (Full Auto MCACC) on p age 38 o r Automatic MCACC (Expert) on p age 75. SC-1525_UXJC B.book 83 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼ å¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂç«æÂÂæÂÂ¥ ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
The System Setup and Other Setup menus 11 84 En Chapter 11: The System Setup and Other Setup menus Making receiver settings from the System Setup menu The following section desc r ibes how to change the s p eake r- r elated settings manually and m ake va r ious othe r settings ( in p ut selec tion, OSD lan guage select ion, etc.). 1 Switch on the receiver and your TV. Make su r e that the TVâÂÂs video in p ut is set to this r eceiver . 2 Press on the remote cont rol, then press HOME MENU . A G r ap hical Use r Inte r face (GUI) sc r een a pp ea r s on you r TV. Use ï©/ïª/ï«/ï¬ and ENTER to navigate th r ough the sc r eens and select menu items. P r ess RETUR N to confi r m and exit the cu rr ent menu. â¢P r ess HOME MENU at any time to exit the Home Menu . 3 Select â System Setup â from th e Home Menu , then press ENTER . 4 Select the setting you want to adjust. ⢠Manual SP Setu p â Sets the ty p e of connection used fo r su rr ound back te r minals and the size, numbe r distance and ove r all balance of the connected s p eake r s (see Manual speaker setup below). ⢠Input Se tup â S p ecifies what youâÂÂve connected to the digital, HDMI and com p onent video inp uts (see The Input Setup menu on p age 40). ⢠OSD Langu age â The GUI sc r eenâÂÂs dis p lay la nguage can be changed (see Changing the OSD di splay language (OSD Language) on p age 38). ⢠Network Setu p â Conducts the setu p necessa r y to connect thi s unit to the netwo r k (see Network Setup menu on p age 87). ⢠Other Setup â Makes customized settings to r eflect how you a r e using the r eceiver (see The Other Setup menu on p age 89). Manual speaker setup This r eceive r allows you to make detailed settings to o p timize the s u rr ound soun d p er for mance. You only need to make these settings once (unless you change the p lacement of your cu rr ent sp eaker system or add new s p eake r s). These settings a r e designed to customize yo u r system, but if youâ r e satisfied with the settings made in Automatically cond ucting optimum sound tu ning (Full Auto MCACC) on p age 38, it isnâÂÂt necessa r y to make all of these settings. CAUTION ⢠The test tones used in the Manual SP Setup a r e out p ut at high volume. 1 Select â Manual SP Setu p âÂÂ, then press ENTER . See Making receiver sett ings from the System Setup me nu above if youâ r e not a l r eady at this scr een. 2 Select the setting you want to adjust. If you a r e doing this fo r the fi r st time, you may want to adjust these settings in o r de r : ⢠Speaker System â S p ecifies how you a r e using you r su rr ound back s p eake r s ( p age 85). ⢠Speaker Setting â S p ecifies the size and numbe r of s p eake r s youâÂÂve connected ( p age 85). ⢠Channel Le vel â Adjusts the ove r all bala nce of you r s p eake r syste m ( p age 86). ⢠Speaker Distance â S p ecifies the distance of you r s p eake r s f r om th e listening p osition ( p age 86). ⢠X-Curve â Adjusts the tonal balance of you r s p eaker system fo r movie soundt r acks ( p age 87). ⢠THX Audio Setting â S p ecifies whethe r you a r e using a THX s p eaker set u p (p age 87). 3 Make the adjustments necessa ry for each setting, pressing RETURN to confirm after each screen. RECEIVER SC-1525_UXJC B.book 84 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼ å¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂç«æÂÂæÂÂ¥ ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
The System Setup and Other Setup menus 11 85 En Speaker system setting ⢠Default setting: Normal(SB/FH ) The r e a r e seve r al ways you can use the s p eake r te r minals with this r eceiver . In addition to a no r mal home thea te r setu p whe r e they a r e used fo r the f r ont h eight s p eake r s o r f r ont wide s p eake r s, they can be used fo r bi-am p ing the f r ont s p eaker s o r as a n inde p endent s p eaker syste m in anothe r r oom. 1 Select â Speaker System â from the Manual SP Setup menu. See Making receiver settings from the System Setup menu on p age 84 if youâ r e not al r eady at this sc r een. 2 Select the speaker system setting. ⢠Normal(SB/FH) â Select fo r no r mal ho me thea te r use with f r ont height s p eaker s in you r main (s p eaker system A) setu p . ⢠Normal(SB/FW) â Select fo r no r mal home theate r use with f r ont wide s p eaker s in you r main (s p eake r system A) setu p . ⢠Speaker B â Sel ect to use the B s p eaker te r minals to listen to ste r eo p laybac k in anothe r r oom (see Switching the speaker ter minals on p age 63). ⢠Front Bi-Amp â Select this setting if youâ r e bi- am p ing you r f r ont s p eake r s (see Bi-amping your speakers on p age 21). ⢠ZONE 2 â Select to use the (su rr ound back) B s p eake r te r minals fo r an inde p endent syste m in anothe r zone (see Using the MUL TI-ZONE controls on p age 63). 3I f y o u s e l e c t e d Normal(SB/ FH) , Normal(SB/ FW) , or Speaker B in Step 2, select the placement of the surround speakers. In a 7.1-channel su rr ound system with su rr ound s p eake r s p laced di r ectly at the sides of the listening p osition, the su rr ound sound of 5.1-channel sour ces is hea r d f r om the side. This function mixes the sound of the su rr ound s p eake r s with the su rr ound back s p eake r s so that the su rr ound sound is hea r d f r om diagonally to the r ear as it sho uld be. 1 ⢠ON SIDE â Select when the su rr ound s p eake r s is p ositioned r ight beside you. ⢠IN REAR â Select when the su rr ound s p ea ke r is p ositioned ob liquely beh ind you. 4 When â Setting Change? â is display ed, select Yes . If No is selected, the setting is not changed. You will r etu r n to the Man ual SP Setup menu. Speaker S etting Use this s etting to s p ecify you r sp eak er configu r ation (size, numbe r of s p eaker s and c r ossover f r equency) 2 . It is a good idea to make su r e that the settings made in Automatically conducting optimum sound tuning (Full Auto MCACC) on p age 3 8 a r e co rr ect. Note that this setting a pp lies to all MCACC pr esets, and cannot be set inde p endently. 1S e l e c t â Speaker Setting â from the Manual SP Setup menu. 2 Choose the set of speakers that you want to set, then select a speaker size. Use ï«/ï¬ to select the siz e (and n umbe r ) of eac h of the following s p eaker s: 3 ⢠Front â Select LARGE if you r f r ont s p eak e r s r e pr oduce bass fr equencies effectively, or if you didnâÂÂt connect a subwoofe r . Select SMALL to send the bass f r equencies to the subwoofe r . ⢠Center â Select LARGE if you r cente r s p ea ke r r e pr oduces bass fr equencies effectively, or select SMALL to send bass f r equenci es to the othe r s p eake r s o r subwoofe r . If you didnâÂÂt connect a c ente r s p eake r , choose NO (the cente r c hannel is sent to the f r ont s p eaker s). ⢠FH â Select LARGE if you r f r ont height s p eake r s r e pr oduce bass fr eque ncies effectively, o r sel ect SMALL to send bass f r equenci es to the othe r s p eake r s o r subwo ofe r . If you didnâÂÂt connect f r ont height s p eake r s, ch oose NO (the f r ont height channel is sent to th e f r ont s p eaker s). 4 ⢠FW â Select LARGE if you r f r ont wide s p eake r s r e pr oduce bass fr equencies effectively, or select SMALL to send bass f r equenci es to the othe r s p eake r s o r subwo ofe r . If you didnâÂÂt connect f r ont wide s p eaker s, choose NO (the f r ont wide channel is sent to the f r ont s p eaker s). 5 Note 1D e p ending on th e p ositions of the s p eaker s and the sound sou r ce, in some cases it may not be p ossible to achieve good r esults. In th is case, set the setting to ON SIDE o r IN REAR. 2I f y o u â r e using a THX sp eaker setup , set all sp eaker s to SMA LL . 3 I f you select SMALL fo r the f r ont s p eaker s the subwoofe r will automatically be fixed to YES . Also, the ce nte r , su rr ound, su rr ound back, f r ont height and f r ont wide s p eaker s canâÂÂt be set to LARGE if the f r ont sp eaker s ar e set to SMA LL . In this case, all bass f r equencies ar e sent to the subwoofe r . 4 ⢠You can adjust this setting only when Speaker Sy stem setting is Norm al(SB/FH) . ⢠If the su rr ound s p eaker s ar e set to NO , this se tting will automatically be set to NO . 5 ⢠Yo u can adjust this setting only when Speaker System setting is Normal(SB/FW) . ⢠If the su rr ound s p eaker s ar e set to NO , this se tting will automatically be set to NO . SC-1525_UXJC B.book 85 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼ å¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂç«æÂÂæÂÂ¥ ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
The System Setup and Other Setup menus 11 86 En ⢠Surr â Select LARGE if you r su rr ound s p eake r s r e pr oduce bass fr equencies effectively. Select SMALL to send bass f r equencies to the other s p eake r s o r subwoofe r . If you didnâÂÂt connect su rr ound s p eake r s choose NO (the sound of the su rr ound chann els is sent t o the f r ont s p eake r s o r a subwoofe r ). ⢠SB â Select the numbe r of su rr ound back s p eaker s you have (one, two o r non e). 1 Select LARGEx2 o r LARGEx1 if you r su rr ound back sp eaker s r e pr oduce bass f r equencies effectively. Select SMALLx2 o r SMALLx1 to send bass f r equencies to the other s p eake r s o r subwoofe r . If you didnâÂÂt connect su rr ound back s p eake r s choose NO . ⢠SW â LFE signals and bass f r equencies of channels set to SMALL a r e out p ut f r om the subwoofe r when YES is selected. Choose the PLUS setting if you want the subwoofe r to out p ut bass sound contin uously o r you want dee p er bass (the bass f r equencie s that would no r mally come out the f r ont and cen te r s p eake r s a r e also r outed to the subwoofe r ). 2 If you did not connect a subwoofe r cho ose NO (the bass f r equencies a r e out p ut f r om othe r s p eake r s). 3 Select â X. OVER â and set the crossover frequency. 3 F r equenc ies below th is p oint will be sent to the subwoofe r (o r LARGE sp eake r s). 4 When youâÂÂre finished, press RETURN . You will r etur n to the Manual SP Setup menu. Channel Level Using the cha nnel level setting s, you can adj ust the ove r all balance of you r s p eake r system, an im p or tant facto r when setting u p a hom e theate r system. 1 Select â Channel Level â from the Manual SP Setup menu. The test tones will sta r t. 2 Adjust the level of each channel using ï«/ï¬ . Use ï©/ïª to switch s p eake r s. Adjust the level of each s p eaker a s the test tone is emitted. 4 3 When youâÂÂre finished, press RETURN . You will r etur n to the Manual SP Setup menu. Tip ⢠You can change th e channel levels by pr ess RECEIVER , then pr ess CH LEVEL , and then using ï«/ ï¬ on the r emo te contr ol. Speaker Di stance Fo r good sound de p th and se p ar ation f r om you r system, you need to s p ecify the distance of yo u r sp eaker s f r om the listening p ositio n. The r eceiver can then add the pr o pe r delay needed fo r effective su rr ound sound. 1 Select â Speaker Distance â from t he Manual SP Setup menu. 2 Adjust the distance of each speaker using ï«/ï¬ . You can adjust the dista nce of each s p eaker in 1 / 2 inch Inc r ements. 3 When youâÂÂre finished, press RETURN . You will r etur n to the Manual SP Setup menu. Tip â¢F o r best su rr ound sound, make su r e the su rr ound back s p eaker s a r e the same distance f r om the listening p osition. Note 1 ⢠If you selected ZONE 2 o r Front Bi-Amp (in Speaker system setting on p age 85) you canâÂÂt adjust the su rr ound back settings. ⢠If the su rr ound s p eaker s a r e set to NO , the su rr ound back s p eaker s will automatically be set to NO . 2 If you have a subwoofe r and like lots of bass, it may seem logical to select LARGE fo r you r fr ont s p eaker s and PLUS fo r the subwoofe r . This may not, howeve r , yield the best bass r esults. De p ending on the s p eaker p lacement of you r r oom you may actually ex p er ience a dec r ease in the amount of bass due low f r equency cancellations. In this case, t r y ch anging the p osition o r di r ection of s p eaker s. If you canâÂÂt get good r esults, listen to the bass r es p onse with it set to PLUS and YES or the f r ont s p eaker s set to LARGE and SMALL alte rnatively and let you r ea r s judge which sounds best. If youâ r e having pr oblems, the easie st o p tion is to r oute all the bass sounds to the subwoofe r by selecting SMAL L fo r the f r ont s p eake r s. 3 ⢠This setting decides the cutoff between bass sounds p laying back f r om the s p eake r s selected as LARGE , o r the subwoofe r , and bass sounds p laying back fr om those selected as SMALL . It also decides whe r e the cutoff will be for bass sounds in the LFE channel. ⢠With Full Auto MCACC Setu p or Auto MCACC Setu p ( ALL or Speaker Setting ), the setting her e will not a pp ly and the c r ossover fr equency will be automatically set. C r ossover f r equency is a f r equency aimed at achieving the o ptimal sound field taking into account the bass ca p acity of all connected s p ea ke r s and human au r al cha r acte r istics. ⢠If youâ r e using THX s p eaker s, confi r m that the c r ossover f r equency is set to 80Hz . 4I f y o u a r e using a Sound Pr essur e Level (SPL) meter , take the r eadings fr om your main listening p osition and adjust the level of each sp eaker to 75 dB SPL (C-weighting/slow r eading). SC-1525_UXJC B.book 86 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼ å¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂç«æÂÂæÂÂ¥ ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
The System Setup and Other Setup menus 11 87 En X-Curve Most so undt r acks mixed fo r cinema sound too b r ight when p layed back in lar ge r ooms. The X-Cur ve sett ing acts as a kind of r e-equalization fo r home theater listening, and r estor es pr op e r tonal balance of movie so undtr acks. 1 1 Select â X-Curve â from the Manual SP Setup menu. 2 Choose the X-Curve setting you want. Use ï«/ï¬ to adjust the setting. The X-Cu r ve is ex pr essed as a downwa r ds slo p e in decibels p er octave, sta r ting at 2 kHz. The sound becomes less b r ight as the slo p e inc r eases (to a maximum of âÂÂ3.0dB/oct ). Use the following guidel ines to set the X-Cu r ve acco r ding to you r r oom size: â¢I f y o u s e l e c t OFF , th e f r equency cu r ve will be flat and the X-Cu r ve has no effect . 3 When yo uâÂÂre finished, press RETURN . THX Audio Setting This menu allow s the use r t o a d j u s t v a r ious THX featu r es includ ing Loudness Plu s, SBch pr ocessing, SB S p eaker Position, THX Select2 Sub woofe r (on /off), and Bounda r y Gain Cont r ol . Please see p age 103 fo r details r egar ding these THX featu r es. 1 Select â THX Audio Setting â from t he Manual SP setup menu. 2 Select either ON or OFF for the THX Loudness Plu s setting. 3 Specify whether the SBch processing is AUTO or MANUAL. ⢠AUTO â When su rr ound back s p eaker s a r e connected, whethe r o r not su rr ound back channel signals a r e pr esent in the audio signals being in p ut is detected and the a ppr opr iate THX su rr ound mode is set. ⢠MANUAL â The desi r ed THX su rr ound mode can be selected rega r dless of whethe r o r not su rr ound back channel sign als a r e pr esent in the au dio signals being in p ut. 4 Specify the distance of your sur round back speakers from each other. ⢠0âÂÂ1 ft â Su rr ound back s p eake r s withi n 1 foot a p ar t. ⢠>1âÂÂ4 ft â Su rr ound back s p eake r s between 1 and 4 feet a p ar t. ⢠4 ft< â Su rr ound back s p eake r s m o r e than 4 feet a pa r t (default). 5 Specify whether your subwo ofer is Select2 certified or not. If you r subwoofe r isnâÂÂt THX Select2 c e r tified, but you still want to switch bounda r y gain com p ensation on, select YES he r e, but the effect might not wor k pr op er ly. 6 Select either ON or OFF for Boundar y Gain Compensation setting. 7 When youâÂÂre finished, press RETURN . You will r etu r n to the Man ual SP Setup menu. Network Setup menu Setting u p the netwo r k to listen to Inte r net r adio on this r eceiver . 1 Press on t he remote control, then press HOME MENU . A G r ap hical Use r Inte r face (GUI) sc r een a pp ea r s on you r TV. Use ï©/ïª/ï«/ï¬ and ENTER to navigate th r ough the sc r eens and select men u items. P r ess RETURN to confi r m and exit the cu rr ent menu. 2S e l e c t â System Setup â from the Home Menu . 3S e l e c t â Network Setup â from the System Setup menu. 4 Select th e setting you want to adjust . If you a r e doin g this fo r the fi r st time, you may want to adjust these settings in o r der : ⢠IP Address, Proxy â Sets u p the IP add r ess/P r oxy of this r eceive r ( p age 8 8). ⢠Information â Checks the MAC add r ess and the fi r mwa r e ve r sion of the Netwo r k section of this r eceiver (p age 88). ⢠Network Standby â Allows the Web Cont r ol function to be used even when the r eceive r is in the standby mode ( p age 88). Note 1S i n c e t h e pr inci p al is the same, X-Cu r ve isnâÂÂt a pp lied when youâ r e using any of the Home THX o r Pu r e di r ect modes. Room size (ft 2 ) ⤠400 ⤠550 ⤠650 ⤠800 ⤠2200 ⤠1 2000 X-Curve (dB/oct) âÂÂ0.5 âÂÂ1.0 âÂÂ1.5 â 2.0 âÂÂ2.5 âÂÂ3.0 RECEIVER SC-1525_UXJC B.book 87 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼ å¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂç«æÂÂæÂÂ¥ ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
The System Setup and Other Setup menus 11 88 En IP address/Proxy setting In case the r outer connected to the LAN te r minal on this r eceiver is a br oadband r outer (with a built-in DHCP se r ve r function), sim p ly tu r n on the DHC P se rve r function, and you will not need to set u p the netwo r k manually. You must set u p the netwo r k as desc r ibed below only when you ha ve connected this r eceiver to a b r oadband r oute r without a DHCP se r ve r fun ction. Befo r e you set u p the netwo r k, consult with you r ISP o r the netwo r k manage r fo r the r equir ed settin gs. It is advised that you also r efer to th e o p er ation manua l su pp lied with you r netwo r k com p onent. 1 IP Address The IP add r ess to be ente r ed must be defined within the following r anges. If the IP addr ess defined is beyond the following r anges, you cannot listen to Inte r net r adio stations. Class A: 10.0.0.1 to 10.255.255.254 Class B: 172.16.0.1 to 172.31.255.254 Class C: 192.168.0.1 to 192.168.255.254 Subnet Mask In ca se an x DS L m o de m o r a te r minal ada p te r is di r ectly connected to this r eceiver , ente r the subnet ma sk pr ovided by you r ISP on p ap er . In most case s, ente r 255.255.255.0. Default Gateway In case a gateway ( r outer ) is connected to this r eceiver , ente r the co rr es p onding IP add r ess. Primary DNS Server/Secondary DNS Server In case the r e is only on e DNS se r ver add r ess pr ovided by you r ISP on p ap er , ente r it in the âÂÂPrimary DNS Serverâ field. In case the r e a r e mo r e than two DNS se r ve r ad d r esses, ente r â Secondary DNS Serverâ in the othe r DNS se r ver add r ess fi eld. Proxy Hostname/Proxy Port This setting is r equir ed w hen you conne ct this r eceiver to the Inte r net via a pr oxy se r ve r . Enter th e IP add r ess of you r pr oxy se rve r in the âÂÂProxy Hostnameâ field. Also, ente r the p or t numbe r of you r pr oxy se r ve r in the âÂÂProxy Portâ field. Tip â¢P r ess ï©/ïª or the numer ic bu ttons to ent er al p hanume r ic cha r acte r s. To delete al p hanume r ic ch a r acte r s en te r ed one at a tim e, pr ess CLEAR . 1 Select â IP Address, Proxy â from the Network Setup menu. 2 Select the DHCP setting you want. When you select ON, the netwo r k is automatically set u p , and you do not need to fo llow Ste p s 3. P r oceed with Ste p 4. If the r e is no DHCP se r ver on th e netwo r k and you select ON , this r eceiver will use its own Auto IP function to dete r mine the IP add r ess. 2 3 Enter th e IP Addre ss , Subnet Mask , Default Gateway , Primary DNS Server and Secondary DNS Server . P r ess ï©/ïª to select a numbe r and ï«/ï¬ to move the cu r so r . 4 Select â OFF â or â ON â for the Enable Proxy Server setting to deactivate or a ctivate the proxy server. In case you select âÂÂOFFâ , pr oceed with Ste p 7. In case you select âÂÂONâ , on the ot he r hand, pr ocee d with Ste p 5. 5 Enter the address of your proxy server or the domain name. 6 Enter the port number of your proxy ser ver. Use the nume r ic buttons to ente r the p or t num be r . 7 Select â OK â to confirm the IP Address/Proxy setup. Checking the MAC address You can check the MAC add r ess. 1 Select â Information â from the Network Setup menu. Network Standb y This setting allows the Web Control functi on ( p age 65) fo r o p er ating the r eceive r f r om a com p ute r connected on the same LAN as the r eceiver to be used even when the r eceiver is in the standby mode. 1 Select âÂÂNetwork Standbyâ from the Network Setup menu. 2 Specify whether the Network Standby i s ON or OFF. ⢠ON â The Web Cont r ol function can be used even when the r eceiver is in the standby mode. ⢠OFF â The Web Cont r ol function cannot be used when the r eceiver is in the standby mode (This lets you r educe p owe r consum p tion in the standby mode). Note 1 In case you make changes to the netwo r k configu r ation without the DHCP se r ver function, make th e co rr es ponding changes to the netwo r k settings of this r eceiver . 2T h e I P a d d r ess deter mined by the Auto IP function i s 169 .254.X.X. You cannot listen to an Inter net r adio station if the IP addr ess is set for the Auto IP function. SC-1525_UXJC B.book 88 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼ å¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂç«æÂÂæÂÂ¥ ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
The System Setup and Other Setup menus 11 89 En The Other Setup menu The Other Setu p menu is whe r e you can make customized set tings to r eflect h ow you a r e using th e r eceiver . 1 Press on the remote control, then press HOME MENU . A G r ap hical Use r Inte r face (GUI) sc r een a pp ea r s on you r TV. Use ï©/ïª/ï«/ ï¬ and ENTE R to navigate th r ough the sc r eens and select menu items. P r ess RETURN to confi r m and exit the cu rr ent menu. 2 Select â System Setup â from the Home Menu . 3 Select â Other Setup âÂÂ, then press ENTER . 4 Select the setting yo u wa nt to adjust. If you a r e doing this fo r the fi r st time, you may want to adjust these settings in o r der : ⢠HDMI Setup â Synch r onizes this r eceive r with you r Pionee r com p onent su pp o r ting Control with HDMI ( p age 57). ⢠Volume Se tup â Sets u p the volum e- r elated o pe r ations of this r eceive r (see below) . ⢠Remote Control Mode Setup â Sets this r eceive r âÂÂs r emote contr ol mode (see below). ⢠Flicker Reductio n â Adjusts the way the GUI sc r een looks ( p age 90). ⢠EXTENSION Setup â Allows the CU-RF100 to be used even when the r eceiver is in the standby mode ( p age 90). ⢠Multi Ch In Se tup â S p ecifies the o p tional settings fo r a multi-channel in p ut ( p age 90). ⢠Pairing Blueto oth Setup â Use to p ai r a Bluetooth ADAPTER and Bluetooth wi r eless technology device ( p age 51). 5 Make the adjustments necessary for ea ch setting, pressing RETURN to confirm after each screen. Volume Setup You can set the maximum volume of this r eceiver or s p ecify what the volume level will be when the p owe r is tu r ned on. 1S e l e c t â Volume Setup â from the Other Setup menu. 2 Sele ct the Power ON Level setting you wa nt. The volume can b e set so th at it is always set to the same level when the r eceiver âÂÂs p ower is tu r ned o n. ⢠LAST (default) â When the p owe r is tu r ned on, the volume is set to the same level as when the p ower was last tu r ned off. â¢â --- â â When th e p ower is tur ned on, the volume is set to minimum level. ⢠âÂÂ80.0dB to 12. 0dB â S p ecify the volum e to be set when the p ower is tu r ned on, in st e p s of 0 .5 dB. It is not p ossible to set a volume level g r eater than the value s p ecified at Volume Limit setu p (see below). 3 Sele ct the Volume Limit setting you want. Use this function to limi t the maximum volume. The volume cannot be inc r eased above the level set he r e, even by o p er ating MASTER VOLUME button (or the dial on the f r ont p an el). ⢠OFF (default ) â The maximum volume is not limited. ⢠âÂÂ20.0dB/ âÂÂ10.0d B / 0.0dB â The maximum volume is limited to the value set he r e. 4 Sele ct the Mute Level setting you want. This sets how much the volume is to be tu r ned down when MUTE is pr essed. ⢠FULL (default) â No sound. ⢠âÂÂ40.0dB/ âÂÂ20.0d B â The volume will be tu r ned dow n to the level s p ecified he r e. 5 When youâÂÂre finished, press RETURN . You will r etu r n to the Other Setup menu. Remote Control Mode Setup ⢠Default setting: 1 This sets this r eceiver âÂÂs r emote cont r ol mode to pr event e rr oneous o pe r ation when mul ti p le units of the r e ceiver a r e being used. 1S e l e c t â Remote Control Mode Setup â from t he Other Setup menu. 2 Select the Remote Control Mode setting you want. 3S e l e c t â OK â to change the remote control mode. 4 Follow the instructions on the screen to change the remote co ntrolâÂÂs settin g. See Operatin g multip le receivers on p age 67. 5 When youâÂÂre finished, press RETURN . You will r etu r n to the Other Setup menu. RECEIVER SC-1525_UXJC B.book 89 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼ å¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂç«æÂÂæÂÂ¥ ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
The System Setup and Other Setup menus 11 90 En Flicker Reduction Setup â¢D e f a u l t s e t t i n g : OFF The GUI sc r eenâÂÂs r esolution can be inc reased. If you feel the GUI sc r een is ha r d to see, tr y changing this setting. Note that the r esolution in this set ting only affects the GUI sc r een; it has no influence on the video out p ut. 1 Select â Flicker Reductio n Setup â from the Other Setup menu. 2 Select the Flicker Reduction setting you want. 3 When youâÂÂre finished, press RETURN . You will r etur n to the Other Setup menu. EXTENSION Setup â¢D e f a u l t s e t t i n g : OFF The CU-RF100 can be used to o p er ate the r eceiver by RF communications. To do so, set the EXTENSION setting to ON . When ON is set he r e, the r eceiver can be op er ated even when the r eceiver is in the standby mode. 1 Select â EXTENSION Setup â from the Other Setup menu. 2 Select the EXTENSION setting you want. 3 When youâÂÂre finished, press RETURN . You will r etur n to the Other Setup menu. Multi Channel Input Setup You can adjust the level of th e subwoofe r fo r a multi- channel in p ut. Al so, when the multi- channel inp ut is selected as an in p ut function, you can dis p lay the video images of othe r in p ut fu nctions. In the Multi C hannel In p ut Setu p , you can assign a video in p ut to the multi- channel in p ut. 1 Select â Multi Ch In Setup â from the Other Setup menu. 2 Select the â SW Input Gain â setting you want. ⢠0dB â Out p uts sound of the subwoofe r at the level o r iginally r eco r ded on the sou r ce. ⢠10dB â Out p uts sound of the subwoofe r at the level inc r eased by 10 dB. 3 Select the â Video Inpu t â setting yo u want. When the multi-channel in p ut is select ed as an in p ut function, you can dis p lay the video images of o the r in p ut functions. The video in p ut can be selected f r om the following: DVD , TV/SAT , DVR/BDR , VIDEO , OFF . 4 When youâÂÂre finished, press RETURN . You will r etur n to the Other Setup menu. SC-1525_UXJC B.book 90 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼ å¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂç«æÂÂæÂÂ¥ ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Additional in formation 12 91 En Chapter 12: Additional information Speaker Setting Guide In o r der to achieve an even bette r su rr ound effect, it is im p or tant to accu r ately p ositio n the sp eaker s and make thei r volume an d tone cha r acte r istics unifo r m so as to finely focus t he multi-channe l sound. The th r ee majo r elements in p ositioning the s p eak er s a r e distance , an gle and orientatio n (the di r ection in which the s p eaker s a r e p ointing). Distance : The distance of all the s p eaker s should be equal. Angle : The s p eaker s should be hor izontally symm etr ical. Orientation : The o r ientation should be ho r izontall y symmet r ical. In most homes, howeve r , it is not p ossible to achieve this envi r onment. Fo r the distanc e, on this r eceiv e r it is p os sible to aut omatically co rr ect the s p eake r distance elect r ically to a pr ec ision of 1 / 2 inch using the Full Auto MCACC Setu p function ( p age 38). Step 1: Speaker layout and dist ance adjustment Use s p eaker stands o r the like to make su r e the s p eaker s a r e steady, and leave at least 10 cm (4 inches) f r om the su rr ounding walls. Position the s p eake r s attentively so that the s p eaker s on the left and r ight a r e at equal angles f r om the listeni ng p osition (cente r of the adjustments). (We r ecomm end using co r ds, etc., wh en adjusting the layout.) Ideally all the s p eaker s should be equidistant f r om the listeni ng p osition. Tip â¢I f t h e s p eaker s cannot be set at equal d istances (on a ci r cle), use th e Auto MCACC Set u p s p eaker distance co rr ection and Fine S p eake r D istance functions to make them equalize the distance a r ti ficially . Step 2: Adjust ing the speak er height Adjust the heights (angles) of the diffe r en t s p eaker s. Adjust so that the f r ont s p eaker units r e pr oducing mid- and high f r equencies is roughly at th e height of the ea r s. If the cente r s p eaker cannot be set at the same height as the f r ont s p eaker s, adjust its angle of elevation to p oint it to the listen ing p ositio n. Set su rr ound s p eake r 1 so that it is not unde r the height of the ea r s. Step 3: Adjusting the speaker orientation If the left and r ight s p eaker s a r e not pointing in the same di r ection, the tone will not be the same on the r ight and left, and as a r esult th e sound field will not be r e pr oduced pr o pe r ly. Howeve r , if all the s p eake r s a r e p ointed towa r ds the listening p osition, the sound field will seem c r amp ed. Testing by the Pion ee r Multi-chann el Resea r ch G r oup has shown that a good sense of sound p ositioning can be achieved by p ointing all the s p eake r s towa r ds an a r ea 30 cm to 80 cm (12 inches to 31 inch es) behind the listening p osition (between the su rr o und s p eake r s and the listeni ng p ositio n). Howeve r , the sense of sound p ositioning can diffe r acco r ding to the conditions in the r oom and the s p eake r s being used. In smalle r en vi r onments in p ar ticula r (when the f r ont s p eaker s a r e close to the listening p osition), with this method the s p eaker s will be p ointed to o inwa r d. We suggest you use this exam p le of installa tion as r efer ence when tr ying out differ e nt installation methods. Step 4: Positioning and adjusting the subwoof er Placing the subwoofe r between the cente r and f r ont s p eake r s makes even music sou r ces sound mo r e natu r al (if the r e is only one subwoo fer , it doesnâÂÂt matte r if it is p laced on the le ft or r ight side). The low bass sound out p ut f r om the subwoofe r is not di r ectional an d the r e is no need to adjust the height. N o r mally the subwoofe r is p laced on the floor . Put it in a p osition at whic h it will n ot cancel out the bass sound out p ut f r om the othe r s p eake r s. Also note that p lacing it nea r a wall may r esult in sym p athetic vib r ations with the bu ilding th at could excessively am p lify the bass sound. If the subwoofe r must be installed nea r a wall, p lace it at an angle so that it is not p ar a llel to th e wall su r fa ce. This can hel p r educe any sym p athetic vib r at ions, b ut de p ending on the sha p e of the r oom this c ould r esult in standing waves. Howeve r , even if standing waves a r e gene r ated, thei r influ ence on the soun d quality can be pr evented using the Auto MCACCâÂÂs standing wave cont r ol function ( p age 81). Step 5: Default settings with the Auto MCACC Setup (auto sound field correction) func tion It is mo r e effective to p er for m the Full Auto MC ACC Setu p ( p age 38) pr ocedu r e once the adju stments desc r ibed above have been com p leted. Tip ⢠The distance to the subwoofe r may be slightly la r ge r than the dista nce actually measu r ed with a ta p e measu r e, etc. This is because this distance is co rr ected fo r elect r ic dela y, and is not a pr oblem. SC-1525_UXJC B.book 91 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼ å¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂç«æÂÂæÂÂ¥ ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Additional information 12 92 En Positional relationship betw een speakers and monitor Position of front speakers and monitor The f r ont s p eaker s should be as equidistant as p ossible to the monito r . Position of center speaker and m onitor Since mostly dialogs a r e out p ut f r om the center s p eaker , kee p ing the cen te r s p eake r as close as p ossible to the sc r een makes the ove r all sound mo r e natu r al. Fo r TVs using B r aun tubes, howeve r , when installing the cente r s p eake r on the flo o r , adjust its angle of elevation to p oint it towa r ds the listening p o sition. â¢I f t h e c e n t e r s p eaker is not of the shielded typ e, install it away f r om the TV. ⢠When installing the cente r sp eaker on to p of the monito r , p lace it facing slight ly downwa r ds towa r ds the listening p osition. Troubleshootin g Inco rr ect o p er ations a r e often mistaken fo r t r ouble and malfunctions. If you think that the r e is something w r ong with this com p onent, check the p oints below. Sometimes the t r ouble may lie in anothe r com p onen t. Investigate the othe r com p onents and elect r ical a pp liances being used. If the t r ouble cannot be r ectified even afte r exe r cising the checks listed below, ask you r nea r est Pionee r autho r ized inde p endent se r vice com p any to ca rr y out r ep ai r wo r k. Note ⢠If the unit does not o p er ate no r mally due to exte r nal effects such as static elect r icity disconnect the p ower p lug f r om the outlet a nd inse r t again to r etu r n to no r mal o pe r at ing condition s. Power TV L R 45ð to 60ð Installation on floo r (Diag r am as seen f r om the side) Monito r Sympt om Remedy The p owe r does not tu r n on. ⢠Make su r e that th e p ower cor d is p lugged in to an active p owe r outlet. ⢠T r y disconnecting f r om th e p ower outlet, then p lugging back in. Powe r cannot be tu r ned off. ( ZONE 2 ON o r ZONE 3 ON is dis p layed.) ⢠P r ess the r emote cont r olâÂÂs ZONE 2 or ZONE 3 , then pr ess ïµ RECEI VER to switch the su b zone off. The r ece iver suddenly switches off o r the iPod iPhone indicato r blinks. ⢠Check that the r e a r e no loose st r ands of s p eaker wi r e touching the r ear p anel o r anoth e r set of wi r es. If so, r e-attach the s p eaker wi r es, making su r e the r e a r e no str ay st r an ds. ⢠The r eceiver may have a se r ious pr oblem. Disconnect f r om the p ower and call a Pionee r author ized inde p endent ser vice com p any. Du r ing loud p layback the p ower suddenly switches off. ⢠Tu r n down the volume. ⢠Lowe r the 63 Hz and 125 Hz equalize r levels in the Manual MCACC setup on p age 77. ⢠Switch on the digital safety featu r e. While holding d own ENTER on the f r ont p anel, pr ess ïµ STANDBY/ON to set this r ec eive r to the standby mode. Use TUNE ï©/ïª to select D.SAFETY ï£ OFFï¤ , and the n use PRESET ï«/ï¬ to select 1 o r 2 (select D .SAFETY ï£ OFF ï¤ to deactivate this featu r e). If the p owe r switches off even with 2 switched on, tu r n down the volume. With 1 o r 2 on, some feat u r es may be unavailable. The unit does not r esp ond when the buttons a r e pr essed. ⢠T r y switching the r eceiver off, th en back on again. ⢠T r y disconnecting the p ower co r d, then conne ct again. SC-1525_UXJC B.book 92 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼ å¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂç«æÂÂæÂÂ¥ ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Additional in formation 12 93 En No sound AMP ERR blinks in the dis p lay, then the p ower automa tically switches off. The ADVANCED MCACC blinks and the p ower does not tu r n on. ⢠The r eceiver may have a se r ious pr o blem. Do not t r y switching the r ece iver on. Unp lug the r eceiver f r om the wall an d call a Pionee r autho r ized inde p endent se r vice com p any. The PQLS flashes and p owe r tu r ns off. ⢠The r e is a pr oblem with the r eceiver âÂÂs p ower unit o r fan. T r y tu r ning on th e p ower afte r 1 minute. If the same th ing ha pp ens, the r eceiver is d amaged. Un p lug the r eceiver fr om the wall and call a Pionee r autho r ized inde p endent se r vice comp any. (Ot he r sym p toms may a pp ea r when the p ower is tu r ned on.) OVERHEAT blinks in the dis p lay o r AMP OVERHEAT and the indi cato r at the c ente r of the r ecei ver flash and the p ower tur ns off. ⢠Allow the unit to cool down in a well-ventilated p lace be fo r e switching back on. ⢠Wait at le ast 1 minute, then t r y tu r ning the p ower on again. The r eceive r suddenly p owe r off o r ADVANCED MCA CC flashes. ⢠The p ower unit is dama ged. Un p lug the r eceive r f r om the wall and call a Pionee r autho r ized inde p endent se r vice com p any. Dis p lay blinks 12V TRG ERR .⢠A n e rr o r has a r isen in the 12 V t r igge r jacks. Reconne ct accu r ately then tu r n the p ower back on. Symptom Remedy No sound is out p ut when an in p ut function is selected. No sound is out p ut f r om the f r ont s p eake r s. ⢠Check the vo lume, mute settin g ( pr ess MUTE ) and s p eaker settin g ( pr ess SPEAKERS ). ⢠Make su r e the co rr ect in p u t function is selected. ⢠Check that th e MCACC setu p micr op hone is d isconnected. ⢠Make su r e the co rr ect in p u t signal is selected ( pr ess SIGNAL SEL ). Note th at when PCM is selected, you wonâÂÂt be able to hea r any othe r signal fo r mat. ⢠Check that th e sou r ce comp onent is connected pr o pe r ly (see Connecting your equipment on p age 16). ⢠Check that the s p eaker s a re connected pr o pe r ly (see Connecting the speakers on p age 1 9). No sound f r om the su rr ound o r cente r s peake rs. ⢠Check that the Ste r eo listening mo de o r the F ront Stage Su rr ound Advance mode isnâÂÂt selected; select one of the su rr ound listening modes (see Listening in surround sound on p ag e 53) . ⢠Check that th e su rr ound/cente r sp eaker s a r e not set to NO (see Speaker Setting on p age 85) . ⢠Check the chann el level settings (se e Channel Level on p age 86). ⢠Check the s p eaker conn ections (see Conn ecting th e speakers on p age 19). No sound f r om su rr ou nd back s p eake r s. ⢠Check that th e su rr ound back s p eake r s ar e set to LAR GE or SMALL , and the su rr ound sp eaker s a r e not set to NO (see Speaker Settin g on p age 85) . ⢠Check the s p eaker conn ections (see Conn ecting th e speakers on p age 19). If only one su rr ound back s p eaker is connected, m ake su r e itâÂÂs connec ted to the lef t channel s p eaker te r minal. ⢠Su rr ound back s p eaker s will not p lay while the Speaker Sy stem is set to Speaker B and audio is being p layed th r ough s p eaker B. No sound f r om f r ont heig ht o r f r ont wide s p eake r s. ⢠Check that the f r ont height o r fr ont wide s p eake r s a r e set to LARGE o r SMALL , and the su rr ound s p eake r s a r e not set to NO (see Speake r Setting on p age 85). ⢠Check the s p eaker conn ections (see Conn ecting th e speakers on p age 19). No sound f r om sub woo fe r . ⢠Check that th e subwoofe r is connected pr o pe r ly, switched on and the volume tu r ned up . ⢠If you r subw oofe r has a sl ee p function, make su r e it is switched off. ⢠Make su r e that the Subwoo fe r setting is YES o r PLUS (see Speaker Sett ing on p age 85) . ⢠The c r ossover fr equency may be se t too low; t r y setting it highe r to match the cha r acter istics of you r othe r s peake r s (see Speaker Setting on p age 85). ⢠If the r e is ve r y little low f r equency info r mation in the so u r ce ma te r ial, change you r s p ea ker settings to F r ont: SMALL / Subwoofer : YES, or Fr ont: LARGE / Subwoofer : PLUS (s ee Speaker Sett ing on p age 85). ⢠Check that the LFE channel is no t set to OFF , o r to a ve r y quiet sett ing (see Settin g the Audio opti ons on p age 60) . ⢠Check the s p eaker level settings (see Channel Level on p age 86). Symptom Remedy SC-1525_UXJC B.book 93 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼ å¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂç«æÂÂæÂÂ¥ ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Additional information 12 94 En Other audio problems No sound f r om one s p eaker .⢠C h e c k t h e s p eaker connection (see Connecting the speakers on p age 1 9). ⢠Check the s p eaker level settings (see Channel Level on p age 86) . ⢠Check that th e s p eaker hasnâÂÂt been set to NO (see Speaker Setting on p age 85). ⢠The channel m ay not be r ecor ded in the sou r ce. By using one of th e ad vanced effect listening modes, yo u may be able to c r eate the mis sing channel (see Listening in surround sound on p age 53). Sound is pr oduced f r om analog com p o nents, but not f r om digita l ones (DVD, LD , CD-ROM, etc.). ⢠Check that th e in p ut signal ty p e is set to DIGITAL (see Choosing the input signal on p age 56). ⢠Make su r e that the digita l in p ut is assigned co rr ectly f o r the in p ut jack the com p onent is connected to (see The Input Setup menu on p age 40). ⢠Check the digi tal out p ut settin gs on the sou r ce com p onent. ⢠If the s ou r ce comp onent has a di gital volume cont r ol, make su r e this is not tu r ned down. ⢠Make su r e that the m ultichannel analog in p uts a r e n ot selected. Select any othe r in p ut function. No sound is out p ut o r a noise is out p ut when Dolby D igital/DTS softwa r e is p layed back. ⢠Check that you r DVD p layer is com patible with Dolby Digital/DT S discs. ⢠Check the digi tal out p ut sett ings of you r DVD p layer . Make su r e that the DTS sig nal out p ut is set to On. ⢠If the s ou r ce comp onent has a di gital volume cont r ol, make su r e this is no t tu r ned down. No sound when u sing the Home Menu . ⢠If the HDMI in p ut function is sele cted, sound is muted until exiting the Home Menu . Sympt om Remedy B r oadcast sta tions cannot b e selected automati cally, o r the r e is conside r able noise in r adio br oadcasts. For FM broadcasts ⢠Fully extend the FM wi r e antenna, adjust the p osition fo r best r ecep tio n and secu r e to a wall, etc. ⢠Use an ou tdoo r antenna fo r better r ecep tion (see p age 32). For AM broadcasts ⢠Adjust the p ositi on and di r ection of the AM antenna. ⢠Use an ou tdoo r antenna fo r better r ecep tion (see p age 32). ⢠Noise may be caused by inte r fe r ence fr om other equip ment, such as a fluor es cent light, moto r , etc. Switch off o r move the othe r eq ui p ment, o r move the AM antenna. Noise is ou t p ut when scannin g a DTS CD. ⢠This is no t a malfunction of the r eceiver . The scan function of you r p laye r alte r s the digital info r mation, m aking it u n r eadabl e, r esulting in noise being out p ut. Lowe r the volume when scanning. When p laying a DTS fo r mat LD the r e is audible noise on the soundt r ack. ⢠Make su r e that the in p ut signal typ e is set to DIGITAL (see Choosing the input signal on p age 56). CanâÂÂt r ec o r d audio. ⢠You can only make a digital r eco r ding f r om a digita l sou r ce, and an analog r eco r ding f rom an analog sou r ce. ⢠Fo r digital sou r ces, make su r e that wh at youâ r e r eco r ding isnâÂÂt co p y pr otected. ⢠Check that the OUT jacks a r e pr op er ly connected to the r eco r der s in p ut jacks (see Connecting the multichannel analog inputs on p age 29) . Subwoofe r out p ut is ve r y low. ⢠To r oute mo r e signal to the subwoofe r , set it to PLUS o r set the f r ont s p eake r s to SMALL (see Speaker Se tting on p age 85) . Eve r ything seems to be set u p co rr ectly, but the p layb ack sound is odd. ⢠The s p eaker s may be out of p hase. Chec k that the p ositive/negative s p eaker te r minals on the r eceiver a r e matched with th e co rr esp onding ter minals on the sp eaker s (see Connecting the speakers on p age 19) . The PHASE C ONTROL featu r e doesn âÂÂt seem to have an audible effe ct. ⢠If a pp licable, check that the low p ass filte r switch on you r subwoofe r is of f, or the low p ass cutoff i s set to the hig hest f r equency setting. If the r e is a PHASE se tting on you r subwoo fe r , set it to 0ú (o r de p ending on the subwoo fe r , the setting whe r e you think it has the best ove r all effe ct on the sou nd). ⢠Make su r e the s p eaker distance setting is co rr ect fo r all s p eaker s (s ee Speaker Distance on p age 86). Noise o r hum can be hea r d even when the r e is no sound being in p ut. ⢠Check th at p er sonal com p ute r s o r othe r digita l com p onents connected to the same p ower sou r ce a r e not causing in te r fe r ence. Sympt om Remedy SC-1525_UXJC B.book 94 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼ å¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂç«æÂÂæÂÂ¥ ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Additional in formation 12 95 En ADAPTER PORT Video CanâÂÂt select som e In p ut functions by the INPUT SELECTOR on th e f r ont p anel o r the INPUT SELE CT button on the r emote c ont rol. ⢠Check the Input Skip settings in the Input Se tup men u. ⢠Check the HDMI In p ut assignment in the In p ut Setu p menu then t r y OFF. The r e seems to be a time lag between t he s p eaker s an d the out p ut of the su bwoofe r . ⢠See Automatically conducting optimum sound tuning (Full Auto MCACC) on p age 38 to set u p you r system again using MCACC (t his will automatically com p ensate fo r a delay in the subwoofe r out p ut). S p eake r switching sound (clicking sound) is hea r d f r om r eceiver dur ing p layback . ⢠De p ending on the listening mode, t he f r ont height (o r f r ont wide) and su rrou nd back s p eaker s may switch automatically in f unction of change s in the in p ut audio. A s p eaker switching sound (clicking sound) will be hea r d f r om the r eceiv er at this time. I f this sound bo the r s you, we r ecommend changing the liste ning mode (see Listening in surround sound on p age 53). The maximum volume available (shown in t he f r ont p anel disp lay) is lower than the 12dB maximum. ⢠Check that the V olume Limit is set to OFF (see Volume Setup on p age 89). ⢠The channel level setting may be ove r 0dB . Symptom Remedy The Bluetooth wi r eless technology device cannot be connected o r op er ated. Sound f r om the Bluetooth wi r eless technology device is not emitted o r the sound is inte rr u p ted. ⢠Check that no object that emits elect r omagnetic waves in the 2.4 GHz band (mic r owave oven, wi r eless LAN device o r Bluetooth wi r eless technology a pp a r atus) is nea r the unit. If such an object is nea r the unit, set the unit far fr om it. O r , sto p us ing the object emitting the elect r omagnetic waves. ⢠Check that the Bluetooth wi r eless technology device is not too fa r from the unit and that obst r uctions a r e not set between the Bluetooth wi r eless technology device and the unit. Set the Bluetooth wi r eless technology device and the unit so that the distance between them is less than about 10 m and no obst r uctions exist between them. ⢠Check that the Bluetooth ADAPTER and the ADAPTER PORT of the unit a r e co rr ectly connected. ⢠The Bluetooth wi r eless technology device may not be set to the communication mode su pp o r ting the Bluetooth wi r eless technology . Check the setting of the Bluetoo th wi r eless technology device. ⢠Check that p air ing is co rr ect. The p air ing setting was deleted fr om this unit or the Bluetooth wi r eless technology device. Reset the pai r ing . ⢠Check that the pr ofile is co rr ect. Use a Bluetooth wi r eless technology device that su pp o r ts A2DP pr ofile and A VRCP pr ofile. Symptom Remedy No image is out p ut when an in p ut is selected. ⢠Check the video connections of th e sou r ce comp onent (see p age 27). ⢠Fo r HDMI, o r when digital video conve r sion is set to OFF and a TV and anothe r comp onent ar e connected with diffe r ent co r ds (in Se tting the Video options on p age 62 ), you must connect you r TV to this r eceiver u sing the same ty p e of video cable as you used to c onnect you r video com p onent. ⢠Make su r e the in p ut assignmen t is co rr ect fo r com p onents connected usi ng com p onen t video o r HDMI cables (see The Input Setup menu on p age 40). ⢠Check the video out p ut settings of the sou r ce com p onent. ⢠Check that th e video in p ut you select ed on you r TV is co rr ect. ⢠Some com p onents (such as video game uni ts) have r esolutions that may not be conve r ted. If adjusting thi s r ecei ver âÂÂs Resolution setting (in Setting the Video options on p age 62) and/o r the r esolution set tings on your comp onent or di sp lay doesnâÂÂt wor k, tr y switching Digital Video Conve r sion (in Setting the Video options on p age 62) to OFF . CanâÂÂt r eco r d v ideo. ⢠Check that the so u r ce is not co p y- pr otected. ⢠The vid eo conve r ter is not available when making r ecor dings. Check th at the same ty p e of video cable is used fo r connecting both the r ecor der and the video sou r ce (the one you want to r ecor d) to this r eceiv e r . Symptom Remedy SC-1525_UXJC B.book 95 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼ å¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂç«æÂÂæÂÂ¥ ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Additional information 12 96 En Settings Professional Calibration EQ graphical output Noisy, inte r mittent, o r disto r te d p ictur e. ⢠Sometim es a video deck m ay out p ut a noisy video signal (du r ing scanning, fo r exam p le), o r the video quality may just be p oor (with some video ga me units, fo r exam p le). The p ictur e quality may also de p end on the settings, etc. o f you r dis p lay device. Switch off the video conve r ter and r econnect the s ou r ce and dis p lay device usin g the same ty p e of connecti on (com p onent o r com p osite), then sta r t p layback again. Video sig nals a r e not out p ut f r om the c om p onent te r minal. ⢠When a monito r on ly com p atible with r esolu tions of 480i is connected to the com p on ent te r mina l and anothe r monito r is connected to the HDMI te r minal, the video signals may not be out p ut to the monito r co nnected to the com p onent te r minal. If t his ha pp ens, do the fo llowing: â Tu r n off the p ower of the monito r conne cted to the HDMI te r minal. â Change the VIDEO PARAMETER menu RES setting. â Video s ignals f r om the HDMI te r minal cannot be ou t p ut to the com p onent te r mina ls. In p ut the video signals f r om the p layer o r othe r sou r ce to the com p osite o r com p onent te r minals. When using the com p onent te r minal, assign it at Input Setup . The p ictu r eâÂÂs moveme nt is unnatu r al. ⢠When Resolution unde r VIDEO PARAMETER is set to 1080/24p , the p ictur e may not be disp layed pr o pe r ly fo r some sou r ce mate r ials. In this case, set the r esolution to something othe r than 1080/24 p ( p age 62). Sympt om Remedy The Auto MCACC Setu p continually shows an e rr o r. ⢠The ambient no ise level may be too hig h. Kee p the noise level in the r oom as low as p ossible (se e also Problems when using the Auto MCACC Setup on p age 4 0). If the n oise level ca nnot be ke p t low enough, you will have to set u p the su rr ound sound ma nually ( p age 84). ⢠When usin g only one su rr ound back s p eaker , connect it to the SURROUND BACK L (Single) te r minals. ⢠To use a 5.1 -channel s p eaker set, use the su rr ound s p eaker s fo r the su rr ound channel, not th e su rr ound ba ck channel. ⢠Make su r e the r e a r e no obstacle s between the s p eaker s and the mic r op hone. ⢠If Reve rse Phase is dis p layed, t r y the following: â The s p eaker âÂÂs wi ring ( and âÂÂ) may be inve r ted. Check the s p eaker connections. â De p ending on the ty p e of s p eake r s and thei r install ation conditions, Reverse Phase may be dis p layed even if the s p eake r s a r e pr o pe r ly co nn ec te d. If t his h a pp ens, select GO NEXT and continue. â If the s p eake r is not p ointed to the mic r op hone (l isteni ng p osition) o r when using s p eake r s that affect t he p hase (di p ole s p eaker s, r eflective sp eaker s, etc.), it may not be p ossible to pr op er ly identify the p ola r ity. Afte r using the Auto MC ACC Setu p , the s p eake r size setting is inco rr ect. ⢠The r e may have been some low f r equency n oise in the r oom f r om an ai r -condit ioner , moto r , etc. Switch off all othe r a pp liances in the r oom and us e Auto MCACC Se tu p again. ⢠De p ending on a numbe r of factor s (bass r e pr oduction cap abilities of the sp eaker s, r oom size, s p eake r p lacem ent, etc.) this may occu r in some c ases. Change the s p eake r setting manually in Speaker Setting on p age 85, an d use the A LL (Keep SP System) o p tion fo r the Auto MCACC menu in Automatic MCACC (Expert) on p age 75 if this is a r ecu rr ing pr oblem. CanâÂÂt adjus t the Fin e S p eaker Distance setting ( p age 78) pr o pe r ly. ⢠Check that the s p eaker s a r e all in p hase (make su r e the p ositi ve ( ) and ne gative ( â ) te r minals a r e matched u p pr op er ly). The dis p lay shows KEY LOCK ON when you t r y to make settings. ⢠With the r eceiver in standby, pr ess ïµ STANDBY/ON fo r about 10 seco nds while holding down SPEAKERS to disable the key loc k. Most r ecent settings have been e r ased. ⢠The p ower cor d was d isconnected f r om th e wall while adjusting thi s setting. ⢠Settings a r e only sto r ed if all the zones a r e tu r ned off. Tu r n off all the zones befo r e un p lugging the p ower cor d. The va r ious system settings a r e not sto r ed. ⢠Make su r e the blue ïµ STANDBY /ON light has gone out befo r e un p lugging. Sympt om Remedy The EQ r esp onse disp layed in the g r ap hical outp ut followin g calib r ation does no t a pp ea r enti r ely flat . ⢠The r e a r e cases whe r e the g r ap h does not a pp ea r flat (even when selecting ALL CH ADJ in the Auto MCACC Setu p ) due to adjustments made to com p ensate fo r r oo m char acter istics to achieve op tima l sound. ⢠A r eas of the g r ap h may a pp ea r identical (befo r e and aft e r ) when the r e is little or no adjust ment needed. ⢠The g r ap h may a pp ea r to have shifted ve r tica lly when com p ar ing befo r e and afte r measu r ements. Sympt om Remedy SC-1525_UXJC B.book 96 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼ å¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂç«æÂÂæÂÂ¥ ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Additional in formation 12 97 En Displa y Remote control EQ adjustments made using the Manual MCACC setup on p age 77 do no t a pp ea r to change the g r ap hica l out p ut. ⢠Des p ite level adjustments being made, the filte r s us ed fo r anal ysis may n ot dis p lay these adjustments in the g r ap hical out p ut. Howeve r , thes e adjust ments a r e taken into account by the filte r s dedicate d to ove r all system calib r ation. Lowe r f requency r es p onse cu r ves do not seem to ha ve been calib r ated fo r SMALL s p eake r s. ⢠Low f r equencies used in b ass management (t he subwoofe r channel) will not change fo r sp eaker s that have been s p ecified as SMALL in the configu r atio n, o r do not out p ut these f r equencies. ⢠Calib r ation is p er for med, but due to yo u r sp eaker sâ low f r equency limitations, no measu r able sound is out p ut fo r dis p lay. Symptom Remedy The dis p lay is da r k o r off. ⢠Pr ess DIMMER r ep eatedly to select a diffe r ent b r ightness. You canâÂÂt g et DIGITAL to dis p lay when using SIGNAL SEL . ⢠Check the digi tal connecti ons and make su r e that the di gital in p uts a r e assigned co rr ectl y (see The Input Setup menu on p age 40). ⢠If the multicha nnel analog in p uts a r e selected, sele ct a diffe r ent in p ut func tion. 2 DIGITAL o r DTS does not light when p laying Dolby/DTS softwa r e. ⢠These indic ato r s do not lig ht if p layback is p aused. ⢠Check the p laybac k (es p ecially the digi tal out p ut) settings of t he sou r ce com p onent. When p laying Dolby Digital o r DTS sou r ces, the r eceiver âÂÂs fo r mat indicato r s do not light . ⢠Check that the p layer is connected using a digital con nection. ⢠Make su r e that the r eceiver is set to AUTO o r DIGITAL (see Choosing the input signal on p age 5 6). ⢠Check that the p layer isnâÂÂt set u p so that Dolby Digital and DTS sou r ces a r e conve r ted to PCM. ⢠Ensu r e that if th e r e a r e seve r al audio t racks on the disc, the Dolby Digita l o r DTS is selected. When p laying ce r tain discs, none of the r eceiver âÂÂs fo r mat indicato r s lig ht. ⢠The disc may no t contain 5.1/6.1 chann el mate r ial. Check the disc p ackaging fo r mo r e on what audio t r acks a r e r eco r de d on the disc. When p laying a disc with the listening mo de set to Auto Su rr ound o r ALC, 2 PL II o r Neo:6 a pp ea r on the receive r . ⢠Make su r e that the r eceiver is set to AUTO o r DIGITAL (see Choosing the input signal on p age 5 6). ⢠If a two cha nnel soundt r ack is cu rr entl y p laying ( including Dolby Su rr ound encode d), then this is not a malfunct ion. Check the disc p ackaging fo r details about the au dio t r acks available. Du r ing p layback of DVD-Audi o, the dis p lay sh ows PCM . ⢠This will occu r when p laying DVD-Audio mate r ial ove r the HDMI connection. This is not a malfunction. The p owe r tu r ns off automatically and some indicato r flashes, o r some indicato r flashes and th e p ower does not tu r n on. ⢠See the Power section ( p age 92). Symptom Remedy Cannot be r emote cont r olled. ⢠Set the r emote cont r ol unitâÂÂs r emote cont r ol mode so that it matches the settin g on the main unit (see Operating multiple receivers on p age 6 7). ⢠Check whethe r th e r eceiver âÂÂs r emote contr ol mode is pr o pe r ly set (see Remote Contro l Mode Setup on p age 89) . ⢠T r y r ep lacing t he batte r ies in the r emote cont r ol (s ee Loading the batteries on p ag e 10). ⢠Be su r e to o p er ate within 7 m (23 feet) and a 30ú angl e of the r emot e senso r on the f r ont p anel (see Operating range of remote control unit on p age 1 0). ⢠Check that th e r e a r e no obstacles be tween the r ec eiver and the r emote cont r ol. ⢠Make su r e that the r e is no fl uo r escent o r othe r str ong light shining on to the r emote sens o r . ⢠Check the conn ections of the CONTROL IN jacks (see Operating other Pioneer components with this unitâÂÂs sens or on p age 36). Othe r com p onents canâÂÂt be o pe r ated with the system r emote. ⢠If the bat te r y r an down, the pr eset codes may have been clea r ed. Re-e nte r the pr eset codes. ⢠The pr eset code may be inco rr ect. Redo the pr oced u re fo r ente r ing pr eset codes. ⢠When command s f r om th e r emote cont r ol u nits of oth e r devices a r e r egis te r ed using the lea r ning function, in some cases they may not be lea r ne d pr o pe r ly. In this case, r egiste r the commands again using the lea r ning function (see Programming signals from other remote controls on p age 68) . If they still do not wo r k, they may be in a s p ecial fo r mat that cannot be r eg ister ed on this r eceiver âÂÂs r emot e cont r ol. O p er ate the device using anothe r r emote cont r ol. Symptom Remedy SC-1525_UXJC B.book 97 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼ å¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂç«æÂÂæÂÂ¥ ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Additional information 12 98 En Web Control HDMI Sympt oms Causes Remedies To p Menu sc r een is not dis p layed on b r owse r . This r eceive r âÂÂs IP add r ess has not been ente red into the b r owser co rr ectly. Check the r ec eive r âÂÂs IP add r ess and ent e r it co rr ectly in the b r owse r ( p age 87). Receive r cannot be o p er ated f r om b r owse r. JavaSc r ip t is disabled on the inte r net b r owse r .E n a b l e J a v a S c r ip t. The b r owser is not com p atible with Jav aSc r ip t. Use an inte r net b r owser that is com p atible with JavaSc r ip t. Receive r âÂÂs p owe r do es not tu r n on when the p owe r is tu r ned on using the Web Control functi on. Network St andby at Network Setup is set to OFF . Set Network Stand by at Network Setup to ON ( p age 88). Sympt om Remedy The HDMI indic ato r blinks continuo usly. ⢠Check all the p oints below. No p ictu r e o r sound. ⢠This r eceiver is HDCP-comp atible. Check that the comp onents you ar e connecting ar e a lso HDCP- com p atibl e. If they a r e not, p lease connect them using the com p onent o r com p osite vide o jacks. ⢠De p ending on the con nected sou r ce com p onent, itâÂÂs p ossible that it will not wo r k with this r ece ive r (even if it is HDCP-com p atible). In this case, connect us ing the com p onent o r com p osite video ja cks between sou r ce and r eceiver . ⢠If the pr oblem still p er sists when connecting you r HDMI com p onent di r ectly to you r moni to r , p lease consult th e com p onent o r monitor manual o r contact t he manufactu r er fo r su pp o r t. ⢠If vid eo images d o not a pp ea r on you r TV, t r y adjusting the r esolution, Dee p Colo r or othe r setting fo r you r co m p onent. ⢠While analog video signals a r e being out p ut ove r HDMI, use a se p ar a te connection fo r audio out p ut. ⢠To out p ut signals in Dee p Colo r , use an HDMI cable (High Sp eed HDMI î Cable) to c onnect this r eceiver to a comp on ent or TV with the Deep Color feat ur e. No p ictu r e. ⢠T r y changing the Re solution settin g (in Setting the Video opti ons on p age 62) . ⢠Set the HD MI out p ut setting to th e connected HDMI OUT te r minal ( in Switching the HDMI out put on p age 65) . No sound, o r sound suddenly ceases. ⢠Check that the H DMI AV setting is set t o AMP/THROUGH . ⢠If the c om p onent is a DVI device, use a se p ar ate conne ction fo r the audio. ⢠If analog video is be ing out p ut ove r HDMI, p lease use a se p ar ate connection fo r the audio. ⢠Check the aud io out p ut settings of the sou r ce com p onent. ⢠HDMI fo r mat d igital audio t r ansmissions r equir e a longe r time to be recognized. Due to this, inte rr u p tion in the audio m ay occu r when switchin g between audi o fo r mats o r beginning p layback. ⢠Tu r ning on/off the device connecte d to this unit's HD MI OUT te r minal du r ing p layback , o r disconnectin g/connecting the H DMI cable du r ing p layback, may cause noise or inte rr u p ted audio. Noisy o r distor ted p ictur e. ⢠Sometimes a vide o deck may out p ut a noisy video signal (du r ing scanning, for examp le), or the video quality may just be p oor (with some video ga me units, fo r exam p le). The p ictu r e quality may also de p end on the settings, etc. of you r dis p lay device. Switch off the video conve r ter and r econnect the sou r ce and dis p lay device using the same ty p e of connec tion (com p onent o r com p osite), th en sta r t p layback again. ⢠If the pr oblem still p er sists when connecting you r HDMI com p onent di r ectly to you r moni to r , p lease consult th e com p onent o r monitor manual o r c ontact the manufactu r e r fo r su ppo r t. HDCP ERROR sh ows in the dis p lay. ⢠Check whethe r or not the connected com p on ent is com p atible with HDCP. If it is not com p atible with HDCP, r econnect the sou r ce device using a diffe r ent typ e of connection (comp onent or com p osite). Some com p onents that a r e com p atible with HDCP still ca use this message to be dis p layed, but so long as the r e is no pr oblem with dis p laying video, this is not a malfunctio n. When Control with HDMI is set to ON , the HDMI Input assignment at Input Setup is canceled. ⢠Even when Control with HDMI is set to ON , fo r Digital In assignment of HDMI 1 is not canceled, so in this case use the HDMI 1 in p ut. SC-1525_UXJC B.book 98 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼ å¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂç«æÂÂæÂÂ¥ ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Additional in formation 12 99 En Important information rega rding the HDMI connection The r e a r e cases whe r e you m ay not be able to r oute HDMI signals th r ough thi s r eceiver (this de p ends on the HDMI- equi pp ed com p onent you a r e connectingâÂÂcheck with the manufactu r e r fo r HDMI com p atibility info r mat ion). If you a r enâÂÂt r eceiving HDMI signals pr o pe r ly th r ough this r eceive r (f r om yo u r com p onent), p lease t r y one of the following conf igu r ations when conn ecting u p . Configuration A Use com p onent video cables to connect the video out p ut of you r HDMI-equi pp ed co m p onent to the r eceiver âÂÂs com p onent video in p ut. The r eceive r can then conve r t th e analog com p onent video signal to a digital HDMI signal fo r t r ansmi ssion to the dis p lay. Fo r this configu r ation, use the most convenient connection ( digital is r ecommended) for sending audio to the r eceiver . See the o pe r ating inst r uc tions fo r mo r e on audio connections. Note â¢T h e p ictur e qual ity will chan ge slightl y dur ing conve r sion. Configuration B Connect you r HDMI-equi pp ed com p onent di r ectly to the dis p lay using an HDMI cable. Then use the most convenient connection (digital is r ecommended) fo r sending audio to the r eceiver . See the o p er ating inst r uctions fo r mo r e on audio connections. Set the dis p lay volume to mi nimum whe n using thi s configu r ation. Note â¢I f y o u r disp lay only has one HDMI ter minal, you can only r eceive HDMI video f r om the connected com p onent. â¢D e p ending on the comp onent, audio o utp ut may be limited to the numbe r of channels avai lable f r om the connected dis p lay unit (fo r exam p le audio ou t p ut is r educed to 2 channels for a mon itor with ster eo audio limitations). ⢠If you want to switch the in p ut f unction, yo uâÂÂll have to switch functions on both the r eceiver and your dis p lay unit. ⢠Since the sound is muted on the dis p lay when using the HDMI connection, yo u must adjust the volume o n the dis p lay eve r y time y ou switch in p ut functions. USB interface Synch r onized o p er ation not p ossible usi ng Control with HDMI function. ⢠Check the HDMI co nnections. ⢠The cable may be damaged. ⢠Select ON fo r the Control with HDMI setting (see HDMI Setup on p age 57). ⢠Select ALL fo r the Control Mode with HDMI setting (see HDMI Setup on p age 57). ⢠Tu r n the TVâÂÂs p ower on befo r e tu r ning on this r ece iver âÂÂs p ower . ⢠Set the TV side Cont r ol with HDMI setting to on (see TV âÂÂs o p er ating inst r uction s). ⢠Connect the TV to the HDMI OUT 1 te rminal and set the HDMI out p ut to HDMI OU T 1 . Then tu r n on fi r st the TVâÂÂs p ower , then this r eceiv er âÂÂs p ower . Symptom Remedy Symptoms Causes Remedies The folde r s/files stor ed on a USB memo r y device a r e not dis p layed. The folde r s/files a r e cu rr ently s to r ed in a r egion othe r than t he FAT (File All ocation T able) r egion. Sto r e the folde r s/files in the FAT r egion. The numbe r of levels in a folde r is mo r e than 8. Limit the maximum numbe r of levels in a f olde r to 8 ( p age 44). The r e a r e mo r e th an 30 000 folde r s/files sto r ed in a USB memo r y de vice. Limit the maximum n umbe r of folde r s/files sto r ed in a USB memo r y de vice to 30 000 ( p age 44). The audio fil es a r e co p yr ighted. Cop yr ighted audio files sto r ed on a USB memo r y device cannot be p layed back ( p age 44). SC-1525_UXJC B.book 99 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼ å¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂç«æÂÂæÂÂ¥ ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Additional information 12 100 En Internet radio A USB memo ry devic e is not r ecognized. The USB memo r y device does not su pp o r t the mass sto r age class s p ecific ations. T r y using a USB memo r y device comp atible with the mass sto r age class s p ecifications. Note that the r e a r e cases whe r e even the audio files sto r ed on a USB memo r y device com p atible with the mass sto r age c lass s p ecifications a r e not p layed back on this r eceiver (p age 44). Connect th e USB memo r y device and switch on this r eceive r ( p age 35). A USB hub is cu rr ent ly being used. This r eceiver does not su pp o r t USB hubs ( p age 44). This r eceive r r ecog nizes the USB memo r y device as a f r aud. Switch off and on ag ain this r eceiver . A USB memo r y devic e is connecte d and dis p layed, but the audio files st o r ed on the USB memo r y device cann ot be p layed back. Some fo r mats of USB memo r y devices, including FAT 12, NTFS, a nd HFS, cannot be p layed back on this r eceive r . Check whethe r the fo r ma t of you r USB memo r y device is e ithe r FAT 16 o r FAT 32. Note that t he FAT 12, NTFS, a nd HFS fo r mats c annot be p layed back on this r eceiver (p age 44). The file fo r mat cannot be pr o pe r ly p laye d back on this r eceive r . See the list of file fo r mats that can be p layed back on this r eceiver (p age 45). Cannot detect USB keyboa r d. The USB keyb oa r d is r outed th r ough a USB hub. This r eceiver is not com p atible with USB hubs. Plug th e keyboa r d di r ectly into the r eceiver . A PS2 keyboa r d is r oute d th r ough a PS2/US B connecto r . PS2 keyboa r ds cannot be used with this r eceiver , even if r outed t h r ough a PS2/ USB connect o r . Use a USB keyboa r d. Keyboa r d is not a USB HID Class device. Some devices will not be detected. Use a USB HID Class keyboa r d. Cannot en te r co rr ect text using the USB ke yboa r d. Keyboa r d is not US-inte r nati onal layout keyboa r d. Use a US-inte r national layout keyboa r d. NB: Some cha r ac ter s cannot be ente r ed. Sympt oms Causes Remedies Cannot acc ess the ne two r k. (â Connection Er ror â shows in the dis p lay.) The LAN cable is no t fi r mly connected. Fi r mly connect the LAN cable ( p age 33). The r oute r is not switched on. Switch on the r outer . The netwo r k device wa s switched on when this r eceiver was alr eady on. Switch the netwo r k device on befo r e the r ecei ve r . Cannot l isten to Inte r net r adio stations. (â Connection Er ror â shows in the dis p lay.) The fi r ewall settings fo r com p onen ts on the netwo r k a r e cu rr ently in o p er ation. Check the fi r ewall settings fo r com p onen ts on the netwo r k. You a r e cu rr ently disconnected f r om the Inte r net. Check the connection settings fo r com p onents on the netwo r k, and consult with you r netwo r k se r vice pr ovide r if necessa r y ( p age 87). The URL fo r th e Inte r net r adio station is inco rr ectly pr og r ammed. Check that th e URL was co rr ectly ente r ed when pr og r amming. The b r oadc asts f rom an Int e r net r adio station a r e sto pp ed o r inte rr u p ted. B r oadcasts may be inte rr u p ted o r sus p ended by the r adio station. An Inte r net r adio station is selecte d whose pr otocol this r ec eiver does not r ecognize. This r eceive r does not r ecognize pr otocols oth e r than âÂÂhtt p â and âÂÂm msâÂÂ. An Inte r net r adio station had closed o r moved. Ente r new inte r net r adio station on the Inte r net Radio Setu p . Cannot l isten to Inte r net r adio stations. (â File Form at Error â shows in the dis p lay.) B r oadcast is i n a fo r mat not com p atib le with this r eceiver . This r eceive r canno t p lay audio in fo r mats othe r than MP3 o r WMA. Also, even if they a r e MP3 o r WMA fo r mats, this r eceive r may not be able to p lay back. Sympt oms Causes Remedies SC-1525_UXJCB.bo ok 100 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ æÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂç« æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ æÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Additional in formation 12 101 En XM radio messages The Inte r ne t r adio settings sc r een cannot be dis p layed on the com p ut er Inte r net b r owse r. This r eceive r âÂÂs IP add r ess has not be en ente r ed into the b r owser co rr ectly. Check the r eceive râÂÂs IP add r ess and ente r it co rr ectly o n the b r owser (p age 87). JavaSc r ip t is disabled on the Inte r net b r owser .E n a b l e J a v a S c r ip t. The b r owser is not com p atible with JavaSc r ip t. Use an Inte r net b r owser that is com p atible wit h JavaSc r ip t. Symptoms Causes Remedies Status messag es Cau se Action Check XM Tuner The XM Mini-Tun e r is not installed o r not fully seated in the XM Mini-Tun e r Home Dock o r the XM Mini- Tune r Dock is not con nected to th is r eceive r . Confi r m the XM Mini-Tune r is fully seat ed in the dock and check the XM Mini-Tune r Home Dock cable is connected t o this r eceiver . Check Antenna The XM antenna is not connected to the XM Mini- Tune r Home Dock o r the X M antenna cable is damaged. Check th at the XM antenna is secu r ely connected to the XM Mini-Tune r Home Dock and check the antenna cable fo r damage . Rep lace the XM antenna if the cable is dama ged. Loading The XM Mini-Tune r is acquir ing audio or pr ogr am info r mati on f r om the XM satellite signal. This messag e can als o occu r in weak XM signal conditions. Note that this r eceiver may not r esp ond to some buttons while this message is dis p layed. This message should disa pp ea r in a few seconds in good signal conditions. If you see this message often, r ep osition the XM antenna fo r bett e r signal r ecep tion . Use the Antenna Aiming o p tion to o p ti mize the antenna p osition. No Signal The XM Mini-Tune r is not r eceiving the XM satellite signal. Someth ing may be blocking th e XM antennaâÂÂs view of the satellites o r the anten na is not pr o pe r ly aimed. Check fo r antenna obst r uctions and r ep osition the XM antenna to ge t bette r signal r ecep tion. Use the Antenna Aiming o p tion to o p timize the an tenna p osition. See inst r uctions su pp lied with the XM Mini-Tune r and Home Dock fo r antenna installatio n info r mati on. Off Air The XM channel you selected is not cu rr entl y b r oadcasting. Check back late r . CH Unauthorized You selected an XM chan nel that is blocked o r cannot be r eceived with you r XM subsc r i p tion p ackage. Consult the lates t channel guide at www.xm r adio.com fo r the cu rr ent list of cha nnels. Fo r info r mati on on r eceiving this channel, visit www.xm r adio.com o r contact XM Satellite Radio at 1-800-967-2346 . CH Unavailabl e The se lected channel is not available. The cha nnel may have been r eassigned to a diffe r ent channel numbe r . This message may occu r initially with a new r adio o r a r adio that has not r eceived XMâ s signal fo r an extended p er iod. Consult the lates t channel guide at www.xm r adio.com fo r the cu rr ent list of cha nnels. Fo r cases of a new r ad io o r a r adio that has n ot r eceived XMâÂÂs signal for an extend ed p er iod, allow the r adio to r eceive the XM sa tellite signal fo r at leas t 5 minute s and then t r y to select the channel again. â â â â â â â â No a r tist na me o r song title is available fo r this selection. No action r eq ui r ed. SC-1525_UXJCB.bo ok 101 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ æÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂç« æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ æÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Additional information 12 102 En SIRIUS radio messages If the pr oblem is not solved afte r the t r oubleshooting above, if the sc r een f r ee zes unex p ectedly o r if the buttons on the r emote contr ol or f r ont p anel stop wor king comp l etely, do th e following: â¢P r ess ïµ STA NDBY/ON on the fr ont p anel to tur n off the p ower , then tur n the p ower back on. â¢I f t h e p ower c annot be tu r ned off, pr ess and hold ïµ STA NDBY/ON on the f r ont p anel fo r ove r 10 seconds. The p ower will tur n off. (In this case, th e var ious settings made on the r eceiver may be clear ed.) Upgrade XM Tuner The connected XM CNP-1000 is incom p atible. This r eceiver featur es advanced technology that is designed fo r use with the XM Mini-Tune r . Contact XM Liste ne r Ca r e (1-800-967-2346) and ask about u p gr adin g you r XM CNP-1000 to an XM Mini- Tune r . Have this r eceiver âÂÂs model name an d CNP-1000 XM Radio ID numbe r r ea dy befor ehand , and exp lain that this r eceiver is disp laying the message Upgrade X M Tuner . If you al r eady have an XM Mini-Tune r connected and you see this message, tu r n off thi s r ecei ver , make su r e the XM Mini-Tun e r is pr op er ly seat ed in the Mini-Tune r Home Dock, and then tu r n this r ecei ve r on again. If the message r ea pp ear s, contact XM Listene r Ca r e and ex p lain the issue that youâ r e ex p er iencing and the co rr e ctive actio ns youâ ve t r ied. XM Power Erro r A sho r t-cir cuit occu rr ing in the antenna o r su rr ounding an tenna cable. Make su r e that the r e is nothing unus ual with the antenna o r anten na cable. Switch the p ower off, then back on again. Status messages Cause Action Antenna Error The SIRIUS antenna is not pr o pe r ly connected. Check that the antenna cable is a ttached secu r ely. Check Sirius Tuner The Si r iusConnect⢠tune r is not pr o pe r ly connected. Check that the 8 p in mini D IN cable a nd AC Adap ter ar e attached secu r ely. Acquiring Signal The SIRIUS signal is too weak at the cu rr ent location. Check fo r antenna obst r uctions and r ep osition the SIRIUS antenna to get bette r signal r ecep tion. Use the Antenna Aiming o p tion to o p ti mize the antenna p osit ion. Subscription Upda ting Unit is u p dating subsc r ip tion. W ait until the ch annel subsc r ip tion has been u p dated. Updating Channels Unit is u p dating the chan nel info r mation. Wait until the channel info r mation has bee n u p dated. Invalid Channel Selected channel is not availa ble/does no t exist. Select anot he r cha nnel. Firmware Upda ting The Si r iusConnect⢠tune r âÂÂs fi r mwar e is being u p date d. Wait fo r u p dating to f inish. Status messages Cause Action SC-1525_UXJCB.bo ok 102 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ æÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂç« æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ æÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Additional in formation 12 103 En Surround sound formats Below is a b r ief des c r ip tion of the main su rr oun d sound fo r mats youâÂÂll fin d on BDs, DVDs, satellite, cable and te rr est r ial b r oadcasts, and video cassettes. Dolby The Dolby technologies a r e ex p lained below. See www.dolby.com fo r mo r e detailed info r mation. Manufactured under lice nse from Dolby Laboratories. â Dolbyâ , â Pro Logicâ , â Surround EXâ and the double-D symbol are trademarks of Dolby Laboratories. DTS The DTS techno logies a r e ex p lained below. See www.dtstech.com fo r mo re detailed info r mation. Manufactured under license under U.S. Patent #âÂÂs: 5,451,94 2; 5,956,674; 5,974, 380; 5,978,762; 6,22 6,616; 6,487,535; 7,212,872; 7,33 3,929; 7,392,195; 7,272,567 & other U.S. and world wide patents issued & pendin g. DTS and the Symbol are reg istered trademarks, & DTS-H D, DTS- HD Master Audio, and the DT S logos are trademarks of DTS, Inc. Prod uct includes software. é DTS, In c. All Rights Reserved. Windows Media Audio 9 Professional Windows Media Audio 9 P r ofessional (W MA9 P r o) is a disc r ete su rr ound fo r mat develo p ed by Mic r osoft Co rp o r ation. Windows Media and the Windows logo are trademarks or registered trademarks of Micros oft Corporation in the United States and/or other countri es. About THX The THX technologi es a r e ex p lained below. Se e www.thx.com fo r mo r e detailed info r mation. ⢠THX Cinema processing THX is an exclusive set of standa r ds and technologies established by THX Ltd. THX g r ew f r om Geo r ge Lucasâ p er sonal desi r e to ma ke you r ex p er ience of the film soundt r ack, in both m ovie theat r es and in you r home the at r e, as faithful as p ossible to what the di r ector intended. Movie soundt r acks a r e mixed in s p ecial movie theat r es called dubbing stages and a r e designed to be p layed back in movie theat r es with simila r equi p ment and conditions. This same soundt r ack is then t r ansfe rr ed di r ectly onto Lase r disc, VHS ta p e, DVD, etc., and is not changed fo r p layback in a small home theat r e envi r onment. THX enginee r s develo p ed p atented technologies to accu r ately t r anslate the sound f r om the movie theat r e envi r onment into the home, co rr ecting the tonal and s p atial e rr o r s that occu r . On this pr oduct, when the THX indicato r is on, THX featu r es a r e automatically added in Cinema modes (e.g. THX Cinema, THX Su rr ound EX). ⢠Re-Equalization The tonal balance of a film soundt r ack will be excessively b r ight and ha r sh when p layed back ove r audio equi p ment in the home because film soundt r acks we r e designed to be p layed back in la r ge m ovie theat e r s using ve r y diffe r ent pr ofessional equi p ment. Re-Equalization r estor es the co rr ect tonal balance fo r watching a movie soundtr ack in a small home envi r onment. ⢠Timbre Matching The human ea r changes ou r p er cep tion of a sound de p ending on the di r ection f r om which the sound is co ming. In a movie theat r e, the r e is an a rr ay of su rr ound s p eaker s so that the su rr ound info r matio n is all a r ound you. In a home theat r e, yo u use only two s p eake r s located to the side of you r head. The Timb r e Matching featu r e fi lte r s the info r mation going to the su rr ound s p eaker s so that they mo r e closely match the tonal cha r acter istics of the sound coming f r om the f r ont s p eaker s. This ensu r es seamless p anning between the f r ont and su rr ound s p eake r s. ⢠Adaptive Decorrel ation In a movie theat r e, a la r ge numbe r of su rr ound s p eaker s hel p cr eate an envelo p ing su rr ound sound ex p er ience, but in a home theat r e the r e a r e usually only two s p eake r s. This can make the su rr ound s p eake r s sound like head p hones that lack s p aciousness and envelo p ment. The su rr ound sounds will also colla p se into the closest s p eake r as you move away f r om the middle seating p osition. Ada p tive Deco rr elation slightly changes one su rr ound channelâÂÂs time and p hase r elationship with r esp ect to the o the r su rr ound channel. This ex p ands the listening p osition and c r eatesâÂÂwith only two s p eake r sâ the sa me s p acious su rr ound ex p er ience as in a movie theat r e. ⢠THX Select2 Plus Befo r e any home theat r e com p onent can be THX Select2 Plus ce r tified, it must inco rp o r ate all the featu r es above and also p ass a r igor ous ser ies of quality and p er for mance tests. Only then can a pr oduct featu r e the THX Select2 Plus logo, which is you r guar antee that the Home Theat r e pr oducts you p ur chase will g ive you su p er b p er for mance for many year s to come. THX Select2 Plus r equir ements cove r eve r y as p ect of the pr oduc t including pr e-am p lifier and p ower am p lifie r p er fo r mance and o p er ation, and hund r eds of othe r p ar am ete r s in both the digital and analog domain. SC-1525_UXJCB.bo ok 103 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ æÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂç« æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ æÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Additional information 12 104 En ⢠THX Surround EX THX Su rr ound EX - Dolby Digital Su rr ound EX is a joint develo p ment of Dolby Labo r ator ies and the THX Ltd. In a movie theate r , film soundt r acks that have been encoded with Dolby Digital Su rr ound EX technology a r e able to r e pr oduce an ext r a channel which has been added du r ing the mixing of the pr og r am. This channel, ca lled Su rr ound Back, p laces sounds behind the listene r in addition to the cu rr ently available f r ont left, f r ont cente r , f r ont r ight, su rr ound r ight, su rr ound left and subwoofe r channels. This additional channel pr ovides the opp o r tunity fo r mo r e detailed imaging behind the listene r and b r ings mo r e de p th, s p acious ambience and sound localization than eve r bef o r e. Movies that we r e c r eated using th e Dolby Digita l Su rr ound EX technology, when r eleased into the home consume r ma r ke t may exhibit wo r ding to tha t effect on the p ackaging. A list of movies cr eated using this technology can be found on the Dolby web site at www.dolby.com. Only am p lifier and cont r oller pr oducts bear ing the THX Su rr ound EX logo, when in the THX Su rr ound EX mode, faithfully r e pr oduce this new technology in the home. This pr oduct may also engage the âÂÂTHX Su rr ound EXâ mode du r ing the p layback of 5.1 channel mate r ial that is not D olby Digital Su rr ound EX encod ed. In such case the in fo r mation delive r ed to the Su rr ound Back channel will be pr og r am de p endent and may o r may not be ve r y p leasing de p ending on the p ar ticular soundt r ack and the tastes of the individual listene r . ⢠Boundary Gain Compensation⢠De p ending on the listene r âÂÂs and the subwoofe r âÂÂs p osition, the listener may ex p er ienc e an excessive bass effect. This featur e com p ensates fo r excessive bass r esulting f r om a bounda r y gain effect. This featu r e is designed to o p er ate when used with a subwoofe r ce r tified to THX Select2⢠s p ecifications. ⢠THX Loudness Plus Descr iption THX Loudness Plus is a new volume cont r ol technology featur ed in THX Ult r a2 Plus⢠and THX Select2 Plus⢠Ce r tified am p lifier s. With THX Loudness Plus, home theat e r audie nces can now ex p er ience the r ich details in a su rr ound mix at any volume level. A conseque nce of tu r ning the volume below Refe r ence Level is that ce r tain sound elements can be lost o r p erceived diffe r ently by the listene r . THX Loudness Plus com p ensates fo r the tonal and s p atial shifts that occu r when the volume is r educed by intelligent ly adjusting ambient su rr ound channel levels and f requency r esp onse. This enables user s to ex p er ience the t r ue im p act of sound t r acks r egar dles s of the volume setting. THX Loudness Plus is automatically a pp lied when listening in any THX listening mode. The new THX Cinema, THX Music, and THX Games modes a r e tailo r ed to a pp ly the pr o pe r THX Loudness Plus settings fo r ea ch ty p e of co ntent. ⢠THX Select2 Cinema THX Select2 Cinema mode p lays 5.1 movies using all 8 s p eaker s giving you the best p ossible movie watching ex p er ience. In this mode, ASA pr ocessing blends the side su rr ound s p eaker s and back su rr ound s p eake rs pr oviding the o p timal mix of ambient and di r ectional su rr ound sounds. DTS-ES (Mat r ix and 6.1 Disc r ete) and Dolby Digital Su rr ound EX encoded soundt r acks will be automatically detected in Select2 Cinema mode if the a ppr opr iate flag ha s been encoded. Some Dolby Digital Su rr ound EX soundt r acks a r e missing the digital flag that allows automatic switchin g. If you know that the movie that you a r e watching is encoded in Su rr ound EX, you can manually select the THX Su rr ound EX p layback mode, othe r wise THX Select2 Cinema mode will a pp ly AS A pr ocessing to pr ovide o p timum r ep lay. ⢠THX Select2 Music Fo r the p layback of multi-ch annel music the THX Select2 Music mode s h o u l d b e s e l e c t e d . I n t h i s m o d e T H X A S A pr ocessing is a pp lied to the su rr ound channels of all 5.1 encoded m usic sou r ces such as DTS, Dolby Digital and DVD-Audio to pr ovide a wide stable r ear soundstage. ⢠THX Select2 Games Fo r the p layback of ste r eo and multi-channel game audio the THX Select2 Games mode should be se lected. In this mode THX ASA pr ocessing is app lied to the su rr ound channels of all 5.1 and 2.0 encoded g ame sou r ces such as analog, PCM, DTS and Dolby Digital. This accu r ately p laces all game audio su rr ound info r mation, pr oviding a full 360 deg r ee p layback e nvir onment. THX Select2 Games mode is unique as it gives you a smooth t r ansition of audio in all p oints of the su rr ound field. THX, the THX logo and Sel ect2 Plus are trademarks of THX Ltd. wh ich may be registered in some jurisdicti ons. All rights reserved . All other trademarks are th e property of their re spective owners. About iPod âÂÂMade fo r iPodâ means that an e lect r onic accesso r y has been designed to connect s p ecifica lly to iPod and has been ce r tified by the develo p er to meet A pp le p er for mance standar ds . âÂÂWo r ks with iPhoneâ means that an elect r onic accesso r y has been designed to connect s p ecific ally to iPhone and has been ce r tified by the develo p er to meet A pp le p er for mance standar ds . A pp le is not r es p onsible fo r the o pe r ation of this device o r its com p liance with safety and r egu lator y standa r ds. iPod is a trademark of Apple In c., registered in the U.S. and other countries. iPhone is a tradem ark of Apple Inc. SC-1525_UXJCB.bo ok 104 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ æÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂç« æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ æÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Additional in formation 12 105 En About SIRI US and X M SIRIUS, XM and all related marks and logos are trademarks of Sirius XM Radio Inc. and its subsidiaries . All other marks and logos are the property of their respective owners. All rights reserved. SIRIUS and XM subscriptions sold separately. Taxes and a one-time activation fe e may apply. XM tuners and home do cks or SI RIUS tuners (each sold separately) are required to receive the SIRIUS or XM satellite radio service. All programming and fees su bject to change. It is prohibited to copy, decompile, disassemble, re verse engineer, hack, manipulate or otherwise make available any tec hnology or software incorporated in receivers compatible with the SIRIUS or XM Satellite Radio Systems. Service not available in Alaska and Hawaii. SIRIUS, XM and all related ma rks and logos ar e trademarks o f Sirius XM Radio Inc. and its subsidi aries. All rights reserv ed. Service not avai lable in Alask a and Haw aii. Record the SiriusConnect⢠tu ner ID below for reference. Record the XM Radio ID below for reference. Note: The XM Radio ID does not use the letters âÂÂIâÂÂ, âÂÂOâÂÂ, âÂÂSâ or âÂÂFâÂÂ. 12he_Additional_ info.fm 105 ãÂÂ㼠㸠ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼ å¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂÂ¥ ãÂÂç«æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂå å¾Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Additional information 12 106 En Auto Surround, ALC and Stream Direct with diff erent input signal formats The following cha r ts show what you will hea r with diffe r en t in p ut signal fo r mats, de p end ing on the St r eam Di r ect mode (see Using Str eam Dire ct on p age 55) you h ave selected. Stereo (2 cha nnel) signal formats Multichannel signal formats Input signal format Auto Surround / AL C / DIRECT PURE DIRECT Surroun d Back speaker( s): Connected Dolby Digital Su rr ound 2 Pro Logic llx MO VIE 2 Pro Logic llx MOVIE DTS Su rr ound Neo:6 CINEMA Neo:6 CINEMA Othe r ste r eo sou r ces Ste r eo p layback Ste reo p layback Analog sou r ces As above ANALOG DIRECT (ster eo) PCM sou r ces As above PCM DIRECT DVD-A sou r ce s As above As above SACD sou r ces As above As above Surround Back speaker (s): Not connecte d Dolby Digital Su rr ound 2 Pro Logic ll MOVIE 2 Pro Logi c ll MOVIE DTS Su rr ound Neo:6 CINEMA Neo:6 CINEMA Othe r ste r eo sou r ces Ste r eo p layback Ste reo p layback Analog sou r ces As above ANALOG DIRECT (ster eo) PCM sou r ces As above PCM DIRECT DVD-A sou r ce s As above As above SACD sou r ces As above As above Input signal format Auto Surround / AL C PURE DIRECT / DIRE CT Surroun d Back speaker( s): Connected Dolby Digita l EX (6.1 channe l flagged) Dolby Digital EX 2 Pro Logic llx MOVIE a a. Unavailable with only one su rr ound back s p eaker connected. Dolby Digital EX 2 Pro Logic llx MOVIE a DTS-ES (6.1 channel sou r ces/6.1 cha nnel flagged) DTS-ES (Mat r ix/Discr ete) DTS-ES (Mat r ix/Discr ete) DTS sou r ces (5.1 ch annel encoding) St r aight decodi ng St r aight decod ing DTS-HD sou r ces As above As above Othe r 5.1/6.1/7.1 c hannel sou r ces As above As above Surround Back speaker (s): Not connecte d DVD-A sou r ces/Multi-ch PCM Str aight decoding St r aight decod ing SACD sou r ces (5.1 channel e ncoding) As above As above Othe r 5.1/6.1/7.1 c hannel sou r ces As above As above SC-1525_UXJCB.bo ok 106 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ æÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂç« æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ æÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Additional in formation 12 107 En Preset code list You should have no problem cont r olling a com p onen t if you find the manufactu r er in this lis t, but p lease note that the r e a r e cases whe r e codes fo r the manufactu r e r in the lis t will not wo r k fo r the model that you a r e usin g. The r e a r e also cases wh e r e only ce r tain func tions may be cont r olla ble afte r assigning the pr o pe r pr eset code. Important ⢠We do not gua r antee the o p er ations of all the manufactur er s and devices listed. O p er ation may not be p ossible even if a pr eset code is ente r ed. If you canâÂÂt fin d a pr eset code that matches the com p onent you want to cont r ol, you can still tea ch the r emote individual commands f r om anothe r r emote cont r ol (see Programming signals from other remote controls on p age 68). TV Pioneer 0004, 0006, 0113 , 0115, 0116, 01 17, 011 9, 0122 , 0123 Admiral 0001, 0014 Adventura 0012 Aiwa 0002 Akai 0002, 0100 Albatron 0097 Alleron 0009 America Action 0104 Amtron 0008 Anam 0104 Anam Na tional 0003, 0008 AOC 0004, 0 005, 00 06, 010 0 Apex 0021, 0102, 0106 Audiovox 0008, 0104 Aventur a 0103 Axion 0094 Bang & Ol ufsen 0111 Belcor 0004 Bell & Howell 0001 Benq 0064 Bradfo rd 0008, 0104 Brillian 0109 Brockwood 0004 Broksonic 0104 Candle 0004, 0006, 0012 , 0100 Carnivale 0100 Carver 0101 CCE 0110 Celebri ty 0002 Celera 0106 Changhong 0106 Citizen 0004, 0006, 0008 , 0100 Clari on 0104 Coby 0056 Colort yme 0004, 0006 Concerto 0004, 0006 Contec 0104 Contec/Cony 0007, 0008 Craig 0008, 0104 Crosl ey 0081, 0101 Crown 0008, 0104 CTX 0063 Curtis Mathes 0000, 0004, 0006 , 0014, 0100, 01 01 CXC 0008, 01 04 Cytron 0093 Daewoo 0004, 0005, 000 6, 0023 Daytron 0004, 0006 Dell 0073 DiamondVision 0096 Dimensia 0000 Disney 0046 Dumont 0004, 00 11, 00 99 Durabrand 0041, 0103, 01 04 Dwin 0014 Electroband 0002 Electro graph 0107 Electrohome 0002, 00 03, 000 4, 0006 Element 0082 Emerson 0004, 00 06, 00 07, 000 8, 0009, 0023, 01 03, 0104 Emprex 0092 Envisi on 0004, 0006, 010 0 Epson 0061 ESA 0103 Fujitsu 0009 Funai 0008, 0 009, 01 03, 010 4 Futuretech 0008, 010 4 Gateway 0067, 01 07, 010 8 GE 0000, 0 003, 00 04, 00 06, 001 0, 0016, 0039 GFM 0080, 0084 Gibralter 0004, 0011, 0099, 01 00 Goldstar 0004, 0005, 0006 , 0007, 0100 Gradiente 0066 Grunpy 0008, 0009, 0104 Haier 0112 Hallmark 0004, 00 06 Harman/K ardon 0101 Harvard 0008, 0104 Havermy 0014 Hewlett Packar d 0053 Hisense 0069 Hitachi 0004, 0006, 00 07 Hyundai 0098 Ilo 0089, 00 91 IMA 0008 Infinity 0101 InFocus 0074 Initial 0091 Insignia 0085, 0086 Inteq 0099 Janeil 0012 JBL 0101 JC Penney 0000, 00 04, 00 05, 000 6, 0010 JCB 0002 Jensen 0004, 00 06 JVC 0007, 0010, 00 44, 5064 Kawasho 0002, 0004, 00 06 KEC 0104 Kenwood 0004, 0 006, 01 00 KLH 0106 Kloss Novabeam 0008, 0012 KTV 0008, 0100, 01 04, 0110 LG 0005, 00 52, 00 78, 009 7 Logik 0001 Luxman 0004, 0006 LXI 0000, 00 06, 01 01, 010 2 Magnavox 0004, 0006, 00 19, 0020, 0037, 0042, 010 0, 0101 Majestic 0001 Marantz 0004, 0006, 0062, 010 0, 0101 Matsushita 0105 Maxent 0087, 0107 Megapo wer 0097 Megatron 0006 Memorex 0001, 00 05, 00 06, 004 1 MGA 0004, 0005, 00 06, 0100 Midland 0010, 0011, 0099 Mintek 0091 Mitsubishi 0004, 0005, 000 6, 0014, 0045 Monivision 0097 Montgomery W ard 0001 Motorola 0003, 0014 MTC 0004, 0005, 0006 , 0100 Multitech 0008, 01 04, 01 10 NAD 0006, 0102 NEC 0003, 0004, 00 05, 0006, 0100 Net-TV 0107 Nikko 0006, 0100 Norcent 0060 Olevia 0048, 0054, 00 59 Onwa 0008, 0104 Oppo 0095 Optimus 0105 Optoma 0075 Optonica 0014 Orion 0025 Panasonic 0003, 0010, 0017 , 0027, 0105, 0114 , 0120, 0121, 0 124, 0125 Penney 0100, 0102 Philco 0003, 0004, 0005, 0006 , 0007, 0100, 010 1 Philips 0003, 0004, 0007 , 0019, 0020, 0101 Philips Magnavox 0019 Pilot 0004, 0100 Polaroid 0057, 0106 Portland 0004, 0005, 00 06 Prima 0065 Princeton 0097 Prism 0010 Proscan 0000 Proton 0004, 0006, 0007 Protron 0055 Proview 0068 Pulsar 0004, 00 11, 00 99 Quasar 0003, 0010, 0105 Radio Shack 0100, 0104 Radio Shack/Realistic 0000, 0004 , 0006, 000 7, 0008 RCA 0000, 0003, 0004, 00 05, 0006, 0013, 002 4, 0035 Realistic 0100, 0104 Runco 0011, 0 099, 01 00 Sampo 0004, 0 006, 01 00, 010 7 TV Pioneer 0004 example: Catego r y P r eset code Manufactu r er SC-1525_UXJCB.bo ok 107 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ æÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂç« æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ æÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Additional information 12 108 En Samsung 0004, 00 05, 00 06, 000 7, 0022, 0032, 0076, 00 77, 0083, 0100, 0110 Sansui 0025 Sanyo 0004, 0050 Sceptre 0072 Scotch 0006 Scott 0004, 00 06, 00 07, 000 8, 0009 , 0090, 0104 Sears 0000, 00 04, 00 06, 000 9, 0101 , 0102, 0103 Sharp 0004, 0006, 00 07, 0014, 0033 Sheng Chia 0014 Shogun 0004 Signature 0001 Sony 0002, 0 018, 00 29, 00 30, 003 1, 0034 Soundesign 0004, 0006, 0008, 0009, 0104 Squarev iew 0103 SSS 0004, 0008, 0104 Starlite 0008, 010 4 Superscan 0014 Supre-Macy 0012 Supreme 0002 SVA 0088 Sylvania 0004, 0006, 0049, 007 9, 0080, 0100, 01 01, 0103 Symphonic 0008, 0041, 0103, 010 4 Syntax 0054 Syntax-Brillian 0054 Tandy 0014 Tatung 0003, 01 08 Technics 0010, 01 05 Techwood 0004, 0006, 0010 Teknika 0001, 00 04, 000 5, 0006 , 0007, 0008 , 0009, 01 01, 0104 TMK 0004, 0006 TNCi 0099 Toshiba 0026, 0 028, 00 36, 00 38, 0040, 0043 , 0102 Vector Research 0100 Vidikron 0101 Vidtech 0004, 0005, 0006 Viewsonic 0058, 010 7 Viking 0012 Viore 0089 Vizio 0004, 0070, 00 71, 0108 Wards 0000, 0001, 0004, 000 5, 0006, 0009, 010 0, 0101 Waycon 0102 Westinghouse 0047, 0051 White Westinghouse 0023 Yamaha 0004, 0005, 0006 , 0100 Zenith 0001, 0004, 0 011, 0015, 0099 DVD If operations are not pos sible using the preset codes below, you may be able to conduct oper ations with the preset codes for the BD , DVR (BDR, HDR) . Pioneer 2014, 2158 Accurian 2092 Advent 2072 Aiwa 2012 Akai 2066 Alco 2070 Allegro 2087 Amphion MediaWorks 2037 AMW 2037 Apex 2002, 2018, 2079 , 2080 Apple 2058 Arrgo 2088 Aspire 2073 Astar 2052 Audiovox 2070 Axion 2040 Bang & Olufsen 2081 Blaupunkt 2080 Blue Parade 2078 Boston 2059 Broksonic 2066 California Audio Labs 2068 CambridgeSoundWorks 2065 CineVision 2087 Coby 2029 Curtis Mathes 2089 CyberHome 2000, 208 8 Cytron 2039 Daewoo 2021, 2087 Denon 2026, 2068 Desay 2055 DiamondVision 2042 Disney 2022 Durabrand 2090 Emerson 2067, 2082, 20 91 Enterprise 2082 ESA 2053, 2091 Fisher 2083 Funai 2091 GE 2016, 2 077, 20 80 GFM 2043 Go Video 2087 Gradiente 2068 Greenhill 2080 Haier 2094 Harman/Kardon 2030, 2084 Hitachi 2011 Hiteker 2079 iLive 2062 Ilo 2038 Initial 2038, 2080 Insignia 2036, 20 64, 209 1 Integra 2078 iSymphony 2060 JBL 2084 JVC 2013 Kawasaki 2070 Kenwood 2028, 2068 KLH 2070, 2080 Koss 2024, 2069, 20 75 Landel 2093 Lasonic 2085 Lenoxx 2074, 2090 LG 2019, 20 51, 206 1, 2082 , 2087 Liquid Video 2075 Liteon 2025, 2092 Magnavox 2067, 2076, 2091 Memorex 2066 Microsoft 2077 Mintek 2038, 20 80, 208 6 Mitsubishi 2020 Nesa 2080 Next Base 2093 Nexxtech 2056 Onkyo 2076 Oppo 2041, 2057 Oritron 2069, 207 5 Panasonic 2005, 2007, 20 17, 2032, 2033, 2050 , 2068, 20 76 Philips 2045, 2076 Proceed 2079 Proscan 2077 Qwestar 2069 RCA 2008, 2016, 2070 , 2077, 2078, 2080 Regent 2074 Rio 2087 Rowa 2071 Samsung 2009, 2 011, 20 15, 203 1, 2044, 206 8 Sansui 2066 Sanyo 2066, 20 83 Sharp 2035 Sherwood 2063 Shinsonic 2086 Sonic Blue 2087 Sony 2003, 2004, 2010 , 2012, 2027, 2046, 204 7, 2048 Sungale 2054 Superscan 2067 Sylvania 2023, 2067, 2091 Symphonic 2023 Teac 2070 Technics 2068 Theta Digital 2078 Toshiba 2001, 2006, 204 9, 2066, 2076 Trutech 2000 Urban C oncepts 2076 US Logic 2086 Venturer 2070 Xbox 2077 Yamaha 2005, 2068 Zenith 2019, 20 76, 208 2, 2087 BD If operations are not pos sible using the preset codes below, you may be able to conduct oper ations with the preset codes for the DVD , DVR (BDR, HDR) . Pioneer 2159, 2160 Denon 2147, 2148, 214 9 Hitachi 2144, 214 5, 214 6 JVC 2127, 2128, 2130 , 2131, 2132, 2133 Kenwood 2044 LG 2123, 2124 Marant z 2139, 2140 Mitsubish i 2137, 2138 Onkyo 2126 Panasonic 2114, 2115, 21 16 Philips 2117 Samsung 2119 Sharp 2141, 2 142, 21 43 Sony 2120, 2121, 212 2, 2129 Toshiba 2125, 2099 Yamaha 2134, 2135, 2136 DVR (BDR, HDR) If operations are not pos sible using the preset codes below, you may be able to conduct oper ations with the preset codes for the DVD , BD . Pioneer 2103, 21 50, 21 51, 215 2, 2153, 2154, 215 5, 2156, 2157 Panasonic 2100, 2106 Sharp 2104, 2112 Sony 2105, 2 108, 21 09, 21 10, 211 3 Toshiba 2111 SC-1525_UXJCB.bo ok 108 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ æÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂç« æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ æÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Additional in formation 12 109 En VCR Pioneer 1035 ABS 1017 Adventura 1005 Aiwa 1005 Alienware 1017 American High 1004 Asha 1002 Audio Dynamics 1000 Audiovox 1003 Bang & Ol ufsen 1032 Beaumar k 1002 Bell & Howell 1001 Calix 1003 Candle 1002, 1003 Canon 1004 Citizen 1002, 1003 Colort yme 1000 Craig 1002, 1003 Curtis Mathes 1000, 10 02, 100 4 Cyberne x 1002 CyberP ower 1017 Daewoo 1005 DBX 1000 Dell 1017 DIRECTV 1016, 1020, 1022 , 1023, 1024, 1027, 1030 , 1031 Dish N etwork 1029 Dishpro 1029 Durab rand 1018 Dynate ch 1005 Echostar 1029 Electrohome 1003 Electrophonic 1003 Emerson 1003, 1004, 10 05 Expressvu 1029 Fisher 1001 Fuji 1004 Funai 1005 Garrard 1005 Gateway 1017 GE 1002, 1004 GOI 1029 Goldstar 1000, 1003 Gradiente 1005 Harley Davidson 1005 Harman/Kardon 1000 Headquarter 1001 Hewlett Packar d 1017 HNS 1016 Howard Computers 1017 HP 1017 HTS 1029 Hughes Network Systems 1016, 1020, 1022, 1023 , 1024 Humax 1016, 1020 Hush 1017 iBUYPOWER 1017 Instant Replay 1004 JC Penney 1000, 1001, 1002 , 1003, 1004 JCL 1004 JVC 1000, 10 01, 102 0, 1029 Kenwood 1000, 1001 Kodak 1003, 1004 LG 1003 Linksys 1017 LloydâÂÂs 1005 LXI 1003 Magnav ox 1004, 1018 Magnin 1003 Marant z 1000, 10 01, 10 04 Marta 1003 Matsushita 1004 Media Center PC 1017 MEI 1004 Memorex 1001, 1002, 1003 , 1004, 1005, 1018, 1019 MGN Technology 1002 Microsoft 1017 Mind 1017 Mitsubish i 1010 Motorola 1004 MTC 1002 Multitech 1002, 10 05 NEC 1000, 100 1 Nikko 1003 Niveus Media 1017 Noblex 1002 Northgate 1017 Olympus 1004 Optimus 1003 Orion 1014, 1019 Panasonic 1004, 1008 Philco 1004 Philips 1004, 1 011, 10 16, 10 20, 102 2, 1023, 1024, 1025 Philips M agnavo x 1011 Pilot 1003 Proscan 1030 Pulsar 1018 Quarter 1001 Quartz 1001 Quasar 1004 Radio Shack 1003 Radio Shack/Realisti c 1001, 100 2, 1003, 1004, 1005 Radix 1003 Randex 1003 RCA 1002, 1004, 1007 , 1016, 1020, 1022, 1030, 1031 Realistic 1001, 1002, 100 3, 1004, 1005 ReplayTV 1026 Ricavisio n 1017 Runco 1018 Samsun g 1002, 1016, 1022 , 1024 Sanky 1018 Sansui 1014, 1019 Sanyo 1001, 1002 Sears 1001, 1003, 1004 Sharp 1012 Shogun 1002 Singer 1004 Sonic Blue 1026 Sony 1006, 1 009, 10 17, 102 1 Stack 1017 STS 1004 Sylvania 1004, 1005 Symphonic 1005 Systemax 1017 Tagar Systems 1017 Tandy 1001 Tashiko 1003 Teac 1005 Technics 1004 Teknika 1003, 1004, 1005 Tivo 1016, 10 20, 102 1, 1022 , 1025 TMK 1002 Toshiba 1015, 10 17, 102 8 Totevi sion 1002, 1003 Touch 1017 UltimateTV 1031 Unitech 1002 Vector Research 1000 Video Concepts 1000 Videosonic 1002 Viewsonic 1017 Voodoo 1017 Wards 1002, 1003, 10 04, 1005 XR-1000 1004, 1005 Yamaha 1000, 1001 Zenith 1013, 1018 ZT Group 1017 Satellite Set Top Box Pioneer 0126, 6097, 6098 , 6145 ADB 6035, 6001 Akai 6102 Alba 6005, 6013, 60 11 Allsat 6102 Alltech 6011 Amstrad 6033, 6 030, 60 44 Anttron 6013 Asat 6102 Austar 6000, 6045 BELL 6160 Bell Exp ressVu 6002, 60 03 British Sky Broadcasting 6030 Canal 6105 Chaparral 6034 CNS 6001 Coolsat 6021 Crossdigital 6043 Digenius 6104 Digiwave 6053 DirecTV 6070, 6110, 6111, 606 2, 6063, 61 13, 600 8, 6038 , 6054 , 6069, 6060, 60 59, 604 3, 6018 , 6114 , 6115, 6116, 6093 Dish Network System 6002, 6089 , 6003, 6004 Dishpro 6002, 6089, 60 04 DX Antenna 6140 E Aichi 6141 Echostar 6002, 6 089, 60 36, 60 05, 6003, 6004, 6146 Express vu 6002, 60 04 Fujitsu 6133, 6134, 6135 Fortec Star 6123, 602 3 Fresat 6014 Funai 6070 GE 6111 General In strument 6032 GOI 6002, 60 04 Grundig 6007, 6030 Hirschmann 6033 Hisense 6020 Hitachi 6038, 6 049, 61 32 Houston 6002 HTS 6002, 6004 Hughes Network Systems 6113, 6038, 60 54, 611 4, 6115 , 6116 Hyundai 6016 iLo 6020 Innova 6059 Jerrold 6032, 6128, 61 49, 6150, 6151, 61 52, 615 3, 6154 , 6155 , 6156, 6157 JVC 6002, 60 03, 600 4 Kathrein 6096 Lava 6053 LG 6047, 6018 Marant z 6102 McIntosh 6032 Mitsubish i 6038 Motorola 6032, 6042 NEC 6050, 613 1 Netsat 6059 Next Level 6032 nfusion 6015 Nokia 6025, 60 26, 611 8, 6119 , 6121 Pace 6035, 6005, 6030 , 6031 Panarex 6016 Panasonic 6008, 6009, 603 0, 6136, 6137, 6138 Pansat 6016, 6022 Philips 6002, 6 113, 60 38, 60 54, 606 0, 6059, 61 02, 610 3, 6030 , 6114 Primesta r 6032, 6147 Proscan 6110, 6111 Proton 6020 RadioShack 6002, 6 111, 60 32 Radix 6036 RCA 6002, 6110, 6111 , 6113, 6109, 6061, 61 14, 614 2, 6144 , 6148 SA 6124, 6 126, 61 58, 615 9 Saba 6014 Sagem 6041, 612 0 Samsun g 6070, 6113, 6091 , 6043, 6017, 6114, 6093 Sanyo 6046 Sat Cruiser 6015 Schwai ger 6066 SEI 6139 Siemen s 6007, 60 36 SKY 6042, 60 59, 603 0, 6031 SM Elect ronic 6011 Smart 6051 Sonicvi ew 6055, 6107 Sony 6062, 6 063, 60 30, 614 3 Star Cho ice 6032 Star Tra k 6032 TechniSat 6033 Thomso n 6110, 6111, 6014 Tivo 6113, 61 14, 611 5, 6116 Toshiba 6038, 60 54, 603 9, 6130 TPS 6041 Triasat 6033 Ultrasat 6021 US Digital 6020 USDTV 6020 ViewSat 6048 Voom 6032 Zehnder 6101 Zenith 6042, 6069, 603 7, 6125, 6127, 6129 SC-1525_UXJCB.bo ok 109 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ æÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂç« æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ æÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Additional information 12 110 En Satellite Set Top Box (SAT/PVR C ombination) Pioneer 0126, 0128 Bell ExpressVu 6002, 6003 DirecTV 6070, 6110, 6062 , 6113, 6060, 605 9, 6114 , 6115 , 6116 Dish Network System 6002, 6089 Dishpro 6002, 6089 Echostar 6002, 6089, 6003 Expressvu 6002 Hughes Network Systems 6113, 6114, 611 5, 6116 JVC 6003 Motorola 6032 Philips 6113, 6114 Proscan 6110 Samsung 6114 Sonicview 6055, 6107 Sony 6062 Star Choice 6032 Tivo 6113, 6114, 6115 , 6116 Cable Set Top Box Pioneer 6028, 6 029, 60 95, 609 9 ABC 6122 Accuphase 6122 Amino 6077, 6078 Auna 6082 BCC 6072 Bell & Howell 6122 Bright House 6074, 6029 Cable One 6074, 6029 Cablevision 6074, 6029 Charter 6074, 6029, 6058 Cisco 6029, 6028, 6083 Comcast 6074, 6 029, 19 82 Cox 6074, 6029 Digeo 6029, 60 58 Director 6073 Emerson 6122 Fosgate 6072 General Instrument 6073, 6072, 6122 Homecast 6024 i3 Micro 6077 Insight 6074, 6073, 6029 Jebsee 6122 Jerrold 6073, 6 072, 61 22 Knology 6029 Macab 6040 Mediacom 6074, 6029 Memorex 6112 Motorola 6074, 60 73, 60 72, 602 9, 6122, 609 4 MTS 6094 Myrio 6077, 6078 Noos 6040 Pace 6074, 60 29, 602 8, 6106 , 6083 Panasonic 6112, 6083 Paragon 6112 Penney 6112 Philips 6012 Pulsar 6112 Quasar 6112 Regal 6072 Rogers 6029 Runco 6112 Samsung 6095 Scientific Atlanta 6029, 6028, 6027, 6112 Sejin 6077 Shaw 6074 Starcom 6122 Stargate 6122 Suddenlink 6074, 60 29 Supercab le 6072 Time Warner 6074, 6 029, 60 58 Tivo 6076 Toshiba 6112 United Cable 6072, 6122 US Electronics 6072 Videoway 6112 Zenith 6112 Cable Set Top Box (Cable /PVR Combin ation) Pioneer 0127, 6029 Amino 6078 Bright House 6074, 6029 Cable One 6074, 6029 Cablevision 6074, 6029 Charter 6074, 6029, 60 58 Cisco 6029, 6083 Comcast 6074, 6 029, 60 83, 607 6 Cox 6074, 6029 Digeo 6081, 605 8 Homecast 6024 Insight 6074, 6029 Knology 6029 Mediacom 6074, 6029 Motorola 6074, 6081 Myrio 6078 Pace 6029 Panasonic 6083 Rogers 6029 Scientific At lanta 6029 Shaw 6074 Suddenlink 6074, 60 29 Supercab le 6072 Time Warner 6074, 6 029, 60 58 Tivo 6076 CD Pioneer 5065, 5066 AKAI 5043 Asuka 5045 Denon 5019 Fisher 5048 Goldstar 5040 Hitachi 5042 Kenwood 5020, 50 21, 503 1 Luxman 5049 Marantz 5033 Onkyo 5017, 5 018, 50 30, 50 50 Panasonic 5036 Philips 5022, 5032, 5044 RCA 5013, 5029 Roadstar 5052 Sharp 5051 Sony 5012, 5023, 5026 , 5027, 5028, 5039 TEAC 5015, 50 16, 503 4, 5035 , 5037 Technics 5041 Victor 5014 Yamaha 5024, 5 025, 50 38, 50 46, 5047 CD-R Pioneer 5067 Philips 5054 Yamaha 5055 Laser Disc Player Pioneer 5062, 5063 Cassete Deck Pioneer 5058, 505 9, 5070 Digital Tape Pioneer 5069 MD Pioneer 5068 SC-1525_UXJCB.bo ok 110 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ æÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂç« æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ æÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Additional in formation 12 111 En Specifications Amplifier Section Continuous averag e power output of 140 watts* per channel, min., at 8 oh ms, from 20 Hz to 20 000 Hz with no more than 0. 08 %** total harmonic distortion. Multi channel simultaneou s p ower out p ut (1 kHz, 1 %, 8 é ) 7 ch total . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 630 W Continuous Powe r Out p ut (20 Hz to 20 kHz, 8 é , 0.08 %) F r ont . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140 W 140 W Cente r . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140 W Su rr ound . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140 W 140 W Su rr ound back (F r ont height/wide) . . . . . . 140 W 140 W Continuous Powe r Out p ut (1 kHz, 6 é , 1.0 %) F r ont . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180 W 180 W Cente r . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180 W Su rr ound . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180 W 180 W Su rr ound back (F r ont height/wide) . . . . . . 180 W 180 W Total ha r monic disto rtion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0.05 % (20 Hz to 20 kHz, 130 W, 8 é ) * Measured pursuant to the Federal Trade CommissionâÂÂs Trade Regulation rule on Powe r Output Claims f or Amplifiers ** Measured by Audio Spectrum A nalyzer Audio Section In p ut (Sensitivity/Im p edance) PHONO MM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 mV/47 k é LINE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 400 mV/47 k é Out p ut (Level/Im p edance) REC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 400 mV/2.2 k é Signal-to-Noise Ratio (IHF, sho r t ci r cuited, A netwo r k) LINE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .103 dB F r equency Res p onse . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 Hz to 100 000 Hz dB (Pu r e Di r ect Mode) Tuner Section F r equency Range (FM) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87.5 MHz to 108 MHz Antenna In p ut ( FM) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75 é unbalanc ed F r equency Range (AM). . . . . . . . . . . . . . 531 kHz to 1602 kHz Antenna (AM) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Loo p antenna (balanced) Video Section Signal level Com p osite Video . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 V p -p (75 é ) Com p onent Video . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Y: 1.0 V p -p (75 é ), PB, PR: 0.7 V p -p (75 é ) Co rr es p onding maximum r esolution Com p onent Video . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1080 p (1125 p ) (Video conve r t off) Digital In/Out Section HDMI te r minal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19- p in (Not DVI) HDMI out p ut ty p e . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 V, 100 mA USB te r minal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . USB2.0 Full S p eed (Ty p e A) iPod te r minal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . USB, and Vid eo (Com p osite) SIRIUS antenna cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8- p in mini DIN cable ADAPTER POR T te r minal. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 V, 100 mA Integrated Control Section Cont r ol (SR) te r minal . . . . . . . . . . . . à3.5 Mini-jack (MONO) Cont r ol (IR) te r minal . . . . . . . . . . . . . à3.5 Mini-jack (MONO) IR signal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . High Active (High Level: 2.0 V) 12 V T r igger te r minal . . . . . . . . . . . . . à3.5 Mini-jack (MONO) 12 V T r igger out p ut t y p e . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 V, Total 150 mA RS-232C cable ty p e . . . . . . . 9- p in, c r oss ty p e, fema le-female EXTENSION te r minal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 V, 150 mA Network Section LAN te r minal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 BASE-T/100 BASE-TX Mis cel la neo us Powe r r eq ui r ements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .AC 120 V, 60 Hz Powe r consum p tion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 330 W In standby . . . . . . . . 0.2 W (HDMI Setu p â Cont r ol : OFF) 0.3 W (HDMI Setu p â Cont r ol : ON) Dimensions . . . . . . 420 mm (W) x 200 mm (H) x 460 mm (D) (16 9 / 16 in. (W) x 7 7 / 8 in. (H) x 18 1 / 8 in. (D)) Weight (without p ackage) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18.5 kg (40.8 lb) Number of Furnished Parts MCACC Setu p mic r op hone (APM7009). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 Remote cont r ol unit (AXD7591) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 AAA size IEC R03 d r y cell batte r ies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 iPod cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 AM loo p antenna . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 FM wi r e antenna . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 Powe r co r d . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 These o p e r ating inst r uctions Note â¢S p ecifications and the design ar e subject to p ossible modifications without notice, due to im pr ovements. Cleaning the unit â¢U s e a p o lishing cloth o r d r y cloth to wi p e off dust and di r t. â¢W h e n t h e s u r face is dir ty, wip e with a sof t cloth di pp ed in some neut r al cleanse r diluted five o r six times with wate r , and w r ung out well, and then wi p e again with a d r y cloth. Do n ot use fu r niture wax o r cleanse r s. â¢N e v e r use thinner s, benzene, insecticide s pr ays or othe r chemicals on o r nea r thi s unit, s ince these will co rr ode the su r face. This product includes FontAven ue î fonts licenced by NEC corporation. FontAvenue is a registered trad emark of NEC Corporat ion SC-1525_UXJCB.bo ok 111 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ æÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂç« æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ æÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Additional information 12 112 En SC-1525_UXJCB.bo ok 112 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ æÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂç« æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ æÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Additional in formation 12 113 En SC-1525_UXJCB.bo ok 113 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ æÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂç« æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ æÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Additional information 12 114 En SC-1525_UXJCB.bo ok 114 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ æÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂç« æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ æÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Additional in formation 12 115 En LIMITED WARRANTY WARRANTY VALID ONLY IN COUNTRY OF PRODUCT PURCHASE WARRANTY Pioneer Electronics (USA) Inc. (PUSA), and Pioneer Electronics Of Canada, Inc. (POC), warrant that products distributed by PUSA in the U.S.A., and by POC in Canada that fail to function properly under normal use due to a manufacturing defect when installed and operated according to the ownerâÂÂs manual enclosed with the unit will be repaired or replaced with a unit of comparable value, at the option of PUSA or POC, without charge to you for parts or actual repair work. Parts supplied under this warranty may be new or rebuilt at the option of PUSA or POC. THIS LIMITED WARRANTY APPLIES TO THE ORIGINAL OR ANY SUBSEQUENT OWNER OF THIS PIONEER PRODUCT DURING THE WARRANTY PERIOD PROVID ED THE PRODUCT WAS PURCHASED FROM AN AUTHORIZED PIONEER DISTRIBUTOR/DEALER IN THE U.S.A. OR CANADA. YOU WILL BE REQUIRED TO PROVIDE A SALES RECEIPT OR OTHER VALID PROOF OF PURCHASE SHOWING THE DATE OF ORIGINAL PURCHASE OR, IF RENTED, YOUR RENTAL CONTRACT SHOWING THE PLACE AND DATE OF FIRST RENTAL . IN THE EVENT SERVICE IS REQUIRED, THE PRODUCT MUST BE DELIVERED WITHIN THE WARRANTY PERIOD, TRANSPOR TATION PREPAID, ONLY FROM WITHIN THE COUNTRY OF PURCHASE AS EXPLAINED IN THIS DOCUMENT. YOU WILL BE RESPONSIBLE FOR REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION OF THE PRODUCT. PUSA OR POC, AS APPROPRIATE, WILL PAY TO RETURN THE REPAIRED OR REPLACEMENT PRODUCT TO YOU WITHIN THE COUNTRY OF PURC HASE. PRODUCT WARRANTY PERIOD Home Audio and Video ........................................................................................................ ................................................. Microphones, Headphones, Phono Cartridges and Styluses ....................................................................... ......................... Shorter li mited warranty periods apply to some models. Please refer to the limited warranty document enclosed with the product for a definitive statement of the warranty period. The warranty period for retail customers who rent the product commences upon the date product is first put into use (a) during the rental period or (b) retail sale, whichever occurs first. WHAT IS NOT COVERED IF THIS PRODUCT WAS PURCHASED FROM AN UNAUTHORIZED DISTRIBUTOR, THERE ARE NO WARRANTIES, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING THE IMPL IED WARRANTY OF MERCHANTABILITY AND THE IMPLIED WARRANTY OF FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE AND THIS PRODUCT IS SOLD STRICTLY âÂÂAS ISâ AND âÂÂWITH ALL FAULTS". PIONEER SHALL NOT BE LIABLE FOR ANY CONSEQUENTIAL AND/OR INCIDENTAL DAMAGES. PIONEER DOES NOT WARRANT ANY PRODUCT LISTED ABOVE WHEN IT IS USED IN A TRADE OR BUSINESS OR IN ANY INDUSTRIAL OR COMMERCIAL APP LICATION. THIS WARRANTY DOES NOT APPLY IF THE PRODUCT HAS BEEN SUBJECTED TO POWER IN EXCESS OF ITS PUBLISHED POWER RATING. THIS WARRANTY DOES NOT COVER TELEVISION OR DISPLAY SCREENS DAMAGED BY STATIC, NON-MOVING, IMAGES APPLIED FOR LENGTHY PERIODS (B URN-IN). THIS WARRANTY DOES NOT COVER THE CABINET OR ANY APPEARANCE ITEM, USER ATTACHED ANTENNA, ANY DAMAGE TO RECORDS OR RECORDING TAPES OR DISCS, ANY DAMAGE TO THE PRODUCT RESULTING FROM ALTERATIONS, MODIFICATIONS NOT AUTHORIZED IN WRITING BY PIONEER, ACCIDENT, MISUSE OR ABUSE, DAMAGE DUE TO LIGHTNING OR TO POWER SURGES, SUBSEQUENT DAMAGE FROM LEAKING, DAMAGE FROM INOPERATIVE BATTERIES, OR THE USE OF BATTERIES NOT CONFORMING TO THOSE SPECIFIED IN THE OWNERâÂÂS MANUAL. THIS WARRANTY DOES NOT COVER THE COST OF PARTS OR LABOR WHICH WOULD BE OTHERWISE PROVIDED WITHOUT CHARGE UNDER THIS WARRANTY OB TAINED FROM ANY SOURCE OTHER THAN A PIONEER AUTHORIZED SERVICE COMPANY OR OTHER DESIGNATED LOCATION. THIS WARRANTY DOES NOT COVER DEFECTS OR DAMAGE CAUSED BY THE USE OF UNAUTHORIZED PARTS OR LABOR OR FROM IMPROPER MAINTENANCE. ALTERED, DEFACED, OR REMOVED SERIAL NUMBERS VOID THIS ENTIRE WARRANTY NO OTHER WARRANTIES IN THE U.S.A. - PIONEER LIMITS ITS OBLIGATIONS UNDER ANY IMPLIED WARRANTIES INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE, TO A PERIOD NOT TO EXCEED THE WARRANTY PERIOD. NO WARRANTIES SHALL APPLY AFTER THE WARRANTY PERIOD. SOME STATES DO NOT ALLOW LIMITATIONS ON HOW LONG AN IMPLIED WARRANTY LASTS AND SOME STATES DO NOT ALLOW THE E XCLUSIONS OR LIMITATIONS OF INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES, SO THE ABOVE LIMITATIONS OR EXCLUSIONS MAY NOT APPLY TO YOU. THIS WARRANTY GIVES YOU SPECIFIC LEGAL RIGHTS AND YOU MAY HAVE OTHER RIGHTS WHICH MAY VARY FROM STATE TO STATE. IN CANADA - EXCEPT AS EXPRESSLY PROVIDED HEREIN, THERE ARE NO REPRESENTATIONS, WARRANTIES, OBLIGATIONS OR CONDITIONS, IMPLIED, STATUTORY OR OTHERWISE, APPLICABLE TO THIS PRODUCT. TO OBTAIN SERVICE PUSA and POC have appointed a number of Authorized Service Companies throughout the U.S.A. and Canada should your product requi re service. To receive warranty service you need to present your sales receipt or, if rented, your rental contract showing place and date of original ownerâÂÂs transacti on. If shipping the unit you will need to package it carefully and send it, transportation prepaid by a traceable, insured method, to an Authorized Service Company. Package the product using adequate padding material to prevent damage in transit. The original container is ideal for this purpose. Include your name, address and telephone number where you can be reached during business hours. On all complaints and concerns in the U.S.A. call Customer Support at 1-800-421-1404, or, in Canada, call Customer Satisfaction at 1-877-283-5901. DISPUTE RESOLUTION IN THE U.S.A. - Following our response to any initial request to Customer Support, should a dispute arise between you and Pioneer, Pioneer m akes available its Complaint Resolution Program to resolve the dispute. The Complaint Resolution Program is available to you without charge. You are required to use the Complaint Resolution Program before you exercise any rights under, or seek any remedies, created by Title I of the Magnuson-Moss Warranty-Federal Trade Commission Improvement Act, 15 U.S.C. 2301 et seq. To use the Complaint Resolution Program call 1-800-421-1404 and explain to the customer service representative the problem you are experiencing, steps you have taken to have the product repaired during the warranty period and the name of the authorized Distributor/Dealer from whom the Pioneer product was purchased. After the complaint has been explained to the representative, a resolution number will be issued. Within 40 days of receiving your complaint, Pioneer will investigate the dispute and will either: (1) respond to your complaint in writing informing you what action Pioneer will take, and in what time period, to resolve the dispute; or (2) respond to your complaint in writing informing you why it will not take any action. IN CANADA - Call the Customer Satisfaction Manager at (905) 946-7446 to discuss your complaint and to obtain a prompt resolution. PIONEER ELECTRONICS (USA) INC. PIONEER ELECTRONICS OF CANADA, INC. IN THE U.S.A. For hook-up and operation of your unit or to locate an Authorized Service Company, please call or write: PIONEER ELECTRONICS SERVICE, INC. P.O. BOX 1760 LONG BEACH, CALIFORNIA 90801 1-800-421-1404 http://www.pioneerelectro nics.com IN CANADA For additional information on this warranty, please call or write: CUSTOMER SATISFACTION GROUP PIONEER ELECTRONICS OF CANADA, INC. 300 ALLSTATE PARKWAY MARKHAM, ON L3R 0P2 (905) 479-4411 1-877-283-5901 http://www.pioneerelectronics.ca RECORD THE PLACE AND DATE OF PURCHASE FOR FUTURE REFERENCE Model No. ____________________________________________ Serial No. _________________________________________ Purchase Date __ _____________________ Purchased From _____________________________________________________________________________________________________________ __________________ KEEP THIS INFORMATION AND YOUR SALES RECEIPT IN A SAFE PLACE Parts Labor 1 Year 1 Year 90 D ays 90 D a ys SC-1525_UXJCB.bo ok 115 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ æÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂç« æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ æÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Printed in <ARB7447-B> T o register your product, find the nearest authorized ser vice location, to purchase replacement parts, operating instructions, or accessories, please go to one of following URLs : P our enregistrer votre produit, trouver le ser vice après-vente agréé le plus proche et pour acheter des pièces de rechange, des modes dâÂÂemploi ou des accessoires, reportez-vous aux URL suivantes : In the USA/A ux Etats-Unis http://www .pioneerelectronics.com In Canada/A ux Canada http://www .pioneerelectronics.ca S018_B1_EnFr Published b y Pioneer Cor poration. Copyright é 2010 Pioneer Corporation. All rights reser ved. PIONEER CORPORA TION 1-1, Shin-ogura, Saiwai-ku, Ka wasaki-shi, Kanagaw a 212-0031, Japan PIONEER ELECTRONICS (USA) INC. P .O. BO X 1540, Long Beach, California 90801-1540, U .S.A. TEL: (800) 421-1404 PIONEER ELECTRONICS OF CANAD A, INC. 300 Allstate P arkway , Markham, Ontario L3R 0P2, Canada TEL: 1-877-283-5901, 905-479-4411 PIONEER EUROPE NV Hav en 1087, Keetberglaan 1, B-9120 Melsele , Belgium TEL: 03/570.05.11 PIONEER ELECTRONICS ASIA CENTRE PTE. L TD. 253 Alexandr a Road, #04-01, Singapore 159936 TEL: 65-6472-7555 PIONEER ELECTRONICS A USTRALIA PTY . L TD. 178-184 Boundary Road, Braeside, Victoria 3195, Australia, TEL: (03) 9586-6300 PIONEER ELECTRONICS DE MEXICO S.A. DE C.V . Blvd.Manuel A vila Camacho 138 10 piso Col.Lomas de Chapultepec, Me xico, D .F . 11000 TEL: 55-9178-4270 K002_B1_En 99he_Backcov er.fm 115 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼ å¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂç«æÂÂæÂÂ¥ ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ